PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2010

182

NORTH AND WEST COASTS OF 

NORWAY

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2010 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

NINTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II

Pub. 182

Preface

0.0 Pub. 182, Sailing Directions (Enroute) North and West

Coasts of Norway, Ninth Edition, 2010, is issued for use in

conjunction with Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean. Companion volumes are Pubs. 181 and

183.

0.0 Digital Nautical Charts 21 and 22 provide electronic chart

coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 7 August 2010, including Notice to Mariners No. 32 of 2010.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

DNC.portal

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain website.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational
III

 Pub. 182

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, however, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Norwegian Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks. 

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.

0.0 Internet Web sites, as follows:

0.0 1. Arctic Pictures of Hornsund, Spitsbergen

0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)

0.0 http://www.bergheims.com/hornsund

0.0 2. Bergen City and Port Guide

0.0 http://www.bergenport.com

0.0 3. Le Club de Voyageurs

0.0 (Paul Kerrien: paul.kerrien@laposte.net)

0.0 http://expresscotier.free.fr

0.0 4. The Coast Route, Norge

0.0 http://www.rv17.no

0.0 5. Eurofishsales Europewide Fishing Port Index

0.0 http://www.eurofishsales.com

0.0 6. Haugesund City and Port Guide

0.0 http://www.haugesund.com

0.0 7. Haugesund Home Page

0.0 http://www.haugesund.net

0.0 8. Haugesund (Norway) Regional Home Page

0.0 http://www.haugalandet.net

0.0 9. Instytut Geografii UMK

0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)

0.0 http://www.geo.uni.torun.pl

0.0 10. Karmsund Havnevesen Informerer (Eirik Hustvedt)

0.0 http://www.karmsund-havn.no

0.0 11. Nordic Shipping Agency Homepage

0.0 http://www.ndic.no

0.0 12. Port Focus Homepage (Ports/Harbors/Marinas

0.0 Worldwide)

0.0 http://www.portfocus.com

0.0 13. The Svalbard Pages

0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)

0.0 http:/www.svalbard.com

0.0 14. Uniwersytet Mikolaja Kopernika

0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)

0.0 http://www.uni.torun.pl
V

 Pub. 182

0.0SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 182
Pub. 182 VI

Conversion Tables

Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
VII Pub. 182

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 182 IX

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Sector 1

Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

Norway—Feistein to Geitungane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Sector 3

Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Sector 4

Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Sector 5

Norway—Fedje to Alesund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Sector 6

Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Sector 7

Norway—Trondheim to Bodo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Sector 8

Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Sector 9

Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Sector 10

Jan Mayen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Sector 11

Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Pub. 182

1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 182

SECTOR 1 

NORWAY—LINDESNES TO JAERENS REV

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway between Lindesnes, the S point on the Norwegian coast and

Jaerens Rev, a point approximately 4.6 miles S of Feistein

Light. 

General Remarks

1.1 General.—The SW coast of Norway between Lindesnes, the S mainland point of the country, and Jaerens Rev

trends in a general NW direction for about 68 miles. Several

large and numerous small fjords, branching in all directions,

indent the coast. Close-lying islands, islets, and rocks front part

of this coastal stretch, particularly the section between

Lindesnes and Steinodden, the vicinity of Listafjorden, and

near Egersund. This part of the coast, although high in places,

is predominately lower than the coast to the N. 

1.1It includes the two lowland regions of Lista and Jaeren,

which are unlike any other part of the Norwegian coast. Steep,

high mountains back the coastal hills and plains. Numerous

good anchorage and harbors are located in the fjords.

Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds on the W and S

coasts of Norway reflect the average pressure distribution and

its seasonal changes. With the shift from high pressure in

winter to low pressure in summer, the winds on the W coast

change from S in winter to N in summer. However, the prevailing winds only blow from a N or S direction not more than

40 per cent of the time. The usual situation is one of variable

winds induced by passing cyclones.

1.1Because of land and sea breezes, and topographical effects,

the wind in the fjords and along the coast is usually different

from that in the open sea. Also, because of the mountainous

nature of the coast, any wind blowing from a direction between

S and WSW is deflected and becomes S wind, and any wind

blowing between NW and N is deflected and becomes a N

wind. 

1.1The speed of the wind increases outward from the coast to a

distance of 150 miles at times.

1.1Along the coast, when the winds are fresh or strong, most

often there is turbulence; when the coast is swept by violent

winds and they penetrate the fjords, they become turbulent.

1.1There are frequent, strong downward currents, usually from

the E or SE, close to the coast, in the vicinity of 60° N. 

1.1 A steep gradient may extend as much as 150 miles seaward

from the coast. When a steep gradient develops along the W

coast, strong S winds are produced; when deep depressions are

on a NE track, moving between the British Isles and Iceland,

gale winds frequently occur. Northwest gales occur occasionally on the W coast when the pressure falls over Scandinavia.

1.1In winter, gales and storms are common on both the S and

W coasts. In spring, there are more gales and storms on the W

and SW coasts then on the S coast. As summer approaches, the

gales decrease in frequency. The strength of the winds decreases in summer, although gales are not unknown, particularly on the W coast. 

1.1Off the coast and in the fjords between Lindesnes and

Jaerens Rev, tidal currents are minimal. Small currents are

found in the narrow channels of the fjords, such as in Skudenesfjorden, but little is known about these currents.

1.1The highest frequency of sea and swell is from the W

quadrant. Observations along the exposed coast during winter,

showed that 65 per cent of the sea waves were less than 1.5m in

height and 9 per cent of the waves observed were greater than

3.6m in height. However, 20 per cent of the recorded observations on swell were recorded to exceed 3.6m in height and, at

times, reached heights greater than 7.6m in height.

1.1During summer, the weakening of the “Icelandic Low” and

the decrease in wind velocities causes a decrease in swell, and,

most often, a decrease in sea on the S and W coasts of Norway.

Only about 6 per cent of the total observations taken along the

exposed portions showed a swell wave height in excess of

3.6m; 68 per cent showed a swell wave height of less than 1.8m

in height. Observations with regard to sea showed that 83 per

cent of the total waves observed were less than 1.5m in height

and that 4 per cent were greater than 3.6m in height.

1.1Sea breezes are frequent along the entire coast in summer.

Wind speeds increase slightly in autumn and gales become

more frequent, especially along the exposed coast.

1.1Fog is the main cause of poor visibility. It is most frequent

over the sea in summer and most frequent in the upper fjords

and over land in winter. Occasionally, sea fog occurs in winter

when air lying over a warm water surface is blown over colder

water. However, the most frequent fog in winter is radiation

fog. Radiation fog is a nighttime occurrence. It is produced

when the land gives up its heat and becomes cooler. The cooler

land cools the air immediately above it. This causes a temperature inversion to form, the temperature increasing with height.

Fog forms. Usually radiation fog occurs at the heads of deep

fjords when there is severe frost inland and cold winds blow

into the open fjords.

1.1One form of fog, which particularly affects the upper

reaches of fjords, is “frost smoke.” This occurs during spells of

severe frost. It may be expected if the wind is light and from an

offshore direction and if skies are clear or nearly so over land. 

1.1In spring, fog decreases generally, as radiation fog becomes

less likely because of the gradual warming of the land. It increases only at Skudenes, where sea fog of the warm season increases in frequency. Poor visibility is least common in summer over the land area of this region. However, sea fog is not

uncommon during the early part of the summer along and over

the coast.

1.1In general, autumn is the season when fog is least common

on the coast. Over land its frequency increases towards the

approach of winter.

1.1The climate of SW Norway is mild in comparison to regions

of equal distance from the Equator. The maritime influence,

which is responsible for the warm winters, is responsible for

the warm summers as well. The steady run of the warm water
4 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

of the North Atlantic Drift, by way of the passage between the

Shetland Islands, the Faeroe Islands, and the English Channel,

into the North Sea and the Norwegian Sea, results in the water

of these seas in January being at least 20°C warmer than in

other areas of the same latitude. 

1.1During all seasons, migratory low pressure centers, accompanied by repeated intrusions of maritime polar air produce

overcast skies, and warm temperatures.

1.1Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and

is present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the

coast. Floating ice is met in early spring, when small masses

may drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and occasionally

from some of the larger fjords to the W and N of Lindesnes.

1.1Tides—Currents.—The tidal current just offshore N from

Jaeren to the vicinity of Korsfjorden flood to the N, and begin

about 5 to 6 hours after HW at Bergen and ebb to the S, and

begin about 30 minutes to 1 hour before HW at Bergen. From

the vicinity of Korsfjorden to approximately 60°51'N, the flood

begins about 6 hours after HW at Bergen, and sets to the E; the

ebb begins about the time of HW at Bergen and sets to the W.

1.1Surface currents in the fjords are predominantly tidal. They

set inward on the flood and seaward on the ebb, except during

May and June. During these months, increased runoff from

melting snow and ice cause the surface currents to flow almost

continually seaward. The depths of the surface currents average 3.6 to 5.5m, though they may vary from 0.91 to 18.3m at

times. Current speeds are strongest at the surface, decreasing

with depth. An intermediate current sets into the fjords usually

between 9.4 and 18.3m. Generally, the water below 73m either

has a very weak seaward set or is stagnant, and is renewed only

by a major meteorological disturbance.

1.1Wind may alter the tidal currents in the fjords. Onshore

winds may cause a rise in the water level with a corresponding

increase in the velocity and duration of incoming currents.

When the winds cease, currents flow in the opposite direction

until equilibrium is established. Outflowing currents along the

sides of the fjords may occur when strong winds blow onshore

for a prolonged period. Offshore winds may have an opposite

effect on the water level and currents.

1.1The term “tidal current” means the resultant of all water

movements; namely, ocean currents, tidal currents, winddriven currents, and outflow of water from rivers, fjords, and

embankments.

1.1The tidal current of this section is subject to great variations.

West of Lindesnes, where the constant ocean current is weaker,

the wind has more effect, and the current is less regular than on

the SE coast between Kristiansand and Oslofjorden. 

1.1A tidal current setting W and N is, however, prevalent

especially in summer. However, with continuous N and W

winds the current may set S and E for perhaps a week continuously. Near the coast the direction of the current may be

toward the land. The current setting N off Jaeren may attain a

velocity of about 2 knots.

1.1Caution.—Off the coast of Norway, various types of ships

and small craft used in the development of oil and gas fields

may be encountered.

1.1An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme lies in the

approach to Risavika SW of Feistein and may best be seen on

the chart.

1.1Norwegian authorities recommend that tankers of 40,000

dwt and over, when navigating off the coast of Norway, should

keep to seaward of a line joining the following positions:

a. 57°46.2'N, 7°00.0'E, 13 miles from Lindesnes Light. 

b. 57°54.3'N, 6°21.5'E. 

c. 58°16.1'N, 5°35.7'E. 

d. 58°30.8'N, 5°12.2'E. 

e. 58°32.9'N, 4°57.1'E. 

f. 59°10.7'N, 4°27.5'E. 

g. 60°49.2'N, 4°08.1'E. 

By keeping seaward of this line, tankers will maintain a distance of 12 to 20 miles from the shore. 

1.1 Pilotage Districts.—The entire coast of Norway is divided

into three Pilotage Districts; pilotage is controlled from the

three VTS Centers, as follows: 

1. Horten—Covers the S coast from the Swedish border

leading W to Egersund (58°27'N,. 6°00'E.).

2. Kvitsoy—Covers the W coast from Egersund leading

N to the parallel of 65°08'N. At Kvitsoy, pilots can be arranged to board at the following positions:

a. Feistein (58°50.5'N., 5°28.0'E.).

b. Skudenesfjorden West (59°02.0'N., 5°10.0'E.).

c. Skudenes (59°06.7'N., 5°26.2'E.).

d. Karmsundet (59°13.1'N., 5°21.0'E.).

3. Lodingen—Covers the W and N coasts of Norway

between the parallel of 65°08'N and the Russian border.

1.1 The VTS Centers can be contacted 24 hours on VHF channels 18 and 19. 

Off-lying Dangers

1.2 Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field (56°33'N., 3°13'E.) is

situated about 150 miles SW of Lindesnes Light. A complex of

production platforms, gas and oil pipelines, and tanker-loading

systems is located in the field. The SPM tanker-loading

systems are generally removed when the field-to-shore

pipelines are operating normally, but installations remain on

the sea bed. Pipelines extend N to the Statpipe System, SE to

Germany, and SW to England and may best be seen ont the

chart.

1.2 Eldfisk Field, Edda Field, Tommeliten Field, West Edofisk

Field, Albuskjell Field, and Tor Field are located within 11

miles of Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field. They consist of several

production platforms, some of which are equipped with an

aeronautical radiobeacon and a racon.

1.2 Hod Field, Valhall Field, and Gyda Field lie 23 miles SSE,

17 miles SSE, and 21 miles N, respectively, of Ekofisk Oil and

Gas Field.

1.2 Varg Field has a well head platform standing in position

58°05'N, 1°54'E; a production and storage vessel is stationed in

the vicinity. A restricted area, with a radius of 1.1 mile, is centered on the position above.

1.2 Glitne Oil Field consists of a lighted storage tanker surrounded by a restricted area with a radius of about 0.7 mile

centered on the storage tanker. A well head, which is connected

to the tanker by a submarine pipeline and cable, is located

about 1.5 milles NNW of the storage tanker, in position

58°44.0'N, 1°38.5'E. Another well head, situated in position

58°41.6'N, 1°40.4'E, is connected to the storage tanker by a

submarine pipeline. 

1.2 A wreck is located in position 58°41.2'N, 1°40.1'E. 
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 5

Pub. 182

1.2 Ula Gas Field (57°06'N., 2°51'E.) is situated about 36 miles

NNW of Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field and consists of three platforms connected by bridges. 

1.2 Cod Gas Field lies 14 miles W of Ula Gas Field.

1.2 Statpipe Platform No. 1 (58°11'N., 2°28'E.) is situated

about 103 miles SW of Feistein and equipped with a racon.

Submarine gas pipelines extend N and S to other fields and NE

to the coast. 

1.2 Sleipner Gas Field lies 23 miles NW of the platform.

1.2 For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sector 2.

1.2 For oil and gas fields NW of the above, also refer Pub. 192,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) North Sea.

1.2 Tamber Oil Field lies 8.5 miles SSE of Ula Field, where a

lighted platform is located above the Gyda and Ula gas line.

Lindesnes to Steinodden

1.3 The coast line from Lindesnes to Steinodden measures about 18 miles and runs in a NW direction. Steinodden is

on the W extremity of the peninsula of Lista. The coast varies

in height, is mostly rocky, and contains trees and several small

beaches.

1.3Gronsfjorden, between the peninsula of Spangereid and the

mainland W, has steep and rugged shores. A group of rocky

islands separates the entrance of the fjord from the entrance of

Rosfjorden. The shores of the latter are steep, rising to about

152m. Between the entrance to Rosfjorden and Farsund for

about 6 miles WNW, there are many islands. The coast is

indented and rocky, but not steep. 

1.3The port of Farsund is at the entrance of Lyngdalsfjordenen.

This fjord and its branch, Oftefjorden, penetrate deeply inland.

Their steep, and generally forested, shores rise to a height of

about 183m.

1.3 The peninsula of Lista lies W of Farsund. In the SW part, it

is low-lying, but in the NE part it rises to heights of about

244m. There are several patches of marshland and extensive

areas of farmland in the SW part.

1.3 Aspect.—The rounded summit of Homsknipen, 477m high,

is located about 11 miles ENE of Steinodden. A conspicuous

radio tower stands on Kalaskniben, a hill situated 1.5 miles

Ekofisk Complex 

Ekofisk Platform 

Ekofsik Oil and Gas Field
6 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

Valhall Flank North Platform
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 7

Pub. 182

NNE of Homsknipen. 

1.3Caution.—Mackerel fishing, by means of drift nets, purse

seines, and trailing lines, flourishes along the S coast of Norway from May to September. The approximate area of greatest

activity is from W from Lillesand to Lista.

1.3A restricted area, in which navigation is controlled by regulation, lies up to 1 mile from the coast between Einarsneset and

Varnes.

1.4 Lindesnes (57°59'N., 7°03'E.) is the S point on the

Norwegian peninsula. An important landfall, it extends SW

from the mainland and is on the S extremity of the rocky and

forested peninsula of the Spangereid peninsula. It is about 40m

high and lies on red, rugged, and uneven land. A light is shown

from a tower.

1.4 Neskletten and Lamekletten, two small banks within 1.5

miles S and 2 miles WSW, respectively, of Lindesnes, have

least known depths of 25m. In heavy weather, the sea breaks on

Neskletten.

1.4Bispen, a small round above-water rock marked by an iron

beacon, is located about 1.3 miles W of Lindesnes and is the

southernmost of all the dangers W of Lindesnes. In rough

weather, the sea breaks constantly on the shoals N and E of

Bispen.

1.4 The coast between Lindesnes and Einarsneset, about 10

miles WNW, is indented. From the offing, the land appears to

form a large bay studded with islands and islets. 

1.4 Skarvoy, about 6 miles NW of Lindesnes, and Faeroy, about

0.7 mile E of the S extremity of Einarsneset, can be easily

identified. The former has a hill resembling a sugarloaf in its

SW part. 

1.5 Gronsfjorden (58°02'N., 7°02'E.) is about 5 miles

long and up to 1 mile wide. It trends in a general NE direction

along the NW side of the Spangereid peninsula. Easy of access,

it is entered about 2 miles NNW of Lindesnes at the SE end of

Raevoy. Gronsfjorden is connected at its inner end with

Lenefjorden by Jasundet.

1.5 Several islets and numerous rocks and shoals extend about 1

mile W and 2 miles S of Raevoy. Sveinene, two small low

rocks which are almost always marked by breakers, are located

about 0.7 mile ENE of Bispen. There are general depths of 146

to 183m, with few islets or dangers.

1.5Jasundet (58°04'N., 7°09'E.), which connects Gronsfjorden

with Lenefjorden, is very narrow and has a least fairway depth

of 3m; a bridge, with a vertical clearance of 14.9m, spans the

narrows. Two 1.8m rocks are located in the passage, one on

either side of the channel. Currents in Jasundet attain velocities

of 3 or 4 knots.

Lindesnes Light

Lindesnes Light 
8 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

1.5Lenefjorden has great depths throughout most of its 5.25

miles length, but can only be reached by vessels that can pass

through Jasundet. 

1.6 Stusvik (58°00'N., 7°02'E.), on the E side of

Gronsfjorden, has a harbor for small vessels. The depth

between the jetties is 6.9m; farther in, depths from 3.7 to 6.9m

are found. The seas in the harbor may become quite rough

during S and SW winds.

1.6Hovdebukta (58°04'N., 7°06'E.), on the NW side of the

fjord, is a good harbor with depths up to 30m, sand, near its

head.

1.6Flatstadbukta (58°05'N., 7°07'E.), on the N shore of the

fjord, has anchorage, in 16.9m, mud. Care must be taken to

avoid a 2.7m rock that lies in the E side of the bay.

1.6Asevagen, about 0.4 mile E of Flatstadbukta, is a good harbor with anchorage, in 24 to 26m, mud. The best anchorage is

near the W part of the bay. The entrance to Asevagen is restricted by an overhead cable with a clearance of about 15.2m.

1.6During good weather, no difficulty should be experienced in

entering Gronsfjorden. Strong W winds, a heavy sea, and the

backwash from the mainland sometimes combine to make

steering difficult. 

1.6Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Raevoysund

(58°02'N., 7°00'E.), the narrow passage between the N end of

Raevoy and the mainland, and in Hundalshamn. A light is

shown on the NW side of the passage. Vessels with local

knowledge can anchor in the W part of Raevoysund, N of the

NW extremity of Raevoy, in 29 to 40m, clay. Raevoysund is

spanned at its W end by a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance

of 20m. A light is shown from the middle of the bridge. Small

vessels can anchor, in 20 to 29m, in Hundalshamn.

1.6Numerous above and below-water dangers, some of them

marked by iron perches or beacons, lie in the several approaches to Raevoysund. 

1.7 Langholm (58°02'N., 6°58'E.), Sutnoy, Kjerringoy,

and Haoy are located within 0.75 mile NW of Kjepsoy

(58°01'N., 7°00'E.). They are nearly joined together by their

fringing shoals. A group of rocks, partly above water, lie about

183m SW of Langholm. A detached 11m patch, about 183m

farther SW, is the outermost shoal in this vicinity.

1.7Detached islets, rocks, and shoals extend up to about 0.5

mile from the W side of Marquee and Kjepsoy.

1.7Rosfjorden, which is easily recognized from seaward, lies

about 2 miles NW of Gronsfjorden. 

1.7 From Hausvigodden (58°03'N., 6°59'E.), the E entrance

point, the fjord trends NNE for about 5 miles and has few

dangers. A light is shown from the point. There are some good

anchorages on both sides of the fjord. This deep fjord has a

maximum width of 1 mile; its narrowest part, with a width of

about 0.1 mile, is located about midway through the fjord.

General depths in the approaches and inside the fjord are 55 to

146m.

1.7The approach to Rosfjorden lies between Herreholmen

(58°02'N., 6°58'E.), a moderately-high islet of reddish color

located about 0.2 mile NW of Sutnoy, and Ulleroy, an 86m

high island nearly 1 mile WNW. A light is shown from a

wooden hut on the NW extremity of Herreholmen.

1.7Midtfjordenskjaer, about 0.4 mile WNW of the W extremity

of Herreholmen, is marked by a black beacon with a white

band. A 7.6m shoal patch lies about 183m N of Midtfjordenskjaer.

1.7Ytre Rosfjordenskjaerene and Indre Rosfjordensk-jaerene,

two groups of rocks, partly above water, are on the W side of

the Rosfjorden approach between Midtfjordenskjaer and the

mainland to the N.

1.7Store Kubbesteinen and Lille Kubbesteinen, two aboveStusvik
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 9

Pub. 182

water rocks, are located on the W side of the approach about

0.5 mile and 0.2 mile, respectively, SSW of the SE extremity of

Ulleroy. 

1.7Bradsteinen, with less than 1.8m, lies between the two rocks

and somewhat to the W. Other rocks lie between Bradsteinen

and Ulleroy. 

1.7Bjorneskjaer, about 0.1 mile NNW of Langholm, is above

water; other above and below-water rocks lie within 137m N of

it. 

1.7Bjorneskjaerflu, awash, lies about 183m SSW of Bjorneskjaer.

1.8 Grotholm (58°02'N., 6°58'E.) is the larger of two

islets that lie about 0.25 mile NE of Herreholmen. Several

rocks, with depths of 1.8 to 4.6m, lie within 183m W, NW, and

E of Grotholm; two small islets and some rocks lie between the

latter and the mainland.

1.8Skonevigflu, with a depth of 4.6m, is located on the E side

of Rosfjorden approach about 0.2 mile S of Hausvigodden.

1.8Teroy (58°03'N., 6°56'E.) is located about 0.1 mile N of

Ulleroy, from which it is separated by Ulleroysund. A light is

shown from the SW extremity of Teroy.

1.8Andreholm lies close off the W entrance point of Rosfjorden, about 0.4 mile WNW of Hausvigodden. Bukkene,

about 0.1 mile NE of Andreholm and the outermost danger on

this side of the fjord entrance, is awash; it is marked by an iron

post. 

1.8Other rocks, above and below-water, lie close W and NW of

Bukkene. A rock, with a depth of 5.9m, lies about 137m NW of

Hausvigodden. 

1.9 Eitlandskjaera (58°03'N., 6°59'E.), partly above

water, lies on the E side of the fjord about 0.6 mile NE of

Hausvigodden. Boroflu, 0.2 mile farther NE is a reef with

depths of 2m or less over it.

1.9Boro, the largest island in Rosfjorden, is on the E side of the

fjord about 1 mile within the entrance. Shoal water extends

about 183m from the W shore of Rosfjorden abreast Boro. 

1.9Shoal water also fringes the head of the fjord for a distance

of about 183m offshore and several other short sections of the

W shore, particularly in the narrows of the fjord.

1.9An overhead cable, with a clearance of 14m, spans the narrow passage between the mainland and the E extremity of

Boro.

1.9A light is shown from Syrhoved, about 2 miles NNE of

Boro, on the W side of the fjord. 

1.9Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Borobukta,

located on the NE side of Boro, in 25m, clay. An 8.7m shoal is

located about 91m off the N end of Boro. 

1.9Anchorage can also be taken on the W side of the fjord, at

Agnefest, in depths of 25 to 35m. 

Directions.—Vessels approaching Rosfjorden should pass to

NW of Herreholmen and Skonevigflu and SE of Store Kubbesteinen, Midtfjordenskjaer, and Ytre Rosfjordenskjaerene. One

white sector of Hausvigodden Light leads clear of all dangers. 

1.9Pass Hausvigodden at a safe distance, taking care to avoid

the 5.9m rock about 137m NW of it. After passing that point,

another white sector of the same light indicates the fairway as

far N as Boro. Vessels are then guided by the white sector of

the light shown from Syrhoved, and N of Syrhoved by the

white sector astern.

1.10 Spindsfjorden (58°05'N., 6°56'E.), the next fjord W

of Rosfjorden, trends NNE for about 3 miles from the SE end

of Skarvoy. Its approach lies between the mainland, on the E,

and Ulleroy, Teroy, and Skarvoy, on the W. Two small bays

extend E from its S part. Numerous dangers border the narrow

channel and local knowledge is required.

1.10Ystesteinen (58°01'N., 6°53'E.), a cluster of above and

below-water rocks, lies about 2 miles SW of Ulleroy. This

isolated group is outside all other dangers in the area and will

be easily recognized. Ostre Steinsflu, a 16.5m patch, lies about

0.2 mile ESE of the largest rock.

1.10Midfjordenskjaer (58°02'N., 6°54'E.) is located about 1

mile NE of Ystesteinen. A detached 7m rock lies about 0.1

mile NE of Midfjordenskjaer. Store Korken and Lille Korken,

above-water rocks, and a detached 1.8m depth, lie between

Midfjordenskjaer and the SE extremity of Vikelen, about 0.7

mile NE.

1.10Breiflu, with depths of 3.7 to 7.8m, lies about 0.5 mile S of

Vikelen. Several 6.4 to 8.7m depths lie between them.

1.10Roholme (58°02'N., 6°52'E.), about 1 mile W of Vikelen,

reddish-colored, and easily identified, is the largest of a group

of four islets. A 5m depth lies about 0.2 mile N of Roholme.

Nordre Roholmflu a 14.6m depth about 0.2 mile NNW of

Roholme.

1.10Odegardsgrunn, with a depth of 16.5m, and Kletten, with a

depth of 26m, are located about 1 mile S and 1.25 miles SW,

respectively, of Roholme.

1.10Ostre Roholmflu, about 0.4 mile SE of Roholme, has a

depth of 4.5m; a 10.1m depth lies between them.

1.10Vestre Bradsteinen (58°02'N., 6°52'E.), marked by an iron

perch and almost always marked by breakers, is located about

0.4 mile S of Roholme. Vestre Roholmflu, about 0.5 mile SSW

of Roholme, has a depth of 10m. 

1.11 Ulleroysund (58°03'N., 6°55'E.), between Ulleroy

and Teroy, is a good roadstead where vessels can anchor, in 29

to 35m, sand and clay. The best anchorage is located about 0.1

mile SW of the light on the SW side of Teroy.

Directions.—Of the two principal approaches to this sound,

the E is the better and the only one described.

1.11Approaching from the S, steer for the white sector of the

light on the E extremity of Ulleroy, which leads W of Bispen

and the islets and dangers extending SW from Marquee and

then E of Store Kubbesteinen.

1.11After passing Store Kubbesteinen, steer to pass between

Lille Kubbesteinen and Midfjordenskjaer, then through

Ulleroysund, taking care to avoid a 7.8m depth, marked by a

black and red spar buoy, which lies about 0.1 mile NE of Teroy

light, and keeping close to Ulleroy when abreast Teroy to avoid

the foul ground extending about 91m S from the latter islet.

1.11The green sector of the light shown from the SW extremity

of Teroy, bearing between 306 and 319°, leads through the E

part of Ulleroysund to within about 0.3 mile of the light.

1.11Skarvoyhamn is on the S side of Skarvoy, the next island N

of Teroy. Anchorage can be taken in the outer part of the

harbor, in 29 to 40m. Skarvoyflu, a 4m depth, lies about 0.2

mile N of the W extremity of Teroy. A 1m depth, marked by an
10 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

iron perch, lies about 0.15 mile S of Skarvoyflu.

1.11Sandholmane are two islets that lie on a reef on the W side

of Skarvoyhamn and close within the harbor entrance. The reef

fringes and extends about 137m from the shore. 

1.12 The approach to the port of Farsund lies between

Langoy and a number of islets and reefs that extend NE toward

that island from Einarsneset (58°03'N., 6°47'E.).

1.12Langoy (58°04'N., 6°52'E.) is the largest island in the

approach and lies on the NE side of the principal fairway. A

light is shown from a position about 0.2 mile NW of the S extremity of Langoy. A light is shown from the W side of Langoy

in a position about 1 mile NNW of Bremerodden, the S extremity of Langoy.

1.12Pilot boarding station for Farsund lies 2 miles S of Sondre

Katland Light (Sore Katland), (58°03'N., 6°51'E.) when

approaching from S. A small inlet lies in the approach to Farsund, about 1 mile E of the SE extremity of Einarsneset.

1.12A light is shown from the S side of Store Haoy, an islet

which lies about 0.1 mile NW of the NW extremity of Langoy.

1.12Several islets and some rocks and reefs lie between Store

Eigeroy, on the W side of the approach to Farsund and Store

Haoy.

1.12A light is shown from the SE extremity of Sandoy, which is

located near the mainland about 0.6 mile WNW of Sondre

Katland. 

1.13 Faeroyflua, a 3.2m depth, marked on its S side by a

lighted buoy, lies about 1 mile SSW of Sondre Katland.

Villaflua, with a depth of 11.9m, and Austre Mellomflua, with

a depth of 5.5m, are located about 0.2 mile NE and 0.25 mile

N, respectively, of Faeroyflua.

1.13Gunnarskjaer, awash, and Skarveskjaer, with a depth of

4.6m, lie on the SE edge of the shoal that extends up to 0.3

mile S and SE from Faeroy. Kalveflu, with a depth of 1.8m and

marked by a buoy, is on the W edge of the shoal. Breakers

usually mark these dangers.

1.13Revoyflu, marked on its N side by a buoy, is located about 1

mile SW of Sondre Katland. Revoyskjaer, marked by an iron

beacon, lies near the S end of Revoyskjaergrunn about 1 mile

SW of Sondre Katland.

1.13Revoy (58°03'N., 6°48'E.), about 0.3 mile S of the SE extremity of Einarsneset, lies on foul ground together with a few

other smaller islets. A beacon stands on Revoy. A 7.3m rock is

located about 0.3 mile WSW of the S extremity of Revoy; a

12m depth lies about 183m farther WSW. Kraka is the

southeasternmost islet in the group.

1.13Sjuhausflua, marked by an iron perch, is located about 0.2

mile W of Revoy; a reef extends about 0.1 mile N from it.

1.13Foul ground, on which the islet of Klubben lies, extends

nearly 0.3 mile E from the SW end of Einarsneset.

1.13Oddeflua, about 0.1 mile NE of Revoy, has a depth of 2.7m

and is marked by a buoy. 

1.14 The principal approach channel to Farsund leads between Faeroyflua and the Roholmane group; then between

Sondre Katland and Lindholmbaen; then W of Svartskjaer and

Brattholme; E of Bukkegrunnane, Futeskjaer, and Risholme;

and then between Lille Haoy and Store Haoy and toward the

respective parts of the harbor.

1.14Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels and

is advisable for all vessels. Pilots should be requested through

the pilot stations at Hidra or Oksoy. Pilots board vessels about

1 mile S of Faeroy.

1.14Several dangers lie near this channel, but a least depth of

33m is charted in the fairway as far as the outer anchorage of

the port.

1.14A 14m depth is charted about 0.4 mile SSE of Sondre Katland; a depth of 10.1m lies about 0.5 mile ENE from the same

islet.

Lindholmbaen, a 4.6m depth, lies on the E side of the fairway about 0.2 mile WNW of the N end of Lindholmen

(58°03'N., 6°52'E.), a 26m high islet, and is marked by a spar

buoy. A 14m depth lies about 0.5 mile W of the same extremity.

1.15 Bukkegrunnane (58°04'N., 6°51'E.), marked on its E

side by a spar buoy, is the E edge of an area of reefs and islets

which extends from a position about 0.4 mile NE of Sondre

Katland to a position 0.5 mile NNW of that islet. A detached

4.8m depth lies about 0.2 mile NE of Sondre Katland.

1.15Lyngholme is located about 0.7 mile NNE of Sondre

Katland and about 0.2 mile SE of the S end of Uroy. A rocky

patch, with a least depth of 3.2m, extends about 0.2 mile S

from Lyngholme, and a detached 5m depth lies 0.2 mile SE of

it. A 7m depth lies midway between Lyngholme and Uroy.

1.15Futeskjaera, above water, lies about 0.1 mile E of Lyngholme.

1.15A 3.2m depth lies between Risholme and Uroy.

1.15Sondre Haoyflua, lying between the NW end of Langoy and

Store Haoy, has a depth of 4m and is marked on the SW side by

a buoy.

1.15Vestre Haoyflua, on the SW side of the fairway 0.1 mile SW

of Store Haoy, has a depth of 4.7m over it and is marked by a

buoy. Nordre Haoyflua, a 5.3m depth marked by a light, lies on

the NE side of the channel about 0.1 mile WNW of Store Haoy.

1.15Lille Haoy and Lamholme lie on the SW side of the channel, about 0.1 mile WSW and 0.3 mile W of Store Haoy.

1.15Engoy and Faroy front the town of Farsund, which is situated about 1 mile NW of Store Haoy. Engoy is the S islet of the

two. Skyskjer, about 0.4 mile SE of Engoy, is one of a group of

above and below-water rocks and is marked by an iron beacon.

1.15Fisholmflua, on the NW side of Fisholmen about 0.2 mile

SE of Engoy, is marked by an iron perch.

1.16 Farsund (58°06'N., 6°49'E.) (World Port Index No.

23520), the inner harbor, lies between Engoy and Faroy on the

E, and the mainland on the W. The outer harbor lies between

Fisholmen and Sundsodden, a mainland projection about 0.3

mile SSW of Engoy. A causeway extends from the NW end of

Faroy to the NE end of the peninsula, on which the town of

Farsund stands on the side of a steep hill. Athreespan Bridge,

with a maximum clearance of 22m, connects Faroy with the E

entrance point of Lyngdalsfjordenen.

1.16Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds in winter blow

from S and SE; in summer nearly half of the time the prevailing winds blow from N or NW. These sea winds are largely

responsible for the very mild temperatures in winter and the

overall lack of extreme temperatures. Precipitation is high. The

harbor is ice free.
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 11

Pub. 182

1.16Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise is about 0.3m. No local

currents are reported in the Farsund approach. Winds have

some effect on tides.

1.16Depths—Limitations.—A depth of 33m is available

through the approach, but Nordre Haoyflua, a 5.3m depth, lies

close to the channel in the narrows between Store Haoy and

Lille Haoy. General depths in the outer harbor are 14.6 to 29m;

in the inner harbor off the town the depths are 4.5 to 8.8m. The

large quays have depths of 4 to 6m alongside.

1.16Aspect.—A light is shown from the SW side of Faroy in

range with a light shown from the SE side of Engoy. Lights are

shown from the S side of Faroy and a post in the water close E

of the N extremity of Engoy.

1.16Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be

ordered through the Safe Sea Net or alternatively the Horten

Pilot Booking Centre. The pilot boards in position 58°01.5'N,

6°50.0'E. 

1.16Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor in the inner harbor;

the usual anchorage is N of Gulsteinen between the town and

Gasholme. Mooring rings and dolphins are located along the

shore. Larger vessels can anchor anywhere between Gulsteinen

and Skjolnes, the S entrance point of Lundevagen about 0.25

mile SE of Sundsodden.

1.17 Lundevagen, the inlet immediately S of Farsund,

extends W a little over 1 mile from its entrance between Sundsodden and Skjolnes and narrows to a width of about 137m in a

position about 1 mile from the entrance.

1.17Kraka, an above-water rock, lies about 0.1 mile W of the

narrows. A 3m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 73m SE of

Kraka. When passing through the narrows, vessels should keep

close to the S shore.

1.17A submarine cable is laid across the entrance to Lundevagen.

1.17A concrete wharf, 135m long, with a depth alongside of

14.5m, lies on the S shore of the inlet near the entrance.

Another concrete wharf, 106m long, with depths alongside of 5

to 9m, lies on the S shore close to the head of the inlet.

1.17Anchorage.—Small vessels can take sheltered anchorage

in the inner part of Lundevagen, in 16.5 to 18.3m, good holding ground. The head of the inlet shoals to a distance of about

0.1 mile offshore. 

1.18 Saltrak (58°03'N., 6°49'E.) is an island close SW of

Sandoy. Palsflua, on the end of a spit extending about 0.2 mile

SW from Saltrak, is awash, always breaks, and is marked by an

iron perch. Sauflua is located on the edge of foul ground that

extends about 0.1 mile E from the SE extremity of Einarsneset.

It has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by an iron perch.

Flama (58°04'N., 6°50'E.), a roadstead, lies between Faeroy,

on the S, Sandoy and the mainland on the W, and Lille Eigeroy

on the N. Reefs and islets extend N from Sondre Katland on

the E. The roadstead is roomy and easy of access.

1.18Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken here, in about 33m,

clay, with good holding ground.

1.18Katlandflua, with a depth of less than 1.8m and lying within

0.1 mile W of Sondre Katland, is marked by an iron perch and

a buoy.

1.18Foeroysundflua, a detached 8m depth, lies close to the Lille

Eigeroy range line about 0.2 mile WNW of Sondre Katland.

1.18Two unmarked rocks, with depths of 7.6 and 9m, lie on the

W side of the roadstead within about 206m of the E side of

Sondoy. The deeper rock never breaks.

1.18Engelskjerflua, on the E side of the roadstead about 0.3 mile

NNW of Sondre Katland, is marked by a buoy.

1.18Raudsteinflua, at the N end of the dangers extending N

from Sondre Katland, has a depth of less than 1.8m and is

marked by an iron perch.

1.18A detached 6.9m depth lies in the NE part of the roadstead

about 0.3 mile ESE of the S extremity of Lille Eigeroy.

1.18Directions to Ostre Faeroysundet.—From the vicinity of

position 58°02.5'N, 6°50'E, the approach route to Farsund track

leads to Flama roadstead by passing Sondre Katland Light

(58°03.4'N, 6°50.5'E.) via Ostre Faeroysund, the passage

between Sondre Katland and Faeroy, which can be used in all

weather conditions.

1.18This channel is approached between Faeroyflua and the

Roholme group until the range lights shown from Lille Eikeroy

are in line. When on the range line, care must be taken to avoid

Foeroysundflua. 

1.19 Kveldsund (58°04'N., 6°54'E.) separates the NE end

of Langoy from the W extremity of Ytre Bugdoy. This narrow,

rock obstructed channel is near the E end of Indre Spindsfjorden, 0.25 to 0.5 mile in width, lying between Langoy and

the mainland, N. It trends E from Store Haoy for about 2 miles.

Several anchorages are located in small coves that lead off

from the inlet. 

1.19Vikholme lies close off the N shore of the inlet about 0.5

mile NW of the NE extremity of Langoy. Shoal water extends

about 137m S from Vikholme.

1.19An overhead cable, with a clearance of 30m, spans the inlet,

about 0.3 mile E of Vikholme. A submarine cable crosses the

inlet about 0.3 mile W of Vikholme.

1.19Midfjordenskjeret, a detached above-water rock, is located

in the W approach to the inlet in a position about 0.2 mile NW

of the N extremity of Store Haoy. A 16m depth lies about 0.2

mile ESE of Midfjordenskjeret.

1.19Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

14m, between the N side of Vikholme and the mainland; in a

depth of 22m, in a creek on the N side of Langoy, about 0.4

mile S of Vikholme; and, in a depth of 15m, in a cove about 1

mile E of Vikholme.

1.19Anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge may be

taken, in depths of 8m to 14m, sand, off Birkenes, 0.6 mile

ENE of Store Haoy. 

1.20 Lyngdalsfjorden extends about 4 miles NE from

Farsund and then divides into two arms, each about 4 miles

long. The E arm continues under the name of Lyngdalsfjorden;

the NW arm is known as Oftefjorden. About 1 mile from the

head of the latter fjord, Drangsfjorden branches NE for about 2

miles.

1.20A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 22m at the center,

spans the entrance of Lyngdalsfjorden. About 1 mile within the

entrance, an overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 22m,

crosses the fjord.

1.20Oen (58°06'N., 6°47'E.), an island in the SW part of Lyngdalsfjorden, is separated from the mainland on its S, W, and N

sides by channels which are, in places, both narrow and
12 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

shallow. Helvigfjorden, W of Oen, has a depth of 3.2m in its

approach, which leads S and W of the island.

1.20With the exception of a shoal extending across the entrance

of the E arm of Lyngdalsfjorden and a few scattered dangers,

the fjordsare deep throughout.

1.20A 5m shoal lies on the E side of Lyngdalsfjorden entrance

about 137m W of the NW extremity of Spindsodden.

Submarine cables are laid from Farsund to Oen and E of

Kilsholme to the mainland. A submarine cable is laid across

Lyngdalsfjorden, about 1 mile E of Farsund.

1.20From the S entrance point to the inner part of Lyngdalsfjorden, a submarine cable is laid NW across Oftefjorden to a

position about 0.5 mile NE of Herred, at the head of a bight

indenting the W side of Oftefjorden. 

1.20Another cable is laid from the S entrance point along

Lyngdalsfjorden to a position about 0.5 mile W of Lyngdal,

located at the head of the fjord.

1.20Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Bjorsviken, on

the E side of Oen, in 11.9m, pebbles and shells.

1.20Several anchorages are located in the E arm of Lyngdalsfjorden; a 5.5m channel leads across the shoal fronting this

arm. 

1.20Anchorage can be taken off Herred, in 14.6 to 22m. Several

dangers lie in the NE part of the bight that Herred lies at the

head of. An anchorage is also located near the head of Oftefjorden, in a depth of about 27m. 

1.21 The coast between Einarsneset and Steinodden, about

8.5 miles NW, is indented by several shallow bights. The first

1.5 miles of the coast is fringed by reefs and islets to a distance

of about 1.5 miles offshore.

1.21 Along the about 7 miles stretch of Lista from Steinodden to

Rauna, the bottom slopes steeply. This leads to sea waves being

both reflected and deflected. In addition, the current conditions in the area are variable with eddy formations, and the

sea can be very rough. Heavy breakers have been observed.

1.21 Hummerdus is an islet close W of the S extremity of

Einarsneset. Between the islet and Havik, about 1.5 miles

WNW, there is a considerable extent of reddish-colored sand,

which has sometimes been mistaken for Mandalssand, a strip

of yellow sand about 12 miles E of Lindesnes, to which it

certainly bears some slight resemblance. Such a mistake is

possible in thick weather.

1.21 Havik (58°04'N., 6°44'E.) appears as a dark brown hill rising

from a small point 2 miles WNW of Einarsneset.

1.21 Svaneflu (58°03'N., 6°45'E.), a 2.1m depth located about 1.5

miles SW of Einarsneset and marked by a spar buoy, is the

outermost of the many dangers in the vicinity. Between Svaneflu and Rauna the known dangers lie within 1 mile of shore.

1.21 Rauna (58°04'N., 6°40'E.), an island, is located about 3

miles W of Einarsneset. Shoal water extends up to 0.3 mile S

from Rauna.

1.21 Ostre Rauneflu, a 2.5m depth, lies near the coastal bank

about 0.25 mile SE of Rauna. A 1.5m depth lies about 0.3 mile

ENE of Ostre Rauneflu. Vestre Rauneflua is a 3.5m patch

about 0.7 mile W of Rauna. 

1.22 Brekneholme (58°06'N., 6°35'E.) is an inconspicuous

flat islet, consisting entirely of pebbles and located a little over

3.25 miles NW of Rauna.

1.22 Listahamn, lying between the SE end of Brekneholme and

the mainland, is protected by a mole extending from the islet

and one extending WNW from the mainland. 

1.22 Small vessels may anchor in Listahamn, in depths from 4 to

6m, with their sterns secured to mooring rings because of

limited swinging room. During SW storms, there is a considerable current in the outer harbor.

1.22 Several above and below-water rocks lie within about 152m

of the S shore of Brekneholme.

1.22 A projecting quay on the E side of Listahamn has depths of

up to 4m alongside.

1.22 Lista Light (58°07'N., 6°34'E.), exhibited from a stone

tower, 34m in height, is on a level plain which projects about 2

miles from the foot of the high land between Farsund and

Listafjorden and terminates in a low sandy shore bordered by

ranges of sand hills.

Steinodden to Svaholmane

1.23 Steinodden (58°07'N., 6°33'E.) is the W extremity of

the peninsula of Lista. Numerous above and below-water rocks

lie within 0.4 mile of Steinodden.

1.23 Verevagen is a small shallow cove about 0.5 mile ENE of

Steinodden. Perches and beacons mark its two entrance channels. A flagstaff stands at the head of the cove.

1.23 Stavestoflu, a 1.8m depth, lies 0.2 mile offshore about 1 mile

NE of Steinodden.

1.23 Varnesholme lies close NW of Varnes (58°11'N., 6°38'E.),

the S entrance of Listafjorden. Rocks border the SW and NW

sides of this small islet. 

1.24 Listafjorden (58°11'N., 6°37'E.) branches to form

Fedafjorden, Stolsfjorden, and Flekkefjorden. Fedafjorden runs

NE between steep forested shores, often rising to a height of

about 305m. Flekkefjorden runs N from Stolsfjorden and has

steep shores up to the port of Flekkefjorden at its head.

1.24 Brekneholmen Light (58°05'N., 6°36'E.) is exhibited from

a white lantern on piles on Brekneholmen, a flat islet consisting entirely of pebbles, which is not easily distinguishable.

Lista Light
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 13

Pub. 182

1.24 Listahamn, between Brekneholmen and the mainland, has a

narrow entrance formed by two breakwaters.

1.24 Andabeloy and Hidra, large and hilly islands, lie N and NW

of Listafjorden. 

1.24 Farther NW, the coast is craggy and treeless, rising steeply to

a height of about 183m, and is indented only by a few small

inlets. The fjords are deep and mostly clear of dangers.

1.24 The fjord gap between Hidra and Varneset is only about 1

mile wide, and with an outgoing current, the sea will become

rough. Large depths of about 300m, and a thereby steep shore,

means that reflection will cause a rough sea. Refraction can

also occur for certain directions.

1.24 Dangers on the NW side of Listafjorden include Myskeskjaerne and Hunden. Myskeskjaerne, two groups of low

rocks, lie within 0.2 mile of the SE side of Andabeloy. 

1.24 One group is located about 0.7 mile NE of Hogsaedeskroa,

the S extremity of Andabeloy; the other group, which is

marked by a beacon 2m high, lies about 0.25 mile farther NE. 

1.24 Hunden, one of a group of above and below-water rocks, lies

about 183m offshore,about 0.2 mile SSW of Tarmevikodden

(58°13'N., 6°41'E.), the E extremity of Andabeloy.

1.24 Eidsfjorden, branching E for about 1 mile from the SE side

of Listafjorden, has steep-to shores and ample depths.

1.25 Ytre Pollen (58°11'N., 6°42'E.), at the head of the

inlet, affords good anchorage to small vessels, but during W

gales the sea breaks across the entrance. Buoys mark the

approach to the anchorage. Hausen, a rock on the S side of the

entrance, is marked by an iron perch. Small vessels can also

take sheltered anchorage, in about 7m, off Vikane, about 0.6

mile E of Varnes.

1.25 Fedafjorden, a continuation of Listerfjorden, extends NE for

about 6 miles from its entrance between Ostre Stolen

(58°13'N., 6°43'E.) and a point about 0.5 mile SE. The fjord is

deep to within about 0.3 mile of its head, where a shoal fronts

the mouth of the river Kvina.

1.25 The NW shore of Fedafjorden is more irregular than the SE

shore. Anchorages in the fjord are all located on this side.

1.25 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 50m, crosses Fedafjorden in position 58°15.5'N, 6°50.6'E between Agholmen

(5815'N., 6°52'E.) and Teistdalsstranda. 

1.25 Sageflua, with a least depth of 5m, lies within 0.2 mile

offshore in a position about 3 miles NE of Ostre Stolen. Binesflua, with a 9m depth, is located about 0.6 mile NE of Sageflua.

1.25 A small bay lies off the settlement of Feda, close NE of

Binesflua. Vessels can anchor in the middle of the bay, in 40m,

hard sand. A stone beacon and two dolphins stand at the head

of the bay.

1.25 Agnholmen (58°16'N., 6°50'E.) lies on the N shore close NE

of Feda.

1.25 Leirvik, located on the NW side of Fedafjorden, is a timberhandling place, with a concrete pier about 92m long and a

depth of 5.6m.

1.25 Oye, the site of a smelting works, lies across a small bay NE

of Leirvik. A concrete quay, 137m long, is located at Oye; a roro berth on its N side has a depth of 8m while its S side has a

depth of 12m alongside. Two buoys mark the edge of shoal

water SE of the quay. A quay, 40m long, with a depth alongside of 3 to 7m, lies close NW of Oye.

1.25 Tides—Currents.—During floods, the outgoing flow in the

narrowest part of the fjord, near Agnholmen, can attain a

velocity of up to 2 knots. The velocity is usually 0.5 knot.

1.26 Strandsfjorden (58°13'N., 6°39'E.), branching N

between Hidra and Andabeloy, is entered between Klubben

and Hogsaedeskroa. The fjord is deep and relatively free from

dangers. It trends N for about 2 miles to Kokodden (58°14'N.,

6°39'E.), a prominent mainland point, where it joins Hidrasundet, and then NE toward Risholmsundet, the channel along

the N side of Andabeloy.

1.26 Katterauva is an islet lying close offshore on the E side of

Strandsfjorden, about 0.3 mile NW of Hogsaedeskroa. Rocks,

with depths of less than 1.8m, lie near its SW end.

1.26 Abelnes is a village on the NE shore of a small cove about

0.3 mile N of Kokodden. Good anchorage can be taken off

Abelnes, in 14.6 or 16.5m, sand and clay.

1.26 Risholmsundet (58°14'N., 6°40'E.), connecting Strandsfjorden and Stolsfjorden, is a narrow channel between the N

end of Andabeloy and Risholmen, a small islet about 0.5 mile

E of Kokodden.

1.26 Engelsholmen lies in the W approach to Risholmsundet. The

islet is located close off the NW side of Andabeloy, about 0.3

mile SE of Kokodden. Two buoys, moored close W and N of

the islet, mark the edges of the reef which fringes it.

1.26 Risholmen is the southernmost of a chain of islets, rocks,

and shoals that almost completely obstructs the passage between the mainland and Andabeloy. Foul ground extends about

137m W from Risholmen. A lighted iron perch, about 91m off

the E side of the islet, marks the SE edge of a foul area.

Risholmbaen, close off the S side of Risholmen, is marked by a

light and an iron perch.

1.26 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in most places

on the bank between the N end of Andabeloy and the mainland. The bottom is mostly stiff mud and sand. The best anchorage is between Engelsholmen and Risholmen, in a depth

of 20m. 

1.27 Stolsfjorden (58°14'N., 6°41'E.) is entered between

Tarmevikodden and Ostre Stolen and extends N about 3 miles

Listahamn from SW
14 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

to the narrows of Straumsundet. The fairway through the fjord

is deep and clear.

1.27 Terneholmen (58°14'N., 6°41'E.), with a smaller islet and

some foul ground near it, lies close off the NE side of

Andabeloy. A stone breakwater extends S from Terneholmen

to the coast of Andabeloy. 

1.27 Aleskjera, a group of above and below-water rocks, lies up to

0.2 mile N of Terneholmen is are marked by iron perches.

1.27 Straumsundet is the middle one of the three narrow channels

that lead N among the several islets in the passage separating

Stolsfjorden and Flekkefjorden. These islets, from S to N, are

Kjeoy, Litle Torsoya, and Store Torsoya. The least charted

depth in the fairway of Straumsundet is 13.5m.

1.27 Stamdalsflua, a 1.8m depth marked on its W side by a buoy,

lies about 183m offshore and about 0.2 mile S of Kjeoy.

1.27 Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge can

anchor in a cove on the S side of Kjeoy, in depths of 10 to 17m,

sand.

1.27 There is anchorage for vessels of moderate size between the

SE end of Kjeoy and Stamdalsflua, in a depth of 33m, clay. 

1.28 Flekkefjorden extends N about 1.5 miles between

Straumsundet and Gronsundet. An islet group extends up to

about 0.2 mile from the W shore. Fairway depths through the

fjord are ample.

1.28 Anchorage.—Anchorage is indicated in the NW part of

Flekkefjorden, in about 25m. Care must be taken to avoid a

4.8m depth on the E side of the anchorage close SW of the

entrance to Gronsundet.

1.28 Gronsundet is the narrow channel joining Flekkefjorden and

Tjorsvagbukta. A buoy marks the E and W sides of the fairway

through the channel. The least charted depth through the

fairway of the channel is 8.7m over a width of 60m. Range

lights, shown from the NW shore of Tjorsvagbukta, lead

between the buoys through Gronsundet.

1.28 Tjorsvagbukta, extending about 0.5 mile N from Gronsundet

and up to 0.5 mile in width, forms the harbor for the town of

Flekkefjorden.

1.29 Flekkefjorden (58°18'N., 6°40'E.) (World Port Index

No. 23510) is located in the N part of Tjorsvagbukta. Its harbor

is ice-free at all times. The harbor comprises all of Tjorsvagbukta and the narrow channel connecting that small bay and

Grisefjorden. A drawbridge, spanning the channel, joins the

two parts of the town. Vessels with a draft up to 3.7m can use

the channel. 

1.29 The harbor is free from dangers, except for the 5.2m shoal

immediately within the entrance close N of Gronsundet. On

either side of the harbor, the country is rocky and broken up by

small lakes. Sparsely-wooded hills rise on the NW to over

274m and on the SE to over 122m.

1.29 Depths—Limitations.—The least charted depth of 8.7m is

found in Gronsundet. There are quays up to 86m long, with

depths of 3 to 8m alongside. Yachts berth between the W

entrance point of the channel leading to Grisefjorden and the

drawbridge. 

1.29 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be

ordered using the Safe Sea Net or alternatively the Horten Pilot

Booking Center. The pilot boards at the entrance to

Listafjorden in position 58°10.9'N, 6°32.9'E. 

1.29 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken almost anywhere in

Tjorsvagbukta, in up to 34m, stiff mud, good holding ground.

1.30 Rasvagen (58°14'N., 6°34'E.), a deep, narrow inlet

indenting the S side of Hidra for about 2 miles in a NNW

direction, has several coves and anchorages and provides good

shelter. A barrier of islets and rocks, among which are five

narrow passages, stretches across the entrance between

Nesodden, the E entrance point, and a point about 1 mile NW.

1.30 A submarine pipeline is laid in the N part of the inlet. The

inlet is crossed by an overhead cable with a vertical clearance

of 21m.

1.30 Flekkefjorden can be approached from Listafjorden either by

way of Stolsfjorden or through Strandsfjorden and Risholmsundet and then through the N part of Stolsfjorden. Vessels

from W can also approach through Hidrasundet and then

through Risholmsundet. 

1.30 Hobmannen, a group of rocks, is located about 91m offshore

about 0.9 mile ESE of Nesodden. Saueholmane is a small

group of islets and rocks lying close offshore about 0.3 mile

ESE of Nesodden.

1.30 Sakseskjeret, marked by a beacon, lies about 0.6 mile SE of

Nesodden. The beacon should be given a berth of at least 152m

to avoid the dangers extending NE from it.

1.30 Baan is a small, low rock about 0.1 mile SW of Sakseskjeret.

A rock lies awash close E.

1.30 Sjonga, the outermost of a group of rocks about 183m N of

Baan, and Skarveskjerflua, the westernmost of a group of rocks

about 0.3 mile farther NW, are each marked by an iron perch.

1.31 Rasvagholmane (58°13'N., 6°35'E.) is a group of

small islets and rocks on the E side of the inlet, close WSW of

the village of Rasvag. An iron perch marks the NW rock by

Rasvagholmane.

1.31 The entrances into Rasvagen are narrow but not very

difficult. Under ordinary circumstances, a pilot will board the

vessel in time to take it into the inlet. If a pilot is unable to

board, the vessel should stand into Listafjorden or Hidrasundet,

both of which are easy of access. 

1.31 The E entrance, between the coast of Hidra and Sakseskjeret,

is the one generally used. It is relatively clear of dangers and is

deep. The other entrances require local knowledge. After

passing Sakseskjeret, keep E of Naudholme, Lille Hummeroy,

and Kregleholme and W of Rasvagholmane.

1.31 Anchorage for Rasvag, in the cove fronting the village, is

prohibited because of submarine cables. Anchorage may be

taken about 0.4 mile NW of Nesodden, off the SW side of

Kreglingholmen, in depths of 20 to 30m.

1.31 A 9.2m patch lies about 91m S of Kreglingholmen.

1.31 Caution.—Vessels must not proceed at more than 5 knots in

the upper part of Rasvagen when N of Vage.

1.31 Breidlia (Breilien) (58°13'N., 6°34'E.) lies in a small cove

on the W side of Rasvagen and affords good anchorage, in

16m, sand. Vessels anchor in the middle of the cove and moor

with stern lines to mooring rings.

1.31 Vage is a small harbor in a bight on the W side of Rasvagen,

about 0.6 mile N of Breidlia. Small vessels can find sheltered

anchorage here, in 26m, sand. A stern line should be taken to

the shore at the head of the bight. 
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 15

Pub. 182

1.32 Kirkehamn (58°14'N., 6°32'E.), on the W side of

Hidra, is a good harbor. Heavy seas from the W send in a heavy

swell. The harbor is ice free.

1.32 Vessels anchor in the bight NW of the church, in depths of

20 to 30m, mud. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the E

bight, off the village, in a depth of 20m, sand. 

1.32 There is also anchorage near the NE end of Dragoya, in

depths of 16.4 to 20m.

Hidrasundet separates Hidra from the mainland N and can be

used by vessels approaching Flekkefjorden from the W. The

fairway is free from known dangers and is deep, but is only

about 0.1 mile wide at its narrowest part. 

1.32 From its entrance between Kvalsberget, the N extremity of

Hidrsundet trends ESE for about 3 miles to Kokodden, where it

joins Strandsfjorden.

1.32 Svertingane (58°15'N., 6°30'E.), a group of above and

below-water rocks lying within about 0.3 mile NW of Prestoya, are the outermost dangers on the S side of the approach.

A 1.5m shoal lies at the W end of the group.

1.32 Kadoyflua, a detached 12m shoal, lies about 0.2 mile N of

the N end of Kadoya, the island NE of Prestoya.

1.32 Stovika (58°15'N., 6°31'E.), on the N side of the W

approach to Hidrasundet, is entered a little over 0.75 miles

NNE of the N point of Kadoya. It affords good anchorage for

small vessels, in depths up to 20m, sand. 

1.32 Smaller vessels can anchor, in 4m, at the head of the cove. W

winds send in a considerable swell. Stovika anchorage is approached between an island group on the SW side of the cove

and a rock, awash, located about 137m SW of the E entrance

point. Vessels must pass close E of the rock awash to avoid the

shore bank extending from the E side of the cove. 

1.33 Berefjorden (58°16'N., 6°28'E.) is entered E of Holmen, an islet 0.5 mile NW of Halsodden, the E entrance point.

Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in a

cove NW of Holmen, in depths up to 24m, mud, approaching

by the wider channel N of the islet. 

1.33 Shoal water extends about 18m from the E side of this islet.

A power line, 21m high, is reported N of Holmen. Small craft

can anchor between Furuholmen (58°16'N., 6°28'E.) and the

head of Berefjorden, in depths up to 6m, mud; the wider channel S of Furuholmen has a depth of 3.7m.

1.33 A hill, 244m high, stands about 0.7 mile NE of Halsodden.

Another hill, 218m high, lies about 2 miles NW of Halsodden. 

Flekkeffjorden
16 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

1.33 Siragrunnen (58°15'N., 6°20'E.) lies off the outlet to Ana

Sira (58°17'N., 6°26'E.); the depth varies from 10 to 100m.

1.33 The current conditions in the area are very variable. A little

further out from land, the coast current runs NE. At the Rekefjord entrance to Ana Sira, the outgoing current has been reported as high as 3 knots.

1.34 Egdeholmen (58°17'N., 6°23'E.) lies close off the E

entrance point of Ana Sira. During strong outgoing tidal currents and with onshore gales, the sea breaks on either side of

the entrance.

1.34 Siragrunnen should be avoided in poor weather. Together

with winds from SE, through S to NW, the variable current

conditions will cause a rough sea. Even outside the current, the

bottom conditions will mean that refraction centers are formed

on the shoal with waves from W to NW.

1.34 The largest of three quays in Ana Sira is located at the head

of the inlet 2 miles ENE of Egdeholmen. It is 50m long, with a

depth of 3m alongside, and is approached through a shallow

channel marked by buoys. 

1.34 Between Ana Sira and Buvarodden, about 2 miles NW, and

up to a distance of about 2 miles W from that point, there are

numerous small islets, rocks, and shoals. The channels among

these islets, rocks, shoals and the coast, although deep, should

only be used by vessels having local knowledge. 

1.35 Jossingfjorden (58°19'N., 6°20'E.), about 0.5 mile E

of Buvarodden, lies between Austre Kvalen and Vestre Kvalen,

about 183m W. From its narrow, well-defined entrance lying

between steep, dark hills, Jossingfjorden extends NE for about

1 mile. The fjord is deep and, within the entrance, is from 0.2

to 0.3 mile wide.

1.35 Overhead cables, with vertical clearance of 6.5m, cross the

entrance to Jossingfjorden E of Austre Kvalen Light.

1.35 Depths—Limitations.—An ore pier at the head of the fjord

has a depth of 15m alongside. Vessels of up to 16,000 dwt can

load from the silo with the help of a conveyor belt. Water may

be obtained from the pier. Another pier at Holmen, on the E

shore of the fjord, is about 20m long, with depths of 7.7 to

8.5m alongside; it is used for general cargo.

1.35 Vintersto, a 2.7m rock marked by an iron perch from which a

light is shown, lies in a small cove on the E side of the fjord

about 0.3 mile NNE of Austre Kvalen. Except for this rock,

Jossingfjorden is clear of dangers.

1.35 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage

between Vintersto and the shore of the cove, in 16.5 to 24m,

sand. Mooring rings are available. 

1.35 Anchorages are also located in two coves on either side of a

small peninsula that projects from the E shore of the fjord near

Holmen, about 0.7 mile within the entrance. 

1.35 Mooring rings are available in the SW cove. Depths in these

anchorages are 20 to 24m. Larger vessels can anchor about 0.4

mile from the head of the fjord, in 40 to 55m, fine sand and

mud.

1.35 Caution.—The approach to Jossingfjorden should only be

made from the W. Passage should be made N of Indrebaen,

Langholme, and Dynga. 

1.35 Two submarine cables lie in the vicinity of the anchorage

near Holmen. An outfall pipeline runs from the vicinity of

Holmen, seaward along the E side of the fjord. Discharge is

achieved through a pipe floating at a depth of 15m.

1.36 The coast between the Jossingfjorden entrance and

RekefjordRekefjord trends WNW for about 2 miles and is very

irregular. It is entirely covered with green grass in summer. 

1.36 In autumn and winter, when the grass is withered and before

the ground is covered with snow, it has a yellowish appearance.

The mountains flanking this coastal stretch are naked and dark,

presenting a striking contrast. 

1.36 A chain of four islets and a group of rocks extends for about

1 mile across a coastal indentation comprising the harbor of

Sogndalsstranda, in the SE part, and two small arms,

Helleviken and Logevik, in the NW part. Vambelsund, the narrow but best entrance into this bay, is between the mainland

and the SE end of Langholme, the southernmost islet of the

chain. 

1.36 During spring and autumn after heavy rains, a strong current

runs out through Vambelsund. The entire bay is exposed to sea

and swell.

1.36 Sogndalsstranda (58°19'N., 6°18'E.) is a village located on

the E side of the bay. A small harbor formed by a jetty lies S of

the village. Along the jetty there is a concrete quay,25m long,

with depths of 1.7 to 5.5m. Overhead cables with vertical

clearance of 8.5m are located in the vicinity of the village.

1.37 Rekefjord (58°20'N., 6°16'E.), extending about 1

mile N, is entered between Lille Presteskjer and a point about

0.2 mile SE. Reefs fringe the shores of the fjord in places. A

light is shown from a 78m high piller close W of the entrance

channel.

1.37 About 0.2 mile within the entrance, the fjord narrows to its

minimum width of about 64m. The least depth in the narrows

is 17.8m. General depths elsewhere in the fjord are 14.6 to

27m. Local knowledge is required. A 22m depth is located in

the fairway about 0.2 mile SE of Lille Presteskjer. Within the

narrows, there are several dangerous rocks that are marked by

iron perches.

1.37 Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor almost anywhere in

Rekefjord. The outer roadstead, just within the entrance, has

depths of 29 to 37m, but is exposed to onshore gales. 

1.37 Moderate size vessels can find sheltered anchorage about 0.5

mile inside the entrance, in a depth of about 24m, clay. Stern

lines can be passed to mooring rings on shore. 

1.37 A submarine cable crosses the S end of this anchorage and

an overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 40m, crosses the

N end.

1.37 The town of Rekefjord lies on the E side of the fjord near its

head. Overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 10m, are

located in the vicinity of Rekefjord.

1.38 Nordfjord (58°20'N., 6°15'E.), a narrow but sheltered

fjord close W of Rekefjord, is entered on either side of Nordfjordenholmane, which lies in the fjord entrance. 

1.38 The channels on either side are narrow. The E channel has a

depth of 6.9m; the W channel has depths of 5 to 6.9m. 

1.38 During onshore gales, the sea breaks across both channel

entrances. Nordfjord trends NNW for about 1 mile, but dries

about 0.3 mile from its head.

1.38 Overhead cables, with a vertical clearance of 10m, exist at

Nordfjord.
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 17

Pub. 182

1.38 Nordfjordenflu, with depths less than 1.8m and marked by

an iron perch, lies close off the NE end of Nordfjordenholmane. 

1.39 The coast between the Nordfjorden entrance and

Stapnes, a mainland projection about 7 miles NW, is lofty and

steep. Along this coastal stretch all known dangers are near the

land. There is no shelter and the few anchorages should only be

resorted to in fine weather and with local knowledge.

1.39 Hadyret (58°20'N., 6°10'E.), a conspicuous 103m hill, is

located on the coast about 3 miles NW of Lille Prestskjaer. 

1.39 Hadyret, resembling a perpendicular wall of rock with a

sharp and slightly projecting peak at the outer extremity, is

marked by a white patch.

1.39 Vatlandsfluene, three detached depths, has depths of 16m,

13.7m, and 24m, lying up to 0.3 mile offshore and between 0.3

and 0.6 miles SE of Hadyret.

1.39 Vagene (58°20'N., 6°13'E.) is a small bay that indents the

coast for about 0.3 mile N from the chain of islets and rocks

fronting it. In the E part of the bay there is a depth of 21.9m

over a sandy bottom, where small vessels with local knowledge

can take anchorage. A draft of 3.9m can be taken through the

channel between the second and third islets from W. 

1.39 However, the anchorage is seldom used because onshore

gales send in considerable swell. Under such conditions, there

are breakers in the channels between the islets. 

1.40 Nalauviken (58°23'N., 6°04'E.) is a bight on the E

side of Stapnes. It is entered between the S extremity of

Stapnes and a point about 0.6 mile E.

1.40 Haskjaer, an above-water rock with a reef projecting about

183m N from it, is located close off the E entrance point of

Nalauviken. Storflu, an 11m depth, lies about 0.2 mile SW of

Haskjaer. Lyreflu, with a least depth of 5.7m, lies close N of

Storflu. Foul ground, on the W side of the bay, extends about

0.1 mile SE and 0.3 mile ENE of the S end of Stapnes.

1.40 Tenholme, on the E side of the bay about 0.3 mile NNW of

Haskjaer, is joined to the mainland close E by a drying shoal. 

1.40 Tenholmflu, with a depth of less than 1.8m, and Kveidflu, a

1.8m rock on the E side of the bay about 0.1 mile farther N, are

each marked by an iron perch. Small vessels can anchor, in

5.9m, off Odden, at the head of Nalauviken. The approach to

the anchorage is narrow and difficult and should not be

attempted without a pilot. During onshore gales, a swell rolls in

over the shoals N of Tenholme.

1.40 At the head of Nalauviken, there is a good harbor, in depths

of 5 to 7m, sand, protected by moles. Mooring buoys and rings

are available. There is a quay, 40m long, with a depth of 5m

alongside, in the harbor.

1.40 Havsund, between the N side of Dragoya, and Prestoya, an

island about 0.2 mile N, is the principal passage leading toward

Kirkehamn. The fairway through Havsund is deep and free

from dangers. Vessels should approach Kirkehamn from W in

mid-channel. 

Svaholmane to Ognabukti

1.41 About one half the coastal stretch between Svaholmane and Ognabukti comprises the approaches to, and the port

area of, Egersund.

1.41 Egeroy (Eigeroy) (58°27'N., 5°58'E.) is relatively low and

indented; seen from the sea it blends with the background.

Lundeviken and Soragapet, the S approach leading into the

port area, are well defined.

1.41 From W, the lowland region of Jaeren will be visible to the N

in clear weather. Eigeroy will resemble a high promontory; the

coast SE will appear very high and precipitous. Nordregapet,

the W approach to Egersund, will also be clearly visible.

1.41 Between Egersund and Ognabukti, the coast is steep and

rocky, but seldom rises above a height of 30m. There are a few

patches of farmland but very few trees; the whole landscape is

wild and inhospitable. A large number of islets front the

several bays and coves that indent the coast between Nordregapet and Ognabukti. 

1.41 Svaholmane (58°23'N., 6°03'E.) is a group of low islets and

rocks lying on the E side of the S approach to Egersund within

0.5 mile W of Stapnes.

1.41 Kletten, Tysnesflu, and Stiksflu, with depths of 8.2m, 16m,

and 8.2m, respectively, lie about 0.5 mile and 0.2 mile WSW

and 0.3 mile NW, respectively, of a lighted structure on Svaholmane. 

1.42 Soragapet (Sondregapet) (58°26'N., 6°00'E.), the S

and principal approach to the port of Egersund, is the sound

between the mainland and the E side of Eigeroy. Its channel is

suitable for deep-draft vessels. 

1.42 Entrance is made between Svaholmane and the shoals and

other dangers that lie up to 1 mile S of Skarvoy, an islet near

the SE end of Eigeroy, about 2 miles NNW of Svaholmane. 

1.42 The most constricted part of Soragapet is between Fugleodden, a projection on the E side of Eigeroy about 1 mile N of

Skarvoy, and Synnavikodden (Sonnevikodden), a small mainland point about 150m NE. A concrete silo, about 61m high,

stands on the point.

1.42 Vardbergodden, the E entrance point of the outer harbor of

Egersund, is located on the E side of Soragapet, about 0.5 mile

N of Synnavikodden.

1.42 Svanesfluene, with depths of 10m and 12m, lies on the E

side of Soragapet, about 0.2 and 0.5 mile offshore and about

0.7 mile NW of the light structure on Svaholmane. Isakbaen,

with a least depth of 4m and marked on its SW side by a buoy,

is located about 0.3 mile offshore and 1.5 miles NNW of the

same light structure.

1.43 Stabsaet (58°24'N., 5°59'E.), a small islet, 10m high,

on the W side of Soragapet, is located about 0.7 mile S of Skarvoy. Jensbaen, a 3m depth, lies about 0.2 mile SSE of Stabsaet.

Jensbohausen, a 20m depth, lies about 183m farther S. 

1.43 Maerra, a rock, awash, about 0.2 mile NE of Stabsaet, is

always marked by breakers. Shoal water extends about 137m S

and E from the rock. Krabbeflu, a 23m depth, is located about

0.3 mile WNW of Stabsaet. 

1.43 Depths of 14.5m and 11.6m lie about 0.3 mile and 0.4 mile

NNE, respectively, from Stabsaet.

1.43 Store Svetlingen, 17m high, and Lille Svetlingen, two islets,

are located about 0.7 mile and 0.8 mile SW of Skarvoy. A

beacon stands on the NE side of Store Svetlingen. Shoal water

extends about 183m S and W from Store Svetlingen. Glana, a

rock, awash, lies about 137m E of the smaller islet.

1.43 Bronnesfluene, situated about 0.3 mile NW of Store
18 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

Svetlingen, is marked at its E end by an iron perch and has a

least depth of 7m over its W part.

1.43 A constant current, which is often very strong, sets S through

Soragapet.

1.43 Navigation is rarely restricted by ice, although sometimes

the portion of Soragapet above Fugleodden freezes over in

winter.

1.43 Anchorage.—Skjevollsvika, indenting the mainland about

0.7 mile NE of Skarvoy, provides sheltered anchorage to small

vessels, in 12.8 to 22m. The approach to Skjevollsvika is made

SE of Tingelset, a 33m high islet on the E side of Soragapet.

Moderate size vessels can anchor about 206m E of Tingelset,

in 40m, sand.

1.43 Rekevika, a bight on the W side of Soragapet, about 0.5 mile

N of Skarvoy, provides anchorage to small vessels with local

knowledge, in 15 to 20m, good holding ground, sand. 

1.43 Vessels entering must pass close to the N shore to avoid the

shoals and rocks extending from the W shore. A 3m shoal lies

in the middle of the entrance.

1.43 Gillestadvika is a small bight on the W side of Soragapet

about 1 mile N of Skarvoy. Small vessels can anchor in the S

part of the bight, in 15 to 20m, sand. Mooring rings are available. Skreddaren, awash and marked by an iron perch, lies

about 0.1 mile NNW of Jektevikodden, the S entrance point. A

concrete quay, located at Jektevikodden, is 60m long with

depths of 8 to 9m alongside.

1.43 Hovlandsvika, a bay on the W side of Soragapet, which is

entered between Fugleodden and a point about 0.3 mile NNW,

is the best of these anchorages. It is the quarantine anchorage

for the port of Egersund. Vessels can anchor here, in 10.1 to

14.6m, good holding ground. 

1.43 Rageskjaerflu, with depths of less than 1.8m and marked by

an iron perch, lies on the shore bank in a position about 0.3

mile NW of Fugleodden. A detached 7.2m depth is located in

the N part of the bay.

1.44 Egersund (58°27'N., 6°00'E.) (World Port Index No.

23490) consists of an inner harbor and an outer harbor that lie

between the mainland and the E side of Eigeroy. The outer

harbor is separated from the inner harbor of Egersund by

Lindoy, an islet which is joined to a peninsula that extends S

from the mainland and forms the NE side of the outer harbor.

This outer harbor, comprising the N part of Soragapet, is protected from the open sea by Eigeroy. The approach channel is

dredged to 13m. 

1.44 A reach, trending NE from Soragapet, forms the sheltered

inner harbor, which is available only to small vessels and is

used primarily by the local fishing fleet. Entrance is made close

S of Lindoy.

1.44 Ice.—The harbor is ice free during normal winters.

1.44 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is insignificant.

1.44 Depths—Limitations.—General depths in the outer harbor

and anchorage area are 6 to 12m. The inner harbor, adjacent to

the town, has depths of 5 to 6m. The depths alongside the

larger quays are 6 to 8m. 

1.44 Harbor facilities are located on both sides of the inner harbor

and close N and S of Lindoy. Steamship Quay, in the outer

harbor close SW of the entrance of the inner harbor, is the

largest and most used of the berthing facilities; it is 288m long,

with a depth of 8m alongside. There is a ro-ro berth for vessels

up to 1,500 dwt, with drafts up to 5.2m.

1.44 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 24m, spans Nysund,

the narrow dredged channel, with a depth of 5.5m, connecting

the N end of the outer harbor with the E end of Nordregapet. 

1.44 Aspect.—Barren hills, with rock outcrops, rise to heights of

more than 122m both N and S of the town; those to the NW are

over 244m high.

1.44 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered

using the Safe Sea Net or alternatively, the Horten Pilot

Booking Center. The pilot boards, as follows:

1. North approach—58°26.9'N, 5°50.9'E. 

2. South approach—58°22.9'N, 5°59.9'E. 

1.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 6 to 12m, in the

outer harbor W of Lindoy. The holding ground of sand and

clay is very good. Vessels in quarantine anchor between

Fuglodden and Svanavagodden, 0.35 mile SE, in depths of 8 to

13m.

Port of Egersund Home Page

http://www.egersund.havn.no

Egersund
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 19

Pub. 182

1.44 Caution.—Several submarine cables lie in the approach to

the port within Soragapet.

1.45 Lundeviken (58°26'N., 5°55'E.) divides Eigeroy into

two parts, which are connected by a narrow neck of low land. It

is conspicuous from the offing, as the land is lofty on both

sides and the inner part is bounded by a low sandy shore. When

approaching Eigeroy with an onshore wind and the weather is

too heavy for pilots to go out, a vessel may safely stand in

between Kjesholme, 19m high, the largest islet in the approach

about 1.5 miles W of Skarvoy, and Fliset, a detached reef on

the W side of the approach, about 1 mile WNW of Kjesholme. 

1.45 There are several rocks and shoals that lie near Kjesholme

and Fliset, but the sea always breaks on them in heavy weather.

Inside Lundeviken, the dangers are near the shore and are

usually marked by breakers.

1.45 Abreast Hodnhammeren, on the W side of the bay about 2

miles NNW of Kjesholme, the depth is 20 to 26m, stony

ground. North from here, the bottom shoals regularly and is

sandy. Temporary anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 11m,

about 0.1 mile NE of Hodnhammeren. This anchorage is somewhat exposed to sea and swell.

1.45 Sprangbukt (58°27'N., 5°56'E.), at the NE end of Lundeviken, is entered between Oksnesodden, a S projecting point

that divides the head of the bay into two coves, and Ellevikholme, about 0.1 mile E. 

1.45 Small vessels can anchor in 10.1m. Southwest winds send in

some swell. There are no dangers within the rocks at the

entrance. When entering, pass W of Ellevikholme, give it a fair

berth, and avoid a 2.7m shoal extending about 183m S from

Oksnesodden.

1.46 Nordregapet (58°27'N., 5°52'E.), the W and secondary approach to the port of Egersund, is entered between Ruskodden, the NW extremity of Eigeroy, and Gulholme, about

0.2 mile NW. Pilot for Nordregapet boards 1.5 miles WSW of

Ruskodden Light (58°26'N., 5°53.4'E.).

Eigeroy Light (58°27'N., 5°52'E.) is located near the S end

of Midbrodoy.

 Gulholme is the southernmost of a group of rocks and islets

that extend about 0.5 mile S from the mainland and NNE of

Midbrodoy. A beacon stands on the NE end of Gulholme.

1.46 Beacons, buoys, perches, and several lights mark the inner

channel reaches. The least depth through the fairway of Nordregapet is 5.5m and is found in the dredged channel across the

bar close N of Grundsundholmen.

1.46 Seilsteinen, the outermost of a group of above-water rocks,

is located about 0.3 mile SW of Ruskodden. This lofty,

perpendicular rock resembles a sail. A whitewashed patch on it

is visible for about 2 miles. A beacon stands on the W side of

the rock. Several shoals, best seen on the chart, lie off of Seilsteinen.

1.46 Tryet, an above-water rock marked by an iron perch, lies in

the fairway about 0.25 mile WSW of Ruskodden. Shoal water

extends about 91m NNE from the rock; several below-water

rocks lie between it and Eigeroy.

1.46 Svartholme is a small islet on the N side of the fairway about

137m NW of Gulholme. A 5.5m depth lies between the two

islets; shoal water extends about 91m SE and NE from the

latter.

1.46 Sundsgapholme, the NW and largest of the islets on the N

side of Nordregapet’s main entrance, lies with its W extremity

about 0.5 mile NW of Gulholme. Horsholme is the E islet. A

bar extends between the N side of Horsholme and the

mainland. This bar limits vessels that can enter through the N

channel, which leads E between the mainland and the N sides

of Sundsgapholme and Horsholme, to drafts of less than 4m.

1.46 Lusaskjaer, marked by an iron perch, is located within the

sound on the W side of the fairway, in a position about 91m E

of Horsholme.

1.46 The usual and best entrance into Nordregapet is made

between Tryet and Gulholme. The channel between Tryet and

Gulholme cannot be made out until the vessel is close to Tryet. 

1.46 After passing SE of Gulholme, course can be set for the

anchorage area E of Horsholme or for the buoys marking the

dredged channel N of Grundsundholmen.

1.46 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of

12m, between Horsholme and Grundsundholmen. Anchorage

can be taken, in a depth of 12m, in the N channel NE of Sundsgapholme, but vessels with drafts exceeding 4m must approach

this latter anchorage from the W. 

1.47 Dyroy (58°28'N., 5°52'E.) lies close offshore. Rocks

and shoals encumber the narrow passage between the mainland

and this small islet.

1.47 Svartskjaer is the outermost of several above and belowwater rocks lying on the S side of the N approach to Nordregapet and up to 0.25 mile SW of Sundsgapholme. 

1.47 Karpusskjaer, with a depth of less than 1.8m, is on the N side

of the approach close W of an islet that lies about 183m S of

the SW extremity of Dyroy. Raudskjaer, with a depth of less

than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch, lies about 183m W of

Eigeroy Light
20 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 

Pub. 182

the S extremity of Dyroy. 

1.47 Dyroyflu, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an

iron perch, lies about 137m SSE of Karpusskjaer.

1.47 A shallow inlet indents the mainland N of Dyroy for about

0.5 mile, then extends about 0.7 mile E. Its much encumbered

approach lies between Karpusskjaer and numerous dangers N

of it, on the E, and Skjerpingerne, a chain of islets and rocks

that extends about 0.6 mile SSW from the mainland, on the W. 

1.47 Oyafluene, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an

iron perch, lie nearly midway between Karpusskjaer and Skjerpingerne. The town of Hellvik stands on the N shore of the

inlet. Several concrete quays are located near Hellvik, with

depths alongside up to 8m. Two lighted ranges and other navigational aids mark the entrance channel, which has been

dredged to 6m. Entrance should not be attempted without local

knowledge. 

1.48 Skraedderen (58°28'N., 5°51'E.), a 5.5m depth, lies

at the S end of Skjerpingerne. Lillegrunn, a detached 16m

depth, lies about 0.7 mile offshore and about 0.7 mile W of

Skraedderen. Mastefluene has several 12 to 18m depths that lie

close to the SW end of Skjerpingerne.

1.48 Laedersholme (58°29'N., 5°50'E.) lies close off a small

peninsula projecting S from the coast, on the E side of the S

approach to Vatnemoholmene. Storflu, a 7m depth about 0.5

mile SSW of Laedersholme, is the outermost of numerous dangers extending S from the islet. 

1.48 Vatnemoflu, a 4m shoal, lies closest to the approach range

line in a position about 0.1 mile NNE of Storflu. Hellarne is

two rocky heads about 183m apart, of which the NW is awash

and the SE is marked by an iron perch, located about 0.2 mile

NE of Storflu. 

1.49 Vatnemoholmene (58°29'N., 5°49'E.), a small

harbor, is formed between the E side of a small coastal

projection and some close lying islets. 

1.49 There are two entrances; the S entrance has a depth of 10.1m

while the W entrance has a depth of 5.9m. Northwest and SW

winds send in a considerable swell. Mooring rings are available

and must be used. Entrance into Vatnemoholmene should not

be attempted without local knowledge. The S, or preferred,

channel is marked by two pairs of range lights.

1.49 Hellesundfluene, with a depth of 4.8m, is located about 0.6

mile W of Vatnemoholmene.

1.49 Ognabukti (58°31'N., 5°45'E.), an open bay, recedes NE for

about 1 mile and has general depths of from 11 to 22m.

1.49 Sirevag (58°30'N., 5°48'E.) is a small fishing harbor on the

E side of Ognabukti. It affords anchorage with mooring rings,

in depths from 6 to 8m, within a short mole which projects

from the N shore. Quays on the N shore have a total length of

300m, with depths from 3 to 5m alongside. There is a new jetty

on the S side of the harbor.

1.49 Vagsgabgrunn, with a depth of 3.5m, lies close W of the

Sirevag entrance. The inlet can be entered either S or N of this

shoal, but local knowledge is required.

1.49 After entering Lundeviken, the vessel may either hove to

when the water becomes smoother, to await a pilot, or stand

farther in, keeping about 0.2 mile from the W shore. 

Ognabukti to Jaerens Rev

1.50 From Ognabukti, the coast trends quite regularly

NNW for nearly 15 miles to Jaerens Rev, the westernmost

extension of the mainland in the S approach to Stavanger. A

few small coastal indentations provide limited shelter to small

craft, but there are no harbors. 

1.50 Between Jaerens Rev and Lyratangen, a mainland projection

located abreast Feistein 4.5 miles NNE, the coast recedes about

0.7 mile E, forming Honsviki.

1.50 At Ognabukti, the mountainous coast begins to drop toward

the sea; immediately to the N is the low land of Jaeren. This

part of the coast is so low that when approaching it from the

offing, the houses appear to rise straight from the sea. About 4

or 5 miles inland, a range of hills, presenting, however, no very

conspicuous landmarks, rises from the plain. 

1.50 The beach between Ognabukti and Lyratangen, and about 2

miles farther N to Vigdelneset, is composed of white sand and

is backed by sand dunes.

1.50 Jaeren is one of the most unusual tracts of land in Norway.

Its surface is undulating and occasionally rises into low hillocks. Bogs dotted with peat stacks are varied by heathercovered tracts and luxuriant meadows and farm lands. Here

and there at rare intervals are small groups of trees; the whole

plain is intersected by a network of stone walls.

1.50 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current off Jaerens Rev is

irregular and much affected by the wind, which may be N for

long periods in early summer. In fine, calm weather the tidal

current usually sets N with the rising tide and S with the falling

tide. The currents attain velocities of 1 knot to 2 knots and

always set strongest to the N. 

1.51 The coast between Ognabukti and Obrestad, about

8.25 miles NNW, is relatively steep-to. 

Regulations.—Traffic is controlled by Kvitsoy Vessel

Traffic Service (Kvitsoy VTS) from Kvitsoya (59°04'N.,

5°25'E.). For further information, see paragraph 2.5.

1.51 Horr Farm (58°33'N., 5°40'E.) is a conspicuous landmark.

Its buildings stand higher than any structures in the vicinity and

appear from a distance to be built on a point. A church, located

about 2 miles N of Horr Farm and 1 mile inland, is white and

has a low tower and spire. Obrestad Light is exhibited from a

granite house and is 16m high. Obrestadbrekra (58°40'N.,

5°33'E.), from which a light is shown, is the highest point on

the Jaeren coast.

1.51 Jaerens Rev (58°45'N., 5°30'E.), a low point, is the W extremity of Jaeren. The coast at the point is a strip of land from

0.2 to 0.6 mile wide. 

1.51 A reef extends about 0.2 mile SW from Jaerens Rev. A

lighted buoy marks the W side of the reef extending W from

Jaerens Rev.

1.52 Honsviki, between Jaerens Rev and Lyratangen, 4.5

miles NNE, is open W and clear of dangers. General depths in

the bay are 9.1 to 18.3m. 

1.52 Skotamedgrunn (58°48'N., 5°26'E.) is located between 3

miles and 3.5 miles NW of Jaerens Rev. The dangerous area

extends approximately 2 miles around the shoals in a SW-NW

direction. The depths vary from about 40m in its W part to

about 16m in its E part. Waves from SW to NW create rough
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 21

Pub. 182

sea in the area. 

1.52 During N weather, a refraction center will emerge on the

shallow areas and, combined with a W current of 1 to 1.5

knots, the conditions will become even worse. Breaking surfs

have been observed in the area.

1.52 Tangerhaug, a 28m high hillock, lies close SE of Lyratangen

and is marked by a wooden beacon. 

1.52 A radio mast, 152m high, stands 2.25 miles NE of Jaerens

Rev. Obstruction lights are shown from the mast.
Pub. 182

2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
25

Pub. 182

SECTOR 2 

NORWAY—FEISTEIN TO GEITUNGANE

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway

between Feistein and Geitungane. Described in sequence are

the approaches to Stavanger, the port of Stavanger, and the

fjords lying S, E, and N of the port area, those branching from

Skudenesfjorden, those in the vicinity of Stavanger, and then,

those in the outer areas of Skudenesfjorden. 

General Remarks

2.1 Winds—Weather.—The changes in pressure resulting from the change in seasons on the W and S coasts of

Norway affect the prevailing winds in this sector. The shift in

pressure over S Norway from high pressure in winter to low

pressure in summer, results in the wind shifting from S in

winter to N in summer. The prevalence of winds from any one

direction is not in evidence more than 40 per cent of the time.

The usual situation is one of winds induced by a passing

cyclone with shifting directions and velocities. Within the

fjords and along the very indented coastline, the wind is usually widely different from that in the open sea, owing to land

and sea breezes and topographical effects.

Because of the mountainous nature of the coast any wind

blowing from a direction between S and WSW, is deflected to

blow as a S wind on the coast, and any wind blowing between

NW and N is deflected to blow as a N wind. The winds in W

Norway therefore have a tendency to blow across the mouth of

the fjords. The speed of the wind also increases outward from

the coast to a distance of as much as 150 miles.

2.1 There is a lot of turbulence along the Norwegian coast when

winds are fresh or strong, due to the broken country. Gales

occur frequently over this area when deep depressions are

moving N between the British Isles and Iceland, under which

condition a very steep gradient is apt to develop all along the W

seaboard of Norway, producing strong S winds. This very steep

gradient at times extends 100 to 150 miles out to sea from the

coast. 

2.1 Under these conditions the coast is swept by violent winds

which penetrate into the more sheltered fjords with great turbulence, though with reduced velocity. Spells of NW gales

occur on the W coast when a suitable gradient is established by

pressure falling over Scandinavia. Such gales are apt to persist

but the gradient on some occasions falls off suddenly to the E

of the Shetland Islands.

2.1 In winter, gales and storms are common on both the S and W

coasts of Norway. In spring they are more common on the W

and SW coasts than the S coast. These gales decrease in

frequency as the season progresses. The strength of the winds

decreases markedly in summer though gales are by no means

unknown, particularly on the W coast of Norway. North gales

as well as W are reported on the W coast. Sea breezes are

frequent along the entire coast in the summer season. Wind

speeds increase slightly in autumn, especially along exposed

coasts, and gales become more frequent.

2.1 On the W coast, thunderstorms occur on two or three days a

month near the heads of deep fjords in summer, but only about

once a month near the open sea. They occur occasionally in

winter during gales between SW and NW. In winter heavy SW

and W gales are often accompanied by thunder and lightning.

2.1 Fog is the chief cause of poor visibility. It varies widely with

the location of stations; that is, whether they are dominated by

land or by sea. Over the sea, fog is most frequent in summer.

The upper fjords and land stations show distinct winter

maximum. Sea fog occurs occasionally in winter when cold air

moves over the warm waters, or when the air is warmer than

the water. The most frequent fogs in winter are the radiation

type land fogs. They may be expected at the heads of deep

fjords when there is severe frost inland and cold wind blows

down on the open fjords. One form of fog, which affects particularly the upper reaches of the fjords, is “frost smoke.” This

occurs during a spell of severe frost, and may be expected by

an approaching ship if the wind is light and from an offshore

direction and skies are clear or nearly so over the land. It is

caused by the water being warmer than the overlying air.

2.1 In spring, fog decreases generally as radiation land fog become less likely under gradual warming of the land. It increase

only at Skudenes. Poor visibility is least common in summer

over the land area of this region 

2.1 Sea fogs are not uncommon along and over the coasts, particularly in the early months of the season. In autumn fog increases at those stations exposed to continental influences in

which radiation fog develops. 

2.1 In general, autumn is the season when fog is least common

on the coast, though inland the frequency is increasing toward

the winter maximum.

2.1 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the North Sea are always semidiurnal, with very little diurnal inequality between the two

HWs or the two LWs of each tidal day.

2.1 The tide progresses into the North Sea from the Atlantic

Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the

North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal

point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and

W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the

6th meridian.

2.1 Along the W coast of Norway the progression is N to about

60°N; N of this the progression is E.

2.1 Along the west coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually

increase toward the N.

2.1 Tidal current off this section of coast is subject to great variations. A tidal current setting W and N is, however, prevalent,

especially in summer, but with continuous N and W wind it

may set S and E for a week continuously. Near the coast the

direction of the current may be toward the land. 

2.1 Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of

winds on the tide levels is small. This is probably due to the

scattering effect of offshore islands and the relatively deep

water close inshore. North from Jaeren to the vicinity of Korsfjorden, the current just offshore floods to the N, beginning 

2.1 about 5 to 6 hours after HW at Bergen and ebbs to the S,
26 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

beginning about 30 minutes to 1 hour before HW at Bergen.

From the vicinity of Korsfjorden to approximately 60°10'N,

the flood begins about 6 hours after HW at Bergen and set to

the E; the ebb begins about the time of HW at Bergen and set to

the W. 

2.1 Surface currents in the fjords are predominantly tidal, setting

inward on the flood and seaward on the ebb, except during

May and June. During these months increased runoff from

melting snow and ice causes the surface currents to flow almost

continually seaward. The depth of the surface current averages

3.5 to 5.5m. Though they may vary from 0.9 to 18m. 

2.1 Current speeds are strongest at the surface, decreasing with

depth. An intermediate current sets into the fjord usually between 9.4m and 18.3m. Generally, the water below 40 fathoms

either has a very weak seaward set or is stagnant, and is

renewed only by major meteorological disturbance.

2.1 Wind may alter the tidal currents in the fjords. Onshore

winds may cause a rise in the level with a corresponding increase in the velocity and duration of incoming currents. When

the wind ceases, current flows in the opposite direction until

equilibrium is established. Outflowing currents along the sides

of the fjord may occur when strong winds blow onshore for

prolonged periods. Offshore winds may have an opposite effect

on the water level and currents. 

2.1 Off the coast and in the fjords between Lindesnes and

Jaerens Rev the tidal currents are inappreciable. Small currents

may be found in the narrow channel of the fjords, as in Skudenesfjorden but little is know about them.

2.1 Aspect.—Skudenesfjorden is the principal approach to

Stavanger and is entered S of Geitungane. Within the entrance,

and near Stavanger, are hundreds of islands and islets forming

numerous sounds, channels, and inlets. The mainland S, E, and

N of the island area is penetrated by a complex system of navigable fjords and smaller inlets.

2.1 Most of the water area between Feistein and Geitungane is

encumbered with low, rocky islands and islets and numerous

dangers, through which there are several channels leading N

toward the inner approaches to Stavanger. Skudenesfjorden is

entered between Geitungane and Kvitsoy. The best approach to

Stavanger is through Skudenesfjorden, then SE through the

length of Kvitsoyfjorden and Byfjorden.

2.1 From Vigdelneset about 3 miles NE of Feistein, the Stavanger peninsula extends N for about 10 miles to Tungeneset.

The important port of Stavanger is situated on the E side of the

peninsula. Several bays indent the W side of the Stavanger

peninsula, and Hafrsfjorden, with a narrow, shallow entrance,

occupies the middle part. A submarine pipeline is laid across

the fjord, SE of the bridge; a few lakes are in the N part, as

shown on the chart. Most of the land is low and cultivated.

There are several small stretches of sandy beach, especially on

the W side. East of Gandafjorden, the country is high moorland, descending abruptly to the rocky shores of Hogsfjorden.

Many low rocky islands, the largest of which is Hundvag, lie

off Stavanger.

2.1 Sheltered anchorages are found in the bays and inlets of the

Stavanger peninsula, among some of the islands between the

peninsula, and in coves on the S side of Karmoya, in the

vicinity of Skudenshavn. 

2.1 Off the Skudenesfjorden entrance, the tidal current usually

sets N. Near the land, on both sides of the entrance, the current

usually sets E with a rising tide and W with an ebbtide. The

inward set begins about 5 hours 15 minutes after HW at

Bergen; the outward set begins about 1 hour before HW at

Bergen.

2.1 Caution.—Crawford Oil Field (59°07'N., 1°30'E.) is situated about 115 miles W of Geitungane and consists of a production platform and a tanker mooring buoy. Balder Oil Field

lies 27 miles ENE of Crawford Oil Field.

2.1 For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sector 3. For oil

and gas fields S of the above, see Sector 1. 

2.1 Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS).—IMO-adopted traffic

separation schemes exist 12 miles SW of Feistein Light, where

COLREGS 72 applies.

Approaches to Stravanger

2.2 Hasteinfjorden (59°00'N., 5°30'E.) is the best approach to Stavanger from the S. It is entered between the

Hastein group, in the E, and the S islets of the Kvitsoya group,

towards the NNW. This passage leads NE for about 7 miles to

the hilly and comparatively steep islet of Alstein, in the vicinity

of Bragen, off Tungenset, and joins the S part of Kvitsyafjorden, where it joins with the N part of Byfjorden. 

2.2 Bragen, an above-water rock about 0.5 mile NNW of Tungenset, is marked by a light equipped with a racon.

2.2 Tungeneset (59°02'N., 5°35'E.) is the N end of the Stavanger

peninsula. Shoals fringe the NW and N sides of the point and

are within the 10m curve, which lies offshore in this vicinity.

2.2 Vestra Imsen (59°01'N., 5°22'E.), the SW islet of the

Kvitsoya group, contains a light, which marks the entrance to

Hassteinfjorden. 

2.2 Hastein (58°57'N., 5°26'E.), 45m high, is the largest of a

group of islets and rocks NW of the island of Rott. Lille Revingen and Storee Revingen lie S of Hastein.

Tungeneset Light
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 27

Pub. 182

2.3 Feistein (58°50'N., 5°30'E.), an islet, lies approximately 12 miles S of Hasteinfjorden. In the S approach to

Stavanger, it lies about 4 miles N of Jaerens Rev Beacon.

Numerous detached shoals and rocks, best seen on the chart, lie

near Feistein.

2.3 Feistein Light is exhibited from a red metal tower, 25m high,

with two white bands, situated on the E side of Feistein. A

racon is located at the light.

2.3 Hengsoy (58°53'N., 5°26'E.) lies about 4 miles NW of

Feistein. A beacon stands on the island.

2.3 Solaviki (58°53'N., 5°34'E.) is a small bay indenting the W

side of the Stavanger peninsula. Depths in the middle of the

bay are 9.1 to 18.7m. Kolnesholmene is a group of islets, best

seen on the chart, lying in the entrance of Solaviki.

2.3 An airport runway points W into Solaviki Bay. Mariners are

advised of low-flying aircraft in this vicinity.

2.4 Risavika (58°56'N., 5°35'E.) (World Port Index No.

23487) and the surrounding sea entrances are included in

Stavanger Port District. Risavika is a public port mainly operated by private companies. It functions as an oil related base

area with services that supply the oil fields of the North Sea.

Risavika is a major oil terminal as well, and can accommodate

large tankers. The harbor is entered between Laksholmbaen

(58°55.7'N., 5°34.3'E.) and Tangen, about 0.2 mile NE. A

breakwater joins Tangen, and runs SE to Melingsholmen. The

small harbor formed is called Tananger. On the N side of the

inlet, numerous quays and facilities are located at a fitting-out

and supply base for oil operations in the North Sea. It is

reported (2009) that works are in progress about 0.3 mile E of

the existing T-head pier on the S entrance to Tananger.

2.4 Tides—Currents.—The HW interval at Tananger is 9 hours

36 minutes. The mean range of tide is 0.4m; the spring range of

tide is 0.5m.

2.4 Depths—Limitations.—The Sola Refinery is located on the

SW side of Risavika Inlet. The berth at the refinery consists of

a T-head jetty, with a depth of 16.8m alongside. Tankers up to

about 240,000 dwt, 335m in length, and 15.8m draft can be accommodated. There are LPG loading facilities at the refinery

jetty.

2.4 There is another tanker berth at the Tananger Jetty located on

the NE side of the inlet. It has a depth of 11.6m alongside.

2.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 50 grt.

Feistein Light

Feistein Light

Port of Risavika Home Page

http://www.risavika.no
28 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

The pilot station can be contacted by VHF radio and by telephone. Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea Net, or

alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. 

2.4 Regulations.—Tankers over 40,000 dwt, when navigating

within territorial waters near Risavika, are to exhibit three red

vertical lights at night, or display a large black cylinder by day,

to indicate that other vessels must not impede their safe

navigation.

2.4 Anchorage.—Risavika provides a good anchorage over a

sand and clay bottom. Strong NW winds send in a considerable

swell. While anchoring, vessels must take care not to interfere

with the vessels mooring at the oil refinery in the SW part of

the bay. Anchorage can be taken in Tananger, in 6.9 to 9.1m,

sand and clay. There are mooring buoys and mooring rings.

2.4 Caution.—Two submarine cables are laid across the entrance to Risavika. When the entrance of Risavika is obstructed

by the hawsers of ships maneuvering off the oil facility, red

flashing lights will be shown either on Melingsholme or on the

facility. Lights indicate which side of the channel is obstructed.

It has been reported (2008) works are in progress S of Risavika. 

2.5 Skudenesfjorden (59°05'N., 5°15'E.), a deep clear

opening, forms the principal outer and easiest approach to

Stavanger. The entrance to the fjord lies between Geitungane;

two close lying islets off the S end of Karmoya, and the NW

side of Kvitsoy; about 6 miles SE of Geitungane. Skudenesfjorden can be easily entered by day or night. Geitungane Light

is on the S islet. 

2.5 When nearing the land, the fjord entrance will be very conspicuous. Cone-shaped mountains on Vestre Bokn and the light

structure on Kvitsoya are prominent. A radio tower, marked by

obstruction lights, stands on Vestre Bokn.

2.5 Tides—Currents.—There appear to be no perceptible tidal

currents setting N or S across the entrance of Skudenesfjorden,

but inside the fjord, weak tidal currents set inward and outward

near the land. Off the fjord entrance, the tidal current usually

sets N, but the wind has much to do with its velocity. Near the

land on both sides of the entrance, this current usually sets

inward during a rising tide and outward during a falling tide.

Near the S end of Karmoya, a strong current sets E and into

Karmsundet during rising W winds.

2.5 Pilotage.—Karmoy pilot station provides pilotage for

vessels exceeding 30,000 gross tons and classified to carry

hazardous or polluting cargo. Pilotage should be ordered using

the Safe Sea Net, or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking

Center. The pilot will board, weather permitting, and only with

prior permission of the pilot station, in Skudenesfjorden Vest

(Boarding Position No. 1) in position 59°02.0'N, 5°10.0'E.

Otherwise, the pilot will board in one of the following

positions: 

1. Skudenesfjorden (Boarding Position No. 2)—position

59°06.7'N, 5°26.2'E.

2. Karmsundet (Boarding Position No. 3)—position

59°13.1'N, 5°21.0'E.

3. Feistein (Boarding Position No. 4)—position

58°50.5'N, 5°27.9'E.

2.5 Regulations.—Vessels engaged in fishing within the area

covered by Kvitsoy VTS are required to maintain a continuous

listening watch and also to answer calls.

2.5 Under conditions where two or more vessels are meeting or

passing one another within a distance of 0.5 mile in the VTS

area, they are required to contact one another on VHF. Each

must assure the other of the intent to a safe procedural action

and agree to yield.

2.5 Vessel Traffic Service.—Traffic is controlled by Kvitsoy

(Kvitsoya) Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) for the area bound by

the following positions: 

a. 58°45'00.0''N, 5°29'36.0''E. (Jaerens Rev)

b. 58°45'00.0''N, 5°21'36.0''E.

c. 58°58'54.0''N, 5°14'54.0''E.

d. 59°05'36.0''N, 5°05'24.0''E.

e. 59°14'18.0''N, 4°43'42.0''E.

f. 59°17'18.0''N, 4°42'48.0''E.

g. 59°19'36.0''N, 4°43'48.0''E.

h. 59°34'30.0''N, 4°53'36.0''E. 

i. 59°34'30.0''N, 5°11'05.4''E.(Bomlahuk) 

j. 59°32'57.0''N, 5°14'23.4''E.(Haskru Light) 

2.5 Participation in the VTS is mandatory for the following: 

1. Vessels of 24m in length and above, including towing

and pushing vessels.

2. Vessels engaged in towing operations where the total

length is greater than 35m.

3. Vessels of all length carrying dangerous and/or

polluting liquid cargo in bulk. 

2.5 Vessels must obtain permission to enter the VTS by contacting the VTS Center by VHF (or by facsimile or telephone if

VHF contact is not possible), as follows: 

1. Vessels carrying hazardous liquid and/or polluting

cargo in bulk—6 hours prior to entering the VTS area.

2. Vessels requesting special measures (such as large

tows)—24 hours prior to entering the VTS area.

3. All other vessels—1 hour prior to entering the VTS

area. 

2.5 The following information should be given: 

1. Vessel name and call sign.

2. Position.

3. Planned route and ports of call.

4. ETA at the outer border of the VTS area and the ETA

at the harbor, mooring facility, or berth.

5. ETD from the VTS area, if the vessel is located within

the VTS area.

2.5 Other information, such as vessel type, nationality, and port

of registration may be requested by the VTS Center. 

2.5 After obtaining permission to enter the VTS area, the vessel

must contact the VTS center, as follows: 

1. When crossing the outer border of the VTS area

(Inbound).

2. When passing position 59°00'08.4''N, 5°40'22.2''E

(Dusavika) (Inbound/Outbound).

3. When passing position 58°58'33.0''N, 5°43'37.8''E

(Stavanger) (Inbound/Outbound).

4. Before moving within the VTS area (leaving the

wharf, berth, or mooring facility).

5. When being towed or anchored.

6. When involved in an accident.

7. Immediately if the vessel is in difficulty and likely to

result in a change of voyage plan.

2.5 In certain cases, permission will have to be renewed from the

VTS Center when passing through specific areas. For further
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 29

Pub. 182

information contact Kvitsoy VTS. 

2.5 Vessels of less than 100m loa do not need to obtain

permission from the VTS when only using the fairway E of a

line joining Toftoy Light and Dusaviga Light. 

2.5 All vessels using the main fairway to/from Sauda should

obtain permission from the VTS on VHF channel 19 when

passing a line between Vardnes Light and Jelsahunden Light.

2.5 Contact Information.—The pilot station can be contacted,

as follows: 

1. VHF: channel 13

2. Telephone: 47-51-735397

47-51-735398

3. Facsimile: 47-51-735391

4. E-mail: pilot.kvitsoy@kystverket.no

2.5 Vessels should maintain a continuous listening watch on the

appropriate VHF working channel for the area. 

2.5 The VTS Center can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Telephone: 41-71-736030

2. Facsimile: 41-71-736031

3. VHF: VHF channel 16, except in the following areas, when VHF channel 19 is used:

a. When N of 59°12.0'N and W of 5°21.5'E.

b. When N of 59°20.0'N and E of 5°58.0'E.

c. VHF channel 18 is used in the remainder of the

VTS area. 

2.6 Kvitsoya (59°04'N., 5°25'E.), the largest of a group of

islands and islets, marks the E entrance of the approach to

Stavenger via Skudenesfjorden. The land of Kvitsoya is low

and relatively inconspicuous from offshore. Lights are shown

from some of the islands and islets; buoys and perches mark

the intricate channels leading to some of the anchorages. 

2.6 A number of sheltered anchorages are indicated among the

islands and islets, but entry should not be attempted without

local knowledge. Some of the islands are connected by causeways.

2.6 Settlement on the islands is concentrated at Ytstabohamn

and Leiasundet. Ytstabohamn is located on the S side of Kvitsoya and Leiasundet is located on the W side of Kviting. Kvitsoya Light, 27m high, standing on the SW side of Kvitsoya, is

conspicuous.

2.6 Kvitsoya radio station is located on Krakoy, about 0.5 mile E

of Kvitsoya; the radio masts are conspicuous and stand up to

125m high. There are numerous radio masts on this island. A

group of four masts stands at the N end.

2.6 Caution.—Due to a strong electromagnetic field around the

masts, navigation, and communication equipment in the vicinity may be disturbed. Vessels passing close to Kvitsoya

Broadcasting Station (59°04'N., 5°24'E.) may experience

electronic interference due to the station electromagnetic

fields.

2.7 Jarsteinen (59°09'N., 5°11'E.) is a small island about

0.5 mile off the SW end of Karmoya. Svelgjeskjaer, an abovewater rock, is located about 0.2 mile S of Jarsteinen. 

Kvitsoy VTS Center
30 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

2.7 Geitungane (59°08'N., 5°15'E.) are two islets that lie close S

of Karmoya. A light is shown from a tower, 11m high, standing on the S islet. A racon is located at the light tower.

2.7 Kryssgrunn, a 9.1m depth, lies about 0.5 mile ESE of the S

islet. An overhead cable, with a clearance of 20m, spans the

channel between the N islet and Karmoya.

Skudeneshavn (59°09'N., 5°16'E.) (World Port Index No.

23485) is fronted on its S side by Vikeholmen, Bakareholmen,

Steiningsholmen, and several smaller islets and rocks. Three

small moles also enclose the harbor. Skudeneshavn is a

sheltered harbor used by ferry and coastal vessels up to 5,000

dwt. 

2.7 Nesagapet, the E and principal entrance of Skudeneshavn, is

between Vikeholmen and the S coast of Karmoya. A light is

shown from the head of a small mole on the N side of Nesagapet. This entrance has a least charted depth in the fairway of

6.2m. 

2.7 Care must be taken to pass S of a 5.3m depth which lies in

the narrowest part of the sound. There are several rocks in the

harbor, some of which are marked by iron posts. Navigation is

not affected by ice.

2.8 Austbaen (59°08'N., 5°17'E.), the outermost danger

in the approach to Skudeneshavn, lies about 1 mile ESE of

Geitungane. Sondreflu is a 4.6m depth about 183m W of Austbaen.

The S coast of Vestre Bokn, towards the NE, on the N shore

of the Skudenesfjorden, E of Karmoya, is formed by Drivsund

(59°10'N., 5°25'E.), an islet and shoal-encumbered bay; the S

ends of the two parts of Vestre Bokn form the W and E shores

of this bay. Vestre Bokn is in two parts; its SW and smaller part

is separated from the main portion by Sundalands-straumen, a

very narrow sound extending NW from the head of Drivsund.

Drivsund has several anchorages for small vessels, but local

knowledge is required.

2.8 Arsgrunn (59°08'N., 5°26'E.), with a least depth of 3.2m

and marked on its SW end by a buoy, is located about 1 mile

SSW of the SE extremity of Vestre Bokn.

2.8 Kraka (59°09'N., 5°25'E.) is an above-water rock and

Skolleflu, 0.5 mile ENE, is a 3m shoal marked by a buoy. 

2.8 Fjoloy and Mosteroya (59°05'N., 5°38'E.), with some islets

between and near them, form the NE side of Kvitsoyfjorden.

The islets and dangers on the NE side of Kvitsoyfjorden, between Alstein and Sveinane, together with those near Tungeneset, form the SW side of the fjord.

2.8 Mosteroy, the SE part of which is called Aske, is nearly

joined at its NW end to Klosteroy and is separated from Fjoloy

by Klosterhamn, a sheltered harbor for small vessels with local

knowledge.

2.8 Isgrunn, a 6.9m depth, lies about 0.5 mile off the SW side of

Mosteroya, in a position about 1 mile SSE of Ejoloy. Langeflu,

a 12.8m depth, lies about 0.25 mile NE of Isgrunn.

2.9 Dysjalandsvag (59°05'N., 5°40'E.), between the SE

end of Mosteroy and Aske, affords secure anchorage, in 12.8 to

18.3m. Local knowledge is required.

2.9 Gryda Light (59°03'N., 5°37'E.) stands on a rock, lies awash

on the NE side of the junction of Kvitsoyfjorden and Byfjorden. It is located about 0.5 mile off the NW side of the island of

Bru and nearly 1.25 miles NE of Tungeneset. A 12.8m patch is

located about 0.1 mile NW of Gryda.

2.9 Nordgrunn is a 6.9m depth lying about 1 mile NW of Gryta.

Kolsboane, about 0.5 mile NNW of Gryta, is two rocks; the

SW rock is awash and marked by an iron beacon. while the NE

rock, with a depth of 1.5m, is marked by an iron perch.

2.9 Byfjorden is the inner part of the approach to Stavanger. It is

entered from Kvitsoyfjorden between Gryta and Bragen. The

island of Bru, on the NE side of the fjord, is comparatively

steep. The W slope of the high land descends almost perpendicularly to the fjord. Brufjell, on the SW side of Bru, rises to a

height of 86m close inland.

2.9 Brukjeoy (59°02'N., 5°40'E.) is on the NE side of Byfjorden

at its junction with Amoyfjorden. The islet lies about 0.5 mile

SE of Bru; close W of it is the smaller Persholmen, from which

a light is shown. Shoals, fringing the E end of Brukjeoy, extend

about 0.1 mile offshore and are marked by a buoy.

2.9 Flataskjaer is an above-water rock about 183m W of Persholmen. An iron perch, about 183m NW of Flataskjaer, marks

the outer end of a reef extending from the rock. Sore Raunegrunn, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies about 0.2

mile N of Flataskjaer.

2.9 Randabergviga (59°02'N., 5°37'E.) is a small bight about 1

mile SE of Tungeneset. Good anchorage can be taken here, in

12.8m, sand and mud.

2.10 Dusavik (59°00'N., 5°40'E.), located on the W side of

Amoyfjorden, provides a protected anchorage, in 22m, gravel

bottom. A large installation, with deep-water facilities for

servicing oil rigs, is located in Dusavik.

2.10 Byfjorden extends in a SE direction, where it meets Amoyfjorden. A chain of small islets and dangers, which are scatKvitsoya Light
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 31

Pub. 182

tered across the E end of Amoyfjorden, separates this basin

from the NW end of Horgefjorden. General depths through the

middle of Amoyfjorden are 64m to 101m.

2.10 A 10.1m depth and an 8.2m depth are located about 0.5 mile

NW and nearly 1 mile NNW, respectively, of the NE extremity

of Hundvag. Dangers elsewhere are those extending across the

E end of the fjord or lying within 0.2 mile offshore.

2.10 A light is shown from the largest and W of Klovingane, a

group of four small islets in the E end of Amoyfjorden. A

beacon stands on the largest islet. Buoys and perches mark a

few of the dangers lying between Klovingane and the S side of

Amoy.

2.10 Vessels proceeding through Amoyfjorden to Horgefjorden

should pass N of Storholmen, in a depth of 24m, staying in

mid-channel, with the S extremity of Hille Kjeoy (59°02'N.,

5°48'E.) bearing 075°.

The approach to Stavanger or to Sandnes, at the head of

Gandafjorden, can be made from Horgefjorden through Lindoysund, the passage between Vassoy and Lindoy, or from

Hogsfjorden through the passage between Kalvoy and Uskjo.

2.10 Revingen (59°00'N., 5°49'E.), which is marked by a lighted

beacon, lies in the N part of Lindoysund, about 0.2 mile N of

Lindoy. Shoal water extends about 91m N and S from this

rock. Revingsgrunn is an 11.9m depth in the SW part of

Horgefjorden, about 0.5 mile NNE of Revingen.

2.10 Tunsoy (58°59'N., 5°49'E.) is close SE of Lindoy; between

them is Lindoygrunn, which is marked by an iron perch. 

Stavanger (58°59'N., 5°45'E.)

World Port Index No. 23480

2.11 Stavanger was founded around the beginning of the

ninth century, and is one of Norway’s oldest cities. Noted for

shipbuilding and fishing for many years, it is now the main

support base for the oil and gas industry in the North Sea area

close to S Norway. 

2.11 Winds—Weather.—Gales are fairly frequent in winter and

are usually from the SE. Northwest gales make loading and

unloading difficult at most of the main quays. Prevailing winds

in the summer are SW and W; in winter they are E and NE. The

climate is mild, and there is frequent precipitation throughout

the year. Stavanger is an ice-free port.

2.11 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are slight. During NW

gales, the water may rise to the decks on some piers. Normal

tidal range is 0.6m.

2.11 Depths—Limitations.—General depths in the fairway between the entrance of Stavanger at Ulsneset and the entrance of

Vagen are 23m to 50m. There is a deep water quay at Sandviga, with depths of 13m to 15m alongside. 

2.11 Aspect.—The principal part of the city faces a bay on the N

side of a small promontory which extends E from the main

peninsula. The port area now has a total quayage length of

approximately 5,000m and is divided into many separate terminals, spread across a large area, from the industry port of Mekjavik to the fish and animal feed silos at Felleskjopet. The

principal deep-water quays line the shores of Vagen

(58°58.3'N., 5°44.0'E.), an indentation on the N side, near the

Approaches to Stavanger Fjord 

Dusavik Light 

Port of Stavanger Home Page

http://www.stavanger-havn.no
32 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

city. Numerous small shoals and rocky patches are scattered

among the islands and islets which form the NE side of the

harbor.

2.11 There are facilities for ro-ro, container, bulk, general cargo,

passenger, and cruise vessels. A vessel of 70,202 grt has been

accommodated in the port of Stavanger. 

2.11 There is a tanker berth which can handle vessels up to 330 m

in length, with a 16m draft. 

2.11 The NATO Quay is at Ulsnes Naval Base (58°59.5'N.,

5°42.9'E.).

Oil platform at the approaches to Stavanger Fjord 

Stavanger
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 33

Pub. 182

2.11 The basin just E of Stavanger is bounded by Steinsoya,

Ormoy, and Vassoy to the N; Lindoy, Hellesoy, and Kalvoy to

the NE; and Uskjo to the S. A chain of islets and dangers

extends SW for about 1 mile through the middle of this area.

2.11 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for Stavanger and is

available 24 hours. Pilots should be requested at least 24 hours

in advance. Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea Net,

or alternatively the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. The Kvitsoy

pilots are to be advised of the vessel’s arrival, giving the

following information:

1. Vessel name.

2. Call sign.

3. Gross registered tons.

4. Draft.

Stavanger Harbor

Stavanger—Inner Harbor 

Stavanger—Harbor Overview 
34 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

5. Cargo.

6. Port of destination.

2.11 Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and meet

inbound vessels outside Feistein, as follows:

1. Approximately 21 miles S of Stavanger, in position

58°50'N, 5°26'E.

2. In Skudenesfjorden, at Skedenesfjorden Vest, in position 59°02'N, 5°10'E.

3. At Skedenesfjorden, approximately 18 miles NW of

Stavanger, in position 59°06'N, 5°26'E.

2.11 Vessels greater than 30,000 grt carrying hazardous or polluting cargo will use the boarding position at Skudenesfjorden

Vest.

2.11 Pilot boats are white and have orange superstructures.

2.11 For detailed information on pilotage regulations, see Pub.

180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.

2.11 Signals.—Storm signals are shown from a mast on the NE

side of Vagen.

The Stavanger Bridge 

Stavanger—Waterfront 
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 35

Pub. 182

2.11 Anchorages—Stavanger affords fairly good anchorage

throughout, but the best is in the E part S of Solyst and Grasholmen, where the depths are 18.3 to 27.4m. 

2.11 Deep draft vessels also anchor NE of Grasholmen, approaching through Amoyfjorden and Horgefjorden.

2.11 Amoyfjorden provides anchorage for large vessels and oil

rigs. The water depth varies from 30m to 130m. Smaller vessels may anchor off Ulsnes Point, which has a maximum depth

of 40m.

2.11 Vessels in quarantine or without berth assignment should

anchor near the entrance at Ulsnes Point, taking care to avoid

the submarine cables and water pipelines.

2.11 Gandsfjorden is a construction site for large offshore structures (depth of 245m) and a lay-up area for oil rigs (depth of

180m).

2.11 Stavanger Port Control is to be contacted prior to anchoring.

Port Control uses VHF channels 13 and 16 and may also be

reached by telephone at 51-73-53-97.

2.11 Caution.—Numerous changes to depths, lights, and aids to

navigation have been reported (2008) in Stavanger and its approaches. Vessels should contact local authorities for further

information. 

2.12 Sandnes (58°51'N., 5°45'E.) (World Port Index No.

23470) extends around the head of and along the W shore of

Gandafjorden. Behind the town, on the SE, the land rises in

hummocky hills, 101 to 198m high. East of Gandafjorden and

immediately NE of the town, the hills rise more steeply to a

height of about 189m. The country W of Sandnes is comparatively low, about 46m high in some places, and is mainly fertile

agricultural land.

2.12 There is 1,021m of quayage at Sandnes. A quay on the W

side of the head of the fjord is 350m long, with depths alongside of 6 to 9m.

2.12 Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor off Sandnes, in 13.7

to 18.3m. Small vessels can also anchor near the head of the

fjord, in a depth of about 6.1m.

The Fjords

2.13 Gandafjorden (58°55'N., 5°46'E.), a deep fjord,

trends S for about 7 miles from Store Maroy. There is a 5-knot

speed limit in the inner part of the fjord.

2.13 Gandsflu, a 5m depth marked by a light, lies about 0.4 mile

SW of Store Maroy. Depths of 7.3 and 8.7m lie within about

0.1 mile NNE of Gandsflu.

2.13 A quay, with a depth of 7.6m alongside, is located in the

vicinity of Fiskaneset (58°54'N., 5°45'E.), on the W shore of

Gandafjorden. Another quay, with a depth of 11m alongside,

lies about 1 mile further S.

2.13 Buoys mark some of the shore banks in the inner part of

Gandafjorden. Two lights, in range 186.5° and shown from the

E shore opposite Sandnes, lead into the fjord.

2.14 Riskafjorden (58°56'N., 5°49'E.), which is about 0.2

mile wide in its narrowest part, is formed between the

mainland SE of Stavanger and the S and E sides of the island of

Uskjo. It branches off from the NE end of Gandafjorden and, at

its N end, leads into the junction of Horgefjorden and Hogfjorden. 

2.14 Riskafjorden is deep and, except for Riskaholmene, two

small islets in mid-channel SW of the S extremity of Uskjom,

is free from dangers in the fairway.

2.14 In Riskafjorden, there is good anchorage, sand and shell, for

small vessels at the head of a small inlet at Hammersak on the

SE side of the fjord. There are mooring buoys and several

quays, with depths up to 4m, located in the inlet. Li is located

on the S shore of Riskafjorden, about 0.4 mile SSW of Riskaholmene. A concrete quay, with a depth of 4m alongside, is

located at Li.

2.15 Horgefjorden (59°01'N., 5°50'E.) surrounds the islet

Horge. The fjord is bounded on the SW and W by the many

islands and islets lying off Stavanger, on the NW by the islets

and dangers at the E end of Amoyfjorden and the SE side of

Stavanger Petroleum Museum

Port of Sandnes Home Page

http://www.sandnes-havn.no
36 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

Amoy, on the N by Hille Kjeoy and the island of Hidle, and on

the E by Heng and Idse and the chain of islets and rocks

between these two islands. General depths throughout

Horgefjorden are ample, but there are some shoal patches. Vessels without local knowledge should not attempt passage between the islets and reefs lying between Heng and Idse.

Hogsfjorden (58°56'N., 6°00'E.) trends SE for about 12

miles, is from 0.5 mile to 1.5 miles wide, and is deep and clear

of dangers in the fairway. Several small sounds lead off from

Hogsfjorden. Lysefjorden is entered about midway along the

NE shore.

2.15 Frafjorden, a continuation of Hogsfjorden, trends E for about

3 miles, is about 0.5 mile wide, and is also deep and clear. The

shores of both fjords are mostly steep-to. 

2.15 A wooden quay at the head of Frafjorden has a depth of

about 4.5m alongside and can accommodate vessels with drafts

to 5.5m.

2.16 Idsefjorden (59°01'N., 5°58'E.) is the basin formed

between the mainland, on the N and E; the islands of Idsal and

Idse, on the S; and Heng and the islets and rocks extending S,

on the W. Botnefjorden, a narrow inlet, extends SE for about 2

miles from the E end of Idsefjorden.

2.16 Most of Idsefjorden is deep and clear, but there are shoals

and rocks near shore and among the scattered islets at the W

and E ends. A few detached shoals lie near the fairway. Inside

Botnefjorden, the depths shoal from about 81m in the entrance

to 16.5m near the head of the fjord.

2.16 Jorpeland (59°01'N., 6°02'E.), a settlement in a small cove

on the NE shore of Idsefjorden, is one of the larger places in

the area. It has numerous buildings and workshops and a quay

with 4 to 6m alongside. There is a steel works, with a quay

having a depth of about 5m alongside. A telegraph station is

located here.

Hillefjorden (59°04'N., 5°49'E.) is a comparatively broad

sheet of open water between Aske, Rennesoy, and Brimse, on

the N, and Amoy and Hidle, on the S. Depths through the

fairways of Hidlefjorden range from about 29 to 180m. 

2.16 Anchorage can be taken, in 13m, good holding ground, clay

and mud. Mooring rings and buoys are available. In the NE

part of the cove, there is a quay, with depths of 3.1 to 4.8m

alongside and a length of 84m. A grain elevator has a quay,

36m long, with a depth of 9m alongside.

2.16 A secure harbor for small vessels lies on the E side of Hidlefjorden off the village of Tau (59°04'N., 5°55'E.)

2.17 Mastrafjorden (Mastrafjorden) (59°06'N., 5°39'E.) is

a good channel for vessels bound to any of the fjords E or S of

Stavanger. From its NW entrance, it trends SE between the SW

side of Rennesoy and the NE sides of Klosteroy, Mosteroya,

and Aske for about 6 miles to its junction with Hidlefjorden.

The least width between the land on either side is about 0.4

mile; however, shoals on either side reduce the navigable

channel width to less than this in places. A least depth of 18.3m

is available through the fairway, but there are lesser depths and

dangers nearby.

2.17 Anchorage.—Medium-size vessels can take good anchorage in Finnesandbukt, the bay formed between Klosteroy and

the N side of Mosteroya. The anchorage is in a depth of 20m,

coarse sand. Care is necessary to avoid Bakhodnagrunn, a 9m

shoal lying in the entrance to this bay.

2.17 Vikevag (59°06'N., 5°42'E.), on the N shore of Mastrafjorden, is the main port on Rennesoy. The largest quay, on the

NW side of the inlet, has depths to 5m alongside. A quay at

Dale, about 1 mile SE of Vikevag, has depths from 5 to 6m.

2.17 Caution.—Numerous submarine cables extend from Rennesoy to the surrounding islands.

Saebosundet (59°10'N., 5°56'E.) is the narrow sound separating the NE side of Fogn from Teistholme, Lindoy, Buoy,

Byre, Bokn, and other islands, islets, and rocks to the NE. It

leads from the N end of Fognafjorden into Finnoyfjorden.

Although very narrow in places, the channel fairway has ample

charted depths. Detached 4.1m to 9.1m depths lie near the fairway. Some of the detached dangers and those extending from

the islets on the NE side of the passage are marked by buoys or

perches. Other navigable channels lead among these islets.

The Fjords Branching from Skudenesfjorden

2.18 Boknafjorden (59°12'N., 5°38'E.), a continuation of

Skudenesfjorden, trends NE for about 10 miles to the S

entrance of Nedstrandsfjorden. It is about 4 to 6 miles wide

between the islands and islets on either side. Depths through

the fairway are great, but there are some detached dangers,

particularly in the NE part and along the SE side. 

Boknasund (59°14'N., 5°27'E.) lies between Vestre Bokn

and Austre Bokn and leads NW for about 3 miles between

Boknafjorden and the S end of Boknaflaeet. It was reported

(1944) that a depth of 9.7m is available through Boknasund but

that passage through the sound is difficult for vessels over

107m in length and with a draft of over 7.6m.

2.18 Two submarine cables cross the sound in the vicinity of

Boknasund Light.

2.18 Knarrholme (59°13'N., 5°28'E.) is the farthest SW of a

group of above-water rocks on the SW side of the fairway.

Knarrholmgrunn, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked on

Boknafjorden
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 37

Pub. 182

its NE side by a buoy, lies about 91m E of Knarrholme.

2.18 Strandvikflu, lying near the E shore of the sound about 0.2

mile NE of Knarrholmgrunn, has a depth of less than 1.8m and

is marked by an iron perch.

2.18 Ta (59°14'N., 5°27'E.), a reef marked at its S end by a

beacon, is on the W side of the fairway. It lies within about 0.1

mile offshore and about 2 miles NNW of Knarrholme. A 6.4m

depth is located about 183m E of the beacon.

2.19 Bleikje (59°15'N., 5°27'E.), a small islet, lies in midchannel about 0.5 mile N of Ta. A 1.8m depth is located about

137m SE of the islet.

2.19 Brattholme lies 183m off the W side of Boknsund and about

0.5 mile W of Bleikje. A smaller islet is located about 183m

NW of Brattholme; Brattholmbaen, with a depth of about 1.5m

and marked by an iron perch, lies about 0.1 mile SE of

Brattholme.

2.19 Tides—Currents.—In Boknasund, the tidal current depends

mainly on the wind and may run in one direction continuously

for a considerable time. It is very strong in the narrowest part

of the sound. During long periods of calm weather at sea, the

tidal current runs regularly, changes direction at half tide, and

is strongest at HW. Farther N in Boknaflaeet, the tidal current

usually runs in the same direction as in Boknsund. It often

changes direction under Boknahovud, the NW extremity of

Vestre Bokn, and is strongest round Bleikje and between Vesteroy and Hovringoy. 

2.19 In Austdjupet, the tidal current usually sets in a direction

opposite to that in Karmsund, but depends greatly on the wind. 

2.19 Still farther N in Fordesfjorden, there is usually an incoming

tidal current in bad weather and an outgoing current in fine

weather, but these currents are very weak.

2.19 Depths—Limitations.—A quay at Alvestadkroken, on the

W shore of Boknasund, has depths up to 5m alongside. Fuel oil

and fresh water are available. A quay at Foresvik, about 1 mile

NW of Alvestadkroken, has depths from 5 to 7m alongside.

Fuel oil and fresh water are available.

2.19 Anchorage.—Anchorages for small vessels with local

knowledge are available on both sides of Boknasund.

2.20 Boknaflaeet (59°16'N., 5°26'E.) is the basin between

Ognoy, Austeroy, and Vesteroy on the E, and Hovringoy and

the numerous islets on the W. Boknaflaeet is a continuation N

of Boknasund and leads into Fordesfjorden.

2.20 Depths through the fairway are ample, but there are nearby

shoals and rocks on either side.

2.20 Anchorage.—On the NE side of Boknaflaeet, anchorage can

be taken between the W side of Austeroy (59°17'N., 5°27'E.)

and the SE end of Vesteroy, or between the N side of Austeroy

and Kvernholmane, about 0.2 mile N of the NW extremity of

Austeroy. A rock lies awash close off the W side of Austeroy in

the channel between these two anchorages.

2.20 The fairway through Austdjupet (59°16'N., 5°24'E.) is clear

and deep except for Austdjupholmane, two islets which lie in

mid-channel about 2 miles from the S entrance. Other dangers

are near the islets on either side of the channel.

2.20 Guleskjaer, a detached rock, is on the W side of the fairway,

about 0.3 mile W of the W islet of Austdjupholmane. 

2.20 Tallaksholmane, consisting of two islets and rocks, is the

outermost group in the SE part of Austdjupet.

2.21 Karsto Gas Terminal (59°16'N., 5°30'E.) (World

Port Index No. 23451) is located a little over 0.75 mile NW of

Arviksundet (59°16'N., 5°33'E.), which lies close N of the N

extremity of Arvikholmen. Gas from the North Sea fields is

piped to the terminal, where it is processed and stored while

awaiting export. 

2.21 A submarine pipeline connects Karsto Gas Terminal with

Austre Bokn, 2 miles S. Vessels are prohibited to anchor within

0.2 mile of the pipeline. Karsto Control can be contacted on

VHF channel 11.

2.21 Depths—Limitations.—Quay No. 1, a T-headed jetty in the

W part of the terminal, handles tankers loading liquid petroleum gas. It has an alongside depth of 13.5m and can accommodate vessels up to 210m long, with a maximum draft of

12m. 

2.21 Quay No. 2, a T-headed jetty standing about 0.2 mile W of

Quay No. 1, also has an alongside depth of 13.5m.

2.21 In the E part of the terminal, about 0.2 mile E of Quay No. 1,

are coaster and ro-ro berths, with depths of 7.7m and 7.5m

alongside, respectively.

2.21 A safety zone extends 300m from shore in the terminal area,

as shown on the chart.

2.21 Pilotage.—A sea pilot should be embarked from Kvitsoya

pilot station; they will also act as a harbor pilot.

2.21 Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea Net or

alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. The pilot

boards about 3 miles WNW of Kvitsoya.

2.21 Regulations.—Vessels over 50 grt and carrying dangerous

cargo wishing to use Karsto Gas Terminal must obtain prior

permission from the Harbor Terminal before entering the

regulated area of Skudenesfjorden and Boknafjorden E of the

line between the light on Geitungen (59°08'N., 5°15'E.) and

the light on Vestre Imsen, 8 miles SSE. Such vessels must not

exceed a speed of 10 knots in the regulated area. 

2.21 Permission to enter must be applied for at least 1 hour before

arrival in the regulated area or before leaving the quays, anchorages, or other mooring installations in those waters.

2.21 The vessel’s ETA should be sent, via the agent, at least 72

hours prior to arrival. The ETA must be confirmed 48 hours, 24

hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival.

2.21 Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to berth at the terminal are to

anchor in the designated anchorage in Falkeidfaet, between

Rovetaerne Light and Billingen Light, and in Hervikfjorden.

Boknasund
38 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

2.21 Directions.—The main approach to Karsto Gas Terminal is

between Austre Vagholmflua (59°13'N., 5°31'E.), a 3m shoal

with a light, and Rovetaerne Light, standing on an outermost

rock lying a little over 1 mile ENE.

2.22 Nedstrandsfjorden (59°15'N., 5°44'E.) is formed by

the mainland on the NW, N, and NE, and by a group of islands

and islets, which are known collectively as Sjernaroyane and

the island of Ombo, on the S. Nedstrandsfjorden has an

entrance that lies between the S end of Toftoy and Lundaroy,

about 4 miles ESE. From its entrance, it trends NE and E for

about 11 miles to the entrance of Jelsafjorden. 

Great depths prevail through the fairway of Nedstrandsfjorden. Shoals and islets lie clear of the fairway.

2.22 Lindoy (59°17'N., 5°42'E.), NE of which is Slattholme, is

the largest of a group of islets and rocks lying within 1 mile E

of the N end of Toftoy. Lindoygrunn, the southernmost danger

of the group, is located about 0.2 mile S of Lindoy and is

marked on its S side by an iron perch. 

2.22 Heimraflu, the NW danger, is a 1.8m depth marked by a

buoy about 0.2 mile N of Lindoy.

2.22 A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron

perch, is located about 183m NE of the SE end of Slattholme.

A 5.9m depth and an 8.2m depth lie within about 0.2 mile E

and SE of this rock.

2.22 Lamholme (59°20'N., 5°45'E.) is a small islet in the approaches to Muslandsvag. Gullholme lies about 0.1 mile S of

Lamholme. Haskjaer, with other islets and rocks NW, lies

about 0.2 mile SSW of Gullholme.

2.22 Hunderavag (59°20'N., 5°49'E.), which indents the mainland for about 1 mile N, is entered between Tveiteneset, about

1 mile ESE of Lamholme, and Baustaneset, about 1 mile ENE.

Hestflu, marked by an iron perch, extends about 0.1 mile from

the E shore of the bay to a position about 0.4 mile NW of

Baustaneset.

2.22 Anchorage.—Large vessels can take anchorage in Hunderavag, in 27 to 59m, but the anchorage is exposed to S winds.

The best anchorage for small vessels is off Tveit, located on the

NW side of Hunderavag.

2.23 Nedstrandsvag (59°20'N., 5°52'E.) is entered between Lille Faeroy, about 1 mile ENE of Baustaneset, and

Tonganes, a mainland projection about 0.2 mile farther ENE. A

5.9m depth lies in the middle of the entrance. Within

Nedstrandsvag, there are numerous dangers, including above

and below-water rocks, some of which are marked by iron

perches. A quay has a least depth of 5m along its outer side.

2.23 Foldoy (59°20'N., 5°58'E.) lies in the NE portion of Nedstrandsfjorden. Sondre Breidvik, on the S side, and a smaller

bight, on the N side, almost divide Foldoy in two. 

2.23 Both parts of the island are fairly high; the E part rises to an

elevation of about 35m. Tjuvholme and other islets and rocks

lie within 0.25 mile SW of the S extremity of Foldoy; within

0.25 mile farther SW there is a detached reef, on the NW end

of which a rock lies above water. 

2.23 Skindryggen, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by

an iron perch, lies close off the N side of Foldoy in a position

about 0.2 mile NW of the island’s NE extremity. 

2.23 Smaskjaer (59°17'N., 5°57'E.), marked by an iron perch,

lies about 0.1 mile N of the W entrance point of Jorstadvag,

which is on the NW side of Ombo, about 1 mile NE of the NW

extremity of the island.

2.24 Talgjefjorden (59°08'N., 5°49'E.) is the basin formed

between Rennesoy and Talgje, on the S, and Finnoy and the

islets and dangers lying up to 3 miles W of Finnoy, on the N.

Fairway depths are sufficient for large vessels. A few detached

dangers lie near the fairway, but most shoals, rocks, and islets

are in the N part W of Finnoy. A light is shown from close N

point of Finnoy.

2.24 Galtaholmen (59°09'N., 5°37'E.) is located close off the N

extremity of Rennesoy. Galten, a rock marked by a beacon, lies

about 0.1 mile N of Galtaholme.

2.24 Ertensoy, comparatively steep-to, lies about 2 miles ENE of

Galtaholme; between these islets is the principal entrance of

Talgjefjorden. Midflu, a detached 7.8m patch, lies about 0.3

mile SW of Ertensoy.

2.24 Tjelmen is a detached 3.2m depth lying on the N side of the

fjord approach, about 1 mile NW of Ertensoy. 

2.24 Flustein (59°08'N., 5°39'E.), on which a beacon stands, lies

at the N end of a shoal that extends N from the N shore of

Rennesoy.

2.25 Finnoyfjorden (59°10'N., 5°54'E.), which is formed

between Finnoy on the W, and the islands of Fogn, Bokn, and

Halsne (59°11'N., 5°57'E.) on the E, trends NE and N from

Talgjefjorden for about 5 miles to the W approach to Garsundsfjorden. It has a minimum width of about 1 mile, great

depths through the middle part, and few dangers.

2.25 Kjerringi, lying awash about 0.5 mile NNW of the NE

extremity of Finnoy, is marked by a beacon. Kjerringer, about

183m N of Kjerringi, is awash and marked by an iron perch.

2.25 Anchorage.—Several good anchorages, suitable for small

vessels with local knowledge, are located along both sides of

Finnoyfjorden.

Garsundsfjorden (59°13'N., 6°00'E.), N of Halsne and Randoy and S of the island of Ombo, trends NE for about 8 miles

to the entrance of Josenfjorden. The minimum width of Garsundsfjorden is about 0.7 mile; it is deep and free from dangers

in the fairway.

2.25 Quays, with depths of 4 to 9m alongside, are at Vestersjo,

about 3 miles ENE of Eidsvag, and at Skar about 2 miles

farther ENE.

2.25 Anchorage.—On the N side of Garsundsfjorden, anchorage

for small vessels is available, in 10.1 to 11.9m, in Eidsvag,

which indents the S side of Ombo about 0.5 mile E of the SE

extremity of Ombo. 

2.25 On the S side of the fjord, anchorage can be taken in Batviki,

on the NW side of Halsne. 

2.25 Breidvik (59°13'N., 6°03'E.), on the N shore of Randoy,

provides good holding ground, in 16.5m. Oyehamn, in a

narrow inlet about 1 mile W of the NE extremity of Randoy,

provides good anchorage to small vessels, in 10.1 to 11.9m;

mooring rings are available.

2.26 Fognafjorden (59°07'N., 5°56'E.) lies between Rossoya and the island of Fogn, on the NW, and the mainland, on

the SE. It leads NE for about 3 miles from Hidlefjorden and

Brimsefjorden and joins the S end of Saebosund and the outer
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 39

Pub. 182

end of Ytre Ardalsfjorden. Fognafjorden is 0.75 mile to 1.25

miles wide and throughout its middle part is deep and clear.

Charted depths exceed 183m and all known dangers lie within

0.15 mile offshore. 

Mosnesholmane, a group of three close-lying islets, are on

the SE side of Fisterfjorden (59°09'N., 6°00'E.) within 0.4

mile NW of Helgoy. Kue is a small islet lies about 0.2 mile off

the SE shore, nearly 0.75 mile NE of the larger islet of the

group. A below-water rock is located close off the NE side of

Kue.

2.26 Anchorage.—On the NW side of the fjord, vessels can

anchor in Knarravag, an inlet on the S end of Randoy about 2

miles NNE of Hattholme; in Sandangervag, about 1 mile farther NE; and in Kvaloysund. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 21.9m crosses the entrance of Sandangervag.

2.26 On the SE side of Fisterfjorden, small vessel anchorage can

be found in Fistervag, which is entered about 2 miles NE of

Kue; and in Vassvik, about 2 miles further NE.

2.27 Ardalsfjorden (59°08'N., 6°00'E.), with its W end

starting between Fognafjorden and Fisterfjorden, has numerous islets and dangers. Helgoy is separated from the mainland

N by the narrow Helgoysund. A 10.1m shoal is located about

0.2 mile W of the W extremity of Helgoy. Kvaerholmane,

within 91m of which there are some above and below-water

rocks, lies about 0.4 mile off the S shore of Ardalsfjorden and

1.25 miles E of Hoylandsneset.

2.27 Anchorage.—Good anchorage is available off Fiska, on the

S side of Ytre Ardalsfjorden about 1 mile SE of Hoylandsneset. A concrete quay at Fiska has depths up to 6m.

The Outer Fjords

2.28 Solbergfjorden (Gapafjorden) (59°15'N., 5°55'E.) is

the channel between the W side of Ombo and a group of

islands and islets of which the largest are Kyrkjoy and Bjergoy.

It leads N from the W approach to Garsundsfjorden to Nedstrandsfjorden and Jelsafjorden. 

2.28 Solbergfjorden has a minimum width of about 1 mile and is

deep and free from dangers in the fairway, except in the N part,

where there are some rocks awash.

2.28 Caution.—Marine farms have been established on the N

side of Solbergfjorden in position 69°02.12'N, 17°38.85'E.

Ground tackle extends up to 0.7 mile into the fairway from

these farms.

2.28 Gapaskjaergrunnane, which is awash in places, lies in the N

part of Solbergfjorden about in mid-channel. An iron beacon

marks the northernmost rock while an iron perch marks the

southernmost rock.

2.28 Kvellandsholme is located on the W side of the fjord, about

0.2 mile off the SE extremity of Bjergoy. A submarine cable

crosses the fjord close N of Kvellandsholme. A submarine

cable lies between Bjergoy and Hidleholme, an island about

0.6 mile SE of Bjergoy.

2.28 Tennholme (59°17'N., 5°52'E.), on the W side of the N end

of Solbergfjorden, lies on foul ground extending about 0.3 mile

from the NE side of Bjergoy. The N and NE edges of the foul

ground are each marked by an iron perch.

2.29 Ombofjorden (59°17'N., 6°07'E.) is the passage between Ombo and Josneset. To the E, it leads N from Garsundsfjorden to Jelsafjorden. The minimum width of the passage is

about 1 mile. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.

2.29 On the E side of Ombofjorden, the coastal bank on the W

side of the approach to Knutsvik, a cove about 2 miles NNW of

the SW extremity of Josneset, is marked by an iron perch.

Skarvagrunn, a 3.7m depth, lies close offshore about 0.4 mile

NNW of Knutsvik.

Lysefjorden (58°54'N., 6°05'E.) is entered between Oanes

and a point about 0.4 mile SE. From the entrance, Lysefjorden

extends in a general NE direction for about 20 miles to its

head. The fjord is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.

Noted for its wild and beautiful scenery, it trends between cliffs

rising almost perpendicularly on either side to heights of from

610 to 914m.

2.29 In the entrance, the channel leads between shoals extending

from either side and has a width of about 0.2 mile and a minimum charted depth of 10.1m. A buoy marks the edge of the

shoal water off Oanes.

2.29 Caution.—A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 50m, spans

Lysefjorden, about 2 miles from the entrance.

2.30 Store Bergsholme (58°56'N., 6°07'E.), with Lille

Bergsholme close off its NW side, lies in Lysefjorden, about 2

miles from the entrance. Navigable channels pass E of the

larger islet and W of the smaller islet. A depth of 11.9m is

available through the E channel; greater depths can be found in

the western channel, but a 15.1m bank, which lies within 183m

NW of Lille Bergsholme, should be avoided. An overhead

cable, with a clearance of 27m, spans the channel between

Store Bergsholme and the coast to the NE.

2.30 A concrete quay, with depths alongside of up to 4m, is

located at Oanes. A quay at Eidane, about 4 miles NE of

Oanes, has depths up to 5m alongside. A quay at Bratteli, on

the NW shore of the fjord 4.5 miles further NE, has depths

from 6 to 9m alongside.

2.30 Kvassnos Light is shown from the S shore of the fjord in a

position about 3 miles NE of Store Bergsholme.

2.30 A submarine cable is laid from a position 1.75 miles ENE of

Kvassnos Light across the fjord to Sangesand; another cable is

laid from the same position for about 7 miles E, close to the S

shore.

2.30 A light is shown from the N shore of Lysefjorden in a position about 9 miles NE of Store Bergsholme. Kallasteinsgrunn,

lying awash close off the N shore about 10 miles NE of Store

Bergsholme, is marked by an iron perch.

2.31 Fordesfjorden (59°20'N., 5°23'E.) trends N for about

8 miles from its junction with Austdjupet and Boknaflaeet at

the N end of Hovringoy. It penetrates the mainland of the

Haugesund peninsula; Fosenoy forms the S part of its W side.

The minimum width through most of the fjord is about 0.3

mile, but islets reduce the navigable channel in places to a

width of about 0.2 mile. Charted depths in the fairway are

ample.

2.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Fosnavag, an inlet

on the W side of the fjord, about 1 mile NW of Hovringoy.

Hellevik, on the W side of the fjord about 1 mile N of Fosnaholme, provides a good anchorage for small vessels. 
40 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 

Pub. 182

2.31 Leirvagholme, Skarveskjaer, Flogholmane, and several

above and below-water rocks are in the S part of Fordesfjorden

within 0.5 mile N of the N extremity of Hovringoy.

2.31 Fosnaholmen (59°18'N., 5°23'E.) is on the W side of the

fairway about 1 mile NNW of Hovringoy. Fosnaflu, a rock

with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch,

lies about 0.2 mile N of Fosnaholme. Other rocks lie between

Fosnaflu and the islet.

2.31 Hoyeholmane is on the E side of the fairway about 3 miles N

of Fosnaholmen. Leirvagflu, a 3m depth, lies about 183m

offshore and 0.15 mile SSE of the southernmost islet. Fjordenflu is a rock marked by an iron perch lying in mid-channel,

about 3 miles N of Hoyeholmane.

2.31 Many islands, islets and other hazards lie between Fjordenflu and the head of Fordesfjorden.

2.31 Royksundviki, on the W side of the fjord about 0.5 mile N of

Hellevik, provides good anchorage for small vessels.

2.32 Falkeidflaeet (59°14'N., 5°31'E.), a basin, lies on the

NW side of Boknafjorden and is formed by Austre Bokn and

Ognoy on the W, the mainland of the Haugesund peninsula on

the N, and a chain of off-lying islets on the SE. 

2.32 Some islands and numerous islets, rocks, and shoals occupy

the N part of the basin. General depths through the fairway of

Falkeidflaeet are 46 to 92m. A few detached shoal patches lie

near the fairway.

2.32 The entrance to Falkeidflaeet is between Nordre Vagaholme (59°13'N., 5°31'E.) and Flata Rova, a rock at the SW

end of the islet chain fronting Falkeidflaeet. 

2.32 Austreflu, a 3m depth, lies on the SW side of the Falkeidflaeet entrance, in a position about 0.2 mile ESE of the N end

of Nordre Vagaholme.

2.32 Nautoyflu, a 6.4m depth, is located about 0.2 mile off the W

side of Nautoy in a position about 1 mile NE of Nordre Vagaholme. Nautoygrunn, with a depth of 11m, lies about 0.25 mile

WNW of this shoal.

2.32 Gasaholme (59°15'N., 5°32'E.) and Arvikholmen, together

with some smaller islets and rocks, lie on foul ground in the

NE part of Falkeidflaeet. Holmeflu lies close off the NE end of

Arvikholmen.

2.32 Arviksund is the passage between Holmeflu and Haugsneset,

a mainland point about 0.3 mile N. It leads into Falkeidflaeet

from Hervikfjorden.

2.32 Austreflu lies at the edge of foul ground extending about 0.1

mile S from Haugsneset. A detached 10.1m depth lies about

183m N of Holmeflu. An 11m depth lies about the same

distance SW of Austreflu.

2.32 Krake, with a depth of 5.9m, and Ytre Krake, above water,

are located about 0.5 mile and 1 mile, respectively, WNW of

Holmeflu. There is an 11m depth about 183m SE of Krake;

rocks with depths of 4.6m and 6.4m lie within 0.4 mile of the N

shore.

2.32 Deep-draft vessels should not use Arviksund because of the

above-mentioned dangers.

2.32 Caution.—The mainland shore on the N side of Falkeidflaeet is fringed by reefs; depths in the vicinity are very irregular, and undiscovered shoals may exist.

2.33 Sandsfjorden (59°21'N., 6°00'E.) trends in a general

NE direction for about 11 miles from its entrance to its junction

with Hylsfjorden. Skorpene, about 3 miles within the entrance,

divides Sandsfjorden into three channels. The fjord then

becomes narrow and winding until it opens again near Naevoy,

about 5 miles farther NE. Depths through the fairway of

Sandsfjorden are ample.

2.33 Tides—Currents.—In Sandsfjorden and in Saudefjorden,

farther N, the tidal current (resultant of constant and tidal currents) usually runs outward. At the head of Saudefjorden, the

current is strong and runs through the fjords to the narrow

channel at Ytre Asaroy (59°25'N., 6°08'E.), where it may

attain a velocity of 3 to 4 knots; then it passes N of Ottoy

toward the W shore, with a branch setting S into Ottoysand, SE

of Ottoy, out through the three channels at Skorpene, with

about equal strength in all the channels.

2.33 Kvitholm (59°23'N., 6°03'E.) is on the W side of the main

fairway about 3 miles NE of the entrance to Sandsfjorden. The

channel width abreast the islet is about 0.2 mile. Two 7.5m

depths are located about 0.2 mile and 0.5 mile SW of Kvitholm.

2.33 Skorpene lies about 0.3 mile N and 0.5 mile NW of Kvitholm. The easternmost of the three channels formed by these

two islets is the main fairway. Midtholme lies about 0.2 mile

NE of Kvitholm and an islet lies about 160m NE of the E

Skorpene island; both dangers lie close W of the main fairway. 

2.33 A 4.5m depth is located about 0.2 mile NW of the western

Skorpene island. A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close S

of the 4.5m depth.

2.33 A 7m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 91m N of Ottoy

(59°24'N., 6°06'E.). A reef extends about 183m S from the

shore N of Ottoy toward the fairway.

2.33 A light is shown from Foreholmen, which lies on the N side

of the fairway about 0.5 mile E of the N extremity of Ottoy. 

2.33 An above-water rock is located about 183m NW of

Foreholmen.

2.34 Sand (59°29'N., 6°15'E.), where there is a quay with

depths of 9 to 10m alongside, lies on the N side of the shallow

mouth of a river flowing into the E side of the fjord. There are

regular ferry services from here to Ropeid and Stavanger.

2.34 Omsmallneset, from which a light is shown, is a salient point

on the E side of the fjord about 0.7 mile NE of Foreholmen.

Between Omsmallneset and Blaskjaer, about 0.1 mile W,

Sandsfjorden is at its narrowest and takes an abrupt turn N.

2.34 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in the N part

of the cove off Sand, to avoid a submarine cable in the S part,

in 25m, clay.

2.34 Leirvik, on the W side of the fjord about 0.3 mile N of the

entrance to Sandsfjorden, is a secure anchorage for small

vessels except during E winds. It has a quay, with 2 to 5m

alongside. Tveitavik, about 2 miles farther NNE, is exposed to

the S. Small vessels can anchor on either side of a promontory

at the head of the bay. There is a quay, with depths of 2 to 5m

alongside.

2.34 Vatlandsvag, about 2 miles further NNE, has a qua, with

depths of 3 to 12m alongside.

Jelsafjorden (59°19'N., 6°02'E.) trends E from Nedstrandsfjorden to Ersfjorden and is deep and clear throughout. Jelsahunden, marked by an iron perch, lies about 91m off the W

entrance to Jelsavag (59°20'N., 6°02'E.), on the N side of

Jelsafjorden. Jelsa, on the NE side of a bight close W of
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 41

Pub. 182

Jelsavag, has a quay with a depth of 5m on one side. Fuel oil

and water are available.

2.34 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage within

Jelsavag.

2.35 Okstrafjorden (59°20'N., 6°06'E.) trends N from its

entrance for about 2 miles to the entrance of Lindevik, where it

becomes very narrow. It then continues NNE for 1 mile to its

head. North of Lindevik, the narrow channel is shallow, restricted by rocks, and ice-bound in winter. In the lower narrows

off Holenes, about 1 mile from the fjord entrance, tidal currents

may often set strongly.

2.35 Charted depths in the fairway as far as Lindevik entrance are

40 to 82m. Some of the dangers in the fjord are marked by iron

perches. The lower narrows, for a distance of about 0.5 mile, is

about 91m wide.

2.35 An overhead cable, with a clearance of 15m, crosses the

narrow inner part of Okstrafjorden.

The Josenfjorden (59°15'N., 6°10'E.) entrance is between

the SW extremity of Josneset and a point about 1 mile SE. The

fjord trends NE and E for about 14 miles and is deep and free

from dangers throughout. Within about 2 miles of its head, it is

narrow. The land on either side of the fjord is very high; on the

S side it is very steep.

2.35 Anchorage.—The anchorages in Josenfjorden are suitable

only for vessels with local knowledge.

2.36 The entrance to Ersfjorden (59°19'N., 6°08'E.) lies

between Lyngneset, a projection at the NW end of Josneset,

and Landsnes, about 0.5 mile N. Ersfjorden trends E for about

5 miles to Kileneset, has a minimum width of about 0.3 mile,

and is deep and free from dangers in the fairway. The NW side

of Landsnes is foul for about 183m offshore.

Tyssefjorden (59°21'N., 6°14'E.) is a narrow branch trending NNW from the E end of Ersfjorden for about 3 miles. The

fairway is deep and clear, but is usually icebound in winter. A

bridge with a vertical clearance of 23m spans the inlet

entrance. The numerous anchorages in Tyssefjorden are only

suitable for small vessels with local knowledge.

Hylsfjorden (59°31'N., 6°16'E.), from its junction with

Sandsfjorden and Saudefjorden, trends ENE for about 10.75

miles to its head. It is deep and free from dangers in the

fairway. Anchorages for small vessels with local knowledge

are available in several places within the fjord.

2.37 Saudefjorden (Saudafjorden) (59°33'N., 6°17'E.)

trends NNE for about 8 miles from its junction with Sandsfjorden and Hylsfjorden. The fjord is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.

2.37 In winter, Saudefjorden is icebound from its head S to Soland, which is on the W side about 4 miles NNE of the entrance.

2.37 A light is shown from Asneset, on the W side of the fjord,

about 1 mile N of the entrance. A quay located in a cove S of

Asneset has depths of 6m alongside.

2.37 A light is shown from Ramsnes (59°38'N., 6°20'E.), a point

on the E shore, about 7 miles NNE of the entrance.

2.37 A light is shown from Saunes, on the N side of the fjord,

about 1 mile N of Ramsnes.

2.37 Shoal water extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in places along

the N shore of the fjord NE of Saunes. A buoy marks a sand

and gravel bank at the mouth of a river.

2.37 Ekkjegrunn, with a depth of about 1.8m and marked by a

lighted beacon, lies 0.2 mile WNW of Hesthamaren, a point on

the E side of the head of Saudefjorden, about 1 mile E of

Saunes. Several buoys also mark this shoal.

2.37 Saudasjoen is on the NW side of the head of the fjord. It has

a concrete pier, 87m long, with a depth of over 9.1m alongside. 

2.37 Two other piers, one 37m long and the other 46m long, have

depths from 3 to 5.9m alongside.

2.38 Sauda (59°39'N., 6°21'E.) lies at the mouths of two

rivers. There is an import quay, about 252m, long with depths

of 6 to 11m alongside. The export quay E of it, is 112m long,

with depths of 8 to 9m alongside. The public quays have depths

from 5 to 6m along-side.

2.38 Anchorage.—At the head of the fjord, vessels can anchor

off Saudasjoen, in 11 to 20m, and off Sauda, in 40 to 50m, clay.

2.38 Caution.—Vessels going alongside the quays at Sauda must

exercise caution because of the strong currents from the rivers.

2.38 Careful attention should be paid to wind direction.

2.39 Vindafjorden (59°20'N., 5°56'E.) trends NNW from

its entrance for about 6 miles to Krossfjorden, a basin formed

by the junction of four separate fjord arms. The E arm, under

the name of Vindafjorden, leads ENE for about 9 miles. 

2.39 From Krossfjorden, Sandeidfjorden trends NNW for about 5

miles, and Yrkefjorden trends SW for about 7 miles. 

2.39 Vatsfjorden extends NNW for about 3 miles from about the

middle of the N side of Yrkefjorden.

2.39 There are few good harbors in Vindafjorden and its connecting fjords to the N, due to the generally steep-to shoreline.

2.39 Ice.—Vindafjorden is usually free from ice. Ice sometimes

forms in Sandeidfjorden, but seldom lasts very long. 

2.39 Vatsfjorden and the head of Yrkefjorden may be icebound

for several months continuously.

2.39 A light is shown from Skjervheim (59°28'N., 5°45'E.) in a

position on the E shore of Vatsfjorden about 2 miles NNW of

the entrance.

2.39 Flatskjaerbaen, at the S end of a reef on the E side of the

Vatsfjorden entrance, is marked by an iron beacon. Forholme is

a small islet at the N end of the reef.

2.39 A quay, with depths of 3 to 6m alongside, is located at

Vikedal on the E shore of Sandeidfjorden.

2.39 A submarine cable is laid in Sandeidfjorden between Ilsvag

and Sandeid at the head of the fjord.

2.39 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 18m, crosses

Yrkefjorden about 0.2 mile from its head.
Pub. 182

3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
45

Pub. 182

SECTOR 3 

NORWAY—SKUDENESFJORDEN TO KORSFJORDEN

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast between Skudenesfjorden and Korsfjorden, and then the inner route and

adjacent inlets between these two major fjords. The arrangement is N, starting from Getungane, two islets directly S of

Karmoya on the N shore of Skudensfjorden, and Store Marstein, an islet on the S side of Korsfjorden. 

General Remarks

3.1 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds on the W

and S coasts of Norway reflect the average pressure distribution and its seasonal changes. With the shift from high pressure over S Norway in winter to low pressure in summer, the

winds on the W coast change from S in winter to N in summer.

The prevalence of winds from any one direction is not in evidence more than 40 per cent of the time. The more usual situation is one of winds induced by a passing cyclone with shifting directions and velocities.

3.1 Within the fjords and along the very indented coast line the

wind is usually widely different from that in the open sea, owing to land and sea breezes and topographical effects.

3.1 Because of the mountainous nature of the coast any wind

blowing from a direction between S and WSW is deflected to

blow as a S wind on the coast, and any wind blowing between

NW and N is deflected to blow as a N wind. The winds in W

Norway therefore have a tendency to blow across the mouth of

the fjords. The speed of the wind also increases outward from

the coast to a distance of as much as 150 miles.

3.1 There is a lot of turbulence along the Norwegian coast when

winds are fresh or strong, due to the broken country. Gales

occur very frequently over this area when deep depressions are

moving NE between the British Isles and Iceland, under which

condition a very steep gradient is apt to develop all along the W

seaboard of Norway, producing strong S winds. This very steep

gradient at times extends 100 to 150 miles out to sea from the

coast. 

3.1 Under these conditions the coast is swept by violent winds

which penetrate into the more sheltered fjords with great

turbulence though with reduced velocity. Spells of NW gales

occur on the W coast when a suitable gradient is established by

pressure falling over Scandinavia. Such gales are apt to persist

but the gradient on some occasions falls off suddenly to the E

of the Shetlands.

3.1 Weather conditions in this coastal sector are changeable. The

prevailing winds are E from October to March and W from

April to September. In winter the heaviest gale occur with SW

winds and are usually accompanied by rain or snow. Northwest

winds are, as a rule, dry both in summer and winter.

3.1 The most rainy months are generally October and November.

Snow appears near the coast in December and in places

remains until March.

3.1 Fog occurs off the coast in summer for an average period of

five days each month.

3.1 Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is

present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast.

Floating ice is met in spring, when small masses, which are

soon dispersed, may drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and

occasionally from some of the larger fjords to the W and N of

Lindesnes.

3.1 Tides—Currents.—North of Skudenesfjorden entrance the

current sets N with a decreasing velocity. An average velocity

of about 2 knots is maintained about 5 miles offshore as far N

as Breidsundet.

3.1 The velocity decreases both toward the coast and seaward,

and about 15 miles offshore is not more than about 0.2 knots. 

3.1 The decrease seaward may be caused by a S current E of the

Shetland Islands. These two currents form large weak eddies,

rotating counterclockwise and centered 30 to 40 miles offshore.

3.1 Tidal currents between Skudenesfjorden entrance and

Korsfjorden entrance the tidal currents about 5 miles offshore

usually sets N. With long periods of SW and W gales, the set is

N and fairly strong, especially during the rising tide (beginning

about 5 hours 45 minutes after HW at Bergen). 

3.1 Closer inshore, the tidal current component is more appreciable, resulting in a N set during the rising tide and a S set

during the falling tide (beginning about 30 minutes before the

HW at Bergen).

3.1 The tidal current usually sets outward from the entrances of

the large fjords.

3.1 In Stokksund and Nyleid the tidal currents set N with the rising tide and S with the falling tide. Before the onset of unsettled weather, however, there may be a set in one direction,

either N or S, for a considerable period of time.

3.1 In Alfjorden the tidal currents may be very strong, but there

may also be tidal currents setting in opposite directions in the

outer and inner parts of the fjord. The tidal currents near the

land usually differ in direction from that in the middle of the

fjord.

3.1 In Langenuen there is nearly always a N setting tidal current,

although occasionally in fine weather it sets S. Current

velocities of 4 to 5 knots during strong S winds have been reported off Skor Light. Dangerous eddies near the shores of

Langenuen have also been reported. There is usually an outgoing tidal current in Hardangerfjorden, however, there may be

an incoming current during W gales at sea, but only in the

outer part. The outgoing tidal currents may be very strong in

Bondesundet W of Varaldsoy, off Ljones in Hissfjorden, and

off Krosnes at the entrance of Sorfjorden. 

3.1 Off Simadal, at the head of Eidfjorden, there is usually a

weak outgoing current, which is somewhat increased during

and after periods of heavy rains and after the snow melts, but

this current may cease with long continued SW winds.

3.1 In Lokksundet, the channel connecting Hardangerfjorden

with Bjornefjorden the spring velocity of the current is

nowhere more than 0.3 knot. With onshore winds at sea, there

is a continuous N tidal current in Lokkfsundet.

3.1 Tides in the North Sea are always semidiurnal, with very
46 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

little diurnal inequality between the two HW or the two LW of

each tidal day.

3.1 The tides progress into the North Sea from the Atlantic

Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the

North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal

point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and

W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the

6th meridian. Along the W coast of Norway the progression is

N to about 60° N.; N of this the progression is E.

3.1 Along the W coat of Norway, tide ranges gradually increase

toward the N, from 0.2m at Mandal to 0.91m at Bergen.

3.1 Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of

wind on the tide level is small. This is probably due to the scattering effect of offshore island and the relatively deep water

close inshore.

3.1 Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

3.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

3.1 Caution.—A permanently-active firing practice area lies in

the SW and W approaches to Korsfjorden. For further information, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic

Ocean.

3.1 In winter, falling snow is the greatest danger. The land is

often completely obscured in snow. In Indreleia, when a snowstorm threatens, careful bearing of the nearest anchorage

should be taken to enable the vessel to seek shelter. Because of

the tidal current, it.is dangerous to heave-to. 

Skudensfjorden to Korsfjorden

3.2 The coast between Geitungane, two islets directly S of

Karmoya on the N shore of Skudensfjorden, to about 60 miles

N to Store Marstein, an islet W of Stora Kalsoy on the S side of

the entrance to Korsfjorden, consists of several large islands,

fringed with islets and rocks. The large islands include

Karmoy, Bomlo, and Selbjornen. There are numerous detached

dangers along the irregular outer coast. 

Bomlafjorden and Selbjornsfjorden are two deep inlets

which are entered from seaward and lead into the inner network of fjords. 

3.2 Hardangerfjorden is a continuation of Bomlafjorden and

extends, under various names, about 70 miles in a NE direction

from its entrance. Indreleia (Inner Lead), comprising all of the

inner channels leading N toward Bergen, is entered from

Skudenesfjorden through Karmsundet, the passage on the E

side of Karmoy.

3.2 Caution.—Marine farms exist within the area of the inner

fjord of Bomlafjorden near Toflekalven. They may not all be

shown individually and their positions change frequently.

Marine farms may be marked by lighted or unlit buoys or

beacons. Mariners are advised to avoid these structures and

associated moorings. 

3.2 North of Skudenesfjorden, the characteristic features of the

Norwegian coast begin gradually to appear; the islands increase in size and number, and the mountains attain a greater

elevation, but there are as yet no traces of the bold, striking

outlines and savage grandeur which distinguish the coastal

scenery N of Trondheim.

3.2 The entrances of Skudenesfjorden and Bomlafjorden are

conspicuous from offshore. Although, when sailing toward

Bomlafjorden, the elevation of the land along the coast decreases in height, when entering Bomlafjorden in clear weather, the Hardanger Mountains are easily visible.

3.2 An imaginary line drawn through the outermost islands, islets, and dangers fronting the mainland between the Bomlafjorden entrance and the Korsfjorden entrance runs irregularly,

but approximately N for about 35 miles. 

3.2 Selbjornsfjorden is entered about 12 miles S of Korsfjorden.

These last two fjords are considered the most important N

fjords of this section. They are the principal S approaches to

Bergen.

The Outer Coast—Off-lying Islets and Dangers

3.3 Beryl Oil Field (59°33'N., 1°32'E.) is situated about

103 miles WNW of Utsira. There is a production platform with

an adjacent flare structure linked to it by a bridge. SPM tanker

loading platforms stand close NE and SE of the platform.

3.3 Ness Oil Field, Bruce Gas Field, and Linnhe Oil Field lie 4

miles W, 9 miles N, and 9 miles NE, respectively, of Beryl Oil

Field. 

3.3 Heimdal Gas Field (59°35'N., 2°15'E.) lies 20 miles E of

Beryl Oil Field; gas pipelines, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend S and SSW from it.

3.3 Frigg Gas Field (59°53'N., 2°04'E.) is situated about 90

miles W of Slatteroy and consists of a complex of platforms. 

3.3 A treatment and compression platform stands in the field.

Close W of it and linked to it by a bridge, stands a treatment

platform. A platform containing living quarters stands close

SSE of the treatment platform and is linked to it by a bridge. 

3.3 A drilling platform, a flare structure, a steel platform, and a

disused drilling platform stand close SSW, close W, close

NNE, and close ESE, respectively, of the treatment and compression platform. Gas pipelines, which may best be seen on

the chart, extend N, NE, and SW from the field.

3.3 Ringhorne Field (59°16'N., 2°27'E.), marked by a lighted

platform, is connected by a submarine pipeline to a storage

vessel moored about 5 miles SSW. 

3.3 Northeast Frigg Gas Field and East Frigg Gas Field lie 8

miles NE and 9 miles ENE, respectively, of Frigg Gas Field.

3.3 For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sector 4. For oil

and gas fields S of the above, see Sector 2 and Pub. 141,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) Scotland.

3.4 Utsira (59°18'N., 4°53'E.), 71m high, lies about 9

miles off the W coast of Karmoy and, because of its isolated

position, is conspicuous. Utsira is inhabited; during the spring

herring fishing season numerous fishing vessels visit the

island. A light is shown from a prominent light tower, 13m

high, standing on the W part of the island.

3.4 Lights are shown from both sides of a sound that indents the

SE side of Utsira close NW of Beiningen, a small islet. A light

is shown from a rock close E of Beiningen.

3.4 Lausingen is the southernmost islet in the Utsira group and is

located about 2 miles SSW of the S extremity of Utsira. This

islet is low and foul on all sides. Vestreflu, a 5m depth, and

Lausingbaen, a 2m depth, lie about 0.1 mile SW and 0.2 mile
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 47

Pub. 182

N, respectively, of Lausingen. Skallen, a 14m depth, lies about

0.6 mile SE of Lausingen.

3.4 Spannholmane (59°17'N., 4°51'E.), a group of islets, is located about 0.5 mile N of Lausingen. Holmegrunka is an 11m

depth, about 0.2 mile N of Spannholmane.

3.4 Vindballen, an above-water rock, and Vindballflu, with a

depth of less than 1.8m, lie within 0.3 mile SW of Beiningen.

Lille Seiskjaer, partly above-water, lies about 0.3 mile SSE of

Beiningen. Skarholmflu, a 4m shoal, is located 0.25 mile off

the E extremity of Utsira. All other charted dangers near Utsira

lie within 0.2 mile offshore.

3.4 The two harbors in Utsira are Tuavag and Nordvikvag, on its

S side and N side, respectively. They are available only to small

vessels with local knowledge.

3.4 Tuavag provides anchorage, in a depth of 17m. A mole, near

the head of the cove, forms a boat harbor which has depths of

1.8 to 7.6m. In the entrance to the boat harbor, there are depths

of 4.9 to 5.8m. A quay has depths of 4 to 5m alongside.

3.4 Nordvikvag is free from dangers in the fairway and affords

anchorage, with good holding ground, in depths of 6 to 17m.

Two quays have depths of up to 5m. 

3.4 Ferkingstadoyane (59°14'N., 5°04'E.), a group of comparatively high islets, lies nearly 3 miles W of Ferkingstadneset,

which is on the W coast of Karmoy, about 5 miles N of

Jarsteinen. The islets are unoccupied, but are frequented during

the fishing season by lobster fishermen. There is no harbor in

the group. Fringing rocks and shoals, some of which are awash,

lie within 0.25 mile of some of the islets.

3.4 Urter (59°22'N., 5°02'E.) lies with its S end about 4 miles

NE of Utsira. It includes the small islet of Urter and a number

of islets and above and below-water rocks spread over an area

about 2 miles long, N and S. 

3.4 The Urter group is uninhabited, but is visited by fishermen

during the fishing season. On Urter, there is a building for their

use. There are no harbors in the group.

3.4 All the remaining islets and dangers along the coast between

Geitungane and Korsfjorden entrance lie within 6 miles W of

the larger islands forming this coast.

Skudensfjorden to Bomlafjorden

3.5 The coast between Skudenesfjorden and Bomlafjorden, the next N large fjord which leads in from seaward, is

formed by the W coasts of Karmoy. It is part of the Haugesund

peninsula. This peninsula is indented by smaller fjords, bays,

and inlets, and is separated from Karmoy by Karmsundet,

which forms the S reach of Indreleia. 

3.5 The irregular coast of Karmoy is fringed by close-lying islets

and dangers, which extend as far as 2.5 miles offshore. About

10 miles N and NW of Karmoy, in the seaward approaches to

Haugesund and Bomlafjorden, there are groups of islets and

numerous dangerous rocks.

3.5 Hills in the SE part of Karmoy are 61 to 79m high and are

rugged. The beaches up to Veavagen, a distance N of about 10

miles, are composed mainly of white sand and rocks.

3.5 Sandvehamn (59°11'N., 5°11'E.) is a small harbor sheltered

by two sets of breakwaters. Anchorage is available for small

vessels at Sandvehamn only during good weather. Local knowledge is required before attempting to anchor in this area.

3.5 Ferkingstadvag (59°14'N., 5°11'E.) is a good fishing harbor

entered N of a short mole. It has a dredged depth of 4m and has

quays with mooring rings. Fuel oil and fresh water can be

supplied. Foul ground, with some above-water rocks, extends

up to 0.2 mile offshore NW from the S entrance point of

Ferkingstadvag.

3.6 Akrehamn (59°16'N., 5°11'E.), a harbor for small

vessels and fishing boats, is on the W shore of Karmoy,

midway S of Veavagen.

3.6 The approach to Akrehamn lies between the coast at the

Ferkingstadvag entrance and Maroy, which lies close offshore

about 3 miles N. The approach is encumbered with numerous

dangers extending up to 1.5 miles offshore.

The islets forming the harbor are joined by causeways and

moles, leaving an opening from the S which is entered close E

of a short mole extending SE from Mortholme. There are

several approaches leading in among the outer dangers, but

local knowledge is required. Buoys and perches mark the channels. The inner harbor has been dredged to a depth of 4m.

3.6 Svortingen and Ryvingen, the outermost islets in the near

approach to Akrehamn, are located about 1 mile WNW and 1.5

miles NNW, respectively, of Akrehamn. Both islets are dark

colored and are easily seen against the beach’s white sand.

Svortingflu, a 9m depth, lies about 0.5 mile WNW of Svortingen.

3.7 Veavagen (59°18'N., 5°13'E.), a narrow inlet, runs SE

for about 2.25 miles from its entrance between Kvartnesholme,

about 2 miles NE of Maroy, and Veavagneset, on Karmoy

about 0.2 mile farther NE. A light is shown from Veavagneset.

Several islets and rocks, some marked by buoys and iron

perches, lie on a foul ground area W of the entrance to Veavagen.

3.7 The approaches to Veavagen within 1.5 miles SW, W, and

NW of Kvartnesholme are obstructed by numerous islets and

reefs, among which there are several channels. Only the N

channel, leading in between the NE side of Kvitingane and

Meldrane, is recommended.

3.7 Salvoy, Dyrholme, and Kavholme lie in the foul area SW, W,

and NW, respectively, of Kvartnesholme. A beacon stands on

the NW extremity of Dyrholme. 

3.7 Beacons marks some of the dangers in the area between

Salvoy and Maroy; perches marks some of those near the

approach channels.

3.7 A beacon stands on Svartholme, about 0.5 mile N of the N

Veavagen
48 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

end of Kavholme. Between the beacon and the islet there is a

group of above-water rocks named Kvitingane. A 4m depth,

marked by an iron perch, and a 5m depth, marked by a buoy, lie

about 0.2 mile WNW and 0.3 mile NNW, respectively, of

Svartholme.

3.7 Lamholme (59°20'N., 5°12'E.) is located in a foul bight

about 1 mile NNE of Svartholme. Rocks lie up to 0.2 mile SW

of the islet. Meldrane, an above-water rock, is the outermost

danger in this direction. Stroka, with a depth of 15m, lies about

0.3 mile NW of Lamholme on the N side of the entrance to

Veavagen.

3.7 Breakwaters extend from each shore in a position about 1

mile SE of its entrance to Veavagen. The space between heads

is about 60m. A light is shown on each side.

3.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Veavagen, in a

charted depth of 23.8m, with a mud and sand bottom, about 1

mile SSE of the entrance. There are several other anchorages

on both sides of the inlet.

3.7 Caution.—A submarine pipeline crosses the head of

Veavagen N of Brekke (59°17'N., 5°16'E.). It then extends

NW for about 2 miles, close to the NE shore of the inlet.

3.7 Gas pipelines extend seaward from a terminal located close

to the N end of the entrance to Veavagen.

3.8 Feoy (59°23'N., 5°10'E.), an inhabited group of islands and islets, lies within 2.5 miles of the W side of the N

part of Karmoy. Foynfjorden lies between Feoy and Karmoy.

3.8 Most of the islets and islands are close to one another. Some

of the narrow channels that separate the islands are navigable

by small vessels. Within and on the outer edge of the group,

there are numerous smaller islets, rocks, and other dangers.

Perches, beacons, and buoys mark some of the dangers near the

channels.

3.8 Foynfjorden (59°25'N., 5°11'E.) has a depth of more than

14m in its fairway; some of the dangers on both sides are

marked by perches and buoys. It provides a navigable channel

leading N to the seaward approaches to Haugesund.

3.9 The approach to Haugesund leads in among the concentration of islets and rocks lying within 2 miles NW and N of

Osnesgavlen (59°25'N., 5°14'E.), the N extremity of Karmoy.

Haraldstotta, a conspicuous red granite obelisk, stands on the

mainland about 1 mile NNE of Osnesgavlen.

3.9 The port of Haugesund is entered by either one of two channels which are formed at the N end of Karmsund by a chain of

islets extending SSE from Sorhaugoy (59°25'N., 5°14'E.).

3.9 Vestre Karmsund, the SW and principal channel, lies

between these islets and the N end of Karmoy at Osnesgavlen.

It is approached directly through the outer buoyed channel.

3.9 Vibrandsoysund, the NE channel, leads in between the

above-mentioned islet chain and Killingoy and Hasseloy.

3.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots can be obtained

from Kvitsoy. 

From the vicinity of the N entrance to Haugesund, the

mainland coast trends in a general N direction for about 6 miles

to Ryvarden, the S entrance point of Bomlafjorden. 

3.9 Four islet and rock-encumbered bays and a few small coves

indent the coastline. Numerous islets, shoals, and foul patches

front this coastal stretch, most of them lying in the seaward approach to Bomlafjorden, where they form the N side of Sletto.

3.9 Sletto is an open stretch of sea NW of Haugesund. The

depths in the area are variable, from shoals with depths of 2m

to places as deep as approximately 250m. 

3.9 The area is relatively narrow, and the great variations in

depth cause extremely turbulent and choppy seas when waves

come in from the SW to NW. The conditions become even

worse when the tidal current runs against the waves.

3.9 Smorsundnes (59°30'N., 5°14'E.), marked by a beacon, is

located on the mainland about 4 miles N of the N entrance to

Haugesund. 

3.9 Smorsundholme lies close NE of this point and is separated

from Trettoy, NE of it, by a narrow channel named Smorsund.

Viksefjorden is joined to the SE end of Smorsund by the

narrow Straumen, which has depths of 0.9m in places.

3.9 Molstrevag is entered between Langeneset (59°31'N.,

5°14'E.) and a point about 0.3 mile farther N. The inner part of

Molstrevag is sheltered, but the entrance channels are very

narrow. Some of the rocks in the bay are marked by iron

perches. Among several quays at Molstrevag, the largest has

depths of 5 to 7m alongside.

3.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Molstrevag, in

16.5m, sand bottom. The approach channels to this anchorage

are narrow. Smaller vessels anchor farther in.

Haugesund (59°25'N., 5°16'E.) 

World Port Index No. 23440

3.10 Haugesund was originally a fishing port, but shipping

and industry have gradually increased its importance. It has an

expanding ship building and ship repairing capability for

conventional vessels, supply vessels, and offshore structures.

3.10 Haugesund’s harbor facilities extend from the mainland to

the adjacent islets of Risoy, Hasseloy, and Killingoy, and continuing across Karmsundet to Karmoy.

3.10 Winds—Weather.—The weather at Haugesund is changeable, which is characteristic of the W coast of Norway. Cargo

operations are not interfered with. The port is well sheltered

from all winds and is ice free. Winter storms are frequent and

may be from any quarter.

3.10 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current turns regularly 3 hours

before and 3 hours after HW, so that at about HW the current is

setting with its greatest velocity to the S; at LW the current is

setting with its greatest velocity to the N. With strong, continuous N winds, the tidal current may set continuously S and,

similarly, with strong, continuous S winds, it may set continuously N. 

3.10 The tidal currents attain their maximum velocity through

Vibrandsoysund, off Osnesgavlen in Vestre Karmsund, and in

Salhusstraummen. In the latter channel, the current may attain

a velocity of 3 knots, but in Vibrandsoysund it is seldom

stronger than 2 knots. Strong winds, as mentioned above, also

greatly influence the velocity. 

3.10 In Smedasund and other parts of the harbor, the velocity is

usually about 1 knot. Nowhere do tidal currents affect the

Port of Haugesund Home Page

http://www.karmsund-havn.no
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 49

Pub. 182

normal use of the port. 

3.10 Depths—Limitations.—Garpeskjaershaien, on Risoy, and

Killingoykaien, on Killingoy, have facilities to handle general

cargo. The berth on the W side at Garpeskjaershaien is 400m

long; the berth on the W side of Killingoykaien is 157m long. 

3.10 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 13.5m, connects Hasseloy with the mainland. Another bridge, with a vertical clearance of 22.5m, joins Risoy with the mainland. Lights are

shown from the center of the bridges to indicate the fairway.

3.10 Smedasundet, the inner harbor, separates Svinholmen, Hasseloy, and Risoy from the mainland. Vessels up to 5,000 dwt

can discharge here.

3.10 At Garpeskjaer, Berth No. 1 is 500m long and can handle

vessels up to 10m draft. Berth No. 2 is 400m long and can

handle vessels up to 8.7m draft.

3.10 At Killingoy Offshore Base, Berth No. 1 is 158m long and

can handle vessels up to 15m draft. Berth No. 2 is 234m long

and can handle vessels up to 10m draft.

3.10 In addition, there is about 1,750m quayage, with depths of

4.5 to 10.9m alongside. There are facilities for ro-ro vessels,

tankers, and oil-drilling rigs. Vessels up to 350m in length can

be accommodated in the port. A drydock can handle vessels up

to 155,000 dwt.

3.10 There is a lay-up area for rigs and vessels up to 250,000 dwt,

in depths of 23 to 40m. It is reported that vessels are generally

Panoramic view of Smedasundet—Inner Harbor of Haugesund

Courtesy of Eirik Hustvedt

Haugesund

Courtesy of Eirik Hustvedt

Garpeskjaer

Courtesy of Eirik Hustvedt

Killingoy
50 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

restricted to a length of 320m and a sailing draft of 10m. 

3.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be

ordered through the Safe Sea Net or alternatively, the Kvitsoy

Pilot Booking Center.

3.10 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 18.3 to 37m, good

holding ground, about 0.1 mile off the SW side of Risoy. In this

anchorage caution is necessary because farther SW the depths

increase suddenly.

3.10 Caution.—Submarine cables and pipelines lie in the vicinity

E of Haugesund and close N of Karmoy. Mariners are advised

not to anchor or trawl in this vicinity. 

3.11 Bomlafjorden (59°34'N., 5°14'E.) is entered between

Ryvarden (59°32'N., 5°14'E.) and Bomlahuk, the S extremity

of Bomlo. Bomlafjorden is described along with Indreleia.

3.11 Ryvarden Light stands on the N entrance point of Molstrevag. 

3.11 Gunnarskjersholet (Gunnarskjaershalet) (59°33'N.,

5°08'E.) is the name given to the approach leading in from the

W to Bomlafjorden. Its fairway is deep and free and has a

width of about 0.5.

3.11 Raudholmene (59°33'N., 5°09'E.) is a group of islets and

rocks on the S side of Gunnarskjersholet, about 2 miles SW of

Bomlahuk. Numerous islets, rocks and shoals, best seen on the

chart, lie in the vicinity of Raudholmene. Gunnarskjersholet

lies about 1 mile NW of Raudholmene.

3.11 Directions.—There is no difficulty in approaching Bomlafjorden from seaward by way of Gunnarskjaersholet. Steer for

the light structure on Raudholmene on a bearing of about 099°

and, when about 0.5 mile from the light, alter course to pass

about midway between Raudholmene and Gunnarskjaer. When

clear of Raudholmene, alter course E into the fairway of Bomlafjorden.

3.11 Caution.—Vessels passing close to Sveio Broadcasting

Station (59°37'N., 5°19'E.) may experience electronic interference due to the station’s electromagnetic fields.

Bomlafjorden to Selbjornsfjorden

3.12 The coast between the seaward entrances of

Bomlafjorden and Selbjornsfjorden is irregular. It is formed by

the islands of Bomlo, Goddo, and Gissoy, and the many islets,

rocks, and shoals in their vicinity. 

Bomlafjorden lies between the mainland, on the SE, and the

islands of Bomlo, Mosteroy, and Stord, on the NW. From its

entrance, the fjord runs NE for about 15 miles to Tittelsnes,

where it joins with the inner fjords of Alfjorden, Bjodafjorden,

and Klosterfjorden. 

Bomlafjorden is a broad, deep channel. Its fairway is free

from dangers and is easily navigated. The current at its entrance is usually outgoing, but is incoming in bad weather,

even during NE gales. 

3.12 When passing W of Bomlo, it is advisable to keep well clear

of the outer dangers for, although most of them are either

visible above-water or are indicated by breakers, they extend

some distance seaward; during light winds the flood current

frequently sets strongly toward the shore.

3.12 Most of Bomlo is moderately high and, as the off-lying islets

are much lower, they are not easily distinguished until within a

distance of about 10 miles.

3.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for most vessels. 

3.12 Siggja (59°45'N., 5°18'E.), a peak in the N part of Bomlo

about 20 miles N of the N end of Karmoy, is visible in clear

weather for a distance of about 30 miles. It resembles a pyramid with a rounded top and a broad base. Siggja is normally

seen before any other part of Bomlo is visible.

3.12 There are numerous anchorages on this coast, some of which

would possibly afford shelter to vessels of moderate draft,

although the available sources of information generally limit

them to small vessels.

3.13 Bomlo (59°40'N., 5°12'E.) is an irregularly-shaped

island which is divided into two parts by the Kuleseidkanal,

which is described in paragraph 3.16. The W coast of Bomlo is

somewhat protected by a number of scattered islet groups,

through or E of which there is an inshore channel for small

vessels with local knowledge.

3.13 Dyrneset (59°37'N., 5°10'E.), a point, is located about 3

miles NNW from the point of Bomlahuk. Four inlets between

Dyrneset and Bomlahuk indent the island’s coast; Kalavag,

Eidesvik, and Roaldsfjorden, the three southernmost inlets,

provide anchorages for small vessels with local knowledge, in

7.3 to 12.8m. Iron perches mark some of the dangers on the

approach to the anchorage areas.

3.13 Dyrnesflu, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies 183m

offshore in a position about 0.3 mile S of Dyrneset. 

3.13 Espevaer (59°35'N., 5°09'E.) is the largest islet in the

Espevaer group lying within 2 miles NW of Bomlahuk. 

3.13 Numerous above and below-water rocks lie within and on

the edge of the group. Fishing vessels frequent these islets,

especially during spring. Only small vessels with local knowledge can enter the group.

3.14 Nordoyane (59°36'N., 5°07'E.) is a group of small

islets and rocks that lie within about 2 miles NW of the NW

extremity of Espevaer; these waters are very foul. Navigation

Ryvarden Light
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 51

Pub. 182

through them should be attempted only by small vessels with

local knowledge.

3.14 Sonoyosen (59°35'N., 5°07'E.) is the channel between the

Espevaer group and Nordoyane. It should not be used during

stormy weather or without local knowledge. Iron perches mark

some of the dangers near the fairway.

3.14 Vikafjorden (59°38'N., 5°11'E.), on the W coast of Bomlo,

can be used for anchorage by small vessels, but local knowledge is necessary. Iron perches mark foul ground on the sides

of the fjord. 

Gissoysund (59°38'N., 5°10'E.), immediately N of Vikafjorden, is a passage between the coast of Bomlo and Nordre

Gissoy and Sore Gissoy, the two parts of an off-lying island.

3.14 Holsoyane (59°39'N., 5°07'E.) is a group of islets and rocks

which lies within 2.3 miles W and WNW of the N extremity of

Nordre Gissoy.

3.15 Grutlefjorden (59°40'N., 5°10'E.) indents the W

coast of Bomlo. Shoal water extends about 0.2 mile from the

head of the inlet. Several of the dangers fringing the shores of

the inlet are marked by iron perches. A quay at the head of the

inlet has depths of 5 to 7m alongside.

3.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 20.1m, on the NW

side of Grutlefjorden about 0.3 mile within the entrance.

3.15 Stokvik, on the Bomlo coast about 1 mile N of Grutlefjorden, provides anchorage for small vessels in about 5.5m.

3.15 Lyklingfjorden (59°42'N., 5°11'E.), which indents the

Bomlo coast, can accommodate small vessels with local knowledge. Lyklingfjorden is very foul; iron perches mark some of

the dangers.

3.15 Store Hiskjo (59°44'N., 5°09'E.), Lille Hiskjo, and numerous other close-lying islets, fringing dangers, and detached

rocks lie in a group close off the coast of Bomlo and NW of the

entrance to Kuleseidkanal. 

3.15 The channels between Bomlo and these islands and between

Store Hiskjo and Lille Hiskjo are encumbered with dangers,

some of which are marked by iron perches. Dangers extend

about 0.5 mile offshore from the seaward sides of the islets.

Hiskosen is the water area between the SE sides of Store

Hiskjo and Lille Hiskjo and the coast of Bomlo.

3.15 Anchorage.—Anchorages for small vessels with local

knowledge are available in several places in the channels separating Store Hiskjo and Lille Hiskjo and among the adjacent

islets. 

3.16 The W approach to Kuleseidkanal leads through

Hiskosen, then NE through Adnanesosen, the water area between the SE side of Lille Hiskjo and the Bomlo coast, then SE

through Troytarosen (59°44'N., 5°13'E.), an embankment. 

3.16 Dyroy (59°45'N., 5°11'E.), with Dyroykalven close S, forms

the N side of Adnanesosen. A 2.7m depth extending a short

distance S of Dyroykalven is marked by an iron perch.

3.16 Hanaskjaer (59°44'N., 5°10'E.), marked by a beacon, is on

the NW side of the fairway about 0.3 mile SSE of the S

extremity of Lille Hiskjo. Tausastein, awash and marked by an

iron beacon, lies on the W side of the fairway at the N end of a

shoal in a position about 0.2 mile NNE of Hanaskjaer. 

3.16 Selvagflu, marked by an iron perch, is on the edge of foul

ground extending from Bomlo, on the E side of the fairway

about 1 mile E of Tausastein.

3.16 Vordnesholmen (59°45'N., 5°13'E.) lies close off the N side

of Vordnes on the S side of the channel to Kuleseidkanal. 

3.16 A 7m depth is located about 0.1 mile WNW of Vordnesholmen. Foul ground, marked by an iron perch, fringes the E

side of Vordnes.

3.16 Flatholmen is located about 183m NE of Vordnesholmen.

Entrance into Troytarosen is made between these two islets.

3.16 Kuleseidvag (59°44'N., 5°14'E.) lies SE of Troytarosen and

is connected to that basin by a narrow channel between Bomlo,

on the NE, and the small islet Straumsholmen, on the SW. A

light marks each end of the channel.

3.16 Kuleseidkanal leads NNE from Kuleseidvag to Finnasvik, at

the NW end of Boroyfjorden. The canal is about 8.8m wide in

its narrowest part and 4m deep. A bridge, with a vertical

clearance of 13m, spans the canal near its SW end. Vessels

with a length of 38m and a draft of 3.6m can use the canal.

There is a speed limit of 5 knots in the canal. Lights mark each

end of Kuleseidkanal. 

The coast from Storaneset (59°45'N., 5°08'E.), a projection

on the seaward side of Bomlo, to Slatteroy, on the S side of the

Selbjornsfjorden entrance about 9 miles N, is formed by the

seaward sides of Bomlo, Rogoy, Goddo, Gissoy, and numerous

other islets that are near and between these islands and larger

islets. Fringing dangers lie up to 1.25 miles off some of the larger islets. A maze of intricate channels leads among the islets

into sheltered anchorages for small vessels, but local knowledge is necessary for their navigation. 

3.16 Beacons and perches mark some of the dangers near the

fairways and there are several lights.

3.17 Melingsvag (59°47'N., 5°07'E.) (World Port Index

No. 23300) is a safe harbor. There are several quays, with

depths alongside of 3 to 9m. Fuel oil and fresh water are

available.

3.17 Two lights, in range 058°, are shown from the SE side of the

bay and lead through the fairway of the narrow entrance.

Another light is shown from the SW extremity of Litlenesholmen. A beacon stands on Kattholme, on the NW side of the

entrance channel. Svelteflu, on the opposite side of the

channel, is marked by an iron perch. 

3.17 Strong onshore winds, especially from S, raise heavy seas in

the entrance and close to it.

3.18 Mosterhamn (59°42'N., 5°24'E.) (World Port Index

No. 23310) is located at the SE end of Mosteroy on the N side

of Bomlafjorden. It is noted for its church, the oldest in Scandinavia, which was built in the 10th century by Olaf Trygvesson. There is a concrete quay, 47m long, with depths alongside from 6.2 to 7.4m. Another quay, which is 19.8m long, has

depths from 3.4 to 5.9m alongside.

3.18 The outer harbor has anchorage depths of 14.6 to 18.3m,

sand and clay, and is provided with mooring rings. South gales

send in considerable swell. The best anchorage position is

toward the E side of the harbor. Should the wind blow from S,

it is better to shift farther inside and anchor, in 11m, abreast the

N end of Fyrholme, the islet close NE of Kaninholme, where

the vessel will be less exposed to the swell. The inner harbor

has a depth of 7.3m, but can only be entered by vessels of very

shallow draft.

3.18 When entering or leaving Mosterhamn, keep well over to-
52 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

ward Kaninholme, as a reef, which is marked by iron perches,

extends for some distance from the S shore of the harbor.

3.18 Eldoyane (59°45'N., 5°30'E.), a man-made peninsula, extends about 1 mile S from the SE side of Stord. A large shipyard, equipped with cranes of up to 300 tons capacity, and a

drydock, which is 325m long and 52m wide, and can accommodate vessels up to 250,000 dwt, is located at Eldoyane. 

3.19 Leirvik (59°47'N., 5°31'E.) (World Port Index No.

23340) is a roomy harbor on the SE shore of Stord. It is

sheltered from the E by several islets, but is open to the SE. 

3.19 The main wharf is 240m long, with depths of 6 to 12m

alongside. There is 600m of private quayage, with depths of 5

to 12m alongside. There are facilities for ro-ro vessels and

coastal tankers. Vessels up to 160m in length can be handled in

the port. Pilotage should be ordered through the Safe Sea Net

or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center.

3.19 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 40m, sand and

clay, in the W part of Leirvik. Caution should be taken to avoid

a submarine cable along the N shore. 

3.19 The entrance to Fordespollen (59°39'N., 5°25'E.) lies on the

SE side of Bomlafjorden. The fjord extends S from its entrance

for about 3 miles and has several side leads. This branch of

Bomlafjorden does not freeze over in winter. 

3.19 Narrow and encumbered channels lead from the SW portion

of Fordespollen into Rodspollen.

3.19 Depths through the fairway of Fordespollen are ample, but

there are nearby dangers, particularly in the SE part of the

basin, some of which are marked by iron perches.

3.19 As there are rocks and shoals in the vicinity of the anchorages, local knowledge is essential.

3.20 The entrance to Boroyfjorden (59°40'N., 5°17'E.)

lies on the NW side of Bomlafjorden. From the entrance, the

fjord trends N for about 4 miles and has a maximum width,

between islands and islets on either side, of about 2 miles.

Finnasvik, the head of which is about 5 miles N of the Boroyfjorden entrance, is the largest of a number of bays and inlets

which lead off from the main fjord. Kuleseidkanal, previously

described in paragraph 3.16, is entered from the NW end of

Finnasvik. Fairway depths through Boroyfjorden are ample. 

3.20 Secure anchorages are located in some of the side bays and

inlets. In winter, the N half of Boroyfjorden is sometimes

icebound. Only small craft with local knowledge can anchor in

Boroyfjorden.

3.20 Langestraumen (59°41'N., 5°15'E.), the narrow channel

between Bomlo and Straumoy, which leads S into Tjongspollen, has a least fairway depth of 3m and is only navigable at

slack water.

3.20 Stokksund (59°45'N., 5°23'E.), one of the channels of Indreleia, is formed between the island of Bomlo, on the W, and the

island of Stord, on the E. It leads NNW for about 8 miles to a

position E of Store Klakksoy (59°50'N., 5°16'E.), where it

branches. One branch continues NNW for about 7 miles under

the name of Nyleid and gives access to the S side of

Selbjornsfjorden. The other trends N under the name of Engesundsleid (59°52'N., 5°17'E.) and becomes very narrow and

shallow in some of its reaches.

3.20 The Stokksund-Nyleid route is safe in clear weather, but

should not be attempted in thick weather without reliable local

knowledge. Large vessels should always use the main route

through Langenuen, on the E side of Stord. Langenuen, although about 3 miles longer than the Stokksund-Nyleid route,

is wider, deeper, and free from dangers in the fairway.

3.21 Sagvag (59°46'N., 5°23'E.) (World Port Index No.

23330) is located at the head of a small islet-encumbered inlet.

The inner channel becomes very narrow but is well marked by

lights, buoys, and iron perches. A quay on the S side of Sagvag

entrance has a depth of 12m. A shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies

near the SW end of the quay. Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the inlet. 

Langenuen trends N and NW for about 14 miles from its S

entrance (59°48'N., 5°34'E.) to its junction with the E end of

Selbjornsfjorden. The S part of the passage is formed between

Stord, on the W, and the islands of Huglo and Tysnesoy, on the

E. Langenuen continues N for an additional 10.5 miles

between Selbjornsfjorden and Korsfjorden and leads between

the islands of Huftaroy and Reksteren and then across the W

end of Bjornafjorden.

3.21 The S part of Langenuen narrows to a width of 0.5 mile in

places; the least width of the N part is about 1 mile. Great

depths prevail in the channel and there are no dangers in the

fairway.

3.21 Heavy squalls occasionally sweep down from the high land

of Stord. In Langenuen, there is nearly always a tidal current

setting N, although occasionally in fine weather it sets S. 

3.21 Dangerous eddies near the shores of Langenuen have also

been reported.

3.21 Caution.—A permanently-active firing practice area lies in

the SW and W approaches to Selbjornsfjorden. For more information, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

Arctic Ocean.

Selbjornsfjorden to Korsfjorden

3.22 This is the coastal sector between Furen and Store

Marstein, an islet on the S side of Korsfjorden entrance about

10 miles N. It includes numerous islets and rocks fronting the

islands of Stolmen, Huftaroy, and Hundvaga and is indented by

Skoltafjorden, Mokstrafjorden, and Horgefjorden. It has been

reported (2008) that the area N of Stolmen Island has new

beacons and lights, as well as significant changes to lights and

buoyage.

3.22 Several good anchorages for both large and small vessels are

found in this area. From offshore, the openings of Selbjornsfjorden and Korsfjorden can be distinguished. 

3.22 Veten (60°01'N., 5°15'E.), a hill in the S part of Huftaroy,

should be easily identified. Maksteinen is located about 2 miles

N of Fugloy and, because of its isolated position, cannot be

mistaken. The lights shown from the islets of Slatteroy and

Store Marstein are also good landmarks.

3.22 The outermost dangers between Furen and Store Marstein all

lie within 1 mile of the nearest islet. Even with a moderate

breeze, the sea breaks over them.

3.22 Marsteinsbaen (60°08'N., 4°59'E.) lies, awash, about 1 mile

WSW of Store Marstein and is unmarked. This is a serious

hazard and vessels should navigate with caution when in the

area of this shoal. Hillagrunn, about 2 miles WSW of Store
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 53

Pub. 182

Marstein, has a least depth of 21m and only breaks in very

heavy weather.

3.23 Skoltafjorden (60°02'N., 5°00'E.) is entered from

seaward between Skoltane and Englamarskaget and leads E to

Stolmasund, Mokstrafjorden, and the N approaches to Bekkjorviksund. Ample depths can be found through the fairway,

but there are a few islet groups and some detached dangers

lying in mid-channel. Kalsoy, about 2 miles ENE of Skoltane,

is the largest islet on the N side of the channel. 

3.23 Kalsoy is about 30m high. Brorne, a group of above and

below-water rocks, lies within 0.2 mile SW of the SW

extremity of Kalsoy. The S and E sides of the islet are fringed

by foul ground extending 0.15 mile offshore in places, and on

the E side, Vardholme, Hestholme, and nearby rocks lie up to

0.3 mile offshore. 

3.23 Larsaskjaer, a detached above-water rock marked by an iron

perch, is located about 0.4 mile E of the SE extremity of

Kalsoy. Vessels with local knowledge can use the narrow channel on the NW side of Kalsoy.

3.24 Fjordaflu (60°01'N., 5°07'E.), a 5m depth marked by

a buoy, lies in the fairway of the N approach to Stolmasund. On

the E side of the N approach to Stolmasund, Vadholmane, a

group of several small islets and some rocks, lies up to 0.5 mile

off the N side of Selbjornen. Iron perches, beacons, and buoys

mark some of these rocks and other dangers closer inshore.

3.24 Stutaflu, a 4.5m depth marked by a buoy, is in the fairway of

the Stolmasund approach in a position about midway between

the NE extremity of Stolmen and the SW islet of Vadholmane. 

Mokstrafjorden entrance is between the N end of Mokster

(60°04'N., 5°06'E.) and the S extremity of Horgo, about 1 mile

NE. The channel leads in a general SE direction toward the N

end of Bekkjorviksund and is connected SW with Skoltafjorden and Stolmasund and NE with Hundvakosen. Ample

depths prevail in the fairway.

3.24 Hysteinen, a 14m depth, lies in the Mokstrafjorden entrance,

about 2 miles WNW of the N extremity of Mokster. 

3.24 Nordstallen and Midstallen, with depths of 21m and 19m, lie

about 0.5 mile ESE and 0.75 mile SE, respectively, of

Hysteinen. These depths may break during onshore gales. 

3.24 Kvitingsflu, a rocky area with a depth of 6m, lies about 0.1

mile S of Midstallen.

3.24 Helgeskjaer and other rocks, some above water, lie within

0.3 mile NW of Mokster. Blaasterstallen, a 4.5m depth, lies

about 183m N of Mokster.

3.24 Stovholme (60°03'N., 5°06'E.) is located close offshore on

the E side of the approach to Naustvag, a cove on the SE side

of Mokster. Close E of the islet there is a 5.5m depth.

3.24 A mole extends N from Stovholme to Mokster; another

mole, its outer end marked by a light, extends about 69m SW

from Stovholme.

3.25 Mokstra Groningen (60°03'N., 5°07'E.) is an islet

about 0.5 mile NE of the NE end of Kalsoy. Shoal water,

marked by an iron perch, extends NW from Mokstra Groningen to a position about 0.2 mile ESE of the S point of Mokster. 

3.25 Krabbhausane, a group of above and below-water rocks, lies

within 0.3 mile E and ESE of Mokstra Groningen Two belowwater rocks at the SW end of the group are each marked by an

iron perch. A detached 12m depth lies about 0.3 mile S of the

southernmost rock of the Krabbhausane group.

3.25 Terneskjaer is located on the NE side of the fjord about 0.2

mile SSE of Horgetrynet, the S point of Horgo. A 4.5m depth

lies about 0.2 mile E of the same point.

3.25 A number of islets also encumber the sound between the SE

side of Hundvaga and the W coast of Huftaroy, to the E. A navigable channel leads N among these latter islets from Mokstrafjorden to Hundvakosen. 

3.25 Hundvakosen (60°07'N., 5°12'E.), a basin, lies between the

E side of Hundvaga and the N end of Huftaroy. There are a

number of islets at the N and S ends of Hundvakosen; the NW

part is obstructed by above and below-water rocks, some of

which are marked by iron perches. 

3.25 Charted depths through the fairway and in the approach

channels are irregular but ample.

3.25 Krosshavnsund (60°09'N., 5°12'E.), the channel between

Staloy and Krossoy to the W leads N from Hundvakosen to

Korsfjorden. Overhead cables, with a minimum vertical clearance of 35m cross, the channel. 

3.26 Horgefjorden (60°06'N., 5°05'E.), a basin, is formed

between the islet Horgo, on the S, and Stora Kalsoy, on the N,

and trends E to the W side of Hundvaga. It is connected to

Mokstrafjorden by a channel leading S between Hundvaga and

Horgo and to Korsfjorden by the channels leading N between

Hundvaga and Stora Kalsoy.

3.26 Sveinane, the S danger on the N side of the Horgefjorden

entrance, lies awash on the S side of Stora Kalsoy. Sverslingen

is a small islet on the S side of the entrance about 1 mile SE of

Sveinane. Within 91m S of Sverslingen there are numerous

rocks, some of which are awash.

3.26 On the N side of Horgefjorden, Bergsholme lies at the end of

a chain of islets which extends about 1 mile E from the SE end

of Stora Kalsoy. Kalsoyvik is formed between the N side of

these islets and the S side of Stora Kalsoy. 

3.26 Reefs extend about 0.2 mile N and NE from Bergsholme.

Smaskjaerflu lies about 0.2 mile NE of Bergsholme. An 11m

depth lies about 0.2 mile ESE of Bergsholme.

3.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Kalsoyvik, near its

head, in 45 to 50m, clay. A detached shoal, with depths of 3 to

3.9m, lies 183m off the S shore of Kalsoyvik nearly 0.5 mile W

of Smaskjaerflu. Barnehaughflu, marked by an iron perch, lies

close off the N shore NW of this detached shoal. Close SSE of

Barnehaughflu, there is a 4m depth. 

3.26 The best anchorage for small vessels is in the SW part of the

bay. Such vessels can also anchor off Hille, in a cove NW of

Barnehaughflu; an iron perch marks foul ground on the W side

of the cove. 

3.26 Between Stora Kalsoy and Navoy, the NW part of

Hundvaga, are Hidleroy, Nautoy, Spissoy, Kvaloy, some other

smaller islets, and numerous rocks. A reef extending about

91m SW from Nautoy is marked by an iron perch. 

3.26 Bakkasund is the narrow channel between Nautoy and the E

side of Stora Kalsoy. Kubbholme and Aerholme lie within 0.3

mile SE of Hidleroy, and about 0.1 mile E of the latter there is a

9m depth. Foul ground fringing the S end of Spissoy is marked

by a buoy moored in a position about 0.2 mile NE of Aerholme. Svartaskjaer, about 0.3 mile E of Aerholme, is awash in
54 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

places. Arholme is located about 0.2 mile N of Svartaskjaer

and is foul on its S side. An 8m depth lies about 0.1 mile S of

Arholme. Mjanesflu, lying 183m offshore about 0.2 mile E of

Svartaskjaer, has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by an

iron perch.

3.26 Austreflu, a 3m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 0.5 mile

N of the N entrance to Bakkasund. Some of the other dangers

between Stora Kalsoy and Navoy are marked by buoys or iron

perches.

3.26 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25.9m, spans

the N entrance of Bakkasund between Kvaloy and the NW

extremity of Spissoy. Another overhead cable, with a vertical

clearance of 19.8m, extends from the SW extremity of Nautoy

to Hidleroy.

Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden

3.27 Indreleia comprises the fjords and sounds forming the

protected inland navigation route between Skudenesfjorden

and Korsfjorden. Karmsundet is the first, or southernmost,

reach of Indreleia. Vessels proceeding N from Stavanger to

Bergen can enter Karmsundet from the N side of Skudenesfjorden. Between Haugesund, at the N end of Karmsund, and

the entrance of Bomlafjorden, about 8 miles N, the route leads

along the outer coast and is only partly protected by the inshore

islet groups.

3.27 North of Bomlafjorden, Indreleia offers alternate routes, of

which the E, through Langenuen, should be taken by large

vessels. The W route leads through Stokksund and Nyleid.

Both routes join N of the island of Stord.

3.27 North of Stord, the principal route passes between Huftaroy

and Reksteren, through the W part of Bjornefjorden, and then

E of Lille Laugaroy (60°09'N., 5°15'E.) into Korsfjorden. 

3.27 The secondary route leads N through Bekkjorviksund, Mokstrafjorden, and Hundvakosen, then through the channel between Krossoy and Staloy, and E of Store Skorpo into Korsfjorden.

3.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in Indreleia. 

3.27 Most of the inner fjords and sounds which are adjacent to

this section of Indreleia penetrate inland in a general NE direction through the Hardangerfjorden region and have the group

name of Hardangerfjordenane. This grand inlet is, perhaps, the

most beautiful of all the Norwegian fjords. Its various branches

extend through districts abounding in game and presenting a

great diversity of magnificent scenery.

3.27 The main branch is a continuation of Bomlafjorden and extends, under various names, about 50 miles NE from its entrance. It then branches, with one branch, Sorfjorden, extending about 20 miles S, and the other, Eidfjorden, extending

15 miles E. There are also numerous smaller branches, in most

of which anchorages can be found. Hardangerfjordenane is for

the most part free from dangers; their shores are nearly everywhere steep-to.

3.27 Caution.—In winter, falling snow is the greatest danger, as

the land is so often completely obscured for hours on end, even

when quite close. In Indreleia, when a snowstorm threatens,

careful bearings of the nearest anchorage should be taken to

enable the vessel to seek shelter. Because of the tidal currents,

it is dangerous to heave-to.

The Inner Fjords

3.28 Karmsundet (59°09'N., 5°21'E.) is about 17 miles

long from its S entrance in Skudenesfjorden, between

Skudenes, the SE extremity of Karmoy, and the SW point of

Vestre Bokn, about 3 miles ENE. It lies in a generally N direction between Karmoy, on the W, and Vestre Bokn, Fosenoy,

and the mainland of the Haugesund peninsula, N of Fosenoy,

on the E. 

3.28 Karmsundet may be considered the beginning of Indreleia.

The port of Haugesund (see paragraph 3.10) is on the E side of

the N end of Karmsundet, and Kopervik (see paragraph 3.29) is

on the W side, about 8 miles above the S entrance of the sound.

It is easily navigated and is used often. Vessels of 40,000 dwt

with a draft of 9.7m can navigate the sound. Its S part is deep

and its fairway is free from dangers. Special care should be

taken, however, near the W end and N end of Fosenoy and in

other narrow portions of the sound.

3.28 Gronestadvag (59°12'N., 5°23'E.) lies on the E side of

Karmsundet. A beacon stands on the N entrance point of the

bay. An 8m depth lies about 183m offshore, 0.15 mile NW of

the beacon; a 4m depth lies about 183m W of the beacon.

Kjelsflu, which is marked by an iron perch, is on the N side

close within the entrance of Gronestadvag. 

3.28 Foul ground fringes the S entrance point up to 183m offshore; a 5m depth lies nearly in the middle of the bay. 

3.28 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in Gronestadvag.

3.28 Trosnavag (59°13'N., 5°23'E.) is another small bight on the

E side of Karmsundet. Trosnavagneset, its SW entrance point,

is located about 1 mile N of the beacon at the entrance of

Gronestadvag. Skruholme is located about 0.1 mile NNE of

Trosnavagneset. A number of rocks, one of which is awash and

marked by an iron perch, lie between them. Small vessels with

local knowledge can anchor in Trosnavag.

3.28 Ternholme, about 2 miles NNW of Trosnavagneset, is at the

S end of a chain of islets and rocks extending about 2 miles

from the S point of Fosenoy. Ternholmflu, with a depth of 4m

and marked by a buoy, lies at the end of foul ground extending

about 0.2 mile SSW from Ternholme.

3.28 Smorstakk, an islet easily identified by its sugarloaf shape, is

the SW of the islets extending S from Fosenoy. 

3.29 Kopervik (59°17'N., 5°19'E.) (World Port Index No.

23450) is located on the W side of Karmsundet. The harbor is

situated on both sides of an inlet. Vessels wishing to anchor

should do so N of Byggnesskjera, which marked by an iron

perch; the bottom holding ground is a mixture of clay and rock.

The Stromsund Bridge spans the inlet about 0.3 mile within

the entrance. Vessels with a draft up to 5.8m can pass the

bridge. The vertical clearance under the middle of the bridge is

reported to be 3.3m.

3.29 Stangalandsvagen and Skipparvik are small inlets close S

and N of the harbor. Skipparvik is spanned by a cable with a

vertical clearance of 15.8m.

3.29 There is 570m of quayage with depths of 5 to 10m alongside.

There are facilities for coastal tankers, ferries, and ro-ro vessels. Vessels up to 80m in length and 10m draft have been

accommodated at the port.

3.29 Kaleflu, awash and marked by an iron perch, lies close off a
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 55

Pub. 182

point S of the entrance to Stangalandsvagen. Mandalsflu, a

3.9m depth marked by a buoy, is located about 0.1 mile N of

Kaleflu.

3.29 A light is shown from Koparnaglen, a rock close offshore N

of the approach to Kopervik. An iron perch marks a group of

rocks, with depths of 1.8m and less, which lie between Koparnaglen and the shore W. 

3.29 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered through the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. 

3.29 Anchorage.—Vessels awaiting pilots should anchor, in

about 37m, with the light on Koparnaglen bearing about 290°.

3.29 Anchorage can also be taken close E of the harbor entrance,

in 14.6 to 20.1m. 

3.30 From Kopervik, Karmsundet trends N for about 3

miles, then continues NNW for about 3 miles to the narrows of

the sound at Salhusstraummen. The E shore of this section is

quite regular, and there are few islets, but the W side is indented by three separate areas in which there are numerous

islets, rocks, and detached dangers, some of which are marked

by perches or buoys. Mandalsflua, a 2.5m patch marked by an

iron perch, lies on the S side of the approach to Kopervik, 0.4

mile SSE of Koparnaglen. 

3.30 A small 15m depth lies on the W side of the fairway about 1

mile NNE of Koparnaglen.

3.30 Several above and below-water rocks, marked by two iron

perches, lie along the W shore of Karmsundet, about 1 mile

NNW of the bridge. A 2.9m depth, marked by an iron perch, is

located close off the E shore opposite the rocks.

3.30 Salhusstraummen (59°22'N., 5°18'E.) is the narrowest part

of Karmsundet. There is a bridge which has a vertical clearance of 45m and a horizontal clearance of 90m. Green lights

are shown from the bridge to indicate the fairway. An overhead

cable, with a vertical clearance of 47m, spans the channel

about 183m S of the bridge.

3.30 A fish oil factory and an oil tank farm on the N shore of the

bay have quays, with depths alongside of 6m. Quays, with

depths alongside of 3 to 4m, are located at Utvik, in the SW

corner of the bay.

3.31 Boviki (59°22'N., 5°18'E.), on the W side of the fairway, affords good anchorage, in depths up to 31m. In the outer

part of the bay, the bottom is mostly sand and shingle. From

abreast the tile works and inward, it is mud. Boflu, lying in the

N part of Boviki, has a depth of 2m and is marked by an iron

perch. Kyrkjeflu, on the S side of Boviki about 0.2 mile

offshore, has a depth of 2.7m and is marked by an iron perch. 

3.31 Three overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 60m, span

Karmsundet close S of Kulorten. Mariners are cautioned that,

within a distance of about 1 mile, the overhead cable gives a

radar echo similar to that of a ship on a collision course. 

3.31 Kulorten, marked by a tower beacon, lies 91m offshore about

0.5 mile N of Koltrepynten. Storetang, a rock with less than

1.8m, lies about 0.1 mile S of Kulorten and is marked by a

buoy.

3.31 Koltrepynten (59°19'N., 5°20'E.), on the W shore of Karmsundet, is the site of an aluminum works. There is a concrete

quay, 270m long, with a depth alongside of 11.6m. It is reported that vessels of up to 100,000 dwt have been accommodated

alongside. It has a large conspicuous warehouse, cranes, and a

plant for discharging alumina.

3.32 The fjords and channels which continue in a NE direction from Bomlafjorden are called Hardangerfjorden. Occasionally, there are heavy squalls, and visibility is reduced.

There are few other dangers, however, and the fjords are, for

the most part, easy to navigate.

3.32 Generally, the shores are steep and rise to heights of about

914m, but there are many bays and small fjords where flat,

fertile land is largely used for cherry and apple orchards. 

3.32 The lower slopes are generally covered with pine forests,

above which there is a belt of summer pasture land. The summits are, however, of bare rock, except where Folgefonni, a

glacier about 1,654m high, covers 108 square miles of the

mountain region between the main fjord and Sorfjorden.

3.32 Regular ship communication is maintained between places

in Hardangerfjorden and other places on the Norwegian coast.

3.32 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for most vessels.

3.32 Anchorage.—When selecting an anchorage, avoid anchoring too near shore in places exposed to avalanches.

3.33 Laukhamarsund (59°52'N., 5°36'E.) is the navigable

channel between Huglo and Skorpo leading NW from Husnesfjorden into the SE part of Skjeljaviksund. Skolten, a rock with

a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch, lies on

the N side of the fairway about 0.3 mile ENE of Kvarvaneset,

the NW extremity of Huglo. Skolten is the only known danger

in Laukhamarsund.

3.33 A cable, with a vertical clearance of 50m, spans a narrow

portion of the sound about 0.5 mile E of Kvarvaneset.

3.33 Skorpesund (59°55'N., 5°38'E.) separates the island of

Skorpo from the SW side of the irregular peninsula extending

from the SE side of Tysnesoy. The sound is narrow and should

not be used without local knowledge. Near its middle part, a

reef extends from each of the shores almost halfway across the

sound; an iron perch marks each of these reefs.

3.33 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25m, crosses

Skorpesund about 1 mile within its SE entrance. 

3.33 Seloysund, Midtoysund, and Anuglosund are the three

channels, from W to E, leading N from Husnesfjorden to

Onarheimsfjorden (59°57'N., 5°41'E.) among Seloy, Midtoy,

Courtesy of Eirik Hustvedt

Kopervik
56 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

and Anuglo. Several small islets and many above and belowwater rocks lie in Seloysund and Anuglosund. 

3.33 Midtoysund is free from dangers, except near the middle of

its W side, where reefs extend about 0.1 mile offshore. At its N

end, Midtoysund becomes quite narrow and has a least charted

depth of 29m in the fairway.

3.33 An overhead cable crosses each of these sounds. There are

vertical clearances of 17m, 30m, and 25m, respectively, under

these cables. A submarine cable is laid across Midtoysund and

another across Anuglosund.

3.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Rysslandsvik

(59°52'N., 5°44'E.), on the SE side of Husnesfjorden about 4

miles SSW of Heroy, in 14.6 to 29m, sand. 

3.34 Husnes (59°52'N., 5°46'E.) (World Port Index No.

23355) is located on the E side of Ondarheimsvag, about 3

miles SSW of Heroy. A quay at Husnes is 240m long, with

10.4m alongside, and can accommodate vessels up to 40,000

dwt. There is a hauling-off buoy moored off the quay. The quay

is well fendered and equipped with two cranes.

3.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered through the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. 

3.34 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Husnes in Ondarheimsvag, in 12.8 to 16.5m, sand. This location is exposed to N

winds.

3.35 Heroysund (59°55'N., 5°47'E.), between Heroy and

the mainland to the E, affords anchorage for small vessels, but

it is exposed to strong squalls; small quays and mooring rings

are available. Vessels entering from S should pass between

Heroy and the foul ground S of it.

3.35 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 20m, spans

the N part of Heroysund. 

3.35 Kvinnheradsfjorden trends NE from Husnesfjorden for about

14 miles and joins Hissfjorden in the vicinity of the islet of

Sild.

3.35 Tangeflu (59°56'N., 5°44'E.), marked by an iron beacon, lies

on the SW side of the junction of Kvinnheradsfjorden and

Husnesfjorden, in a position about 0.2 mile ENE of the NE

extremity of Anuglo. Rocks, with depths of 4.9m and less, lie

up to 0.2 mile off the N side of this islet.

3.35 Fjaereflu, on which a beacon stands, is located near the

middle of Onarheimsfjorden, in a position about 2 miles NNW

of Tangeflu. A 5m depth lies close SE of the rock.

3.35 Onarheim (59°57'N., 5°38'E.), located on the SW shore of

Onarheimsfjorden, has a 35m long quay, with depths of 3 to

6m alongside. Several quays, with depths of 4m alongside, are

located at Vattedal, about 1 mile NNE of Onarheim.

3.35 Anchorage.—The best anchorage in Onarheimsfjorden is

located on the NE side of the fjord in Teroysund, the channel E

of Teroy. Anchorage can be taken, in 9.1 to 18.3m, sand and

clay. 

3.36 Lokksundet (60°03'N., 5°43'E.) is a narrow sound

separating the island of Tysnesoy from the mainland to the E

and joins Onarheimsfjorden with Bjornefjorden. It is about 5

miles in length. The least depth of 12.8m is found in the narrowest part of the sound, where the width is 183m.

3.36 Moderate-size vessels visiting Hardangerfjorden and the

other fjords of this region use Lokksundet when bound N to

Bergen. The main channel of Indreleia is joined in Langenuen

N of the island of Reksteren.

3.36 During calm weather, the current in Lokksundet always

flows N, with a velocity of up to 2 knots during S winds. The

current may flow S during N winds and has been reported to

reach a velocity of 3 knots. There are eddies in the bays on

either side of the channel.

3.36 Sandoy is on the W side of Lokksundet S entrance. A rock

lies, awash, about 0.2 mile NE of its N end. Hamarhaugflu

Light (60°00'N., 5°44'E.) is shown from a white lantern on

piles on the SW side of a reef fringing the E entrance point of

Lokksundet. A 7.8m depth lies about 0.4 mile N of Sandsoy. 

3.36 An 1.5m depth, marked by a perch, lies on the W side of the

channel, about 1 mile NNW of Sandsoy; a 3m depth lies about

160m SSE of the perch.

3.36 At Nymark, on the W side of the sound about 1 mile NNW

of Hamarhaugflu, there is a quay with 5m alongside. 

3.37 Storsundet (59°57'N., 5°53'E.), on the SE side of

Kvinnheradsfjorden, is entered from the S between Skorpegavlen (59°56'N., 5°48'E.) and Heroy. This navigable

channel has depths greater than 37m throughout the fairway. It

is formed between the mainland and the S and E sides of

Skorpo, Snilstveitoy, and Kalven, close-lying islets which extend in a continuous chain from Skorpegavlen to Kalvtangen, 6

miles NE. Storsundet trends ENE for about 6 miles, then continuing in a general N direction for 2.25 miles into Kvinnheradsfjorden. The sound is notorious for squalls.

3.37 Flatholmen (59°56'N., 5°51'E.), on the S side of Storsundet,

is joined to Neset, a prominent point about 2 miles E of Skorpegavlen.

3.37 Skjeret, which is marked by a beacon, lies on the N side of

the fairway in a position about 0.2 mile S of Oyeneset, the SE

point of Snilstveitoy. A 4.5m depth is located between the rock

and the point.

3.37 Holmeflu (59°57'N., 5°58'E.), with a depth of less than 1.8m

and marked by an iron perch, is on the S side of the fairway and

extends about 0.1 mile W from Ytreholme, a small islet lying

close off a salient point about 1 mile SE of Oyeneset. Two

rocks lie, awash, close NE of Holmeflu; a 6.1m depth is located

close SW. Elsewhere in Storsundet, the known dangers are

close inshore.

3.37 Uskedal (59°56'N., 5°52'E.), on the SE side of Storsundet

close E of Flatholmen, has quays with depths alongside of 4 to

6m. Fresh water is available. A quay, with 5m alongside, is

located at Dimmelsvik, about 1 mile ESE of Skjeret.

3.37 Rosendal (59°59'N., 6°00'E.), located on the E shore of

Storsundet, has a quay, with depths up to 6m alongside. Fuel

oil is available. Another quay, with depths of up to 6m alongside, is located at Seimsfoss about 1 mile S of Rosendal.

3.37 Anchorage.—Small vessel anchorages are found in several

coves along the S shore of Storsundet. 

3.38 Husavagen (60°00'N., 5°48'E.) indents the NW shore

Port of Husnes Home Page

http://www.husneshavn.no
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 57

Pub. 182

of Kvinnheradsfjorden for nearly 2 miles in a NNE direction.

The bay narrows gradually. Kyrkjevag, narrow and rock encumbered, trends NE from the head of Husavagen for about 1

mile. Depths within Husavagen are ample and all known dangers are inside the 9.1m curve, which lies within 183m offshore.

3.38 Ulke, on the NW shore of Husavagen close to the head of the

bay, has a quay, 21m long, with depths of up to 6.3m alongside.

3.38 Anchorage.—Husavagen affords anchorage to vessels of

considerable size, in about 40m, soft clay, S of Husa, which is

at the head of the bay. About 1 mile S of Husa, anchorage can

be taken, in about 35m, sand and clay. Husavagen is exposed to

S winds. 

3.39 Latrevikklubben (60°04'N., 5°59'E.) is the S extremity of Varaldsoy. Four coves, Latrevik, Ferjevag, Knarrevik,

and Akrehamn, are on the SE side of Varaldsoy between

Latrevikklubben and a point about 3 miles NE. Akreholme and

two above-water rocks W of it, lie close off the entrance of

Akrehamn. Three channels lead in among the islet and rocks. 

3.39 The middle channel is the deepest and leads between

Akreholme and the rocks to the W. The E channel, which has a

depth of 5.5m, leads N of Akreholme; a rock on the S side of

the fairway is marked by an iron perch.

3.39 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage in

Akrehamn, in depths of 7 to 10m, mud. 

3.40 Oynafjorden (60°06'N., 5°55'E.), which is formed

between Varaldsoy and the mainland to the W, trends N for

about 5 miles and then turns NE into Bondesundet. In Bondesundet, Kraka and other nearby rocks lie within 0.15 mile of

the NW shore; an iron perch marks the outer edge of these

dangers. Other dangers in the sound and some small islets lie

close offshore and are generally located within or near the few

coves that indent both shores. An overhead cable, with a

vertical clearance of 50m, crosses Bondesund 2.25 miles NE of

Bundesund Light. 

3.40 Caution.—Because of the strong currents in Bondesundet,

its use is not recommended. Submarine cables are laid SE from

Mundheim, at the head of Oynafjorden, to the E shore, and

SSE for 2.5 miles and then E to Varaldsoy.

3.40 Gjermundshamn (60°04'N., 5°55'E.), located on the SW

side of the entrance to Oynafjorden, has a quay with a least

depth of 7m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are available.

3.40 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in Gjermundshamn, in 15 to 20m, sand and mud.

3.40 Vagen, located on the SW side of Varaldsoy, about 1 mile N

of its S extremity, has quays with depths of 4 to 12m alongside. 

3.40 Two quays, with depths up to 5m alongside, are located at

Mundheim.

3.41 Maurangerfjorden (60°06'N., 6°10'E.) trends NE

from the NE part of Kvinnheradsfjorden for about 5 miles and

then branches. One branch, named Nordpollen, trends NNE for

about 2 miles; the other, named Austrepollen, trends ENE for

about 2 miles. Great depths prevail throughout the fjord, except

that numerous above and below-water rocks extend across

Austrepollen within 0.5 mile of its head. The two arms are usually icebound during hard winters.

3.41 Bondhusbre, a branch of the large glacier Folgefonn, is on

the S side of Maurangerfjorden. Steep cliffs are on both sides

of the fjord.

3.41 Mountain squalls can be violent towards the head of the

fjord, especially during E winds. Because of possible landslides, vessels should avoid approaching the shores of Maurangerfjorden too closely. Several submarine cables are laid

across the fjord and its two arms. A cable, with a vertical

clearance of 65m, spans the fjord about 4 miles within the entrance, close W of Sundal.

3.41 Sundal, on the S shore about 4 miles within the entrance, has

a small wharf, with alongside depths of 3 to 4m. Fuel oil and

fresh water are available. Eikanes, on the N shore of the fjord

about 1 mile WNW of Sundal, has a small masonry quay, with

alongside depths of 3.9 to 5m.

3.41 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the wharf of

Sundal, in about 35m. Good anchorage can be taken near the

head of Nordpollen. 

3.42 Hissfjorden (60°12'N., 6°03'E.) extends N and NE

for about 10 miles from the N portion of Kvinnheradsfjorden to

its junction with Ytre Samlofjorden in the vicinity of Jondal.

The shores of Hissfjorden are mostly steep-to, except along the

NW side. In places along this shore small islets and rocks lie

up to 0.25 mile offshore. Some of the outermost dangers are

marked by iron perches. An overhead cable, with a vertical

clearance of 65m, spans Hissfjorden about 2 miles SW of

Jondal.

3.42 A quay at Fosse (60°16'N., 6°02'E.), on the NW shore of

Hissfjorden, has alongside depths of 3 to 5m.

3.42 Kysnes (60°12'N., 6°07'E.), located on the SE side of

Hissfjorden, has a quay, with depths of up to 5m alongside.

Torsnes, about 3 miles NE of Kysnes, has a quay with depths

of 5 to 6m.

3.42 A quay at Jondal (60°16'N., 6°15'E.) is 65m long, with

depths of 4 to 10m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are

available.

3.42 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the village of

Jondal. 

3.43 Ytre Samlafjorden (60°21'N., 6°18'E.) extends NE

for about 6 miles from Hissfjorden to its junction with Indre

Samlafjorden off of Samlaneset, a salient point on the S shore. 

3.43 General depths through the main fjord are great, and the

fairway is clear. There are some dangers and islets which lie

close offshore and within the several bays indenting the shores

on both sides.

3.43 Herand (60°20'N., 6°23'E.) is at the head of a bay which is

entered about 2 miles S of Samlaneset. Herandsholme is the

largest of several islets lying close off the SW entrance point of

this bay. A quay with up to 4m alongside is located at Herand.

3.43 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken near the head of the

bay E of Herandsholme. Care must be taken to avoid a group of

rocks, marked by an iron perch, in the SE part of the anchorage. 

3.43 Norheimsund is an inlet extending in a NW direction from

the NW side of Ytre Samlafjorden. Fairway depths in the outer

part of Norheimsund are 18.3 to 48m. The narrow inner part

has a least charted depth of 11m in the deeper SW channel.

There is a 6-knot speed limit in Norheimsund.
58 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

3.43 Vikoy is located on the S shore of Norheimsund about 2

miles SE of the head of the inlet. Several rocks, including an

above-water rock, lie up to 0.25 mile offshore in the vicinity of

Vikoy. A 9m depth lies about 0.3 mile E of the above-water

rock. A buoy marks the N edge of a shoal area extending N

from the S shore. A quay at a tank installation near Vikoy has a

depth of 6m alongside.

3.43 Vallandsgrunn, marked by a buoy, lies on the N side of the

fairway N of Vikoy. A depth of 7m is charted close E of the

buoy. Between Vallandsgrunn and the shore NW, there are a

number of rocks, some of which lie above water. A light is

shown from near the outer edge of these rocks.

3.43 An islet, with foul ground extending about 183m SE, lies in

the middle of the inner part of Norheimsundand forms two

channels which lead NW to the head of the inlet. The SW

channel is the better one. A buoy is moored on the S edge of

the foul ground.

3.43 Norheimsund (60°22'N., 6°09'E.), is located at the head of

the sound. Several quays, with depths alongside of 3 to 6m, are

located at Norheimsund. 

3.44 Tjuvaholmen (60°22'N., 6°16'E.) is located between

Kvamsoy and the mainland to the NW. A rock close S of

Tjuvaholmen is marked by an iron perch. Another iron perch

marks a group of rocks close off the mainland, NW of Tjuvaholmen. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 28m,

spans the channels between the mainland and Tjuva-holmen

and between that islet and Kvamsoy.

3.44 Oystesevagen (60°23'N., 6°12'E.) trends N for about 1.25

miles from its entrance. Several quays, with alongside depths

of up to 7m, are located at Oystese, a village at the head of the

inlet.

3.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken close off the head of

the inlet. Take caution to avoid the submarine cable along the E

shore and a 7.5m shoal 0.5 mile S of the head. 

3.45 Fyksesundet (60°25'N., 6°15'E.) trends NNW for

about 5 miles from the NW side of Ytre Samlafjorden. The

sound varies in width from about 91m to 0.3 mile between

steep mountains on either side. It is the narrowest and most

gloomy branch of Hardangerfjorden. Squalls occur in the

sound, especially during E winds.

3.45 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 26.5m, spans Fyksesundet about 1 mile from the entrance to the sound. Several

overhead cables, of which the least vertical clearance is 27m,

and several submarine cables cross the inlet throughout its

length. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 17m,

crosses a small bight of the sound at its N end. Steinsto, on the

E shore, close NW of the entrance to the sound, has a quay

with 8 to 10m alongside. 

3.45 A mooring buoy is located a little over 2.5 miles within the

entrance. A rock close off the SW entrance to the sound is

marked by an iron perch. Rysholme lies in mid-channel, about

0.5 mile within the entrance. 

3.45 Indre Samlafjorden extends in a NE direction from Samlaneset for about 8 miles to its junction with Utnefjorden. 

3.45 Ytre Alvik (60°25'N., 6°23'E.), located on the N shore of

Indre Samlafjorden, has a small quay, with 5m alongside.

3.45 Indre Alvik, also located on the N shore of Indre Samlafjorden about 2 miles further NE of Ytre Alvik, is the site of a

ferro-silicon works. It has its own quays, the largest of which is

82m long, with depths of 9 to 10m alongside. 

3.45 Two 7.5 ton cranes are located on the quay. Two mooring

buoys are located about 91m off the quay at Indre Alvik. 

3.45 Pilotage is compulsory. Anchorage can be taken in the bay

W of the quays, in a clay bottom. 

3.46 Utnefjorden (60°26'N., 6°38'E.) trends about 4 miles

in a SE direction from Indre Samlafjorden to its junction with

Eidfjorden and Sorfjorden. The fjord is deep and clear in the

fairway. 

3.46 Utne (60°26'N., 6°37'E.), on the SW shore, has a quay, with

depths from 4 to 7m alongside. Tingnesflu, marked by an iron

perch, lies close offshore about 0.2 mile NW of the quay at

Utne. Numerous submarine cables are laid in Utnefjorden.

Granvinfjorden (60°28'N., 6°37'E.) trends in a general NE

direction for about 5 miles and in places is reduced to a width

of about 0.2 mile. Depths of about 134 to 200m prevail in the

fairway up to the anchorage near the head of the fjord. 

3.46 Granvinfjorden is reported to be ice-free.

3.46 Kvanndal lies on the NW side of Granvinfjorden, about 1

mile within its entrance. There are quays, 100m long, with

depths of 4 to 11m alongside located at Kvanndal. About 1

mile farther up the fjord, on the W side, there is a quay, with up

to 5m, alongside at Folkedal.

3.46 Eide, a village at the head of Granvinfjorden, has a quay,

100m long, with a depth of 12m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh

water are available. 

3.47 Eidfjorden (60°25'N., 6°43'E.) extends ENE from its

junction with Utnefjorden for about 11 miles to the village of

Eidfjorden. Eidfjorden is very deep and free from dangers in

the fairways.

3.47 Djonno (60°28'N., 6°45'E.), on the N side of Eidfjorden

about 3 miles NE of the entrance, has a quay, with depths of 6

to 10m alongside. Another quay at Vallavik, 2.5 miles ENE of

Djonno, has depths of 5 to 6m alongside.

3.48 Eidfjord (60°28'N., 7°04'E.) is a scattered village on

the S side of the head of Eidfjorden. A quay at Eidfjorden is

30m long, with depths of 3 to 5m alongside. Good anchorage

with clay bottom can be taken by vessels of moderate size 0.3

mile W of the quay, avoiding submarine cables NW of the

village; mooring rings are available.

3.48 Ringoy (60°27'N., 6°47'E.), on the SE shore about 3 miles

ENE of the entrance to Eidfjorden, has a quay with depths of

up to 5m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are available.

Vessels approaching the quay must avoid a reef extending a

short distance from the nearby Ringoynes and which is marked

by an iron perch. Brimnes, on the S shore about 4 miles further

NE, has a quay with depths of up to 5m alongside.

3.49 Simadalsfjorden (60°30'N., 7°05'E.) extends about 2

miles ENE from Eidfjorden. Vessels are warned against anchoring in this fjord due to rock falls from the steep mountain

sides and to submarine cables. The fjord often freezes during

the winter. 

Osafjorden (60°30'N., 6°55'E.) extends 6.75 miles NE from

Eidfjorden to Osa and is deep and free from dangers. Squalls

occur in the fjord and are worse during SE winds. During hard
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 59

Pub. 182

winters, the inner part of Osafjorden is icebound. Small vessels

can anchor off Osa, in 40m, clay. A mooring buoy is located off

Osa. Several submarine cables cross the fjord.

3.49 Ulvikfjorden, a smaller inlet, trends N and NE for about 3

miles from the W side of Osafjorden. During hard winters the

entire fjord is icebound. Ulvik, on the NW shore about 1 mile

from the head of Ulvikfjorden, has an angled quay, with depths

off its longest side of 6 to 7m. 

3.49 Hetlenes, on the W shore about 0.5 mile within the entrance

of the inlet, has a quay, with depths of 5 to 8m alongside. A

rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close off the E shore about

0.2 mile SE Of Ulvik.

3.49 Caution.—A seaplane landing area is situated in Ulvikfjorden.

3.50 Sorfjorden (60°24'N., 6°42'E.) extends SSW from

the junction of Utnefjorden and Eidfjorden for about 20 miles

to the town and port of Odda, at its head. This fjord is one of

the most beautiful branches of Hardangerfjorden. Sorfjorden is

narrow and straight. Near its entrance there are extensive farm

lands along both sides, but S of Hovland bare rock walls rise

almost perpendicularly from the water’s edge. 

3.50 The width of Sorfjorden varies between about 0.2 mile and 2

miles. The narrowest part is within 1.25 miles of the head of

the fjord. Throughout the length of the fjord the depths are

ample and in places they exceed 366m. There are few dangers

and all of these lie within 0.3 mile offshore.

3.50 Winds—Weather.—Squalls occur in Sorfjorden and are

often very strong. During hard winters, ice forms in the fjord,

but a channel is usually kept open.

3.51 Kinsarvikbukta (60°23'N., 6°43'E.) is a clear bay

located on the E side of Sorfjorden. Large vessels can anchor

here; the best berth, in 12.8 to 31m, lies in a position SW of the

quay, which is near the village church at the head of the bay. A

rock, marked by an iron perch, lies awash close offshore W of

the church. Two quays at Kinsarvik, at the head of the bay,

have depths of 5 to 6m alongside.

3.51 Ullensvang (60°19'N., 6°39'E.), in a bight on the E shore of

the fjord, has quays with depths of up to 5m alongside.

3.51 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Ullensvang, in

25.6m, but vessels must be prepared for sudden violent squalls.

3.51 A quay at Lofthus, close N of Ullensvang, has 5m alongside.

Fuel oil and fresh water are available. Quays at Lutro and

Instanes, on the E shore of the fjord about 2 and 3 miles,

respectively, NNE of Lofthus, have alongside depths of up to

5m. 

3.51 Grimo (60°23'N., 6°39'E.) and Aga, on the W shore of the

fjord about 2 miles and 7 miles, respectively, SSW of the

entrance to Sorfjorden, each have a quay, with depths alongside of up to 7m. Na, on the W shore about 3 miles SSW of

Aga, has two quays, with depths of up to 5m alongside.

3.51 Espe (60°12'N., 6°36'E.), located on the E shore, has quays

with depths of 6 to 10m alongside.

3.51 Tyssedal (60°07'N., 6°34'E.), located on the E shore, has

about 335m of quayage. One 45-ton crane and one 2.5-ton

crane are available. Depths alongside the larger of the quays

range from 12 to 14m. The largest of the several quays at a zinc

works at Eitrem, on the W shore, 1 mile SW of Tyssedal is 73m

long with depths from 9 to 11m alongside.

3.52 Odda (60°05'N., 6°33'E.) (World Port Index No.

23240) is located at the S end of Sorfjorden. Facilities of the

port are adjacent to the town at the head of the fjord and at

Eitrem, about 1 mile NNW. Odda is known for its extensive

electro-chemical and electro-metallurgical industries. 

3.52 Wind—Weather.—During the summer months there is usually considerable haze and rain, much of the haze being attributable to the smog given off by the plants in the town. There is

some smoke control. Because the harbor is protected from the

winds, such control is inadequate. 

3.52 Tides—Currents.—The spring tidal rise is 0.6m. A slight

tidal current sets outward through Sorfjorden.

3.52 Depths—Limitations.—The E and W shores of the harbor

are steep-to. The 18.3m curve lies about 0.3 mile N of the head

of the fjord and in the NW part of the harbor rounds Eitrheimnes to a position about the same distance S of that point. Shoal

water extends about 183m S from Eitrheimsnes. 

3.52 General depths in the middle part of the harbor are 35 to

50m. Depths in the anchorage area range from 29m to about

44m.

3.52 There are quays, with reported depths of 5.1 to 13.7m alongside. There are facilities for container and bulk vessels. 

3.52 Vessels up to 26,000 dwt and 9.1m draft, and chemical

tankers up to 10,000 dwt, can be accommodated.

3.52 Aspect.—The harbor of Odda is formed by the S part of

Sorfjorden. It is entered through the narrows, about 1 mile N of

the head of the fjord, which is formed by a small peninsula

terminating S in Eitrheimsnes and the shore, to the E.

3.52 Except for the head of the fjord where the town of Odda is

located, the harbor is surrounded by mountains. The E and W

shores rise steeply from the water’s edge to heights of 1,067m

and 1,189m. There are no beaches as such.

3.52 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered through the Safe Sea

Net or, alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. 

3.52 Signals.—VHF channel 16 is guarded from 0900 to 1600

and has a range as far as the entrance to Sorfjorden.

3.52 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in the W part of the basin

N of the town, in 29.3m, clay, well sheltered from all winds.

The holding ground is good to the W portion of the basin.

Caution must be taken to avoid submarine cables and outfall

pipelines.

3.52 Caution.—Navigation through the fjords leading to Odda

presents no difficulties, but, because of the many fierce squalls,

caution is always necessary. 

3.53 Bjornafjorden (60°06'N., 5°25'E.) trends E for about

13 miles from Langenuen. It is bound on the S by the N sides

of the islands of Reksteren and Tysnesoy and on the N and E

by the mainland.

3.53 The fairway leading through the length of Bjornafjorden is

clear and deep. On the S side of the fjord, a number of islets

and rocks lie within 2 miles off the N side of Tysnesoy and

about 1 mile off the NE end of Reksteren. 

3.53 On the NW side islands, islets and rocks lie up to 2 miles off

the mainland. Elsewhere, the shores of Bjornafjorden are

relatively steep-to. In the side fjords there are some islets and

dangers.

3.53 Store Vernoy (60°05'N., 5°26'E.) is separated from the NE

side of Reksteren by a narrow channel which dries. It is the

largest of a group of islets lying within 1.5 miles E of the NE
60 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 

Pub. 182

point of Reksteren. Numerous small islets and above and

below-water rocks are in this group.

3.53 Veaneset (60°03'N., 5°29'E.) is the NW extremity of

Tysnesoy. From Veaneset, the N side of Tysnesoy trends very

irregularly ENE for about 7 miles to Krossnes, on the W side

of the Lokksundet entrance. It is indented by several bays and

coves.

3.53 Off the N coast of Tysnesoy there are some larger islets,

including Store Godoy and Lille Godoy, and many close-lying

small islets and above and below-water rocks. 

3.53 Godoysund, a channel which is navigable by small vessels

with local knowledge, separates Store Godoy and Lille Godoy.

Iron perches mark some of the dangers in both approaches to

Godoysund. A overhead cable and several submarine cables

cross the channel.

3.53 Tysnesvik (60°03'N., 5°32'E.) is entered about 1.25 miles E

of Veaneset. Above and below-water rocks are on both sides of

the entrance and within the inlet. Some of the dangers in the

entrance to Tysnesvik are marked by two iron perches and a

buoy.

3.53 Vage, on the W shore of Tysnesvik, has a quay, with depths

of 4 to 13m alongside. Two other quays have depths of up to

7m alongside.

3.53 Gripnesvag (60°04'N., 5°40'E.) is a small inlet about 1 mile

WSW of Krossnes. The entrance channel is narrow and has a

least depth of 4.5m.

3.54 Soreidsvik (60°03'N., 5°28'E.) is entered between

Veaneset and Raftodden, a projection on Reksteren about 1

mile WSW. From the entrance, Soreidsvik trends S for about 4

miles, and, except at its head, is deep and free from dangers in

the fairway.

3.54 Many small bays and coves indent the shores of the inlet;

small quays are located at several of these places.

3.54 Aquay at Bruntveit (60°02'N., 5°26'E.), on the W shore of

the inlet, has a quay, with a least alongside depth of 5m. 

3.54 Uggdalseidet, close to the SE head of the inlet, has quays

with depths of up to 5m alongside. Fuel oil is available.

3.54 Indroy (60°09'N., 5°25'E.), on the N side of Bjornafjorden,

lies in a bight of the mainland, with its S extremity about 2

miles ENE of Rotingtangen. Ytroy lies close W of Indroy.

3.54 Hauglandssund, between Indroy and the mainland E of it, is

entered between Skjerholme and Bjornahaug, the S extremity

of the mainland, about 0.5 mile E. A light is shown from a rock

close SW of Bleikja, an islet in mid-channel, about 0.5 mile

NW of Bjornahaug. 

3.54 Hauglandssund is narrow in places but free from dangers in

the fairway. A depth of 6m is available through the sound.

Vessels must not exceed a speed of 8 knots in Hauglandssund

when N of Bleikja.

3.54 A quay, 46m long, with depths of 4 to 8m alongside, is located at Halgjem, on the mainland about 0.5 mile N of Bleikja. 

3.54 Stegleholme (60°09'N., 5°41'E.) is the farthest S of several

islets fronting Strandvik to a distance of 0.5 mile off the NE

shore of Bjornafjorden. Knapholme and Storholme are other

islets in the group. Foul ground extends about 0.1 mile SE from

Storholme. Overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 20m

and 15m, connect Stegleholme to Storholme and Storholme to

the mainland.

3.55 Strandvik (60°10'N., 5°41'E.), which has several

quays with depths of up to 8m alongside, is on the mainland

NW of Knapholme. A reef extending about 183m SW from

Knapholme is marked by an iron perch.

3.55 Saevareidfjorden is entered between Storholme and a mainland point about 1 mile E. This side fjord trends N and NE

from Bjornafjorden for about 3 miles to Saevareid at its head.

Depths through the fairway are ample, and most of the shore is

steep-to. A depth of 4.3m is charted about 0.2 mile off the E

shore in a position nearly 1 mile NE of Storholme. 

3.55 Very heavy squalls are experienced in Saevareidfjorden,

especially off Mulsodden, a projection on the NW shore about

1 mile NNE of Storholme.

3.55 Saevareid (60°11'N., 5°45'E.) has several small quays. The

largest is 43m long, with depths of 7.8 to 19.3m alongside. A

salmon farm installation is moored at the W end of the quay.

3.56 Lygrepollen (60°04'N., 5°46'E.), located at the E end

of Bjornefjorden, is available only to small vessels with local

knowledge. The entrance channel is very narrow and is fringed

by islets and above and below-water rocks, some of which are

marked by aids. The least depth in the fairway is 5.5m. 

3.56 About 1 mile within the entrance, the basin becomes deeper

and broader and then leads off into three separate branches. 

3.56 Overhead cables, with a least vertical clearance of 20m, span

the entrance. Several submarine cables are laid across the

entrance and in the N branches.

3.56 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in various

coves inside the bay. 

3.57 Fusafjorden (60°10'N., 5°32'E.) is a deep inlet which

extends in a NNE direction from the N side of Bjornefjorden. 

3.57 About 7 miles within the entrance, Eikelandsfjorden

branches E for 3.5 miles, and Adlandsfjorden branches NE for

the same distance. The fairway is free from dangers. Except for

Sandholmane, the islets and dangers in the fjord are close offshore.

3.57 Sandholmane, a group of small islets and nearby rocks, lies

on the W side of the fairway about 3 miles within the Fusafjorden entrance. A rock, with a depth of 2.5m and marked by a

buoy, is located about 0.2 mile NNE of the northernmost islet

of Sandholmane.

3.57 Raudholmane (60°10'N., 5°28'E.), a group of above and

below-water rocks, lies up to 0.3 mile offshore about 1 mile

WSW of Sandholmane. Two iron perches mark two detached

rocky patches, with depths of less than 1.8m, lying about 183m

SW and SSW of Raudholmane. 

3.57 Another iron perch marks a rock lying, awash, near Ferstadvag, about 0.2 mile SW of Raudholmane. Depths of 2.4m are

charted up to 183m offshore in the vicinity of Mobergvik,

about 0.5 mile N of Raudholmane.

3.57 Os (60°11'N., 5°28'E.) is located on the SW shore of Fusafjorden. An angled quay at Os has a depth of 4m alongside.

3.57 Hattevik lies at the head of a small inlet on the W side of

Fusafjorden, about 3 miles NE of Os. It has a quay, with 4 to

6m alongside. Anchoring in the cove is not recommended

because of submarine cables. Ferry service is maintained

between Hattevik and Fusa, across the fjord about 3 miles E. 

3.57 Fusa, where there is a quay with 4 to 7m alongside, is
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 61

Pub. 182

located in a cove. An iron perch marks a shoal close off the W

entrance point of the cove. 

Eilelandsfjorden extends in a ENE direction for about 4

miles from Altaneset, the N entrance point.

3.57 Gjerdevikflu, awash, marked by an iron perch and with

depths of 3 to 4m extending close NE, lies about 1 mile ESE of

Altaneset. This shoal and other known dangers along the S

shore of the fjord all lie within 0.2 mile offshore. 

3.57 On the N shore a small islet, about 1 mile NE of Altaneset,

lies about the same distance offshore and is connected by a

shoal to the shore. Bergsvik, on the S shore of the fjord about 2

miles E of Altaneset, has a quay with depths of 5m alongside.

Eikelandsosen, at the head of the fjord, has a projecting quay

with depths of up to 4m along its N side. 

3.57 Small vessels can anchor SSE of the quay, avoiding submarine cables. West winds send in a considerable sea.

3.58 Adlandsfjorden (60°15'N., 5°38'E.) is formed between the SE side of Bogoy and a mainland peninsula which

terminates in Altaneset. Adlandsfjorden’s entrance is between

Altaneset and Holsundskjaer, about 1 mile W. Holsundskjaer,

consisting of above and below-water rocks, extends about 0.2

mile SSW from the S end of Bogoy. The southernmost danger

is marked by an iron perch; close N of the perch there is a

beacon.

3.58 Adlandsholme lies in the middle of the fjord about 2 miles

NNE of Altaneset. Two other small islets lie between Adlandsholme and Bogoy. Samnoyholme lies about 0.2 mile SW of

Adlandsholme, with rocks marked by perches between the

islets. A light is shown from the E extremity of Adlandsholme.

3.58 Samnoy, a village on Bogoy about 0.5 mile SW of Adlandsholme, has a small quay with depths of 2 to 7m alongside. A

narrow 5.5m channel leads to the quay. Three rocks, each

marked by an iron perch, lie in the approach to Samnoy.

3.59 Holmefjorden (60°17'N., 5°40'E.) lies at the head of

Adlandsfjorden. Iron perches mark some of the dangers in the

approach. Two quays have least depths of about 5 and 6m

alongside. Fresh water is available. 

The entrance to Samnangerfjorden lies between Holsundskjaer and the mainland to the W. About 7 miles above the

entrance, Samnangerfjorden divides; one branch continuing N

for about 2 miles to Trengeried, at its head while the other

trends in a general NE direction for about 4 miles to Arland, at

the head of a basin. 

3.59 A shoal, marked by an iron perch, lies close NW of Holsundskjaer. Hovdeflu, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies

close off Hovdanes the W extremity of Bogoy, which point is

located about 1 mile NNW of Holsundskjaer. 

3.59 Two rocks lie awash close off the opposite shore of the fjord

in a position about 0.5 mile SSW of Hovdeflu.

3.59 A light is shown from Hovdanes.

3.59 Bogavik (60°16'N., 5°35'E.) is located on the W shore of

Samnangerfjorden, about 1 mile N of Hovdanes. A quay

located in a cove at Bogavik has a least depth of 6m alongside.

3.59 A light is shown from the W shore of Samnangerfjorden,

about 2 miles NE of Bogavik.

3.59 Boroy, on the E side of Samnangerfjorden close off the NW

side of Bogoy, is separated from that island by Boroysund. A

depth of 7.3m can be taken through this very narrow channel,

but in it there is a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch. 

3.59 A depth of 3.7m is available through Kluresund, the narrow

channel separating Boroy from the mainland to the N. Iron

perches mark dangers on either side of the fairway through

Kluresund. Both channels lead into Tveitevag. This inlet is

about 2 miles long and very narrow in places.

3.59 Solbjorg (60°18'N., 5°37'E.), located on the W shore of the

fjord about 1 mile W of the N extremity of Boroy, has a quay,

with depths of 4 to 5m alongside.

3.59 Rolsflu, a rock awash and marked by an iron perch, is on the

W side of the fjord about 2 miles NNW of the N end of Boroy.

It lies near the end of a reef extending about 0.2 mile N of a

point extending N from the shore.

3.59 A light is shown from Utskot, on the E side of Samnangerfjorden, about 2 miles N of Boroy.

3.59 Skjeljavag (60°22'N., 5°40'E.) is located on the NE shore of

the NW branch of Samnangerfjorden, about 2 miles N of

Utskot. A quay located on the W side of the head of this branch

has depths of 5 to 7m alongside. A 10-ton crane is available. 

3.60 Gaupholmen (60°22'N., 5°42'E.) lies 183m off the S

shore of the E branch of Samnangerfjorden, about 3 miles NE

of Utskot. Furoyi is located close off the S shore about 1 mile E

of Gaupholmen. 

3.60 A quay, close to Gaupholmen, has depths of up to 7m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are available.

3.60 A light is shown from the W side of the fjord, about 0.5 mile

W of Gaupholmen.

3.60 Tysse, about 0.5 mile E of Furoyi, has a quay, with depths of

3 to 5m alongside. A doctor is available. There is bus and rail

transportation to Bergen.

3.60 Anchorage.—Moderate-sized vessels can anchor in the area

between Furoyi and Tysse.

3.60 A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies awash close off the W

side of Haukaneset, a prominent point on the N shore nearly 1

mile N of Furoyi.
Pub. 182

4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
65

Pub. 182

SECTOR 4 

NORWAY—KORSFJORDEN TO FEDJEOSEN

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway from

Korsfjorden to the island of Fedje, which is in the vicinity of

Fensfjorden and Fedjefjorden. The description is of the outer

islands and islets starting from Korsfjorden and working N; the

approaches to, and the port of Bergen; and the inner fjords NE

of Bergen. 

General Remarks

4.1 Winds—Weather.—Winds, in general, blow from S

and SE in winter and from the N and NE in summer, but there

are local variations. Fog occurs during summer.

4.1 Weather conditions are changeable, varying between the

outer islands and the region near Bergen and the head of the

main fjord system of the sector. The climate at Bergen is mild,

humid, and rainy. Bergen harbor freezes only in very severe

winters. At the head of the fjord system there is slightly less

rain, and the temperatures are lower in winter.

4.1 The climate along the SW coast of Norway is milder than

that of other regions so remote from the Equator. The steady

run of warm water of the North Atlantic Drift by way of the

passage between the Shetland Islands and the Faeroe Islands

and the English Channel into the North Sea and the Norwegian

Sea results in the water of these seas being, in January, at least

20° warmer than in others at the same latitude. This condition

is naturally reflected in the meteorology of the region. Migratory low pressure centers frequent this area in all seasons,

accompanied by repeated intrusions of maritime polar air

which produce overcast to broken cloud decks, unsettled

weather and warm temperatures.

4.1 This maritime influence which is responsible for the warm

winters is present during the summer months as well, exerting

moderating influence on the temperatures, particularly on the

coast.

4.1 Large variations in temperature occur throughout this region

in winter as it is located on the borderline between the cold of

the continent and the mild climate of the Atlantic. Sharp

temperature contrasts are observed at a short distance inland,

according to the direction of motion of the air. With W, SW,

and NW winds from the ocean, temperatures are comparatively

high. The E, SE, and NE winds, particularly the latter, usher in

continental air with the lowest temperatures observed here.

4.1 Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of

winds on the tide levels is small. This is probably due to the

scattering effect of offshore islands and the relatively deep

water close inshore.

4.1 Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is

present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast.

Floating ice is met in spring, when small masses, which are

soon dispersed, may drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and

occasionally from some of the larger fjords to the W and N or

Lindesnes.

4.1 Over the entire area the highest frequency of waves is from

the W quadrant. Along the exposed coast of Norway 65 per

cent of the seas during winter are less than 5 feet in height. 

4.1 It is significant to note that 9 per cent were observed to be

greater than 3.6m high. During the summer, decreased wind

velocities associated with the weakening of the Icelandic

“Low” results in lower sea heights. Observations along the exposed portions of the coast show 83 per cent of the waves to be

less than 1.5m and 4 per cent greater than 3.6m in height.

4.1 Swell conditions along the Norwegian coast are generally

rough. During the winter, 20 per cent of the swell recorded, for

exposed portions of the coast, exceeds 3.6m in height. This

swell is generated over the North Atlantic. During the summer,

conditions are moderated, with only about 6 per cent of the

swells in excess of 3.6m. With 68 per cent of the swells

observed to be less than 1.8m in height.

4.1 Fog.—Bergen experiences both sea and land fog, the

maximum (16 per cent) occurring in July, where a exposed

coastal station like Llsta and Skudenes have lower frequency,

with the maximum occurring in early summer.

4.1 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the North Sea are always semidiurnal, with very little diurnal inequality between the two

HWs or the two LWs of each tidal day.

4.1 The tide progresses into the North Sea from the Atlantic

Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the

North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal

point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and

W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the

6th meridian. Along the W coast of Norway the progression is

N to about 60°N; N of this, the progression is E.

4.1 Along the W coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually increase

toward the N, from 0.2m at Mandal to about 0.9m at Bergen.

4.1 Currents, in general set at right angles to the coast. In the S

half of the sector the set is seaward during the falling tide and

toward the land during the rising tide.

4.1 In the N half of the sector, the set is NW with the greatest

velocity during the falling tide. These currents are not strong,

however, except in the narrow passage and are affected by the

winds. 

4.1 Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

4.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

4.1 Caution.—The N current off the S part of the W coast of

Norway tends to set toward this coast. A considerable set

toward the coast may be experienced between the entrance of

Bomlafjorden and Breisunddybet while the tide is rising at

Bergen. This set occurs especially during SW, W, and NW

gales.

4.2 The coast between Store Marstein, an islet on the S

side of the entrance to Korsfjorden, and the island of Fedje,

about 38 miles NNW, is irregular. It consists of numerous inlets and small fjords, and is scattered with many small islands

and peninsulas. 

4.2 The general direction of the fjords is NW; the principal
66 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 

Pub. 182

exceptions are Osterfjorden and its continuation, which trends

to the NE, and Sorfjorden and Veafjorden, on the E side of

Osteroy, which trend to the N. The fjords are deep and vary in

width.

4.2 Off-lying islands fronting this coastal sector and the peninsulas are lower than 305m in height and are generally rocky

with stunted trees. The coast of the mainland, the island of

Osteroy, and the Bergen peninsula rise to an elevation of about

610m and have extensive patches of wooded, fertile land in the

lowlands. 

4.2 Passages among the off-lying islands are intricate, narrow.

and deep.

4.2 There are several anchorages for small vessels and some for

large vessels in this sector. Coastal vessels call at the many

small landings in the fjords.

4.2 The Oseberg Oil Field, the Brage Oil Field, and the Veslefrikk Oil Field are situated in an area centered about 50 miles

W of Hellisoy. Numerous submarine pipelines and installations

exist in this area. A pipeline extends E to the coast from the

Oseberg Field at the S end of the area.

4.2 Troll Gas Field (60°44'N., 3°33'E.) and Huldra Gas Field

(60°51'N., 2°40'E.) lie about 16 miles E and 9 miles NNW of

the Veslefrikk Field.

4.2 Caution.—Troll A Platform Radar Surveillance Service and

the VHF Base Station, located on the Troll A Platform, is

controlled by Statoil Trafikkontroll at Sandsli (Statoil VTS).

The surveillance service is an advisory service for the coordination of vessel movements by means of gathering, verification, and dissemination of information as to avert hazards

and accidents between vessels and the platforms, and between

other vessels. 

4.2 Vessels with intent to navigate across the Entry Zone are

requested to inform Statoil Trafikkontroll when passing the

limit of the Approach Zone stating their intentions. Vessels in

the Approach Zone heading for the Entry Zone will be contacted in due course. If necessary, Statoil Trafikkontroll will

request a vessel to increase its passing distance. If this is not

possible or the vessel fails to respond, the “Troll A” standby

vessel will intercept the unknown vessel and the platform

notified. The surveillance service will communicate in Norwegian or English. Three zones have been established around the

platform, as follows:

1. Troll A Safety Zone—The Safety Zone is 500m from

the outer points of the platform. In certain hazard and

accident situations the Safety Zone can be extended.

2. Troll A Entry Zone—The Entry Zone comprises the

area within a 3-mile radius centered on the platform

(60°38.7'N, 3°43.6'E.).

3. Troll A Approach Zone—The Approach Zone comprises the area within a 15-mile radius centered on the platform.

Vessels passing with a closest point of approach (CPA) of 3

miles or less from the installations must inform Statoil Traffic

Control when 1 hour before the time of closest possible

approach (TCPA).

4.2 Statoil Traffic Control may be contacted 24 hours on VHF

channel 16 or 68.

4.2 For oil and gas fields located SSW of the above, see Sector 3.

For oil and gas fields NW of the above, see Sector 5.

Outer Islands and Islets

4.3 Store Marstein (60°08'N., 5°01'E.) lies about 1 mile

W of the NE end of Store Kalsoy on the S side of Korsfjorden

entrance. A light tower, 17m high and prominent, stands on the

summit next to a dwelling.

4.3 Marsteinboen lies about 1 mile WSW of Store Marstein

Light and is usually awash and marked by breakers. 

4.3 Hillagrunnane, a shoal with a least depth of 21m, lies 1.5

miles WSW of Store Marstein Light; the sea only breaks in

very heavy weather.

4.4 Tekslo (60°09'N., 5°01'E.) is on the N side of the

Korsfjorden entrance, about 1 mile N of Store Marstein. Foul

ground extends about 0.2 mile WNW from Tekslo.

Tekslefluene, with a least depth of 13m and Hysteinen, a 27m

depth, lie about 0.3 mile and nearly 1 mile, respectively, W of

Tekslo. 

4.4 Under good conditions, the Korsfjorden entrance should be

identified at a great distance as an opening in the land, the

mountains in the background being high and distinctive.

4.4 The current flow in Korsfjorden is usually outgoing. The

current may be incoming during rising W winds. The outgoing

flow in the entrance to Korsfjorden may be very strong during

floods.

4.4 Pilotage.—The pilot vessel may cruise in the entrance to

Korsfjorden, about 1 mile N of Store Marstein, but is usually

stationed between the S side of Viksoy (60°10'N., 5°03'E.) and

Flesa.

4.5 Lyroddane (60°10'N., 4°59'E.), consisting of a group

of islets and above and below-water rocks about 1 mile in diameter, are centered about 1 mile NW of Tekslo. Nordre

Oddane, on the NW side of the group, is 21m high.

Fugloyhamn lies between Store Fugloy (60°10'N., 5°01'E.)

and Store Vardoy, about 0.3 mile N. Vessels up to moderate

size can take good anchorage, in depths up to 20m, sand, in

Fugloyhamn. There may be a considerable swell during N or

W winds. Entrance can be made from SE, passing E of Tekslo

and Seiskjaer, W of foul ground fringing the W side of Naroy

for a distance of about 91m, then E of a 2.7m depth marked by

a buoy, and W of a rock, marked by an iron perch.

4.6 Store Sotra (60°20'N., 5°05'E.), extending about 18

miles N from Korsfjorden, is the largest of the islands in the

chain fronting the approaches to Bergen. This chain extends N

from Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen, a distance of about 35 miles,

Store Marstein Light
Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 67

Pub. 182

and includes a number of other smaller islands and hundreds of

close-lying islets and rocks.

4.6 From offshore, Store Sotra appears to be a part of the mainland, and, in contrast to the coastal aspect farther N, no offlying islets can be distinguished. Fordesveten, the highest peak

in the S part of Store Sotra, has a steep fall on its N side. The N

end of Store Sotra is considerably lower.

4.6 A radio mast, painted red and white in bands and with a

height of about 165m, stands on the N part of Store Sotra. A

white flashing obstruction light is shown from the top.

4.6 On nearing the land, Store Lonoy will be easily identified

from its height and isolated position. The high land in the S

part of Algroy has a jagged outline and from the N has a sawtooth appearance; other hills in the vicinity are round.

4.6 Turoy, about 2 miles W of the N end of Store Sotra, is higher

than the N part of the larger island. A beacon stands on the

81m summit of Turoy in the N part of that island. Toftevik, on

the W side of Toftoy between Turoy and Naroy, about 2 miles

N, is easily made out.

4.6 Pollen is the name given the continuation of Austefjorden N

of its junction with Toftoyosen.

4.6 Between Tekslo and the coast of Store Sotra, about 3 miles

N, there are a number of islets and rocks which are nearly

joined together by foul ground. There are several anchorages

for small vessels among the islets; some of the channels

leading to them are marked by perches.

4.6 Goltaosen (60°13'N., 5°01'E.) provides good anchorage

with mooring rings, in depths up to 17m, sand. There is a

submarine pipeline crossing the channel close to its S entrance.

4.6 Ternneset (60°14'N., 4°59'E.) is a projection on Store Sotra

close NE of Lutatangen. From Ternneset, the W coast of Store

Sotra trends in a general N direction for about 5 miles to

Roksneset, then irregularly ESE for 2.75 miles, and then in a

general N direction for about 10 miles to Vindneskarven

(60°27'N., 5°00'E.), the N extremity of the island. 

4.6 This side of the island is much indented by inlets and coves

and is fronted by several islands; numerous islets and patches

of foul ground extending up to 3.5 miles offshore.

4.6 Stallen (60°17'N., 4°57'E.) is a point on Store Sotra about

midway between Grimsoy and Rocksneset. South and SW of

Stallen, the outermost dangers lie from 0.5 mile to 1.2 miles off

Store Sotra. Malmen, marked by a beacon, is the largest of a

group of islets and rocks lying up to 1.25 miles W of Knappen,

a point 1 mile S of Stallen. Teigen, a 7m depth, lies about 1

mile W of Stallen.

4.7 Goltasteinen (60°13'N., 4°58'E.), a small islet, but

lofty and easily identified by an iron perch on its summit, lies

about 1 mile WSW of Lutatangen, the NW extremity of Golta,

an island which lies in a bight on the SW side of Store Sotra.

Telavag (60°15'N., 4°59'E.), a narrow inlet about 1 mile N of

Ternneset, trends NNE for about 2 miles from its entrance.

Grimsoy is a 55m islet on the NW side of the entrance.

4.7 Nordre Stuholme and Sore Stuholme are two smaller islets

close off the NE side of Grimsoy.

4.7 Valoyane lie on the W side of Telavag approach. A beacon

stands on the E end of the largest islet of the group.

4.7 Within Telavag, Stekkholme lies in mid-channel, about 1

mile from the entrance. A 3m shoal lies about 183m N of

Stekkholme. Other known dangers near the fairway are marked

by iron perches. Several overhead obstructions, with a least

vertical clearance of 13m, span Telavag. Some quays in Telavag have alongside depths of up to 6m.

4.7 Anchorage.—Vessels of moderate draft can anchor in

several places within Telavag. Care must be taken to avoid the

3m shoal N of Stekkholme and the submarine cables that cross

the inlet. Anchorage can be taken between Nordre Stuholme

and Sore Stuholme, E and N of Stekkholme, in sand and clay.

4.7 Small vessels can anchor, in up to 22m, in the W end of Rynjelsosen, the channel between the N side of Grimsoy and Store

Sotra.

4.8 Hissoyna (60°18'N., 4°56'E.) lies with its SE point

about 0.2 mile W of Rocksneset. Between Stallen and Roksneset the outermost shoals and rocks lie within 1 mile W of

Store Sotra.

Rabbarosen (60°18'N., 4°57'E.) a small bay which is

entered about 0.2 mile S of Roksneset, is available for small

craft with local knowledge. The approach from W is deep, but

there are dangers near the fairway. The best approach is from

SW, passing between Mokalasset and Augnarholme. Myrbaerholme is on the S side of the bay entrance. Augnarholme is a

smaller islet close W of Myrbaerholme.

4.8 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage in the

S part of Rabbarosen E of Myrbaerholme, but care must be

taken to avoid foul ground extending about 91m from the E

shore.

Mokalasset (60°18'N., 4°56'E.) lies above water, about 0.3

mile W of Augnarholme. Sore Mokalassflu and Nordre Mokalassflu, with depths of 9.5m and 5m, lie about 0.3 mile SSW

and 0.25 mile WNW, respectively, of Modalasset. Grytebaen, a

rock awash, is located about 0.2 mile NW of Mokalasset.

4.8 Salen, an above-water rock, is on the N side of the fairway

about 0.2 mile N of Augnarholme. A reef extends about 91m

SW from Salen; there are depths of less than 9.1m within 183m

E of the rock.

4.8 Between Hissoyna and Haveroyna (60°24'N., 4°56'E.),

about 5 miles N, are Lokoyna, Langoyna, Algroyna, and many

islets and rocky areas. Overhead cables, with vertical clearance

of at least 10m, span the fairways between Hissoyna, Naroyna,

Syltoyna, Lokoyna, Langoyna, and Algroyna. An overhead

cable, with a vertical clearance of 24m, and a bridge, with a

vertical clearance of 15m, span the channel between Langoyna

and Store Sotra, about 0.4 mile S of the N extremity of

Langoyna. On the E side of the islands above are narrow

channels leading into an inner basin, which is formed in a bight

on the W side of Store Sotra. 

4.8 This basin forms the approach to Fjellspollen (60°18'N.,

5°03'E.). From its narrow and shallow entrance, Fjellspollen

trends N for about 2 miles and S for 1.25 miles through the

middle part of Store Sotra. Only small vessels should attempt

to use the channels leading to these inner basins. Some of the

dangers near the fairways are marked by perches.

4.9 Kalsoyane (60°19'N., 4°56'E.), several close-lying

islets from 13 to 20m high, lie within 0.5 mile NNW of Hissoy. 

4.9 Kalsoyflu, with a least depth of 3m, lies about 0.2 mile W of

the farthest SW islet.

4.9 Store Lonoy, a conspicuous island, is located about 1 mile

NW of Hissoy. Several islets lie close off the W and SW sides
68 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 

Pub. 182

of Store Lonoy; within 0.75 mile S and NW and 0.5 mile W of

the island there are other small islets and foul areas.

Nordre Tjornoy (60°22'N., 4°55'E.), marked by a light, lies

about 0.3 mile off the NW side of Algroyna. 

A beacon with a cross topmark stands on Ljosoy, about 2

miles N of Norde Tjornoy.

4.9 Breidflu, a 9.1m depth, is located about 1 mile WNW of the

beacon on Sore Tjornoy. Other detached shoals, with depths of

less than 1.8m to 11.9m, lie within 0.6 mile NNE of Breidflu.

4.9 Polleflu, an 11m depth, and Landrobaen, a 5.9m depth, lie

about 1 mile WSW and 1.5 miles W, respectively, of the

beacon on Ljosoy. Numerous other dangers are located

between the described dangers and the islands fronting the

coast of Store Sotra.

4.9 Kartveit (60°23'N., 5°00'E.), a village, lies on the E shore of

an inlet extending from Eideosen into the W side of Store

Sotra. There are two quays, with alongside depths of 4 to 7m,

located at Kartveit. Fuel oil is available.

Approximately 5.4 miles NNE of Norde Tjornoy, the small

islet of Ertenskjaer lies about 0.6 mile W of Sandoyni

(60°27'N., 4°53'E.) and is the W danger of the group of islands

and islets in this area. The islets of Odden (60°26'N., 4°56'E.)

and the shoal Oddefluene lie about 0.6 mile S of Ertenskjaer

and Ertensskjerflu.

4.10 Turoyna (60°27'N., 4°55'E.) has a beacon on its 81m

summit, about 0.25 mile from the N end of the island. Lille

Turoyna is close off the SW side of Turoyna. Other smaller

islets and many rocks, both above and below-water, lie nearby;

a chain of islets and dangers extends nearly 1 mile SE from

near Giljeneset, the S extremity of Turoy.

4.10 Magoyna, Kvaloyna, and Sandoyni are the principal islets of

a group that includes many smaller islets and rocks and lies

between 0.7 mile and 1.7 miles W of Turoy. 

4.10 Vestre Odden, an above-water rock, is near the SW edge of

this area. Shoal water extends about 0.2 mile SSW from Vestre

Odden. 

4.10 Svartskjaeri, a small area of above and below-water rocks, is

centered about 0.5 mile S of Magoyna.

4.10 Svartskjersosen is the basin that lies S and SSW of Turoy.

The entrance from seaward is S of Svartskjerosen. Hattholme

lies on the SE side of the Svartskjerosen entrance, about 1 mile

SSE of Maioy. 

4.10 Hattholmbaen, a 3.2m depth, and Svartskjergrunnane, with a

least depth of 12.8m, lie about 0.2 mile NW and 0.5 mile W,

respectively, of the N end of Hattholme.

Vindoysen, the basin E of Turoy, is bound on the N by Store

Skarvoy, some nearby smaller islets, and the S end of Toftoy;

on the E by the island of Misje, and on the S by Store Vindoy,

Lille Vindoy, and Vearoy.

4.10 A light is shown from a position close off the NW extremity

of Lille Vindoy.

4.10 Solsviksund is the narrow channel between the N end of

Store Sotra and Misje. Svelgen is the channel between Misje

and the SE side of Toftoy. Both channels lead into Hjeltefjorden. Charted depths in these narrow channels are 16 to

21m.

4.10 A light is shown from the SW extremity of Misje, close W of

the entrance of Solsviksund. A light is shown from a hut on the

N extremity of Misje in Svelgen channel. The E end of the

channel is also marked by lights. Iron perches mark some of

the dangers near the channel fairways.

4.10 Solsviksund may be approached from S, but the principal

approach is from W through Svartskjerosen and Hjelmeholsen

(60°25'N., 4°56'E.), passing well S of Lille Hjelmen, the islet

at the SE extremity of the islet chain extending from Turoy, and

then E of Geitaroy and Bollholme, two islets which are near

Store Sotra.

4.10 Care must be taken to avoid a 5m depth lying near the fairway in a position about 137m E of the N end of Bollholme.

4.10 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18m, spans Solsviksund close within its S entrance. Fixed red lights mark the centerline.

4.10 A quay, located on the W side of Solsviksund, has an

alongside depth of 6m.

4.10 A submarine cable runs from Utfall, located on the coast of

Store Sotra W of Bollholme, NW past Lille Vindoy, and then

W to Turoy. A submarine cable exists in the N portion of

Svelgen, passing around the N extremity of Misje.

4.10 At Utfall, there is a quay, with depths of up to 9m alongside.

4.10 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Solsviksund and Svelgen set N into Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning

about 6 hours 10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward

from Hjeltefjorden during the falling tides (beginning about

HW at Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.

4.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Tjuvvika, a cove

on the N side of Svelgen, N of the N extremity of Misje, in

18m, sand. Caution must be used to avoid the submarine cable

off the N side of Misje.

4.10 Several narrow channels are formed by Store Skarvoy and

the islets near it which lie between Turoy and Toftoy. They lead

NW from Vindoyosen into the SE side of Tofteviki and are

spanned by cables, with vertical clearances of 18m to 32m.

Shoals, marked by iron perches, lie in the channel between

Turoy and the islets close E, and in Skarvoysund (60°27'N.,

4°56'E.) fairway, the channel between Store Skarvoy and

Toftoy.

4.11 The bay of Toftevika is bound on the S by Sandoy,

Knappane, Turoyna, and Store Skarvoy and on the N by

Kvannholmen, Froa, Nuroyi, and Rongoyni (60°30'N.,

4°55'E.). Depths in Toftevika are irregular and, except for a few

detached patches, exceed 36m. Navreskjaer, a detached reef

which is above-water near its S end, lies in the middle of

Tofteviki.

4.11 Bjornoy lies near the NW side of Toftoyni, about 2 miles N

of Store Skarvoy. Kjempa, a rock marked by an iron perch, is

on the outer edge of foul ground extending nearly 0.25 mile

SW from Bjornoy. A light is shown from an iron perch located

off the NE extremity of Bjornoy, between Bjornoy and Toftoy.

Rongsund is the channel between Toftoyni and Bjornoyni

(60°29'N., 4°56'E.), on the E, and Rongoy and islets extending

S from that island, on the W. It joins Tofteviki with Hjeltefjorden. 

4.11 Rongsund is narrow; the S approach is intricate. Depths in

the fairway are about 18.7 to 48m, but there are nearby dangers. Cables exist in the inlet S of Rongsund and N of Bjorno.

Anchorage is not permitted in this area.
Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 69

Pub. 182

4.12 Toftevag (60°29'N., 4°56'E.) indents the W side of

Toftoy extending S from Bjornoy. Two quays, with alongside

depths of 3 to 7m, are located at Toft close to the head of

Toftevag.

4.12 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Rongsund have the

same characteristics as those in Solsviksund and Svelgen.

4.12 Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor in Torsteinsvik, on

the SE side of Rongsund, NE of Bjornoy. The anchorage has

depths of 12.8 to 22m and is free from dangers; mooring rings

are available. Quays, with depths of up to 4m, are located in the

cove.

4.12 Kjeldosen, between the N side of Nuroy and two islets

named Borsholme and Sjurdholme, affords protected anchorage to small vessels, in 9.1m, in its W part. 

4.12 The best approach is E of Svelslingen, which lies above

water near the SE edge of a shoal that extends 0.25 mile E from

a position near the E side of Nuroy.

4.12 Ulvsundet, which is entered about 1 mile ENE of Skarvoy

(60°30'N., 4°50'E.), is the narrow sound between the islands of

Ono and Rongoy, on the S, and Ulvoy and Blomoy, on the N. 

4.12 It leads ENE into Hjeltefjorden and is approached from

seaward between Skarvoy and Nessaengen, about 0.2 mile N,

and the islets and rocks just E of these two outer islets. 

4.12 The channel fairway is very narrow, and although some of

the dangers are marked by lights or iron perches, its use is

limited to small vessels. Power-driven vessels must not exceed

a speed of 7 knots in Ulvsundet.

4.12 The E part of Ulvsundet is spanned by a bridge, with a

vertical clearance of 20m, and a cable, with a vertical clearance

of 32m.

4.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Ulvsundet close W

of an islet at its E end. The depths here are 11 to 16.5m; mooring rings are available.

4.13 Rorsund, between the NW side of Ulvoyni (60°31'N.,

4°53'E.) and the SW part of Blomoyni, leads into Blomvag N

of Ulvoyni. Small vessels can anchor, in 22 to 26m. Iron

perches and lights mark some of the dangers in the approach. 

4.13 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans

Rorsund about 1 mile SSE of Blomvag. Several quays, with

alongside depths of 3 to 12m, lie in Blomvag. Fuel oil and

fresh water are available.

4.13 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in the narrow

sound between the W side of Blomoy and the islets Nautoy and

Husholme, in about 14.6m, sand. A quay located in the sound

has alongside depths of 3 to 10m.

4.13 Osunder (60°33'N., 4°51'E.), the narrow sound leading NE

into Hjeltefjorden between Blomoy and One, is free from

dangers, but is only navigable by small vessels because of its

narrow width.

4.13 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Osundet set N into

Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning about 6 hours

10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward from Hjeltefjorden during the falling tide (beginning about HW at

Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.

4.13 Kollsoy lies on the SE side of Osundet entrance. Two smaller

islets lie in Osundet approach about 0.1 mile W and 0.2 mile S,

respectively, of the W extremity of Kollsoy. Flatskjaer, above

water, and Saskjaeri, partly above water, lie within 0.2 mile

SW and 0.3 mile SSW, respectively, of the S of the two above

islets.

4.13 Forskjaer lies above water on the NW side of Osundet

approach in a position about 0.2 mile SW of the N islet. 

4.13 Husmannsflu, a 12m depth, lies in the fairway between

Flatskjaer and Forskjaer.

4.13 Kvalosen (60°34'N., 4°50'E.) is the S and broadest part of

the sound between One and Skogsoyni, to the W.

4.13 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 40m, about 1 mile

N of Forskjaer. Small vessels can anchor farther N in depths

decreasing from 18.3 to 9.1m S of an above-water rock in the

vicinity of Breidvik, close inside the N entrance to the sound.

4.13 A mole and a bridge cross the passage between One and

Skogsoy close S of Breidvik. The mole and bridge prevent

further progress N to all but small craft.

4.13 Breidvik has quays, with alongside depths of 4 to 5m. Fuel

oil is available.

4.14 Storodden (60°33'N., 4°48'E.) is the largest of several

islets and rocks lying within 0.25 mile of the SW side of

Skogsoy. Tenen, a detached above-water rock, is located about

0.2 mile S of the W extremity of Storodden.

4.14 Herdlevaer is an island close NW of Skogsoy. Rossoy and

some smaller islets and rocks lie on foul ground extending

about 0.3 mile S and SW from Herdlevaer. 

4.14 Nordre Seiskallane, a detached 7.5m depth, lies about 0.3

mile SW of the W extremity of Rossoy. Sore Seiskallane, with

a least depth of 1.5m, and Borsklakken, a 14m depth, are

located about 1 mile SSW and 0.7 mile W, respectively, of the

same point. 

4.14 Straumsundi (60°35'N., 4°51'E.) are the channels between

One and Alvoyni, to the N, which lead from seaward into Hjeltefjorden and Indreleia. Islets, rocks, and bridges some-what

obstruct the passage.

4.14 Entrance from the W can be made N of Geitingen. Straumsoy, with the islet of Galten close SW of it, lies in the E end of

the passage and divides it into two narrow channels, named

Nordre Straumsund and Sore Straumsund.

4.14 Flatskjaer, marked by an iron perch, is on the N side of the

fairway, about 0.2 mile N of the N extremity of Herdlevaer.

Senholme lies on the S side of the fairway within 0.25 mile NE

of the same extremity. Foul ground, marked by an iron perch,

extends about 0.2 mile SE from Rotevaagoy, which lies on the

N side of the fairway about 0.3 mile NE of Senholme. 

4.14 A 4m rocky patch lies on the N side of the fairway, about

183m SSW of the SW extremity of Rotevaagoy. There are

other dangers near the fairway of Nordre and Sore Straumsund,

some of which are marked by iron perches.

4.14 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Straumsundi set N

into Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning about 6

hours 10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward from Hjeltefjorden during the falling tide (beginning about HW at Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.

4.15 Alvoyni (60°38'N., 4°50'E.) trends about 3 miles N

between its S extremity, the NW entrance point of Nordre

Straumsund, and Aadneset (60°36'N., 4°48'E.), the N extremity of the island. 

4.15 The W coast of Alvoyni is about 2 miles long and is fronted

by numerous islets and above-water rocks, all of which lie
70 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 

Pub. 182

within 1.3 miles of the larger island. The channel among the

islands and islets can be used only by small vessels.

4.15 Hjartoyni (60°38'N., 4°50'E.) is reported as the largest

island off the W coast of Alvoy. Alvheimsund, a very narrow

channel, especially in its S part, is marked by Iron perches and

lights. 

4.15 A quay, with depths of 3 to 6m, is located at the village of

Alvheim on the NE shore of the sound. 

4.15 Small vessels can take good anchorage, in depths up to 18m,

off Alvheim.

4.15 Langoysund (60°37'N., 4°48'E.), between Alvoyni and Langoyni, provides good anchorage for small vessels, in 13 to

20m; mooring rings are used. The S entrance is the broader one

and more clear of dangers than the N entrance. Care must be

taken to avoid a 3m shoal near the middle of the sound.

4.15 The channel that passes the W side of the island of

Forhjelmo (60°40'N., 4°48'E.) and the S side of Store Lyngoy,

and leads into Hjeltefjorden, is entered from W between

Myklebaen, on the S, and the dangers extending S from Store

Lyngoy. From Myklebaen, a 2.5m depth, the channel leads SE

of Lamholmflu, a 3.5m depth. 

4.15 Care must be taken to avoid both Lamholmflu and Siefluene,

where the channel turns NE and leads between Tikje and the

SE islet of Skreiskjaerene. Care must be taken to avoid the foul

ground extending from both of these islets. 

4.15 After passing these dangers, vessels may enter Hjeltefjorden,

passing or rounding Robbeganstangen (60°41'N., 4°48'E.),

the N extremity of Forhjelmo, at a prudent distance.

4.15 Nordoy (60°43'N., 4°44'E.) lies on the S side of Fedjeosen,

the principal approach from seaward leading into the channels

of Indreleia, which continue S to Bergen.

Approach to Bergen from South

4.16 Lysefjorden (60°12'N., 5°19'E.) is a continuation of

Korsfjorden from its junction with Langenuen and Fanafjord.

The fjord is entered between Korsen, the SW point of Krossnes

and Fluaneset, the W point of Skorpo, 2.25 miles SE. 

4.16 The outer 2 miles of the fjord is deep and clear, except for

islets and rocks which lie within 0.6 mile offshore on both

sides. Lysoya is the largest number of islets at the head of the

fjord. A conspicuous tower stands on Lysoya. 

4.16 Caution.—Submarine cables lie E of Lysoya and close W of

the mainland. Mariners are advised not to anchor or trawl in

the vicinity. 

4.16 Good anchorage for small vessels is available in several

places along the shores of Lysefjorden, but local knowledge is

required for entering these anchorages. Two anchorages are

available at the head of the fjord and are best seen on the chart.

4.16 Fanafjorden is entered between Korsen and Leroy-Buaroy,

1.5 miles NW. The fjord trends NE for about 5 miles to the

town of Fana, at its head. With the exception of some islets and

dangers lying close to the shores and those at the head of the

fjord, it is clear and deep.

4.16 Iron perches and a buoy mark a narrow channel between

Leroy and Bjelkaroy. Perches also mark some of the dangers

along the shores of Fanafjorden. 

4.16 Small vessels can anchor in most of the bights on the SE side

of Fanafjorden and also near the head of the fjord. There are

quays with depths of 4 to 5m at the head of the fjord near Stendaholmen. 

4.17 Leroyosen (60°14'N., 5°10'E.) is entered from the S

between Bornestangen and the islet of Leroy-Buaroy, about 10

miles NNE. Leroyosen is the principal channel used by large

vessels approaching Bergen from the S. Both sides of the

channel are comparatively steep-to. 

4.17 A light is shown on Bornestangen and Tangaflu. A light is

also shown from an islet close off the SW side of Leroy.

4.17 On the W side of the channel, good anchorage with mooring

rings can be obtained by small vessels close W of Svinstangen. 

4.17 Klokkarvik (60°13'N., 5°10'E.) lies about 1 mile NNW of

Svinestangen and offers anchorage to small vessels, in 7.3m. A

small quay is located in the port.

4.17 On the E side of Leroyosen there are several anchorages

which are suitable for vessels with local knowledge. 

4.17 Temporary anchorage can be taken, in 14.6 to 16.4m, off the

W end of Leroy-Buaroy. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited

in the area of Leroyosen that is best seen on the chart.

4.17 Raunefjorden (60°16'N., 5°10'E.) lies just N of Leroy and

Bjelkaroy. The fairway through Raunefjorden leads W of a

group of islands and islets and has ample depths for large

vessels. Rauneskjaerene Light is shown on the SW end of a

reef which lies in the middle of Raunefjorden. 

4.17 A beacon lies about 0.1 mile E of the light. A light is shown

on the NW side of Flatoy, which lies 0.5 mile E of the above

light. Large vessels can anchor in the vicinity of Flatoy. Care

must be taken to avoid a shoal E of the islet.

4.18 Vatlestraumen (60°19'N., 5°12'E.) trends N and

NNW on the E side of Bjoroy for about 4 miles and is the preferred passage from the N end of Raunefjorden to the channel

N of Bjoroy which continues farther N into Byfjorden. 

4.18 The fairway through Vatlestraumen is deep and free from

dangers. A light marks a rock on the E side of the fairway near

 Lysefjorden—Preikestolen Rock
Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 71

Pub. 182

its S entrance point. A light is shown on a small point about 2

miles N of the above light. A number of other navigational aids

can best be seen on the chart.

4.18 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the bight

off Flesland, in depths of 7.3 to 26m. Larger vessels can anchor

in depths up to 46m in a bay N of Tangen, avoiding a 4m patch

close off this small point. A quay, with depths of from 4 to 6m

alongside, is located in this bay.

4.18 Grimstadfjorden (60°19'N., 5°14'E.) lies on the E side of

Vatlestraumen. The fjord extends 1.5 miles E and then divides

into two arms; one trends 1.25 miles NNW to Mathopen while

the other trends SSE to Dolvik. Tidal currents of up to 5 knots

have been reported (2008) in the N branch of the fjord. The

fairway through most of Grimstadfjorden has depths exceeding

37m. 

4.18 A light is shown on shore at the E extremity of the fjord and

also on the NW shore of Store Bogoy. The N part of Grimstadfjorden contains a restricted area and that can best be seen

on the chart. Stamneset lies on the S side of Grimstadfjorden.

A quay at an oil tank installation on the E side of Stamneset

has a depth of 14m alongside. 

4.18 A mooring buoy lies close E of the quay. Nordasstraumen

leads E from the S arm of Grimstadfjorden and connects the

fjord with the inner basin of Nordasvatn. The channel is very

narrow and can only be used by small vessels. The least depth

in the fairway is 3.4m. A cable with an overhead clearance of

25m spans Nordasstraumen at its narrowest part.

4.18 Anchorage.—A bight on the E side of Store Bogoy provides

good anchorage for small vessels, in 12.8m. Such vessels can

also anchor in, 14.6 to 20.1m, in the N arm of Grimstadfjorden,

about 1 mile NNE of the S end of Store Bogoy. Depths of 4 and

4.9m lie in mid-channel about 0.2 mile S of the anchorage.

4.18 Anchorage is found in the S arm off Dolvik; anchorage is

also available in a small cove on the S side of Grimstadfjorden

about 0.3 mile W of Stamneset. A 6.1m patch lies just N of the

cove entrance.

4.19 Kobbaleida (60°19'N., 5°09'E.) is an alternate

passage leading N from Raunefjorden. The passage is bounded

on the W by the island of Store Sotra and on the E by the

islands of Tosoy and Bjoroy. Depths in the fairway through

Kobbaleida are ample for large vessels, but caution is necessary because of nearby dangers. 

4.19 There is a submarine cable across Kobbaleida about 2 miles

N of its S entrance. Liholmane, a group of islets, lie on the E

side of the fairway about 0.5 mile NW of the N extremity of

Tosoy. A light is shown from the W side of the S islet of the

group. The dangers on the E side of the fairway are well

marked by navigational aids and can best be seen on the chart.

There are no recommended anchorages in Kobbaleida. 

4.19 From the junction of Vatlestraumen and Kobbaleida, a deep,

clear channel trends N for about 2 miles to Stangsnes, a mainland projection at the SW end of Byfjord. Depths in the fairway are from 64 to 97m. A depth of 1.8m lies on the W side of

the fairway, about 0.1 mile N of the beacon marking Fuglaskjaer.

4.19 Alvoyvag (60°21'N., 5°11'E.) lies on the E side of the above

channel, about 1 mile NNE of Fuglaskjaer. A 3.6m patch lies in

the middle of the narrow entrance to Alvoyvag. 

4.19 A small quay, with a depth of 4m alongside, is located at

Alvoen, a small town on the NE side of Alvoyvag. Stongi Light

marks a rock on the E side of the channel close W of Stangsnes. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 50m, crosses the

channel close N of Stongi Light.

4.20 Brattholmen (60°21'N., 5°10'E.) (World Port Index

No. 23180), a small settlement on the W side of the channel on

Litlasotra, lies about 1 mile N of Fuglaskjaer. A pier close to

the settlement has a depth of 4m alongside. Anchorage is available for small vessels, in a depth of 11.8m, off the settlement.

The W entrance to Byfjorden lies between Stongi Light and

Hjelteskjaer Light, nearly 1 mile to the NNE. This SW reach

separates the S side of Askoy from the mainland and trends NE

for 2.25 miles to Kvarven, which shows a light, and then continues E for about 1 mile to the W limits of the port area of

Bergen at Olderneset. Both sides of this reach are steep-to,

with a few existing dangers within 183m of the shores. Depths

in the fairway are ample and in most places exceed 183m. Submarine cables cross the fjord at Storebuneset and about 0.5

mile farther NE.

4.20 Skardholmen (60°24'N., 5°13'E.) is located about 0.2 mile

NE of Storebuneset. A tanker wharf, with depths of from 10 to

24m alongside, is located at Skardholmen. A cove close NE of

Skardholmen affords good anchorage, with mooring rings for

small vessels at its N end.

4.20 A large oil tank installation in Klampevik has a quay, 76m

long, with depths from 11 to 16m alongside, and a shorter

quay, with depths of up to 19m alongside.

4.20 Caution.—A suspension bridge extends SSE from Skardholmen to Brysteneset. It had a reported (1992) vertical clearance of 60m.

4.21 Skalevik (60°24'N., 5°14'E.), about 0.2 mile SSW of

Kvarven, has two oil quays, the W and E of which are approximately 79 and 46m long and have least depths of 15 and 6.4m

alongside, respectively. A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies

close off the W entrance point of Skalevik. Storholmen, an

islet, lies about 0.5 mile N of Kvarven. A quay on the W side of

the islet is 85m long, with depths of 14 to 17m alongside.

There is a small quay on the E side of the islet, with an

alongside depth of 9m.

4.21 Anchorage.—Marikoven has good anchorage in a nearby

cove, in a depth of 30m, sand. This is a good temporary anchorage for deep-draft vessels. There are mooring rings in the

outer part of the cove.

Approach to Bergen from North

4.22 Fedjeosen (60°44'N., 4°44'E.) is the principal N approach to Bergen. It affords direct access from sea into the

channels of Indreleia, which continue S to Bergen for about 30

miles. It is about 1 mile wide between the island of Fedje and

the islets to the S.

4.22 On the S side of the channel, Bolleflesi, a rock lying on foul

ground which breaks, is located about 1 mile NW of Nordoyni.

A racon is situated at the lighted beacon standing on the rock.

A light is shown from the NW end of Nordoy.

4.22 On the N side of the channel, Ostre Hellisoy is situated close

to the SW side of Fedje. A prominent light tower, 3m high,
72 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 

Pub. 182

stands on the island. A racon is situated at the light tower.

4.22 In addition to the above, at night, the lights at Onglesundet

(60°43'N., 4°52'E.) and Vardholmen (60°46'N., 4°52'E.) may

be of aid to navigation in the channel.

4.22 Hakeskallen, a 14m patch, lies about 1 mile NW of Bolleflesi and reduces the navigable width of the channel to about 1

mile. Other dangers S and W of Hakeskallen may best be seen

on the chart.

4.22 Vessels from the N proceeding to Bergen can pass through

the length of Hjeltefjorden and then through the SW reach of

Byfjorden, the channels of which lead W and S of Askoy. An

alternative route leads from the N part of Hjeltefjorden into

Herdlefjorden, through that fjord, and then through the N reach

of Byfjorden. These two routes are the ones generally used.

4.22 Pilotage.—Pilots are transferred by helicopter at the Hordaland-Fedje pilotage station. Pilotage rules and information

are, as follows:

1. Pilot boarding places:

a. Fedje Vest (60°46.0'N., 4°27.9'E.).

b. Holmengra Vest (60°51.0'N., 4°25.9'E.).

2. Pilot services for vessels which exceed 30,000 grt and

are classified to carry hazardous or polluting cargo as mentioned in Annex 2 of Regulation 1129/23 December 1994, on

the Obligation to Use a Pilot in Norwegian Waters, will be

provided exclusively from the pilot boarding places mentioned in paragraph 1 above. The same applies when vessels

carry no cargo. Fedje Traffic Control Center may decide that

other vessels should also be serviced from the pilot boarding

places mentioned in paragraph 1 above.

3. Vessels as mentioned in paragraph 2 above will be

offered pilot transfer by helicopter. Such offer will be given

to the vessel or the agent when the initial pilot booking is

made. Vessels/agents that do not immediately accept pilot

transfer by helicopter will have up to 12 hours prior to

commencement of the pilotage assignment in which to make

a decision.

4. Vessels that receive a helicopter shall comply with the

rules set out in “Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations,”

issued by the International Maritime Pilots Association.

5. Vessels as mentioned in paragraph 2 above, which

cannot or do not wish to have a pilot transferred by helicopter, will have a pilot transferred by pilot boat when this

can be done safely. The pilot will be transferred to the new

pilot boarding places mentioned in paragraph 1 above. It

should be noted that to decline use of a helicopter in cases

where it is not safe to use a pilot boat will result in waiting

time.

6. Fedje Traffic Control Center shall not clear vessels

mentioned in paragraph 2 above for entry until the pilot has

embarked. Such vessels shall not be cleared for departure

with a pilot on board until it is confirmed that the pilot can

disembark as intended.

7. If helicopters are available, other vessels than those

mentioned in paragraph 2 above may also be offered pilot

transfer by helicopter provided the vessels in question satisfies the requirements of paragraph 4 above. The vessels

will in the event be provided with a pilot at the new pilot

boarding places.

8. The helicopter company will bill the agent for the particular vessel for all costs incurred in pilot transfer by helicopter.

9. The above measures will be implemented immediately and shall apply until further notice.

4.22 Vessels not encompassed by these measures will continue to

be provided with a pilot by pilot boat at the pilot boarding

places in Fedjeosen and off Holmengra. State pilots shall be

booked in advance, giving 24 hours notice to Fedje Traffic

Control Center.

4.23 Fedjefjorden (60°45'N., 4°47'E.) lies E of Fedjeosen

and the Holmengra group, and W of many islets and rocks extending 3 miles NW from Fosnoy. On the W side of Fedjefjorden, there are no known dangers more than 183m off Fedje. 

Hjeltefjorden (60°35'N., 4°55'E.) is the principal part of the

N inner approach to Bergen. The fairway through Hjeltefjorden

favors the W side of the fjord and passes within 0.5 mile of the

outer islets and dangers on that side. Between Geitanger and

the entrance of Byfjorden the fairway width is considerably

reduced. Buoys or iron perches mark some of the outer

dangers, and there are some beacons and a few lights.

4.23 Toska (Toskoy), a narrow island, lies on the E side of

Hellisoy Light
Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 73

Pub. 182

Hjeltefjorden abreast of Seloy. A small inlet which is entered

from Hjeltefjorden nearly divides Toska into two parts. 

4.23 The N part of Toska is known as Uttoska. Norde Flesi,

marked by a buoy, lies about 0.5 mile NW of the NW extremity

of Uttoska. Stureholmen, which shows a light, lies on the W

side of Hjeltefjorden.

4.23 The direct Hjeltefjorden route is used by large vessels. Small

vessels and vessels of moderate size usually prefer the route

through Herdlefjorden, which is almost free from dangers in

the greater part of its length, but narrows at its N end.

4.24 Sture Oil Terminal (60°37'N., 4°52'E.) is a major

facility for the export of oil received by pipeline from the Oseberg Oil Field. The terminal is located close N of Stureholmen

Light and consists of two jetties, with associated mooring

dolphins, extending E from the shore 0.4 mile and 0.8 mile,

respectively, NNW of the light tower. A short breakwater projects S from the shore close S of the root of the N jetty to

protect the tugs.

4.24 Tankers up to 300,000 dwt and 23m draft can be accommodated at the terminal.

4.24 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 4,000

grt carrying cargo to and from the terminal. See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean for details.

4.24 Helmferdflu, a rock with a depth of 3m, lies about 0.5 mile

NNW of Stureholmen and close N of the S tanker berth; it is

marked by a lighted beacon. Sandvikflu lies about 1 mile NNW

of Stureholmen and close SW of the S end of the N tanker

berth; it is marked by an iron perch.

4.24 A conspicuous water tower, 64m in elevation, and a conspicuous flare tower, 52m in elevation, stand in the vicinity of the

oil terminal and may be seen from a considerable distance.

4.25 Mangersfjorden (60°37'N., 5°00'E.) lies on the E

side of Hjeltefjorden and is entered about 10 miles SE of the

seaward entrance of Fedjeosen. The fjord is deep and clear in

the fairway. All dangers lie within 300m of the shores. The

fjord trends about 4 miles to the E and shows a light at its head.

4.25 Skjeljanger Light (60°37'N., 4°57'E.) stands on the NW

end of Holsenoy. Kvernane, two above-water rocks, lies about

0.6 mile WNW of Skjeljanger Light. A beacon stands on Kvernane. Mefjordbaen Light lies about 1 mile WSW of Skjeljanger Light. An iron perch marks the NW end of Mefjordbaen.

4.25 Herdla, an island enclosing the NW end of Herdelfjorden,

lies on the E side of Hjeltefjorden, with its W extremity about 2

miles S of Skjeljanger. A white church on the W slope of the

island is a good landmark. A bank, with depths of less than

5.5m, extends about 0.3 mile N from the island.

4.26 Herdlesund (60°34'N., 4°58'E.), between Herdla and

the N end of Askoy, is a narrow channel leading from Hjeltefjorden into the N end of Herdlefjorden. A light is shown on

the NW point of Askoy. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of

16.2m, spans Herdlesund. Red fixed lights beneath the bridge

indicate the center of the fairway. 

4.26 Herdlefluene, a group of shoals extending S from Herdla, are

marked by an iron perch at their E end, which dries, lying 0.2

mile SW of the bridge.

4.26 Between Krabbejoneset and the Byfjorden entrance, about

11 miles SE, the fairway of Hjeltefjorden continues to be deep

and clear, and for the most part favors the W side of the fjord.

Both shores are irregular, and most of the detached islets and

dangers are on the E side, lying up to 1.5 miles off the W side

of Askoy.

4.26 Store Jona lies on the W side of the fairway of Hjeltefjorden,

about 1 mile E of Krabbejoneset. Store Jona consists of two

close-lying islets. A light is shown on the S islet.

4.26 Rongsund (60°30'N., 4°56'E.), on the W side of Hjeltefjorden, is entered between Rongoy and Toftoy, about 1 mile S

of Store Jona. Vikavag, on the E side of Toftoy, has mooring

rings. The largest of several quays, situated on the E side of

Vikavag, has depths of up to 7m alongside.

4.26 Hanoy and Hauglandsoy, on the W side of Hjeltefjorden, are

the largest islets in an archipelago which extends about 2 miles

from the W side of Askoy and forms the NW side of a basin

named Hauglandsosen. 

4.26 Lights and iron perches mark several intricate channels

among the islets. A light is shown from a rock N of Hillesoy. 

4.26 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 22m, extends

NE from Ramsoyni (60°26'N., 5°03'E.) to Hanoy. A causeway

and bridge have been constructed between Hanoy and Ramsoy.

4.26 Nordre Brattholme (60°24'N., 5°06'E.), which shows a

light, lies on the W side of the fairway, 2 miles S of Hanoy.

Store Brattholme, marked by a beacon, lies close W of Norde

Brattholme. Faeroy, an island, lies about 1 mile E of Nordre

Brattholme Light. A small boat harbor, protected by a mole, is

located at Follese, which lies on the SW side of Askoy.

4.27 Agotnes (60°24'N., 5°01'E.) (World Port Index No.

23195) is a supply and servicing base for offshore industry.

Depths—Limitations.—There are nine berths, with lengths

of 20 to 180m and depths of 4.7 to 20m alongside. Vessels up

to 50,000 dwt can be accommodated.

4.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be

ordered using the Safe Sea Net or alternatively, the Kvitsoy

Pilot Booking Center. Pilots are available at Korsfjorden or

Fedje. The pilot boards for the S entrance in position

60°08.6'N, 5°00.9'E about 0.7 mile N of Store Marstein. Pilot

boarding for the N entrance is covered under Fedje.

4.27 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained 0.25 mile N of

Agotnes, in depths of 29 to 74m. Large vessels and semisubmersible drill-ing platforms must anchor only in positions

appointed by the Port Authority.

4.27 Tranvagen, a small port, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Agotnes. 

4.27 A quay in the port has depths of 5 to 7m alongside. A lighted

buoy marks a 6m patch 183m W of Tranneset. Vessels of

considerable size can anchor 0.3 mile N of Tranneset. 

4.27 Vessels should use care when anchoring to avoid a submarine cable which exists between the shore W of this anchorage and the head of Tranvagen. Near the anchorage, there is a

quay, with 3 to 7m alongside.

4.27 There area number of anchorages between Krabbejoneset

Port of Agotnes Home Page

http://www.coastcenterbase.no
74 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 

Pub. 182

and the entrance to Byfjord. These anchorages, except as

noted, are suitable only for small vessels with local knowledge,

and can best be seen on the chart.

4.27 A protected area has been established around the oil terminal. Berthing and unberthing are only permitted during daylight.

4.28 Herdlefjorden (60°32'N., 5°05'E.) is a deep clear

fjord separating Holsnoy and Askoy. From the N entrance, it

trends ESE for about 9 miles,where its joins with the N part of

Byfjorden at Askeneset. The few islets and dangers in Herdlefjorden all lie within the several inlets on either side or close to

the shores. 

4.28 An area in which anchoring and fishing is prohibited lies

within the entrance to Herdlefjorden between Nesodden and

Ypso. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in Herdlefjorden.

4.28 The N entrance to Byfjorden is entered between Askenset

and Galteneset, 1 mile to the NNE. This entrance is at the

junction of Byfjorden, Herdlefjorden, and Salhusfjorden. This

reach is very deep and all known dangers lie close off its

shores. Submarine cables cross the reach in two places and can

best be seen on the chart.

4.29 Radoyfjorden (60°35'N., 5°11'E.) lies between Holsnoy and Radoy. The fjord is free from dangers in the fairway,

except in the vicinity of Saeboholmane. A quay, with depths of

3 to 6m alongside, is situated about 1 mile NNW of Saeboholmane.

Bongnestraumen, between the NE side of Bongno and

Radoy, is a narrows connecting Radoyfjorden with Mangersfjorden. A light is shown on the N side of Bongno. A cable,

with a vertical clearance of 37m, spans Bongnestraumen. This

channel has a least depth in the fairway of 21.9m and, although

narrow, is free from dangers.

4.29 From abreast the E extremity of Bongno, Radoyfjorden

trends in a general SE direction for about 5 miles and joins

Kvernafjorden in the vicinity of Tjuvholme. The fairway

through the fjord is deep and clear, but there are some nearby

dangers.

4.29 Kvernafjorden trends SE for about 2 miles to the N end of

Hagelsund. Navigation is prohibited to all but local vessels

between Flatoy and Holsnoy. A light marks a shoal on the SW

side of Kvernafjorden, about 0.3 mile SSE of Tjuvholme. 

4.29 Three cables span the channel between Flatoy and Holsnoy

and can best be seen on the chart.

4.29 Salhusfjorden trends SSW from its junction with Hagelsund

for about 3 miles to its junction with Herdlefjorden and the N

reach of Byfjorden. Salhusfjorden is very deep and has a

fairway clear of dangers. Foul ground extends about 183m SW

from a projection on the E side of the S entrance of the fjord. A

submarine cable crosses the fjord 0.5 mile within its entrance.

Salhus, on the E side of the fjord, has two small quays. At

Frekhaug, 1 mile NW of Salhus, there are quays. with depths

of from 3 to 6m alongside.

4.29 A bridge and racon, with a vertical clearance of 32m, crosses

Salhusfjorden from the SW extremity of Flatoy to Klauvneset,

about 0.8 mile SE.

4.30 Lurefjorden (60°42'N., 5°07'E.) is approached from

Fedjeosen and the S end of Fedjefjorden by passing N of Store

Sandholme and the dangers E of this islet and then through

Hoplandsosen and Fosnstraumen. The S approach is made

from Kvernafjorden by way of Alversund, Radsundet and

Lureosen. A light marks the N side of the NW entrance of

Hoplandsosen. Taren, awash in places and marked by an iron

perch, lies on the S side of the Hoplandsosen entrance. 

4.30 Kraka is an above-water rock on the SW side of Hoplandsosen. Fosnstraumen is the narrow channel between the N

side of Radoy and the S end of Fosnoy and connects Hoplandsosen with the NW end of Lurefjorden. The fairway has a least

charted depth of 20m. Two overhead cables, with a minimum

vertical clearance of 15m, span the channel.

4.30 Lurefjorden trends about 9 miles SE to the narrow Rylandspollen. Seimsfjorden continues about 3 miles SSE from

Lurefjorden. Both of these fjords are clear and deep in their

fairways. Numerous lights mark the channels leading N and S

from Lurefjorden. The dangers in these channels are also

marked by iron perches or beacons.

4.30 Alverstraumen (60°34'N., 5°14'E.), which leads 1.5 miles

NNW from Kvernafjorden, is spanned near the S end by a

bridge, with a vertical clearance of 27m. The fairway N of the

bridge is well marked by navigational aids. 

4.30 There are quays, with least depths of 3m alongside, on the E

side of the channel at the village of Alversund, near the bridge. 

4.30 There is anchorage for small vessels in several places N of a

submarine cable which lies across the channel 0.25 mile N of

the bridge, care being taken to keep clear of the fairway. The S

part of the channel is spanned by an overhead cable with a

vertical clearance of 28m; the N part of the channel is spanned

by an overhead cable with a vertical clearance of 36m.

4.30 Radsundet has a length of about 5 miles from its S entrance

at Alverstraumen to its N entrance at Bruknappen. The W side

and both ends of Radsundet is well marked by lights. 

4.30 There are quays at Skardsvag and Notlevag. Quays at Sandvik, situated 1 mile SSW of Skardsvag, and Askeland have

depths of 7m alongside.

Bergen (60°24'N., 5°19'E.)

World Port Index No. 23160

4.31 Bergen is often called the capital of West Norway and

has been a city for over 900 years. It has a population of more

than 210,000. Known for shipping and fishing in the past, it is

now identified as a servicing and supply base for the offshore

oil and gas fields of the North Sea in the vicinity of SW Norway as well.

Located on the NW side of the Bergen peninsula and on the

SE part of Byfjorden, the city’s harbor includes bights and inlets which lie E of a line running N for about 3 miles from

Olderneset to Hella.

4.31 Passenger, ro-ro, tanker, bulk, and general cargo vessels can

be handled. In addition, the port has drydocks and shipyard
Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 75

Pub. 182

Bergen Harbor—Vagen from SE

Bergen Harbor
76 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 

Pub. 182

facilities for the offshore oil industry.

4.31 Winds—Weather.—Generally, the wind direction is from S

to SE during the winter and from N to NE during the summer. 

4.31 Weather conditions vary between the outer islands, the

region near Bergen, and in the fjords of this sector. The climate

at Bergen is mild, humid, and rainy. 

4.31 Bergen harbor freezes only during very severe winters. Fog

occurs during the summer.

4.31 Tides—Currents.—The mean HW interval at Bergen is 10

hours 17 minutes. 

4.31 Tidal currents in the port are negligible, except in

Damsgardssund, where a slight set may be encountered during

both the rising and falling tides.

4.31 Depths—Limitations.—Puddefjorden, the outer roadstead,

has general depths of 9 to 37m. Close offshore the depths are

less. On the SE side, at the head of Puddefjorden, Damsgardssund leads into Solheimsvik. 

4.31 There is a total of approximately 9,139m of quayage within

the port. The main quays are, as follows:

1. Jekteviken Quay, close N of Dokkeskjerskaien, is

253m long with depths of 9 to 11.6m alongside. It handles

container and ro-ro cargo.

2. Skoltegrunnskaien, at the N side of the entrance to

Vagen, is used by passenger vessels. The quay has a total

berthing space of 700m and has depths of 6.5 to 9.7m

alongside.

3. At Hegrenese, on the outer W side of Nyhaven, a

grain quay is 75m long, with depths of 8.8 to 10m alongside.

A conspicuous silo stands in the vicinity of the quay.

4. Rieber Coal Quay, close N of the grain quay, is 147m

long with depths of 6.2 to 9.7m alongside.

Bergen—Vagen from NW

Port of Bergen Home Page

http://www.bergenhavn.no

Bergen—Port Facilities

Quay Length Depth 

alongside Remarks

Mohlenpriskaien 306m 2.9-4.5m

Located on N 

side of Damsgardssund E 

of the bridge.

Frieleneskaien 251m 5.9-9.2m

Located on N 

side of Damsgardssund W 

of the bridge.

Dokkeskjerskaien

South Quay 439m 7.2-11.0m Located on N 

side of Damsgardssund W 

of the bridge.

West Quay 100m 7.9-9.7m

North Quay 155m 7.3-8.7m
Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 77

Pub. 182

4.31 Vessels up to 70,200 grt have been accommodated in the

harbor. Generally, vessels up to 10.6m draft can be handled. It

was reported that a vessel with a draft of 11m had entered the

port.

4.31 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans the entrance into Damsgardssund. Numerous mooring buoys are

moored in Damsgardssund. Store Lungegaardsvn is entered

from the NE side of Solheimsvik through a narrow passage

spanned by a lift bridge.

Aspect.—Puddefjorden is the outer roadstead. Vagen is an

inlet entered on the NE side of Puddefjorden; it is usually

congested with ships moving in the harbor. Sandvik, a harbor

basin, is entered about 0.5 mile N of the entrance to Vagen and

is used by seaplanes. Nyhaven and Breidvik are small harbor

basins close N of Sandvik.

4.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots for Bergen are ordered through the Safe Sea Net or the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking

Center and board in the following positions: 

1. Vessels approaching from S (see paragraph 4.16)

board the pilot at the W end of Korsfjorden, on the N side, in

the vicinity of Viksoy and Store Flesa, or at the entrance to

Korsfjorden, about 0.7 mile N of Store Marstein.

2. Vessels approaching from N board the pilot at Fedjeosen (see paragraph 4.22), either off Hellisoy Light or off

Homengra Light. When pilots are prevented from boarding

due to bad weather at the above locations, they will then do

so E of Grisholmen, 0.25 mile N of Fedje. 

4.31 See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic

Ocean for additional information.

4.31 Regulations.—A printed English translation of harbor

regulations may be obtained at the harbor office. Regulations

concerning explosives and lights are very stringent. Vessels

arriving at Bergen without having been assigned an anchorage

or mooring shall anchor in Puddefjorden until a berth has been

designated by the harbor authorities. 

4.31 Vessels should send their ETA to Port Control at least 1 hour

prior to arrival. The ETA message should include the following

information: 

1. Vessel name and call sign.

2. Length overall, beam, and draft.

3. Flag.

4. Purpose of port call.

5. Name of agent.

6. Last port-of-call and next port-of-call.

4.31 A speed limit of 5 knots is the maximum permissible speed

in the inner part of Eidsvagen. 

4.31 Anchorage.—Vessels of considerable size may anchor in

Puddefjorden, except W of a line extending 0.5 mile NW from

the W end of Dokkeskjerskaien. A submarine pipeline is laid E

of this line on the NE side of Dokkeskjerskaien leading about

0.5 mile N to Georgernes. The fjord is exposed to NW winds,

but the holding ground is good. The prominent spire of a

church, situated 0.25 mile NNE of the bridge at the entrance to

Damsgardssund, is a useful mark for anchoring.

Bergen Harbor

Bergen Harbor

Bergen—Contact Information

Port Authority Port Control

Call sign — Bergen Port Control

VHF — VHF channels 12 and 16

Telephone 47-55-568950

47-55-568980

47-55-568981

Facsimile 47-55-568986 47-55-321203

E-mail bergen.havn@bergen.kommune.no skolten.havnevakt@bergen.kommune.no
78 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 

Pub. 182

4.31 Skutevik affords anchorage to vessels of moderate size, in

depths of 27 to 36m, but stern mooring is necessary as the

bottom shelves steeply. The quarantine anchorage is in Florvag. There is anchorage for small vessels in Nyhavn and Breidvik.

4.31 Anchorage is prohibited in Vagen and also W of the lighted

buoy in the entrance to Vagen.

Inner Fjords Northeast of Bergen

4.32 Osteroy, a large island, lies about 6 miles NE of

Bergen. The island is completely shut in by the mainland and is

encircled by Sorfjorden and Osterfjorden. Both of these fjords

have deep fairways and have comparatively few dangers.

Sorfjorden (60°31'N., 5°22'E.), the southernmost of the

inner fjords, is entered between Hammersnes (60°33'N.,

5°20'E.) and Hordvikneset, about 2 miles to the SW. Depths in

the fairway exceed 183m, except for 1.25 miles in the NE part

where it narrows, the depth is 12.8 to 33m. 

4.32 The few shoal areas lie close offshore and the entire fjord is

well marked by lights. It has been reported an overhead cable,

with a vertical clearance of 60m, spans the fjord about 5 miles

within the entrance.

4.32 Votloy (60°28'N., 5°28'E.), an islet, lies about 6 miles within

the entrance near the middle of the fjord. A light is shown on

the islet.

4.32 Arnavag, which branches S from Sorfjorden, is entered 0.5

mile SSW of Votloy. There are a number of quays for small

vessels inside the entrance to Arnavag.

4.32 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 53m, crosses Sorfjorden about 3 miles SE of Votloy.

4.32 Vaksdal (60°29'N., 5°44'E.) (World Port Index No. 23140),

an industrial center, is located on the E side of Sorfjorden, ENE

of the light on the islet of Ulsnesoy. Large vessels can berth at

the largest quay, which is 145m long, with depths of 7 to 21m

alongside. There are several small quays in the port. 

4.32 Vessels bound for the port must first call at Bergen for

customs clearance and a pilot. A conspicuous mill and silo

stand in the vicinity of the quay.

4.32 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained by small

vessels in Veavik, on the W side of Sorfjorden, 4.5 miles N of

the entrance to Dalevagen. Stamneshella, on the N side of

Vikafjorden close within the entrance, is an anchorage with

mooring rings W and E of the main quay, which is 64m long

and has depths of up to 5m alongside. 

4.32 Good anchorage can be obtained by small vessels in Kallandsbukt close NE of Kallandsholmen, in depths of 10 to 18m,

sand.

4.33 Eidsfjorden (60°43'N., 5°47'E.) trends NNE for

about 3.25 miles from the N end of Sorfjorden. It is narrow

and, except for a shoal lying within 1 mile of its head, has

fairway depths of 30 to 106m. The depths close offshore are

between 12.8 and 20.1m.

4.33 Mellesdalsund is the winding channel leading in a general

NW direction for about 3 miles on the N side of Osteroy and

connecting the N end of Sorfjorden with Romarheimsfjord. 

4.33 The fairway through Mellesdalsund is deep and clear of dangers. Romarheimsfjord, entered between Langeneset and the E

side of Haukoy, leads 3 miles NE to Mofjorden, which continues NE for another 6.5 miles.Osterfjorden is entered between Hammersnes and a mainland point, about 2 miles to the

W. The fjord trends in a general NE direction for about 13

miles and joins the S end of Romereimsfjord. Fairway depths

through the fjord are ample and the fjord is clear. The only dangers are found within the side inlets and coves or lie within

183m of the sides of the fjord.

4.34 Lonevagen (60°33'N., 5°27'E.), on the SE side of Osterfjorden, is entered 3 miles ENE of Hammersnes and extends

about 3 miles SE. The entrance is narrowed to a width of 183m

by submerged rocks, marked on the NE side of the entrance by

an iron perch.

4.34 On the SE side of Osterfjorden, small vessels can anchor in

Lonevagen between some islets and the W entrance point. The

inlet has several quays, with depths of from 3 to 5m alongside.

4.34 At Ostereidet, on the NW side of Osterfjorden, there is

anchorage for small vessels W of a quay, which has a depth of

3m alongside. 

4.34 At Kleppsvag, on the S side of Osterfjorden, good anchorage

is available to small vessels at its head, in depths of 20 to 30m;

it has mooring rings. There is a rock, awash, near the middle of

the entrance to this inlet.

4.34 There are a number of other anchorages for small vessels in

Osterfjorden that can best be seen on the chart.

Dokkeskjskaien
79

Pub. 182

5. 

Norway—Fedje to Alesund

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
81

Pub. 182

SECTOR 5 

NORWAY—FEDJE TO ALESUND

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Fedjeosen

N to the approaches to Alesund. The Indreleia, or Inner Route,

from Fedje to Alesund, is also described, as are the various

fjords along this route.

General Remarks

5.1 Winds—Weather.—The direction and strength of the

winds in any period in this sector are controlled by the

prevailing depression track. The average wind strength is 11 to

27 knots, but about 10 per cent of observations reach 34 to 40

knots.

5.1 Most of the strong gale force winds are from S and tend to

follow the direction of the coastline. The frequency of gales

increases in the N.

5.1 Winds are lighter from May to August. The direction is more

variable at this time, with more frequent N winds tending to

follow the coastline.

5.1 During gale force winds, a shift of the wind from S or SW to

NW or N is liable to raise a heavy sea.

5.1 The unusual irregularities of the coastal topography cause

large variations in the direction and strength of the wind.

5.1 Deflection and funneling increase onshore winds above the

average strength. Severe katabatic squalls come down from

steep mountain slopes and cause local hazards, with little

warning of their approach.

5.1 There is a marked tendency for the wind to blow out of the

fjords toward the open sea in winter and into the fjords in summer; however, the chain of offshore islands reduces the wind

strength in some sections of the coast.

5.1 South of Ytteroyane, the weather conditions on the coast are

frequently unsettled and stormy during the autumn, winter, and

spring. The least rainfall is in spring and summer, and the visibility is generally good at that time. The heaviest fog occurs

during the summer months.

5.1 The weather during autumn, winter and spring, on the coast

between Ytteroyane and Alesund, is frequently unsettled and

stormy also. At sea, the prevailing wind during this period is

SW; however, close to land SE and E winds prevail. During the

summer, the wind is most frequently from N to NE. The least

rainfall and the clearest weather will be found during the spring

and the greatest amount of fog occurs during the summer. In

many of the fjords on this part of the coast, heavy squalls will

be experienced from off, and in the vicinity of hills.

5.1 During the winter months, S winds prevail, changing to N in

the summer. Most rain is generally accompanied with SW

winds.

5.1 The amount of rain along this coast varies. The wettest

places are those nearest to high mountains. Greater amounts

occur at higher levels inland.

5.1 The period from September to January is the wettest while

the period from April to early June is the driest. There is no set

pattern of variations from normal in any particular month. The

total amount of rainfall varies from year to year. Because of the

topography, the amount of precipitation in one area may differ

considerably from another area within a short proximity.

5.1 Snow usually begins in October. It is most frequent in March

and infrequent in April and May. There is no snowfall from

June to August along the coast.

5.1 Snowstorms at the approaches to fjords and around the

offshore islands may cause hazards to coastal vessels due to

poor visibility and to ice forming on the superstructure as wet

snow freezes.

5.1 Fog is most common with mild S to SW winds. The highest

frequency of fog occurs over the sea in summer. Coastal areas

exposed to those winds are often obscured, but visibility over

water is normally improved when the wind veers.

5.1 Most fog in the approaches to the fjords occurs in summer,

with the penetration of sea fog varying according to the degree

of exposure to onshore winds. Sea fog offshore may drift over

the coastline with the sea breeze as the land began to cool in

the evening. Better visibility is found on the lee side of the land

barriers.

5.1 Radiation fog often forms over low-lying land at the head of

fjords, mostly during long clear winter nights.

5.1 Arctic sea smoke or frost smoke may form temporarily over

the inner part of the fjord when extremely cold air drifts over

relatively warmer water on winter nights.

5.1 Visibility is seriously restricted in snow, heavy rain, or thick

drizzle. Good visibility prevails over the region for most of the

time in all seasons. Mirages are reported along the coast at

times.

5.1 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents may be very much

influenced by the winds and floods; in turn they may influence

the general flow along the coast.

5.1 In the narrower channels between the islands, the tidal

current often runs with considerable strength; because of

strong currents great caution must be exercised by vessels navigating in Indreleia, the passage along the coast inside the offlying islands and reefs.

5.1 Due to the constant coastal current, the NE flood current is

usually stronger; during the rising tide there may be a set

toward the islands and reefs.

5.1 The velocity and direction of tidal currents, including temporary wind influences, are described with specific fair-ways

and ports, as required.

5.1 During settled weather, the tidal currents on the coast

between Ytteroyane and Alesund set NE with the rising tide

and SW with the falling tide, attaining their greatest velocity at

a distance of 30 to 50 miles from the coast. During continuous

W winds, the tidal currents set constantly NE with considerable velocity, especially during the rising tide.

5.1 On this part of the coast, the tidal currents set more strongly

and constantly NE than in the opposite direction, especially at

the distance from land mentioned above.

5.1 Statthavet has long been known as an area with very severe

weather, and many have identified the area as dangerous. The

depths vary from approximately 60 to 150m.
82 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

5.1 It is indicated that winds, especially from the SW to N,

create rough seas. In those circumstances, the waves go straight

in from the sea. The current in the waterway has been

estimated at between 2 and 4 knots and when the ocean waves

meet it, strong, steep waves develop and the swell becomes

choppy.

5.1 Pilotage.—Kvitsoy Pilot Center organizes and engages

pilots along the W coast of Norway from Egersund in the S

leading N to the parallel of 65°08'N. Pilots should be requested 24 hours in advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours

prior to arrival at the pilot station. 

5.1 See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic

Ocean for further information.

5.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

Off-lying Dangers

5.2 Alwyn North Oil Field (60°48'N., 1°44'E.) is situated

86 miles W of Holmengra Light, about midway between the

coast of Norway and the Shetland Islands. A drilling and accommodations platform and a production platform stand in the

field.

5.2 Ninian Oil Field (60°51'N., 1°28'E.), with three production

platforms, is located 8 miles NW of Alwyn Field. Lyell Oil

Field and Heather Oil Field lie about 8 and 15 miles, respectively, NW of Ninian Oil Field.

5.2 Brent Oil Field (61°05'N., 1°43'E.) is situated 82 miles W

of Utvaer Light and about 15 miles N of Alwyn North Field.

Four production platforms, a vent structure for burning excess

gas, and a moored tanker loading and storage facility stand

within the field.

5.2 Hutton Oil Field, North West Hutton Oil Field, and South

Cormorant Oil Field lie 8 miles W, 12 miles WNW, and 18

miles WNW, respectively, of Brent Oil Field.

5.2 North Cormorant Oil Field (61°15'N., 1°09'E.), with a production platform, is situated about 19 miles NW of Brent Oil

Field and 64 miles NE of Muckle Flugga Light (Shetland

Islands).

5.2 Tern Oil Field, Eide Oil Field, and Osprey Oil Field lie 7

miles WNW, 7 miles N, and 6 miles NE, respectively, of North

Comorant Oil Field.

5.2 Statfjorden Oil Field (61°15'N., 1°51'E.) is situated about

78 miles WNW of Utvaer Light and 7 miles NNE of Brent Oil

Field. There are three production platforms and two SPM

loading platforms in the field. In addition, there is an offshore

loading system (UKOLS), by which a tanker is moored to a

sub-surface buoy. The largest drilling rig in the world, the

Statfjord C can be found in the vicinity of this oil field.

5.2 Gullfaks Oil Field (61°12'N., 2°12'E.), with two platforms

and two SPMs, lies 10 miles ESE of Statfjorden Oil Field.

Dunlin Oil Field and Snore Oil Field lie about 7 miles W and

18 miles NNE, respectively, of Statfjorden Oil Field.

5.2 Magnus Oil Field (61°37'N., 1°20'E.) lies about 97 miles W

of Ytteroyane Light and 28 miles NW of Statfjorden Oil Field.

A very large production platform stands in the field.

5.2 Don Oil Field and Murchison Oil Field lie 11 and 18 miles,

respectively, SE of Magnus Oil Field. Thistle Oil Field and

Deveron Oil Field, close W, lie 17 miles SSE of Mangnus Oil

Field.

Fedje to Utvaer

5.3 From the island of Fedje (60°46'N., 4°43'E.), the N

entrance point to Fedjeosen, the channel at the N approach to

Bergen, the coast trends about 19 miles NNW to Utvaer Light.

Utvaer Light is located on one of the larger islets of the NW

group of Utvaer Islets. This part of the coast is indented by

Sognesjoen, a deep and unencumbered passage leading S of

Utvaer and then E to Sognefjorden. 

Between Utvaer Light and Ytteroyane Light, about 33 miles

NNE, the coast is fronted by islands and rocky islets; the

continuity of the inner passage is interrupted, in places, by

channels leading directly in from the open sea to Indreleia.

The Ytteroyene group of islands lies within the vicinity of

Ytteroyan Light. Ytteroyan Light is abreast the port of Floro. 

5.3 Between Buelandet, a group of about 350 islands, islets, and

skerries about 15 miles N of Utvaer Light, and Ytteroyane,

there are many banks, with depths of 18.3 to 27m, which are

dangerous in bad weather. Under these conditions, there is a

confused sea within the 200m curve. In this area the off-lying

islets are thickly interspersed with rocks completely or nearly

awash. Unless a vessel is standing in to enter one of the fjords,

it is advisable to navigate at least 10 miles W of the larger

islands.

5.3 North of Ytteroyan Light, the coast trends for about 40 miles

to the NW end of Stadttlandet, one of the most remarkable

promontories on the coast of Norway. This coast is also fronted

Statfjorden Oil Field—Platform C
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 83

Pub. 182

by islands, islets, and rocks. Indreleia is reached through a

number of channels within this area. Except when making one

of the fjords, it is advisable to keep an offing of at least 10

miles W of the larger islands.

5.3 Between Buholmen Light at Stadttlandet and the approach

channels leading to Breisund and Alesund, the outer coast

trends about 25 miles in a NE direction. The coast is indented

by a number of fjords and again the mainland is fronted by

many islands, islets, and dangerous rocks. The islands are high

and steep on the seaward side, and the mainland backing them

is also high. In places, the dangers extend a considerable distance seaward from the islands. When Breisund is approached,

it will appear as a conspicuous and fairly wide opening.

5.3 The main channel of Indreleia, leading N between the N

approach to Bergen and the port of Floro, continues from

Fedjeosen through Sognesjoen and then through Krakhellesund to Atleoy and Vilnaesfjorden. 

5.3 From Atleoy, there are alternative routes available to vessels

of moderate size; the W route passes W of Atleoy, while the E

route continues through Granesund at the inner end of

Vilnaesfjorden. These routes unite to the N at Stavenes Light,

and the track then leads N to Floro.

5.4 From offshore, between Fedje and Utvaer, Sognesjoen appears as a wide opening in the land.

5.4 Utvaer, 30m high, and the islets close E are low, but farther E

the islands of Sula are high and conspicuous, and appear to be

a promontory of the mainland. 

Vessels approaching the coast, intending to enter Indreleia or

the fjords N of Fedjeosen, usually stand N of Holmengra

Light (60°51'N., 4°39'E.), about 4 miles N of Fedje. The island

is small and relatively high. The light tower is 16m high and is

equipped with a radiobeacon and a racon. Rocks, above and

below-water, extend about 1 mile W from the island. About 2

miles NNW is Bergskallen, a rock covered by 17m of water.

This sunken rock is the farthest S of a chain extending about 5

miles NW of Holmengra. 

5.4 Fedjefjorden lies to the SE, and Fensfjorden lies to the E of

Holmengra, and leads for a distance of about 25 miles.

5.4 Sognesjoen, the approach to Sognefjorden from seaward,

leads about 15 miles NE from the S end of Ytre Sula, an island

about 9 miles N of Holmengra, and E of Utvaer. Small islets lie

off the entrance to Sognesjoen farther N.

5.4 The approach to Indreleia or the fjords in this vicinity N of

Holmengra is usually done by keeping in mid-channel between

Holmengra Light and the light over Bergskallen.

5.4 At night, enter and keep in the white sector of Grimeskjaret

Light (60°51'N., 4°45'E.), bearing between 092° and 104°,

which leads between Holmengra and Bergskallen. A racon is

located at the light tower.

5.5 Pollatind (61°06'N., 4°52'E.), 542m high, situated on

Sula about 11 miles ENE of Utvaer, is conspicuous. It rises

gradually from a base which extends about 3 miles in a N-S

direction.

5.5 On the island of Alden, about 13 miles NNW of Pollatind, a

conspicuous saddle-shaped hill stretching E and W rises to a

height of 480m. This hill can be seen in clear weather at a

distance of 32 to 40 miles. Alden will be immediately recognized as an island.

5.5 Fensfjorden is entered between Rongevaer (60°49'N.,

4°47'E.), 1.75 miles SSE of Grimeskjeret Light, and Roytingja,

an island 2.25 miles NNE.

5.5 Fensfjorden presents no difficulties to navigation, but vessels

should give both shores a fair berth and the dangers near the

entrance must be avoided. This fjord extends E and SE for 15

miles, then becomes Austfjorden, which continues SE for 15

miles; it forms the approach to Mongstad Oil Terminal. From

the outer part of the fjord, several passes lead N to Sognesjoen;

from its inner part Masfjorden branches NE for 12 miles.

Hindnesfjorden and Vagane are arms which branch S from

Austfjorden.

5.5 Krakeflui, Mefjordbaen, and Boskallane are three shoals

lying in the fairway of the entrance to Fensfjorden; they lie 0.8

mile W, 1 mile WSW, and 1 mile SW, respectively, from

Grimeskjeret Light.

5.5 Rongevaerskallen (60°50'N., 4°46'E.), 0.9 mile SSE of

Grimeskjeret Light, has a least depth of 6m.

5.5 Fringing dangers, branch inlets, and the lights of Fensfjorden

can best be seen on the chart.

Fedje Vessel Traffic Service

5.6 The Fedje Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) is in operation in the approaches to Mongstad and Sture Oil Terminals.

Participation is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. Vessels with a length of 24m or greater, including

towing and pushing vessels.

2. All vessels involved in towing operations where the

total length exceeds 35m.

3. Vessels carrying dangerous and/or polluting liquid

cargo in bulk, irrespective of length. 

5.6 Note.—The Coastal Directorate has the authority to apply

restrictions 1 and 2 for smaller vessels.

5.6 The operational area of the VTS has a boundary of straight

lines joining:

5.6 All vessels carrying dangerous cargoes or pollutant cargoes

are required, as far as is possible, to navigate within the limits

of the fairways. Such vessels should report their ETA at the

limit of the operational area 6 hours in advance. 

Holmengra Light on Islet
84 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

5.6 All vessels wishing to navigate within the operational area

must obtain permission from the Fedje VTS at least 1 hour

before their arrival at the limit of this area. 

5.6 This requirement includes vessels intending to leave a quay,

berth, or mooring within the area.

5.6 When requesting permission to enter the VTS operational

area, the message should include the following information:

1. Vessel name and call sign.

2. Position and time.

3. Nationality.

4. Master’s name and nationality.

5. GRT.

6. Draft.

7. Destination.

8. Intended navigation channel (fairway).

9. Cargo.

10. Amount, in tons, of dangerous or polluting cargo.

11. ETA at the limits of the operational area.

12. ETA at the harbor.

13. ETD from the harbor.

5.6 Vessels should send position reports to the Fedje VTS, as

follows:

1. When passing the limits of the operational area.

2. When departing from a quay, anchorage, or mooring.

3. When arriving at a quay, anchorage, or mooring.

4. When passing any position that the Fedje VTS may

require a report to be made.

5. Involvement in and sighting any accident or abnormal

operational condition.

6. As requested by the Fedje VTS.

5.6 Vessels should report the following with regard to the above

position reports when entering or operating in the operational

area:

1. Vessels bound for a harbor within the operational area:

a. Name and call sign.

b. Adjusted ETA of passing the limits of the operational area.

c. New ETA at a quay, anchorage, or mooring.

d. New time when arriving at a quay, anchorage, or

mooring.

2. Vessels leaving a harbor in the operational area:

a. Name and call sign.

b. Time when departing from a quay, anchorage, or

mooring.

c. ETA of passing the limits of the operational area.

d. Time when passing the limits of the operational

area.

3. Vessels navigating within the operational area from

one position to another:

a. Name and call sign.

b. Time when departing from a quay, anchorage, or

mooring.

c. ETA at a quay, anchorage, or mooring.

d. Time when arriving at a quay, anchorage, or mooring.

4. Vessels in transit through the operational area:

a. Name and call sign.

b. Time, position, course, and speed when passing the

limits of the operational area.

5.7 Mongstad (60°49'N., 5°02'E.) (World Port Index No.

23138) is a coastal port situated on the S shore of Fensfjorden,

about 8 miles within its entrance. It is the site of a refinery and

is designed to handle incoming crude and to load the finished

products. The port is approached through the channel N of

Holmengra and from the channel SSE of Fedje.

5.7 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Mongstad terminal in Fensfjorden have, in general, a constant W set, but unsettled winds may cause them to set E.

5.7 Depths—Limitations.—At the Statoil Rafinor refinery

there are six jetties, including the following main berths:

1. No. 1 Quay (for crude)—124m long, with a depth of

38m alongside. It can accommodate vessels up to 300,000

dwt.

2. No. 2 Quay (for products)—69m long, with a depth of

24m alongside. It can accommodate vessels up to 35,000

dwt.

3. No. 7 Quay (for crude)—100m long, with a depth of

22m alongside. It can accommodate vessels up to 180,000

dwt.

5.7 Near the refinery is a supply base for the Oseberg Oil Field.

The main quay is 122m long, with depths of 11.2 to 13m

alongside.

5.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 4,000

gross tons carrying dangerous cargo to and from the terminal.

Pilots board, as follows: 

a. Fedjeosen No. 2: 60°44.1'N, 4°44.0'E. 

b. Fedjefjorden No. 3: 60°45.7'N, 4°46.1'E (By

appointment only).

c. Holmengra No. 2: 60°51.4'N, 4°39.0'E. 

d. Fensfjorden No. 3: 60°51.4'N, 4°45.2'E (By

appointment only). 

e. Vessels over 30,000 gross tons carrying hazardous or

polluting cargo to the terminal:

1. West Fedje—in position 60°46.0'N, 4°27.9'E (Pilot

transfer by helicopter, if required).

2. West Holmengra—in position 60°51.0'N, 4°25.9'E

(Pilot transfer by helicopter, if required).

5.7 Pilots should be ordered using the Safe Sea Net or

alternatively the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. Vessels should

Mongstad
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 85

Pub. 182

send an ETA 72 hours in advance and confirm their arrival 48

and 24 hours prior to arrival.

5.7 Regulations.—Tankers of 40,000 tons or more, when within

territorial waters, display a black cylinder by day and exhibit

three red lights, disposed vertically, at night, to indicate that

other vessels must not impede their navigation. 

5.7 In addition, tankers may use a sound signal of one long blast,

followed by two short blasts at any time.

5.7 All vessels underway, anchored, or at a quay within the

limits of the operational area should maintain a continuous

listening watch on VHF channels 16 and 80.

5.7 The terminal regulations can be accessed, as follows: 

5.7 Contact Information.—The terminal can be contacted, as

follows: 

1. Call sign: Mongstad Port Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 11, 12, and 16

3. Telephone: 47-56-345529

4. Facsimile: 47-56-344660

47-56-344729

5. Telegraph: STATOIL MONGSTAD

5.8 Fedjefjorden, the continuation of Indreleia to the

NNW from Bergen, leads E of Fedje to Fensfjorden and is free

from dangers in the fairway. The NE side of the channel should

be avoided as rocks extend about 0.7 mile offshore. 

5.8 The E side of Fedje is free from dangers at a distance of

about 183m.

5.8 Ytre Langoyflui (60°47'N., 4°49'E.), on the E side of the

fjord, about 2 miles ENE of the E extremity of Fedje, has a

depth of 3m or less, and is marked on its N end by an iron

perch.

5.8 The lights and dangers in the fjord may best be seen on the

chart.

5.8 Vetegjograskjaer Light (60°49'N., 4°45'E.), 2.5 miles NNE

of Fedje Light, stands at the NE end of Fedjefjorden.

5.8 Directions.—When a vessel desires to pass through Indrelia

N of Fedjefjorden, vessels pass W of a 1.8m patch, marked by

an iron perch, situated 0.25 mile WNW of Vetegjo Graskjaer

Light; W of the dangers lying W of Grimeskjeret Light; and

then into the W end of Fensfjorden.

5.8 From the W end of Fensfjorden, the deep water track leads

about 15 miles N to Sognesjoen, which leads to Sognefjorden.

5.8 Vessels desiring to pass through Indrelia N of Fedjefjorden,

pass W of the 1.8m patch, described above, and then into

Fensfjorden, continuing N at the outer end of that fjord.

5.8 From the NW end of Fensfjorden, Indreleia passes W of

Mongstad

Ole R. Olsen Home Page

http://www.oro.no/port_info
86 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

Roytingkalven (60°52'N., 4°47'E.), marked on its SW side by

a light, and E of a light about 0.2 mile W of Roytingkalven

Light. A rock, with a depth less than 1.8m, marked by an iron

perch, lies on the W side of the preferred channel, 0.3 mile NW

of Roytingkalven Light.

5.8 After passing the above rock, the track leads in a general N

direction, passing W of the light on Sogneuksen (60°57'N.,

4°46'E.), into Sognesjoen, the broad deep channel forming the

E continuation of Indreleia.

5.8 An alternative track from Fensfjorden to Sognesjoen turns N

at Vikingneset (60°51'N., 4°56'E.), the SE extremity of Byrknesoy, and then passes between the island of Mjomna on the

W and Sandoy on the E, about 2 miles NNE of the light on

Vikingneset. 

5.8 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 30m, connects Mjomna

and Sandoy, about 3.4 miles NNE of the light on Vikingneset.

5.8 Caution.—Vessels crossing the cautionary area for VLCC,

from seaward of Holmengra into Fensfjorden, must not impede

vessels displaying signals required of tankers of 40,000 tons

and larger.

5.9 Sognesjoen (60°52'N., 4°40'E.) extends about 17

miles NE to its junction with Sognefjorden, from a position

about 7 miles NNE of Holmengra. The fairway is deep and has

a least width of 1.75 miles.

5.9 Storsvalene and Smasvalene are two groups of islets and

rocks lying off the SW entrance to Sognesjoen. The S end of

Storsvalene lies about 6 miles N of Holmengra Light; the two

groups then extend about 2 miles N. 

5.9 An island, in position 60°56'N, 4°37'E, and marked by a

beacon, lies near the S end of Storsvalene.

5.9 At the S end of the approach to Sognesjoen, on the E side,

are numerous islands, islets, and rocks. 

5.9 Mebaen (60°54'N., 4°42'E.), an unmarked danger with

depths of less than 1.8m, is the farthest W of these dangers. It

lies about 3 miles NNE of Holmengra Light. A similar unmarked danger lies about 0.2 mile N of Mebaen. These dangers

are covered by the red sector of Sogneuksen Light.

5.9 When approaching Sognesjoen from the WSW, the most

prominent visible feature is the 722m high mountain Brosviksata (61°02'N., 5°10'E.). There is a conspicuous radio mast

on the mountain. The mast is over 50m in height.

5.9 Kvaereknapp (60°59'N., 4°42'E.) is the S extremity of Ytre

Sula. This extremity, on the N side of Sognesjoen, is marked by

a light.

5.9 Storholmen (61°01'N., 4°47'E.) and some smaller islets and

rocks lie within 0.5 mile S of Tungodden, the S extremity of

Steinsundoy, 2.75 miles NE of Kvaereknapp. These dangers

are covered by the green sector of Sogneuksen Light.

5.9 Guleskjer, situated 1.75 miles NNE of Storholmen, is an

above-water rock in the middle of the entrance to a fjord that is

mostly foul.

5.9 Gronholmen (61°02'N., 4°53'E.) lies close off the SW end

of Nesoy. A light is exhibited on Gronholmen.

5.9 A light is exhibited on the SE point of Sula, 2 miles ENE of

Gronholmen.

5.10 Rossoy (60°59'N., 4°48'E.), situated on the S side of

Sognesjoen, 2.5 miles NNE of Sogneuksen Light, is marked by

a lighted beacon. The dangers S of Rossoy are covered by the

red sector of Sogneuksen Light bearing more than 197°.

5.10 Bunesholmane is situated 1 mile ENE of Rossoy Light and

Hamnesholmen is situated about 0.3 mile farther E. A rock,

marked by an iron perch, lies 183m N of Hamnesholmen.

5.10 A beacon stands on the NE end of Nord Glavaer, 1 mile ENE

of Hamnesholmen; it marks the W side of the N entrance to

Rossosen.

5.10 Dingenes (61°02'N., 5°02'E.), reported to be 4.5 miles ENE

of Nord Glovaer, is marked by a light.

5.10 Islets and rocks lie within 1.25 miles to 1.5 miles W and NW

of Dingenes Light. Stabben, the farthest N of these dangers,

has a depth of 1.5m, and is marked by an iron perch. These

dangers are covered by the green sector of Dingenes Light.

5.10 Rutletangen Light (61°05'N., 5°10'E.) is exhibited from the

NE point of Fjaeroy, about 6 miles NE of Dingenes. A beacon

stands on a rock close NW of the point.

5.10 Torsholmane are a group of dangers situated on two shoals

on the N side of Sognesjoen, within 1 mile SW of Hansneset

(61°07'N., 5°06'E.), the SE extremity of Losna.

5.10 When about 1 mile SSW of Kvaereknapp Light, shape a

course to pass about midway between Storholmen and Rossoy. 

5.10 From this position, steer to keep in the white sector of

Krakeneset Light, until in a position about 1 mile SW of that

light, then steer to pass midway between Krakeneset Light and

Stabben.

5.10 From this position, steer in the white sector of Rutletangen

Light bearing between 068° and 102° until N of Stabben and

then steer a mid-channel course between the light and Torsholmane, and then into Sognefjorden, passing N and then SE

of Rutletangen Light.

5.10 Caution.—The area extending from Holmengra to Sognesjoen and to Rossoy is foul with many shoals.

5.10 With an ebb tide, the current runs W. The outward current in

Sognefjorden will increase significantly during the snowmelt

period and during periods of heavy precipitation, which is

strongest on the N side of the fjord.

5.10 Interaction between waves and current, as well as refraction

of waves over shallow areas, causes choppy seas. High, steep

waves have been observed in the area.

5.10 When nearing the land to the S of Utvaer, in clear weather,

Sognefjorden
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 87

Pub. 182

Eldsfjell will be seen farthest S. This is a high rounded hill on

the island of Holsnoy rising to 324m, in a position about 31

miles SSE of Utvaer Light.

Utvaer to Ytteroyane (including Floro)

5.11 The lighthouses on Utvaer and Ytteroyane are 31m

high and form good landmarks. Utvaer Light is equipped with

a radiobeacon.

From Utvaer Light (61°02'N., 4°31'E.), 12.5 miles NNW of

Holmengra Light, to Ytteroyane Light, a distance of about 33

miles, three fjords indent the coast. From S to N, these three

fjords are Buefjorden, Stavfjorden, and Rekstafjorden.

5.11 Buefjorden (61°15'N., 4°40'E.) is the open fjord which

separates Ospa and Buelandet. The middle waters of the fjord

are clear, but on both the N and S sides rocks and shoals extend

well out into the fjord. North of Buefjorden, from W to E, lies

Buelandet, 41m high; Vaeroy, 163m high; and Alden, 480m

high.

5.11 To the S, at the N end of Ytre Sula, are numerous islets and

rocks, some of which are above water. At its end is Krakestein

Light.

5.11 Gasvaer, and the groups of islands in its vicinity, are lowlying islands, islets, and rocks situated about 7 miles NE of

Nordholmene, the farthest N of the Utvaer Islets. Gasvaer

(61°11'N., 4°42'E.), the largest and highest of the islands, is

18m high,

5.11 The waterway extending from Gasvaerosen N via Buefjorden to the Geita light can be dangerous. Winds especially

from W to NW cause heavy seas in the area. Rough seas and

large waves come mainly in from the W, and the outgoing tidal

current of between 1 and 2 knots causes choppy swell. High

steep waves have been observed in this waterway.

5.12 Ospa (61°13'N., 4°45'E.), an island which rises to a

height of 110m near its center, is situated on the S side of

Buefjorden. 

5.12 A light is located close off its NW side. This island is foul on

all sides, and rocks and shoals extend about 1 mile N from the

island. The islands of Drevoy and Faeroy lie E of Ospa; navigation through the numerous shoals N of them is possible only

with local knowledge.

5.12 Bulandet consists of over approximately 350 islands, islets,

and skerries. The landscape is gentle, low, and rich in vegetation. It is located about 6 miles NNW of Gasvaer. 

5.12 Foul ground extends 0.75 mile S and W from the islets. The

group of islets should not be approached without local knowledge.

5.12 Loftsteingrunnen, SW of Bulandet, is a group of shoals, with

depths of 15 to 17m, which can be dangerous in rough weather.

5.12 Vvryygrunnen is a group of shoals, with depths of 23 to

34m, which lies about 4 miles W of Buesteinane.

5.12 Buesteinane is conspicuous with its black color and ragged

peaks.

5.13 Sandoy Light (61°18'N., 4°36'E.) is exhibited on

Sandoyna and is easily identified by its close settlement and

the light on its highest peak.

5.13 Vaeroy (61°18'N., 4°44'E.), 2.75 miles E of Sandoy Light, is

the principal island on the N side of Buefjorden; it attains a

height of 163m, and its two round knolls, of about equal size,

resemble haycocks.

5.13 Islets and rocks extend about 1 mile S of Vaeroy and three

islands are located in the fairway SE of that island. Geita, the

farthest SE of these three islands, is marked by a light.

5.13 Directions.—The light on Geita leads from seaward into

Buefjorden, clear of the dangers, to within about 2 miles of the

light. Using the chart as the guide, no difficulty should be

experienced in passing E of Vaeroy and S of the light on

Raudoy (61°18'N., 4°55'E.), about 4 miles E of Vaeroy, then

into Vilnesfjorden. The main track of Indreleia continues N

from this fjord.

5.14 Svineflu (61°20'N., 4°33'E.), with a depth of 14m,

lies at the seaward end of numerous rocks and shoals 3 miles

NNW of Sandoy Light. Hasteinosen separates these dangers

from the N side of Buelandet and the NW side of Vaeroy. An

extensive reef, which is awash, lies 1.5 miles E of Svineflu.

5.14 Hasteinen, situated 4 miles NNE of Sandoy Light, is a dense

group of small islets with many off-lying rocks.

5.14 Teinegrunnen (61°24'N., 4°29'E.), with a least depth of

13m, lies about 4 miles NNW of Svineflu. This depth is covered by the red sector of Sandoy Light bearing more than

151.5°.

5.14 Temba is a fishing ground, with a least depth of 13m, situated 4 miles N of Teinegrunnen.

5.14 Stavfjorden (61°27'N., 4°53'E.) lies E of these dangers; the

main track of Indreleia leads across this fjord, then through

Brufjorden to Floro.

5.14 Rekstafjorden is entered on the S side of Kinn (61°34'N.,

4°46'E.) and can be approached from the offing by passing on

either side of Jonsgrunnfalla, by keeping in the white sector of

the light on Sandoya. The white sectors of the light bearing

between 056° and 059°, and between 066° and 068°, lead S

and N of Jonsgrunnfalla, respectively.

5.14 Indreleia continues N from the inner end of Rekstafjorden,

into Nekkoyosen.

5.15 Sverslingosen, the channel between Ytteroyane

Utvaer Light
88 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

(61°35'N., 4°41'E.) and Sverslingane, 1.25 miles N, should

always be used when approaching Skorperfjorden.

5.15 Hoydalsnakken, a 13m patch, lies at the outer end of a chain

of shoals extending 2 miles WSW from Ytteroyane.

5.15 Havfluene, lying at the outer end of many shoals which extend up to 3 miles WSW from Sverslingane, has a least depth

of 11m.

5.15 Ternehaug (61°35'N., 4°41'E.), on the S side of the fairway,

lies 0.3 mile NE of Ytteroyane; it is marked by a light.

5.15 Ertreskjert, 0.8 mile NE of Ternehaug, is easily identified; it

lies on the NW edge of a group of islets and rocks which

extend 0.7 mile SE.

5.15 Kvitingane, above-water, and Kvitingsfalla, awash, lie in a

group of shoals on the N side of the fairway 1.5 miles NE of

the light on Ternehaug. 

5.15 Skallefluene (61°35'N., 4°46'E.), on the NE side of the

fairway, 1 mile SE of Kvitingane, has depths of 2m or less.

These rocks and a 4m patch, 0.3 mile SSE, are covered by the

red sector of Kinnasund Light, situated on the NE side of Kinn,

bearing more than 167°.

5.15 For vessels entering Sverslingosen from seaward, the 387m

height on Skorpa in line with Ertreskjeret bearing 079° will

lead to a position about 0.4 mile N of Ternehaug Light; then

change course to the NE to pass 0.2 mile N of Ertreskjeret. 

5.15 From Ertreskjeret steer E until the white sector of Kinnasund

Light bears between 157° and 167°, which course will lead to

the W end of Skorpefjorden.

5.15 Skorpefjorden, an E continuation of the entrance from Sverslingosen, is formed between Skorpa and Ytre Annoya on the

N and Reksta and Nordre Nekkoya on the S. It extends about 5

miles ENE.

5.15 Flategrunnane (61°35'N., 4°50'E.), awash, lies on the S side

of the fairway, 0.4 mile S of the S extremity of Skorpa. It lies at

the W end of Hestholmane, which has another rock awash, 0.3

mile ENE of Flategrunnane.

5.15 Klungreskjeret lies on the S side of the channel, 0.3 mile SW

of the SE extremity of Skorpa. A light marks the E end of foul

ground 0.4 mile ENE of the SE end of Skorpa.

5.15 Foul ground lies on the S side of the fairway, about 183m S

of Ytre Annoya.

5.15 Annoyskjeret Light (61°36'N., 4°56'E.) is situated close off

the S side of Indre Annoya and about 0.2 mile E of Ytre

Annoya.

5.15 To navigate between the dangers in Skorpefjorden from W to

E, bring the white sector of Annoyskjeret Light ahead, between

the bearings of about 074° and 077°. Pass S of that light into

Indreliea, which leads N from Nekkoyosen.

5.16 Floro (61°36'N., 5°02'E.) (World Port Index No.

23130) is an administrative town, with its principal industries

primarily associated with fishing.

Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Floro is about 1m.

5.16 Depths—Limitations.—The general depths in the harbor

are 29 to 50m, although a 7.7m patch lies 0.15 mile ESE of

Floro Light and a 6.4m patch lies about 160m farther E; the

latter patch is marked by a buoy. Inside the mole there are two

rocks, with a depth of 2.6m over them, which lie close

offshore, 183m E of the mole.

5.16 Fugleskaer Terminal has about 500m of total quayage, with

depths of 5.2 to 13.1m alongside. This includes a deep-sea

berth 200m lone. Vessels up to 6,000 dwt and coastal tankers

up to 1,000 grt can be handled. 

5.16 There are facilities for ferries, ro-ro vessels, and bulk vessels. In addition, there are several private wharves and a small

offshore base for oil and gas industry service craft.

5.16 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered

24 hours in advance using the Safe Sea Net or alternatively the

Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. 

5.16 Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF

channel 16 about 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot boarding

position. Vessels that call on VHF channel 16 will be

connected to the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center via Floro or

Rogaland Coast Radio Station if the station does not respond. 

5.16 All direct communications with the pilots and the pilot

vessel will take place on VHF channel 13. 

5.16 Pilots board, as follows: 

1. Vessels over 30,000 gross tons or vessels with a

freeboard greater than 8m—position 61°43.0'N, 4°23.5'E.

(via helicopter by appointment)

2. West of Kvannhovden Light—position 61°42.2'N,

4°45.5'E.

3. In bad weather, by appointment:

a. Hellefjorden—position 61°39.1'N, 4°51.2'E.

b. Froysjoen—position 61°45.0'N, 4°56.6'E.

5.16 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA is required 24 hours before

arrival.

5.16 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 47-57-756740

3. Facsimile: 47-57-740916

4. E-mail: hamn@flora.kommune.no

5.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage in Floro is charted about 0.1 mile

NE of the mole. Depths in the anchorage are about 50m.

Ytteroyane to Stadlandet

5.17 From Ytteroyane Light (61°35'N., 4°41'E.), the

coastline extends for about 40 miles in a N direction to the NW

end of Stadlandet, one of the most remarkable promontories on

the Norwegian coast.

5.17 The mainland is fronted by islands, islets, and rocks, which

lie up to 12 miles offshore, and is frequently interrupted by

channels leading from the open sea to Indreleia. There are no

off-lying islands or islets in the vicinity of Stadlandet. Except

when making for one of the fjords, it is advisable to keep an

offshore distance of at least 10 miles W of the larger off-lying

islands.

5.17 The principal fjords along this coast are, from S to N, Hellefjorden, Froysjoen, Nordfjorden, Fafjorden, and Vagsfjorden;

the latter two connect with Nordfjorden S of Stadlandet.

5.17 The most important lights for making a landfall between

Ytteroyane and Stadlandet are Ytteroyane Light (61°34'N.,

4°41'E.), Kvanhovden Light (61°42'N., 4°50'E.), and HenFloro Port Authority Home Page

http://www.flora.kommune.no
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 89

Pub. 182

danes Light (61°58'N., 5°02'E.), on the W side of Vagsoy, and

Krakenes Light (Kraakenes) (62°02'N., 4°59'E.), on the NW

extremity of Vagsoy.

5.17 The most conspicuous island among the islands in the

vicinity of Ytteroyane is Kinn (61°34'N., 4°46'E.). It is 316m

high and lies 2 miles ESE of Ytteroyane Light. This domeshaped island has two hills separated by a deep ravine with

steep sides. On the N end of the island there is a church which

is visible at a distance of 8 miles.

5.17 During the winter months, with long nights and frequent bad

visibility, when approaching the land during W winds, vessels

should avoid being set N of the entrances to the channels.

Skorpa, about 3 miles ENE of Ytteroyane Light, rises to a

height of 393m. The island of Batalden, 1.5 miles NNW of

Skorpa, rises to a height of 491m. 

5.17 From offshore, W of Floro, Alden (61°19'N., 4°48'E.)

should be visible to the SE and Kinn should be visible to the E.

5.17 Batal Den, a good landmark 4 miles N of Kinn, is 491m high

and precipitous.

5.18 Sendingane (61°39'N., 4°34'E.), a group of abovewater rocks, and Loynefallet, a 4m shoal, 0.6 mile WSW, lie

5.75 miles NW of Ytteroyane, at the W end of a chain of rocks

extending W from Batalden.

Bremangerlandet (Bremangerland), an island which rises to

a height of 910m at Hornelen (61°51'N., 5°14'E.), appears to

be part of the mainland.

5.18 Stadlandet projects NW from the mainland E of Vagsoy for a

distance of about 14 miles. Kjerringa (62°11'N., 5°08'E.), at

the NW end of Statdandet, is 497m high. Radio masts, which

are prominent, stand near the summit of Kjerringa.

5.18 The waterway near Haugsholmen and Stalrevet, a shoal with

a depth of 20m, as well as several shoal areas between them,

have been mentioned as areas with particularly heavy seas.

5.19 Skorpefluene and Bataldfluene (61°54'N., 4°48'E.),

with a least depth of 10m, lie 5 and 4.5 mile SW, respectively,

from the N extremity of Bremangerlandet. These two dangers,

which break when a swell is running, are the farthest W in the

approach to Fafjorden and Vagsfjorden. Veststeinen, an islet

44m high, lies 2.75 miles W of the N extremity of Bremangerlandet. The islet is surrounded by foul ground to a distance of

0.6 mile.

5.19 Toytemulen, awash and always marked by breakers, lies 1.25

miles NNW of Veststeinen. There is a 5m patch 0.3 mile NNE

of this rock.

5.19 Several dangers lie in the general area between Veststeinen

and Klovningen. Seiabaane, with a least depth of 4m, lies

about 2 miles NNE of Veststeinen, and Brunebaen, a rock,

awash, lies about 2 miles ENE of the same islet. 

5.19 Several shoals, which reportedly break in a swell, lie S of

Brunebaen. Their positions may be seen on the chart.

5.19 Harfluene, with a least depth of 19m, lies about 2 miles NW

of Klovningen. Between this patch and the islet is Norefluene,

covered by a least depth of 8m. Klovningskjer, which covers

1.5m, lies at the NNW end of the foul ground 0.3 mile from the

N end of Klovningen.

5.19 Skoringane, a chain of small islets, lies 0.5 mile E of Klovningen. Svarteskjera are above-water rocks 0.3 mile farther E.

5.20 Basundskjera (61°56'N., 5°00'E.), a group of abovewater rocks marked by a light, lies on the N side of the

approach to Vagsfjorden, in a position 0.75 mile NW of Hovdeneset Light.

5.20 Mehuken, in the NW part of Vagsoy, is 433m high and steep

on its N side.

5.20 Havfruskallen (62°03'N., 4°51'E.), a 4.5m shoal, lies 3.75

miles WNW of the NW extremity of Vagsoy. 

5.20 Vessels making for the open sea S of Kraka can alter course

when Krakenes Light is open N of Skongenes Light and bearing about 271°. The white sector of Skongenes Light, bearing

astern, leads between Torsflu and Noreskallen (62°03'N.,

4°52'E.), 2.75 miles WSW. 

5.20 The white sector of this light, astern, leads between Kraka

and Melsfluene, and about 0.5 mile SW of Oddeskallane, a

12m depth, 2 miles NW of Kraka. When Svinoy, about 7 miles

NNE of the N end of Stadlandet, is open W of the NW extremity of Statdandet bearing about 030°, course should be altered

NNE. 

Kvanhovden Light

Krakenes Light on NW point of Vagsoy
90 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

5.21 Hellefjorden, a passage extending from seaward in a

SE direction to Indreleia and Floro, leads SE from the

approach to Froysjoen. The islands of Aralden and Batalden lie

on the SW side of the seaward entrance to the fjord and

Hovden lies on the NE side. Hellefjorden is about 7 miles in

length and 1.75 miles in width at its narrowest part.

5.21 On the N side of the approach to Froysjoen are many

dangers; some of them break. These dangers extend to a

distance of about 3 miles S and 8 miles W of Froya. Shoals

also extend about 8 miles W of the entrance to Hellefjorden, on

the S side of the approach to Froysjoen. 

5.21 From Aralden (61°41'N., 4°46'E.), the NW entrance point of

Hellefjorden, shoal water extends about 0.7 mile N; vessels

must keep well clear. A light, with a racon, is displayed from

the islet.

5.21 From the offing, vessels can stand in toward Frojsoen

through a deep channel clear of all dangers, with Skarekina, the

310m high hill on the NW end of Hovden, bearing 090°. 

5.21 The white sector of Kvanhovden Light, close W of Skarekinna, leads from seaward through the fairway to within 1 mile

of the light.

5.21 The inner part of Hellefjorden is free from dangers in the

fairway except for Risholmflua (61°38'N., 4°53'E.), awash, on

the W side of the fairway about 3 miles NW of Stabben Light,

and two shoals. The two shoals have least depths of 9.4 and

11m. They lie in the fairway about 1 and 2 miles SE, respectively, from Risholmflua.

5.21 To enter the N end of Hellefjorden, steer in the white sector

of Stabben Light. This course will lead close W of Dombeskjaerene Light, which is situated on the SW side of Hovden.

5.21 When near Stabben Light, steer S in the white sector of

Nekkoyosen Light and continue S into Indreleia or steer E in

the white sector of Floro Light and proceed to Floro.

5.21 Skarekinna (61°42'N., 4°51'E.) attains an elevation of 310m

on the NW part of Hovden. Hovden lies 1.25 miles NE of

Batalden; they are separated by Hellefjorden. Froya rises to a

height of 379m, 5.5 miles N of Skarekinna.

5.22 Froysjoen is a deep channel about 15 miles long and

not less than 1 mile wide. The tidal currents usually set E and

N with the rising tide and W and S with the falling tide.

Froysjoen may be entered from seaward or from the S through

Indreleia.

5.22 The approach from the offing may be the same as that

directed for Hellefjorden. When within 1 mile of Kvanhovden

Light, steer in a NE direction in the white sector of Smorhavn

Light. When within 1.5 miles of that light, steer a mid-channel

course in a NE direction.

5.22 The passage from Floro to Froysjoen through Hellefjorden is

the preferred track. However, a passage for vessels of moderate

size leads N through Naeroyfjorden, then into Froysjoen. The

channel through Naeroyfjorden, though more protected, is

much obstructed by shoals.

5.22 Naeroyfjorden lies between Sore Naeroy and Nordre Naeroy,

on the W side, and the mainland. The S entrance is about 2

miles NNE of Stabben Light.

5.22 Speed restrictions have been established in Naeroyfjorden.

Mariners are advised to contact the local authorities for details. 

5.22 Vessels running for Naeroyfjorden from Floro alter course

N, after passing S of Floro Light and enter the white sector of

Arebrotsneset Light (61°38'N., 5°00'E.). This track will lead

W of Sandvoeret, 1.25 miles NW of Floro and Naeroyflua, a

6m shoal 0.5 mile WNW.

5.22 When NW of Sandvoeret, enter the white sector of

Dragjaskjaerflu Light (61°39'N., 4°59'E.) ahead, which leads

between Nordre Naeroy and the dangers on the E side of the

fairway. A vessel may steer in the white sector of the light 1

mile N of Dragjas Kjaerflu Light. This also leads through the

channel and E of Dragjaskjaerflu Light. When NE of Dragjaskjaerflu Light, alter course NW and bring that light astern showing white. 

5.22 This track leads E of Hollendarane (61°41'N., 4°56'E.),

awash, and Rognane, 1.5 miles farther N, and into the white

sector of Smorhavn Light; the track then leads into Froysjoen.

5.22 Between Fiskholmen (61°46'N., 4°56'E.) and the entrance

to Berlepollen, 6.5 miles ENE, the fairway of Froysjoen is defined by the white sector of Smorhavn Light, situated on the

SW extremity of Fiskholmen, bearing between 240° and 332°,

astern, which marks the N shore. The S edge is marked by

Olaskjaer Light (61°44'N., 4°57'E.).

5.22 When abeam the Berlepollen entrance, keep within the white

sector of Hornelen Light bearing between 061° and 078°,

ahead. When not less than 0.5 mile from Hornelen Light, alter

course to the E until in the white sector of Haukedalsholmen

Light (61°52'N., 5°16'E.), which leads between the E coast of

Bremangerlandet and Maroy, 0.5 mile E, and into the E

entrance of Skatestraumen.

5.22 Skorperauva (61°46'N., 4°40'E.), a 6.5m shoal, lies at the

W end of several rocks and dangers extending WSW from

Froya. A 19m patch lies 1 mile W of this shoal; a depth of 24m

is charted 2.5 miles farther WSW.

5.22 Skorpefluene (61°55'N., 4°46'E.), the W rocks off the NW

side of Bremangerlandet, have a least depth of 5m, and are

sometimes marked by breakers.

5.22 Vetrungane (61°56'N., 4°49'E.), a group of rocks partly

above water, lies 1 mile NNW of Toytemulen. Fallet, covered

by a least depth of 2m, lies 0.6 mile N of Vetrungane.

5.22 Klovningen (61°56'N., 4°57'E.), an islet, 84m high,

surrounded by foul ground, lies just over 1 mile N of the N

extremity of Bremangerlandet. Both Veststeinen and Klovningen can be distinguished from a distance of 10 to 12 miles.

5.23 Maloy (61°56'N., 5°07'E.) (World Port Index No.

23125) is situated on the SE side of Vagsoy. It is a center of the

fishing industry. There are several quays in the harbor. The

Inter-Comtermnalen is the main quay and includes two deepsea berths, 159m long and 127m long, with depths of 8.1 to

13.1m and 7 to 10m, respectively, alongside. A local traffic

quay is 40m long, with a depth of 8m alongside. There are

facilities for ro-ro vessels. The fishing harbor has a pier, 110m

long, with depths of 10 to 17m along both sides, and a quay,

206m long, with depths of 10 to 12m alongside.

5.23 Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered using the

Safe Sea Net or alternatively the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center.

Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF channel

16 at least two hours prior to arrival. If the station does not

respond, either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio station

will reply and relay details to the pilot station.
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 91

Pub. 182

5.23 Anchorage may be taken, in 30 to 40m, sand and mud or

rock, about 0.1 mile off the quays. Anchorage is prohibited in

the fairway E of a line joining Maloy North Light and Goteberghamaren (61°57'N., 5°08'E.), a point 0.6 mile N, and W

of a line joining the N light on the E side of Maloysundet to

Trolleboflu Light.

5.23 Ulvesund, between Vagsoy and the mainland, leads N for 4

miles to Sildegapet, and has few dangers. There is a speed limit

of 10 knots in the central and N part of the channel.

5.24 Ulven Light (61°58'N., 5°09'E.) is exhibited from a

pile of rocks in the center of Ulvesund, about 2 miles N of

Maloy.

5.24 At Hagevik, 0.3 mile ESE of Ulven Light, there is a quay,

with a depth of 6m alongside. On the opposite shore at Barstadvik is a quay, 110m long, with depths of 5 to 8m alongside.

5.24 There are lights, in range, which lead to Olvesund from the

N.

5.24 The usual track of Indreleia is on either side of Trolleboflu,

then into the white sector of Ulven Light, passing on either side

of that light. When passing through Ulvesund, vessels keep

about 91m from Trolleboflu and Ulven. North of Ulven the

shore should not be approached nearer than 183m. The dangers

and lights in Ulvesund are best seen on the chart.

5.24 From Ulvesund, several channels lead through Sildegapet to

the open sea.

5.24 Seaward bound vessels in Sildegapet can pass through the

southernmost channel between Breidflu, a 10m bank about 2

miles W of Skongenes Light (62°02'N., 5°08'E.), and Melsfluene, 0.25 mile NE. Skongsnes Light is situated on the NE

extremity of Vagsoy.

5.24 Further N, vessels can pass through the channel between

Melsfluene, which has a least charted depth of 11m, and

Kraka, which is well above water.

5.24 It is reported that the channels S of Kraka should be used

only in fine or moderate weather. A 16m bank, which breaks in

heavy weather, lies NW of Kraka.

5.24 A broad channel leads N between Kraka and the shoals

extending SW from Stadlandet. Ramseflu, an 8.6m patch, lies

at the S extremity of these shoals, about 2 miles SSW of the

SW extremity of Stadlandet.

5.25 Torsflu (62°04'N., 4°57'E.), a small isolated bank

with a charted depth of 13m, lies 2 miles NNW of Krakenes

Light. This bank, which occasionally breaks in bad weather,

should be avoided.

5.25 In bad weather, northbound vessels should always stand out

to sea through the channel between Kraka and the dangers off

Stadlandet.

5.25 From a position about 0.5 mile SW of Ulvesund Range

Light, vessels can steer about 021° until Ulvesund Range 

5.25 Lights, in line astern, lead between the fringing dangers on

either side of the fairway to the seaward channel N of Kraka.

5.25 This course passes about midway between Toren and

Ytstebaan (62°09'N., 5°04'E.), with a depth of 5.5m, situated

1.25 miles off Stadlandet. Ytstebaan breaks in bad weather.

5.25 When W of Ytstebaan, about 1 mile distant, steer a N course

to pass W of Bukketjuvane (62°11'N., 5°04'E.) about 0.5 mile

distant. Bukketjuvane is a partially submerged reef lying about

1 mile SW of the NW extremity of Stadlandet.

5.25 Vessels can proceed N past Bukketjuvane until Dollstein, a

hill at the W end of Sandsoy, about 7 miles ENE of Stadlandet,

bears about 067°, when course can be altered NE for the N end

of Skorpa, to pass N of Stadlandet, then into Vanylvsgapet and

Indreleia.

5.25 Buholmen Light (62°10'N., 5°05'E.) is off the W side of

Stadlandet, on the SE islet.

Skongenes Light on NE point of Vagsoy Island

Skongenes Light
92 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

Stadlandet to Alesund

5.26 The coast from Stadlandet (62°12'N., 5°08'E.) to

Alesund is indented by fjords and is fronted by many islands,

islets, and dangerous rocks. This section is about 25 miles long

and runs in an ENE direction. The appearance of the coast is

rugged, bare, and gray. The two main openings are Vanylvsgapet, on the NE side of Stadtlandet, and Breisunddjupet, NE

of Runde.

5.26 Runde (62°25'N., 5°35'E.) is a bare gray island, with a

height of 331m at Rundesundet, in the E, and 293m at Branden, in the W. On the seaward side it is steep-to, except on the

S where cultivated land is seen. 

5.26 Rundesundet (Rundo Sund) lies between Runde and Rimoya, 0.5 mile S. The islands are connected by a causeway leading to a bridge in the S with a vertical clearance of 24m. A red

light marks the N pillar of the bridge and a green light marks

the S pillar, with a 118m horizontal distance between them; a

white light marks the center of the bridge. Rundesund Light

stands on Saeviksteinen. 

5.26 The summits of Sauehornet (62°14'N., 6°09'E.), 1,303m

high, 28 miles E of Kjerringa, on Stadlandet, and Slogen,

1,564m high, 15 miles farther ESE, may be used in the approaches from seaward, and on the fishing grounds farther seaward. 

5.26 Statthavet (62°12'N., 5°06'E.) has long been known as an

area with very severe weather, and many have identified the

area as being dangerous.

5.26 It has been indicated that heavy sea is created particularly by

winds from SW to N. In these cases, the waves come straight in

from the ocean. The current in the passage has been estimated

at between 2 and 4 knots, and when the ocean waves meet this

current, strong precipitous breakers are developed. 

5.26 The swell becomes choppy.

5.26 The passage near Haugsholmen and the shoal of Stzlrevet, as

well as several small shoal areas between these, have been

mentioned as areas with particularly heavy seas.

5.26 The currents on this part of the coast, irrespective of the tide,

usually set in a NE direction and are known to have a velocity,

at times, of more than 1 knot. At a distance of 30 to 60 miles

from land, a vessel will be set to the NE.

5.26 Pilots cruise NE of Runde; vessels enroute to Alesund or

Bergen may embark a pilot here. During N gales, the pilot may

be forced to seek shelter at Nerlandsoy.

5.27 Sandsoy (62°15'N., 5°26'E.), lying 5.5 miles ENE of

Stadlandet, rises to a height of 370m. There is a height of

227m, shaped like a haystack, at the W end of the island. This

height is easily identified from SW or NW, but merges into the

background when viewed from the W.

5.27 Numerous dangers extend up to 2 miles W of Sandsoy. The

farthest NW of these dangers is Skjeggene (62°16'N., 5°20'E.),

a group of rocks with a least depth of 0.5m over its N end; they

are usually marked by breakers.

5.27 A group of shoals, with a least depth of 24m, lies about 3

miles W of Skjeggene.

5.27 Svinoy (62°20'N., 5°16'E.), 6 miles W of Skorpa, is easily

identified by its remote position although it is comparatively

small. A light is shown from a tower 11m in height, standing

on the SE side of the island. Due to numerous dangers, the

passage between Svinoy and Skorpa should not be attempted

without local knowledge.

5.27 Skorpa (62°20'N., 5°30'E.) and Nerlandsoy, close NE and 4

miles NE of Skorpa, respectively, stand out clearly from the

background.

5.27 Juklebaen (62°22'N., 5°24'E.), a 2m patch lying 4.25 miles

ENE of Svinoy, usually breaks.

5.27 Heroyfjorden lies between Sandoya and Gurskoya

(62°15'N., 5°40'E.), on the S, and Skorpa, Nerlandsoy

(62°21'N., 5°33'E.), and Bergsoya (62°20'N., 6°38'E.).

5.27 Goldnes Light (62°22'N., 5°34'E.) is situated on the N

extremity of Nerlandsoy, 4.25 miles ENE of Juklebaen.

5.27 Geitmaren, a 5m patch, lies 1.75 miles NNW of Goldnes

Light. The sea occasionally breaks over it in quiet weather,

though seldom during calms or offshore winds.

5.28 Rundoy Light (62°25'N., 5°36'E.) is situated on the

NW extremity of Runde (Rundoy), 2.5 miles NNE of Goldnes

Light. Numerous dangers extend 1.75 miles ENE from a rock,

awash, 0.9 mile NW of Rundoy Light. Some of these dangers

are above water.

5.28 Langenes Light stands on the NE extremity of Runde. A line

of rocks and islets extends from Treholmane, 0.6 mile E of

Langenes Light, to Grasholmen, 3 miles NE. The sea sometimes breaks over a spit, which extends 0.5 mile ENE from

Grasholmen and terminates in Breiflu, an 8m patch.

5.28 Grasoyane Light (62°26'N., 5°46'E.) stands on Grasholmen.

5.28 The channels through the dangers between Langenes Light

and Grasoyane Light are navigable only with local knowledge.

5.28 Florauden Light (62°26'N., 5°50'E.) is situated on the

central islet of Florauden, a group of islets lying 2 miles E of

Grasholmen. A racon is located at the light tower.

5.29 Breisundet (62°27'N., 6°00'E.), between Hareidlandet on the S and Godoya, gives access from the sea to Alesund and Indreleia. It is deep and clear of dangers except close

inshore.

5.29 Vessels entering Breisundet steer for a position 1.5 miles N

of Florauden; a mid-channel course will then lead to a position

0.7 mile NW of Eltraneset, the NW extremity of Sula. 

5.29 Heissafjorden leads E from this position to Alesund. Sulefjorden leads SE from the above position.

5.29 Hogsteinen Light (62°28'N., 6°02'E.) is situated off the SE

extremity of Godoya, on the NE side of Breisundet.

5.30 Alesund (62°28'N., 6°10'E.) (World Port Index No.

23120) is situated on the islands of Norvoya, Heissa, and Aspoya. These islands are interconnected and are also connected

to the mainland by fixed bridges. The waters of Alesund Havn

comprise the harbor at Alesund.

5.30 Alesund is a major commercial and fishing port. Products

include clothing and dairy products, as well as furniture and

fish products. It has a population of about 37,000 people.

Alesund Port Authority Home Page

http://www.alesund.havn.no
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 93

Pub. 182

Approaches to Alesund

Alesund Harbor
94 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

5.30 Depths—Limitations.—There are quays at Storneskaien,

Prestebryggen, and Skutevikkaien, on the S side of Alesund

that are 42 to 220m long with depths of 5.1 to 16m alongside.

The largest vessel to use this port was 69,000 grt, with a draft

of 10m.

5.30 There are four tanker berths, with depths up to 12.2m alongside; a ro-ro berth, 85m long, with depths of 6 to 14m; alongside and a fishing quay, 330m long, with depths of 4 to 6m

alongside.

5.30 The port area has mooring facilities for the lay-up of vessels

of all sizes. Vessels up to 508,000 dwt have been accommodated at lay-up here. The port is open year round.

5.30 Vessels may, draft permitting, transit the channel which lies

between Aspoya and Heissa. There is a least depth of 5m in the

channel, but depths of 4.2m are charted near the range line.

5.30 A fixed bridge, with a navigable width of 50m and a vertical

clearance of 17m, spans the channel. The port is open all the

year.

5.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 500

grt and all vessels carrying dangerous cargo. Pilotage should be

requested using the Safe Sea Net or alternatively the Kvitsoy

Pilot Booking Center. Vessels should call the pilot station 2

hours prior to arrival on VHF channel 16. If the station does

not respond either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio station

will reply and relay details to the pilot station.

5.30 Pilots board in Breidsundet, in position 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E,

weather permitting; by request, the pilot can also board in

Breidsunddjupet, in position 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E. 

Alesund Harbor

 Alesund
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 95

Pub. 182

5.30 When entering into or departing from the pilot boarding

position in Breidsundet, vessels are requested to navigate

inside the Recommended Fairway, bounded, as follows:

a. 62°31.8'N, 5°44.4'E.

b. 62°30.2'N, 5°45.8'E.

c. 62°27.5'N, 5°55.1'E.

d. 62°27.5'N, 5°57.2'E.

e. 62°26.5'N, 5°57.2'E.

f. 62°26.5'N, 5°53.5'E.

g. 62°29.5'N, 5°43.3'E.

h. 62°29.5'N, 5°38.2'E.

i. 62°31.8'N, 5°44.4'E.

5.30 The pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 16.

5.30 Regulations.—Within the harbor area of Alesund, the following regulations are in effect:

1. Within the harbor area, powered vessels are not to exceed the minimum speed required for good seamanship and

maneuverability, or to proceed at such a speed as to cause

damage or danger to vessels or harbor installations from

wash.

Alesund—Inner Harbor

Alesund—Inner Harbor
96 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

2. When, near the entrance to Indre Havn or Steinvagsundet, a risk of collision exists between inbound and

outbound vessels, the inbound vessel must wait at a suitable

distance off the entrance until the outbound vessel is well

clear of the breakwater at Indre Havn or of the lights in

Steinvagsundet.

3. In Indre Havn, Skutevika, or Steinvagsundet, vessels

are not permitted to swing to their anchors, or to anchor in

such a way as to obstruct the harbor entrances or the approaches to alongside berths.

5.30 Vessels should advise Port Control of their ETA; the

following information should also be included: 

1. Vessel name.

2. Flag.

3. Port of registry.

4. Call sign.

5. IMO number.

6. Gross tonnage, loa, actual draft, and maximum summer draft.

7. Last port-of-call and next port-of-call.

8. Dangerous cargo information, if any.

5.30 Port Control can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF:VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 47-70-163410

47-99-853400

5.30 The Port Authority can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Telephone: 47-70-163400

2. Facsimile: 47-70-163401

3. E-mail: havnevesenet@alesund.havn.no

5.30 For the requirements for non-military vessels entering Norwegian internal waters, see Pub 180. Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. 

West side of Alesundhavn 

Alesund—Berth Signals

Quay 1 Quay 2 Quay 3

Skanskaien One green One green and one white (at W end) One green and one white (at E end)

Storneskaien One red Two red Three red

Prestebryggen One green Two green —

Skutevikkaien One white Two white Three white
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 97

Pub. 182

5.30 Signals.—Signals are exhibited at night, from signal masts

on Skanskaien and Storneskaien, using fixed red, green, and

white lights to give berthing instructions and to indicate an

arriving vessel’s berth. Such signals should be acknowledged

by a blast on the whistle. The berth signals are given in the

accompanying table titled Alesund—Berth Signals.

5.30 By day, a red flag is displayed at the berth allocated to the

vessel. 

5.30 The general night signals are, as follows:

1. Fixed red, green, and white—All berths occupied.

2. Flashing red—Continue into harbor.

3. Flashing green—Anchor and await orders.

4. Flashing white—Close to hailing distance.

5. Indreleia and the Inner Fjords

5.31 Indreleia is a navigable inner route and is, to some

extent, protected by offshore islands. The route is continuous

from Fedje to Alesund. At times it extends to near the coast.

Sognefjorden, the continuation of Sognesjoen E from Rutletangen (61°05'N., 5°10'E.), is the longest and deepest fjord

in Norway. The inner recesses of the fjord are more than 100

miles from the open sea, but in few places is it as much as 2.5

miles wide. The mountains rise almost vertically from the

water’s edge in many places, and exceed an elevation of

1,800m near Aurlandsfjorden, where their summits are always

covered with snow. There are numerous waterfalls and cascades, and the scenery is grand, but somber.

5.31 The principal branches of Sognefjorden are Aurlandsfjorden

and Naeroyfjorden, on the S side; Fjaerlandsfjorden, Sogndalsfjorden, and Lustrafjorden, on the N side; and Ardalsfjorden,

an extension of Songnefjorden, at the E end.

5.31 The tidal currents in Sognefjorden usually set W and run

strongest along the N side; they are, however, irregular and

may be found setting W under one shore and E under the other.

5.31 In the middle of the entrance the current is rotary, counterclockwise, and weak; the spring rate in all directions is 0.25

knot.

5.31 There are few anchorages in Sognefjorden, but at the heads

of nearly all the branches there are banks formed by the deposit

from the various rivers that flow into it. These banks, consisting generally of soft mud or sand, afford excellent holding

ground, but they are continually changing in shape and increasing in size.

5.31 Sognefjorden is fringed with a number of towns, the most

important one being Ardal at the head of Ardalsfjorden.

5.32 Bofjorden (61°07'N., 5°20'E.), situated on the N side

of Sognefjorden, close within its W entrance, affords anchorage to vessels of moderate size. Vessels anchor 0.25 mile NNE

of the light, in 30 to 40m, good holding ground. An iron perch,

reported 0.15 mile WNW of the light structure, marks a rock

off the E edge of a bank. A light is exhibited from a rock 0.2

mile N of the anchorage.

5.32 A marine farm is situated 0.7 mile WSW of Bofjord Light.

There are other marine farms situated 0.85 mile SSE and 2

miles SSE of the same light. 

5.32 Risnefjord provides good anchorage for moderate size vessels off the W shore, 0.5 mile S of Ortneset. Vessels anchoring

in Risnefjord should avoid a submarine cable crossing the

fjord. 

5.32 A marine farm is located in position 61°00.6'N, 5°28.4'E; an

overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 27m, crosses Risnefjord. 

5.32 A bay at Vikum (61°10'N., 5°43'E.), on the N side of Sognefjorden about 22 miles E of Bofjorden, is one of the better

harbors for vessels of moderate size in this fjord. 

5.32 Vessels anchor in the N part of the bay, in about 30 to 40m,

clay. There is a quay in the bay, with depths of 4 to 5m alongside.

5.32 Hoyanger (61°13'N., 6°04'E.), situated at the head of Hoyangsfjorden, 10.5 miles ENE of Vikum, is an industrial town

and an administrative center. There is a mooring buoy off the

largest quay, which has a least depth of 8m alongside.

5.32 Pilotage is compulsory; special arrangements for a pilot

should be make through Fedje Pilot Station.

5.33 Ardal (61°14'N., 7°43'E.) (World Port Index No.

23136) is a coastal harbor situated at the NE extremity of

Ardalsfjorden. This ice-free port is directed by the Bergen

Customs District.

There are a number of quays in the port. Quay I is 220m long

and has a depth of 9.25m alongside. Quay II is 100m long and

has 11.5m alongside. The largest vessel that can be accommodated is 220m long with a 9.6m draft.

5.33 Pilotage is compulsory and is provided using the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. For

further information, see paragraph 5.1. 

5.33 The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 9 and 16

2. Telephone: 47-57-660122

3. Facsimile: 47-57-660125

5.33 Vessels, when in transit of Rekstafjorden from the WSW,

may, when within 0.75 mile of Sandoya Light (61°33'N.,

4°46'E.), alter course to the E to pass 0.25 mile S of that light. 

5.33 When E of Sandoya Light, steer in its white sector, astern,

and continue to the E end of Rekstafjorden and enter the white

sector of Nekkoyosen Light, as directed above, which leads

into Nekkoyosen.

5.34 The better Indrelia track for large vessels passes from

the E end of Sognesjoen, and then turns abruptly N leading

through Krakhellesund between the islands of Sula, on the W,

and Losna.

5.34 Klauva Light (61°07'N., 5°02'E.) is situated on the SW

extremity of Losna and on the E side of the S entrance to

Krakhellesund. 

5.34 A light is situated on the W side of Losna, about 2 miles

NNW of Klauva. A light is situated on a rock on the W side of

Krakhellesund, 0.5 mile farther NNW.

5.34 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 70m, crosses

Krakhellesund about 1 mile NNW of Klauva Light.

5.34 The channel of Krakhellesund, about 5 miles long, is free of

dangers in the fairway, except for a rocky patch lying 183m

SSE of the salient point on the W side of the S entrance and a

reef lying close off the rock marked by a light about 2 miles N.

The tidal currents in the channel nearly always set N.

5.34 Klauva Light, showing white, leads N from Sognesjoen into

the entrance of Krakhellesund. The white sector of the light

situated on the rock on the W side of the channel leads through

the fairway of the S part of the channel. 

5.34 After passing E of this light, vessels can keep in the white
98 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

sector of the light, astern, which will lead W of the island

Skorpa then into Afjorden.

5.34 Losneosen, between the E side of Losna and the mainland,

connects Sognesjoen and Sognefjorden with Krakhellesund

through Tollesund, which separates Losna from Skorpa. Losneosen connects with Afjorden through Storakersundet E of

Skorpa. 

5.34 These channels are deep and free of dangers. An overhead

cable, with a vertical clearance of 70m, crosses the SE end of

Tollesund.

5.34 Afjorden trends about 6 miles ESE from its confluence with

Storakersundet, and branches into Hylestadfjorden and Sorfjorden, at its head.

5.35 Sakrisskjer (61°14'N., 4°57'E.) is the NW entrance

point of Afjorden. From the W end of Afjorden the track of

Indrelia takes a N direction past the W sides of the islands

Sakrisoy and Lutelandet, and Lammetu. From the W end of

Vilnesfjorden the direction is E through that channel to the W

end of Dalsfjorden, then N into Granesundet. A light is situated

on Sakrisskjer.

5.35 Midtfjordskjer (61°16'N., 4°54'E.), marked by a light, is

situated in the S entrance to Vilnesfjorden, 3 miles NNW of the

light on Sakrisskjer. Araldeflu is a 4m patch 0.25 mile N of

Midtfjordskjer.

5.35 Morpolsa, a rock, awash, is situated at the extremity of the

foul ground extending W from Lammetu. It lies about 0.7 mile

ENE of the light on Midtfjordskjer.

5.35 Ytste Taren (61°17'N., 4°55'E.), a 5m shoal, lies 0.3 mile N

of Morpolsa.

5.35 Vessels enroute from Krakhellesund to Vilnesfjorden can

keep in the white sector of the light on Sakrisskjer until about 1

mile from the light. Vessels may then steer W to pass S of the

light and then enter the white sector of the light on Raudoy.

This sector will lead W of Morpolsa and E of Midtfjordskjer,

into the SW entrance Vilnesfjorden.

5.36 Vilnesfjorden is a broad channel which extends about

4 miles E from the light on Raudoy.

5.36 Haskallen (61°18'N., 4°57'E.), with a least depth of 14m,

lies in the fairway just over 1 mile ESE of Raudoy Light, and

close S of the dangers E of Raudoy.

5.36 Einingsflu, lying on the S side of the fairway 1 mile SSE of

Haskallen, has a depth of 2.3m.

5.36 Mokalasset (61°18'N., 5°01'E.), a reef, awash, is situated on

the N side of the fairway, about 1 mile W of Vilnesfjorden

Light. There is an 11m patch 0.25 mile SW of the beacon

situated on Mokalasset. Several rocks and shoals lie between

Mokalasset and Atloy.

5.36 Vilnesfjorden Light (61°18'N., 5°04'E.) is situated on the S

side of the E end of Vilnesfjorden.

5.36 Vessels in transit of Vilnesfjorden from W to E may steer in

the white sector of Vilnesfjorden Light to within 0.5 mile of the

light. Haskallen lies in this sector. The white sector of Langenes Light, 1.25 miles NNE of Vilnesfjorden Light, leads S of

Flatoyflu, then into the white sector of Vilnesfjorden Light,

astern, which leads to the S entrance of Granesundet.

5.36 Dalsfjorden continues ENE from Vilnesfjorden for 17 miles

to the vicinity of Bogstad.

5.37 Granesundet, separating the E side of the island Atloy

from the mainland, is about 4 miles long and has a least width

of 0.25 mile. It is nearly free of danger in the fairway.

5.37 Flatoyflu (61°19'N., 5°03'E.), awash, lies 0.3 mile S of

Flatoy in the SW approach to Granesundet. It is marked by two

iron perches.

5.37 Flatoy, an islet at the S end of Granesundet, lies on the W

side of the entrance 1 mile N of Vilnesfjorden Light. The islet

is surrounded by a shore reef to a distance of about 0.1 mile

5.37 Langenes Light is situated about 0.8 mile E of Flatoy;

another light is situated on the SW side of Prestoy, 0.45 mile

NNE of Flatoy. Both of these lights are on the E shore of

Granesundet.

5.37 A depth of 9.5m lies nearly in mid-channel about 0.3 mile

WNW of Langenes Light. A 12m patch lies 0.15 mile WSW of

the light on Prestoy.

5.37 Englandsflu is a 4m patch situated on the W side of the

fairway, 0.8 mile NW of the light on Prestoy.

5.37 Granebaen (61°23'N., 5°01'E.), a 3.5m shoal, lies on the W

side of the fairway in the N entrance to Granesundet.

5.37 A light is exhibited on Trettenes, on the E side of the N end

of Granesundet.

5.37 Vessels entering Granesundet should keep in the white sector

of Vilnesfjorden Light, astern, until it intersects the white

sector of the light on the W side of Prestoy, which will lead

between the dangers in the S entrance of Granesundet. Alter

course to the NNW when the white sector of Langenes Light,

astern, bears between 118° and 122°. Continue in this sector

until the white sector of the light on Trettenes bears between

350° and 356.5°. Alter course to the N to keep in this sector

which leads through the fairway of Granesundet, into the white

sector of the light on Prestoy, bearing astern, which leads

between Trettenes and Granebaen. 

5.37 The white sector of Trettenes Light, bearing astern, leads

toward Stavfjorden.

An alternate route from the W end of Vilnesfjorden to

Stavenes Light, is to pass through Aldefjorden, W of the island

of Tvibyrgje and Tussen Light and then to the E on the S side

of Heggoyane.

5.37 Aldefjorden, the passage between Alden and Tvibyrgje, is

situated on the E and S sides, respectively, of these islands.

5.38 Midfjordflu (61°19'N., 4°49'E.), a 10m patch, lies

0.8 mile SW of the SW point of Tvibyrgje. Senholmtaren, an

un-marked 4m shoal, lies about 0.6 mile ESE of Midfjordflu

and an 8m patch marked by a buoy lies 0.5 mile N of

Midfjordflu.

5.38 There are other dangers in Aldefjorden which may best be

seen on the chart.

5.38 Alden is saddle-shaped and rises to a height of 480m in its E

part. Tvibyrgje lies about 1 mile NE of Alden and about 0.5

mile W of Atloy. The island resembles two haycocks; the one

farthest W is 192m high.

5.38 Tussen (61°23'N., 4°50'E.) lies 1 mile N of Tvibyrgje. It is

marked by a light and a beacon. A reef projects about 183m

NW from Tussen; a 14m bank lies 0.3 mile W of the light.

5.38 Heggoyosen is the channel between Heggoyane on the N and

Atloy on the S.A light is shown from the S extremity of

Heggoyane, in a position about 3 miles ENE of Tussen.

5.38 A light is shown from the NW extremity of Raudoy, an
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 99

Pub. 182

island lying 1 mile E of Heggoyane, and on the W side of the N

entrance of Granesundet.

5.39 Vessels from the S desiring to pass through the W part

of Vilnesfjorden then into Aldefjorden may do so by keeping in

the white sector of the light on Raudoy (61°18'N., 4°55'E.) as

previously suggested, until within 0.5 mile of that light, when

course should be changed to the NW. 

5.39 With the white sector of the light on Raudoy, astern, proceed

until within the white sector of the light on Geita. Navigate

with Geita Light, astern, which leads W of Midfjordflu and the

8m patch 0.5 mile N of it, until abeam of Tussen, about 1 mile

distant. A 14m depth is charted 1.25 miles W of Tussen Light.

5.39 To enter Heggoyosen from the white sector of Geita Light,

steer in the white sector of the light on Raudoy, passing no less

than 0.25 mile N of Tussen Light. When the white sector of

Stavenes Light bears between 017° and 032°, steer in that

sector to clear the dangers N of Raudoy and E of Heggoyane.

This course will join the track leading NNW from the N

entrance of Granesundet.

5.39 Kjerringholmen (61°24'N., 4°58'E.), an islet 19m high, lies

W of the fairway leading NNW from Granesundet and E of the

fairway leading NNE from Heggoyosen, in a position 0.45

mile N of Raudoy. The islet is surrounded by shoal water to a

distance of 183m. Melsholmen, an islet 21m high, lies 0.6 mile

NW of Kjerringholmen.

5.39 Stavenes Light (61°25'N., 4°59'E.) is situated on an islet on

the E side of Indreleia, in a position 1.75 miles NNE of the

light on Raudoy.

5.39 From Stavenes Light, the main track leads across Stavfjorden between Baane (61°29'N., 4°59'E.) and Trefotskjeret,

about 0.6 mile E; it then leads between Askrova Light, on the E

end of the island Askrova, and Leieskjera, about 0.1 mile SSE. 

5.39 This narrow passage has a least charted depth of 14m and

should be navigated with caution.

5.40 Folvagfluene (61°25'N., 4°58'E.) is a group of rocks,

awash, which lies on the W side of Indreleia, 0.5 mile SW of

Stavenes Light. Faneskjera, above water, lies on the same side

of the track, within 0.25 mile N of Folvagfluene.

5.40 Ryggene, reefs marked at their E end by a buoy, are situated

0.75 mile NNW of Stavenes Light.

5.40 The white sector of Stavenes Light, bearing astern, leads

across Stavfjorden from a position E of Ryggene; the white

sector of Askrova Light (61°31'N., 5°00'E.) then leads

through the fairway E of Baane. An 11.5m patch lies on the E

limit of this sector 0.2 mile WSW of Trefotskjeret. 

5.40 When within 0.2 mile of the light, alter course NNE to pass

between it and Leieskjera, and then into Brufjorden.

5.40 Oddane (61°33'N., 5°00'E.) is marked on its E extremity by

a light. Andalsskjera, 1.25 miles NE of Oddane, is also marked

by a light.

5.41 To continue across Brufjorden, from a position close

E of the light on Askrova, steer N with the white sector of this

light bearing more than 179°, astern, and keep the light on

Andalsskjera ahead, which leads E of Oddane.

5.41 When entering the white sector of Nekkoyosen Light

(61°35'N., 4°57'E.), alter course NW to keep in this sector,

which leads NE of Oddane and out of Brufjorden to the

entrance of Nekkoyosen.

5.41 Nekkoyosen, a continuation of Indreleia, is entered between

Sore Nekkoya and Nordre Nekkoya (61°35'N., 4°56'E.), on

the W side, and Faeroya and Faeroykalven, on the E side.

5.41 Mortingbaen, 1 mile NNE of Nekkoyosen Light, is marked

by a light. It lies on the E side of the channel. Annoyholmbaen,

with depths of 2m or less, lies on the W side of the fairway 0.3

mile SW of the light on Mortingbaen.

5.41 Stabben Light (61°36'N., 4°57'E.) is situated on the E end

of foul ground, in a position just over 1 mile NNE of

Nekkoyosen Light. There is a least depth of 3.4m on the foul

ground WSW of the light.

5.41 Grasskjeret Light is situated on the W part of a reef, about

0.3 mile ENE of Stabben Light.

5.42 Floro Light (61°36'N., 5°01'E.) is situated on the N

side of the channel, 1.25 miles E of Grasskjeret Light. A 6m

patch lies 183m W of the light.

5.42 Vessels en route through Nekkoyosen to Floro keep Stabben

light structure bearing about 005°, which leads between Nordre

Nekkoya and Faeroya. Enter the white sector of Nekkoyosen

Light, astern, which will lead W of Mortingbaen. 

5.42 When NW of the light on Mortingbaen, enter the white

sector of Floro Light. When within 0.35 mile of Floro Light,

steer a mid-channel course between the light and the shoal

water about 183m to the S,. This course will lead into Floro.

5.42 An alternate track from Nekkoyosen for approaching Floro

is with the white sector of Nekkoyosen Light bearing astern. It

leads between Mortingbaen and Svartskjeret, marked by a

beacon, which is situated 0.3 mile E of the light on Mortingbaen, into the white sector of Grasskjeret Light, then into the

white sector of Floro Light as indicated above.

Froysjoen

5.43 Vessels may approach Fafjorden and Vagsfjorden by

keeping in the white sector of Hovdeneset Light (61°56'N.,

5°01'E.), which leads N of Skorpefluene, Bataldfluene, and

Veststeinen, and S of Toytemulen and Seiabaane to within

about 3 miles of the light. 

5.43 Vessels heading for Fafjorden then enter the white sector of

Kvitnes Light, which leads to the white sector of Fafjorden

Light. Enter the white sector of Fafjorden Light ahead, which

leads into Fafjorden.

5.43 Vessels approaching from the NW may keep the summit of

Ronelden (61°55'N., 5°01'E.), a steep conical hill 321m high,

in line with the summit of Klovningen, bearing 115°, which

passes NE of Fallet and SW of Harfluene and Norefluene. 

5.43 When E of Fallet, steer in the white sector of Kvitnes Light

and proceed as directed above.

5.43 Vessels approaching the entrance from the N should keep

Hornelen, the 889m hill on the E end of Bremangerlandet,

bearing about 124°. When N of Klovningen, alter course S and

enter the white sector of Fafjorden Light. 

5.43 Care must be taken to avoid Jokkulflu, an 11m depth, 0.7

mile NNE of Klovningen.

5.43 Alternative routes lead, respectively, N and S of Jokkulflu

and then between Basundskjere and Svarteskjera.
100 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

5.44 Fafjorden, a narrow inlet, is the farthest S of two seaward entrances to Nordfjorden. It leads between Bremangerlandet and Husevagoy and connects with Vagsfjorden by a

shallow channel at the E end of Husevagoy. Farther E is the

channel that leads N from Froysjoen.

5.44 Ribba (61°54'N., 5°00'E.), awash, lies on the W side of the

fairway 0.6 mile WSW of Kvitnes Light; between this danger

and the shore to the S are some above and below-water rocks.

5.44 Spenfluene, situated on the N side of the fairway 0.4 mile S

of Kvitnes Light, consists of a group of sunken rocks, awash, at

their E end.

5.44 To transit Fafjorden, keep the white sector of Fafjorden Light

ahead, which leads between the dangers of Ribba and

Spenfluene. When about 0.3 mile distant from Fafjorden Light,

steer a mid-channel course in an ESE direction and pass on

either side of Bjornoy, an island 2.5 miles ESE of Fafjorden

Light. The white sector of Skaten Light (61°52'N., 5°13'E.)

leads through the fairway N of Bjornoy; another white sector

of the light leads S of Bjornoy.

Approach to Vagsfjorden

5.45 When E of Bjornoy, a vessel may continue E and join

Indreleia and proceed through Skatestraumen or proceed N to

Nordfjorden by passing between the islands of Gangsoy and

Risoy. When vessels pass between these two islands, they

should keep in mid-channel, favoring the W side of Risoy,

which is steep-to.

5.45 Vagsfjorden leads between Husevagoy and Vagsoy into the

W end of Nordfjorden. It also is the S entrance to Maloy, a port

on the SE side of Vagsoy.

5.45 Gasholmen (61°55'N., 5°06'E.), a reef-fringed islet, lies on

the S side of the fairway in a position about 3 miles ESE of

Hovdeneset Light. An unmarked patch, with a least charted

depth of 6m, lies on the N side of the channel 0.5 mile NE of

Gasholmen.

5.45 Bergsholmane Light is situated on the N side of the channel,

0.9 mile E of Hovdeneset.

5.45 Vessels that have approached Vagsfjorden from the W with

the white sector of Hovdeneset Light ahead steer in the white

sector of Bergsholmane Light, which leads to within 0.5 mile

of that light.

5.45 The white sector of Hovdeneset Light, astern, and the white

sector of Bergsholmane Light, astern, lead N of Gasholmen

into Indreleia, which leads SE, passing E of Gangsoy, and

continues N and, E of Vagsoy through Ulvesund.

Nordfjorden

5.46 Nordfjorden, entered N of Risoy, is approached from

seaward through Fafjorden or Vagsfjorden. It extends E of

Risoy for a distance of about 50 miles under various names.

The main fjord has several branches, most of them extending S,

that provide several anchorage areas.

5.46 At the seaward end of Nordfjorden, the shores are barren and

rugged, but farther inland there is often a narrow coastal terrace, with scattered farms and forest. The fjord is deep and

practically free from dangers.

5.46 The first reach of Nordfjorden extends to the vicinity of

Asneset, situated 8 miles ENE of Risoy.

5.46 Allmenningsfluene (61°54'N., 5°16'E.), marked by a light,

is situated on the N side of the fairway in a position 2.5 miles

ENE of Risoy. These rocks are covered by less than 1.8m of

water.

5.46 Skorpeholmane, a chain of islets and rocks, lies on the S side

of the fairway, 1 mile ENE of Risoy. Etreskallen, with a least

depth of 5.5m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 0.6 mile S of

Allmenningsfluene.

5.46 A light is situated on Asneset (61°56'N., 5°28'E.). Good

anchorage with sand bottom can be obtained near the head of

the bay at Maurstad, 0.7 mile N of Asneset. Care must be taken

to avoid a 6m shoal 0.8 mile NW of the light on Asneset.

5.47 From Asneset, Nordfjorden continues ESE for 19

miles to Anda (61°51'N., 6°05'E.).

5.47 Davika, on the S side of the fjord, is entered 2.75 miles SE of

Asneset. It affords good anchorage, in depths up to 26m, sand

and stones.

5.47 Eidsfjorden extends 7 miles E from Davikfjorden. Winds

from W raise a considerable sea in this branch.

5.47 Anchorage with sand bottom can be obtained in a cove W of

the river mouth at Starheim, on the N side of Eidsfjorden, 2

miles within the entrance. At Starheim, there is a quay, with

depths of 4 to 6m alongside.

5.47 Nordfjordeid (61°54'N., 5°59'E.), at the head of Eidsfjorden, is an industrial and administrative town. 

5.47 Anchorage, with a bottom of sand, can be obtained 183m

WNW of the head of the mole. There are depths of 5 to 7m

alongside the quay situated inside the N end of the mole.

5.47 Isefjorden, a continuation of Nordfjorden, is entered 7.5

miles ESE of Asneset; it extends 3 miles SE.

5.47 Alfoten, entered S of Hjelteneset (61°51'N., 5°47'E.),

extends 4.5 miles WSW from the main fjord; its head ices over.

5.47 Hundvikfjorden, the continuation E from Isefjorden, is

entered between Hjelteneset and Krokeneset, 0.8 mile ENE.

5.47 At Yksenelvane, on the S side of this reach 1 mile S of Krokeneset, the larger of two quays has depths of 9 to 14m alongside.

5.47 Hyen, entered E of Hyenese (61°51'N., 5°59'E.), extends 7

miles SSW from Hundvikfjorden.

5.47 Gloppen, entered W of Anda, branches SE from Hundvikfjorden for 6 miles. The head of Gloppen affords spacious

anchorage, in depths of 20 to 50m. Care should be taken to not

anchor near the submarine cables E of this berth.

5.47 Ufjorden, the continuation of Nordfjorden E from Hundvikfjorden, is entered N of Anda.

5.47 Innvikefjorden, the next reach E of Utfjorden, affords

anchorage off Innvik (61°51'N., 6°37'E.), in depths of 30 to

40m. A quay at this village has depths of 5 to 6m alongside.

5.47 Faleidfjorden, the last reach of Nordfjorden, is entered about

2 miles NW of Innvik, and extends 7 miles E to its head.

5.47 Good anchorage can be obtained about 0.6 mile N of the

church at Olden (61°50'N., 6°49'E.), in 50 to 60m, clay.

5.47 Off Loen, the village at the head of the bay, there is good

anchorage, in 15 to 20m, sand and clay.

5.48 Skatestraumen, the continuation of Indreleia from

Froysjoen, leads between the SW side of Rugsundoy and

Bremangerlandet to Fafjorden; it is about 3 miles in length in

an E-W direction.
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 101

Pub. 182

5.48 Hornelsflua (61°52'N., 5°16'E.), on the N side of the fairway 0.25 mile WSW of Haukedalsholmane, has a least charted

depth of 1m.

5.48 Kalveholmen Light is situated on the N side of the fairway, 1

mile WNW of Hornelsflua; Skaten Light is situated 0.3 mile

farther W. Shrukken, a rock, lies 183m SE of Skaten Light.

5.48 A light is situated on the SW extremity of Risoy, a little over

1 mile WNW of Skaten.

5.48 In Skatestraumen, the current is usually W during the falling

tide, with a rate up to 3 or 4 knots, and Eduring the rising tide,

with a rate of 2 knots. Current conditions are irregular,as wind

and weather can greatly influence both direction and rate.

5.48 Vessels may enter Skatestraumen from the S by steering in

the white sector of Kalveholmen Light, then steering in the

white sector of Skaten Light until SW of Kalveholmen Light.

Then steer to pass N of Skaten in the white sector of Risoy

Light or in the white sector of Kalveholmen Light, astern; this

leads N of a 7.5m patch close ENE of Skaten. The white sector

of Risoy Light leads over this patch.

5.48 After passing N of Skaten, bring the white sector of this light

astern; this leads S of Bjornoy into Fafjorden. Another sector

of this light, bearing astern, leads into the white sector of the

light on the E end of Gangsoy. This light ahead leads to the

fairway between Gangsoy and Risoy.

5.48 After passing Risoy, the track leads W into Vagsfjorden and

then N through Maloysundet, the entrance to Ulvesund. The

channel of Indreleia lies on the E side of the island of Maloy.

5.49 After passing between Risoy and Gangsoy, steer for

Vemmelsvikholmen (61°54'N., 5°10'E.) until Gasholmen

bears 305°, when course may be altered toward that island to

bring the light on Gangsoy astern, which leads between

Gasholmen and the unmarked patch on the N side of the channel. Vessels then continue NW in the white sector of Bergsholmane Light.

5.49 Kariskjer Light (61°55'N., 5°07'E.) is situated on a point

0.75 mile NNE of Gasholmen.

5.49 A light is situated on the S extremity of Maloy, 0.45 mile

NNW of Kariskjer Light.

5.49 Maloysundet is the channel between the island of Maloy and

the mainland and is the approach, from S, to the port of Maloy.

5.49 Maloysundet is spanned by a bridge, and is divided into two

separate channels by the central pillar. The W passage has a

vertical clearance of 42m over a width of 23m, or of 40m over

a width of 76m. The E passage has a vertical clearance of 41m

over a width of 50m. The W channel has a least charted depth

of 10.5m and the E channel has a least charted depth of 7m. 

5.49 Lights are exhibited on both sides of the bridge to indicate

the center of each passage.

5.49 The flow in Maloysundet usually sets N on both the flood

and ebb. The strongest rate is about 1 hour before HW. During

springs, with a S wind, the rate is reported to reach 3 knots.

5.49 Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards off Homengra

(60°51'N., 4°37'E.) or Breisundet (62°27'N., 5°59'E.).

5.49 Between Maloysundet and Leistholmen, there is a speed

limit of 6 knots, but larger vessels may proceed at 8 knots to

improve steering if wind and current conditions make this

speed necessary. In Maloysundet itself, vessels may adjust

speed as necessary for safe steering.

5.49 Stalrevet, 0.6 mile N of the N extremity of Stadlandet has a

least charted depth of 29m. It breaks in heavy weather to a

distant of 1.25 miles ESE, which is an area of foul ground.

5.49 Barskallen, about 1 mile WSW of Kvamsoy, has a least

depth of 28m. Svarteskjaer (62°11'N., 5°21'E.), a reef above

and below water, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Haugsholmen

Light, on the NE side of the channel.

5.49 When making Vanylvsgapet from W or NW, pass N of

Stalrevet and enter the white sector of Haugsholmen Light

ahead. When about 0.3 mile NW of Svarteskjaer, steer S to

pass about midway between Haugsholmen Light and the islets

off the NE side of Stadlandet. 

5.49 The white sector of Terneskjerflu Light (62°11'N., 5°24'E.)

leads into the channel between Storholmen and Haugsholmen.

When the two lights marking the W end of the channel are

abeam, course may be adjusted to pass clear N of Terneskjerflu

Light, then into Haugsfjorden.

5.49 Anchorage, in depths of 11 to 25m, is charted 0.35 mile

WNW of Terneskjerflu Light.

5.50 Haugsfjorden is formed between Stadlandet, Storholmen, Kvamsoy, and Haugsholmen, on the W and NW sides,

and by the mainland, on the E side.

5.50 Ytsteflu (62°12'N., 5°27'E.), awash, lies about 0.3 mile

offshore, 1.75 miles NE of Terneskjerflu Light.

5.50 Aramsund Light (62°12'N., 5°29'E.) is situated 2.75 miles

NE of Terneskjerflu Light, in the W entrance to Aramsundet.

The white sector of this light leads from a position close N of

Terneskjerflu Light, across the N end of Haugsfjorden and N of

Ytsteflu. Two 10m patches lie in this white sector.

5.50 Aramsundet leads from Haugsfjorden E to Rovdefjorden. 

5.50 The channel is marked by Aramsund Light, at the W entrance; Stabbane Light, in the E entrance; and a third light

about midway between these two.

5.50 To enter Aramsundet, vessels, after passing Ytsteflu, should

steer to pass S of the 6.5m shoal lying about 0.4 mile WNW of

Aramsund Light, then between this light and the wreck and 9m

depth 0.15 mile NE. Then course may be shaped to pass W and

S of Stabbane Light. Larger vessels may pass N of the iron

perch 183m NW of Stabbane Light and S of Raedene, a reef

awash, 0.15 mile N of the light. This track leads over a 7.5m

depth.

Stabbane Light
102 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

5.50 Rovdefjorden extends about 3 miles SE from Stabbane Light

to Saudeholmen Light (62°11'N., 5°36'E.), then ENE to the

entrance to Voldsfjorden. Vartdalsfjorden is the NE extension

of Rovdefjorden.

5.51 Rovdeskjeret Light (62°11'N., 5°45'E.) is situated on

the S side of Rovdefjorden, 3.75 miles E of Saudeholmen

Light. There are a number of dangers in the vicinity of this

light.

5.51 There is anchorage available off Knarrdal, Little Rovde, and

Sundnesbogen, which lie 0.4 mile E, 0.9 mile E, and 1.5 miles

ENE, respectively, from Rovdeskjeret Light, in depths up to

33m, sand. When approaching these anchorages from the W, it

is advisable to keep well N of the dangers in the vicinity of

Rovdeskjeret Light.

5.51 Vessels may keep Stabbane Light astern, which leads into

the W part of Rovdefjorden. Pass S of Saudeholmen Light,

then steer ENE with the white sector of that light bearing

astern. Vessels may continue E, with the white sector of

Ysnoya Light bearing ahead.

5.51 When about 2 miles WSW of Ysonya Light, alter course to

the E, then steer NNE to pass between Ysonya Light and the

dangers 1 mile E, and enter Vartdalsfjorden.

5.51 Syvdsfjorden extends 6 miles SSE from Rovdefjorden in a

position 1.5 miles SE of Saudeholmen Light.

5.52 Voldsfjorden (62°12'N., 5°56'E.) extends 9.25 miles

SSE from its entrance at the E end of Rovdefjorden. Its two

inner arms, Dalsfjorden and Austefjorden, are deep and clear

of dangers.

5.52 An ammunition dump is situated close within the entrance to

Voldsfjorden.

5.52 Vartdalsfjorden leads 10 miles NE toward Sulefjorden. It is

flanked by high, partly-wooded mountains. The fjord is deep,

and almost everywhere steep-to up to the shore. It is easy to

navigate by day.

5.52 Vessels may enter Vartdalsfjorden with the white sector of

Ysonya Light astern. After passing Skolten (62°16'N.,

6°00'E.), a 2m patch, keep Ysonya Light bearing 222° astern.

This leads through the NE part of Vartdalsfjorden.

5.52 Orstafjorden (62°14'N., 6°00'E.) leads off the SE side of

Vartdalsfjorden and extends 5 miles SE. It is surrounded by

mountains and is almost free of dangers.

5.52 Raudoy and Raudoyholmen, close E, lie in the entrance to

Orstafjorden. Raudoy Light (62°14'N., 5°59'E.) is situated on

Raudoyholmen. Vessels can anchor, in 25 to 40m, sand, 0.25

mile NW of Raudoy Light.

5.52 Vessels may enter with the white sector of Ysonya Light

bearing astern, which leads S of Raudoy. The white sector of

Raudoy Light bearing astern, leads to the vicinity of Lianes,

about 2 miles SSE.

5.52 Orsta (62°12'N., 6°08'E.) (World Port Index No. 23118) lies

at the head of Orstafjorden. It is the site of several industries.

There are several quays, one being 61m in length. There are

depths alongside the quays from 1.7 to 7m.

5.52 Anchorage is available SW of the quays, in 15 to 45m, sand

and mud.

5.53 Indreleia continues through Sulefjorden, between

Hareidlandet and Sula, from the junction of Vartdalsfjorden

Vartdalsfjorden 
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 103

Pub. 182

and Storfjorden, into Breisundet.

5.53 For the requirements for non-military vessels entering Norwegian internal waters, see Pub 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. 

5.53 Hjorungneset Light (Hjoringnes Light) (62°21'N., 6°07'E.),

stands on the NE end of Hjorungneset. This light is situated on

the S side of the E entrance to Sulefjorden. A monument/cairn

is located a little over 1 mile WNW of Hjorungneset Light.

5.53 Overaflu, a reef awash, lies 0.15 mile offshore, 1 mile NW of

Hjorungneset.

5.53 Eltraneset (62°26'N., 6°03'E.), the W extremity of Sula, is

fronted by a shore reef which extends about 0.2 mile SW.

Eltraflu, about 0.2 mile N of Eltraneset, has a least depth of

10m.

5.53 Hareid (62°22'N., 6°02'E.), situated on the SW side of

Sulefjorden, 2.25 miles WNW of Hjorungneset, is protected by

two moles. The dredged depth inside the harbor was 5m; the

depths alongside the quays ranged up to 6m.

5.53 Brandal (62°24'N., 6°01'E.) is a small harbor about 2 miles

NNW of Hareid. There is a ferry quay, 35m long, with depths

of 1.7 to 4.6m alongside; a fish oil quay, 108m long, with

depths of 4 to 7.8m alongside; and a disused factory quay,

110m long, with depths of 2.9 to 4.2m alongside.

5.54 Storfjorden, with its continuations, extends about 55

miles SE from the junction of Vartdalsfjorden and Sulafjorden. 

5.54 The terrain alternates between wild mountain areas and

productive lowlands and valleys.

5.54 Storfjorden extends ENE about 18 miles to Gausneset

(62°28'N., 6°46'E.), then in a general SSE direction about 14

miles to its continuation as Norddalsfjorden.

5.54 Hjorundfjorden, with its two inner arms, Norangsfjorden and

Storfjorden, is entered from a position 7.25 miles ENE of Hjorungnes Light. These fjords extend 18 miles in a SSE direction.

They are surrounded by high mountains which fall steeply to

the water.

5.55 Sykkylvfjorden (62°24'N., 6°33'E.) is entered 4

miles E of Hjorundfjorden. Anchorage is available 2.5 miles

within the entrance near the middle of the fjord, in depths of 28

to 35m. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 16m, spans the

fjord about 0.3 mile N of Vik.

5.55 At Sykkylven, 1.5 miles within the fjord on the E side, there

are quays, exposed to W winds, with depths up to 7.5m

alongside.

5.55 At Ikornes, on the W side of the fjord SW of Sykkylven,

there are depths up to 7.2m alongside the quays.

5.55 Stordalsvika (62°23'N., 6°58'E.) opens off the E side of

Storfjorden, 6.75 mile SSE of Gausneset. Stordal, at the head

of the bay, has berths with 1.1 to 10.3m alongside. Anchorage

is available in the NE corner of Stordalsvika, in 16 to 27m,

mud.

5.55 Stranda (62°18'N., 6°57'E.), on the W side of Storfjorden,

about 4 miles SSW of Stordalsvika, is the principal town in the

inner part of the fjord. There are several berths at the various

quays that range in depth from 1.4 to 7.7m. 

5.55 Strong winds raise considerable seas and make berthing

difficult at the quays.

5.56 Sunnylvsfjorden extends 13 miles SSW from its

junction with Storfjorden and Norddalsfjorden.

5.56 Geirangerfjorden leads about 7 miles E from the SE side of

Sunnylvsfjorden between Lundanes (62°07'N., 6°58'E.) and

Nokkeneset, 0.75 mile SW.

5.56 Both of these fjords are deep and clear of dangers, but navigators are advised to keep well out into the center owing to the

risk of rock falls from the precipitous mountains.

5.56 Hellesylt (62°05'N., 6°53'E.), at the head of Sunnylvsfjorden, has a quay 32m long, with depths of 5.6 to 8.0m alongside.

Vessels may anchor, in 28 to 68m, sand, 0.2 mile NE of the

church.

5.56 Geiranger (62°06'N., 7°12'E.) lies at the head of Geirangerfjorden, 8 miles E of Lundanes. The S side of the ferry quay

is available for berthing and is 50m long, with depths of 3.5 to

8.4m alongside.

5.56 Anchorage is available, in depths of up to 50m, sand, within

0.45 mile of the head of the fjord. 

5.56 Care is necessary to avoid submarine cables which are laid

along the SW shoreline and the cables which extend across the

fjord in a N direction from the S shore in a position 0.85 mile

NW of the quay.

5.57 Norddalsfjorden leads E from the SE end of Storfjorden and then in to Tafjorden. Both fjords are deep and present no navigational difficulty.

5.57 There is anchorage off Tafjorden (62°14'N., 7°25'E.), at the

head of the fjord, in 30 to 50m, sand and clay, clear of the

banks at the river mouth.

5.57 Sandsfjorden (62°15'N., 5°31'E.) is an alternate route from

the sea to Rovdefjorden and the inner route to Alesund. This

fjord lies between Sandsoy, and the islands extending S from

this island, on the W, and Gurskoy on the E.

5.57 From Sondre Flavaerleia, a S course in mid-channel avoids

all dangers and leads clear E of Kleveboen (62°16'N., 5°30'E.),

a 2.3m patch lying off the NE point of Sandsoy.

Geirangerfjoren 
104 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 

Pub. 182

5.57 The white sector of Stabbane Light, bearing ahead, leads

toward the S end of Standsfjorden. The white sector of Sandshamn Light (62°15'N., 5°30'E.), bearing astern, leads SSE

into the W entrance of Rovdefjorden.

5.57 Sandshamn, a harbor protected by a mole, is situated on the

E side of Sandsoy. There is a berth on the inner side of the

mole 25m long, with depths of 8.4 to 10.3m alongside.

5.57 Gursken, a narrow inlet, is entered with the white sector of

Sandshamn Light, bearing astern. Saltflu, awash, lies in this

sector about 3 miles distant from the light. Lights in range lead

N of this danger and then SE to the head of the inlet.

5.57 Vagen (62°13'N., 5°39'E.) lies at the head of Gursken, where

there is a shipyard. There is a fitting out quay at the shipyard,

60m long, with depths of 3.5 to 7m alongside.

5.58 Breisunddjupet, which has depths of over 200m, leads

8 miles SE from position 62°31'N, 5°40'E into Breisundet.

5.58 A number of shoals and patches lie between Runde and the S

side of Breisunddjupet. Nyttarsskallane, with a depth of 24m,

and Golla, three patches of 9m each, lie 3.5 miles NNW and 3

miles NNE, respectively, from Runde Light.

5.58 Heavy seas have been observed in the Breisunddjupet and

Breisundet area with winds from the W and NW. The outgoing

current is approximately 1 knot from Storfjorden and causes

choppy waves and heavier seas.

5.58 Refraction centers will occur on the leeward side of the local

shoal areas on both sides of Breidsunddjupet.

5.58 Vallabaane (62°28'N., 5°41'E.), with a least depth of 2.4m,

and Keipbaane, with a least depth of 7m, lie 3.5 miles NNW

and 4 miles NNW, respectively, from Grasoyane Light. Other

shoals lie in this area. An 18m depth is charted 1.25 miles ENE

of Vallabaane.

5.58 Heroyfjorden lies between Sandsoy and Gurskoy on the S,

and Skorpa, Nerlandsoy, Bersoy, and Leinoy on the N. 

5.58 In Heroyfjorden, there are many islets separated by rockobstructed channels, which in places are narrow. The three

principal channels through these dangers are Sondre Flavaerlia,

Mellomste Flavaerlia, and Nordre Flavaerlia, which are

collectively known as Flavaerlia. 

5.58 These channels lead to the intricate passages which lead N of

Gurskoy and NW of Hareidlandet into Breisundet. Some of

these channels can only be used by small vessels with local

knowledge.

5.58 Heroyfjorden may be approached with the white sector of

Flavaer Light (62°19'N., 5°35'E.) bearing ahead, which leads

N of Stadlandet; however, this track leads over charted depths

of 30m. A racon is located at the light tower.

5.59 Sondre Flavaerlia leads between the N side of

Sandsoy and a group of islets, rocks, and shoals about 1 mile

N. 

5.59 Flesene (62°17'N., 5°27'E.), marked by an iron perch, lies

near the W end of this group.

5.59 Sandsfjorden, previously described in paragraph 5.57, may

be entered from Sondre Flavaerlia.

5.59 The white sector of Hidsneset Light (62°17'N., 5°33'E.), at

the W end of Gurskoy, leads S of Flesene and N of the foul

ground extending NW of Sandsoy.

5.59 Sondre Flavaerlia then passes NE. The white sector of Hidsneset Light, bearing astern, leads W of Langflu, which lies 1

mile NNE of that light, and W of Blomrokkene, which lies

0.45 mile NE of Langflu, and into the E end of Mellomste

Flavaerlia.

5.59 The white sector of Klubben Light (62°19'N., 5°37'E.), situated at the SE end of the Flavaer Group, bearing ahead, leads S

of Langflu.

5.59 From E of Langflu, Sondre Flavaerlia leads ENE to pass

between Klubben Light and an iron perch which marks Kvalebaen, a 3m patch, 0.2 mile S.

5.59 The white sector of Steinsholmskjer Light, 1.25 miles ESE

of Klubben Light, bearing ahead, leads between Klubben Light

and Kvalebaen.

5.59 Mellomste Flavaerlia leads ENE directly toward the Flavaer

Group. This channel is entered as directed for Heroyfjorden.

5.59 The sea sometimes breaks over Hoven, the 30m patch lying

about 1 mile N of Sandsoy, near the entrance to Mellomste

Flavaerlia.

5.59 After passing Penningflu (62°19'N., 5°33'E.), 0.8 mile

WSW of Flavaer Light, course may be altered N to join Nordre

Flavaerlia, or E to join Sondre Flavaerlia, by steering in the

white sector of Steinsholmskjer Light. Nordre Flavaerlia leads

ENE, passing S of Skorpa and Nerlandsoy.

5.59 The white sector of Kyrkjeholmen Light, leads between

Langfallet, partly awash, and Store Godoyflu, at the W

entrance of Nordre Flavaerlia. When within 0.5 mile of Kyrkjeholmen Light, steer in an E direction to pass N of the Flavaer

Group, then steer SE with the white sector of Kyrkjeholmen

Light as tern, which leads into the inner part of Heroyfjorden. 

5.59 Tronden (62°19'N., 5°38'E.), above-water, lies in this white

sector, about 0.5 mile E of Klubben Light.

5.59 Well-sheltered anchorage is available in a bay off Moldtu

(62°18'N., 5°38'E.), on the N coast of Gurskoy, in 20 to 30m,

sand. The anchorage lies 0.9 mile SSE of Klubben Light, and is

entered from the E end of Sondre Flavaerlia.

5.59 Moldtustranda (62°18'N., 5°39'E.) (World Port Index No.

23115) is entered SSE of Steinsholmskjer Light, and lies E of

Moldtu. There are several quays in Moldtustranda, with

lengths from 10 to 130m and depths up to 10m alongside. 

5.59 There is a fish meal factory with a large quay installation.

5.59 Vessels approaching from seaward may embark pilots at the

Geiranger
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 105

Pub. 182

pilot station NE of Runde. Customs officers from the port of

Alesund meet inbound vessels at the above pilot station.

Breisundet

5.60 Heissafjorden (62°27'N., 6°08'E.) leads 2.5 miles E

from Breisundet into Borgundfjorden; at its E end gives access

to Aspevagen, which is the principal entrance to Alesund

Havn.

5.60 Alesund Havn (62°28'N., 6°09'E.) consists of Aspevagen, S

of Aspoya; Steinvagsundet and Steinvagen, W of Aspoya; and

Indre Havn, E of Aspoya.

5.60 Aspevagen is entered E of Slinningen, the E extremity of

Heissa; it is the principal entrance to Alesund Havn. 

5.60 Submarine cables are laid from Slinningsodden, the NE

extremity of Slinningen, NE to Norvoya.

5.60 Aspa (62°28'N., 6°09'E.), a reef awash, lies in the middle of

Aspevagen.

5.60 Vikanesflu Light (62°28'N., 6°07'E.) is situated in the SW

part of Aspevagen. The white sector of this light bearing between 262° and 269° leads from N of Slinningen, S of Aspa to

the anchorages in the S part of Aspevagen. A depth of 9.1m

lies in this white sector.

5.60 Anchorage may be taken, in 30m, 0.35 mile ESE of Vikanesflu Light and, in 36m, 0.7 mile ESE of the same light.

5.60 There is a quay at the tank installation on the S shore of

Aspevagen, about 0.2 mile SE of Vikanesflu Light, which is

75m long and has depths of 7.5 to 11.1m alongside.

5.61 Hoggsteinen Light (62°28'N., 6°02'E.) is situated off

the SE extremity of Godoya, on the NE side of Breisundet. 

5.61 Djupeflua, with a charted depth of 12m, lies 0.3 mile SSE of

the light. Skarvoyflua, a 5m patch which breaks in bad

weather, lies about 1 mile E of the light.

5.61 Nordtaren, with a least charted depth of 7.5m, lies about

midway between Heissa and Godoya, 1 mile ENE of Hoggsteinen Light.

5.61 To enter Valderhaugfjorden, which lies N of Alesund, steer

in the junction of the red and green sectors of Havsteinen

Light (62°29'N., 6°04'E.). This track leads over Djupeflua and

W of Nordtaren. 

5.61 When W of Erkneflua, which lies close N of Nordtaren, steer

NE with the white sector of Hoggsteinen Light astern; this will

lead to a position NW of Alesund.

5.61 Foul ground extends about 0.2 mile N from the NE extremity

of Heissa. Steer a SE course from the white sector of Hoggsteinen Light to pass E of this foul ground, to the berths on the

N side of Alesund.

5.61 Olsskjer, a partly submerged reef, lies on the N side of the

fairway, about 0.5 mile N of Aspoya Olsskjerboen, a 3m shoal,

lies 0.15 mile ENE of this reef. 
Pub. 182

6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
109

Pub. 182

SECTOR 6 

NORWAY—BREIDSUND-DJUPET TO TRONDHEIM

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Breidsund-Djupet to Halten, including the seaward approaches to

Indreleia, the connecting fjords, and Trondheim. The inner

route N of Alesund is included in this sector. 

General Remarks

6.1 Winds—Weather.—Between Alesund and Trondheim, during autumn, winter and spring, the weather is frequently unsettled and stormy. During this period the prevailing

wind is SW. In summer, the wind is most frequently between N

and NE.

Tides—Currents.—During settled weather, the tidal currents set NE with the flood and SW with the ebb. They attain

their greatest strength at a distance of 30 to 50 miles offshore.

At 30 to 50 miles offshore on this part of the coast, the NE tidal

current is generally the stronger and the most constant.

6.1 When the wind is continuously E, the tidal current is always

SW.

6.1 During the winter months, when the nights are long and the

visibility is frequently bad, vessels approaching land with a W

wind should exercise caution to avoid being set N of the

harbor, channel, or channel entrance.

6.1 Within the various channels of the fjords the tidal currents,

as a rule, flow NE with the rising tide. The tidal currents in

some channels are negligible, while a rate of 3 to 4 knots have

been observed in others.

From Breidsund-Djupet, the outer coast trends in a general

NE direction for about 39 miles to Buadjupet. From Buadjupet,

the coast trends in a general ENE direction for about 27 miles

to Kristiansund. This coast is fronted by islands, groups of

islets, and rocks which extend up to 8.5 miles off the mainland.

6.1 From Kristiansund, the islands and rocks lying off the coast

extend about 75 miles NE to the islands of Halen. These

islands are located on the W side of the main N approach to

Trondheim.

6.1 For details and information concerning the color and bearings of the sector lights mentioned within this sector, see the

Light List.

6.1 Rain, fog, and storms usually occur during SW winds. The

least rainfall and the clearest weather are experienced during

the spring. Summer is the season with the greatest number of

foggy days; however, at Trondheim, fog is more prevalent in

autumn and winter.

6.1 Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

6.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

6.1 Caution.—Due to continued damage to floating navigation

aids in the area, mariners are requested to give a wide berth

when passing them. Vessels are to report observance of any

disfunctional or irregular lights or damaged buoyage to the

nearest coast station.

Off-lying Dangers

6.2 Dangerous Waves Areas.—Coastal areas where repeated marine casualties caused by heavy seas in rough weather have occured are designated by the Norwegian authorities as

Danger Areas.

Stattlandett (62°12'N., 5°00'E.) is exposed to SW to N

winds which raise heavy seas. 

6.2 Haugsholmen (62°11'N., 5°23'E.) and Stalrevet (62°13'N.,

5°11'E.) are particularly known as rough sea areas.

6.2 Breidsunddjupet and Breidsundet (62°28'N., 5°50'E.) are

areas where W and NW winds cause heavy seas.

6.2 Haustadvika (63°00'E., 7°00'E.), extensive offshore shoals,

completely exposed to SW to NW strong winds. These conditions are especially severe in the area of Buadjupet, Bjornsund

(62°54'N., 6°45'E.), and Kolbeinsflua,.

6.2 Ytrefjorden (63°12'N., 7°50'E.) is an area extending from

SW of Gripholen to Ytrefjorden S of Smola, where depths are

100 to 150m. Griptarane, the westernmost shallow area where

the sea breaks heavily, lies about 11 miles W of Smola.

6.2 The Folla (63°55'N., 9°30'E.) area is known for rough seas

with strong W or NW winds, especially in the winter. Many

large and small ships have been lost in the area through the

years. The coast line is steep-to, with depths of 300 to 500m

near offshore that also contributes to rough conditions, along

with the outflow of tidal current.

6.3 Oil and gas fields.—Draugen Oil Field lies 45 miles

WNW from Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.). A lighted concrete platform LF3F (64°21.2'N., 7°47'.0E.) stands on Halten.

An SPM is moored 1.5 miles ESE of the platform. There are

numerous underwater installations within 6.5 miles of the platform. 

6.3 Njord A and Njord B storage tankers, 1.5 miles apart and

connected to each other with a submarine pipeline, are located

about 60 miles E of Halten Light. 

6.3 Asgard, Norway’s largest and most complex offshore development, is situated 87 miles NW of Halten Light and consists

of three permanent structures, as follows:

1. Asgard B (65°06.6'N., 6°47.5'E.), the world’s largest

semi-submersible production platform, is moored with 16

anchor lines, each extending a length of 1,900m.

2. Asgard A, a floating production storage and offloading vessel (FPSO) located about 3.2 miles SSW of Asgard B,

is moored with 12 anchor lines.

3. Asgard C, a floating storage and offloading vessel

(FSO) located about 2.5 miles ENE of Asgard B, is moored

with nine anchor lines, each extending a length of 1,200m.

6.3 Gas is delivered via a submarine pipeline running 385 miles

from Asgard B to Kallsto, located on the mainland 6 miles S of

Haugesund (59°25'N., 5°16'E.). 

6.3 Numerous wells, structures, and other obstructions exist on

the sea bed within the boundaries of the field, which extend 5

miles N, 6 miles S, 5 miles W, and 22 miles E of Asgard B.
110 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within 500m of the sea

bed installations. A lighted buoy is moored close N of a well

located 9.5 miles N of Asgard B.

6.3 Statoil Marin VTS conducts radar surveillance from the

three structures and can be contacted on VHF channel 6. Vessels are requested to pass at least 3 miles off all installations. 

6.3 Caution.—It has been reported (2009) that a submerged

obstructions lie at 65°09.8'N, 6°29.6'E and at 65°08.2'N,

6°28.6'E. Both obstructions lie W of Halden Bank and about

22.5 miles SW of Heidrun platform. 

Breidsund-Djupet to Buadjupet (Buddjupet)

6.4 The coast NNE of Breidsund-Djupet, the NW

approach to Alesund and the recommended fairway to Alesund, is fringed with a number of islands which are fronted by

foul ground to a distance of 6 miles in places. Vessels approaching the coast from seaward should maintain a considerable distance offshore until their position is positively determined. 

Vallabaane, with a charted depth of 2.4m, lies about 7 miles

W of Godoya. Keipbaane lies 0.6 mile NNW of the 2.4m

depth.

Alnes Light (62°29'N., 5°58'E.), situated on the NW extremity of Godoya, is a good mark for making Giskesundet, the

passage between the islands of Godoya and Giske. 

Alesundaksla (62°28.5'N., 6°11.0'E.) rises to an elevation of

197m, on the island of Norvoya, close E of Alesund. It is used

as a mark in the approach to Giskesundet.

6.4 Klovgrynna, an 18m patch; Dyngeskallen, a 26m patch; and

Stadsgrunnskallen, a 20m patch, lie about 5 miles WNW of the

NW extremity of Godoya.

6.4 Olsflua (62°30'N., 5°51'E.), an 11m patch, and Lyren, a 16m

patch, lie 3 and 2 miles W, respectively, from the NW extremity of Godoya.

6.4 To enter Giskesundet (62°30'N., 6°01'E.) from the W, Alnes

Light, just open N of the highest point of Havsteinen, bearing

092° leads N of Keipbaane, but directly over Olsflua.

6.4 The NW extremity of Godoya, in line with the S point of

Havsteinen bearing 098°, leads close S of Klovgrynna and

Dyngeskallen and N of Olsflua toward Giskesundet.

6.4 Vessels may approach Giskesundet at night with the white

sector of Erkna Light.

6.4 A middle course steered through Giskesundet avoids the

dangers and Valderhaugfjorden may be entered by passing N or

S of Havsteinen.

6.4 Vessels having entered Valderhaugfjorden whose destination

is Alesund, proceed as previously directed.

6.5 Fauskane (62°34'N., 5°45'E.), shoals with a least

depth of 8.8m, lie in the NW approach to Giskesundet, about 8

miles NW of Godoya. These are marked by breakers in any

swell and a lighted buoy moored close W. Onglegrunnen, a

17m patch, and Kvalsbaen, a 2m patch, lie 6 and 4.75 miles,

respectively, NW of Godoya. Kvalsbaen is usually marked by

breakers.

6.5 Langeskjeret (62°32'N., 5°52'E.), an islet marked by a

beacon, lies 4 miles NW of Godoya. A chain of rocks extends 1

mile N to Leiafalla, a rock, awash. Oddebaen, a group of rocks,

awash, lie 0.85 mile NW of Langeskjeret.

6.5 Leiafallet, rocks, awash; Alnesbreidflua, awash; Bjornebaen,

awash; and Alnesraunen, marked by a beacon; lie 1.25 miles

NW, 2 miles NW, 2 miles NW and 2 miles NW, respectively, of

Godoya.

6.5 Vessels approaching Giskesundet from NW keep the SW

point of Godoya in line with the top of the SW slope of Sula

bearing 125°. This track will lead SW of Fauskane and Onglegrunnen, but Olsflua lies close N of this track further inshore.

6.6 Giskesundet, between Godoya and Giske (62°30'N.,

6°03'E.), 1 mile N, gives access to Indreleia from seaward and

is used by vessels leaving Alesund for the open sea. It is affected by strong mountain squalls from Godoya, when winds are

strong between S and W.

6.6 When entering Giskesundet, the NW extremity of Godoya

should be given a wide berth, owing to the banks which extend

up to 0.2 mile from it. Foul ground extends 2.5 miles NW from

Giske, and 0.3 mile SW.

6.6 Erkna Light (62°33'N., 5°56'E.), situated on the summit of

an island 1.75 miles W of Vigra, is a useful landfall light.

6.6 Synesfjellet (62°33'N., 6°02'E.), 87m high, is situated near

the SW extremity of Vigra. Blindheimsfjellet, 77m high, and

Molnesfjellet, 128m high, are situated 1.25 miles and 2.5 miles

NE, respectively, from Synesfjellet.

6.6 Storholmane (62°39'N., 5°56'E.), 5.5 miles NW of Vigra,

consists of three easily identified islands.

6.6 Storholmen (62°39'N., 5°56'E.) is the largest of the three

islands which comprise the group. A light is situated on this

island.

6.6 The waters N and E of Storholmen can be difficult to navigate without local knowledge, despite the ample provision of

navigational lights.

6.7 Lepsoya (62°37'N., 6°11'E.), Haramsoya, and Flemsoya are easily identified, especially when the mountains in the

background are visible. When viewed from the NW, these

islands appear equal in width to the openings, about 2 miles,

between them.

6.7 Godalde, the summit of Lepsoya, is 489m high. Mannen, at

the center of Haramsoya, is 347m high; Skulen, the summit of

Flemsoya, is 493m high.

6.7 Lepsoyklovningen (62°38'N., 6°03'E.), an islet, lies 3.25

miles E of Storholmen. Kloningsgrunnen, a 4.8m patch, lies

0.25 mile S of Lepsoyklovningen; Klovningsfallet, a 2m patch,

lies 0.4 mile SE of the same islet.

6.7 Knappen (62°38'N., 6°02'E.), an isolated above-water rock,,

lies 0.7 mile S of Lepsoyklovningen. Nordreflua, a 3m patch,

lies about 1 mile W of Knappen. Melingskjeret, above water,

lies 1.25 miles SW of Nordreflua.

6.7 A light is situated on Rossholmen (62°36'N., 6°03'E.), an

islet 1.25 miles NW of Vigra. Rossholmbaen, a 1.5m patch,

lies 0.45 mile N of the light.

6.7 Flatskjeret lies 1.5 miles ENE of Rossholmen; Flatskjergrunnen, a 1.7m patch, lies 0.2 mile farther ENE.

6.8 The island of Mia (62°40'N., 6°38'E.), 6 miles E of

Flemsoya, rises to a height of 533m. Several hummocks protrude from its summit.

6.8 Skjerdingen, on the mainland about 5 miles SSE of the

summit of Mia, has a saddle-shaped summit 1,062m high, and
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 111

Pub. 182

is visible for a considerable distance at sea.

6.8 Farther NE, on the coast about 30 miles from Flemsoya, will

be seen Stemshesten, 667m high, and Maelen, 769m high.

6.8 Jendemsfjellet (62°48'N., 7°03'E.), 633m high, is situated

on the mainland, about 11 miles SSW of Maelen;. It may be

identified by its perfectly round form.

6.8 Gulberget, 160m high, about 7 miles NNW of Jendemsfjellet. The hill rises from a level plain and is conspicuous

because of its detached position. Its summit is almost flat and

presents the same appearance when sighted from various

bearings. A church 1 mile WSW of the hill is also visible from

seaward.

6.9 Vigrafjorden lies between Vigra and Lepsoya, which

lies 1.75 miles NE. Vigrafjorden is entered from the vicinity of

Storholmen, about 7 miles WNW.

The recommended route into Vigrafjorden by day leads E

from a position 0.4 mile S of Storholmen, then passes between

Knappen and Klovningsgrunnen, then turns SE, passing W of

Flatskjeret or E of Flatskjergrunnen.

6.9 When E of Flatskjergrunnen, steer SSE with the white sector

of Innholmen Light (62°38'N., 6°07'E.), astern, which leads

to the S part of Vigrafjorden.

6.9 When Rognodden, the E extremity of Vigra, bears 270°,

enter the white sector of Oksebasen Light (62°31'N., 6°09'E.)

until about 0.5 mile distant from the light, then change course

to pass midway between Oksebasen Light and the island of

Valderoya, about 0.5 mile distant, W. 

6.9 Enter the white sector of Gildreneset Light (62°30'N.,

6°11'E.) bearing between 116° and 120°, ahead, which leads

through a channel about 0.2 mile wide. 

6.9 When clear of the channel, steer SW and enter Valderhaugfjorden, then SE to Alesund or continue SW through Indreleia

as previously directed.

6.9 Caution.—The glide path for aircraft landing at Alesund

airport passes over Vigrafjorden 3 to 4 miles N of Hamnoya. 

6.9 At the E limit of the approach zone, the aircraft will be at an

altitude of only about 60m when descending to the runway.

6.10 Lepsoyrevet (62°36'N., 6°15'E.), a shallow reef of

shingle, sand, and shells, with rocky heads, extends from Lepsoya to the mainland, about 2 miles SE. This is the shallowest

part of Indreleia; a depth of little more than 5m can be carried

across it.

6.10 Unexpected and unsteady winds are liable to blow off the

mainland and off Lepsoya.

6.10 The tidal currents flow NE and SW. The flow is strong and is

greatly influenced by wind.

6.10 A light is shown from the head of a breakwater extending

0.15 mile from the shore, on the SE side of Lepsoyrevet.

6.10 Sore Kverna Light stands on the reef on the NW side of the

fairway, about 0.5 mile W of Lepsoyrevet Light. A racon is

located at the light tower.

6.10 The fairway across Lepsoyrevet is entered about 0.3 mile

SSW of Sore Kverna Light. The white sector of Lepsoyrevet

Light leads toward the entrance of the fairway. The fairway

leads NE to Haramsfjorden, and is marked by buoys.

6.10 When clear of Lepsoyrevet, course may be shaped to pass

NW of Haugneset (62°37'N., 6°20'E.), or NW through Haramsfjorden, to the open sea.

6.10 The waters NW of Lepsoya are foul and should not be

entered without local knowledge.

6.10 Haramsfjorden is difficult to access and should not be

attempted without a pilot.

Pass S of Hella (62°41'N., 5°59'E.) and N of Utbaane,

awash, 2 miles ESE of Hella. 

6.10 A light is shown from Hellevik (62°38'N., 6°10'E.). Naggen,

awash, lies about 2 miles WNW of Hellevik Light.

6.10 When S of Naggen, the white sector of Haugneset Light

(62°37'N., 6°20'E.) leads into the NW entrance of

Haramsfjorden. This track lies close N of a 1m depth just off

the N side of Lepsoya. When about 0.9 mile ESE of Hellevik

Light, steer SE as required, to join Indreleia.

6.11 Nogvafjorden (62°41'N., 6°20'E.), entered between

Flemsoya and Fjortoft, about 1 mile NE, is the best entrance

from seaward to Indrelia between Lepsoya and Buadjupet.

6.11 Tides—Currents.—On the N side of the seaward approach

to Nogvafjorden, the NE flow, experienced during the rising

tide, sets markedly in toward the dangers W of Fjortoft and

Haroya.

6.11 Directions.—To enter Nogvafjorden from seaward, steer for

Skulen (62°41'N., 6°19'E.) bearing 126°, which leads NE of

Grunnflua, a 3.5m patch, lying 2.5 miles WNW of Kjeholmen

Light, and SW of Breidflua, a 5m patch lying 1.75 miles NW

of the light.

6.11 A mid-channel course through Nogvafjorden leads clear of

dangers; however, a 15m patch lies 0.9 mile ENE of Kjeholmen Light, and a 16m patch lies 0.25 mile farther E.

6.11 At night the white sector of Kjeholmen Light (62°42'N.,

6°15'E.) leads between Grunnflua and Breidflua.

6.11 The white sector of Fjortoftneset Light, 2 miles ENE of

Kjeholmen Light, leads N of the dangers close off Flemsoya.

6.11 The white sector of Kjeholmen Light bearing astern, and the

white sector of Fjortoftneset Light bearing, astern, lead from

Nogvafjorden into Haroyfjorden.

6.12 Haroyfjorden (62°52'N., 6°55'E.) is bound on the

NW by Flemsoya, Fjortoft, Haroya, Finnoya, and Sandoya, and

on the E by Dryna, Midoya, the NW end of Otteroya, and the

islets and rocks SW of Gossa.

6.12 The current through Haroyfjorden usually flows NE, with

the strongest flow during the rising tide.

6.13 Nyhamna (Nyhavna) (62°51'N., 6°57'E.) is a new gas

terminal situated on the N side of Gossa, about 4 miles SE of

the entrance to Haroyfjorden. 

6.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is provided by Fedje

(paragraph 5.3). Pilotage is ordered through Kvitsoy Pilot

Booking Center or through the Norwegian Safe Sea Net. 

6.13 Pilots board in the following positions: 

1. Vessels greater than 25,000 gross tons—Pilots board

by helicopter N of Ona (62°56'N., 6°27'E.).

2. Vessels less than 25,000 gross tons—In Breisundet S

of Godoy (Godoya), in position 62°26'50.2''N, 5°58'51.0''E.

6.13 Regulations.—A cautionary area has been established in the

water area bounded, as follows: 

1. North boundary—latitude 62°56'52.8''N.

2. West boundary—longitude 6°33'48.0''E.

3. South boundary—latitude 62°38'40.8''N.
112 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

4. East boundary—longitude 7°22'19.8''E.

6.13 Vessels should use extreme caution when navigating in this

area. In addition, vessels underway or at anchor in the waters

covered by the cautionary area must maintain a continuous

listening watch on VHF channels 14 and 16. 

6.13 Category 1 and Category 2 vessels calling at Nyhamna must

notify the terminal on VHF channel 14 or 16 of the following

information: 

1. Vessel name.

2. Call sign.

3. Planned sailing route to and from the terminal.

6.13 These broadcasts must be made, as follows: 

1. Thirty (30) minutes prior to arrival at the cautionary

area.

2. Fifteen (15) mintues prior to arrival at or departure

from the terminal.

3. When leaving the cautionary area.

4. When arriving at or departing from the anchorages at

Karlsoyfjorden and Midfjorden (62°38'N., 6°40'E.), S of

Tautra.

6.13 Category 1 and Category 2 vessels must use escort vessels,

as follows: 

1. From the pilot boarding position to Nyhamna.

2. From Nyhamna to the pilot boarding position.

3. When en route to the anchorage—from prior to departing Nyhamna until anchored in the anchorage area..

4. When departing the anchorage area—from prior to

raising the anchor until arriving at the quay at Nyhamna.

6.13 Additional regulations for Category 1 and Category 2 vessels

govern entry into Nyhamma. Consult local authorities for

details. 

6.14 Indreleia continues from Lepsoyrevet, NE, to pass W

of Haugneset and Raudholmane, about 2 miles farther NE.

6.14 Grunnrevet, a spit extending 0.4 mile E from Rogneholmen,

lies 0.8 mile W of the light on Raudholmane.

6.14 The white sector of the light on Raudholmane leads to a

position 0.6 mile WSW of the light. The white sector of the

light on Haugneset, astern, leads between Raudholmane and

Grunnrevet, and then into Haroyfjorden. Nogvafjorden joins

Indreleia in this area.

6.14 From a position 0.75 mile N of Haugneset, Dronenholmen

Light, 3 miles E of Raudholmane, bearing between 076° and

084°, leads N of foul ground and S of Raudholmane to Midfjorden.

6.14 Anchorage.—There is anchorage available, in 29m, off the

SE extremity of Haramsoya. There is an 18m depth charted

close E of the anchorage and a cable extends SE from the

island to the mainland.

6.14 Anchorage is available for medium and small vessels S of

Hestoya, which lies 0.85 mile E of Lepsoya, in 14 to 15m, sand

and shells.

6.15 Indreleia continues from Raudholmane (62°38'N.,

6°24'E.) through Haroyfjorden, which is broad and deep, to the

vicinity of Sandoya (62°49'N., 6°36'E.), 12 miles NNE.

6.15 The white sector of the light on Raudholmane astern leads E

of the dangers off the SE side of Fjortoft. 

6.15 Husevikflua (62°46'N., 6°32'E.), a 1.9m patch situated 1

mile ENE of the E extremity of Haroya, lies within these bearings.

6.15 Aersteinen Light (62°48'N., 6°36'E.) is situated 0.35 mile S

of Sandoya. The white sector of this light leads E of Husevikflua and W of the dangers W of Orta, an island 3 miles ENE

of Husevikflua.

6.15 Flatflesa Light (62°50'N., 6°41'E.) is situated 3.25 miles NE

of Aersteinen Light. The white sector of this light, ahead, leads

E of Aersteinen Light and W of the foul ground and islets

extending 1.25 miles N of Orta.

6.15 The white sector of Aersteinen Light bearing 220°, astern,

leads E of the foul ground extending NE from Sandoya, and

farther NE to the S entrance to Saltsteinsleia.

6.16 Midfjorden (62°38'N., 6°40'E.) is approached from

Haroyfjorden, and extends 4.5 miles ENE from Dryna to its

junction with Moldefjorden, S of the SW extremity of Otteroya.

6.16 The main channel through Midfjorden and Moldefjorden

from Dryna to Molde, 19 miles E, is deep and clear of dangers

except close to shore and in the final approach to Molde.

6.16 A mid-channel course in the fjords clears all dangers, but a

course adjustment may be needed to avoid Tautreflua

(62°41'N., 6°56'E.), a 16m patch lying in the fairway NE of

Tautra.

6.16 Dronenholmen Light (62°38'N., 6°31'E.), bearing between

253° and 274°, astern, and the white sector of Arnesklubben

Light lead clear of Midoya.

6.16 The white sector of Arnesklubben Light, situated on the SW

extremity of Otteroya, bearing astern, leads clear of Otteroya

and Tautra.

6.16 Moldefjorden, the continuation of Midfjorden, from the vicinity of Arnesklubben Light (62°40'N., 6°41'E.), passes between Tautra and the SE side of Otteroya, just over 1 mile to

the N.

6.16 Julsundet extends N from Moldefjorden, between Otteroya

and the mainland.

6.16 From Tautra to Molde, about 7 miles ENE the fairway is

clear of dangers. South and SW of Molde, there are numerous

islets and scattered rocks, making it advisable to keep on the N

side of the channel when entering the roadstead.

6.16 Mekgrunna (62°43'N., 7°06'E.), a 3.5m patch, lies 0.6 mile

offshore, about 2 miles WSW of Molde Light. The patch may

be passed on either side.

6.16 The white sector of Molde Light, bearing ahead, leads N of

Mekgrunna, which is the preferred channel.

6.16 Dangers lie 0.45 mile S of Molde Light. Their position may

best be seen on the chart.

6.17 Molde (62°44'N., 7°10'E.) (World Port Index 23110)

is a coastal natural harbor, which lies on the N side of Moldefjorden, about 5 miles E of Julsundet, and has a small ice-free

harbor.

6.17 Tides—Currents.—The tide rises about 2m at springs and

1.6m at neaps.

Port of Molde HomePage

http://www.molde-romsdalhavn.no
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 113

Pub. 182

6.17 The tidal current within the harbor is hardly noticeable.

Winds between SE and SW can be troublesome, and raise a

considerable sea.

6.17 Depths—Limitations.—The main quay in the harbor is

Storkaia. It has lengths of 70m on the NW side, 192m on the

SW part, and 73m on the NE part. Depths of 5.1 to 6.3m exist

on the NW side, with 6.8 to 10.3m in the SW part, and 6.3 to

6.8m in the NE part. Moldegard has two quays 130 and 100m

long with depths of up to 15m and 6m, respectively, alongside.

6.17 There are facilities for ferry, cargo, ro-ro, container, cruise,

and passenger vessels. Tankers up to 5,000 dwt can be accommodated. Vessels up to 35,000 grt berth at Storkaia.

6.17 Moldegard Haven can accommodate passenger vessels of

any size. It is reported that the largest vessel handled was

70,200 grt and 10.4m draft.

6.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots may be ordered

via the Safe Sea Net or through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking

Center. Vessels should call the pilot on VHF channel 16, at

least two hours prior to arrival. If the station does not respond,

either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio Station will reply

and relay details to the pilot station. The pilot boards in

position 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E or by arrangement in position

62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E. 

6.17 Regulations.—From Reknes Mole to the light at Aroy, 3.25

miles E, there is a speed limit of 6 knots, to be exceeded only

with the harbormaster’s permission.

6.17 Vessels in quarantine are required to anchor near Moldeholmen, which is situated 1 mile ESE of Reknes mole.

6.17 Signals.—The quays are numbered 1 to 5 from W to E.

Signals consisting of flags by day and a combination of red and

green lights at night are shown to indicate the allotted berth. By

day a red flag is shown at the assigned berth. By night, lights

are shown from a signal mast on the steamer quay, as follows: 

6.17 When vessels arrive simultaneously from E and W, the first

signal shown refers to the vessel from the W.

6.17 When a signal is understood, the vessel concerned should

acknowledge it with a short blast on the whistle.

6.17 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 47-71-191620

3. Facsimile: 47-71-191621

4. E-mail: office@molde-romsdalhavn.no

6.17 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor off Molde, in depths of 30

to 35m, sand and clay.

6.18 Romsdalfjorden is entered E of Tautra (62°40'N.,

6°4'E.) and extends 24 miles ESE to Andalsnes and then 3

miles E to its head at Isfjorden. The fjord is deep and clear of

dangers and is not difficult to navigate.

6.18 A submarine cable lands close S of Furneset. Four submarine pipelines extend up to 300m from the shore on the E

side of Tresfjorden. A discharge pipe extends 230m S from

Vorpneset (62°38.5'N., 7°05.5'E.), another discharge pipe extends about 0.3 mile W of the N point of Feoya.

6.18 To enter Romsdalsfjorden steer in the white sector of

Helgestones Light (62°36'N., 7°22'E.), which leads between

Sekken and Skalhamnholmen, about 10 miles ESE of Tautra.

6.18 Steer to pass NE of Helgestones Light and enter the white

sector of Hovdenes Light (62°33'N., 7°31'E.), about 6 miles

SE of Helgestones Light. 

6.18 When about 0.5 mile distant from Hovdenes Light, steer an

E course to bring the white sector of Hovdenes Light astern.

This course will lead to Andalsnes.

6.18 Andalsnes (62°34'N., 7°41'E.) (World Port Index No.

23111) stands on a point on the S side of Romdalsfjorden. 

6.18 This natural coastal port is a district capital. There are a

number of berths that range in length from 22 to 183m, and

have a depth alongside to 14m.

6.18 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots may be ordered

via the Safe Sea Net or through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking

Center. Vessels should call the pilot on VHF channel 16, at

least two hours prior to arrival. If the station does not respond,

either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio Station will reply

and relay details to the pilot station. The pilot boards in

position 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E or by arrangement in position

62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E. 

6.18 An obstruction was reported (1996) 2.5 miles NE of the end

of Andalsnes.

6.18 Anchorage is available over the whole of Isfjorden from

Andalsnes to Stein, 2.5 miles E, in a depth of 35m, mud.

6.19 Julsundet is entered between Heggneset (62°43'N.,

6°56'E.), the SE extremity of Otteroya, and Julneset, a point on

the mainland 1.5 miles NE. Julsundet leads 10 miles N from

Moldefjorden, E of Otteroya and Gossa to join Buadjupet. It is

deep and clear.

6.19 The current in Julsundet is always N, but in unsettled

weather there may be a S flow during the rising tide.

6.19 Vessels may enter Julsundet by steering in the white sector of

Julholmen Light (62°44'N., 6°58'E.). When abeam of

Julneset, steer a NNW mid-channel course, to pass W of

Julholmen Light.

6.19 Vessels enter the white sector of Hogsnes Light (62°50'N.,

6°58'E.). 

6.19 This track will lead E of Kua, a small reef marked by a light,

situated 2 miles NNW of Julholmen Light.

6.19 Steer to pass E of Hogsnes Light and bring the white sector

of that light astern which will lead W of Herringen, situated

about 1 mile NNE of the light, and E of the NE extremity of

Gossa.

Signal Meaning

One red light Berth 1

Two red lights Berth 2

Three red lights Berth 3

One green light Berth 4

One green light and one red light Berth 5

One green light and two red lights Moldegard Havn

One green light and three red lights All berths occupied

Port of Andalsnes HomePage

http://www.molde-romsdalhavn.no
114 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

6.19 The white sector of Indre Haroy Light (62°53'N., 6°56'E.)

located at Degerhalsen, bearing 305°, leads NW towards Buadjupet. The white sector of Indre Haroy Light, astern, leads clear

of the dangers SW of Oddane (62°54'N., 6°53'E.) and NE of

Bjornsund (62°54'N., 6°50'E.). 

6.19 Oddane, a group of islets, lies about 2.25 miles NW of Indre

Haroy Light.

6.20 Haroysund (62°54'N., 6°58'E.) (World Port Index

No. 23108) is a spacious coastal harbor, situated between Ytre

Haroy, Indre Haroy, and the mainland. The harbor is normally

entered W of Indre Haroy.

6.20 There are a number of berths in Haroysund. They range up to

220m in length and have depths up to 9m alongside.

6.20 Anchorage is available E of Ytre Haroy and NE of Indre

Haroy, in about 8m, sand.

6.20 Bud (62°54'N., 6°55'E.) is situated on a point of the

mainland, about 1 mile E of Oddane. The town is rather low

but the church is visible from seaward. Vessels with a draft not

exceeding 5.5m can anchor in the outer harbor.

Buadjupet

6.21 From the seaward entrance to Nogvafjorden, the offlying dangers run for a distance of about 22 miless in a NE

direction to Buadjupet.

6.21 Several channels lead in from seaward. The waters in this

area are foul and passage through them should not be

attempted without local knowledge.

6.21 From Storholmen Light (62°39'N., 5°56'E.), about 6 miles

WNW of Lepsoya, the off-lying dangers lie E of a line between

the light and Rosok-Havflua, a 9m patch, 13 miles NE. However, Hella, Skreia, and Seigrunnane lie close W of this line

about 2.75, 3.5, and 5.5 miles NNE, respectively, of Storholmen Light.

6.21 Rosok Havflua (62°49'N., 6°13'E.), marked by a lighted

buoy, is situated on the NW side of the foul ground which

extends 6.25 miles WNW from Haroya.

6.21 Ona Light (62°52'N., 6°33'E.), situated on an island, is

shown at a height of 40m. 

6.21 Klakken (62°57'N., 6°43'E.), with a charted depth of 10m,

lies 15.5 miles ENE of Rosok-Havflua and 6 miles WNW of

Bud. Vessels approaching Buadjupet from the SW are advised

to keep well to the seaward to avoid the shoal water lying E of

a line between Rosok-Havflua and Klakken.

6.21 In gales, breakers form over shoals in this area, with depths

as great as 20 to 30m.

6.22 Bjornsund Light (62°54'N., 6°49'E.) is situated on

the E end of the islet of Mooya, at the N end of the Bjornsund

group, about 3 miles WSW of Bud.

6.22 Karlmedhammaren and Turiskallen lie, respectively, 6 and

6.25 miles NNW of Bjornsund Light. They have a least depth

of 26m, but vessels should avoid them in bad weather.

6.22 Jendemsfjellet, bearing between 134° and well open of

Bjornsund Light, leads in from seaward NE of Klakken.

6.22 The white sector of Bjornsund Light, ahead, leads in from

NW between Klakken and Karlmedhammaren to within 2.5

miles of the light, when course may be shaped either into

Buadjupet or Saltsteinsleia.

6.22 Saltsteinsleia, which leads SSW to Haroyfjorden, passes W

of Krabben Light (62°52'N., 6°43'E.). The white sector of

Flatflesa Light, 1.75 miles SSW of Krabben Light, leads W of

Krabben toward Haroyfjorden.

6.22 For a continuation of Indreleia S, follow a reciprocal course

of directions previously given.

6.22 Buadjupet and Julsundet comprise the usual N approach

from seaward to Moldefjorden and Molde.

6.22 Buadjupet is about 1 mile wide between Staflua (62°54'N.,

6°51'E.), a 6.4m shoal 0.75 mile E of Bjornsund Light, and the

outer island lying W of Bud.

6.22 Vessels approaching Buadjupet from N steer in the white

sector of Bjornsund Light. which leads into the white sector of

Indre Haroy Light.

6.22 To enter Bud and Julsundet, follow a reciprocal course of

directions previously given.

Buadjupet to Kristiansund

6.23 From Buadjupet, the coast trends in a general ENE

direction for about 27 miles to Kristiansund. The coast is

fronted by groups of islets, rocks, and shoals which extend up

to 8.5 miles from the mainland.

6.23 The coast is formed partly by the mainland and partly by the

NW coast of Averoya and by the islands on which Kristiansund

stands. The coast is mainly low and sparsely vegetated, and the

off-lying islands are bare and grey.

6.23 This is one of the most difficult parts of the Norwegian coast

to navigate. From Buadjupet, Indreleia leads into the open sea,

continuing NE through Hustadvika, then through Ramnefjorden into Kristiansundsleia (63°09'N., 7°42'E.).

6.23 Several channels lead from seaward into this part of Indreleia. Local knowledge is required in some of the channels and

pilots should always be employed. Large vessels proceeding to

Kristiansund or Trondheim use Gripholen.

6.23 Tides—Currents.—Between Buadjupet and Kristiansund,

in calm weather, the tidal current usually sets ENE with the

rising tide and WSW with the falling tide. With strong longcontinued winds, the set of the current follows the direction of

the wind.

6.23 Hustadvika is the name used for the W part of the waters,

from Bud to Fugen. Hustadvika coastline is totally unprotected

against the sea, and the passage is foul with many shoals.

6.23 Waves from the SW to NW will be refracted over the Buagrunnen shoals, and refraction centers occur on the leeward side.

With waves from the N, Griptarane may cause a refraction

center in the N portion of Hustadvika.

6.23 When the waves meet the current, the seas turn even more

turbulent. This is particularly noticeable in the passage

between Kolbeinsflu and Bjyrnsund. Falling water causes an

outgoing current from Julsundet, and with wind and waves

from the NW, the seas become very turbulent.

6.23 Precipitous breakers have been reported from the entire area.

6.23 Shemshesten (62°58'N., 7°11'E.), 665m high, rises 8.75

miles NE of Bud. Shemshesten is not only the name of the

above peak, but is also the name of a range of mountains, with

two other summits. From N, this range resembles a large promontory with three rounded summits and a steep fall on the seaward side.
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 115

Pub. 182

6.24 Reinsfjellet (62°56'N., 7°56'E.), 12 miles SSE of

Kristiansund, is 994m high, and is surmounted by a television

mast.

6.24 Bremsneshatten, situated in the N part of Averoya 3 miles

SW of Kristiansund, is 130m high. It resembles a hat with a flat

crown.

6.24 Freikollen (63°03'N., 7°46'E.), 3.5 miles S of Kristiansund,

is a prominent summit, 629m high.

6.24 Kvernberget is a long light-colored mountain, 205m high,

with steep slopes on the NE and SW sides. It is situated in the

center of Nordlandet, 2 miles E of Kristiansund.

6.24 Magnillen (63°06'N., 8°05'E.), on the mainland 10 miles E

of Kristiansund, is 486m high. Although it is lower than the

surrounding mountains, it stands out owing to the steep fall on

its E side and three jagged peaks at the summit, recognizable at

a considerable distance.

6.24 There are three peaks on the island of Tustna, which are

220m, 856m, and 892m high, located, respectively, 8, miles

10.5 miles, and 11.25 miles ENE of Kristiansund.

6.24 Kristiansund has been reported to be a good radar target

from a distance of 26 miles.

6.24 Kvitholmen Light (63°01'N., 7°14'E.) is situated on an

island by the same name which lies 1.25 miles offshore, about

11 miles NE of Bud. A racon is located at the light tower. Part

of a former light tower stands close to the light as a daymark.

6.24 Hestskjer Light (63°05'N., 7°30'E.) is situated on the W

islet of the Hestskjer group, which lies 8 miles ENE of

Kvitholmen. A racon is located at the light tower which is a

square house built into a conical tower 20m in height.

6.24 Grip Light (63°14'N., 7°37'E.) is situated at the N end of the

Grip group on the S side of the seaward entrance to Gripholen.

A racon is located at the light tower, which is 44m in height

and prominent.

Approaches to Kristiansund

6.25 Hustadvika, the coastal waters between Buadjupet

and Kvitholmen, 11 miles NE, is encumbered by rocks, shoals,

and small islets. Indreleia leads through Hustadvika, at a

distance of about 3 miles from the shore.

6.25 An area of isolated shoal heads lies on the N side of Hustadvika from Karlmedhammaren to the vicinity of Kroppen

(63°03'N., 6°59'E.), 7 miles ENE. Kroppen, a rock with a depth

of 5m, breaks in bad weather and is marked close NW by a

lighted buoy.

6.25 Kolbeinsflu (62°58'N., 6°53'E.), 4.5 miles NNE of Bjornsund Light, has a least charted depth of 5m. It is the NW

extremity of the dangers fronting the mainland N of Bud and is

marked by a lighted buoy. Lyroddane Beacon, equipped with a

racon, is situated about 5 miles NE of Bjornsund Light.

6.25 Between Kolbeinsflu and Kvitholmen there are several

channels, but local knowledge is required in them.

6.25 Fuglen (63°03'N., 7°09'E.), a small black islet, lies about 3

miles WNW of Kvitholmen.

6.25 Foul ground extends E and SE of Fuglen to Stabbeflu, a

1.4m patch lying 1 mile ESE; Midtflu, a 4.2m patch lies 0.35

mile SSW of Stabbeflu.

6.25 Ekneskjerfluene, with least depths of 10m, lies 1.75 miles

SE of Fuglen.

6.25 Fugleleia leads from seaward, N of Fuglen, to join Indreleia

N of Kvitholmen Fugleleia. It is about 3 miles wide between

Fuglen and Follingen, an islet situated to the NE.

6.25 Orskjera is an extensive area of low-lying islets and rocks

which extends about 3 miles N from Follingen. They cannot be

seen at any great distance and are awash in high seas.

6.25 Freikollen, in line with Follingen bearing 097°, leads close S

of Spunset, a 21m patch, which lies 3 miles NNW of Fuglen.

6.25 Bjogna (63°03'N., 7°17'E.), a rock, awash, lies on the N side

of the inner end of Fugleleia, 2 miles NE Kvitholmen.

6.26 From a position about 5 miles WNW of Fuglen, steer

toward Magnillen (63°08'N., 8°05'E.), bearing 085°, which

leads N of Kroppen and the shoals in that vicinity.

6.26 When N of Kroppen, and Fuglen is in sight, steer in an ESE

direction to pass N of Fuglekrakken, a 4.4m patch lying 0.25

mile N of Fuglen. When clear of Fuglekrakken, steer to pass

about mid-way between Kvitholmen and Bjogna.

6.26 When approaching Fugleleia from NW at night, the white

sector of Kvitholmen Light leads E of Spunset and W of Snapane, a 6m patch, situated nearly 4 miles N of Fuglen.

6.26 When clear of Spunset and Snapane, the white sector of

Kraka Light (63°01'N., 7°18'E.), situated 1.75 miles ESE of

Kvitholmen, leads NE of Fuglekrakken and W of Follingsflu, a

3.8m patch situated 0.7 mile WSW of Follingen.

6.26 On reaching a position 2 miles NW of Kraka Light, course

may be altered ENE to join Indreleia.

6.26 Ramnegapet, 6 miles NE of Fugleleia, leads in from seaward

E of Orskjera to join Indreleia in the vicinity of Hestskjeret. It

is comparatively free from dangers and offers an easier approach than Fugleleia.

6.27 Stabben (63°08'N., 7°16'E.), a reef on the S side of

Ramnegapet, on the NE side of Orskjera, is awash. Jonstaren,

with a charted depth of 11m, lies 0.5 mile NE of Stabben, and

Grunnkampen, with a charted depth of 14m, lies in the fairway

1.5 miles ENE of Stabben.

6.27 The Ramnane group of islets, on the NE side of Ramnegapet,

are small black rocks which are not visible from any great

distance.

6.27 Sore Ramnen (63°08'N., 7°24'E.), 3.5 miles NW from

Hestskjeret, is precipitous on its W side but slopes to the E; it is

marked by two beacons.

6.27 Boggrunnstaren, a 5.4m patch, lies on the S side of Ramnegapet, 1.5 miles SE of Stabben.

6.27 Store Sortna (63°05'N., 7°24'E.), 6m high, lies 2.75 miles

WNW of Hestskjeret.

6.27 Store Sortna and Litle Sortna, 0.8 mile SE, in range lead

through the fairway of Ramnegapet, passing S of Grunnkampen and N of Jonstaren. 

6.27 After passing Sore Ramnen, course can be altered E through

Ramnefjorden until N of Hestskjeret, where the track to

Kristiansund joins the track leading E from Fugleleia.

6.27 The white sector of Hetskjer Light (63°05'N., 7°30'E.)

leads in from seaward N of Grunnkampen and SW of Sore

Ramnen, to within about 3 miles of the light, when course can

be altered E into Ramnefjorden.

6.28 Ramnefjorden leads from the vicinity of Hestskjeret,

8 miles ENE, into Kristiansundleia.

6.28 Stavenes Light (63°07'N., 7°40'E.) stands on Staveneset, the
116 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

NE extremity of Averoya, about 5 miles ENE of Hetskjer

Light.

6.28 On the seaward side of Ramnefjorden, a line of rocks and

islets extend from Sore Ramnen to Hilbaren (Hilbaane), 10

miles ENE. Shoals lie S of a line joining the two above points.

6.28 Midfjordsfallet, awash, lies 3.25 miles NNE of Hestskjer

Light. Indre Skjellingen, a 4.5m patch, lies 0.6 mile E of

Midfjordsfallet.

6.28 Helklakken (63°09'N., 7°38'E.), an 11m patch, lies in the

fairway, 5.25 miles NE of Hestskjer Light. Fausken, a 0.8m

patch, lies 1.25 miles NNE of Helklakken.

6.28 From the vicinity of Hestskjeret, a course shaped to pass SE

of Helklakken avoids all danger and leads to Kristiansundleia,

which forms part of the approach to Kristiansund.

6.28 Treflisleia leads into Ramnefjorden, about 5 miles NE of

Ramnegapet, and is not difficult access if Stavenes Light and

the beacon on Litle Skjelbreida (63°10'N., 7°10'E.), 5 miles

NW of Stavenes Light, can be identified.

6.28 Treflisa, marked by a beacon, is situated on the N side of the

fairway, about 1 mile NE of Litle Skjelbreida.

6.28 Gamle Jakob, a rock, awash, and Gardstaren, an 11m patch,

lie 0.9 mile and 2 miles SE, respectively, from the beacon on

Litle Skjelbreida.

6.28 Lontarane (63°11'N., 7°31'E.), with a least depth of 3.7m,

lies 1.5 miles NW of Treflisa. Other shoals lie 1.5 miles NNW

of Lontarane.

6.28 Sydskjellingen, above water, lies on foul ground 0.9 mile SE

of Treflisa.

6.28 From the vicinity of Lontarane, the white sector of Stavenes

Light, bearing between 126° and 131°, leads between the

beacons on Litle Skjelbreida and Treflisa, and N of Gardstaren.

6.29 Grip Light (63°14'N., 7°37'E.) is situated on the N

island of Grip, which is an extensive group of islets and rocks

from 5 to 9 miles NNW of Kristiansund. All the islands of the

group are small and low, and afford little protection from wind

and sea. They are not visible at any great distance.

6.29 Griptarane comprise shoal patches which lie in the approach

to Gripholen, 8 miles WNW of Grip Light.

6.29 Nordre Fausken (63°14'N., 7°33'E.), a 1m patch, lies 1.5

miles W of Grip Light; Ytre Langfallet, another 1m patch, lies

0.8 mile ESE of the light.

6.29 Lonnfallet, a 1.5m patch, lie s about 2 miles ESE of Ytre

Langfallet.

6.29 Hilbaren (Hilbaane) (63°12'N., 7°44'E.), with a charted

depth of 2m, is marked by a light. It lies 1.25 miles SE of

Lonnfallet.

6.29 Vestkleppen (63°18'N., 7°21'E.) is the shallowest part of

Griptarane and is usually marked by breakers. It lies 7.75 miles

NW of Grip Light.

6.29 Jorngrunna, a 24m patch, lies in the middle of Gripholen, 1.5

miles NNE of Grip Light.

6.29 Nordre Godtaren, with a least charted depth of 9m, lies in the

middle of the fairway, 1.5 miles NNE of Hilbaren.

6.29 Kjefallet (63°16'N., 7°40'E.), a 2m patch, lies on the NE

side of Gripholen, 3 miles NNE of Grip Light. Lontaren, an

11m patch, lies 0.35 mile S of Kjefallet.

6.29 Gasskjera, above water in places, lies 3 miles NE of Grip

Light. Gaseflua, with a charted depth of 10m, lies 0.6 mile SSE

of Gasskjera.

6.30 Gjeslingskjer Light (63°15'N., 7°48'E.), situated on

Gjeslingskjeret, stands 5 miles E of Grip Light. Islets and foul

water extend 0.6 mile SSW from the light.

6.30 When approaching from the W, the white sector of Grip

Light leads S of Griptarane to within 5 miles of the light.

6.30 When Hestskjer Light changes from white to red, course

should be altered into the white sector of Gjeslingskjer Light,

which leads N of the dangers off Grip.

6.30 From a position 1 mile NE of Grip Light, the white sector of

Ytre Langholmen Light (63°11'N., 7°52'E.) leads S of Nodre

Godtaren into Ytrefjorden.

6.30 When approaching from the N the white sector of Grip Light

leads between Griptarane and the dangers lying NW of Gjeslingskjer Light.

6.30 From the vicinity of Grip Light proceed as indicated above.

6.30 Pilotage.—There is a pilot boarding station 1 mile NNW of

Grip Light. 

6.30 Caution.—Heavy seas in the passage SW of Gripholen to

Ytrefjorden S of Smyla are created particularly by wind from

the NW. The waves will come straight in from the sea, turning

E, S of Smyla. With falling water, the current goes against the

waves and causes heavy and choppy sea. 

6.30 When the waves come from between NW-SW, a refraction

center will be created leeward of Griptarane. The conditions

become even worse when the tidal current toward the W is

combined with falling water. Under such conditions, precipitous breakers have been observed.

6.31 After proceeding from seaward through Gripholen,

vessels should pass SW in Indreleia, steering in the white

sector of Stavenes Light. Sondre Godtaren, with a charted

depth of 29m, lies within this light sector, about 0.8 mile S of

Nordre Godtaren.

6.31 When the white sector of Raudsandnes Light (63°04'N.,

7°41'E.), situated 2.75 miles S of Stavenes Light, comes ahead,

steer on that light and enter Bremsnesfjorden.

6.31 When approaching Bremsnesfjorden from the SW, the white

sector of Baltserneset Light, 1.5 miles SE of Stavenes Light,

leads through the entrance.

6.31 Bremsnesfjorden (63°06'N., 7°41'E.) is entered from N between Staveneset and Klubbeneset, 0.6 mile E. It is the principal entrance to Kristiansund.

6.31 Kverven (63°07'N., 7°40'E.), a 4m patch, lies 0.2 mile NW

of Stavenes Light on the W side of Bremsnesfjorden. A 2m

patch lies close off Klubbeneset on the E side of the fairway.

6.31 Bremsnesflua, a 4m patch, lies about 1 mile SE of Stavenes

Light, near the middle of the fairway.

6.32 Sorsundet (63°06'N., 7°44'E.) is entered between

Baltserneset, the SW extremity of Innlandet, and Smorvikneset, 0.3 mile N. It is not more than 91m wide between the

shoal depths on either side, and has a least depth of 13m in the

fairway.

6.32 A breakwater, marked at its outer end by a light, extends

91m N from Innlandet, 0.35 mile ENE of Baltserneset. A 3m

patch lies 183m WNW of the breakwater head.

6.32 A bridge spans Sorsundet close E of the breakwater; it has

vertical clearances of 38m in the center and 32m on the sides.

6.32 A rock, with a depth of 6.8m, lies on the S side of the

fairway 0.15 mile ENE of the breakwater head.
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 117

Pub. 182

6.32 Vessels entering Sorsundet from Bremsnesfjorden steer in

the white sector of the light on the breakwater. When in the

entrance of Sorsundet, steer on the light in the center of the

bridge bearing 061°, which leads through the sound.

6.33 Bolgsvaet (63°06'N., 7°44'E.) is entered from

Bremsnesforden S of Innlandet, and extends E to Talgsjoen.

6.33 Skjerveskjeret, marked by a light, lies 0.3 mile SE of Baltersneset, at the seaward edge of the foul ground which extends

0.2 mile S of Innlandet.

6.33 A 1m patch lies 160m NW of Skjerveskjeret; an isolated

7.9m patch lies the same distant SE.

6.33 Linflua (63°06'N., 7°44'E.), with a charted depth of 4m, lies

on the SE extremity of the foul ground, 0.25 mile E of Skjerveskjeret. Sjursvikgrunnen, a 7.5m patch, lies 0.4 mile ENE of

Linflua.

6.33 Bolgfallet, awash, lies near mid-channel, 0.8 mile S of

Linflua. A 4.2m patch lies 183m WSW of Bolgfallet and

Vestre Bolgfallet, a 5.2m patch, lies 91m farther WSW.

6.33 Kopparholmflua, awash, lies 0.25 mile S of Vestre Bolgfallet.

6.33 Kopparholmane, 3 small islets, lie on the S side of Bolgsvaet, 0.5 mile S of Linflua.

6.34 Vikaholmen Light (63°06'N., 7°46'E.) stands on the

S point of Vikaholmen, about 1.25 miles E of Baltersneset.

Vikaholmen is connected to the land to the N by a breakwater.

6.34 Vikaholmflua, a 1.6m patch, lies 0.15 mile W of Vikaholmen

Light. A 7.4m patch lies 0.4 mile SE of the light.

6.34 Anchorage may be taken on the E side of Vikaholmen, in

15m, sand, with patches of rocks.

6.34 Markussundet (63°06'N., 7°45'E.) lies between Innlandet,

on the W, and Nordlandet, on the E. Lights in line lead through

the fairway to the inner harbor of Kristiansund. Markussundet

it is deep and clear of dangers.

6.34 Austre Fugloygrunnen (63°06'N., 7°47'E.), on the S side of

Bolgsvaet, lies about 0.1 mile ENE of Fugloya. It has a least

charted depth of 2m. Vorpholmbaen, a 5m patch, lies about 0.1

mile SE of Austre Fugloygrunnen.

6.34 Vorpholmen lies in the entrance to Bolgvagen, about 0.1

mile S of Vorpholmbaen. A cable, with a vertical clearance of

30m, spans the narrow channel E of Vorpholmen.

6.34 Bolgvagen (63°05'N., 7°47'E.) is entered E of Vorpholmen.

Husoya forms its W side.

6.34 Close within the entrance, on the NE point of Husoya, there

are quays, totaling 110m in length, with depths of 13.6 to 3.3m

alongside.

6.35 Omsundet extends E about 3 miles, from a position S

of Vikaholmen Light, to its junction with Arsundfjorden. The

fairway is spanned with overhead cables about 1 mileand 1.25

miles E of Vikaholmen Light. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18m over a width of 30m in mid-channel, also spans

the strait.

6.35 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with mooring rings, for medium

and small vessels, is available in the SW part of Bolgvagen, in

16m, mud. Care should be taken to avoid the shoal bank which

fringes the S shore and a pipeline laid across the W part of the

bay.

6.35 A light is situated on the foul ground in the center of the

fairway, 0.7 mile E of the bridge. A beacon is situated on the

foul ground 160m ENE of the light. This area may be passed

on either side.

6.35 Omsundet is entered from Arsundfjorden N of Arholmen

(63°06'N., 7°53'E.), about 1 mile E of the bridge which spans

the fairway.

6.35 Kristiansund may be entered from the E through Norsundet,

which is spanned by a bridge with vertical clearance of 28m.

Kristiansund has a depth of 5.8m at LW.

6.35 Dalasundet extends ENE 1.75 miles from Norsundet and

enters Talgsjoen N of Kvitnes Light (63°08'N., 7°48'E.).

6.35 Tanker berths are situated in Dalasundet on NW side of

Norsundet.

6.35 A light stands on the NW edge of the spit which extends W

from a point that lies just over 1 mile ENE of the bridge which

spans Norsundet. A rocky bank, with a depth of 7.5m, lies on

the N side of the fairway 183m N of the light.

6.35 The white sector of Kvitnes Light, astern, leads NNW

toward Gripholen.

6.35 Talgsjoen is formed between Norlandet, on the SW side, and

the islets W of Tustna, on the NE side. It leads to Arsundfjorden, Freifjorden, and to Dalasundet.

6.35 Talgsjoen is deep and free of dangers; however, Talsgrunnane (63°10'N., 7°46'E.), a bank with a depth of 36m, lies

2 miles NNW of Kvitnes Light, and Klakkane, with a depth of

30m, lies 0.7 mile E of Talsgrunnane.

Kristiansund (63°07'N., 7°44'E.)

World Port Index No. 23100

6.36 During WWII, Kristiansund sustained heavy damage,

especially by a German bombardment in April of 1944. Completely rebuilt, it is now the home port for a large Norwegian

trawler fleet.

Kristiansund is situated on three small islands facing the

Norwegian Sea. Its harbor is protected by an inlet in the adjacent island of Frei and by the island of Averoy, and is bound on

the N by Kirkelandet and Gomalandet, on the S by Innlandet,

and on the E by Nordlandet.

6.36 The town of Kristiansund stands on all sides of the harbor.

Sorsundet

Port of Kristiansund HomePage

http://www.kristiansund-havn.no
118 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

Communications between the several parts are maintained by

ferries. When approached from seaward no houses can be seen

until close to the harbor entrance.

6.36 Winds—Weather.—The predominant wind in Kristiansund

is from the S at a mean speed of 6 knots. However, in the

months of June, July, and August, in the afternoons, the winds

shift to the NW and N at about 4 knots. During the months

December through March, there are an average of 2 days a

month with gale force winds of 34 knots or more.

6.36 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Kristiansund is from

about 1 to 2m. The currents in Sorsundet and Norsundet sometimes reach a velocity of 3 knots. 

6.36 The current in Sorsundet changes at HW and LW. The flow

is greatly influenced by the wind. In Norsundet, the current

occasionally changes with the tide, but is usually E.

6.36 Depths—Limitations.—There is about 900m of quayage

available for steamer traffic. There are 12 main berths, with

lengths of 80 to 175m and depths alongside of 4.9 to 11m.

There are three private berths for coastal tankers, with depths

of 5.7 to 7.6m alongside. The harbor has facilities for ferries

and ro-ro vessels.

6.36 The port is a main service base for the coastal exploration

and development of oil and gas fields. There are facilities for

mooring semi-submersible rigs.

6.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage to and from sea is available. Pilotage

should be ordered through the Safe Sea Net, or alternatively,

through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. Vessels should call

the Kristiansund pilot station on VHF channel 16, at least two

hours prior to arrival. If the station does not respond, the Floro

or Rogaland Coastal Radio Station will reply and relay

information to the pilot station. The pilot boards 1 mile NNW

of Grip Light; 24 hours notice is required.

6.36 Sea pilots are stationed at Kristiansund. They also act as

harbor pilots, however, harbor pilotage is not compulsory for

merchant ships.

6.36 Regulations.—Within the harbor limits the speed of a vessel

is to be no more than good seamanship and maneuverability

require.

6.36 Speed is to be reduced to prevent wash in Norsundet W of

Teistholmen; Markussundet, N of the cold store at Sjursvika;

Sorsundet, E of the breakwater; Holmasundet; and Overvagen.

6.36 Signals.—Berthing signals are shown from a signal mast

which stands on Storkaia. They consist of red, green, and white

flags by day and red, green, and white lights by night.

6.36 Anchorage.—There is limited anchorage for medium size

ships in the main port area, but there is ample space in the close

approaches to the harbor with well sheltered holding ground, in

depths of 13 to 49m.

6.37 In the vicinity of Kristiansund there are several fjords

are known collectively as Nordmorsfjordene. These is, fjords

lying in the N part of the district of More. They penetrate

inland to positions about 12 miles S and 35 miles SE and E of

the town.

6.37 The islands of Averoya (63°00'N., 7°30'E.), Frei, Tustna,

Stabben, and Ertvagoya, lie, in that order, from W to E and are

separated from the mainland by the outer fjords of Nordmorsfjordene.

One of Kristiansund’s Harbors

Kristainsund—Gomalandet

Signal Meaning

One white Berth No. 1

Two white Berth No. 2

Three white Berth No. 3

One red Berth No. 4

Two red Berth No. 5

Three red Berth No. 6

One green Berth No. 7

Two green Berth No. 8

Three green Berth No. 9

One red and one green Berth No. 10

One white and one red Berth No. 11

One white and one green Berth No. 12

Flashing green Anchor in the harbor

Flashing white Close to hailing distance
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 119

Pub. 182

6.37 Lauvoyfjorden (Lovofjorden) (63°00'N., 7°20'E.) lies on

the W side of Averoya, and is entered from seaward by passing

through the chain of islets which extend ENE from the vicinity

of Kraka Light.

6.37 There are several passages between the islets, all of them

narrow and requiring local knowledge.

6.37 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run strongly in the

entrance to Lauvoyfjorden, with reported rates of up to 4 knots

at half tide. Strong NW winds raise heavy seas during outgoing currents. In these circumstances, the entrance channels

are difficult to navigate.

6.37 Tovikholmen Light (62°59'N., 7°21'E.) is situated close off

the W extremity of Averoya. Trovikholmane lies in Lauvoyfjorden, 0.75 mile NNE of the light.

6.37 Lauvoyfjorden is practically free of dangers, with the exception of Trovikholmane and Hjertvikholmane, which lies about

1 mile farther NE.

6.37 Kornstadfjorden (62°57'N., 7°25'E.) is entered from Lauvoyfjorden SW of Tovikholmen Light, and leads 5 miles SE to

its junction with Kvernesfjorden, off the S extremity of Averoya.

6.37 Kvernesfjorden (62°57'N., 7°37'E.) trends NE from its junction with Kornstadfjorden for about 8 miles to the S end of

Bremsnesfjorden. It is free of dangers in the fairway. Bremsnesfjorden is about 7 miles long from its seaward entrance.

6.38 The S part of Bremsnesfjorden lies between Frei, on

the E side, and Averoya, on the W, and, apart from shoals

which are marked, is clear of dangers.

6.38 Bremsnesfjorden is entered from S between Lundenes

(63°00'N., 7°44'E.), the E extremity of Averoya, and Kvitneset,

the S extremity of Flatsetoy, 1 mile NE.

6.38 Gullsetholmen, a small islet, lies on the W side of the fjord

0.7 mile NNW of Lundenes.

6.38 Leitnes Light (63°02'N., 7°41'E.) stands on the W side of

the fjord, 1.75 miles NW of Lundenes. The white sector of this

light leads into Bremsnesfjorden.

6.38 Steer to pass E of Leitnes Light, and bring the light, astern,

which will lead N through the fjord and E of Raudsandnes

Light, situated 2.5 miles N.

6.38 An overhead cable, with vertical clearance of 39m, spans

Bremsnesfjorden close N of Leitnes Light.

6.38 Flatoya, Amundoya, Brattoya, Arholmen, and Tjuvholmen

(63°04'N., 7°42'E.) lie off the W coast of Frei, from 0.5 to 1

mile SE of Raudsandnes Light.

6.38 Freifjorden (63°03'N., 7°55'E.) is entered between Flatsetoy

and Bergsoya, 2 miles SE. It leads 7 miles NE. Freifjorden is

formed between Frei, on the W side, and Bergsoya, Aspoya,

and the NW part of the Tingvoll peninsula, on the E.

6.38 Freines Light (63°01'N., 7°49'E.) stands on the S extremity

of Frei, 0.75 mile E of Flatsetoy. Refsholmtaren, a 2.4m shoal

patch, lies 0.8 mile SSW from the light.

6.39 Steet (63°00'N., 7°48'E.), consisting of islets and

rocks, awash, lies 0.5 mile S of Revsholmtaren. Jaholmen lies

0.7 mile E, and an 8.8m rocky patch, lies 0.6 mile ENE,

respectively, from Steet.

6.39 Vessels may enter Freifjorden by steering in the white sector

of Freines Light, which leads between Revsholmtaren and

Revsholmen (63°01'N., 7°47'E.), a small islet 0.85 mile WSW

of Freines Light.

6.39 The white sector of Strandanes Light (62°59'N., 7°42'E.),

astern, leads SE of Revsholmtaren and N of Steet into Freifjorden. Once clear of the shoals, the fjord is almost entirely

clear of dangers in the fairway.

6.39 The white sector of Skarvbergnes Light (63°05'N., 7°58'E.)

leads NNE into Freifjorden.

6.39 Kvisvikholmane (63°03'N., 7°57'E.), among which are

Storholmen and Klubbholmen, lie up to 1 mile N of Aspoya on

the E side of Freidfjorden.

6.39 Arsundoya (63°06'N., 7°59'E.), situated close off the Tingvoll Peninsula and about 2 miles E of Frei, lies at the junction

of Freifjorden, Arsundfjorden, and Talgsjoen. Skarvbergnes

Light is situated on the SW extremity of Arsundoya.

Kristiansund Harbor
120 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

The Inner Fjords

6.40 The Tingvoll district occupies the greater part of a

peninsula, which has an average width of 4 miles and extends

30 miles NNW from the head of Sundalsfjorden. Tingvollfjorden and Sundalsfjorden lie on the W side of this peninsula,

and are reached from Kvernesfjorden and Freifjorden through

Gjemnessundet or Bergsoysundet and Bergsoyfjorden.

6.40 Gjemnessundet (62°58'N., 7°48'E.) is entered between

Krakholmen, which lies close off the SW extremity of

Bergsoya, and Ikkorneset, 1 mile WSW.

6.40 Seiholmane, situated on a shoal, awash, lies 0.4 mile WSW

of Krakholmen. Omolmane, on the W side of the fairway, lies

0.4 mile SSE of Seiholmane. A 7.3m rocky patch lies in the

fairway 0.7 mile ESE of Omolmane.

6.40 The Gjemnessund Bridge, with a vertical clearance of 42m

and a main span of 632m between two 108m high towers, extends SSW across Gjemnssundet from a position about 0.2

mile SE of Krakholmen Light (62°58.6'N., 7°46.8'E.).

6.40 Bergsoysundet is formed between Bergsoya, on the W, and

Aspoya, on the E.

6.40 Maloya, a small islet, is connected to the N extremity of

Bergsoya by a bridge.

6.40 Brusen (63°00'N., 7°52'E.) lies close NE of Maloya;

Skallen, a 7.3m patch, lies 0.4 mile NE of Brusen.

6.40 The tidal current in Bergsoysundet can be strong, especially

when N.

6.41 Bergsoyfjorden extends about 5 miles ENE from its

W entrance, at the junction with Gjemnessundet. Except for the

shoals, which are marked, the fjord is clear of dangers.

6.41 Bergsoyholmen (62°58'N., 7°53'E.) lies close offshore, 0.2

mile SE of the E extremity of Bergsoya. A shoal, awash, lies at

the extremity of the foul ground which extends 0.4 mile SW of

Bergsoyholmen.

6.41 Kvalvagholmen Light (62°59'N., 8°00'E.), situated at the

SE entrance point of Bergsoyfjorden, lies 3.5 miles SE of

Bergsholmen.

6.41 Vessels may enter Bergsoyfjorden from Gjemnessundet as

previously directed. When clear of that fairway, steer in the

white sector of Kvalvagholmen Light. When S of Bergsholmen, steer to pass about 0.3 mile N of that light.

6.41 Vessels entering Bergsoyfjorden from Bergsoysundet, when

clear of the SW extremity of Apsoya, steer in the white sector

of Kvalvagholmen Light. Then steer to pass N of the light, then

into Tingvollfjorden.

6.41 Batnfjorden (62°56'N., 7°45'E.) leads 5 miles SW from

Gjemnessundet and Bergsoyfjorden. The fjord is clear of dangers but there are no anchorages.

6.41 Batnfjordsoren, at the head of the fjord, is the administrative

center for the district. On the S side of the bay there is a quay,

10m long, with a depth of 3.1m alongside.

6.41 Tingvollfjorden is entered between Kvalvagholmen

(62°59'N., 8°00'E.) and Strupneset, 1.5 miles N, and extends

19 miles SE. Sundalsfjorden continues 5 miles farther SE. The

fjord is to a large extent clear of dangers and is not difficult to

navigate.

6.41 Ekremsholmane (63°00'N., 8°02'E.) lie up to 0.45 mile offshore, on the NE side of the fjord, 1.5 miles NNE of Kvalvagholmen.

6.41 Sognskjer Light is situated on the W side of the fjord, 4.75

miles SSE of Kvalvagholmen. The white sector of Sognskjer

Light leads through the N part of Tingvollfjorden.

6.41 Anchorage is available in Gagnat, 0.5 mile WNW of

Sognskjer Light, in depths of 35 to 45m, sand and clay, steeply

shelving. It is advisable to lay out hawsers to the shore.

6.41 A 1.2m patch lies in mid-channel, 0.75 mile SE of Sognskjer

Light. A 3.4m patch, marked by a beacon, lies 0.5 mile SSW of

the 1.2m patch.

6.41 The white sector of Sognskjer Light, astern, leads S in

Tingvollfjorden, W of the above dangers.

6.42 Tingvollvagen (62°54'N., 8°11'E.), an inlet on the E

side of the fjord 1.5 miles SSE of Sognskjer Light, affords

anchorage at its head, in 15m, clay.

6.42 Tingvoll, at the head of Tingvollvagen, is the administrative

center for the district. Near the church is a quay, 7m long, with

a depth of 4m alongside. There is also a quay near the ferry

berth at the head of the inlet; it is 25m long, with depths of 0.6

to 5m alongside.

6.42 Angvik (62°53'N., 8°06'E.) lies on the W side of the fjord, 2

miles SSW of Sognskjer Light. Anchorage may be taken off

Angvik, in 18 to 40m, clay. Southwest winds can raise a considerable sea in the bay, and it is advisable to lay out hawsers to

the shore.

The Gjemnessund Bridge
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 121

Pub. 182

6.42 Berths are situated at an iron ore and gravel works situated

on the W side of the fjord, 3 miles S of Angvik. There are

depths of 4 to 10.3m alongside the quays.

6.42 At Rausand, close S of the iron ore works, there is a quay,

12m long, with depths of 2.6 to 4.4m alongside.

6.43 Meloy Light (62°48'N., 8°18'E.) is situated on an

islet in the middle of Tingvollfjorden, 5 miles SE of Rausand.

The white sector of the light leads ESE from the vicinity of

Rausand.

6.43 Flaoya Light stands on the SW side of Flaoya, 5 miles ESE

of Meloy Light.

6.43 The fairway, either N or S of Meloy Light, is free of charted

dangers.

6.43 The white sector of Flaoya Light leads about 4 miles SE in

Tingvollfjorden from the vicinity of Meloy.

6.43 Oksendal (62°43'N., 8°26'E.) is situated at the head of a

cove entered about 1 mile SSW of Flaoya. Good anchorage is

available off the public jetty, in clay, where the depths change

less rapidly than elsewhere.

6.43 Sundalsfjorden leads 5 miles SSE from Flaoya to Sundalsora.

6.43 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 46m, spans

Sundalsfjorden, about 2 miles SE of Flaoya.

6.43 The white sector of Flaoya Light, astern, leads ESE in Sundalsfjorden, but patches of 7.3 and 9.1m, lie within this sector

about 0.3 mile ESE of Flaoya.

6.43 Sundalsora (62°41'N., 8°33'E.) (World Port Index No.

23105) lies on the E side of Sundalsfjorden, near its head.

There is a quay at the aluminum works, 307m long, with

depths of 9.4 to 10m alongside. Vessels up to 27,000 tons have

used this quay.

6.43 Krokshavn (62°41'N., 8°32'E.), situated on the W shore of

Sundalsfjorden WSW of Sundalsora, has two bunkering quays,

each 9m long, with 2.8 to 10m alongside. A quay at the power

station is 55m long, with depths of 6.2 to 18m alongside.

6.44 From Arsundfjorden (63°07'N., 8°00'E.), Halsefjorden and Trangsfjorden, which lie E of the Tingvoll Peninsula, lead SSE and give access to a group of fjords which include Bofjorden, Ulvunfjorden, Stangvikfjorden, Todalsfjorden, Surnadalsfjorden, and Hamnesfjorden.

6.44 Arsundfjorden is entered between Arsundoya and Krakoya,

1.75 miles N. The fjord leads 5 miles E from its junction with

Talgsjoen and Freifjorden, S of Tustna.

6.44 Arsundbaen (63°07'N., 8°02'E.) lies on the S side of the

fjord, about 1.2 miles ENE of Arsundoya. Rocks, awash, lie

close W.

6.44 Hestholmen, with foul ground W and NW of it, lies 0.3 mile

offshore, 1.5 miles E of Arsundbaen. A 1.2m patch lies about

0.6 mile ESE.

6.44 Volongoya (63°08'N., 8°09'E.) lies on the S side of Arsundfjorden, 2 miles ENE of Hestholmen. Langskjera, on which a

beacon stands, lies 0.2 mile N of Volongoya; Hattholmen lies

about 0.1 mile off its SW point.

6.44 The white sector of Haukomin Light (63°09'N., 8°16'E.)

leads through Arsundfjorden to the entrance of Halsefjorden

and into Korsnesfjorden.

6.45 Halsefjorden (63°04'N., 8°12'E.) is entered between

Furuholmane, 0.4 mile SE of Hestholmen, and Volongoya. It

leads 9 miles SSE from Arsundfjorden into Trangsfjorden.

6.45 Furunes Light stands on Furuneset, near the W entrance to

Halsefjorden. The white sector of this light leads from Korsnesfjorden into Halsefjorden, keeping SE of Volongoya.

6.45 Anchorage is available off Vikan, on the W shore, about 1

mile SSE of Furuneset, in 9 to 22m.

6.45 Saksnes Light (63°02'N., 8°14'E.), situated on the E side of

the fjord 5.5 miles SSE of Furuneset, bearing between 147°

and 157° leads through the N part of Halsefjorden; pass W of

this light and bring it astern bearing between 312° and 320°,

which leads into Trangsfjorden.

6.45 An ammunition dump is charted with its center situated

about 0.9 mile SSE of Saksnes Light.

6.45 Bofjorden is entered on the E side of Halsefjorden, 3 miles

SE of Saksnes Light, and leads 2 miles E. Asskardfjorden

continues 3 miles farther E.

6.45 Bosundet, the narrow channel leading from Bofjorden into

Asskardfjorden, has a least depth of 6.7m. It is spanned by a

drawbridge with a vertical clearance of 2m when closed.

6.45 Staknes Light (63°01'N., 8°21'E.) is situated on the SE side

of Bofjorden, about 0.8 mile within the entrance. Numerous

dangers lie on the N side of the fairway, N and NE of the light.

6.45 Trangsfjorden continues 2 miles SE from the entrance to

Bofjorden, to an exit between Aksneset (62°57'N., 8°20'E.)

and Batvikneset, a promontory, 1.25 miles ENE. A light is

situated on Aksneset; a cable with a vertical clearance of 35m

spans Trangsfjorden, close N of Aksneset.

6.46 Trangsfjorden exits into a basin from which several

fjords open; they are discussed in order from S to N.

6.46 Ulvunfjorden (62°54'N., 8°22'E.) is entered between

Aksneset and Nesoya, 2.75 miles SSE. For the most part the

fjord is clear of dangers and is easy to navigate.

6.46 The white sector of the light on Aksneset, bearing astern,

leads into the N part of Ulvunfjorden, keeping E of the dangers

which lie SSE of the light.

6.46 Meistingsetvagen is entered on the S side of Ulvunfjorden,

about 4 miles SSE of Akneset. It extends about 2 miles SW.

6.46 Ulvund lies at the head of Ulvundfjorden. It is connected to

the national road network.

6.46 Stangvikfjorden is entered between Nesoya and Soloyet

(62°57'N., 8°26'E.), 2 miles NNE.

6.46 A bank, which dries in places and is marked by a beacon,

extends 0.2 mile offshore, 0.8 mile S of Soloyet.

6.46 Rokkem Light (62°53'N., 8°30'E.), situated on the S side of

Stangvikfjorden, 3.75 miles within its entrance, is a good mark

for entering the fjord. This light bearing between 133° and

151°, ahead, leads into the fjord, clear of the dangers. Pass on

the N side of the light, then bring it astern bearing between

272° and 282°, which will lead into Todalsfjorden.

6.46 Todalsfjord is entered E of Flesa (62°52'N., 8°35'E.), a low

islet lying close off a headland, 2.5 miles ESE of Rokkem

Light, and extends 4.5 miles SSE.

6.46 Todalsfjorden ices over every year; in severe winters the ice

extends into Stangvikfjorden.

6.46 A good anchorage is available in Svinvik, on the E side of

the fjord 1.75 miles SSE of Flesa, in 17 to 19m, sand. The anchorage is exposed to mountain squalls.

6.46 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 65m, spans
122 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

Todalsfjorden close S of Svinvik.

6.46 Todalsfjorden Light (62°50'N., 8°38'E.) stands on the W

shore 2.25 miles SSE of Flesa. The white sector of the light

leads through the N part of Todalsfjorden. With the light

bearing between 271° and 285°, astern, transit may be made

toward the head of the bay.

6.46 A good anchorage is available on the W side of the head of

the fjord, in 16m, clay, close N of Todalen.

6.47 Surnadalsfjorden extends 4.5 miles E from its entrance between Torvikneset (62°57'N., 8°26'E.) and Kjergroneset, 0.7 mile NW.

6.47 There are two quays, each 10m long, located at Arnes, a

village on the N side of the fjord, situated 0.8 mile NE of

Torvikneset. There are depths of 7.5 to 8.5m and 3 to 7.5m,

respectively, alongside the quays.

6.47 Hamnesfjorden is entered W of Kjergroneset (62°58'N.,

8°28'E.) and leads 5 miles NE. Vargoya, a small islet, lies 0.25

mile W of Kjergroneset A shoal, awash, lies off the SW point

of the islet. Hamnesfjorden affords shelter for small vessels.

6.47 Korsnesfjorden is entered from Arsundfjorden N of Volongoya (63°08'N., 8°09'E.) and leads 5 miles E between Tunsta

and Stabben on the N and the mainland on the S, into Arasvikfjorden.

6.47 Haukomkin Light (63°09'N., 8°16'E.) is situated on the S

shore of Korsnesfjorden, about 3 miles E of Volongoya.

6.47 The white sector of Haukomkin Light leads from Arsundfjorden, N of Volongoya,toward the entrance to Skalvikfjorden.

Overhead cable, with a veretical clearance of 40m, span Korsnesfjorden, close E of Haukomkin Light.

6.47 Skalvikfjorden, a relatively shallow fjord, extends 4.5 miles

SSE from its entrance, close SW of Haukomkin Light.

6.47 One mile within the entrance of the fjord, an islet lies in the

center of the fjord. An overhead cable spans the fjord at the

islet, with a vertical clearance of 26m over the W channel and

30m over the E channel.

6.48 Solemsundet (63°12'N., 8°11'E.) leads from the N

side of Korsnesfjorden between Tustna and Stabben, 5.5 miles

NNW to Edoyfjorden. It has been reported to be navigable by

vessels of 90m length, 13m beam and 6m draft.

6.48 Halsneset Light, situated on the SE extremity of Tustna, and

other lights in Solemsundet provide marks for vessels in

transit. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18m, spans the

channel 3 miles within its S entrance. An overhead cable, with

a vertical clearance of 20m, spans the channel close N of the

bridge.

6.48 Imarsundet (63°12'N., 8°18'E.), a shallow passage, is

entered from S between Oykan, the SE point of Stabben, and

the SW point of Ertvagoya and leads NNW between these two

islands for a distance of 4.5 miles, then 2 miles farther NNW

into Edoyfjorden.

6.48 The fairway of Imarsundet, off the N point of Stabben, is

spanned by an overhead cable with a vertical clearance of 20m.

6.48 Arasvikfjorden (63°09'N., 8°25'E.) is entered between

Takneset (63°09'N., 8°20'E.), and the SW extremity of Ertvagoya, 0.9 mile NNW, and leads 7 miles ENE to Aroya, an islet

lying on the W side of the entrance to Auresundet.

6.48 The fjord is, for the most part, clear of dangers and is steepto up to the shore.

6.48 Risholmen Light (63°09'N., 8°32'E.) stands on an islet 5

miles E of Takneset. A white sector of the light leads through

the W part of Arasvikfjorden, clear of the dangers.

6.48 A white sector of Risholmen Light, bearing astern, leads

through the E part of Arasvikfjorden, keeping NW of Aroya

(63°11'N., 8°36'E.), and into Auresundet. Another white sector

leads S of Aroya and into Vinjefjorden.

6.48 Valsoyfjorden is entered between Otneset (63°08'N.,

8°31'E.) and Stokkneset, 1.75 miles NE, and leads 4.5 miles

SE.

6.48 Valsoya and Kjoloya lie on the S side of Korsnesfjorden, in

the entrance to Valsoyfjorden. Although the outer part of Valsoyfjorden is foul, it is well marked. Channels leading E and W

of Valsoya each have a least depth of 3.8m. A bridge, with a

vertical clearance of 24m, spans the E channel.

6.48 Valsoyfjorden is often frozen in winter.

6.48 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 28m, spans

Valsoyfjorden 2.25 miles within its entrance.

6.48 Vessels should not enter Valsoyfjorden without local

knowledge.

6.49 Auresundet is entered at the E end of Arasvikfjorden

E of Rumpenneset (63°11'N., 8°35'E.), the SE extremity of

Ertvagoya, and leads 7 miles NNW between Ertvagoya,

Rottoya ,and Ruoya on the W, and the mainland, on the E, into

Gjerdesvika. It has been reported to be navigable by vessels up

to 90m in length, 13m beam, and 6m draft.

6.49 The tidal current in Auresundet is usually flowing N and

strongest during the rising tide. There may, however, be a S

flow during the falling tide, which is considered to be a sign of

bad weather at sea. The flow can be strong in the narrows at the

N end of Auresundet.

6.49 A light stands on the W extremity of Vikaneset (63°12'N.,

8°36'E.) just over 1 mile NNE of Rumpenneset. A white sector

of the light leads W of Aroya and E of a spit with 1m depth 0.5

mile NNW of Aroya. Another white sector of the light leads E

of Aroya and N into Auresundet.

6.49 There is anchorage, in 22m, in a cove W of the light on Vikaneset.

6.49 A cable spans Auresundet between Rottoya and the mainland. It has a vertical clearance of 30m.

6.49 The white sector of the light on Vikaneset, bearing astern,

leads farther N into Auresundet. A shoal patch with a depth of

2.7m, lies within these bearings close NE of the N point of

Rottoya. The light bearing 151° leads through the narrows

between Rottoya and the mainland.

6.49 Sveholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°29'E.) is situated on the SW

extremity of Sveholmen. The white sector of this light leads

NE of Ruoya. When NE of Ruoya steer a mid-channel course

and pass SW of Sveholmen Light and then into Gjerdesvika.

Transit of Auresundet should not be attempted without local

knowledge.

6.49 Vinjefjorden continues E from Arasvikfjorden, and leads 10

miles E from Aroya to Vinjeora, at its head.

6.49 Hovedehammaren Light (63°12'N., 8°51'E.) is situated on

the S side of the fjord, 6.75 miles within its entrance. 

6.49 A white sector of the light ahead, leads through the W part of

Vinjefjorden; another white sector, bearing astern, leads

through the E part of the fjord to its head.

6.49 Anchorage is available WNW of Vinjeora, in 16 to 20m,
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 123

Pub. 182

sand and clay.

6.49 Caution.—A bridge, with a maximum clearance of 15m, has

been constructed spanning the N part of Auresundet.

The Outer Coast—Kristiansund to Trondheim

6.50 From Grip Light (63°14'N., 7°37'E.), at the seaward

end of Gripholen, the islands and rocks off the coast extend

about 75 miles NE to the island of Halten. 

6.50 The Halten Islands are situated on the W side of the entrance

to Frohavet, the primary approach channel from N to Trondheim, a distance of about 75 miles, through the various channels.

6.50 The three large islands of Smola, Hitra, and Froya front this

stretch of coast. Smola, the farthest S, is low-lying in comparison with the mainland and other islands in its vicinity. It

rises to a height of about 67m at the SE end. Hitra, situated NE,

is the highest, about 305m high, and the largest of the three.

Froya, the farthest N, lies close N of Hitra. 

6.50 Numerous small islands, islets, and dangers extend seaward

to a distance of about 8 miles from Smola and up to 12 miles N

and more than 30 miles.

6.50 The tidal currents usually set ENE with the rising tide and

WSW with the falling tide, following the trend of the coast.

6.50 Caution.—A maritime area in the Storneset area, marked

with transponders close E, is positioned about 65 miles E of the

mainland and Skalmen Light, NE of Froya, and SW of Froya

Bank.

6.51 Morkedalstua (63°30'N., 8°31'E.), in the SW part of

Hitra, and Havikfjellet, 5 miles NE, are both conspicuous.

6.51 When approaching the coast, at a distance of 5 or 10 miles N

of Halten, the land may be seen as far as Tonnelsfjell, 372m

high, which rises about 24 miles SSE of Halten. 

6.51 To the N, Oksbasheia, 228m high, is visible at a distance of

32 miles ENE of Halten. 

6.51 Store Kopperen (63°48'N., 8°44'E.), 476m high, rises about

3 miles ENE of Tonnelsfjell. It resembles a haystack. In clear

weather, Store Kopperen may be seen from 40 miles distant.

6.51 On Linesoya, an island 14.5 miles SE of Halten, Linesfjell

(64°01'N., 9°54'E.), rises to a height of 229m. Linesfjell is

separated from a similar height by a steep cleft with a small

round knot in it.

6.51 Almeningskollen, situated on an island about 16 miles E of

Halten, can be seen from a distance of 15 to 20 miles. It

appears rounded from W or N, and is easily identified. Tronningsfjell, 297m high, rises about 5 miles SE of Almeningskollen, can be seen from 15 to 17 miles seaward. It is marked

by a conspicuous slanting road.

6.52 Reimane (63°31'N., 7°50'E.) lies in the S part of a

large area of low light-colored rocks which cannot be distinguished from afar. Storbaen lies on the NE edge of this

group.

6.52 Small islets, surrounded by above and below water rocks,

extend about 12 miles N from the W extremity of Froya, then

continue about 35 miles NE terminating in the Halten Islands. 

6.52 Below-water rocks and dangers extend from 6 to 8 miles

outside this line of islets, and in general the islets are not easily

identified. The entire area should be given a good berth as it is

dangerous. The 200m curve lies within a short distance of the

outer dangers and soundings afford little warning.

6.52 The most important lights along this coast, from S to N are.

Skalmen Light (63°28'N., 7°46'E.), situated on a small islet

3.5 miles off the NW coast of Smola and equipped with a

racon; Haugjegla Light (63°'N., 7°58'E.), situated 4 miles N

of Smola; Sletringen Light (63°40'N., 8°16'E.), situated close

off the W extremity of Froya, about 11 miles NE of Haugjegla

Light; and Sula Light (63°51'N., 8°28'E.), situated on the N

part of Store Sula, well inside the dangers, about 12 miles NNE

of Sletringen Light.

6.52 Farther N are Vingleia Light (63°55'N., 8°41'E.), situated 7

miles NE of Sula Light; Finnvaer Light (64°04'N., 9°07'E.),

situated in an islet group about 22 miles NE of Sula Light; and

Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.), situated on W side of the entrance to Frohavet about 10 miles NE of Finnvaer Light. A

racon is located at Halten Light.

6.52 There are numerous lights and navigational aids charted

along this section of the coast.

6.53 Gripholen is the principal S approach from seaward to

Trondheimsleia, but it may also be entered through Ramsoyfjorden, which is entered about 24 miles NNE of Grip Light.

6.53 Ramsoyfjorden is formed between Smola, on the W side,

and Hitra, on the E. It leads about 8 miles SSE toward a

junction with Trondheimsleia.

6.53 A submarine gas pipeline extends from Heidrun (65°19.5N.,

7°19.1E.), a platform described in paragraph 7.1, to Tjeldbergodden (63°24.7'N., 8°39.9E.) and enters Ramsoyfjorden

about 0.5 miles W of Saebuodden Light (63°29.4N., 8°14.3E.).

The pipeline then extends to a position 3 miles NNW of Rognannes Light (63°23'N., 8°39’E.), where it extends SSE to a

position about 0.2 mile SW of Stangnesflua. 

6.53 Steinsoy, close off the NE coast of Smola, 5.75 miles SSE of

Haugjegla Light, and Saebuoy (63°30'N., 8°15'E.), 3 miles

ENE are the N entrance points of Ramsoyfjorden. A light is

situated on the SW end of Saebuoy.

6.53 Tides—Currents.—In Ramsoyfjorden, the tidal currents set

S with the rising tide and N with the falling tide. The N current

is always stronger, and when it is opposed by N winds at

springs, considerable turbulence occurs in the NW entrance to

the fjord.

6.53 Kvaloy Light (63°24.6'N., 7°50.8'E.) stands on the W end of

Kvaloya, close E of Maholmen. 

6.53 Dyrnes Light (63°26'N., 7°51'E.) stands at the N entrance

point of Dyrnesvagen, a cove on the NW side of Smola; the

white sector of the light leads towards the cove from the

vicinity of Store Kvaloya. 

6.53 Dyrnesvagen is protected from NW by a breakwater that

extends 160m SW from Kalvoya, about 0.15 mile NW of

Dyrnes Light. The breakwater has several alongside berths on

its NE side; the berths have lengths of 12 to 40m, with alongside depths of 3 to 7m. 

6.53 Sorgrunnen (63°33'N., 8°00'E.) and Nordgrunnen, patches

of 20 and 32m, lie in the NW approach to Ramsoyfjorden, 1.25

and 1.75 miles, respectively, NE of Haugjegla Light.

6.53 Gjesingboerne, awash in places, lies 2 miles NW of Steinsoy,

and Mefjordbaen, a drying patch, lies 1.25 miles ENE of that

island.

6.53 Austre Reiflua (63°27'N., 8°13'E.), a 6m patch, lies in the
124 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

fairway about 2 miles SE of Steinsoy. Ramsoybaen, drying and

marked by a beacon, lies on the E side of the fairway 2.75

miles SSE of Austre Reiflua. Fosflua, a 6m patch, lies 1.5

miles SSE of Ramsoybaen. Ramsoygalten, marked by a beacon, lies 1.5 miles SE of Fosflua. Austklakkane, 10m patches,

lies 1.25 miles ENE of Ramsoygalten.

6.53 Shoal water extends about 2 miles into Ramsoyfjorden from

the E coast of Smola, and 1.75 miles W from Hitra.

6.54 Vessels may approach Ramsoyfjorden from N or NW

by steering in the white sector of the light on the SW side of

Saebuoy. Steer to a position 1.5 miles NW of the light and

enter the white sector of Remmingskjer Light (63°22'N.,

8°17'E.), which course leads into Ramsoyfjorden, between the

dangers off each coast of the fjord. 

6.54 When the vessel is abeam of Fosflua, with the light about 2

miles distant, steer SE to pass about midway between Remmingskjer Light and Ramsoygalten and enter Trondheimsleia,

steering as required to destination.

6.54 Froyfjorden (63°40'N., 8°40'E.) lies 9 miles N of the W

entrance to Ramsoyfjorden. The whole W side of Hitra from

Saebuoy to the entrance of Froyfjorden is fronted by islets

which extend up to 4.5 miles offshore.

6.54 Froyfjorden extends about 16 miles ENE from its W entrance, S of Sletringen Light, and leads into Frohavet. 

6.54 The W half of the fjord is relatively free from danger, but the

E half is narrow and encumbered with many dangers in or near

the fairway. Local knowledge is necessary to transit this fjord.

6.54 Regulations.—A speed limit of 5 knots is in force along the

coastal waters of Ulvoya (63°40'N., 8°04'E.) and Fjellvaeroy,

Lille Helsoy (63°40'N., 8°04'E.), Store Helsoya, Kvaenvaer,

and Kvernvaer. This speed limit applies to all vessels except

those engaged in operations for the Norwegian armed forces or

craft engaged in emergency police, custom, fire fighting, ambulance, or search and rescue missions. 

6.55 Kya (63°46'N., 8°19'E.), marked by a light, is a small

islet situated 6 miles N of Sletringen Light.

6.55 Foul ground extends 2.5 miles SW from Kya, and the same

distance NNW. Synstflua, a 9m patch, lies 2.75 miles WSW

and Oreklakken, with a least charted depth of 13m, lies 3.25

miles WNW, respectively, from Kya. They are the farthest W

of these dangers. 

6.55 Sula Light (63°51'N., 8°27'E.) is located about 6 miles NE

of Kya, at the S end of Froan.

6.55 Froan, the waters lying between Sula and Halten, 30 miles

NE, are foul and large areas are not navigable. A few channels

lead between the islets and reefs, but local knowledge is

essential.

6.55 Vingleia, entered 7.5 miles NNE of Sula, affords the only

passage for large vessels, in the vicinity, from the sea to Frohavet, but as the entrance is difficult to distinguish, use of the

channel is not recommended unless a local mariner is embarked.

6.56 Frohavet, a deep arm of the sea, is entered between

Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.) and Almenningen, an island

situated 16 miles E. The channel leads SSW to Krakvagfjorden, and is formed between Froan and Froya on the W side

and the islands lying off the mainland on the E. 

6.56 From a position 5 miles E of Halten, the distance to Trondheim is 75 miles.

6.56 Vessels bound for Trondheim and entering Frohavet from the

offing W of Halten should keep at least 5 miles N of Halten

Light. When the light bears not less than 236°, course may be

altered S, steering to pass from 4 to 5 miles E of the light and

then in about mid-channel.

6.56 Vessels proceeding from the N should approach Halten Light

on a bearing of about 183°, so as to pass well W of the dangers

off the mainland; they should then pass E of the light and

through mid-channel as directed above.

6.56 Tides—Currents.—Currents in Frohavet flow S on the rising tide and N on the falling tide. These directions are opposite

those at Halten and farther seaward. During the rising tide, the

current runs S to join the flood current in Trondheimsleia.

6.56 The tidal current often runs strongly, notably on the W side

of Frohavet.

6.56 When a S or SW gale is imminent, there is usually a W flow

in Frohavet. In winter, an E and N flow is considered a sure

indication of an E gale.

6.56 An unusually strong flood current is considered to be an

indication of W or NW gales. An unusually low tide is an

indication of N winds.

6.56 The W side of Frohavet is comparatively free from dangers,

but the E side is encumbered by numerous fringing islands and

shoals.

6.56 Borklakken, a shoal with a least charted depth of 8.5m, lies

on the E side of the entrance about 6 miles NNW of Almeningskollen (64°11'N., 10°01'E.), the summit of Almenningen,

and Ranen, with a least charted depth of 4.9m lies about 5

miles NW of the summit.

6.56 Ravnfaldet, awash, 3.25 miles W of the S point of Almenningen, is the farthest W of the dangers off that island.

6.56 Flessa (64°06'N., 9°54'E.) is the largest and farthest N of a

group of islets situated about 5 miles SW of Almenningen. The

islets and shoal water extend 3.5 miles farther SW.

6.56 Borklakken and Ranen are considered the most dangerous of

the shoals W of Almenningen.

6.57 Melsteinen (63°58'N., 9°35'E.), comprised of a group

of low flat islets and rocks lying between 8 and 15 miles SW of

Flessa, is separated from that island group by a deep wide

channel.

6.57 In the Melsteinen group, the tidal currents are S on the rising

tide and N on the falling tide. The currents are strong and considerable overfalls occur.

6.57 To the SSW of Melsteinen is the Tarva Group of islets and

rocks. which lie from 7 to 12 miles distant from the light in

Melsteinen. Husoya is the largest islet in the group. A light is

situated on a small islet off the N extremity of Husoya.

6.57 Krakvagfjorden (63°40'N., 9°15'E.) connects Frohavet and

Trondheimsleia, and leads on the E side of Ulvoya and Fjellvaeroya, and W of Krakvagoya.

6.57 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Flesa, in the center of

Krakvagfjorden, the incoming current sets S during the rising

tide, continuing so as to pass on either side of Sore Leksa and

Nordre Leksa, and join the E flood current in Trondheimsleia.

The outgoing currents set in the opposite directions. 

6.58 Gronholmen Light (63°41'N., 9°09'E.) stands on
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 125

Pub. 182

Gronholmen, 9 miles SW of Husoya, in a position about 1 mile

off the E coast of Ulvoya.

6.58 Tarnet, above water in places, lies on the E side of the entrance to Krakvagfjorden, about 5 miles ENE of Gronholmen

Light. Ugsteinskjerane, with a least charted depth of 4.6m, lies

2.25 miles SW and an 18.3m patch lies 2 miles WSW,

respectively, from Tarnet.

6.58 Flesa Light (63°39'N., 9°14'E.) is situated on the W side of

Krakvagfjorden, 3 miles SE of Gronholmen Light. A racon is

located at the light tower which stands on Flesa Islet. 

6.58 The dangers off Fjellvaeroya lie W of a line joining these

two lights. A patch, with a depth of 20m, is charted 0.45 mile N

of Flesa Light. A pilot boarding station is located 0.75 mile NE

of the light.

6.58 Krakvagoya, 31m high, is situated 2.25 miles E of Flesa

Light. Kommersoyflua, a 7.3m patch, lies 0.6 mile SSE.

6.58 A vessel bound for Trondheim should pass in mid-channel E

of Flesa Light and then round the SW end of Krakvagoya at a

distance of about 1 mile. 

6.58 Course should then be altered to pass about midway between

Nordre Leksa, 3 miles SSE of Krakvagoya, and Smellingflua,

awash, 3 miles NE of Nodre Leksa. The normal route into

Trondheimsleia leads E of Sore Leksa.

6.58 The white sector of Rognan Light (63°34'N., 9°17'E.) leads

from Krakvagfjorden, W of Ugsteinskjerane, and E of Sliskjertaren and Sliskjeret, which lie just over 2 miles and 1.25 miles,

respectively, NNW of the light. 

6.58 When clear of Sliskjeret, alter course to pass W of Rognan

Light and W of Storaflua, a 1m patch lying 1.3 miles SSE of

the light, then into Trondheimsleia, altering course toward the

ENE to Trondheim or WSW toward Kristiansund.

The Main Route—Kristiansund to Trondheim

6.59 The main route from Kristiansund to Trondheim leads

through Ytrefjorden, Edoyfjorden, and Trondheimsleia, passing S of Smola, Hitra, Sore Leksa, and Nordre Leksa to

Agdeneset, which is situated at the entrance to Trondheimsfjorden.

6.59 A route leading seaward of the Froan Archipelago, NE of

Smola, branches NW through Ramsoyfjorden, between Smola

and Hitra.

6.59 A route leading N through Krakvagfjorden and Frohavet,

branches N between Hitra and Sore Leksa.

6.59 Ytrefjorden, Edoyfjorden, and the greater part of Trondheimsleia form part of Indreleia, the N continuation of which,

through Grandevika, is approached NNE of Nordre Leksa.

6.59 Ytrefjorden, from its junction with Gripholen, N of Ytre

Langholmen Light (63°11'N., 7°52'E.), leads 7 miles ENE

into Edoyfjorden. Ytrefjorden is deep and in mid-channel,

clear of dangers, presents no navigational difficulty.

6.59 Baeflua (63°14'N., 7°52'E.), a 3.5m patch, lies 2.25 miles

NNE of Ytre Langholmen Light. Kutmannsflua, a 6m patch,

lies 3 miles ENE of Baeflua. Depths of 1m, 6m, and 3m lie,

respectively, 1 mile, 1.5 miles and 2.5 miles, ENE of Baeflua.

6.59 Edoyfjorden is entered from Ytrefjorden and leads ENE into

Trondheimsleia. The channel is deep and free from dangers in

the fairway; from abreast Ytre Langholmen Light, vessels

should steer a mid-channel course, passing about 1 mile SE of

Tyrhaugh Light.

6.59 Tyrhaug Light (63°19'N., 8°14'E.) is situated close off the

NE end of Edoya, on the N side of Edoyfjorden, about 12 miles

NE of Ytre Langholmen Light.

6.59 Trondheimsleia is considered to extend from Tyrhaug Light

to Beian Light and Agdenes Light, or to the mouth of Trondheimsfjorden, a distance of about 45 miles ENE; the channel,

for the most part, is free from sunken dangers. It can be navigated by the largest vessels.

6.59 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Trondheimsleia

swt E with the rising tide and W with the falling tide. At the

narrows, about 25 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light, they run with

considerable velocity.

6.59 Gjerdesvika leads 7 miles E from the junction of Edoyfjorden and Trondheimsleia.

6.59 Tidal currents flow to the E on the rising tide and W on the

ebb. The flow can be strong in the W entrance.

6.60 Svartskjeret (63°18'N., 8°18'E.) lies near the center

of the E entrance to Gjerdesvika, 2 miles SE of Tyrhaug Light.

It is marked by a beacon. A chain of islets extends ENE from

Svartskjeret to Grisvagoya, about 2 miles distant.

6.60 Gjerdesvika is entered between Svartskjeret and Omoyflua,

awash, 0.8 mile S.

6.60 Steinholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°20'E.) is situated on the S

side of Gjerdesvika, just over 1 mile SE of Svartskjeret. The

white sector of this light bearing between 078° and 112° leads

from Edoyfjorden into Gjerdesvika.

6.60 Charted depths of 5, 9, 12 and 11m lie in the white sector

above, and are situated 0.35 mile S, 0.5 mile SSW, 0.9 mile SW

and 1.25 miles SW, respectively, from the beacon on

Svartskjeret.

6.60 When within 0.75 mile of Steinholmen Light, steer to pass N

of the light, then steer ENE on a mid-channel course.

6.60 Auresundet, previously described in paragraph 6.49, may be

entered from Gjerdesvika by steering in the white sector of

Sveholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°29'E.). Sveholmen Light is

situated about 4 miles ESE of Steinholmen Light.

6.60 Torsetsundet is formed between Skarsoya and the mainland

on the S and extends 4.75 miles ENE. It is entered from Gjerdesvika, S of Alfartangen, and terminates at its junction with

Arvagfjorden and Dromnessundet.

6.60 Alfartangen (63°19'N., 8°34'E.), the SW extremity of Skarsoya, lies 3 miles NE of Sveholmen Light. A 2.1m patch lies

0.5 mile WSW of Alfartangen.

6.60 Torsetsundet is narrowest off Tua, 1.25 miles E of Alfartangen. The least depth in the fairway is 7.5m.

6.60 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 16m, spans Torsetsundet at Tua.

6.61 Glomstadholmen Light (63°19'N., 8°38'E.) is situated on the S side of the fairway, 0.7 mile ENE of the bridge.

The white sector of the light leads through the W part of

Torsetsundet, N of foul ground which lies close E of Tua.

6.61 Glomstadholmen Light bearing between 246° and 250°,

astern, leads through the E part of Torsetsundet. A charted

depth of 11m lies within this white sector, about 1 mile ENE

from the light.

6.61 Lilleoya Light (63°20'N., 8°44'E.) stands on the N point of

an island, Lilleoya, at the E end of Torsetsundet. A 5.5m patch
126 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

lies 183m NNW and Russen, a drying patch, lies about 0.1

mile N. Storoya, an island, lies 0.2 mile NNW from the light.

6.61 Three routes lead NE or E from the E end of Torsetsundet, as

follows:

1. A route W of Storoya.

2. The channel E between Russen and Lilleoya Light.

3. The channel S of Lilleoya Light.

6.61 Arvagfjorden is the continuation of Torsetsundet, leading 3.5

miles E from Lilleoya and is entered S of Hellandneset, a

promontory standing 0.8 mile ENE of Lilleoya.

6.61 Arvag lies at the head of the fjord.

6.61 Dromnessundet leads 4 miles NNW along the E side of

Skarsoya into Trondheimsleia. It is foul in places, but well

marked.

6.61 There is usually a N flow at all stages of the tide; a S flow

occurs only during strong NW winds.

6.61 Espenes Light (63°21'N., 8°43'E.) stands on a point on the E

side of Dromnessundet, 0.75 mile NW of Lilleoya Light.

Rognannes Light is situated on the W side of the channel, 2.5

miles NNW of Espenes Light.

6.61 Vessels should enter Dromnessundet by passing E of Storoya

in the white sector of Espenes Light. When N of Storoya, alter

course to the W, then steer to pass W of the light and bring it

astern bearing between 173° and 187°, which course leads E of

a point 0.75 mile N of the light.

6.61 Rognannes Light (63°23'N., 8°39'E.), bearing between 313°

and 316°, ahead, leads farther N through Dromnessundet, passing between dangers which lie off either coast.

6.61 The white sectors of Rognannes Light, astern, offer three

alternative routes farther N into Trondheimsleia, depending on

the destination.

6.61 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 15m, crosses Dromnessundet at Ulvnestangen, about 0.7 mile NNW of Espenes

Light.

6.62 Remmingskjer Light (63°22'N., 8°17'E.) is situated

3.5 miles NNE of Tyrhaug Light at the junction of Trondheimsleia and Ramsoyfjorden.

6.62 Klakksbroren Light (63°21'N., 8°25'E.) is on the S side of

Trondheimsleia, 5.5 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light.

6.62 A line of above-water rocks and shoals extends from

Kvitholmen, 2.75 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light, NE to Klakksbroren Light. Friskjeret, marked by a beacon, lies 0.8 mile NE

of the light.

6.62 Vessels proceeding E through Trondheimsleia steer with the

white sector of Tyrhaug Light, astern, which leads N of

Klakksbroren Light. Austklakkane, 6.5 miles NE of the light,

falls within the sector.

6.62 When reaching a position S of Austklakkane (63°23'N.,

8°24'E.), vessels should steer E, keeping a mid-channel course. 

6.62 The channel is broad and free from dangers in the fairway,

though a number of rocks lie close under the land on either

side. Terningen Light, bearing about 070° ahead, may be

steered for, which course will lead clear of the dangers.

6.62 Terningen Light (63°30'N., 9°03'E.) stands on the S side of

Store Terningen, about 19 miles E of Klakksbroren Light.

6.62 Hevnefjorden is entered on the S side of Trondheimsleia, in a

position 1.5 miles SSE of Terningen Light and leads 133 miles

S. Astfjorden extends nearly 9 miles E, 4 miles within the

entrance; Snildfjorden extends 8 miles E, 8 miles within the

entrance.

6.62 Hevnefjorden is, to a large extent, deep and clear of dangers.

6.62 Anchorage is available at the head of Hevnefjorden, in 23 to

28m, sand and clay, but is not recommended in N winds to

which the bay is exposed.

6.63 To pass through the narrows situated close E of

Terningen Light, vessels steering for the light, from W, should

alter course when within about 1.5 miles; the fairway then

leads S of the light and between Josnoya, on the N, and

Hevnskjelova (63°29'N., 9°08'E.), on the S. These islands are

nearly steep-to, but attention must be paid to the strength of the

tidal currents.

6.63 Between Terningen Light and the entrance to Trondheimsfjorden, the distance is about 20 miles. The channel is entered

by vessels proceeding from Frohavet and Kjrakvagfjorden, E

of Nordre Leskka, about 10 miles ENE of the light.

6.63 Garten (63°39'N., 9°32'E.), an island 72m high, lies on the

N side of Trondheimsleia, 4 miles ENE of Nordre Leksa.

Smellingflua, awash and marked by a light, lies about 0.8 mile

SW of Garten.

6.63 Vessels after passing Terningen steer a mid-channel course

between the mainland and the islands to the N. After passing

Smellingflua, the mainland coast should not be approached

within 0.25 mile as it is foul, and the dangers W of Agdenes

Light should be given a good berth. The light should be

rounded at a distance of 0.75 mile.

6.63 Stornafjorden extends about 6 miles NE from the E end of

Trondheimsleia, at the entrance to Trondheimsfjorden. It terminates in two inlets which are frozen over in severe winters.

There is considerable traffic in the fjord during the herring

fishing season.

Trondheimsfjorden

6.64 Trondheimsfjorden is entered E of Agdeneset

(63°39'N., 9°46'E.), and, with its branches, leads SE and NE

for a total distance of 70 miles to Steinkjer, which is situated 52

miles ENE of Agdeneset.

6.64 Trondheim lies 24 miles from Agdeneset.

6.64 Ice.—The outer part of Trondheimsfjorden is ice-free all

year round and Skarnsundet is normally ice-free. 

6.64 Beitstadfjorden is frozen over during January, February, and

March in some years, and some of the other branch fjords may

be frozen over at times.

6.64 Tides—Currents.—A normal tidal current runs in Trondheimsfjorden. Off Agdeneset and W of Tautra, the maximum

rate is 1 knot, and the currents are reported to run strongly in

Skarnsundet and in the entrance to Borgenfjorden and in

Beitstadsundet. Elsewhere the rate does not exceed 0.5 knot.

6.64 Pilotage.—Trondheim has a pilot office, which has a pilot

boat station at Hetvika. A pilot boat station has been established off Flesa Light. Pilots for ports in Trondheimsfjorden

can be obtained at Kristiansund.

6.64 Caution.—Gunnery firing practice takes place, in an area

which includes the outer part of Trondheimsfjorden, within 3.5

miles of Agdeneset. For further information on gunnery firing

areas, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic

Ocean.

6.64 An ammunition dumping ground is situated in Trondheims-
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 127

Pub. 182

fjorden and is centered about 2 miles SSE of Agdeneset.

6.65 From Agdeneset, Trondheimsfjorden trends about 12

miles SSE to Rodberg (63°29'N., 10°00'E.). A light is situated

on the mole at Rodberg.

6.65 Selvbukta (63°37'N., 9°43'E.), a cove on the W side of the

fjord, 1.5 miles S of Agdeneset, affords anchorage to mediumsized vessels, in 13 to 28m. The cove dries within 183m of its

head. Larger vessels may anchor, in 37m, sand, 0.2 to 0.25 mile

offshore, in the vicinity of a cove 2.5 miles S of Selvbukta.

This anchorage is exposed, particularly in N and S winds.

6.65 A light is situated on Gjetneset, a promontory situated 2.75

miles S of Rodberg.

6.65 Vessels may transit this part of Trondheimsfjorden by steering a mid-channel course to a position off Rodberg, which

leads clear of danger. 

6.65 Orkedalsfjorden and Gaulosen comprise a branch of Trondheimsfjorden which is entered between Gjetneset and Froskjeret (63°25'N., 10°07'E.), 4 miles ESE. 

6.65 A light is situated near the end of a spit extending 0.2 mile

NW from Froskjeret.

6.65 The E part of the entrance to Orkedalsfjorden and Gaulosen

forms part of the harbor area of Trondheim.

6.65 The white sector of the light at Rodberg, bearing astern,

leads E of Gjetneset to the mouth of Orkedalsfjorden.

6.65 Orkedalsfjorden is entered W of a point 5.5 miles S of

Gjetneset. The fjord is deep except at its head, where drying

banks lie at the mouth of the river flowing into it.

6.66 Thamshamn (Orkanger) (63°19'N., 9°53'E.) (World

Port Index No. 23095) is part of the harbor area named

Orkdalsora. It extends 1.5 miles along the SE side of the fjord

near its head where the town of Orkanger is located. Information on berthing facilities is given in the table titled

Berth Limitations..

6.66 It is reported that vessels up to 200m in length can be

handled. 

6.66 Anchorage is available, in 9 to 28m, mud, N of the berths at

Orkanger.

6.66 Gaulosen is entered between Lundsneset (63°20'N.,

10°02'E.) and Vevikneset, 1.5 miles NE. It extends 4.5 miles

SE. The E part forms part of the harbor area of Trondheim.

6.66 Borsa is situated on the S shore of Gaulosen 1.75 miles SSE

of Lundsneset. A quay, 15m long, with depths of 6.7 to 12m

alongside, is situated 1.25 miles E of the church at Borsa. 

6.66 Anchorage, in 22 to 30m, clay, steeply shelving, is available

about 1 mile SE of the quay.

6.66 Buvika (63°18'N., 10°11'E.) is situated at the head of Gaulosen, 3.25 miles ESE of Borsa. A narrow dredged channel,

with a least depth of 6.5m, leads into a basin at the mill. A quay

on the W side of the basin is 103m long, with 8.5m alongside;a

quay on the E side is 65m long, with 3 to 4m alongside.

6.66 Munkholmen Light (63°27'N., 10°23'E.) is situated on the

island of Munkholmen at Trondheim Road, off the city of

Trondheim.

6.66 Trondheim Road is a nearly unobstructed basin affording anchorage to a large number of vessels. The limits of the harbor

area are as charted.

6.66 The roadstead is open to the NW, N, and NE, which are the

directions of prevailing winds, and a considerable sea is raised

by these winds at times.

6.66 Vessels may approach Trondheim Road by giving the light at

Rodberg a berth of about 1 mile. They should then proceed E in

mid-channel until Munkholmen Light bears about 113°, when

course may be altered S into the roadstead, passing W of

Munkholmen.

6.66 Holmgrunnane, a shoal which extends about 0.8 mile NNE

from Munkholmen, is marked by a light on Tua, near its N

extremity. Depths of 1.5m are charted on Holmgrunnane.

6.66 Caution.—Shallower depths than charted may be encountered between Munkholmen Light and the light on Tua.

Trondheim (63°26'N., 10°24'E.)

World Port Index No. 23090

6.67 Trondheim is a coastal natural harbor, but the main

port facilities are sheltered by breakwaters which divide the

harbor into several protected basins. The Nidelva flows into

Trondheimsfjorden here and is crossed by several bridges. 

6.67 The city is the junction for both land and sea traffic between

S and N Norway, and with rail service to Sweden.

6.67 Winds—Weather.—The predominant winds in Trondheim

are from the S throughout the year; however, during the months

of April through September, the afternoon winds will shift to

the NW and N. The average winds are about 6 knots, with

some 13 days of the year when gale force winds of 34 knots or

more occur. Gales are rare from May through August.

6.67 The harbor is always ice-free, and almost always free from

fog.

6.67 Tides—Currents.—The mean tidal range is 2m and the

spring range is 2.7m.

6.67 The ebb current from Nidelva sets out fairly strong, occasionally attaining a maximum velocity of 5 to 6 knots during

the thawing season. 

6.67 Depths—Limitations.—Several berths are available at the

Berth Limitations

Quay Length Depth

Thamshamn

No. 1 95m 10m

No. 2 70m 8m

No. 3 96m 7m

Orkanger

No. 1 48m 5m

No. 2 80m 12m

No. 3 23m 10m

Port of Trondheim HomePage

http://www.tih.no
128 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

port.

6.67 In addition, there is more than 1,500m of quayage for coastal

vessels and fishing craft.

6.67 Tanks and other installations with alongside berths are situated about 1 mile SW of Munkholmen. The five tanker berths

range in length from 61 to 198m. The alongside depths range

from 5.5 to 12m. There are facilities for container, ro-ro, and

cruise vessels. 

6.67 Vessels of up to 65,000 dwt, 132m in length, and 11.3m draft

can be handled at the port.

6.67 Aspect.—The cathedral situated 1.5 miles SSE of Munkholmen Light has a green roof and a tall conspicuous green

spire. Stiftsgarden, a large wooden house 0.25 mile N of the

cathedral, is conspicuous.

6.67 Pilotage.—A pilot station has been established off Flesa

Light in position 63°39'N, 9°15'E.

6.67 Harbor pilotage is compulsory for foreign vessels arriving,

departing, or shifting berths. Pilotage should be ordered

through the Safe Sea Net, or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot

booking center can be used. They normally embark on the

landward side of Munkholmen, or, in bad weather, off the

appropriate harbor entrance. The pilot for Krakvagfjorden

boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. Trondheim also

provides pilotage for Stjordal and Orkanger. 

6.67 A pilot station, with State Pilots, who do outbound transit

and coastal pilotage, is established at the public pilot office at

Trondheim on Pier 2.

6.67 Vessels approaching from the S should contact the pilot

when about 10 miles from Grip Light. The pilot station monitors on VHF channel 16.

6.67 The arrival message should be sent 72 hours prior to arrival

via Rogaland Radio and also 24 hours prior to arrival via Kristiansund Radio. Any significant change in the 24 hours ETA

must be advised to the Pilots. 

6.67 In addition, tankers radio the agent “Petroleum Trondheim”

at least 72 hours prior to arrival via Rogaland Radio giving

ETA at Grip in GMT and advising all requirements and other

information pertinent to the turn-around of the vessel. Confirm

the ETA via Kristiansund Radio 12 hours before arrival at Grip.

6.67 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in Trondheim RoadTrondheim

Berth Length Depth

Pier 1 275m 8m

Pier 2 940m 9m

Strandveikaia 230m 9m

Kullkranpiren Coal Pier 610m 11m

Transittkaia 210m 9m

Ila Grain Pier 877m 11m

Ytre Haven 489m 9m
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 129

Pub. 182

stead, in 22 to 42m, fine sand and mud, about 1 mile SW of

Munkholmen Light. There is also anchorage 0.5 mile SSE of

Munkholmen, in 34m, 0.5 mile SE.

6.68 The main part of Trondheimsfjord, with its continuations, extends about 45 miles NE from Trondheim. It is irregular in shape and varies greatly in width. 

6.68 The fjord is deep and navigable throughout the year. The SE

shore is indented by several large bays and toward its head is

less rugged than in the vicinity of Trondheim.

6.68 Storegrunnen (63°30'N., 10°26'E.), a 7.3m patch, lies near

the middle of Trondheimsfjorden, 2.75 miles NNW of the light

on Tua. Indregrunnen and Treungsgrunnen, two 14.6m patches,

lie 1.75 and 2.5 miles, respectively, NE of Storegrund.

6.68 Strindfjorden is the water area on the SE side of Trondheimsfjorden, and is entered between Ostmarktangen

(63°27'N., 10°27'E.) and Tautra, an island situated about 8

miles NNE of the point. From its entrance, the fjord trends

about 6 miles E to Stjordalsfjorden, on the SE side, and Asenfjorden, on the NE side. The fjord is free from dangers in its

middle part.

6.68 Saksvikskjer, above water, lies 0.6 mile offshore, 3.75 miles

ESE of Ostmarktangen.

6.68 A conspicuous tower, with a restaurant near the top, stands

about 2 miles S of Ostmarktangen Light. A mast stands close E

of the tower.

6.68 Litlegrunnen (63°28'N., 10°46'E.), a 6.7m patch, lies in the

E part of Strindfjorden, 4.75 miles ENE of Saksvikskjer.

Fiskvikgrunnen, a 12.8m patch about 2 miles N of Litlegrunnen, lies 0.3 mile offshore.

6.68 Stjordalsfjorden is entered between Haugberget (63°26'N.,

10°41'E.), a point 6.25 miles ESE of Ostmarktangen, and

Skjervauran, 4 miles NE.

6.68 Hommelvik (63°25'N., 10°48'E.) (World Port Index No.

23080) stands at the head of a small bay of the same name,

which is entered SE of Rota Light. There are two quays at the

head of the bay up to 165m long, with depths from 5.2 to 11m

alongside. Pilotage should be ordered through the Safe Sea

Net, or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot booking center can be

used. The pilot boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The

port monitors VHF channels 9 and 16. 

6.68 Anchorage may be taken, in 25 to 35m, sand, on the W side

of Hommelvik, near its head.

6.69 Muruvik (63°26'N., 10°51'E.) (World Port Index No.

23075), 2 miles NE of Hommelvik, lies at the head of a small

bay between two drying coves. There are two berths. The

export quay has depths of 5 to 6.5m alongside; the import quay

has depths of 7.5 to 9.5m alongside. Pilotage should be ordered

through the Safe Sea Net, or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot

booking center can be used. The port monitors VHF channel 9.

6.69 There is anchorage near the entrance to the bay, in 22 to

30m, clay. A submarine cable lies across the bay’s entrance.

6.69 In a cove close E of Muruvik, an oil transit installation has a

quay 80m long, with a depth of 11.5m alongside. Vessels berth

either side.

6.69 The town of Stjordalshalsen, lies 2.5 miles NE of Muruvik,

at the head of Stjordalsfjorden.

6.69 Asenfjorden is entered between Vaberget (63°31'N.,

10°46'E.) and Slaegga, 3 miles WNW. From its entrance on the

NE side of Strindfjorden, Asenfjorden trends about 8 miles

ENE.

6.69 Steinviksholm, close offshore 2 miles NE of Vaberget, is the

site of the ruins of a monastery. Anchorage for medium-size

vessels may be taken, in 20 to 30m, clay, close E of Steinviksholm.

6.69 Storgrunnen, an 11m patch, lies 0.8 mile NNE of Steinviksholm. Storholmen and Smaskjera, which are partly awash,

lie 0.5 to 1 mile farther NNE.

6.69 Skarvholmane and Furuholmen, with foul ground close NE,

lie in the entrance to the E arm of Asenfjorden, from 1.25 to

1.75 miles ENE of Steinviksholm.

6.69 Saltoya (63°33'N., 10°54'E.) lies in the S central part of the

E arm, 0.35 mile SSE of Furuholmen. A light stands on its W

end. The white sector of the light on Saltoya leads clear of

dangers into the E arm of Asenfjorden.

6.69 Langstein (63°33'N., 10°54'E.) is situated in a cove on the S

shore, 73m SE of Saltoya. A quay, 36m long, with depths of 6

to 7.2m, is situated at the W entrance point of the cove.

6.69 Korsnesodden Light (63°35'N., 10°50'E.) is situated on the

N side of Asenfjorden, 5.25 miles NE of Slaegga. The white

sector of the light leads into the fjord, clear of the entrance

points.

6.69 Lofjorden is entered between a point 1.5 miles ENE of Korsnesodden Light and a point 0.3 mile NE. Vessels can anchor

anywhere in the fjord, clay, clear of the submarine cables.

6.70 Ambornes Light (63°34'N., 10°26'E.) is situated on

the W side of Trondheimsfjorden, 4.5 miles W of the S extremity of Tautra. From Ambornes Light, the NW coast of Trondheimsfjorden trends 18 miles NE to the S entrance of Norviksundet. This coast is free of off-lying dangers.

6.70 On the SE side of Trondheimsfjorden, foul ground extends

0.4 mile SSW from Tautra, with a depth of 1.5m charted near

the edge of the foul area. An 18m depth is charted 0.7 mile

WSW of the SW end of Tautra.

6.70 Tautra Light (63°35'N., 10°37'E.) stands on the NW side of

Tautra. A 1m patch lies 0.3 mile NE of the light; patches with

depths of 12.8m, lie 0.35 mile W and 0.75 mile SW, from the

light. The E side of Tautra is joined to the mainland by a causeway.

6.70 Fanes Light, situated on the SE side of Trondheimsfjorden,

stands on a point about 6 miles NE of Tautra Light. Vessels can

find anchorage SE of the light, in 20m.

6.70 Flagrunnen, with depths of 6.5 to 7m, lies 0.5 mile NE of

Fanes Light. Nordrunnane, a group of shoal patches, lies up to

1.5 miles offshore, 2.25 miles NE of the light.

6.70 Vesterholmen (63°43'N., 11°00'E.), a promontory, lies

about 8 miles NE of Fanes Light.

6.71 Head of Trondheimsfjorden.—At its head, Trondheimsfjorden opens into a basin; and Ytteroy, an island, lies in

this basin. Skarnsundet leads from the NW side of the basin

into Beitstadfjorden.

6.71 Sandsora Light (63°45'N., 11°03'E.) is situated on the SE

extremity of Ytteroy, 2.25 miles NNE of Vesterholmen.

6.71 The dangers off the SE side of Ytteroy lie W of a line drawn

from Sandsora Light, to a point on the island, 5 miles NE.

6.71 Hokstad, on the NE side of a bay 4.75 miles NE of Sandsora

Light, has a quay, 17m long, with depths of 4.4 to 7.8m along-
130 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 

Pub. 182

side.

6.71 Hestoyflua (63°43'N., 11°04'E.), marked by a light, lies

about 2 miles SSE of Sandsora Light. South of this danger are

patches with depths of 8 and 8.5m.

6.71 Hestoya, an island, lies 1.5 miles ENE of Hestoyflua. Submarine cables extend from the island in a SSE direction to a

point of land. A 9.5m patch and a 1m patch lie 0.4 mile SSW

and 0.8 mile SSE, respectively, from the S extremity of Hestoya.

6.71 Fiborgtangen (63°43'N., 11°09'E.), situated 1 mile SSE of

Hestoya, is a peninsula consisting of a former, island and

reclaimed land. The N face is 141m long with 10.4m alongside, while the E face is 216m long, with 6.4m alongside.

6.71 Levangerbukta is entered between Langneset, a point 4.25

miles ENE of Hestoya, and Borgsoen 1.25 miles farther ENE.

6.71 Levanger (63°45'N., 11°18'E.) (World Port Index No.

23060) is an ice-free harbor situated at the head of Levangerbukta. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 100 grt. Pilotage

should be ordered through the Safe Sea Net, or alternatively,

the Kvitsoy Pilot booking center can be used. The pilot boards

in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The port monitors VHF

channels 12, 14 and 16.

6.71 The controlling depth is 4.2m. The berths are 16 to 81m long

and have depths of 3 to 6m alongside.

6.71 Vessels arriving without a preallocated berth are required to

anchor in Levangerbukta, in depths of 8 to 24m. A submarine

cable extends about 0.3 mile NNE into the W part of the bay,

from a position on shore close S of Langneset.

6.72 Verdal Havn (63°47'N., 11°27'E.) (World Port Index

No. 23058) is built on reclaimed land situated 3 miles ENE of

Borgsoen. The basin is enclosed by breakwaters and is 212m

by 272m, with a dredged depth of 10m.

6.72 The harbor can be approached in the white sector of the light

situated on the outer end of the N breakwater.

6.72 Fjordgrunnskjeret (63°48'N., 11°19'E.), awash, lies 2 miles

E of the E extremity of Ytteroy, in the middle of Trondheimsfjorden. 

6.72 Fjordgrunntaren, a 0.3m patch, and Skallen a 0.7m patch, lie

0.25 mile NE and 0.6 mile ENE, respectively, from Fjordgrunnskjeret.

6.72 Norviksundet is entered from S between the SW extremity of

Ytteroy and Rodberget, 1.25 miles W, and leads N between the

island and the mainland. It is clear of dangers in the fairway.

6.72 Saltvikhamn Light (63°47'N., 11°00'E.) is situated on the

W side of Norviksundet, 2 miles N of Rodberget. The white

sector of this light leads E of Rodberget into the fairway. Pass

E of the light and bring it astern bearing between 210° and

229° which will lead clear of the dangers and NNE to the S

entrance of Skarnsundet.

6.73 Skarnsundet is entered from S between

Brasethammeren (63°50'N., 11°04'E.), a point about 4 miles

NNE of Salt-vikhamn Light, and Vangsholmen, a point 0.8

mile E. It is formed between Inderoy on the E and the mainland

on the W. The fairway leads 2.75 miles N to the S end of

Beitstadfjorden.

6.73 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 45m, crosses Skarnsundet.

6.73 Though narrow, Skarnsundet has a deep channel free of dangers; however, some ice usually appears at the beginning of the

year, but it seldom obstructs the fairway.

6.73 The tidal currents in Skarnsundet are strong, reaching a

maximum velocity at about half tide.

6.73 Vennesodden Light (63°53'N., 11°03'E.) stands on a lowlying point, on the W side of the N entrance to Skarnsundet.

6.73 A good anchorage is available in Venneshamn, a cove

located close SW of Vennesodden Light, in 20 to 40m, sand.

6.73 Beitstadfjorden and Steinkjerfjorden together form a landlocked basin in which all known dangers lie within about 0.6

mile offshore. On the N side of the junction of the two fjords,

Beistadsundet trends about 7 miles NNW.

6.73 Giplingoya (63°54'N., 11°01'E.), a small island, lies on the

SW side of Beitstadfjorden, 1.5 miles NW of Vennesodden

Light. A 5m patch lies about 0.3 mile SE of the island.

6.73 A good anchorage is available between Giplingoya and the

shore, in depths of 12 to 20m, sand and shingle.

6.73 Verrasundet is entered from the W extremity of Beitstadfjorden, about 2 miles NW of Giplingoya. Foul ground, with a

charted depth of 5m at its outer end, extends 0.4 mile N from

the E entrance point of Verrasundet.

6.73 Verrasundet extends about 11 miles WSW from its entrance

and is narrow about 8 miles within its entrance. A submarine

cable is laid close within its entrance. An overhead cable, with

a vertical clearance of 45m, crosses the channel 2.25 miles

within the entrance; another overhead cable, with a vertical

clearance of 47m, crosses at the narrows.

6.74 Hooya (63°54'N., 11°05'E.), on the E side of the

entrance to Beitstadfjorden, lies 1.25 miles NE of Vennesodden

Light. A 7.3m patch lies close N of the island, with a 15m

patch lying 0.5 miles farther N.

6.74 A 2m patch lies at the end of a shoal spit extending NNE

from a point lying 1.5 miles NE of Hooya.

6.74 Kirknestangen Light (63°55'N., 11°12'E.) stands on a point

3 miles NE of Hooya.

6.74 Kirknesvagen, a cove on the E side of the light, affords good

anchorage, in depths of 12 to 30m, sand and clay.

6.74 Stornesora Light (63°59'N., 11°18'E.) stands on a point at

the NE end of Beitstadfjorden, about 4 miles NNE of Kirknestangen Light.

6.74 Follafoss (63°59'N., 11°07'E.), situated on the NW side of

Beitstadfjorden, about 5 miles NNW of Kirknestangen Light,

stands on the W bank of the Folla River.

6.74 A wood pulp factory situated close SW of the river mouth

has an export quay, 116m long, with depths of 8 to 9.8m alongside.

6.74 Beistadsundet is entered on the N side of the junction of

Beitstadfjorden and Steinkjerfjorden. The sound is narrow but

free from dangers in the fairway.

6.74 Tidal currents in Beitstadsundet can be strong, and are

strongest at half tide.

6.74 Beitstadsundet is entered between Rambergholmen

(64°02'N., 11°14'E.) and a point 0.25 mile E. 

6.74 A submarine cable is laid across the entrance and an overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 45m, spans the sound

close N of Rambergholmen.

6.74 The white sector of the light on Rambergholmen, bearing

astern, leads N to the anchorage off Malm, 2.5 miles distant N.

6.74 Malm (64°04'N., 11°14'E.) (World Port Index No. 23053) is
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 131

Pub. 182

situated on the W side of Beitstadsundet and is the administrative center for the district.

6.74 There is a jetty at Malm, with a berth at its head, 11m long,

with depths of 10 to 11.5m, and a berth on each side, 38m long,

with depths of 3 to 10m. It is reported that vessels up to 35,000

dwt can be berthed at the jetty.

6.74 Pilotage is not compulsory for merchant vessels, but pilotage

and berthing are usually undertaken by the sea pilot.

6.74 Vessels can anchor off Malm, in 23m, clay, about 0.2 mile E

of the church. 

6.74 A 2m patch lies about 183m off the S shore opposite the

jetty.

6.74 Beitstadsundet continues about 5 miles ENE from Malm.

6.75 Steinkjerfjorden extends 6 miles E from Beitstadfjorden from its entrance between Stornesora Light and the E

entrance to Beitstadsundet, 3 miles NNW.

6.75 Ytre Logrunnen (64°01'N., 11°24'E.), a 2.5m patch, lies 0.5

mile off the N shore, 3.5 miles NE of Stornesora Light. A 5m

patch lies 0.5 mile farther E.

6.75 Eggebogtangen Light stands on the S part of a peninsula in

the E part of Steinkjerfjorden, 5.5 miles ENE of Stornesora

Light. Rodskjeret, above-water and marked by a beacon, lies

0.5 mile S of Eggebogtangen Light.

6.75 In the approach to Steinkjer, at the head of the fjord, the

white sector of Eggebogtangen Light, ahead, leads between the

dangers off either shore.

6.75 Steinkjer may be approached by passing either N or S of

Rodskjeret, however, the N side is preferred. Rodskjeret should

be given a wide berth.

6.76 Steinkjer (64°01'N., 11°30'E.) (World Port Index No.

23055) lies at the head of Steinkjerfjorden; the harbor is bound

on the W by a N-S line approximately 2 miles W of Eggebogtangen Light and on the E by the highway and railroad bridges

over the rivers.

6.76 A noticeable current flows among the quays. There are six

quays, with alongside depths of 3.3 to 9.5m.

6.76 The harbor is frozen up from January to March in some

years.

6.76 The depth in the approach to Steinkjer is 9.1m. The quays

are up to 452m in length, with depths of up to 8.2m alongside. 

6.76 There is a private wharf, 100m long, with alongside depths

of 9.1m. The port will accommodate a vessel with a mean draft

of 7.6m.

6.76 Harbor pilotage is not compulsory for merchant vessels, but

harbor pilots are available if required. Pilotage should be

ordered through the Safe Sea Net, or alternatively, the Kvitsoy

Pilot booking center can be used. The pilot boards in position

63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The port monitors VHF channels 12, 14

and 16.

6.76 Vessels can anchor, in 25 to 30m, clay, on a line joining

Eggebogtangen Light and the beacon on Rodskjeret. The anchorage is unsafe in bad weather from SW to NW.
133

Pub. 182

7. 

Norway—Trondheim to Bodo

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
135

Pub. 182

SECTOR 7 

NORWAY—TRONDHEIM TO BODO

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Trondheim to the approaches to Bodo and Saltenfjorden. 

General Remarks 

7.1 Winds—Weather.—Weather reports and forecasts

are broadcast regularly from shore stations. Warnings of hazardous conditions are also issued when appropriate.

7.1 This is an area of frequent changes in barometric pressure

which result in frequent change in the direction of the wind.

There are frequent depressions in this area.

7.1 Fairly large and rapid changes of pressure occur in this area.

A change of 24 milibars in 24 hours is relatively common, and

a larger 24 hour change is not rare. Also, the actual pressure on

a particular day may differ from the average, and on occasions

by perhaps 50 millibars.

7.1 Since most depressions approach from the Atlantic, and

cross N of the area, the most common sequence is that of backing and increasing, followed by veering and decreasing as a depression moves away. The sequence can vary if a depression

moves further S over the area or if a polar low move S in a

strong N air current in winter.

7.1 Because of the rugged topography in this area, strong winds

may blow from different directions at places relatively close to

each other.

7.1 Strong winds outside a fjord may give way to calm weather

within, gales may be generated in the fjord or strait through

funneling of wind on occasions when winds are light outside.

Accordingly, any generalizations made about winds around

these coasts must be regarded as subject to large local variations.

7.1 In the area of this sector, the average number of days per

month with gales force winds of force 8 or above, for the

months of November, December, January, and February is 9.8.

The average number of days per month with gales force winds

of force 8 or above, for the months of May, June, July, and August is 1.1.

7.1 Fog forms more often over the coast than over the open sea.

Coastal fog is more frequent in summer than in winter, and

early in the morning than later in the day. Frequency in the

summer is more than 5 per cent about 2 days a month and from

2 to 5 per cent in winter, between 1 and 2 days monthly.

7.1 The conditions which favor fog at sea and over exposed

coast do not usually favor fog formations inland or in the

sheltered inner parts of the fjords. As a result, when there is a

widespread fog at sea the inner reaches of landlocked fjords are

usually clear and when fog affects the inner reaches there is

usually clear weather in the offing.

7.1 Tides—Currents.—During fine weather, the flood current

sets to the NE and the ebb to the SW. In general the NE current,

increased by the prevailing ocean current, is the stronger,

especially at a distance of 20 to 30 miles offshore. 

7.1 In periods of stormy weather the current runs strongly and

constantly to the NE when the wind is S or W, and with N or E

gales the set is constantly SW, but with less velocity. 

7.1 Within the fringing islands, the flood current always sets to

the NE and the ebb to the SW; here the NE current is also the

stronger.

Aspect.—From Halten, a generally steep coast trends about

50 miles NE to Vikna, 3 conspicuous islands close N of the

seaward approach to the port of Namsos.

7.1 This stretch of coast is fringed with rocky islands, but there

are comparatively few off-lying dangers. It is heavily indented

by small fjords and inlets which penetrate in all directions, and

is remarkably barren except from some cultivation and forests

at the heads of the fjords.

7.1 This part of the coast can be approached with greater safety

than that farther N, but is fully exposed to the SW gales.

7.1 From Nordoerne Light (64°48'N., 10°33'E.) on the W side

of Vikna, the coast trends about 80 miles NNE to Ytreholmen

Light. Along this coast off-lying islands and reefs extend,

generally, to a distance of 25 to 30 miles from the mainland.

7.1 Along this part of the coast the outer rocks and islets are

almost without exception, low and without distinctive features,

so a vessels position can be determined by bearings of distant

objects. The mountains on the larger islands and the mainland

possess such striking characteristics and attain such elevations

that in fairly clear weather they may be identified at 40 to 65

miles distant. These conspicuous landmarks may be selected to

fix the vessel’s position before the off-lying dangers are approached.

7.1 The sea breaks over the outer shoals more readily with W

and NW winds, partly because the winds raise the heaviest sea,

and partly because the reefs are generally steep-to on their W

and NW sides. 

7.1 Along the coast extending about 100 mile NNE from Ytreholmen Light (66°01'N., 11°42'E.) to Bodo, the aspect is bleak

and precipitous. There is, however, some low land at the seaward ends of the promontories which separate the fjords.

7.1 The off-lying islets and reefs extend from 25 to 30 miles seaward as far N as Traena, a group of islands about 35 miles N of

Ytreholmen Light. It has been reported (2008) that an obstruction lies 95 miles W of Ytterholmen Light near Traena Bank. 

7.1 North of this group, there is a gradual decrease in the offshore distance of the outer dangers until W of Kunna, a headland some 40 miles NE of Traena, where the distance is about

10 or 11 miles from the mainland. 

7.1 North of Kunna, the offshore distance again increases; W of

Bodo the dangers lie about 20 miles offshore.

7.1 The principal fjords within this sector are Bindalsfjorden,

Velfjorden, Vefsnfjorden, Ranafjorden, Sjonafjorden, Melfjorden, Tjongsfjorden, Skarsfjorden, Sorfjorden, Nordfjorden,

Saltfjorden, and Skjerstadfjorden.

7.1 In general, the channels leading from seaward to Indreleia

are longer and more difficult to navigate than those to the S. In

the N part of the sector, the entrances are difficult to make out

and a vessel’s position must be determined by the peaks on the

larger islands and on the mainland.
136 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

7.1 For details and information concerning the color and bearings of the sector lights mentioned within this sector, see the

Light List.

7.1 Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

7.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

7.1 Caution.—Three patches with depths of 16.8m, 19.8m, and

24m, lie, respectively, 5, 6.25 and 7.5 miles, NNE of Kya

(64°28'N., 10°13'E.). A restricted area, with a radius of 500m

centered on position 64°58'13.8''N, 07°37'13.2''E is located

about 23 miles S of the Heidrun patform and 88 miles W of

Sklinna Light.

7.1 Heidrun (65°19.5'N., 7°19.1'E.), a platform equipped with a

racon, lies 92 miles W of Sklinna Light (65°12'N., 11°00'E.).

Awell lies 5 miles NNE. Gas is delivered to Trondheimsleia

(63°30'N., 9°00'E.) via a 130-mile long pipeline.

7.1 Statoil Marin VTS conducts radar surveillance from the

Heidrun platform and can be contacted on VHF channel 9.

Vessels are requested to pass all installations at a distance of at

least 3 miles.

Trondheim to Buholmrasa

7.2 The portion of Indreleia leading N from Trondheim

and Grandevika (63°41'N., 9°29'E.) to Buholmrasa requires

exact knowledge to avoid the shoals close to the fairway, which

in some places is reduced to a width of only 46m; because of

this, only an outline of the routes is given.

7.2 Between Valsoya (63°52'N., 9°44'E.), an island, and Stokkoya, an island about 13 miles NNE, the fairway is quite

narrow in places, but from abreast the S end of Valsoya large

vessels can take an outer, and broader, channel known as

Asenleia, which rejoins Indreleia in the fairway N of Stokkoya.

7.2 The inner channel passes W and N of Valsoya, through the

narrow channel between Skjoroya and Lysoya, then E of

Leikua, 1.5 miles N of Lysoya, and W of Lauvoy.

7.2 Linesfjorden, entered NW of Lauvoy, may be navigated by

large vessels, and Stokksundet, between Stokkoya and the

mainland, may be used by vessels of about 6.1m draft; however, there is a sharp turn E of Stokkoya.

7.2 Stokken, which separates the NE side of Stokkoya from the

mainland, is deep and free from dangers in the fairway; it leads

2.5 miles NW from Stokksundet to the junction with Asenleia.

7.2 Asenleia lies between Hosenoyan, on the W, and Linesoya,

Stokkoya, and the mainland, on the E. Indreleia, N of the junction of Stokken and Asenleia, is deeper and wider than farther

S. 

7.3 Marflessa Light (64°10'N., 10°08'E.), situated on an

islet about 5 miles NE of the junction of Stokksundet and

Asenleia, may be passed on either side. Kjeoya lies on the W

side of the fairway, 2 miles NNE of Marflesa Light, and is

passed on its E side. A light is situated on the SE extremity of

Kjeoya. Northeast of Kjeoya, the track passes W of Terningen

Light (64°13'N., 10°15'E.) and then farther N toward Borova.

7.3 Kaurleia leads into this part of Indreleia from seaward,

passing N of Kaura (64°14'N., 10°08'E.); this entrance is difficult and local knowledge is necessary.

7.3 Boroya (64°16'N., 10°17'E.) lies with its S extremity about

1.75 miles NE of Terningen Light. Indreleia leads between

Boroya and the mainland, and then proceeds N passing E of the

Skjervoyan group. From the Skjervoyan grou, the track leads E

of Ramsoya and then E of the Rodoya group, farther N.

7.4 Saksa Light (64°24'N., 10°26'E.) lies on the W side

of Indreleia, at the S entrance to Buholmrasa; a lighted buoy is

situated about 250m E of Saksa Light; a patch with a charted

depth of 7.9m lies in the fairway 90m NW of this light. Lights

in range, situated on the W side of Sondre Rodoya, lead

through the S entrance to Bulholmrasa.

7.4 Bulholmrasa can be navigated by large vessels, but the channel is narrow and is considered to be one of the most difficult to

transit, in bad weather, on the Norwegian coast.

7.4 Buholmrasa Light (64°24'N., 10°27'E.) is shown from a

tower, 23m in height, standing about 1 mile E of Saksa Light.

A racon is located at the light.

7.4 Langro Light (64°29'N., 10°30'E.) is shown from a tower

standing about 5 miles NNE of Buholmrasa Light and 7.5

miles ENE of Kya. The tower is equipped with a racon and is

located on the SE side of Grunnane, a group of dangerous

rocks and islets.

Grandevika to Folla 

7.5 Between Grandevika and Folla, about 65 miles N,

numerous small fjords lie E of Indreleia. In general, the fjords

have no significant ports. 

7.5 Bjugnfjorden, the fjord next N of Grandevika, leads E from

Indreleia and extends about 7 miles from Bjugnskjaer Light

(63°46'N., 9°33'E.), its N entrance point. 

7.5 An islet fringed on its S side by foul ground, lies 2.75 miles

E of the light.

7.5 Bjugnfjorden may be entered from the SE part of Frohavet. 

7.5 Tarvfjorden (63°46'N., 9°25'E.) separates Tarva from the

mainland, and lies in a NE and SW direction. It is entered between Gyltingtarren, off the S extremity of Tarva, and Bjugnskjaer Light, 5 miles E.

7.5 Torskjaer Light (63°46'N., 9°28'E.), is situated in the S part

of Tarvfjorden, 2.5 miles W of Bjugnskjaer Light. The fjord is

divided by foul ground running in a SSW-NNE direction. 

7.5 The W part of the fjord, between the foul ground and Tarva,

should not be entered without local knowledge. Indreleia leads

through the E part of the fjord, between the foul ground and the

mainland. 

7.5 Kjeungskjer Light (63°43.6'N., 9°32.2'E.) stands on 20m

high red stone tower on Kjeungskeret, that lies on the W side of

Indreleia fairway at the N entrance of Grandevika. 

7.5 Valsfjorden extends 2.5 miles NE from its entrance between

Valsholmskjaer Light (63°49'N., 9°36'E.) and the foul ground

about 0.5 mile S. It is reported that a racon is located at Valsholmskjaer Light.

7.5 The fjord is free from dangers in the fairway. Lauvoyfjorden,

about 10 miles NE of Valsholmskjaer Light, on the SE side of

Indreleia, leads into Afjorden E and Skrafjorden NE. Vessels

with local knowledge can enter the fjord from Indreleia when

NE of Skjelholmen (63°54'N., 9°51'E.). Afjorden extends 8

miles in a general NE direction from its junction with Lauvoyfjorden. It has depths of 80m but there are isolated shoal

patches in the fjord.
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 137

Pub. 182

Buholmrasa Light

Kjeungskjer Light
138 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

7.5 Skrafjorden, entered from Lauvoyfjorden, extends about 5

miles NE from abreast the S end of Lauvoy (63°56'N.,

9°56'E.). It is foul and should only be entered by small vessels

with local knowledge. 

7.6 Linesfjorden is formed between the dangers SSW of

Linesoya (64°01'N., 9°54'E.), and Linesoya on the NW and the

mainland on the E. Indreleia passes through this fjord from

SSW to NNE. The track passes over a charted depth of 7.9m in

the S part of Linesfjorden.

7.6 Skjorafjorden (64°06'N., 10°10'E.), about 6 miles NE of

Linesfjorden, is entered from Indreleia, and is deep and free of

dangers in the fairway, with the exception of a 3m shoal lying

about 2 miles within the entrance. A 10m patch lies 0.35 mile

SE of the shoal.

7.6 The fjord extends about 2 miles SE and then continues about

2.5 miles NE.

7.6 Anchorage is available, in depths of 20 to 23m, sand and

clay, in a cove extending SSW from the S extremity of Skjorafjorden. Foul ground lies in the vicinity of the anchorage. 

7.6 Brandsfjorden, situated 3 miles E of Kaura (64°14'N.,

10°08'E.), is entered N of Terningen. The fjord extends 5 miles

SE and S and is deep and free from dangers.

7.6 Kaurleia leads from seaward in a SSE direction toward

Kaura and joins Indreleia ESE of that islet.

7.6 Svefjorden (64°23'N., 10°30'E.) is entered from Indreleia

close S of the S entrance to Buholmrasa. It extends 5 miles

ESE and is deep and fairly clear of dangers. There is little

traffic in the fjord.

Folla—Namsfjorden 

7.7 Folla is the body of water extending between the S

rocks of Vikna and the mainland S; it is entered between

Buholmen (64°25'N., 10°26'E.) and Nylandskjeret, marked by

a light, 12 miles N.

7.7 Folla gives access at its E end to Namsfjorden and the port of

Namsos, to Foldfjorden, and to Naeroysundet and the port of

Rorvik.

7.7 The passage outside Folla has particularly severe weather;

the seas go straight towards the coast when the winds are from

the WNW.

7.7 The passage is very deep immediately outside the coastline

and reflections against the steep continental shelf may be one

of the reasons for the turbulent seas. In combination with

outgoing current, this may possibly be one of the reasons that

the seas are particularly heavy W of the shoals.

7.7 The open sea passage across Folla, from Bulholmrasa to

Naeroysundet, forms part of Indreleia. 

7.7 Kya (64°28'N., 10°13'E.), an isolated islet marked by a light,

is an excellent mark in the approach to Folla.

7.7 Some of the mountains are visible from the vicinity of Kya

for a distantce of 45 miles SSW and as far as 60 miles NE.

7.7 Halsfjell (64°19'N., 10°'37'E.), 13.5 miles SE of Kya and

504m high, is seen as a prominent mountain with a deep cleft,

and a large round hummock S of the cleft. Helvikkeipen, 3.5

miles NNW of Halsfjell, is 347m high, it is identifiable by its

prominent location on a peninsula, with a fjord on either side.

7.7 Oksbasheia (64°25'N., 10°31'E.), 8.5 miles ESE of Kya and

228m high, is prominently situated on a peninsula. Nesvagklubben, consisting of two hummocks about 103m high, rises

in the SW part of the same peninsula.

7.7 The tidal current seaward of Namsfjorden sets W with the

falling tide and E with the rising tide. The direction, however,

is greatly affected by the wind and at times the velocity is fairly

strong. 

7.7 The islet of Kya lies in the S approach to Namsfjorden. On

the N side of the fairway, about 15 miles NNE of Kya, is

Nylandskjeret (64°41'N., 10°33'E.), which consists of several

rocks.

7.7 Hilleroen (64°46'N., 10°25'E.), covered by 2.7m, always

breaks. It is the farthest W of the shoal patches off Vikna and

lies 5 miles NW of Nylandskjeret.

7.7 Klakken, a 16.7m patch, lies about 2 miles W of Nylandskjeret.

7.8 Sveskallen (64°33'N., 10°15'E.), with a least charted

depth of 16.8m, lies 5 miles N of Kya Light. Ostvikklakken, a

19.8m patch, lies 1.75 miles ENE of Sveskallen; Skillengen, a

24m patch lies 1.25 miles farther NE. These three patches

break and the area should be avoided.

7.8 Kya, situated about 5 miles seaward of the dangers to the S,

affords a good landmark when approaching Folla from the SW.

From abreast this islet course, should be shaped to pass about 2

miles NW of the islets and dangers lying off the mainland in

the approach to Namsfjorden.

7.8 When approaching Folla from N, a wide berth should be

given to the dangers lying off the W side of Vikna; course

should be shaped to pass S of Klakken (64°40'N., 10°27'E.).

7.8 After clearing Klakken, course should be adjusted to pass 1

mile NW of Bjoroyvaer (64°36'N., 10°48'E.), lying 18 miles

NE of Kya. Continue NE and pass S of Sorhunden, a small islet

3.75 miles NNE of Bjoroyvaer, then steer SE and enter

Namsfjorden, W of Otteroya. 

7.9 On the S side of Folla is a large indentation in the

mainland, in which are the islands of Otteroya, Joa, and Elva. 

7.9 The fjords which separate these islands have distinctive

names. They are collectively known as Namsfjorden, but the

fjord which leads W of Otteroya to Namsos is the one to which

the name is specifically assigned.

7.9 Namsfjorden is entered between Knapholmene (64°36'N.,

11°02'E.), an islet off the W end of Otteroya, and the mainland

1 mile W.

7.9 The fjord, which is deep throughout, with an average width

of 1 mile, leads 18 miles SE to the port of Namsos.

7.9 Tides—Currents.—From the entrance of Namsfjorden to

Finsneset, 3.5 miles SE, the tidal currents can be quite strong.

7.9 Pilotage.—The services of a State Pilot in the Namsos area

can be arranged through the harbor authority at Trondheim.

7.10 Mefaldtaren (64°37'N., 11°00'E.), a 14.9m patch,

lies about 1 mile NNW of the light on Knapholmene;

Svarttaren, a 2.4m patch, lies 2.5 miles WNW. Foul ground

extends 0.25 mile from the mainland, 0.8 mile WSW from the

light.

7.10 Finsneset, marked by a light, is located on the W side of

Namsfjorden, 3 miles SSW of Knapholmene; it rises to a

height of 151m, 0.25 mile inland.

7.10 Anchorage is available, in 23 to 32m, sand, off Lovika on the
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 139

Pub. 182

W side of Namsfjorden, 1 mile SSW of Finsneset.

7.10 During bad weather from SW of Folla, large vessels seeking

shelter anchor SE of Krokvik (64°31'N., 11°04'E.), in the SW

part of Leirfjorden, 3 miles SSW of Finsneset, in depths of 40

to 44m, clay.

7.11 Hoddoya (64°28'N., 11°14'E.), an island which rises

to a height of 208m on its W side, is located on the W side of

Namsfjorden, about 9 miles within its entrance. Hoddoygrunnen, a 1.5m patch, lies 0.25 mile off the N side of Hoddoya.

7.11 Shoal water extends about 0.1 mile off the NE extremity of

Hoddoya. Namsfjorden is about 0.7 mile wide in this area.

7.11 Bromsneset Light stands on a point in Otteroya, E of Hoddoya. A series of islands lies on the S side of the fairway from

1 to 2.75 miles ESE of the light.

7.11 Ansneset (64°28'N., 11°24'E.), the S point of Otteroya, has a

drying spit extending about 0.2 mile S from it. A rocky shoal,

covered by less than 1.8m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 1

mile S of the point.

7.11 Maerranes, a promontory on the mainland, lies 1.5 miles SE

of Ansneset. Namsos is situated 1.25 miles NE of Maerranes.

7.11 Vessels in transit to Namsfjorden steer a mid-channel course

until abreast of Hoddoya. Shape a course to pass N of Hoddoygrunnen, then between Hoddoya and Otteroya. 

7.11 The white sector of Bromsneset Light bearing between 286°

and 293°, astern, leads clear of the dangers until SW of Ansneset, when a course should be shaped to pass S of Maerranes,

then NE to Namsos.

Namsos (64°28'N., 11°30'E.) 

World Port Index No. 23050

7.12 The coastal port of Namsos is situated on the N side

of mouth of Namsen. The S part is called the Spillum harbor,

with berths on reclaimed land.

7.12 Ice.—The harbor is well sheltered and cargo operations are

seldom interfered with. Navigation is seldom impeded by ice

except during exceptionally severe winters, when entrances

may be blocked; the port is kept open by icebreakers.

7.12 Tides—Currents.—The spring range of tide is 2.7m.

7.12 Strong tidal currents may be experienced in Namsos. The

flow is affected by the outflow from Namsenelva, the shallow

water area E of Namsos, and can cause difficulty in berthing.

7.12 Depths—Limitations.—The quays of Namsos are situated

around a small bay. The older part of the town, including the

railway station and the church, occupies the E side.

7.12 The principal berths vary in length from 50 to 150m, with

depths of 5 to 10m alongside. Vessels of up to 15,000 dwt can

be accommodated.

7.12 There are three oil berths, with depths of about 5m alongside. Coastal tankers up to 2,000 dwt can be handled.

7.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. Pilots

board 1 mile NNW of Grip Light, but if heavy swell is present,

vessels may be directed into smooth water by the pilot boat.

Contact the pilot office by VHF at Kristiansund. 

7.12 Regulations.—A speed limit of 5 knots is in force. This

speed limit applies to all vessels except those engaged in operations for the Norwegian armed forces or craft engaged in

emergency police, custom, fire fighting, ambulance, or search

and rescue missions along the Namsos coastal region. 

7.12 Anchorage.—There is a good, spacious anchorage available

in the harbor, in depths of 50 to 60m. Anchorage is available

closer in, in depths of 18 to 42m. 

7.13 Lygnenfjorden is entered from Namsfjorden and

extends about 9 miles SSE from its entrance between Skjerpoya on the W and Kvarvodden, 1.5 miles E.

7.13 Bangsund Light (64°25'N., 11°21'E.) is situated on an islet

on the E side of the fjord 1.5 miles S of Skjerpoya.

7.13 On each side of the entrance to the fjord are several dangers,

whose positions may be seen on the chart. The white sectors of

Bangsund Light lead clear of the dangers lying 0.25 mile E of

Skjerpoya.

7.13 Anchorage, in 10 to 19m, mud, with mooring rings, is available off Bangsund, 1 mile SE of the light.

Lokkaren, Surviksundet, Lauvoyfjorden, and

Rodsunda 

7.14 Lokkaren, Surviksundet, Lauvoyfjorden, and Rodsunda lead N from Namsfjorden, along the E and NE sides of

Otteroya, to join Folla N of Otteroya.

7.14 Lokkaren (64°30'N., 11°26'E.) is entered E of Ansneset and

extends 3.5 miles N, along the E side of Otteroya, to its

junction with Surviksundet, in the vicinity of Levra.

7.14 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 30m, spans the fairway

2 miles within the entrance. A depth of 4.9m is charted close S

of the bridge. Lokkaren may be entered within the white sectors of the light situated on the W side of the fairway 0.75 mile

NNE of its S entrance. Another white sector of this light,

astern, leads farther NNE.

7.14 Levra Light (64°32'N., 11°28'E.) changing from red to

green leads W of the 4.9m patch S of the bridge. 

7.14 Surviksundet (64°33'N., 11°24'E.), a narrow sound lying

between Otteroya on the SW and Elva and Hooya on the NE,

Port of Namsos HomePage

http://www.namsos.kommune.no

Namsos
140 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

connects Lokkaren with Lauvoyfjorden. The sound is spanned

by several overhead cables, the lowest having a vertical clearance of 30m.

7.14 An 8.8m patch lies in the NW entrance of Surviksundet;

otherwise it is clear of dangers. 

7.14 Levra Light, bearing 124° astern, changing from red to

green, leads through the middle of the sound, to Kraka, foul

ground extending 160m NE from Otteroya, 2.75 miles NW of

the light. From Kraka, the white sector of the light situated on

Lauvoy leads into Lauvoyfjorden; however, the 8.8m patch lies

within this sector. 

7.15 Lauvoyfjorden (64°35'N., 11°20'E.) lies between

Otteroya and Joa on the W and Elva on the E; it is mostly clear

of dangers and is well marked.

7.15 Lauvoytaren (64°33'N., 11°20'E.), a 3m patch, lies 0.5 mile

SW of the SW point of Elva. Lauvoy, a small islet, is located

0.3 mile W of the SW point of Elva. Foul ground extends 0.2

mile N from the islet; a 4m patch lies 0.6 mile N.

7.15 Lyngholmen (64°35'N., 11°24'E.) lies in the middle of the

fjord, 0.8 mile N of Lauvoy; a drying patch lies 183m N.

7.15 Vessels which have entered Lauvoyfjorden from Surviksundet, pass W of Lauvoy, and steer with the white sector of

that light, astern, which leads into the SW part of Rodsunda.

7.15 Anchorage may be taken off Fosslandsosen, in the SW part

of Lauvoyfjorden, in 44m, clay. 

7.15 Rodsunda (64°38'N., 11°10'E.) is formed between Otteroya,

on the S and W, and by Joa on the E; it is about 6 miles from its

junction with Lauvoyfjorden to its NW entrance. The fairway

is mostly clear of dangers.

7.15 Holviktaren (64°36'N., 11°18'E.), a 1m patch, lies 0.15 mile

offshore, 0.6 mile NW of Holvikneset, the S extremity of Joa.

7.15 Stonga, drying, lies at the extremity of a spit extending 0.5

mile from Joa, at the NW entrance to Rodsunda.

7.15 Vessels which have entered Rodsunda from Lauvoyfjorden

steer a mid-channel course and pass E of Jervika Light

(64°38'N., 11°09'E.), close within the NW entrance point. The

white sector of Jervika Light, astern, leads W of Gauvene into

Folla. 

7.16 Gyltefjorden (64°39'N., 11°22'E.) is entered between

Skreddarneset, the NE point of Joa and Storhovedet, 2.5 miles

NE, and leads 3.5 miles S to the entrance to Seirstadfjorden

and Nordsunda. The fjord is deep and clear of dangers.

7.16 A mid-channel course will lead SSW to the entrance to

Seirstadfjorden.

7.16 Anchorage may be taken, in 20 to 24m, clay, in Movika,

close within the N entrance to Gyltefjorden, on the E side.

7.16 Seirstadfjorden (64°37'N., 11°22'E.) is entered W of

Olhammeren, the N point of Elva, and leads 2.5 miles S into

Lauvoyfjorden. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of

45m, spans the fjord in the vicinity of the light on Olhammeren.

7.16 Shoal water extends up to about 0.2 mile off the E side of

Joa, which reduces the fairway to about 0.2 mile in places. 

7.16 Nordsunda and Arbustraumen, which separate Elva from the

mainland, lead SSE from Gyltefjorden and connect with the

various fjords E of Elva. 

7.16 Nordsund and Arbustraumen, especially the latter, are

frequently difficult and even dangerous to navigate, due to the

strong tidal currents and to the squalls which come off the high

land E. These channels, which can be used only by small vessels, are not recommended in the absence of good local knowledge.

Foldfjorden

7.17 Follfjorden is entered at the inner end of Folla and

extends 25 miles ENE towards the entrances to Opployfjorden,

and Indre Foldjorden.

7.17 Flottra (64°40'N., 11°04'E.), an island marked by a light, is

situated at the E end of Folla, just over 1 mile N of Otteroya. 

7.17 Foul ground extends about 0.4 mile W and 0.3 mile N and E

from the island.

7.17 Stokkgrunnen (64°39'N., 11°00'E.), a dangerous drying

reef, lies in the middle of the fairway, 2 miles SW of Flottra.

7.17 Smatarene, a patch with a depth of 11.9m, lies 0.5 mile NE

of Flottra; isolated patches, with depths of 9.8m and 9.1m, lie,

respectively, 0.3 and 0.75 mile, N of Flottra.

7.17 Tarnfallene, islets and rocks which usually break, lies on the

S side of the approach to Foldfjorden, 2 miles E of Flottra.

7.17 Vessels approaching Foldfjorden from Folla can pass on

either side of Stokkgrunnen and then SE of Flottra. Then shape

a course to enter the white sector of Abelvaer Light (64°43'N.,

11°10'E.), 4 miles NE of Flottra.

7.17 When N of Tarnfallene, shape an ENE course to pass about

midway between Mefallstaren (64°46'N., 11°29'E.), awash,

and Kvalholmen, 1.25 miles SE. When clear of Mefallstaren,

steer E toward Opployfjorden. 

7.17 Opployfjorden (64°48'N., 11°45'E.), the E continuation of

Foldfjorden, is entered between Digermulen (64°47'N.,

11°43'E.) and Galtnesodden, 0.75 mile NE and extends 3.5

miles E to Salsbruket.

7.17 Galtnesskjaer Light is situated on a rock which lies in the

entrance to Opployfjorden.

7.17 Several overhead cables, with a vertical clearance of 30m,

cross the entrance to the fjord approximately 0.3 miles E of

Galtnesskjeret. Overhead cables with a vertical clearance of

10m cross from the S side of Krokoya to Monsoya.

7.17 The fjord may be entered by passing N or S of Galtnesskjaer

Light, then E with the white sector of that light astern, passing

S of the island about 1 mile E. 

7.17 Steer to pass N of Garsoya, just over 1 mile farther E, then N

of Opployskjeret, 0.2 mile E of Garsoya, then directly to Salsbruket. 

7.18 Salsbruket (64°48'N., 11°52'E.) stands on the N side

of the head of Opployfjorden, 0.5 mile ENE of Opployskjeret.

Salsbruket Church, situated 0.5 mile W of Salsbruket is floodlit

and makes a good landmark. The harbor is good, but winds can

be troublesome.

7.18 The export quay is 70m long and has depths of 7.5 to 9.2m

alongside. Vessels of 1,000 to 3,000 grt regularly use the quay;

vessels of 10,000 grt have berthed there but have only been

partly loaded.

7.18 Anchorage is available off the quays, in 25 to 30m, sand and

clay. 

7.18 Indre Foldfjorden (64°53'N., 11°44'E.) is connected to the

NE end of Foldfjorden through Korsnesstraumen, a narrow
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 141

Pub. 182

sound. From the N end of Korsnesstraumen, Indre Foldfjorden

extends ENE 13 miles, then SE for 10 miles. 

7.18 Korsnesstraumen and Indre Foldfjorden are mostly clear of

dangers but are narrow in places. Korsnesstraumen is navigable

without difficulty, even though the tidal currents run strongly in

it. 

7.18 Indre Foldfjorden is narrowest at Foldereidstraumen, about

16 miles ENE of the S entrance to Korsnesstraumen; large

vessels should not pass it without a pilot or a local mariner on

board.

7.18 Korsnesstraumen is entered between Falskeneset (64°50'N.,

11°39'E.), a headland, and a point 0.35 mile WNW.

7.18 The white sector of Kjeoy Light (64°48'N., 11°35'E.),

astern, leads into the fairway of Korsnesstraumen. A midchannel course leads N through Korsnesstraumen to Indre

Foldfjorden; the sound is spanned by an overhead cable, with a

vertical clearance of 45m. 

7.19 Kvalbakskjer Light (64°52'N., 11°41'E.) is situated

at the extremity of a spit which extends 0.15 mile W from the

mainland, at the entrance to Indre Foldfjorden; the fairway

passes W and N of this light. The fjord is spanned by overhead

cables, with a vertical clearance of 43m, 1 mile NE of the light.

7.19 The white sector of Skaftenes Light (64°57'N., 12°01'E.)

leads from the vicinity of the overhead cables above to within

about 1 mile of the light. Steer a mid-channel course to pass S

of Skaftenes Light; then steer in the white sector of that light,

astern, which leads N of Ahamaren, a point 2.5 miles ENE of

the light.

7.19 A 5m patch lies on the S side of the fairway 0.75 mile ENE

of Ahamaren. There is a light situated on shore N of Ahamaren; the white sector of this light, astern, leads N of the 5m

patch.From this area SE to the head of the fjord, passage

should not be attempted without local knowledge.

7.19 Kongsmoen (64°53'N., 12°26'E.), situated at the head of the

fjord, 9.75 miles SE of Ahamaren, is the site of a quay, 50m

long, with depths of 9.2 to 10.3m alongside.

7.19 Anchorage can be obtained, in charted depths of 49m, off

Kongsmoen. 

7.19 Arnoyfjorden (64°46'N., 11°15'E.) lies ENE of Tviberg and

may be entered by passing either N or SE of the island; the SE

side, however, is preferred. A 4m rocky shoal lies on the SE

side of the fairway, about 1 mile ENE of the S point of Tviberg.

Naeroysundet

7.20 Indreleia crosses Folla in open sea for a distance of 20

miles, then leads through Naeroysundet (64°50'N., 11°11'E.)

between Indre Vikan on the NW and Naeroya, Maroya, and the

mainland on the SE.

7.20 Tidal currents in Naeroysundet are NE on the flood current

and SW on the ebb current. The spring rate in each direction is

3 knots off the W side of Maroya and 4 knots off the E side of

Stromoya. 

7.20 The group of shoals which separates the NW side of the

entrance to Foldfjorden from the SE side of the approach to

Naeroysundet includes the following salient dangers; the

positions are given from the islet Sorhunden (64°39'N.,

10°53'E.):

1. Bondfallet, a 4.6m patch, lying 1.5 miles NW.

2. A 2m patch lying 1.75 miles NNW.

3. A 5.8m patch lying 2 miles NNW.

7.20 Gjeslingene Light (64°44'N., 10°51'E.) is situated on the

NW side of the approach to Naeroysundet, 4.75 miles N of Sohunden. A racon is located at the light tower, which is 24m in

height.

7.20 Grinna Light is situated about 3.75 miles ENE of Gjeslingene Light.

7.20 Finskjerane, a group of rocks partly awash, extends NE from

Grinna Light. Spygrunnsfallet, awash, lies on the E side of the

fairway, 1.5 miles ESE of the light.

7.20 Naeroysundet is entered between Finskjerslua (64°46'N.,

11°00'E.), at the E extremity of Finskjerane, and Spygrunsfallet.

7.20 Naeroysund Light stands on the NW side of Naeroysundet,

7.75 miles NE of Grinna Light. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m, stands 0.8 mile NE of Naeroysund Light.

7.20 Vessels approaching Naeroysundet should adjust course to

pass about 1 mile SE of Gjeslingene Light, then pass 0.7 mile

SE of Grinna and continue NE into Naeroysundet, and in midchannel to Rorvik.

7.21 Rorvik (64°52'N., 11°14'E.) (World Port Index No.

23040) is a resort and fishing harbor protected by moles. The

entrance is about 50m wide. The harbor is separated into two

parts by a penninsula situated in Indre Vikna at the NE end of

Naeroysundet.

7.21 Winds—Weather.—Strong SW winds raise a considerable

sea, sometimes making the quays untenable. Southeast winds

can bind vessels to many of the quays.

7.21 Depths—Limitations.—The quays are up to 143m in length

and have depths of 7.3 to 8.8m alongside. Other quays are from

10 to 60m in length and vary in depth from 2.2 to 8.2m. Vessels

up to 1,000 dwt can be accommodated.

7.21 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center. The

pilot boards in position 64°44.0'N, 10°58.0E by arrangement. 

7.21 Regulations.—The harbor area of Rorvik extends from

Naeroysund Light, 1.5 miles SW of Rorvik, to Haganes Light,

Rorvik
142 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

1.5 miles NE of Rorvik, including the waters on the N side of

Maroya.

7.21 Within the harbor area, powered vessels must not proceed at

a greater speed than necessary for good seamanship and

maneuverability. Cautionary notice boards are placed at the

SW and NE limits of the harbor area.

Rorvik to Risvaerjorden 

7.22 Indreleia continues from Rorvik to Risvaerfjorden, 12

miles NE, between Indre Vikna, Stromoya (64°52'N.,

11°16'E.), Krakoya, Lauvoya, Gjerdingen, and Risvaer

(64°55'N., 11°32'E.) a group of islets, on the NW, and Kvingla

and the mainland on the SE, passing either side of Svinoya.

7.22 A light is situated on the SE point of Stromoya; a 4m patch,

marked on its W side by a lighted buoy, lies 0.25 mile NE of

the light.

7.22 The tidal flow off the 4m patch above is 4 knots at springs

tide. It is 3 knots off Krakoya, 1.25 miles NNE. 

7.22 Humulrasa Light (64°55'N., 11°22'E.) stands on the SW

point of Svinoya. The following features positions are given

from this light:

1. Krigsborgene Islets, lying about 1 mile SW, on the

NW side of the fairway.

2. Krigsborntaren, a rock marked by a light, lying 0.8

mile SW.

3. A light standing on the E coast of Svinoya, 0.7 mile

NE.

4. A light standing on Valhaugen, on the NW coast of

Kvingla, 0.7 mile ENE.

7.22 A light is situated on Gjerdinggalten (64°56'N., 11°28'E.),

on the NW side of the fairway, SE of Gjerdingen. A light is

situated on Stangholmgalten, on the SE side of the fairway, 0.4

mile E of Gjerdinggalten. 

7.22 Vessels proceeding N from Rorvik and vicinity, pass E of

Stromoya and W of the 4m patch, and then in mid-channel,

pasing E of Krakoya about 1 mile NNE of Stromoya. The

white sectors of the charted lights lead clear of the dangers.

7.22 The main fairway E of Stromoya has been used by vessels of

20,000 grt with a draft of 10m. Larger vessels can pass if

assisted by tugs. Large vessels should only use this channel

during the period of slack water.

7.22 The narrow channel W of Stromoya, in which the least

charted depth is 7m, can be used by vessels up to 1,200 grt.

7.22 Powered vessels should observe the speed as required for

Rorvik. When the vessel has cleared Krakoya and Krigsborntaren (64°54'N., 11°20'E.), 1 mile NE, course may be shaped

to pass either E or W of Svinoya.

7.22 Svinestien, the passage between Svinoya and Kvingla, may

be entered with the light on the NW coast of Kvingla, bearing

between 051° and 059°; steer to clear the light, then bring it

astern to bear between 227° and 231°, which will lead NE

between Gjerdinggalten and Stangholmgalten. 

7.23 Humulrasa (64°57'N., 11°23'E.) is entered off the

NW side of Indreleia, N of Svinoya, and leads N between

Lauvoya and Gjerdingen into the open sea.

7.23 Indre Haugoytaren (64°56'N., 11°22'E.), a 6.3m patch, lies

1 mile N of the SW point of Svinoya. A 6m patch lies 0.3 mile

W of Indre Haugoytaren.

7.23 Range lights are situated on Lamholmen, off the NW coast

of Gjerdingen.

7.23 The recommended route through Humulrasa passes close E

of Indre Haugoytaren, with the white sector of Humulrasa

Light astern. When clear of Lamholmen, vessels may proceed

to the open sea or NE toward Lekafjorden and Indreleia. 

7.23 Risvaersundet (64°58'N., 11°31'E.) is a much-used passage

which extends NNE from Oteren (64°58'N., 11°31'E.), located

1.75 miles NE of Gjerdinggalten, and leads between Blikoya,

Kalvoya, Skarvholmen, Hamneholmen, and Leroya on the W

and Risvaer, Risvaeroya, and Stensoya on the E.

7.23 Oterholmflakket, a 3m patch, lies 0.25 mile WSW of Oteren.

Patches of 6 and 8m lie between Oterholmflakket and Oteren.

7.23 Risvaersundet may be entered either between Oterholmflakket and Oteren, where the least depth is 6m, or E of Oteren

in deeper water. The white sector of the light on Risvaer will

lead in the fairway NNE, E of Blikoya. 

7.23 Steer to pass W of the light, then bring it astern bearing

between 209° and 215°. After passing clear of Leroya, course

may be altered WNW into Risvaerfjorden or NE into Dolmsundet. 

7.24 From Stangholmgalten (64°56'N., 11°28'E.), Indreleia leads close off the mainland, passing SE of Oteren and

Store Oterholmen, 0.3 mile NE, and then 183m W of Eiternestangen which is situated 4 miles ENE of Stangholmgalten,

then NNE into the E end of Risvaerfjorden.

7.24 Risvaergalten, rocks partly awash and marked by a beacon,

lies 1 mile NE of Oteren. A 2m patch lies 0.2 mile farther

NNE.

7.24 Ivarholmen, marked by a light, Lamholmen, Drenken, and

Bardskjeret lie across the passage between Risvaer and Eiternestangen.

7.24 From the vicinity of Stangholmgalten, the white sector of

that light, bearing between 230° and 238°, astern, leads SE of

Store Oterholmen (64°58'N., 11°32'E.). From a position 0.2

mile SE of Oteren the fairway leads NE between Eiternestangen and Bardskjeret, taking care to avoid the 7m patch, 0.15

mile NE of Bardskjeret and Hornbaen (64°59'N., 11°35'E.),

rocks, partly awash, about 0.6 mile NNE of Bardskjeret.

7.24 When the vessel has cleared the passage E of Bardskjeret,

steer NW into Risvaerfjorden, passing SW of Hornbaen, or

midway between Hornbaen and the mainland, then NE into

Dolmsundet.

Folla to Yetterholmen 

7.25 Sklinna Banken (65°16'N., 10°10'E.), an extensive

bank with general depths of less than 183m, and a least charted

depth of 121m, lies with its center about 21 miles WNW of

Sklinna. 

7.25 Sklinna (65°12'N., 11°00'E.), a small group of isolated islands, lies 26.75 miles NNE of Nordoyan.

7.25 Sklinna Light is shown from a tower, 14m in height, standing

on Heimoya, the principal island of the group. Several rocky

patches, which sometimes break, lie N of the W shoals off

Vikna. 

7.25 Galttaren (65°09'N., 10°41'E.) has a least charted depth of

11m and lies 8 miles WSW of Sklinna. Breigrund, 2.75 miles S

of Galttaren, has a charted depth of 14.6m. A shoal, with a
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 143

Pub. 182

depth of 2.7m, lies 2.75 miles NNE of Galttaren.

7.25 Hogbraken (65°24'N., 11°02'E.), an isolated islet located

11.5 miles N of Sklinna, is visible for a distance of about 4

miles. Two above water rocks lie about 2.5 miles S of the islet;

in moderate weather these two rocks are marked by heavy

breakers. Shoals, which always break, extend about 1 mile W

of these two rocks.

7.25 Steinan (65°36'N., 11°17'E.), a group of islets and rocks,

lies 14 miles NNE of Hogbraken. They lie at the SW end of a

larger group of islets known as Bremsteinan, which lies 9 miles

W of Vega.

7.25 Skjaervaergrunnan, located 9 miles N of Bremsteinan, has

depths of 16.4 to 18.3m and is rocky; this area should be avoided in heavy weather, when the flow in the vicinity is strong and

the sea troublesome. Nordvaer, Skjaevaer, and Hysvaer are

three groups of islets which lie 4.5 miles NE, 4 miles E, and

7.5 miles ESE, respectively, from Skjaervaergrunnan; these

areas are foul and should be avoided.

7.25 The area 14 miles NE of Nordvaer is a mass of islets and

reefs which are unapproachable from seaward.

7.25 Ytreholmen (Ytterholmen) (66°01'N., 11°42'E.), 13 miles

NNE of Nordvaer, lies about 15 miles W of the SW point of

Donna; the island is marked by a light. Skalsveskolten, Skalsveet, and Baksveet, covered by depths of 24 to 29m, lie 4.5 to

6.25 miles W and WSW of Ytreholmen (Ytterholmen) and are

the farthest patches W in the approach to Ytreholmen. 

7.25 The sea breaks over these rocky patches in bad weather.

7.25 Meloya (66°04'N., 11°37'E.), a rock, awash, with surrounding shoals, lies about 2 miles NW of Ytterholmen. In bad

weather, these dangers form a large breaker which extends in a

NE to SW direction.

7.25 Caution.—From the vicinity of Hogbraken to Ytterholmen,

a wide berth should be given to the 183m contour; this is little

more than 1 mile seaward of the outer line of islets and shoals

in some places.

Vikna to Donna 

7.26 Vikna (64°55'N., 11°00'E.) consists of three large

islands, Indre Vikna, Mellem Vikna, and Ytre Vikna. These are

surrounded by a number of islets, rocks, and shoals.

7.26 Among the several shoal areas S and W of Vikna, the tidal

currents set towards the land.

7.26 In the vicinity of Vikna, mariners bound for Indreleia or the

inner fjords are strongly advised to enter through Folla or

Maholmrasa.

7.26 Maholmrasa (65°00'N., 10°55'E.) is a good and deep

channel leading ESE, from seaward, between the coastal reefs

off the NW side of Vikna, then S of the islets Maholmen

(65°00'N., 10°58'E.), Rauoya, and Kvaloya, lying off the N

side of Vikna. Indreleia can be reached through Humulrasa or

Risvaerfjorden.

7.26 Maholmrasa is approached from W by passing N of the

Arsgrunnane patches, which lie 2 miles NW of Arsflesa

(65°01'N., 10°41'E.); these shoal patches, with a least charted

depth of 12.8m, break in bad weather.

7.26 The range lights on Maholmen, in line bearing 105°, ahead,

lead 0.15 mile N of Djupbaen, awash, lying 0.75 miles ENE of

Arsflesa, then S of Brosjetarene, patcheswith a depth of 10m,

lying 0.5 mile farther ENE. 

7.26 Oksrevltaren (65°01'N., 10°51'E.), a 16.5m patch, which

breaks in heavy weather, lies close N of the range line, 2.5

miles WNW of the front range light.

7.26 It is advisable to keep the rear light open of the front range

light in order to pass safely S of Oksrevltaren and the 1 and 2m

patches which lie close N of the track, 1.5 miles ESE of Oksrevltaren.

7.26 The fairway of Maholmrasa S and E of Maholmen is flanked

by numerous dangers, which are charted. The white sector of

Ternholmen Light (65°00'N., 11°07'E.), standing on an islet

off the S side of Kvaloya, leads clear of the dangers; however,

Maholmtaren, a 1m patch, situated 0.5 mile WSW of the rear

range light, lies within these bearings.

7.26 In the E approach to Maholmrasa, a drying reef lies 0.7 mile

E of Ternholmen Light. A 10m patch lies 1 mile ESE of the

light, and Ytre Ragnildtaren, a 3m patch, lies about 2 miles

ESE of the same light.

7.26 Mefjordsbaen, with a least charted depth of 3.9m, lies 1 mile

SE of Ternholmen Light.

7.26 The white sector of Ternholmen Light bearing leads clear of

the above danger.

7.26 The range lights on Gjerdingen bearing 147° leads SE

toward Indreleia; it may be reached alternatively, by continuing

E and entering Risvaerfjorden. 

7.27 Helmoya (65°12'N., 11°00'E.), 35m high, is the

largest and highest of the Sklinna group; it is marked by

Sklinna Light. A vessel proceeding to Indreleia may pass either

N or S of the group, but only the N approach will be described.

7.27 From positions NW of Sklinna, the approach to a position

about 4 miles W of Sklinna Light (65°12'N., 11°00'E.) is clear

of dangers in the fairway. With the light bearing not less than

087°, a vessel will pass N of Horsgrunnskoltane, which has a

least depth of 6.7m, and Horsgrunnen, with a least depth of

2.7m, situated about 5 miles WSW of the light; these patches

sometimes break.

7.27 The light on Sklinnaflesan (65°08'N., 10°59'E.), 4.5 miles S

of Helmoya, bearing between 125.5° and 142°, leads NE of

Horsgrunnskoltane, and SW of Sawgrunnen, an 11.9m patch

lying 2.25 miles NNW of the light.

7.27 From a position 4 miles W of Sklinna Light, the route leads

ESE, passing N of Sawgrunnen (65°09'N., 10°56'E.) and S of

Breidgrunnen, a 2.7m patch which breaks, 1.25 miles SSW of

the light. Flotran, 0.5 mile SSE of Breidgrunnen, a patch with a

depth of 8.5m, is passed on its S side.

7.28 Stortaren (65°08'N., 11°01'E.), a rocky patch with a

least depth of 4.8m, lies 1 mile NE of Sklinnaflesan. Lilletaren,

a patch with a depth of about 10m, lies 1.25 miles ESE of

Stortaren. Both of these patches are passed on the N side. 

7.28 From a position in Storgrunden (65°09'N., 11°07'E.), 3.25

miles ENE of Sklinnaflesan, the range lights on Gjerdingen

bear 147°, 15 miles distant; however, they will not be visible.

This alignment leads toward Humulrasa passing about 2 miles

SW of Mefjordbaen (65°08'N., 11°12'E.), which breaks and is

reported to always be visible.

7.28 The track continues SE. passing NE of Gjuvtaren, a rocky

patch with a least charted depth of 4.9m, lying 3.25 miles SSW

of Mefjordbaen. The track also passes NE of Sporsluene, a
144 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

4.9m patch lying 1 mile SE of Gjuvtaren; an isolated 8.5m

patch lies 0.5 mile NE of Sporsluene.

7.28 Brunflesan Light (65°03'N., 11°17'E.), which stands among

drying patches about 2 miles ESE of Sporsluene, is passed to

the SW, then SW of Vevlan 2.75 miles SSE of Brunflesan

Light. It is advisable to keep on the SW side of the range light

in the vicinity of Vevlan which lies almost on the line; a 7m

patch lies 0.2 mile SE of Vevlan.

7.28 When the vessel is clear of Vevlan. the front range light on

Gjerdingen. bearing between 143° and 200°. leads NE of

Djuptarskjeret (64°58'N., 11°22'E.), a 7m patch marked by a

beacon, situated 3.25 miles SE of Vevlan. From Djuptarskjeret.

proceed to pass W of Lamholmen and then S as previously

directed into Humulrasa. 

7.29 From the vicinity of Vevlan (65°01'N., 11°19'E.). the

route passes W of Vevlan, then W and S of a 7m patch lying

0.3 mile SSE. 

7.29 When the N tangent of Store Kvitholme (65°01'N.,

11°36'E.), 7 miles E of Vevlan, bears 080°, steer on that course,

until clear of Skjeribaen, 3 miles E of Vevlan. 

7.29 When the vessel is S of Skjeribaen, about 0.5 mile distant, a

mid-channel route ENE passing about 0.4 mile N of Store

Kvitholme and the same distance S of Madsoygalten

(65°02'N., 11°41'E.), 2.5 miles NE of Store Kvitholme, leads

into the S entrance of Lekafjorden and joins Indreleia.

7.29 A 2.4m patch lies 0.5 mile WSW of Madsoygalten. 

7.29 From the vicinity of Mefjordbaen (65°08'N., 11°12'E.), 7

miles SE of Sklinna, a branch of the entrance channel leads NE

through Hortafjorden, passing about 3 miles NW of Leka to

join Indreleia in Melsteinfjorden by one of two alternative

routes.

7.29 From a position clear S and E of Mefjordbaen, Hortafjorden (65°10'N., 11°30'E.) may be entered on an E course.

7.29 The alignment of Sorflesa, the S islet of Steinsflesan, and the

summit of Gutvikfjellet (65°08'N., 11°56'E.), 11 miles farther

E, bearing 091.5°, leads toward a position about 2 miles W of

Sorflesa. Storslua, a large shoal area with a least charted depth

of 3.3m, lies 0.4 mile N of this track about 4 miles W of

Sorflesa. 

7.29 From a position about 2 miles W of Sorflesa, a mid-channel

route will lead into Hortafjorden, passing N of Steinsflesa

(65°09'N., 11°31'E.) and SE of Breigrunnen, a shoal patch 2.25

miles WNW.

7.29 When N of Steinsflesa, a vessel may steer E and enter the

white sector of the light on that island. This sector, astern, will

lead into the white sector of Helgelandsflesa Light (65°13'N.,

11°53'E.).

7.29 The S of two alternative routes into Melsteinfjorden leads

ENE, E, and NE from the vicinity of Steinsflesa, passing N of

the dangers lying off Leka. There are numerous less than

charted depths exist in the W approaches to Leka.

7.29 When N of Steinsflesa, the S end of Melsteinen (65°11'N.,

11°51'E.), in range 078° with the N extremity of a headland 10

miles farther E, leads 183m N of Kriskjaertaren, 3.75 miles

ENE of Steinsflesa, and 0.25 mile N of Storgrunnen, 2 miles

farther ENE.

7.29 Melsteinfjorden may be entered by passing either W or E of

Melsteinen. Care is necessary to avoid shoal water extending

0.2 mile SSW of Melsteinen, and Lilletaren (65°10'N.,

11°50'E.), 0.5 mile farther SSW.

7.29 The white sector of the light on Helgelandsflesa leads into

Melsteinfjorden passing between Steinstaren on the W and

Melsteinen on the E.

7.29 Lekafjorden may be entered from N by rounding the dangers

NE of Leka and passing SW of Stortaren (65°09'N.,

11°50'E.), 2 miles S of Melsteinen, and then SSW into the

fairway of the fjord. 

7.30 Ytreholmen (66°01'N., 11°42'E.), previously described in paragraph 7.24, may be approached from the SW,

avoiding Baksveet, Skalsveskolten, and Skalsveet, which lie 6

miles WSW, 6 miles W and 5.5 miles W, respectively, from

that islet. The sea breaks over these shoals in heavy weather.

7.30 From a position SW of Ytterholmen, the SW summit of

Store Steinen (66°00'N., 12°01'E.) is the only part of the

Steinan group that can be seen. Vessels approaching Husvaetfjorden should keep this summit bearing between 072° and

080°, which will lead S of Langskolten and Storgrunnsveet, 1.5

miles S and 1.75 miles SSE, respectively, from Ytterholmen,

and N of Kastsveet, which is reported to break in heavy weather, 3.5 miles S of Ytterholmen.

7.30 Langfallet, a 2m rocky patch, lies about 2 miles, ESE of

Ytterholmen, on the N side of the fairway.

7.30 The white sector of the light on Store Steinen leads over the

same area described above.

7.30 From a position about 2 miles WSW of Store Steinen, the

white sector of the auxiliary light on Ytterholmen, astern, leads

S of all dangers in Steinan and N of Kvanflessveet (65°58'N.,

12°03'E.), an 11m patch 9 miles ESE of the light. 

7.30 Husvaerfjorden (65°58'N., 12°05'E.) extends SE from the

vicinity of Steinan to Husvaersundet, which is entered between

Traetholmen (65°56'N., 12°12'E.), and Dragan, an islet 0.2

mile WSW. From a position about 2 miles SE, the white sector

of the light on Store Steinen, bearing between 308° and 326°,

astern, leads toward Traetholmen, passing SW of Langodbaen

(65°58'N., 12°07'E.), which lies 1.75 miles ENE of Kvanflessveet. Indre Flesa, an extensive area of foul ground, lies S

of Kvanflessveet.

7.30 Langobaen, 1.25 miles N of Traetholmen, should be passed

on its SW side; then steer toward the light on Traetholmen

passing SW of Stappen, which is marked by a beacon. A 6.4m

patch lies 183m S of Stappen. 

7.30 Husvaersundet (65°56'N., 12°12'E.) lies in a N-S direction;

the white sector of the light on Traetholmen, astern, leads

through the fairway for a distance of 1 mile. 

7.30 Seisholmtaren, a 1.5m patch, lies on the E side of the

fairway, 1 mile S of Traetholmen.

7.30 Two marine farms are situated on the E side of the fairway

between Tennvalen and Seisholmtaren.

7.30 A submarine pipeline and submarine cable are laid across

Husvaersundet between Brasoya and Tennvalen.

7.30 Tennsundet (65°57'N., 12°14'E.) lies between Heroya and

Tenna; a track leads 2 miles ENE from Husvaerfjorden to the S

entrance for Heroysundet. The controlling depth at the E end of

the fairway at Tennsundet is 3m.

7.30 A submarine pipeline is extends SW from Lendingen, at the

head of Tennsundet. 

7.30 Altfjorden (65°56'N., 12°19'E.) is entered from the S end of
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 145

Pub. 182

Husvaersundet; the fairway passes S of Seisholmtaren and NW

of Springen Light (65°55'N., 12°13'E.). Buoy Light, 2.75

miles ENE of Springen Light, bearing 069°, passes between

Seisholmtaren and Springen Light.

7.30 From Springen, the white sector of Springen Light leads into

the fairway, passing clear of the islets on each side.

7.30 Indreleia continues NNE through Alstfjorden to Ulvangen.

Risvaerfjorden to Ulvangen 

7.31 Indreleia continues N from Risvaerfjorden to Ulvangen, about 70 miles distant. At position 65°08'N, 11°51'E,

there is a choice of three different routes. The W route through

Vegafjorden is the preferred route. Caution is advised in the W

approaches to Leka (65°02'N, 11°26'E.) where many depths

less than charted are known to exist.

7.31 Dolmsundet (65°00'N., 11°37'E.) leads ENE from Risvaerfjorden, passing between Dolma and the mainland SE, and

forms the principal channel of Indreleia.

7.31 The white sector of the light close NNE of Eiternestangen,

bearing between 199° and 203°, astern, leads toward Dolmsundet, leading E of Hornbaen, then E of an 11.9m patch, 0.35

mile NE of Hornbaen, and E of Abregtaren, 0.4 mile farther

NE.

7.31 From a position E of Abregtaren, Dolmsund Light

(65°00'N., 11°39'E.) ahead, leads clear of danger into Dolmsundet. This sector also leads from seaward passing N of

Hornbaen and the 11.9m patch NE of it; however, Abregtaren

lies within the light sector. With Dolmsund Light astern, this

leads clear N of Tenfjordsluen, a 5.8m patch, lying 0.8 mile NE

of the light. The 245.5° line of bearing should be favored.

7.31 Madsoygalten Light (65°03'N., 11°41'E.) ahead, leads into

the center of the fairway of Lekafjorden.

7.31 Indreleia leads from the NE end of Dolmsundet through

Lekafjorden, between Madsoya and Leka on the NW and

Austra on the SE. Lekafjorden is joined at its SW end by one of

the channels leading inwards from Sklinna. 

7.31 Lekafjorden (65°05'N., 11°47'E.) may be entered from a

mid-channel position SE of Magsoygalten Light, with the

white sector of Sore Gutvik Light (65°05'N., 11°49'E.) ahead.

When E of Magsoygalten Light, steer a mid-channel course to

clear off-lying dangers on either side.

7.31 From the N end of Lekafjorden, the track of Indreleia passes

between Melsteinen and Sorflesene, a group of partly submerged rocks about 0.4 mile E of the island, then between Helgelandsflesa (65°13'N., 11°54'E.), 2 miles NNE of Melsteinen,

and Uertaren, a reef which dries, 0.7 mile SSE of Helgelandsflesa. Several shoals lie between Sorflesene and Uertaren

on the E side of the fairway. 

7.31 Vessels in the vicinity of Melsteinen may expect a SW tidal

current out of Royningen, except during strong W winds, when

a weak tidal current may set to the E.

7.31 Vessels approaching Melsteinenfjorden from the S should

pass E of Lilletaren, 0.75 mile SSW of Melsteinen. The white

sector of the light on Helgelandsflesa leads E of Lilletaren and

then between Melsteinen (65°11'N., 11°51'E.) and the shoals

to the E and NE of the island.

7.31 With the light on Melsteinen, astern, and showing green, this

leads through the fairway between Helgelandsflesa and the

NW side of Uertaren.

7.31 Langsundet (65°14'N., 11°58'E.) is formed between Langoya on the W, and Kvaloya on the E, and lies 2.25 miles NE

of Melsteinen. 

7.31 Good anchorage may be taken in Langsundet, in 10 to 17m,

sand and clay, abreast the summit of Langoya. 

7.32 After passing SE of Helgelandsflesa in Melsteinfjorden, Indreleia continues NNE on the W sides of the islands

of Langoya and Kvaloya.

7.32 Lyngvaer (65°16'N., 11°58'E.) is a group of islets and rocks

extending about 3 miles N from Kvaloya. Tyven, lying about 1

mile NW of Kvaloya, and Vagoytaren, a 7m patch a little over

1 mile NNE of Tyven, are the farthest W of the dangers off

Lyngvaer.

7.32 Gronstabben (65°16'N., 11°56'E.), a reef, lies on the W side

of the fairway, 0.85 mile NW of Vagoytaren.

7.32 From Gronstabben, Indreleia passes between Gloven, 3.5

miles NE of Gronstabben, on the E side of the fairway, and

Biskoptaren, a 1.8m patch on the W side of the fairway, 0.9

mile NW of Gloven.

7.32 Helbergotaren (65°20'N., 12°03'E.) lies on the E side of the

fairway, 1.25 miles NNE of the light on Gloven; it has a least

depth of 1.8m.

7.32 Helbergoya, marked by a light, lies on the W side of the

fairway, 0.7 mile NNE of Biskoptaren; foul ground extends 0.1

mile SSW and 0.8 mile NNE from the island. The many shoal

patches in this area may be seen on the chart. 

7.32 Torgfjorden extends NE from the vicinity of Sandvaerodtaren (65°22'N., 12°03'E.), situated at the extremity of the

foul ground NNE of Helbergoya. 

7.32 Vessels proceeding N pass E of Helgelandsflesa; then a midchannel course NNE will pass about 0.2 mile E of the light on

Gronstabben. When abreast of Gronstabben, steer in the white

sector of the light on Helbergoya, which leads in the fairway

passing W of Gloven and E of Biskoptaren.

7.32 When SE of Biskoptaren, steer a mid-channel course to pass

about 0.2 mile E of Helbergoya and the same distance E of

Sandvaerodtaren, and then into the SW entrance of Torgfjorden. 

7.33 Lyngvaerfjorden (65°15'N., 12°05'E.) is enclosed by

Kvaloya and Lyngvaer, on the W, and the mainland, on the E.

7.33 Vessels entering Lyngvaerfjorden should proceed to a position about 1 mile NNE from the entrance, then steer E passing

N of Lyngvaertaren, at the N end of Lyngvaer. 

7.33 When in the white sector of Lyngvaergalten Light

(65°16'N., 12°03'E.) steer a course mid-channel to pass 0.5

mile NE of the light.

7.33 The white sector of Lyngvaergalten Light, astern, will lead

into Vikvagen, where anchorage may be taken, in 19m, hard

sand.

7.33 Vikvagen (65°18'N., 12°07'E.) is encumbered with shoal

patches and small islets; the approach to the anchorage passes

close SE of a 1m patch and a 7m patch lies close off the S side

of the fairway. These and other dangers may be seen on the

chart.

7.33 Somnesvagen (65°23'N., 12°10'E.) is entered off the SE side

of Torgfjorden, 2.25 miles from its S entrance. Somnesvagen is

approached between Somnesoya, an islet, on the S side, and

the S extremity of Sylskjaerene, 0.75 mile N.
146 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

7.33 Anchorage may be taken SE of Jarholme, an islet 0.75 mile

within the entrance to Somnesvagen, in 18.3m, sand and clay.

7.33 Berg (65°22'N., 12°12'E.) (World Port Index No. 23020)

close NE of Jarholme, has two quays. One quay is 62m long,

with depths of 9.3 to 12m alongside; the other quay is 55m

long, with depths of 7.6 to 10.8m alongside. 

7.34 Bronnoysundet (65°27'N., 12°10'E.), on which the

port of Bronnoysund is situated, is entered between Ormoya

(65°26'N., 12°09'E.), situated on the W side of Torgfjorden 5

miles NE of its S entrance, and Stokholmen close E; it leads 3

miles NNE into Tilremfjorden.

7.34 The passage through Bronnoysundet is narrow and local

knowledge is required; however, it is well-marked.

7.34 Tidal currents in Bronnoysundet are strong, making navigation difficult.

7.34 This channel can only be used by vessels drawing up to

5.2m, with a maximum beam of 12.2m. 

7.34 Bronnoysund (65°28'N., 12°12'E.) (World Port Index No.

22990) is a coastal natural harbor situated on the E side of

Bronnoysundet, 2 miles NNE of Ormoya. The harbor area

covers most of Bronnoysundet.

7.34 Bronnoysund may be approached from N or S. The least

depth in the S approach from Torgfjorden is 6m and in the N

exit to Tilremfjorden the least depth is 6.5m. A bridge with a

vertical clearance of 30m spans the fairway in a position about

0.4 mile SW of the church in Bronnoysund.

7.34 Tides rise about 2.7m at springs and 2.1m at neaps.

7.34 There is about 630m of total quayage. Berths vary from 14 to

102m in length with depths of 1.5 to 10m alongside. Vessels up

to 5,000 tons can be accommodated.

7.34 It is reported that a deep-water quay 100m long with a depth

of 20m alongside, was under construction about 1.5 miles NNE

of Bronnoysund Church.

7.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively, the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center. The

pilot boards in positions 66°15.2'N, 12°35.9E for Asvaer or

64°44.0'N, 10°58.0'E for Grinna. Within the harbor area

power-driven vessels are required to proceed at no greater

speed than good seamanship and maneuverability demand to

avoid creating a damaging wash.

7.34 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.

7.34 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 12 to 16m, 1.25

miles SSW of the church in Bronnoysund, and in depths of 20

to 24m, sand, 1.5 miles NNE of the church.

7.34 Anchorage is prohibited close N of the quays to permit

maneuvering for vessels berthing and unberthing at the packetboat quays. 

7.35 The W route of Indrelia leads from the S entrance of

Torgfjorden, WNW, N of Sandvaer (65°21'N., 11°58'E.), and

Klubholmen Light, then NNW passing close E of Blabakflua

Light, then the track passes S and W of Uttorgvaer, an island

group 6 miles NNW of Helbergoya.

7.35 From the S entrance to Torgfjorden, vessels proceed WNW

on a mid-channel course which will lead S of Sandoytaren

(65°23'N., 12°00'E.), a reef with a charted depth of 4.9m,

situated about 1 mile ENE of Klubholmen Light.

7.35 From E of Klubholmen Light, a vessel should alter course to

Bronnoysund

Port of Bronnoysund HomePage

http://www.bronnoyhavn.com
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 147

Pub. 182

pass E of Hokstaren (65°24'N., 11°58'E.), a 2.4m patch, 1.5

miles N of the light.

7.35 On the E side of the fairway, 0.35 mile E of Hokstaren, lies a

14.9m patch; a 5.5m patch lies 0.25 mile farther NE.

7.35 Fleina, marked by a light, is situated 0.75 mile NE of

Hokstaren. Blabakflua Light lies 0.6 mile WNW of Fleina; the

fairway passes between these two lights.

7.35 After passing between Fleina and Blabakflua, Indreleia leads

NNW to pass between Knutstaren (65°26'N., 11°55'E.), a

1.8m patch 2 miles NW of Blabakflua. on the W side, and

Flestaren, a 4.9m patch, 0.55 mile E, on the E side. The white

sector of Blabakflua Light. astern, leads between these two

dangers. Tvertaren, a 7m shoal patch, lies on the SW side of

the fairway 0.5 mile NW of Blabakflua Light.

7.35 When the vessel is clear of Knutstaren, a NNE course may

be set, passing about 0.5 mile WNW of Uttorgflessa Light

(65°26'N., 11°57'E.) and W of the Uttorgvaer group.

7.35 This part of Indreleia crosses the E end of Vegafjorden in a

SSW to NNE direction. 

7.36 After passing into Vegafjorden, vessels should steer

for the W edge of the 67m summit of Ylvingen, which lies 10.5

miles NNE of Uttorgflessa Light.

7.36 Halholmen Light (65°32'N., 12°05'E.) is located on the SE

side of Indreleia, about 7 miles NNE of Uttorgflesa Light;

Klabben Light is situated 2.75 miles NW of Halholmen Light.

7.36 The white sector of Ylvingen Light, about 4 miles NNE of

Halholmen Light, leads through the fairway of Vegafjorden,

passing between the dangers in the vicinity of Halholmen Light

and the dangers off the SE side of Vega.

7.36 From Halholmen Light, vessels should alter course NE and

pass S of Ylvingen (65°36'N., 12°10'E.) and N of the shoals

lying about 0.5 to 1 mile N and NNE of the light. 

7.36 Indreleia leads about 7 miles N through Tilremfjorden from

Bronnoysundet to a junction between Hornsneset (65°35'N.,

12°18'E.) and Ylvingen, 3.5 miles WNW, with the W route of

Indreleia through Vegafjorden.

7.36 Nordtaren (65°34'N., 12°11'E.), a 1.8m shoal patch, lies on

the W side of Tilremfjorden, 3.25 miles SW of Hornsneset.

7.36 Anchorage,in 14m, sand and clay, may be taken in a cove,

near Tilrem, 3.5 miles NNE of Bronnoysund Church.

7.37 Velfjorden (65°35'N., 12°21'E.) is entered N of

Hornsneset, the W entrance point. The fjord penetrates the

coast about 11 miles SE to Nevernes Light (65°26'N.,

12°35'E.); from the light, Langfjorden continues about 6 miles

farther in the same direction. Okfjorden, Storfjorden, Litle

Borja, and Stor Borja, all opening off the E side of Velfjorden,

are deep and clear, but are unmarked.

7.37 Sorfjorden and Heggefjorden, branching off the S side of the

fjord and the extension of Langfjorden, are neither so deep nor

so free from dangers as the fjords on the E side; the land in

their vicinity is less mountainous.

7.37 Hornstaren (65°35'N., 12°19'E.), a shoal patch with a

charted depth of 1.8m, lies in the entrance of Velfjorden, 0.4

mile ENE of Hornsneset. Jenssluin, an 8.8m patch, lies 0.25

mile farther NE.

7.37 Manddauen Light is situated on a reef, 0.75 miles SE of

Horns-neset.

7.37 The entrance to Storfjorden is encumbered with dangers,

whose positions may best be seen on the chart.

7.37 Ice.—Sorfjorden, Heggefjorden, Stor Borja, and most of

Storfjorden are usually frozen over in winter. Ice forms first

and lasts longest in Langfjorden. Obstruction by ice is greatest

after the New Year.

7.37 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents usually set into Velfjorden with the rising tide and out with the falling tide. Currents usually set out of the branch fjords but they are affected

by the tide and wind. 

7.37 From the entrance N of Hornsneset, the W extremity of

Bjornholmen (65°37'N., 12°18'E.) in range 329°, astern, with

the E extremity of Kvitjerta, an islet 1 mile NNW of Bjornholmen, leads NE of Jenssluin, awash, and the shoal patches E.

7.37 A white sector of Manddauen Light, astern, leads through

the fairway of Velfjorden to within about 2 miles of Nevernes

Light; a white sector of that light ahead, leads through the

fairway from abreast Okfjorden to within a short distance of

the light.

7.37 All the branch fjords of Velfjorden afford suitable depths for

anchorage during the ice-free season. 

7.38 Vevelstadsundet is entered about 3.5 miles NNE of

Hornsneset and lies between the mainland and the E side of

Hamnoya. A 5.5m rocky shoal lies about 2 miles within the

entrance. This danger lies within the white sector of Snertholmen Light (65°43'N., 12°28'E.).

7.38 Forvik, located on the mainland about 0.5 mile S of Snertholmen Light, has a timber quay, 36m long, with depths of 4.2

to 6.5m alongside.

7.38 Between the S end of Ylvingen (65°36'N., 12°10'E.) and

Ulvangen, about 30 miles NNE, Indreleia is comparatively free

from dangers.

7.38 Tides—Currents.—In this section of Indreleia, the tidal

current sets N from about half rising tide to half falling tide; the

period of the S current is the reverse of this. Their strength is

variable and may be affected by the prevailing wind. The tidal

currents set out of the adjacent fjords, and when the direction

of the set coincides with that of the main tidal current the latter

may run with great strength, particularly in the nar-row

channels.

7.38 In position 65°36' N, 12°13' E, off the SE side of Ylvingen,

the W and E routes of Indreleia unite and continue 7.5 miles N

to Skjelva (65°43'N., 12°19'E.), then 23 miles NNE through

Tjottafjorden and Alstfjorden to Ulvangen. 

7.39 Tjottafjorden consists of the waters around the

junction of Indreleia and the entrance to Vefsnfjorden off the

SW side of the island Tjotta. Mindvaeret, the foul ground NE

of Skjelva, and Mindlandet, the 159m high island 2 miles NE

of Skjelva, form the SE side of Tjottafjorden.

7.39 Breigtaren (65°45'N., 12°21'E.), awash, lies 2.25 miles

NNE of Skjelva and Nordtaren, with a charted depth of 0.9m,

lies 0.3 mile farther NNE; these dangers lie off the NW side of

Mindvaeret.

7.39 Foul ground extends 1.25 miles into Tjottafjorden from the S

extremity of Tjotta.

7.39 Tjotta (65°50'N., 12°26'E.), a small port, is located on the S

side of the island Tjotta. Local knowledge is required to enter

the harbor, which has depths of 3.6 to 5.1m alongside the

steamer quay.
148 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

7.39 Tjotta Church, with a square tower and a dark gray roof, is

prominent.

7.40 Erviken (65°48'N., 12°28'E.), situated on the NW

side of Mindlandet, 2.25 miles SSE of Tjotta Church, has a

quay, 26m long, with alongside depths of 8.3 to 13m. 

7.40 Vefsnfjorden is entered from Indreleia through Tjottafjorden, between Langholmen (65°49'N., 12°27'E.), off the SE

coast of Tjotta, and the NW coast of Mindlandet, 1 mile SE.

The W arm of the fjord extends 14 miles NE, between the

mainland and Alsten; the SE arm of the fjord extends 12 miles

SE to the port of Mosjoen.

7.40 The outer part of the fjord is sparsely vegetated and the landscape is dominated by De Syv Sostre, in the SE part of Alsten.

The inner part of the fjord is wooded and most of the villages

are situated there. 

7.40 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run into Velsnfjorden

with the rising tide and out of the fjord with the falling tide. At

the entrance, when the ebb coincides in direction with the

current in the channel off the entrance, the resultant flow may

have considerable strength.

7.40 The fairway of Vefsnfjorden is free of dangers other than

those shown on the chart. The head of the fjord is shallow for a

distance of 0.75 miles N of Mosjoen.

7.40 The fairway of Vefsnfjorden is about 0.4 mile wide between

Sornes (65°58'N., 12°52'E.), on the W side, and Nubben, on

the E side, about 11 miles NW of Mosjoen.

7.40 Anchorage may be taken, in 17 to 20m, in the cove on the W

side of Sornes; it shelves quickly to the N.

Mosjoen (65°51'N., 13°11'E.) 

World Port Index No. 22920

7.41 Mosjoen is a small natural harbor situated at the head

of Vefsnfjorden, about 26 miles from Indreleia. It consists of

the quays and the city of Mosjoen, which is situated 0.75 mile

S of the quays.

7.41 Winds—Weather.—Mosjoen is well sheltered and port

cargo handling is seldom interrupted. The port is usually icefree, except for some shallow bays which may freeze over in

severe winters; shipping is rarely hampered by ice.

7.41 Tides—Currents.—Mean High Water Spring tides in Mosjoen are 2.7m and MLWS is 0.4m; the greatest spring range

observed was 4m.

7.41 Depths—Limitations.—The channel leading to the port is

narrow.

7.41 The aluminum quay is 271m long, with a depth of 11m

alongside. Other quays range in length from 45 to 325m, with

depths 3 to 9.5m alongside.

7.41 Vessels over 10.1m draft are berthed only at HW.

7.41 It was reported that a 55,000 dwt vessel, with a length of

212m and a draft of 11m, was accommodated in the port.

7.41 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively, the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center. The

pilot boards in positions 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7E (1.5 miles N of

Donna) or 66°17.0'N, 12°12.6'E (2.4 miles WNW of Asvaer

Light). 

7.41 Anchorage.—Large vessels may anchor off Halsoy, 0.9 mile

N of Mosjoen, in 30m, sand and clay, and off the aluminum

works, in 40m, sand and clay.

7.42 The track of Indreleia, N of Tjottafjorden, leads

between Sondre Rosoya and Norde Rosoya, on the W side, and

Tjotta, on the E side.

7.42 Juledagene Light (65°51'N., 12°23'E.) is situated near the

edge of the foul ground extending W from Tjotta, about 8

miles N of Skjelva. A patch, with a depth of 8.5m, lies on the

W side of the fairway, 0.45 mile W of Juledagene Light.

7.42 Rosoytaren (65°52'N., 12°22'E.), with a charted depth of

5.8m, lies 0.25 mile off the NE extremity of Nordre Rosoya; it

may be passed on either side.

7.42 Hamnesleira, a large open anchorage, is entered between

Faksholmen, off the NW part of Tjotta and Haugsneset

(65°53'N., 12°24'E.), 1.25 miles N. Large vessels anchor, in 25

to 30m, sand and shells, 0.75 mile ENE of Haugsneset; a rock

is charted about 0.3 mile ENE of the anchorage. 

7.42 From the vicinity of Rosoytaren, Indreleia continues NNW,

passing between the SW end of Alsten and Skarvoya

(65°53'N., 12°20'E.), which lies 1.5 miles NW of Haugsneset.

7.42 A rock, awash, lies on the foul ground extending NNE from

Valoya, about 1 mile WNW of Haugsneset.

7.42 When E of Skarvoya, the fairway continues N about 1 mile,

and passes between Karholmen (65°55'N., 12°23'E.) on the E

side, and an 11m patch 0.4 mile W. Then a mid-channel course

leads NNE passing E of Sondre Soroyholme, 0.45 mile NNW

of Karholmen.

7.42 The NE extremity of Alteren is situated on the W side of

Indreleia, 0.85 mile N of Sondre Soroyholme; Valloygalten

(65°57'N., 12°24'E.), with a least depth of 4.9m, lies 0.8 mile

NNE of Alteren. 

7.43 Alstfjorden extends from the vicinity of Sondre

Soroyholme (65°55'N., 12°22'E.) along the NW side of Alsten, to the vicinity of Sandnessjoen 9 miles NE, where it leads

into Ulvangen.

7.43 A channel from seaward entered off Ytreholmen joins

Alstfjorden, at its SW end, from Alterfjorden.

7.43 Vikholmen (65°57'N., 12°26'E.), a small islet, lies on the E

side of the fairway through Alstfjorden, 1.5 miles ENE of

Alteren. Foul ground extends 0.7 mile NNE from the islet.

7.43 Valloya and Svinoya lie in a NNE direction from 0.3 to 0.7

mile, respectively, NNE of Valloygalten; Svartskjaer lies 0.15

mile off the NE extremity of Svinoya.

7.43 From abreast Sondre Soroyholme, vessels can steer for the

summit of Skorpa (66°02'N., 12°33'E.), which rises about 8

miles NNE. This course leads through the fairway of Indreleia

into Alstfjorden. When well into the fjord, a mid-channel

course will lead NE to the S entrance of Ulvangen. 

7.43 Sandnessjoen (66°01'N., 12°38'E.) (World Port Index No.

22750), protected from the S by a road embankment and by the

island of Holmen, lies on the NW side of Alsten, at the junction of Alstfjorden and Ulvangen. The entrance to the harbor is

from the E.

7.43 During strong W winds, an unpleasant short sea is raised off

Sandnessjoen; at times strong squalls come down from the

mountains situated about 5 miles S.

7.43 The harbor authority operates a total quayage of about 780m.

The berths vary in length from 18 to 148m, with depths of 2.6
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 149

Pub. 182

to 10.5m alongside. Some of the berths and installations are

situated in Sandnesvagen, on the SE side of town, and in Botnfjorden, 1.5 miles SE; these are accessible from Leirfjorden.

7.43 Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea

Net or alternatively, the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center. The

pilot boards in positions 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7E (1.5 miles N of

Donna) or 66°17.0'N, 12°12.6'E (2.4 miles WNW of Asvaer

Light).

7.43 Local knowledge is required for vessels to take up berthing

space, as the tidal currents are strong.

7.43 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.

7.43 Anchorage is available, in 16.5 to 24m, 0.15 mile W of the S

end of Holmen.

Donna to Bodo 

7.44 The high peaks of the mainland and larger islands

often rise to several thousand feet and at times are visible over

50 miles.

7.44 Sanna (66°30'N., 12°03'E.), the principal island of Traena,

lies 30 miles NNE of Ytterholmen; it is by far the most important landmark on this coast. Its principal peak, Traenstaven,

rises to about 331m, and may be seen at a distance of more

than 40 miles; it is unmistakable.

7.44 Kunna, a headland on the mainland 44 miles NE of Sanna,

can be made out when in the vicinity of Traena.

7.44 Three high peaks rise on the island of Tomma, about 21

miles SE of Sanna. The peak farthest N rises to a height of

916m and resembles Traenstaven.

7.44 Lovunden (66°22'N., 12°20'E.), 619m high, lies about 10

miles SE of Sanna. The island appears isolated but is easily

identified by its nearly perpendicular W side and the gradual

slope on its E side.

7.44 Luroy, an island lying about 11 miles ENE of Lovunden, is

689m high. It is more rounded and has less abrupt declivities

than other islands in the vicinity. Hestmannoy lies with its S

end about 4 miles N of Luroy and has a pointed peak 568m

high. 

7.44 Telnestind, on the mainland, rises to a height of 967m, 0.75

mile inland, in a position 8.75 miles ENE of Hestmannoy.

7.44 Between Hestmannoy and Kunna, about 28 miles NNE, the

coast line is rather indistinct, but Kunna, which appears as an

island, is easily identified. 

7.44 Fugloya (67°04'N., 13°50'E.), an island about 8 miles NE of

Kunna, is steep and rises to a height of 765m. Sandhornet, a

conspicuous mountain on the island of Sandhornoya, 5.5 miles

NE of Fugloya, is 996m high; its W face is precipitous.

7.44 From this part of the coast, Svartisen, a range of glacierbearing mountains, may be seen. It is one of the most remarkable features of this part of Norway. As there is no glacier so

near the sea on any other part of the coast, it can be identified

with certainty from a considerable distance seaward.

7.44 Svartisen stands out well from dark mountains in the background. In spring and cold summers, it appears white; in warm

summer,s when surface snow melts, it becomes bluish-green.

In winter, when all mountains are covered with snow, Svartisen, seen from NW and N, appears to run parallel with the

horizen, with hardly any depression between peaks; the highest

part only shows some dark patches of bare rock among the

snow.

7.44 Landegode (67°24'N., 14°20'E.), 803m high, lies 6 miles

NNW of Bodo; in clear weather the S part of the Lofoten Islands will be visible about 55 miles to the WSW. 

7.45 A bank, with a depth of 12.8m, was reported to lie

about 110 miles W of Sanna. A depth of 14.6m, the position of

which is doubtful, was reported about 85 miles WNW of

Sanna. A depth of 10m was reported to lie about 0.2 mile NW

of the 14.6m patch.

7.45 The area for about 20 miles W of Donna (66°06'N.,

12°33'E.) is foul. Ytreholmen lies about 15 miles W of the SW

point of the island.

7.45 Lillesveet (66°06'N., 11°31'E.) and Skolton, rocky banks

situated about 7 miles NW of Ytterholmen, have least depths of

27m and 26m, respectively. Between these banks and

Ytreholmen, there are other shoals and banks which break.

7.45 Floholman (66°10'N., 11°42'E.) lies 4 miles NE of Skolton;

Floholm is the middle islet of the group. Lunboen the farthest

SW of the group, lies 1.5 miles NE of Skolton. It dries at very

LW and the breakers are visible from the offing for a

considerable distance. Foul ground extends about 2 miles NW

from Floholm.

Luroy

Courtesy of Kystriksyeien Reiseliv AS

Donna
150 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

7.45 Moholmssve, an isolated bank with a depth of 29m, lies 5

miles NNE of Floholm and Samskallen, also an isolated bank

with a depth of 33m, lies 9 miles farther NNE.

7.45 Myken (66°45'N., 12°25'E.), the group of islands next N of

Traena, lies with its S end about 15 miles NE of Sanna. The

water surrounding Myken is deep almost to its outermost islets.

This can cause the sea to break over the islets with strength.

7.45 Tennholmen, marked at its SW end by a light, lies 17 miles

NE of Myken. Below-water rocks extend about 1 mile W from

the light and 5.75 miles NE. Sveboen, a rocky shoal with a

charted depth of 4.8m, lies 5.75 miles WSW of the light; a

rocky 5.8m shoal lies 2.5 miles S of Sveboen.

7.45 Gronna (67°01'N., 13°11'E.), a dangerous group of islets

and rocks, lies 2.5 miles N of Tennholmen, and is the outermost danger WNW of Kunna (66°57'N., 13°31'E.). In stormy

weather and with high tides, the sea breaks over the entire

Gronna group.

Asvaer to Indreleia 

7.46 Asvaer (66°14'N., 12°12'E.), an island group situated

19 miles NE of Ytterholmen, consists of a group of rocks and

islets; some of them are of a moderate height. 

7.46 Asvaer Light is shown from a prominent tower, 18m in

height, standing near the NE extremity of the group. A racon is

located at the light tower.

7.46 There are no dangers in the seaward approach to Asvaer,

which leads between Ovskallen (66°25'N., 11°58'E.), an 11m

depth lying about 5 miles SSW of Sanna, and the Floholman

group, about 13 miles farther SSW.

7.46 A principal channel leads in through Nordre Asvaerfjorden,

off the N side of Asvaer, through Stifjorden, 12 miles ESE of

Tomfjorden, then 11 miles E to join Indreleia off the SE or NE

side of Tomma.

7.46 The approach to Asvaer in not difficult in favorable weather.

7.46 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Nordre Asvaerfjorden flow NE on the flood and SW on the ebb.

7.46 Pilotage.—A pilot station is situated on Andersbakken

(66°16'N., 12°18'E.), the NE island of Asvaer. The pilots

embark 2.5 miles WNW of the station.

7.46 The pilot radio calling frequency is VHF channel 16; the

working frequencies are VHF channels 12 and 13. 

7.46 Nordre Asvaerfjorden is not difficult to approach in daylight

with clear weather. The peaks on Tomma are especially useful

in making the entrance. 

7.46 Breifind (66°15'N., 12°48'E.), 821m high, in the S part of

Tomma, bearing about 098° leads in N of Asvaer.

7.46 After passing N of the light on Andersbakken, course should

be altered to pass S of Syntholmbaen, a drying reef about 3.5

miles ESE of the light, and N of Utoybaen (66°14'N.,

12°36'E.), about 4 miles ESE of Synstholmbaen. Utoybaen lies

about 0.7 mile off the NE extremity of Donna.

7.46 Stifjorden, between the S side of Tomma and the N side of

Lokta, is free from dangers, except for a small area of foul

ground extending about 0.5 mile N from the NE end of Lokta;

it joins Indreleia off the NE coast of Lokta.

7.46 Skifjorden, leading S from Stifjorden between the E side of

Donna and the W side of Lokta, is part of the W route of

Indreleia between Ulvangen and Gjeroya. The channel passes

either side of Svensskjeret (66°06'N., 12°41'E.), an abovewater rock lying 0.45 mile E of Donna. Dangers in the fairway

may best be seen on the chart.

7.46 In Skifjorden, the tidal currents nearly always set N along

the coast of Donna; northbound vessels should keep to the W

side of the channel and southbound vessels should keep to the

E side.

Ulvangen to Meloyfjorden 

7.47 Between Ulvangen and Gjeroya, about 25 miles NNE

of Donna, there are two channels of Indreleia. The W channel

leads NW of Tomma through Tomfjorden. The E channel,

passing E of Tomma, is the preferred route. It is less intricate

and has a relatively wide fairway which is practically free from

dangers. 

7.47 From the N end of Ulvangen the fairway of Indreleia leads E

of Finnkona (Finkonna) (66°07'N., 12°44'E.), Lokta and

Tomma, passing W of Hugla and Handnesoy.

7.47 Rana, the approach to the port of Mo I Rana is entered from

Indreleia, on the SE side of Lokta and NE of Finnkona.

Bruneset (66°08'N., 12°50'E.), 2.25 miles ENE of Finnkona, is

the S entrance point of Rana and Huglneset, 2.5 miles NNE of

Bruneset, is the N entrance point.

7.47 Rana extends 24 miles ENE to Stromholmen where Nordana

leads 11 miles farther ENE to Mo I Rana and the mouth of

Ranelva.

7.47 Branch fjords include Utskarpen, Elsfjorden, and Sorfjorden.

7.47 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Lokta are

variable. In Rana, they usually set out with the falling tide and

into the fjord with the rising tide. In the outer part of the fjord,

the ebb current is strongest on the S side. 

7.47 During thaws, accompanied by prevailing E winds, the set in

the fjord may be continuously outward and the velocity may be

2 to 3 knots; in the vicinity of the head of the fjord there is

usually a constant outward set. 

7.48 Ranskjeret (66°09'N., 12°52'E.), an above-water

rock, lies 1.5 miles NE of Bruneset in the entrance to Rana.

From Ranskjeret, the fairway is free of dangers to Bardalsoya,

a distance of about 13 miles.

7.48 Storgrunnen, a rocky 14m patch, lies 0.5 mile WSW of Bardalsoya. Mud flats extend S from Bardalsoya to the mainland.

7.48 At the head of the fjord, for about 1 mile SW of Mo I Rana,

the coastal reef dries and extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in

places.

7.48 An anchorage is charted on the SE side of Bardalsoya, in

25m. A 6m line is formed 183m S, W, and N of the anchorage.

7.48 Anchorage can be obtained in Utskarpen (66°15'N.,

13°35'E.), 5 miles ENE of Bardalsoya, in 33m, clay, at the

discretion of the pilot. 

7.48 Nesna (66°12'N., 13°01'E.) is a small town with several light

industries. Located at the end of a peninsula extending from

the mainland, it is E of the island of Hugla and S of the island

of Handnesoya. Nesna has a concrete jetty with a NNE-SSW

orientation. It is 117m long and has depths of 6.5 to 8.1m

alongside. At the head of the jetty, a berth, orientated ESEWNW, also of concrete construction, is 66m long and has

depths of 3.9 to 7.1m alongside. Both the jetty and berth pro-
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 151

Pub. 182

tect a ferry and boat harbor on the N side of town.

7.48 Hemnesberget (66°13'N., 13°36'E.) is a small natural

coastal port situated on the E entrance point of Elsfjorden,

about 2 miles SSE of the entrance to Uts-karpen. A mooring

buoy is moored off the quays, which are up to 60m long and

have depths from 3.9 to 14.5m alongside.

Mo I Rana (66°19'N., 14°08'E.)

World Port Index No. 22760

7.49 Mo I Rana, also known as Mo, is situated at the head

of Nordrana, near the mouth of Ranelv, and is approached

through Rana. It consists of the city, with an inner harbor with

berthing facilities for small vessels and an outer harbor that can

accommodate large vessels alongside and at anchor.

7.49 Winds—Weather.—The port is well sheltered and normal

operations are seldom interfered with by weather conditions.

The harbor is ice free.

7.49 Tides—Currents.—The range of spring tides is 2.7m, a

range of 3.6m was observed during 1951-53.

7.49 Depths—Limitations.—The Town Quay is 250m long, with

depths of 5.5 to 8m alongside. The Jernverk Steel Quay is

250m, long with a depth of 8m alongside. 

7.49 There are facilities for ro-ro and container vessels. Koksverk

Coke Pier has quays, 130m long on the N side and 90m long on

the S side, with depths of 11m alongside. Bleikvassli Gruber

Pyrite Quay is 35m long, with a depth of 7m alongside.

7.49 A new iron ore quay can accommodate vessels up to 80,000

dwt, with a draft of 16m.

7.49 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be

ordered using the Safe Sea Net or alternatively, the Lodingen

Pilot Booking Center. The pilot boards in positions 66°17.0'N,

12°12.5'E (2 miles WNW of Asvaer Light) or 66°15.3'N,

12°36.7'E (smaller vessels after agreement with the pilot

station). 

7.49 The pilot calling frequency is VHF channel 16; the pilot

working frequencies are VHF channels 12 and 14.

7.49 Tugs are recommended for vessels of more than 10,000 dwt

and are available with 24 hours notice.

7.49 Regulations.—Vessels operating within the seaplane harbor,

N of the harbormaster’s office, are required to maneuver with

care and comply with the regulations governing the transit of

seaplane operating areas. A patrol boat displaying a yellow and

black flag patrols the seaplane harbor when seaplanes are operating.

7.49 Anchorage.—Anchorage in the harbor is to be advised by

the harbor pilot. 

7.49 Caution.—A dumping ground was established 0.7 mile

NNE of Hauknesbukta Light. 

7.50 Indreleia continues N of Rana passing W of Huglneset (66°10'N., 12°51'E.), the SW extremity of Hugla, an

island which rises to a height of 623m, in its S part.

7.50 Mefjordsholman (66°12'N., 12°50'E.), consisting of two

small islets fringed by reefs, lies on the W side of the fairway,

off the SE end of Tomma, about 24 miles N of Huglneset.

7.50 Handnesholmen, an islet marked by a light, lies on the E side

of the fairway about 2 miles NE of Mefjordsholman. Foul

ground extends about 0.3 mile NNE from the islet.

7.50 A white sector of the light on Handnesholmen will lead

through the fairway from a position 0.3 mile W of Huglneset,

to within about 1 mile of the light.

7.50 Tomfjorden, which leads NE from the inner end of Nordre

Asvaerfjorden, passes N of Tomma and joins Indreleia NE of

Kjerringskjeret (66°20'N., 12°53'E.), a foul area marked by a

light, situated 1.75 miles NNE of Tomma. 

7.50 Odoyflua (66°21'N., 12°55'E.), a drying rock, lies at the SW

entrance point of Stigfjorden, 1.5 miles NNE of Kjerringskjeret.

7.50 Stigfjorden, formed between Stigen on the W and Aldra on

the E, is the N continuation of Indreleia to Bonetskjeret, 9

miles N, and is free from dangers in the fairway.

Port of Mo I Rana HomePage

http://www.portofmoirana.no

Mo I Rana

Mo I Rana
152 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

7.50 Teisten (66°22'N., 12°56'E.), a small islet on the W side of

the fairway, lies 1.25 miles NNE of Odoyflua.

7.50 Aldersundet is entered E of Teisten; it is clear of dangers in

the fairway. Aldra forms the W side of the passage; the E side

of the passage is formed by the mainland. Three overhead

cables span Aldersundet between Aldra and the mainland.

7.50 At the N end of Stigfjorden, the track of Indreleia passes W

of three small islands, Brusoya, Rundvedoya and Langvedoya;

it then leads E of Bonetskjeret (66°29'N., 12°58'E.), 1.5 miles

NW of Langvedoya.

7.50 Kvina, an inlet entered off the E side of Indreleia, ENE of

Rundvedoya, is free from dangers in the fairway.

7.50 Kvina (66°28'N., 13°10'E.), a village at the head of the inlet,

has a jetty, with a berth 18m long, at its head; there are depths

of 4.5 to 5.8m alongside. 

7.51 From Bonetskjeret, Indreleia passes through Kvaroyfjorden, in a NNW direction; then it turns E passing N of

Vikingen Light (66°32'N., 12°58'E.), and S of Rangsundoya.

A 14.9m patch lies in the SW entrance to Kvaroyfjorden, 0.35

mile NE of Bonetskjeret. 

7.51 There is a 4.3m shoal patch on the E side of the fairway, 1.25

miles ENE of Bonetskjeret. A 10m patch lies 0.2 mile NW of

the 4.3m depth.

7.51 After passing SE of Rangsundoya, 3 miles NE of Vikingen

Light, a vessel should steer N to pass between Rangsundoya

and Gjeroya on the W and the island of Renga located about 1

mile E. 

7.51 Lamannskjeret (66°36'N., 13°05'E.), a reef, lies on the E

side of the fairway, about 2 miles NNW of the S extremity of

Renga. Other dangers, which may be seen on the chart, lie off

the W side of Renga.

7.51 From abreast the N extremity of Renga, vessels should steer

N through Rodoyfjorden, passing between Rodoya and the

mainland.

7.51 Rodoy (66°39'N., 13°05'E.) is a small coastal harbor situated

at the SE extremity of Rodoya. It may be entered from the S

through Rodoysundet. The timber quay is 31m long and has

depths of 6.3 to 8.5m alongside; however, local knowledge is

required.

7.52 Sandverken (66°39'N., 13°06'E.) lies on the W side

of the fairway, 0.6 mile SE of Rodoy. Sorskallen, a 0.9m

isolated patch, lies 0.2 mile SSW of Sandverken.

7.52 Ronvikskjerane (66°40'N., 13°11'E.), a group of abovewater rocks on the E side of Indreleia, lies about 3 miles NE of

Sandverken. Klauskjeret, an above-water rock, is about 1 mile

NNE of Ronvikskjerane, in about mid-channel of the entrance

to Tjonsfjorden.

7.52 A mid-channel course through Rodoyfjorden leads clear of

the dangers.

7.52 Svinvaer (66°45'N., 13°10'E.) is situated on the W side of

Indreleia, 2.75 miles NNE of Rodoya. In the fairway between

Svinvaer and Amnoya, 2.25 miles E, are two 14m shoals

located, respectively, 0.8 mile E, and 1.25 miles E of the NE

extremity of Svinvaer. A small islet lies 0.25 mile E of

Svinvaer.

7.52 Meloyfjorden is entered between Svinvaer and Amnoya.

Meloyfjorden to Saltfjorden 

7.53 Indreleia continues from the junction of Rodoyfjorden, Otervaerfjorden, and Skarsfjorden for 11 miles NNE

and ENE through Meloyfjorden, then turning NE through

Meloysundet. When clear of Meloysundet, Indreleia continues

7 miles NNW across Gasvaerfjorden and Stottfjorden to

Stottsundet. This route is suitable for large vessels.

7.53 An entrance from seaward through Tennholmfjorden gives

access to Indreleia through Gasvaerfjorden and Stottfjorden.

7.53 Angersholmen Light (66°46'N., 13°16'E.) is situated on the

E side of the fairway, 0.35 mile off Amnoya.

7.53 Mefjordholmen, a group of islets and rocks, lies on the W

side of the fairway, about 1 mile WNW of Angersholmen

Light. A shoal, with a depth of 8m, is situated 1.25 miles NE of

the light, on the SE side of the fairway.

7.53 Hatboen (66°48'N., 13°21'E.), marked by a beacon, is about

3 miles NE of Angersholmen Light on the N side of the fairway.

7.53 A mid-channel course will lead through Meloyfjorden,

passing between the N extremity of Amnoya and Hatboen. Between Hatboen and Meloysund Light, 5 miles ENE, the fairway is free from dangers.

7.53 Glomfjorden, the E continuation of Meloyfjorden, extends

10.5 miles E from its entrance S of the Meloysund Light; the

fairway is deep and free of dangers.

7.53 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 42m, spans

Glomfjorden, about 6 miles within its entrance.

7.53 Glomfjord (66°49'N., 13°59'E.) (World Port Index No.

22540) is situated on the N shore at the head of Glomfjorden. 

7.53 A private bulk quay, about 317m, long will accommodate a

vessel up to 15,000 dwt, with a draft of 8m.

7.53 The pilot boards, as follows:

1. North approach—2 miles N of Fleinvaer.

2. South approach—2 miles WNW of Asvaer Light.

7.53 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—for details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26. 

7.54 Meloysundet, the continuation of Indreleia, is formed

between Meloya on the W side and Skjaerpa on the E side.

7.54 Meloyneset Light (66°50'N., 13°35'E.) is situated on the E

extremity of Meloya, 0.75 mile NE of Meloysund Light.

Courtesy of Kystriksveien Reiseliv AS

Rodoy
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 153

Pub. 182

7.54 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 60m, spans

the S end of Meloysundet.

7.54 A white sector of Meloysund Light bearing astern, leads

through the fairway of Meloysundet to the E end of Gasvaerfjorden.

7.54 Mesoya (66°51'N., 13°40'E.), an island 318m high, lies with

its SW part 1 mile E of Meloya. It forms the E side of

Mesoyfjorden; Eiet, formed on its E sid,e leads NNE from

Glomfjorden.

7.54 Ornes (66°52'N., 13°42'E.) is situated on the mainland 0.45

mile E of the NE end of Mesoya. It is the administrative center

for the Meloy district.

7.54 Ornes may be approached from the N by rounding the N end

of Mesoya from Mesoyfjorden, or from the S through Glomfjorden then NNE through Eiet. The quays at the fish factories

have a total length of 152m; the main quay has a depth of 5.2m

alongside. The packet boat quay is 92m long, with depths of 4

to 9.7m alongside. 

7.54 Indreleia route leads across Gasvaerfjorden, then passes

through Stottsundet, between the Stottvaer group of islands and

the mainland. Kunna, the conspicuous headland at the NE end

of this stretch, lies with its seaward end about 7 miles NNW of

Meloysundet.

7.54 From Kunna NE to Fugloyfjorden, a distance of about 5

miles, Indreleia is open sea sheltered by the low-lying Gronna

(67°01'N., 13°10'E.) group of islets and rocks.

7.54 After entering Fugloyfjorden, the track continues in a

general NE direction and passes SE of Fugloya; then the trend

is N past the W side of Sandhornoya Island into Saltfjorden.

7.54 Caution.—During N gales, a heavy sea is raised on the bank

N of Kunna. This part of Indreleia is considered to be one of

the most difficult to navigate in bad weather and under such

conditions the area should be avoided by vessels without local

knowledge. 

7.55 Gasvaer (66°53'N., 13°29'E.) is a group of islands

lying 3.25 miles NW of Meloysund Light. Teksmona, an

island, lies on the E side of Indreleia, about 1 mile E of Gasvaer. The fairway in this area is free of danger; however, a 7.6m

patch lies about 0.3 mile W of the W extremity of Teksmona.

7.55 Ostholmen (66°53'N., 13°31'E.) is the farthest E of the

Gasvaer group. A reef, with some above-water rocks, extends

about 0.3 mile SW from a point on the mainland 1.75 miles

NNE of Ostholmen.

7.55 Stott (66°55'N., 13°28'E.) is the name for the general

vicinity of Stottsundet and the island group Stottvaer.

7.55 Skarvskjer Light is situated close off the E side of Stott, 2.75

miles NNW of Ostholmen.

7.55 Stottsundet, formed between Stott and the mainland, is free

of dangers except for Litlegrunnen, a 10m patch 0.9 mile N of

Skarvskjer Light, and Bonetskjergrunnen, a 7m patch lying

0.35 mile farther NNW.

7.55 Tides—Currents.—Though much influenced by the wind,

the tidal currents in Stottsundet have a tendency to set N with

the rising tide and S with the falling tide. During or after fresh

S or SW winds, the tidal currents may set continuously N.

7.55 A white sector of Skarvskjer Light, astern, leads N through

the fairway of Stottsundet. 

7.55 When clear of Stottsundet, vessels bound for Fugloyfjorden

can alter course E, taking care to avoid the foul ground extending about 0.4 mile N from the N face of Kunna.

7.55 On the W side of the channel, from about 0.5 mile to 1.25

miles N of Stott Light (66°57'N., 13°28'E.), is a rocky shoal

with a least depth of 7.6m. An 18.3m rocky patch lies in the

channel about 0.7 mile NE of the light; on the N side of the

fairway, about 2 miles NE of the light is Meloygrunnen, a 2.5m

shoal. A 14.6m patch lies S of Meloygrunnen, in about midchannel, between the shoal and Kunna.

7.55 A white sector of Digerflesa Light (66°58'N., 13°38'E.),

leads between the coastal reef N of Kunna and the S end of

Meloygrunnen, but it should be noted that the 14.6m patch lies

in this sector. A white sector of Finneset Light, located 2.5

miles E of Digerflesa Light, ahead, leads through the same

channel and S of Digerflesa. 

7.56 From the vicinity of Meloygrunnen and Digerflesa,

the track leads NE through Fugloyfjorden, passing SE of

Floholman (67°01'N., 13°42'E.), and then passing between the

E side of Fugloya and Rossoya, 1.75 miles E.

7.56 In Fugloyfjorden, the tidal currents are usually strong,

setting N on the flood and S on the ebb; heavy overfalls occur

during W and NW winds.

7.56 Fuglesangen (66°59'N., 13°38'E.), lying about 0.9 mile

WNW of Digerflesa Light, consists of some above and belowwater rocks which break in bad weather.

7.56 Above-water rocks lie on the E side of the fairway, about 0.4

mile off the W side of Rossoya.

7.56 Fugloya Light (67°04'N., 13°52'E.) is situated at the E end

of Fugloya. A rock, with a depth of 5.2m, lies 1 mile N of the

light.

7.56 From NE of Fugloya Light, Indreleia passes SE of Fleina, an

island lying 1.25 miles N of Fugloya, and E of Sor-Arnoya and

Nord-Arnoya and W of Veoya and Sandhornoya to the vicinity

of Marnesskagen (67°10'N., 14°05'E.), at the junction with

Saltfjorden.

7.56 A shore reef extends about 1 mile SE from Sor-Arnoya; the

fairway narrows to about 0.4 mile in this area. 

7.57 Sorfjorden, on the E side of Fugloyfjorden, is approached from its N end from Indreleia between Fugloya and

Sandhornoya, 3.5 miles ENE. The fjord extends S for 7.75

miles and is formed between Rossoya and Femris and a peninsula of the mainland on the W and by a peninsula of the mainland on the E. It is free of danger in the fairway, but its inner

part is icebound in the winter.

7.57 Stavsundet (67°01'N., 13°56'E.), formed between Femris

and the mainland to the S, leads into Sorfjorden; it can be used

by vessels up to 1,500 grt and 5.2m draft.

7.57 Rosoysundet, formed between Rosoya and Femris, connects

Fugloyfjorden and Sorfjorden. This narrow passage has no

known dangers in the fairway and can be used by vessels up to

11,000 grt and 7.9m draft. 

7.57 Anchorage may be taken by vessels of moderate size, with

local knowledge, in 20 to 40m, on the E side of Sorfjorden, 2.5

miles SE of the N extremity of Femris. Care must be taken to

anchor close inshore as the depths increase rapidly to the W. 

7.57 The W approach to Morsdalsfjorden from Indreleia is at the

N end of Sorfjorden; the fjord proper lies between the mainland peninsula on the E side of Sorfjorden and the SW side of

Sandhornoya. It extends about 6 miles SSE to the S end of
154 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

Sandhornoya, and then Holmsundfjorden continues E and N to

the S end of Nordfjorden.

7.57 Morsdalsfjorden is free from dangers, except for two rocky

shoals, with depths of 5.5m and 8.5m, which lie 0.5 mile W

and 0.4 mile N, respectively, of Sundsodden Light (67°05'N.,

14°04'E.).

7.57 There is anchorage for moderate-size vessels, in a depth of

18.3m, on the W side of Morsdalsfjorden, about 0.4 mile SSE

of Sundsodden Light. Vessels should get close under the land,

as the depths increase rapidly offshore. 

7.57 Saltfjorden, extending from Fleinvaer (67°10'N., 13°45'E.)

to Hopen, 23 miles ENE is crossed by Indreleia. The E part of

Saltfjorden is entered between Skarneset (67°12'N., 14°17'E.),

the N point of Sandhornoya, and Kvannoya, 3.25 miles NNE.

It gives access to Nordfjorden and through Saltstraumen to

Skjerstadfjorden and other inner fjords.

7.57 This part of Saltfjorden is deep and wide and is free of

dangers, though coastal reefs fringe each side; it is exposed to

seaward.

7.57 The tidal currents in the E part of Saltfjorden are strong; they

are usually E along the S shore and W along the N shore.

7.57 A mid-channel course in a NE direction will lead through

Saltfjorden to the entrance of Saltstraumen. 

7.58 Saltstraumen, a narrow channel on the S side of the

inner end of Saltfjorden, is entered between Kvitberget

(67°14'N., 14°36'E.), the NE extremity of Straumoya, and the

NW point of Knaplundoya, 0.45 mile NE. This channel leads

to the fjords E, which are collectively known as Indre Saltfjorden.

7.58 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m over a navigable

width of 80m, spans Saltstaumen.

7.58 Overhead cables span Saltstaumen; the least vertical clearance is 32m.

7.58 Winds—Weather.—With W winds, the flow is irregular,

and slack water may occur up to 1 hour earlier or later than

usual.

7.58 In springtime, with E winds and with the rivers in flood, the

beginning of the N current is advanced,; that current may run

for 7 hours, and the S current for only 5 hours.

7.58 Tides—Currents.—Skjerstadfjorden and its branch fjords

are filled and emptied by semidiurnal tides through two narrow

openings. These openings so restrict the volume of water that

can pass, as to cause:

1. A substantial difference between the outer and inner

levels.

2. Very strong tidal currents, especially in Saltstraumen.

3. A delay of about 1 hour 45 minutes in the times of

HW and LW within.

7.58 In Saltstraumen generally, the spring rate of the tidal current

is at least 3 knots, but attains 7.5 to 8.5 knots, and considerably

more in extreme conditions, in the narrows abreast Storholmen.

Saltstraumen
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 155

Pub. 182

7.58 Tidal intervals in Saltstraumen are shown below:

7.58 Vigorous eddies, several meters wide and with markedly

deep vortices, form when the flow is strong.

7.58 During the S current, eddies form between the S point of

Storholmen and Tuv, 0.7 mile SE; on the S shore of Svefjorden; and beyond. They are strongest in the basin formed by

Storholmen and the cove 0.2 mile E. 

7.58 In that basin, the S current sets strongly towards the S point

of Storholmen, then ESE towards Ripnespynten 0.2 mile ESE.

During the S current, eddies do not form along the coast of

Knaplundoya, SE and E of Ripnespynten. 

7.58 During the N current, eddies form between the N point of

Storholmen and the N entrance to Saltstraumen; the strongest

eddies are off Storholmen. The currents which set on to the

projecting points of Storholmen and Knaplundoya, beneath the

bridge, cause an easily-visible ridge to form in the water, this

extending 0.5 mile NNW to Kvitberget, the NW entrance point

of Saltstraumen.

7.58 In Svefjorden, the incoming tidal current at the surface is the

stronger, and can set up unpleasant overfalls in opposition to a

strong E wind.

7.58 The strength of the tidal current and the powerful eddies in

their wake cause Saltstaumen to be navigable only at brief

periods of slack water and then only with local knowledge.

7.58 Signals.—Saltstraumen Signal Stations, which inform vessels when the passage of Saltstraumen may be made, are situated, as follows:

1. For inbound vessels—on the E shore, by the King

Oscar II statue 0.3 mile N of the bridge.

2. For outbound vessels—at Ytre Tuv, 0.7 mile SSE of

the bridge, on the S shore of Svefjorden.

7.58 Signals are shown from masts (yellow and white) and consist

of red balls by day and red lights by night.

7.58 Saltstraumen Signal Stations are manned 1 hour before and

after each current change within the period 0800 to 1900. A

watch is maintained on VHF channels 14 and 16. 

7.58 Information on times of transit through the Saltstraumen

passage can be obtained through a 24-hour information servic

contacted by telephone at 08-18-77-00. 

7.58 Mariners are held responsible for meeting the passage

schedule and any other required conditions. Local regulations

state that to avoid passing situations in the narrows, vessels

with the current running against them should wait.

7.58 Anchorage.—Vessels proceeding to Saltstraumen can

obtain anchorage, in depths of 20 to 29m, N of the W entrance

point of Saltstraumen, but care must be taken to avoid the reef

fringing Straumoya. 

7.59 Svefjorden continues ESE from the S entrance of

Saltstraumen; it is free of dangers in mid-channel. An overhead

cable spans Svefjorden 1 mile E of its entrance.

7.59 Skjerstadfjorden is entered from Svefjorden abreast Buneset

(67°13'N., 14°42'E.) and extends to Gjelbuneset (67°11'N.,

15°24'E.) 16 miles E, on the S side of the fjord. From this point

Saltdalsfjorden extends 5 miles farther SSE.

7.59 As in Svefjorden, the incoming tidal current at the surface is

the stronger, and can set up unpleasant overfalls in opposition

to strong E winds. These conditions are particularly dangerous

in Skjerstadfjorden, which is liable to squalls. Squalls often

develop suddenly and are generally followed by periods of

calm.

7.59 The white sector of the light on Buneset, bearing astern,

leads in the fairway towards position about 3 miles NE of the

light. The white sector of Alvnestangen Light (67°16'N.,

15°02'E.) leads E in the fairway, passing N of Oygrunnane, an

area of foul ground which extends about 1 mile N of the S

shore.

7.59 From a position about 1 mile W of Alvnestangen Light a SE

course will lead through the E part of Skjerstadfjorden to

Gjelbuneset. 

7.59 Fauske (67°16'N., 15°24'E.) lies at the head of Fauskevika,

which is entered 7 miles SE of Alvnestangen Light; this is the

administrative center for the surrounding district.

7.59 There is a stone and concrete quay here, 39m long, with

depths of 4.2 to 7.2m alongside.

7.59 Finneid, about 1 mile E of Fauske, has a quay 126m long,

with depths of 5.2 to 11m alongside.

7.59 Rognan (67°06'N., 15°25'E.) lies at the head of

Saltdalsfjorden, which extends 5 miles S from its entrance

abreast Gjelbuneset; it is the administrative center for Saltdal

district. 

7.59 Berths are available in Rognan, at quays up to 130m long,

with depths of 3.4 to 10m alongside. Anchorage is available, in

21m, clay and sand, in a position about 0.3 mile WNW of

Rognan Church.

Donna to Saltfjorden 

7.60 Indreleia may be reached from seaward by passing S

of the S end of Traena (66°25'N., 12°00'E.), then proceeding

across the S part of Traenfjorden, into the W arm of Sjona, then

toward the S end of Stigfjorden. Traenfjorden is the fjord next

N of Nordre Asvaerfjorden.

7.60 Traenfjorden, which lies in a NNE to SSW direction, is

bound on the W by the Traena group and on the E by Mavaer

and Nesoya. The navigable channel is about 4 miles wide at its

entrance and about 3 miles wide between Selvaer (66°36'N.,

12°18'E.) and the dangers W of Nesoya.

7.60 Tides—Currents.—In Traenfjorden the tidal currents set N

and NE with the rising tide and S and SW with the falling tide. 

7.60 When bound from the S end of Traenfjorden to Indreleia, a

vessel should steer ENE passing between Samskallen

(66°22'N., 11°58'E.) and Ovskallen, 2.25 miles N, and pass N

of Kvalholmen Light (66°25'N., 12°28'E.); from this position

the track leads about 0.5 mile N of Kvitingan, which lies 3.25

miles ESE of the light. 

7.60 Indre Solvaerrevet (66°24'N., 12°41'E.), an isolated patch

with a charted depth of 5.8m, lies about 2 miles E of the light

HW at Narvik Remarks

-5 hours, 50 minutes LW at N entrance

-4 hours, 10 minutes LW at S entrance

-3 hours, 55 minutes Slack water

-0 hour, 10 minutes HW at N entrance

+1 hour, 25 minutes HW at S entrance

+2 hours, 00 minutes Slack water
156 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

on Kvitingan. Other dangers in this area may best be seen on

the chart.

7.60 From the vicinity of Kvitingan, steer toward Eggelosa, passing S of Indre Solvaerrevet. A vessel can steer from Eggelosa

SE between Onoya and Kvitaer into Sjona and then into Indreleia.

7.60 The dangers in Sjona and the vicinity may best be seen on

the chart. 

7.60 Although there are several different ways through and across

Traenfjorden, care should be taken to avoid Stokholmen

(66°29'N., 12°21'E.), 4.75 miles NNW of Kvalholmen Light,

and the shoals which are charted within 1.75 miles.

7.60 Vessels may proceed N from a position N of Kvalholmen

Light, passing in mid-channel between Skjaerflesa Light and

Stokholmen, steering to pass W of Asbraken (66°30'N.,

12°32'E.), a foul area 3 miles E of Stokholmen. 

7.60 From a mid-channel position E of Dorvaer, 4 miles NNW of

Stokholmen, a deep fairway leads N toward the W end of

Lyngvaerfjorden passing between the many dangers charted off

Traena and Nesoya. 

7.61 Lyngvaerfjorden, N of Traenfjorden, is broad and

deep and separates Traena from Myken (66°46'N., 12°29'E.).

7.61 Valvaerfjorden lies E of Valvaer, the island group close NE

of Myken. This fjord is encumbered by a large number of

rocky shoals; navigation is dangerous without local knowledge.

7.61 Tennholmfjorden, 16 miles NE of Lyngvaerfjorden, is entered S of Kalsholmen Light (66°55'N., 13°06'E.). The fjord is

free from dangers but Lyjosboen, a reef with less than 1.8m lies

in the W approach 6 miles SW of Kalsholmen Light, and

Sveboen, a reef with a least depth of 4.6m, lies 5.5 miles WSW

of the light.

7.61 Stapfjorden leads N from the inner end of Tennholmfjorden,

along the W side of the Stottvaer (66°56'N., 13°20'E.). The

fairway of this fjord is free from dangers. 

7.62 Fleinvaerfjorden, leading NE into Saltenfjorden, is

deep and free from dangers in the fairway. Fleinvaer, a group of

low islands, lies on the NW side of Fleinvaerfjorden. Fuglovaer, Fleina, Sor Arnoya, and Nord Arnoya lie on the SW and

SE side of the fjord.

7.62 Nupen (67°08'N., 13°43'E.) is the farthest S of the Fleinvaer

group. The most dangerous shoals in the approach to Fleinvaerfjorden extend 4 miles W of Nupen. Other shoals lie off

Fleinvaer; their positions may be seen on the chart.

7.62 The outer dangers in the approach are usually indicated by

the great number of sea birds seen in their vicinity.

7.62 A vessel approaching Fleinvaerfjorden, when in the vicinity

of Gronna (67°01'N., 13°11'E.), should steer well N of that

group. When clear N of Gronna, steer ENE, passing S of

Nupen, then in mid-channel to join Saltfjorden NE of Nord

Arnoya

7.62 The principal channel to Bodo, is the one which leads S of

Tennholmen (67°18'N., 13°30'E.), then N of Fleinvaer into

Saltfjorden in approximate position 67°12'N, 14°08'E; this is

specified for entrance into the Restricted Sea Area.

7.62 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents around Tennholmen are

rotary. At local LW, the current begins to run SW, changing

gradually through W, NW, and N as the tide rises.; at local HW,

the current begins to run NE, changing gradually through E,

SE, and S as the tide falls. 

7.63 Tennholmen lies about 20 miles W of Bodo and about

9 miles NW of Fleinvaer. 

7.63 Seioskallen (67°17'N., 13°31'E.), a shoal with a least charted

depth of 7m, lies about 2 miles SSE of the light on Tennholmen. A shoal, with a depth of 15.9m, lies 0.25 mile SW of Seioskallen. This is the farthest S of the dangers off Tennholmen. 

7.63 For dangers E of Tennholmen and the dangers in the vicinity

of Givaer, 5 miles E of Tennholmen, refer to the chart.

7.63 From a position clear of Seioskallen, the entrance channel

passes midway between Fleinvaer and Kjaervaer, 3 miles NE,

then into the W end of Saltfjorden.

7.63 Mesjoygrunnen (67°12'N., 13°59'E.), with a least charted

depth of 4.6m, lies about 1.0 mile SE of the light in Kjaervaer.

7.64 Indreleia crosses Saltfjorden from Marnesskagen to

the vicinity of Store Svartoksen (67°16'N., 14°14'E.), 7 miles

NE, where the route divides.

7.64 Svartoksleia, the principal channel into Bodo, leads N of

Store Svartoksen and S of Store Hjartoy and Lille Hjartoy.

7.64 A line of shoals extend ENE from Store Svartoksen.

7.64 Kirkgrunnen (67°15'N., 14°14'E.), a small patch with a

depth of 1.5m, lies about 0.4 mile SW of the light on Store

Svartoksen.

7.64 Lille Svartoksen, a drying reef, lies on the N side of Svartoksleia, 1 mile NE of Store Svartoksen.

7.64 In Saltfjorden, vessels should steer in the white sector of

Store Svartoksen Light bearing between 036° and 062°, ahead,

to within about 1 mile of the light, when the vessel should steer

to pass W and N of the light.

7.64 When N of Store Svartoksen, steer to pass between Lille

Svartoksen and Langdragan, 0.45 mile ESE, then into the entrance of Bodo.

Courtesy of Kystriksyeien Reissseliv AS

The Bodo Bridge
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 157

Pub. 182

7.64 Care should be exercised to avoid the shoal spit extending

91m SW from the SW extremity of Nyholmen and a shoal spit

extending 137m E from the mole head, in the entrance to Bodo.

Bodo (67°17'N., 14°23'E.)

World Port Index No. 22290

7.65 Bodo, a coastal natural harbor, is formed between

Nyholmen and the Buroya peninsula on the NW side, and the

mainland on the NE and SE side. A mole extends about 0.2

mile NNW from the mainland toward the SW extremity of

Nyholmen. Nyholmen and Buroya are connected by a causeway and by the Bodo Bridge.

7.65 Bodo is the administrative center for the county of Nordland.

7.65 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind at Bodo is from the

E, except in summer, when winds are mainly from N and E or

between SW and W. Calms often occur from July to September.

Gales and strong winds blow mostly from SW and W.

7.65 The inner harbor is well sheltered from most directions, but

it is reported that bad weather from SW or W can cause occasional delays in berthing or unberthing in the absence of tug

assistance. The harbor is always ice free.

7.65 The outer harbor consists of the water area between the town

and the SW part of Lille Hjartoy, SW of the mole; it is exposed

to SW and W.

7.65 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at MHWS is 2.8m; the

tidal rise at MLWS is 0.4m. 

7.65 Depths—Limitations.—The public quay has a length of

1,000m, with depths from 3 to 6.7m alongside. The railroad

quay is 250m long on its N side, with depths of 5.5 to 7.5m

alongside. There are two tanker berths, about 60m,long with

depths of 9.7m alongside.

7.65 Vessels up to 15,000 dwt, 150m in length, and 10.6m draft

can be accommodated. A 250m quay, with a depth of 9m

alongside, has been constructed in Ronvik at the head of the

inner harbor. 

7.65 Aspect.—The framework radio masts, E of the root of the

mole, are conspicuous. Bodo Church is a prominent yellow

building, with a separate belltower surmounted by a spire at its

W end.

7.65 Pilotage.—Pilotage from the sea to Bodo is reported to be

compulsory. Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea Net

or alternatively, the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center. The pilot

Bodo

Port of Bodo Home Page

http://www.bodohavn.no
158 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 

Pub. 182

boards in positions 67°13.5'N, 13°46.2'E (2 miles N of

Fleinvaer) or 67°30.0'N, 14°22.5'E (3 miles N of Landegode

Light). 

7.65 The pilot boat and pilot office are equipped with VHF

channel 16. 

7.65 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26. 

7.65 Anchoring is usually advised by the sea pilot or the harbor

pilot. 

7.65 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12, 14, and 16

2. Telephone: 47-75-551080 

3. Facsimile: 47-75-551090

4. E-mail: firmapost@bodohavn.no

7.65 Caution.—Bodo Seaplane Harbor comprises the area E of

Store Hjartoy, between a line joining the N extremity of that

island and a point on the mainland about 1.0 mile ESE, and a

line joining Hjartoydragan, off the SW coast of Store Hjartoy,

and a point on the mainland about 1 mile SSE.

7.65 When flying is in progress and the area is closed to water

traffic, a ball painted in yellow and black checks is hoisted at a

signal mast on a tower near Breidvikholmen, close SW of the

head of the mole.
Pub. 182

8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
161

Pub. 182

SECTOR 8 

NORWAY—SALTFJORDEN TO TROMSO

8.0 Plan.—This sector describes the NW coast of Norway

starting from the area near Vestfjorden, in the vicinity of Bodo

to Tromso including Malangen. A description of the mainland,

Lofoten, Vesterlan, and the approaches to Narvik, Harstad and

Tromso is included. Indreleia and the inner fjords are also described. 

General Remarks

8.1 Tides—Currents.—The tides on the NW coast of

Norway are always semi-diural, with relatively little inequality

between heights of the two tides. They are small to moderate in

size with a gradual increase in range toward the N. The mean

range is about 1m at Bergen and about 2.1m at Tromso.

8.1 Weather conditions, both locally and in the ocean off the

coast, may considerably influence the tides.

8.1 The currents on the W side of Lofoten sets constantly N

regardless of the tide, but this may not be the case close inshore.

8.1 Along the coast of Vesteralen, the tidal currents nearly

always set N with an appreciable velocity. It is strongest with

the approach of bad weather and increases in strength near the

land. Occasionally the tidal currents set S for about 1 hour, the

change occurring at the time of HW and LW.

8.1 Off Senja, the tidal currents usually set N following the

direction of the land, and often attain a considerable velocity,

especially near the time of HW. 

8.1 Along Kvalo, the tidal currents usually set NE with the rising

tide and SW with the falling tide, but they are likely to follow

the contour of the coast and the principal reefs. The Kvaloy

tidal currents attain their strength at about half tide, and often

run with a velocity of about 3 knots.

8.1 Along the coast of Vesteralen, the tidal currents nearly

always set N with an appreciable velocity. It is strongest with

the approach of bad weather and increases in strength near the

land. Occasionally the tidal currents set S for about 1 hour, the

change occurring at the times of high or LW.

8.1 Certain reports published from 1835 to 1848 indicate the

current 10 to 12 miles SW of Andersboskallen (68°46'N.,

13°33'E.) ran N, NE, and E, with a rate dependent upon the

wind, but occasionally reaching 4 knots over the shallow

banks. These reports must be considered, for where depths

change suddenly, as in the vicinity of Andersboskallen, and

about 23 and 32 miles farther NE, there may be a strong flow

and violent turbulence. In the areas referred to, the NE or E

flow is probably strongest on the rising tide with strong S to W

winds. Turbulence is probably most violent during the rising

tide with strong N to E winds.

8.1 In the whole of Vestfjorden the movements of the tidal

currents are substantially influenced by the winds. At times

when there is little or no current in mid-channel, there is a

regular current along the land on either side, invariably setting

in contrary direction on the opposite sides of the fjord. 

8.1 The tidal currents set NE with the rising tide and SW with

the falling tide, along either the mainland or SE coast of

Lofoten, but it is uncertain as to when or on which coast the

currents will make. Vestfjorden and all major straits are free of

ice.

Aspect.—Vestfjorden is a broad and deep body of water that

separates the mainland from the islands of Lofoten and

Vesteralen. Its principal outlying islands are Hadseloy, Langoya, and Andoya. Vestfjorden is the seaward approach from

Saltfjorden and Bodo to Ofotfjorden and Narvik. Both Ofotfjorden and Narvik lie about 100 miles NE of Saltfjorden, at

the head of the fjord.

8.1 In general, the W and NW coasts of Lofoten are almost inaccessible and should be avoided. This is also true of the Vesteralen group, comprised of four large islands and several small

islands, which are dangerous to approach.

8.1 The coast of the mainland of Vestfjorden is broken by a

number of large fjords. Generally, it rises abruptly to over

900m, and consists of bare rock with a forested lower slopes.

8.1 The mountains of Lofoten aand Vesteralen are steep and

lofty, often covered with snow, and are, most often, easily

identified. They may be seen from a distance of 40 to 50 miles

in clear weather.

8.1 The coast continues to the island of Senja and then to Kvaloy. The entrance to Tromso lies between the two islands. Malangen, the direct passage to Tromso, lies between the two islands as well.

8.1 Senja, with its granite peaks, presents a rugged and imposing

appearance from seaward. A ridge, from 610 to 914m high,

runs along the whole island in a NE and opposite direction.

Kvaloy, to the NE, is mountainous and attains an elevation of

1,045m.

8.1 Pilotage.—Lodingen Pilot Center organizes and engages

pilots for vessels in Nordland and the Troms, from Rorvik in

the S to Kirkenes in the N. Pilots should be requested 24 hours

in advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior to

arrival at the pilot station. 

8.1 See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic

Ocean for further information.

8.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

8.1 Trafffic Separation Scheme (TSS).—An IMO-adopted

TSS is located off the N coast of Norway; it lies about 60 miles

W of Rost (67°31'N., 12°07'E.) and leads to about 37 miles

NNE of Vardo (70°22'N., 31°07'E.). See paragraph 9.1 for

further information. 

8.1 Caution.—Andersboskallen (68°46'N., 13°33'E.), with a

least charted depth of 37m, lies about 18 miles W of Langoya

off the Vesteralen group. There are two other patches within 3

miles N of the 37m spot, with depths of 40m and 57m.

8.1 It would be by no means safe to pass over Andersboskallen

during a heavy W swell, as this would cause a high topping

sea, even if it did not break; rollers set in toward them from a

long distance W. 
162 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

Saltfjorden to Skrova

8.2 Vestfjorden, the fjord lying between Lofoten, Vesteralen, and the mainland, is entered from seaward between

Muken (66°45'N., 12°29'E.) and Skomvaer Light, 40 miles

NNW.

8.2 Vestfjorden is deepest at Tranoy, with a depth of about

640m. At this point, it is also the narrowest, and the depth

decreases farther S. 

8.2 Between Rost and Fleinvaer, the maximum depth is about

300m. The fjord is deepest along the mainland. Here the

bottom slopes steeply at a short distance from land so that the

relatively shallow parts close to land are narrow.

8.2 Vessels approaching Vestfjorden from SW in clear weather

will be able to identify Rost, Vaeroy, and Moskenesoy, which

form the SW end of Lofoten. Rost, the S island, can be seen

from a distance of 30 miles. The latter two islands appear as

two steep cliffs. From a distance of 20 miles, one can see the

high and pointed small islands of Ellefsnyken, Trenyken, and

Hernyken, which are located to the S of Storfjellet. The

characteristic formations of these islands make it easy to

identify Rost.

8.2 When entering Vestfjorden in thick weather, vessels can

verify their distance offshore near Lofoten by soundings. There

are depths of 100m from about 1 to 4 miles offshore from the S

end of Moskenesoy to Skrova, about 47 miles ENE. Soundings

give little warning E of Skrova; depths of 200m are found

within 1 mile of some of the rocks off the S coast of Hinnoya.

8.2 In general, it is recommended that vessels keep close to

Lofoten, where there are large flat sea areas with lesser depths,

rather than the mainland, which is foul offshore. When E of

Skrova, the dangers are all on the N side of the fjord and it is

necessary to keep on the mainland side.

8.3 Among the islands lying off the mainland coast are

Landegode, 791m high, about 8 miles N of the Saltfjorden

entrance, and Engeloya, 648m high, about 45 miles NNE of the

same entrance. These islands are conspicuous because of their

size and contour.

8.3 There are several conspicuous mountains, which rise to a

height of 947m, in the vicinity of Ofotfjorden.

8.3 The fringing islands and dangers extend about 20 miles W

from the mainland in the vicinity of Bodo; north of Bodo the

obstructions gradually decrease in distance from the coast.

8.3 Helligvaer (67°25'N., 13°55'E.) and Lyngvaer, W of Landegode, comprise the next mass of islets NE of Tennholmen. This

group of islets lies with their S end about 10 miles NE of

Tenholmen.

8.3 Storboen, a drying shoal, lies on the SW side of Helligvaer

and Nordboen, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 7.9m, is

situated off the N side of Helligvaer, 5 miles NE of Storboen.

8.3 Kjengbaen (67°29'N., 14°01'E.), a rock with a depth of

0.3m, lies 2.75 miles NE of Nordboen.

8.3 Husoyvaer, situated 18 miles NNE of Kjengbaen, consists of

a group of islets and rocks which extends about 11 miles W of

the mainland.

8.3 Utgrunnen (67°42'N., 14°17'E.), the outer patch of Husoyvaer, has a least depth of 18.2m. Utgrunnsflesa, a reef which

breaks, lies 1.25 miles ESE of Utgrunnen.

8.3 Kjolibaen (67°45'N., 14°23'E.), with a depth of 1.8m,

breaks except in calm weather. It is situated 4.25 miles NNE of

Utgrunnen, off the SW side of Maloyvaer. Dorholmskjaeran,

another danger, lies on the NW side of Maloyvaer, 2.5 miles

NNE of Kjolibaen.

8.3 Maloy Skarholmen, an islet marked by a light, lies 1 mile

NNE of Kjolibaen.

8.3 Maloy Skarholmen (67°46'N., 14°24'E.) is a light shown

from a prominent tower, 34m in height, standing on the islet. A

racon is located at the light tower.

8.3 Engelvaer (67°53'N., 14°34'E.) is a group of islands and

rocks which lie close NE of Maloyvaer, about 6 miles offshore.

Tverskallen, with a charted depth of 15m, lies 3.5 miles NE of

Dorholmskjaeran, at the SW edge of the group. 

8.3 Several foul patches lie on the NW side of the group, 3 to 4

miles NE of Tverskallen. 

8.3 Flatoy (67°55'N., 14°46'E.), an island, lies 2 miles NE of the

Engelvaer group. A light is situated on the SW part of the

island.

8.3 To the NE of Flatoyare are the islands and rocks of Valsvaer,

which extend about 3 miles W of Engeloya, a large island

rising to a height of 648m.

8.3 Off the N end of Engeloya is Brunvaer, another dangerous

group. From Brunvaer NE to Ofotfjorden, the salient features

of the coast are apparently free from off-lying dangers.

8.4 The islands of Lofoten and Hinnoya form a chain extending NE to the mainland near Ofotfjorden.

8.4 Rost is the farthest SW group of islands on the NW side of

Vestfjorden. 

8.4 Rost (67°31'N., 12°07'E.), the principal island of the group,

is a flat low-lying island surrounded by islets and rocks, none

of them visible beyond 7 or 8 miles. Masts equipped with

obstruction lights are situated in the N part of Rost.

8.4 Rostnesvagen is entered close to the W side of Vaeroy Light

(67°39.1'N., 12°43.5'E.). Iron perches mark the E side of the

entrance. 

8.4 Skomvaer Light (67°25'N., 11°52'E.) is shown from a tower

34m in height, standing near the S end of the Rost group. A

racon is located at the light tower.

8.4 Storfjellet (67°28'N., 11°56'E.), 267m high; Vedoy 209m

high; and Stavoy, 148m high, lie, respectively, 3.75 miles SW,

2 miles SSW, and 1 mile SE of Rost. These three islets form

excellent landmarks.

8.4 Tides—Currents.—The general flow pattern in Vestfjorden

flows inward along the W. In winds from the SW, the current is

partially turned. Most straits on the W and N sides of

Vestfjorden have strong currents. High water and LW are occur

about simultaneous in all of Vestfjorden. The differences in

tidewater levels are among the greatest along the entire Norwegian coast. In a storm from the SW, the water level may be

significantly above the anticipated values in the Tide Table.

8.4 The passage W and SW of Lofoten, the continental shelf

generally has depths of less than 200m with some shoals close

to land. The slope in the W is very steep.

8.4 The coastal current, running N to NE, dominates the current

conditions. Tidal currents reinforce this effect with rising water

and weaken it with falling water.

8.4 With waves from NE to NW, the interaction between current

and waves will create choppy waves. Refraction centers may

occur SW of Rost when the waves come from the SW. Close to
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 163

Pub. 182

Lofoten, the waves may also be reflected due to the steep continental slope.

8.4 Vaeroy (67°40'N., 12°40'E.), about 10 miles NE of Rost, is

separated from that island by Rosthavet. Mosken, a conspicuous two pointed summit lies on the same shoal bank, 3

miles NNE of Vaeroy.

8.4 The S, W and N sides of Vaeroy and Mosken are unapproachable and a vessel wishing to enter Vestfjorden from W

must do so through Rosthavet, or through Moskenstraumen, 3

miles NNE of Mosken; Rosthavet is preferred. The shoals on

either side of these channels are best seen on the chart.

8.4 Lofotodden (67°50'N., 12°51'E.), the S extremity of Moskenesoya, forms the N side of Moskenstraumen.

8.4 Yttertuven (67°50'N., 12°52'E.), the E extremity of Lofotodden, is marked by a light. From this point, the coast of

Moskenesoya extends 8 miles NE to Reine. Rodliskallen, an

11.9m patch, lies 1 mile offshore, 2.75 miles NE of Yttertuven.

8.4 A (67°53'N., 12°59'E.), at the mouth of a river 4 miles NE of

Yttertuven, Tind, and Bogen, are three fishing villages with a

common entrance. They are suitable only for small vessels and

local knowledge is required.

8.4 Reine (67°56'N., 13°06'E.), one of the principal fishing

stations in Lofoten, is situated 3.5 miles NNE of Bogen. Local

knowledge is necessary for entering the harbor, which has a

Scomvaer Light

Vedoy
164 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

channel dredged to 4.9m. The deepest berths are 3.9 to 5.9m.

There is a secure anchorage in the harbor, in depths of 20 to

24m.

8.5 From Reine, the coast of Moskenesoya trends NNE

for 4.25 miles to Kunna (68°00'N., 13°14'E.), a narrow island,

96m high; then the S coast of Flakstadoya and the S end of

Vestvagoya trend NE 8.5 miles to Ballstad. The coast in this

area is much indented with fjords and there are numerous offlying dangers.

8.5 The entrance to Kirkefjorden, about 1 mile N of Reine, is

encumbered with islets and rocks. Strong winds blow out of the

fjord.

8.5 A channel, spanned by a bridge 1.75 miles within its entrance, separates the E side of Moskenesoya from Flakstadoya. The bridge has a vertical clearance of 15.9m.

8.5 Kunna lies in the entrance to Skjelfjorden, which penetrates

the S side of Flakstadoya to a distance of about 4 miles N.

8.5 Skjelfjorden is navigable by deep-draft vessels as far as

Stjerndalen (68°02'N., 13°14'E.), 1.5 miles within the entrance; however, a shoal spot, with a depth of 0.9m, lies about

0.3 mile ENE of the NE side of Kunna.

8.5 Nusfjorden, entered about 3 miles NE of Skjelfjorden,

penetrates Flakstadoya for about 1 mile. The entrance to the

fjord is constricted to a width of about 183m between the light

and a danger NE.

8.5 Nappstrommen (Nappstraumen), the passage between Flakstadoya and Vestvagoya, is entered from Vestfjorden in approximate position 68°02'N, 13°25'E, and leads N to the vicinity of

Nappholmen (68°08'N., 13°28'E.).

8.5 Gapet, a narrow channel about 1 mile long, gives access to

the open sea from Nappholmen. Nappstrommen and Gapet can

be navigated by large vessels.

8.5 The dangers in the S entrance of Nappstrommen may best be

seen on the chart. Most of the dangers within the passage lie on

the E side of the fairway, leaving a deep and clear channel up

the W side.

8.5 Gapet (68°09'N., 13°28'E.) is entered close E of Nappholmen. The white sector of the light on Hudholmen bearing

between 326° and 336°, ahead, leads through the fairway.

8.5 Northbound vessels from Gapet pass E of Hudholmen.

8.5 Anchorage may be taken in Haugbukten, in 25 to 30m, clay

and sand, in a position about 1 mile ENE of the light at Nappholmen. It is inadvisable to anchor off the N shore of the bay

owing to heavy squalls which blow down from Offersohammen, 1 mile N of the center of the bay. Vessels are cautioned of

the submarine cables located in the vicinity of Napp Light.

8.5 Buksnesfjorden indents Vestvagoya to a distance of about 4

miles. It is entered NE of Svinoya (68°03'N., 13°33'E.), which

is about 3 miles ENE of the entrance to Nappstrommen. A light

is situated on Svinoya.

8.5 Ballstad (68°04'N., 13°42'E.) is an important fishing port,

protected by moles, situated on the W side of Buksnesfjorden,

1.5 miles N of Svinoya. There are depths of 7m in the approach

and 4m in the inner harbor. The deepest berths are 4.3 to 5.1m.

The harbor is suitable for small vessels.

8.6 Brandsholmen (68°05'N., 13°39'E.) is situated on the

E side of the entrance to Buksnesfjorden. The island is 100m

high and is the highest in the area. It is impossible to mistake

Vaeroy
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 165

Pub. 182

because of its precipitous W side.

8.6 From Brandsholmen, the coast of Vestvagoya trends 3 miles

ENE; the SE side of the island extends about 14 miles NE to

the island of Gimsoya, on the W side of Austvagoya.

8.6 Urberget (68°04'N., 13°43'E.), 335m high, rises in the SE

part of Vestvagoya, 1.25 miles ENE of Brandsholmen. It is

easily identified by its darker appearance and though its summit is always snow-capped, its precipitous slopes hold little

snow. Steinetind, 517m high, and pointed in shape, is situated

about 3 miles NNE of Urberget. Dalstind, 461m high, and

Horntind, 361m high, lie 6.5 and 8.5 miles NE, respectively,

from Steinetind. They are the most conspicuous hills on a dark

ridge of hills that extend NNE from Dalstind.

8.6 Henningsvaerstraumen (Henningsvaer Strommen) is a broad

and deep opening between the SE side of Vestvagoya and the

Reine

Reine
166 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

SW end of Austvagoya. This sea area extends 10 miles to the

NNE, which in turn leads to the open sea. 

8.6 The area is difficult to navigate due to the many dangers,

which may be seen on the chart. The area is one of the principal fishing grounds in Lofoten.

8.6 Stamsund (68°07'N., 13°51'E.) is situated on the SE side of

Vestvagoya, close E of Steinetind. It is protected by

breakwaters. A stone steamship quay, with timber fenders, has

a length of 180m and depths of 5.4 to 6.9m alongside. Vessels

up to 16,000 grt have been moored stern-to at an oil storage

installation.

8.6 Stamsund is a large fishing district with an advantageous

location with respect to the fishing fields. Good approaches to

these fields are easily recognized due to the many

characteristic peaks which can be used for alignment purposes.

8.6 Local pilots are available for mooring and warping large

vessels.

8.6 Anchorage is available in Rakvika, SW of the harbor area, in

17 to 29m, good holding ground, but it is uncomfortable in S

and SW gales and in squalls from NW.

8.7 Henningsvaer (68°09'N., 14°13'E.) is a large

offshore fishing station, situated in an island group of the same

name, off the SW end of Austvagoya. The harbor is centered

on Hellandsoya.

8.7 It was reported that the main island of the group was joined

to the small island NNE by a bridge, which in turn is joined to

Engoya by a further bridge which extends to the mainland. It is

reported that a conspicuous lattice mast stands at the S end of

Henningsvaer.

8.7 The principal channels in the harbor approach have depths of

17m. A steamship quay has a length of 45m and alongside

depths of 8 to 11.3m. There is about 1 mile of quayage which

is provided with a large number of small cranes.

8.7 Local pilots are available on request to the harbor assistant.

8.7 From an approximate position of 68°09'N, 14°08'E, 1.75

miles W of Henningsvaer, a channel, obstructed by islets and

rocks, leads about 6 miles NNE between Vestvagoya and Austvagoya to the vicinity of Gimsoya.

8.7 Gimsoystraumen (68°16'N., 14°15'E.), between Gimsoya

and Austvagoya, connects Henningsvaerstraumen with the

open sea. It can be used by moderate size vessels and is easy to

navigate. 

8.7 Gimsoystraumen is spanned by a bridge, with a vertical

clearance of 30m and a horizontal clearance of 90m.

8.7 From Henningsvaerstraumen, the coast of Austvagoya trends

about 11 miles ENE to the entrance of Ostnesfjorden (Austnesfjorden).

8.7 Off Henningsvaer, at the W end of this coast, patches of 14.6

to 27m lie up to 5 miles offshore. Moholmen, marked by a light

situated, is located 2 miles offshore. The dangers that comprise

this group may best be seen on the chart.

8.7 During onshore gales, the waters around Moholmen and the

islets 1 to 2 miles NW are noted for the strength of flow. In

such conditions, a violent race occurs in this area and passage

becomes difficult.

8.8 Skrova (68°10'N., 14°41'E.), an isolated island,

stands out because of its distinctive color and lower elevation.

The largest island of the group rises to a height of 313m; it

appears as a haystack against Store Mola and Lille Mola (Litle

Molla) behind.

8.8 Skrova Light (Skraven Light) is shown from a prominent

tower 24m in height. A radiobeacon is situated at the tower.

8.8 Skrova Havn (68°10'N., 14°40'E.) (World Port Index No.

21910) is situated in the island group of Skrova. Some of the

islands are connected by moles.

8.8 The harbor is spacious, with several good quays on both

sides of the strait. The quays, which are up to 90m long, have

depths of 1.7 to 4.9m alongside. Mooring rings are installed

around the harbor. 

The Gimsoystraumen Bridge
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 167

Pub. 182

8.8 There are several good anchorages within the harbor area.

The best anchorage is located in the roadstead N of St. Ramnoya, where there are depths of 16 to 30m, sand bottom. Caution is required due to the reported presence of fish farms in the

harbor.

8.8 Pilots may be arranged through the pilot station at Svolvaer

when a 24-hour advance notice is given.

8.8 Orsvag (68°12'N., 14°25'E.), situated 2.5 miles NNE of the

light on Moholmen, is the best and roomiest anchorage in the

area for vessels of moderate draft, and is easily approached in

all weather. The anchorage is in depths of 7 to 8m, sand and

clay. Orsvag Hamn Light is a perch marking a below-water

rock.

8.9 Svolvaer (68°14'N., 14°35'E.) (World Port Index No.

21900), the largest and best protected harbor along the Lofoten

The Gimsoystraumen Bridge

Approach to Henningsvaer
168 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

coast, lies on the SE coast of Austvagoya, 4 miles NE of

Orsvag.

8.9 Svolvaer, the capital of the Lofoten Islands, is situated on a

peninsula and on several adjoining islets. Some of these islets

are connected with the peninsula and each other by jetties and

bridges.

8.9 The port has three harbors. It has been reported a vessel of

8,400 dwt, with a 7m draft, used the main harbor. There are

four tanker berths. Vessels up to 16,000 dwt, 158m in length

and 9.1m draft can be accommodated.

8.9 Submarine cables are laid in many parts of the harbors, as

shown on the chart.

8.9 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of more than 500 grt within the port area. The request for a pilot can be made to Bodo, or

to the Svolvaer pilots, on VHF channel 16. The pilot embarks 2

miles SSE of Rodholmane (68°13'N., 14°33'E.).

8.9 Sveleia (Sveleden) (68°11'N., 14°42'E.) is a passage

between the islets lying N of Skrova and those of Lille Molla;

it connects Holen with Vestfjorden.The channels through

Sveleia are well-marked and easily navigated.

8.9 Vessels of moderate size which are unable to enter Svolvaer

may anchor in Sveleia, as indicated on the chart, in 16 to 30m,

sand.

8.9 Molldoren leads between Lille Molla (68°12'N., 14°46'E.)

and Store Molla, about 0.5 mile NNE.

8.9 Brettesnes (68°14'N., 14°51'E.), a fishery harbor in a cove

at the S end of Store Molla, is approached from Molldora

(Moldora) or from Vestfjorden. The harbor is exposed to

mountain squalls, and a considerable sea is raised by S gales.

8.10 Holen (Hola) (68°14'N., 14°39'E.) is formed between

Austvagoya, on the W, and Lille Molla, on the E. Skjoldvaer,

on the SE side of the passage and NW of Lille Molla, is a

group of islets and rocks lying up to 1.5 miles off Lille Molla,

N of Skrova. This group should be avoided. 

8.10 Kvalbaken, a danger on the NW side of Holen, is marked by

a light and lies about 2 miles ENE of Rodholmane.

8.10 Austnesfjorden (68°17'N., 14°43'E.) extends about 6 miles

N from the inner end of Holen and is free from dangers for

about 4 miles. Farther N there are several shoals, which are

best seen on the chart. Heavy squalls are experienced in the

fjord.

8.10 Oyhellesundet, the passage NE of Holen, separates Store

Molla from Austvagoya; it is connected at its NE end with

Raftsundet.

8.10 From Skrova, the NW side of Vestfjorden trends 16 miles

ENE to Rotvaer (68°22'N., 15°56'E.), a group of islets and

rocks lying about 1 mile SE of Hinnoya, and 3 miles W of the

entrance to Ofotfjorden.

8.10 Several fjords indent this coast; the entire area is fronted by

dangers which are best seen on the chart. Vessels enroute from

Skrova to Ofotfjorden should steer along the SE side of Vestfjorden in this area.

8.10 Flovika (68°15'N., 14°57'E.), a deep body of water clear of

dangers in the fairway, is formed between Store Molla, on the

W side, and Arstein and Hinnoya, on the E. This passage leads

from Vestfjorden to Rafsundet, about 7 miles NNW. The dangers off Arstein may best be seen on the chart.

8.10 Raftsundet (68°23'N., 15°05'E.) extends about 11 miles

NNE from its junction with Oyhellesundet and Flovika, close

N of Store Molla.

8.10 Raftsundet is formed between Austvagoya and Hinnoya. It is

Henningsvaer 
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 169

Pub. 182

narrow and comparatively deep and clear. The channel, which

is used by coastal steamers and tourist vessels, is not difficult

to navigate and is well-marked by aids. The channel will accommodate vessels drawing 7.3m and about 116m in length.

8.10 The Raftsundet Bridge, a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance of 54.3m, spans Raftsundet about 0.7 mile SSW of the N

entrance to the passage.

8.10 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Raftsundet set S between half tides at fall and rise. In Trangstraumen, the narrows

between 3.5 and 5 miles S of the N entrance, the current has a

velocity of 4 to 5 knots, but with a S gale the N current may

attain a velocity of 6 or 7 knots. It should be noted that in

Trangstraumen, the S current sets toward the E shore and the N

current sets toward the W shore. A light stands about 0.15 mile

ESE of the bridge; a submarine cable crosses Raftsundet in the

vicinity of the bridge. 

8.10 There is anchorage for large vessels with local knowledge, in

the SE part of Raftsundet, in 20 to 42m, about 1 mile ENE of

the N extremity of Store Molla. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 55m, spans Raftsundet near its N entrance.

8.11 Oksfjorden, the next fjord E of Flovika, penetrates

about 11 miles N into Hinnoya. Between its entrance and Vestfjorden lies an extensive area of islets and shoals, including the

islet group Risvaer (68°15'N., 15°09'E.) and Svellingen

(68°18'N., 15°18'E.). Within that area are channels and anchorages suitable only for those with local knowledge.

8.11 Oksfjorden is connected to Vestfjorden by a channel from

Flovika, which passes close along the E side of Arstein, and by

Smitskjaerleien (68°20'N., 15°25'E.), which passes S of the

SE part of Hinnoya.

8.11 Oksfjorden can be navigated by large vessels for a distance

of about 8 miles to the islet of Husjordoy.

8.11 Kanstadfjorden is entered between Offersoy (68°19'N.,

15°37'E.), a small low-lying peninsula 4.5 miles E of Smitskjaerleien, and Rotvaer, 7 miles NE. It indents Hinnoya for a

distance of about 10 miles.

8.11 Hokfjorden extends 2.5 miles N from the inner end of

Kanstadfjorden; Indrefjorden is the continuation of Kanstadfjorden on the NE side. Erikstadfjorden, suitable only for small

boats, extends NW from Kanstadfjorden NNE of its junction

with Hokfjorden.

8.11 Rinnoyvag (68°22'N., 15°46'E.), situated on the W side of

Kanstadfjorden, 4.5 miles NNE of Offersoy, has a berth at the

timber quay, 23m long, with depths of 5.5 to 7.7m alongside.

8.11 Anchorage has been taken in Kanstadfjorden, with good

protection from N and W winds, in 48m, with the light on

Aspeneset (68°25'N., 15°47'E.) bearing 345°, 1.4 miles

distant.

Landegodefjorden and Vestfjorden

8.12 Because of the shallow channel in Grotoysundet, for

about 40 miles N of Bodo, Indreleia is of little use to large

vessels. This part of Indreleia merges into Vestfjorden through

Breisundet; Indreleia proper does not resume until the vicinity

of Lodingen, at the entrance to Tjeldsundet, is reached.

8.12 Landegodefjorden is formed between Landegode (67°25'N.,

14°20'E.) and the mainland about 4 miles SE. It is encumbered

by islets, reefs, and shoal areas, whose positions are best seen

on the chart.

The Raftsundet Bridge from S
170 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

8.12 Winds—Weather.—The area between Bodo and Landegode

is exposed to violent squalls, especially in winter. East winds,

with strong and frequent gusts, are liable to blow off the mainland; NW winds are also unstead,y with heavy squalls off the

high peaks of Landegode.

8.12 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current in Landegodefjorden

sets NE with the rising tide and SW with the falling tide.

8.12 Aspect.—Landegode Light (67°27'N., 14°23'E.) is shown

from a tower, 29m in height, standing on the islet of Eggeloysa,

close N of the N end of Landegode.

8.12 Tennholmen Light (67°18'N., 13°30'E.) is shown from a

low tower on a building, 14m in height, standing on the largest

islet of the group. There is a helicopter landing platform at the

light. 

8.12 Vessels proceeding from Saltfjorden to Landegodefjorden

should steer to pass NW of Store Svartoksen and SE of

Hausen (67°17'N., 14°12'E.), an isolated patch with depths of

less than 5.5m, situated 1.5 miles NNW of Store Svartoksen.

8.12 The white sector of the light on Store Svartoksen, bearing

astern, leads NW of Store Hjartoy and W of Lopsholmen

(67°20'N., 14°24'E.), 2 miles NE of Store Hjartoy.

8.12 Vessels proceeding from Bodo to Landegodefjorden may

proceed through Hjartoysundet, formed between Store Hjartoy

and Lille Hjartoy, or around Hjartoydragan and proceed in the

white sector of the light on Store Svartoksen.

8.12 After the vessel has cleared Lopsholmen, they may steer in

the white sector of Bjornoy Light (67°25'N., 14°26'E.).

8.12 In heavy weather, it may be preferable to pass 0.4 mile off

Bjornoy then between Steinsgrunnen, a 20m patch 0.6 mile N

of Bjornoy, and Mistgrunnen, a 19.8m patch, 0.75 mile NE.

8.12 From the vicinity of Bjornoy, the route continues NNW

toward a position W of Utgrunnen (67°42'N., 14°17'E.), then

N or NNE into Vestfjorden.

8.12 The white sector of the light on Bjornoy, bearing astern,

leads W of Ytre Skallen (67°28'N., 14°25'E.), a 4.9m patch 3

miles NNW of the light, and E of Oyensve, 10.5 miles NNW,

which usually breaks.

8.12 From the vicinity of Oyensve, the summit of Lopsfellet

(67°19'N., 14°29'E.) in range with an isthmus on Landegode,

0.4 mile WNW of Bjornoy Light, bearing 167.5°, passes 0.4

mile W of Utgrunnen, and then into Vestfjorden.

Inner Fjords—Saltfjorden to Ofotfjorden

8.13 The fjords on the SE side of Vestfjorden, known as the

coast of Salten, run in all directions and are frequently connected by low-lying marshy or lake filled depressions, so that

the entire coast is a maze of intricate channels between islands

and peninsulas. 

8.13 In places, steep ranges of mountains, separated by valleys,

lead away from the shores of the fjordens, which are broken

and have several large, low, boggy peninsulas. 

8.13 Some of the fjords penetrate so deeply they almost reach the

Swedish border.

8.13 Indreleia diverges from the main route from Bodo to Vestfjorden off Lopsholmen, keeping to the E side of Landegodefjorden and continuing NE through Karlsoyfjorden. There are

many below-water rocks and dangers which exist in Landegodefjorden and must be avoided. Karlsoyfjorden is deep and

free from dangers in the fairway.

8.13 Mistfjorden lies E of Indreleia, about 6 miles ENE of

Bjornoy. The fjord is surrounded by high, massive, and bare

mountains.

8.13 Kvanholmen (67°27'N., 14°40'E.), marked by a light, is

situated on the S side of the entrance to Mistfjorden. From its

entrance, the fjord extends about 10 miles E, terminating in

Nordfjorden.

8.13 Several shoal spots lie up to 0.5 mile W of Kvanholmen and

a rock, awash, lies on the N side of Mistfjorden, 0.75 mile E of

the island.

8.13 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor at the head of

Nordfjorden, in a depth of 29m, sand.

8.13 Karlsoyfjorden (67°31'N., 14°40'E.) is formed between

Karlsoyvaer, on the NW, and the mainland, on the SE. The

fairway leads NE to Folla.

8.13 Indreleia leads NNE from position 67°29'N, 14°35'E, passing through Karlsoyfjorden towards Helloyskjeret.

8.13 The white sector of the light on Bjornoy, bearing astern,

leads into Karlsoyfjorden NW of the islets and dangers off the

mainland; the white sector of the light on Helloyskjeret then

leads toward the N entrance of the fjord. It is advisable to keep

to the E side of this sector as the W sector passes close to

Karlsoyvaer.

8.13 Kjerringoy (67°31'N., 14°46'E.) (World Port Index No.

22270) is located on the SE shore of Karlsoyfjorden. There is a

wooden quay, 38m long, with depths of 3.2 to 5.2m, located at

the port. A light beacon is shown on Kjerringoy. 

8.13 Anchorage is available 137m SE of the beacon, in depths of

5 to 10m, sand and clay bottom.

8.14 Folla, a large fjord complex, is entered in the vicinity

of Helloyskjeret, and is approached through Karlsoyfjorden or

from W by passing N of Slovaer (67°36'N., 14°39'E.).

8.14 Abreast of Hjartoya (67°39'N., 15°05'E.), about 6 miles

ENE of Helloyskjeret, Folda divides into two branches, each

having several arms; Sorfolla extends about 20 miles SE and

Nordfolla extends about 15 miles NE.

8.14 The W approach to Folda from Vestfjorden can be made by

steering in the white sector of the light on Helloyskjeret,

passing S of Skarholman (67°39'N., 14°28'E.), 7.5 miles

WNW of the light, then S of Breifallet, a 7.9m patch 3 miles

ESE of Skarholman. This course will lead close N of Ytre

Raholmen 1.75 miles SE of Breifallet. Then steer E into Folla

to pass N of Helloyskjeret.

8.14 Oyensve (67°35'N., 14°17'E.), which breaks, are the farthest

W of the dangers off-lying Karlsoyvaer, about 12 miles W of

Helloyskjeret.

8.14 Nordfolla (67°45'N., 15°17'E.) leads NE from Folla. Its E

continuations are known as Reinvikfjorden and Morsvikfjorden. Store Belgkjosen and Lille Belgkjosen have a common

entrance off the N side of the fjord, 10.5 miles NE of Hjartoy.

They are icebound in the winter. Vinkfjorden leads from the SE

side of Nordfolla 6.5 miles NE of Hjartoy; Stavfjorden extends

from its inner end.

8.14 The fjord is open toward the SW, with winds from the W and

SW. East gales are most frequent in the winter.

8.14 In Nordfolla, the tidal currents usually flow outward, but in

calm weather, if the tributary rivers are low, the current may set

into the branches with the rising tide.
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 171

Pub. 182

8.14 Anchorage may be taken off Nordfold (67°46'N., 15°14'E.),

in depths of 14 to 18m, clay and sand. Anchorage is also available off Stavnes, 5 miles E of Nordfold, between two charted

6m patches. Iit is a well-used anchorage, but is exposed to SW

winds.

8.14 Nordfolla may be entered by keeping the white sector of the

light on Helloyskjeret (67°37'N., 14°47'E.), astern, which will

lead between the dangers off Hjartoy and the NW shore. A

mid-channel course may be steered to the head of the fjord.

8.15 Sorfolla (67°32'N., 15°16'E.) extends SE from the E

end of Folla. Several smaller fjords extend SW, S, and NE from

Sorfolla.

8.15 Eidekjosen and Navelsfjorden have a common entrance off

the W side of the fjord, 4 miles within its entrance. Nordre

Oygardskjeret (67°32'N., 15°08'E.) lies in the entrance.

8.15 Sjunkfjorden extends 5.25 miles SSW from its entrance, 3.5

miles SE of Nordre Oygardskjeret.

8.15 There are anchorages in Sjunkfjorden, sand and clay, 3 miles

WSW and 4.5 miles SW from the light on the E entrance point

8.15 Leirfjorden (67°32'N., 15°37'E.) extends about 11 miles NE

from Sorfolla, 6.25 miles E of Sjunkfjorden. It appears to be

free of charted dangers in the fairway. 

8.15 Storvika (67°31'N., 15°36'E.) affords good anchorage, in

clay and sand, on the S side of Leirfjorden, 2 miles within the

entrance.

8.15 Laksely (67°22'N., 15°36'E.) (World Port Index No. 22295)

situated on the W side of Sorfolla, near its head, 8.5 miles S of

the entrance to Leirfjorden, has a smelting works. There is a

concrete quay at the factory, 96m long, with depths of 9.6 to

11.2m alongside.

8.15 Sorfolla is well marked by lights. The white sectors of these

lights lead through the various channels clear of charted dangers.

8.15 Sagfjorden (67°38'N., 15°16'E.) is entered from Folla

through Refsfjorden N of the island of Prestmasoy, and from

Sorfolla through Masoysundet, E of the island.

8.15 Anchorage may be taken off the NE side of Prestmasoy, in

18 to 23m, sand, 1.5 miles SE of Mulneset, the N entrance

point to Sagfjorden. There is also anchorage 2.5 miles E of the

point, in 40m, sand. 

Courtesy of Kystriksyeien Reiseliv AS

Leirfjorden

Helloskjeret Light
172 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

8.15 There is an anchorage 6 miles E of Mulneset, off Sagfjorden,

in 22 to 30m, sand and shingle.

8.16 Indreleia leads from the vicinity of Helloyskjeret, 3

miles NW across the outer part of Folla, then about 10 miles N

across Brennvika and Andholmsfjorden, to the vicinity of Sildskjeret (67°48'N., 14°44'E.), in the SW approach to Grotoysundet.

8.16 Vessels may proceed from the vicinity of Helloyskjeret by

keeping the white sector of that light, which will lead SW of

Kjopmannen (67°39'N., 14°43'E.) and into the white sector of

Ola-Persoya Light (67°40'N., 14°43'E.).

8.16 During W gales, breakers extend some distance W from

Kjopmannen and should be given a wide berth.

8.16 From Kjopmannen, steer in the white sector of Ola-Persoya

Light and enter Ytre Vettoysundet passing, E of the light.

When entering Ytre Vettoysundet, care is necessary to pass W

of the rocks, awash, lying from about 0.1 mile SSE to 0.2 mile

ESE of the light. Care must be used to pass E of the danger 0.3

mile N of Ola-Persoya Light.

8.16 Brennvika indents the coast about 4 miles from a position

about 2 miles NNE of Ola-Persoya Light.

8.16 Leinesfjorden, next N of Brennvika, is an E continuation of

Andholmfjorden. It terminates in two branches, Saursfjorden,

on the N, and Botnfjorden, on the S. An entrance channel off

Leines is well marked, but is suitable for use only with good

local knowledge. The many encumbrances may best be seen on

the chart.

8.16 From the vicinity of Ola-Persoya Light, the route of Indreleia leads across Brennvika to a position W of Skjaholmen

(67°43'N., 14°43'E.). The green sector of the light, bearing between 167° and 178°, astern, leads W of this islet. 

8.16 When W of Skjaholmen, steer toward the rear range light on

Steinsholmen, 1.5 miles N of Skjalholmen, passing E of the

foul ground 0.5 mile SSW of the range light, then W of the

danger which extends 183m SSW from Steinsholmen

(67°44'N., 14°43'E.).

8.16 From Steinsholmen, the range lights in line 186°, astern,

indicate the fairway of Indreleia as it crosses the inner part of

Andholmfjorden. This track leads between the light marking

Leiskjer, 1.75 miles N, and foul ground marked by a perch

183m W of the light, then NNE to pass E of Sildskjeret, 2.5

miles farther N. There are many dangers in this area which are

best seen on the chart.

8.17 Grotoysundet (67°50'N., 14°46'E.) lies between Grotoya and the mainland E. The narrow, shallow channel through

it connects the inner part of Andholmfjorden with Breisundet

3.5 miles NNW, and Vestfjorden.

8.17 Local knowledge is necessary in Grotoysundet and the use of

a local pilot is recommended for the largest vessels that can use

the channel. The channel is 30m wide, with a depth of 4.9m.

8.17 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Grotoysundet are

strong. The tide levels at Grotoy (67°50'N., 14°46'E.) on the

NE end of Grotoya are 3m at MHWS and 0.5m at MLWS.

8.17 Depth gauges are placed at Hartvikgrunnen Light

(67°49.2'N., 14°44.2'E.), for northbound vessels and at Skaten

Light (67°50.6'N., 14°47.4'E.), for southbound vessels.

8.17 From Skaten Light, three channels lead NW into Breisundet

(67°54'N., 14°43'E.). The W channel is the safest and deepest,

but it is tortuous. Breisundet is about 3 miles distant from

Skaten Light. Vestfjorden is entered from this pass.

8.17 Skotsfjorden is entered about 1 mile NE of Skaten Light

through a rock-encumbered entrance, with a channel about

46m wide between the reefs on either side. This fjord should be

entered only by vessels with local knowledge.

8.17 Anchorage is available at the head of the fjord, in depths of 9

to 22m, and in the bay close W, in depths of 11 to 17m.

8.18 Flagsundet (67°55'N., 15°00'E.) leads S of Engeloya

and is entered from Indreleia or from the W through Breisundet. Skitenfjorden is its E continuation. 

8.18 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 25m and a navigable

width of 40m, spans the narrows between Alstadoya

(67°54'N., 15°11'E.) and Bogoya, 183m S.

8.18 The E end of Skitenfjorden opens into Sagfjorden.

8.18 Tides—Currents.—In Flagsundet, the tidal current flows in

the direction of the channel. Strong squalls sometimes blow

down from the mountains and are particularly severe about 5

miles within the W entrance and near Bogoya. The current is

strongest at Vikskjer. Flagsundet is limited to vessels with local

knowledge.

8.19 Skagstadsundet (67°58'N., 15°10'E.) is entered from

Vestfjorden between Foroya (68°01'N., 15°07'E.) and Orneset,

1.25 miles ESE, and leads 8 miles S and E between Engeloya

and Lundoya to the junction with Skitenfjorden, Okssundet,

and Sagfjorden.

8.19 Dangers are charted in the entrance E of Foroya and near the

center of the fairway about 5 miles within the entrance.

8.19 Okssundet (68°00'N., 15°18'E.) is entered from Vestfjorden

between Oksnesodden (68°03'N., 15°14'E.) and Dalshamaren,

a point 1.5 miles NE. It leads 7 miles SSE between Lundoya

and Hamaroy to the junction with Skagstadsundet and Sagfjorden.

8.19 There is usually a N flow of current on the E side of the

sound and a S flow on the W side of the sound.

8.19 Squalls from the mountains can occur during S winds.

8.19 The white sector of the light on Oksnessodden through N

indicates clear water in the approach from Vestfjorden.

8.19 Okssundet is deep; however, a mid-channel course will lead

clear of any coastal dangers.

8.20 Sagfjorden (67°58'N., 15°36'E.) is entered between

Bolsoygalten (67°57'N., 15°24'E.), at the S extremity of

Husoyvaer, and Skranstad, 2 miles SE. It extends about 13

miles E and SE along the S side of Husoya and Finnoya. The

fjord is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.

8.20 Anchorage at Store Lagmansvika (67°55'N., 15°53'E.), at

the head of Sagfjorden on the E side, may be taken, in 15 to

17m, sand.

8.20 From Dalshamaren, the N entrance point of Okssundet, the

NW coast of Hamaroy trends 7.5 miles NNE to Selsoya

(68°09'N., 15°29'E.), then 3.75 miles ENE to Eggloya

(68°11'N., 15°38'E.), which lies close off the Tranoya peninsula, the N extremity of Hamaroy.

8.20 Tranoy (68°11'N., 15°40'E.) (World Port Index No. 22160)

consists of a cove on the E side of the peninsula. The timber

quay is 74m long, with depths of 2 to 9m, and is situated in the

NW corner of the cove.
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 173

Pub. 182

8.20 A foul bay, 0.75 miles SSE of Tranoy, provides a good anchorage, in 18 to 40m, sand, sheltered from W, but is open to N

and NE winds.

8.20 There is a pilot station located at Tranoy. Mariners are advised when approaching the pilot boarding place to pass well S

of the lighted buoy located at position 68°14'N, 15°36'E, which

marks a shoal area.

8.20 The pilot boarding areas are located in position 68°12.7'N,

15°35.7'E and position 68°18.4'N, 15°55.7'E. Contact should

be made on VHF channel 13 for boarding arrangements.

8.20 A channel leads W of Tannoya (68°09'N., 15°48'E.) into a

long inlet between Tranoya and the mainland 3 miles E.

8.20 Tannoysundet, W of Tannoya, leads S between Tannoya and

Hamaroy. A 10m patch lies in the fairway off the W extremity

of Tannoya. Local knowledge is required in the channel.

8.20 Presteid (68°05'N., 15°40'E.) lies on the W side of Presteidfjorden 3.5 miles SSW of Tannoysundet. This harbor is the

calling place for Hamaroy, the principal village on the island.

There is a timber quay, 26m long, with depths of 5.8 to 7.8m

alongside. Anchorage may be taken, in 30 to 50m, clay, NW of

Presteid.

8.21 Tysfjorden (68°06'N., 16°15'E.) is the name for a

group of fjords which extends for about 30 miles SSE from a

position 10.5 miles NE of Eggloysa. The fjords are deep and

several rivers discharge into them.

8.21 The tidal currents usually set out of Tysfjorden, attaining a

maximum velocity of about 3 knots.

8.21 An extensive reef lies between Bremneset (68°17'N.,

16°09'E.), the NE entrance point to Tysfjorden, and Bavoya an

island 2.75 miles NNW. Storboen lies at the W end of this reef. 

8.21 Bremnesskjaer (68°17'N., 16°08'E.), a drying shoal, lies on

the NE side of the entrance, 0.75 mile S of Bremneset.

8.21 Foul ground extends about 0.4 mile offshore off the SW

entrance to Tysfjorden. Sandvikskallen, with a charted depth of

4.9m, lies 1.75 miles NW of the light at Korsnes.

8.21 The white sector of various lights lead from Vestfjorden

toward and into Tysfjorden.

8.21 Korsnes (68°15'N., 16°04'E.) (World Port Index No. 22140)

lies close within the entrance of Tysfjorden, on the SW side. It

is protected from the N but a sea is raised in it by a SE gale

which is known locally as a Tysfjorden Wind. 

8.21 There is an angled timber quay, with two berths 25 and 20m

long, with depths of 3.9 to 7.6m and 2.3 to 3.9m, respectively,

alongside.

8.21 Bogvika (68°14'N., 16°05'E.) opens off the W side of Tysfjorden, 1.75 miles S of Korsnes. There is good anchorage, in

depths of 14 to 21m, clay, in Bogvika.

8.21 Bessfjorden is entered off the W side of Tysfjorden, 1.5

miles SSE of Bogvika, between Bessfjordneset (68°12'N.,

16°07'E.) and Klubben, 0.4 mile SSW. 

8.21 There is anchorage, in 12.8 to 14.6m, clay, 0.9 mile SW of

Bessfjordneset, and, in 20 to 22m, 1 mile SSW of the point, for

vessels with local knowledge.

8.21 Drag (68°03'N., 16°05'E.) (World Port Index No. 22120) is a

natural coastal harbor which opens off the W side of

Tysfjorden, 8.25 miles S of Bessfjordneset. There is an angled

timber quay in Drag, with a berth 23m long, with depths of 4.6

to 4.9m alongside. The timber quays at the felspar quarry has

depths of up to 6.5m alongside. 

8.21 There is an anchorage W of the light, with mooring rings, in

clay and sand. A slight swell sets in with N winds.

Tranoy Light
174 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

8.22 Hellemofjorden is entered from Tysfjorden and extends about 13 miles SSE from its entrance between Hellandneset (68°02'N., 16°09'E.), 2.25 miles SE of Drag and

Hestneset 1 mile ESE. An overhead cable, with a vertical

clearance of 38m, spans the fjord at Hestneset.

8.22 A similar cable, with a vertical clearance of 240m, spans the

fjord 9 miles within the entrance.

8.22 The fjord is deep throughout, but on its E side, about 2 miles

within Hestneset, foul ground, with a charted depth of 1.8m,

extends 0.4 mile offshore. An islet lies about 0.3 mile off the E

shore 6 miles farther S, reducing the fairway to a width of 0.45

mile.

8.22 Skrovkjosen (68°15'N., 16°19'E.), a bay on the NE side of

Tysfjorden, is deep and free from dangers. Its N entrance point,

Solvneset, lies about 4 miles SE of the E entrance point of

Tysfjorden. Brennsoyklubben, the S entrance point of the bay,

lies 0.9 mile SSE of Solvneset.

8.22 Anchorage.—Anchorage with mooring rings, may be taken,

in 40m, clay and sand, off Ulvik (68°34'N., 16°20'E.) (World

Port Index No. 21970) in the SE part of Skrovkjosen. 

8.22 Anchorage may be taken, in 20m, off Eidbukta, in the N part

of Skrovkjosen, 1.5 miles N of Ulvik. Local knowledge is required.

8.22 Haukoyfjorden opens off the E side of Tysfjorden, about 3

miles SE of Skrovkjosen. It is entered between Indre Skarbergneset (68°13'N., 16°12'E.) and Skjerneset, 4 miles SSE.

The fjord is deep and clear of dangers, however, Haukoygrunnen, with a charted depth of 2.5m, lies in the entrance 1.25

miles NNW of Skjerneset.

8.22 The inner end of the fjord divides into the N and S arms,

namely, Stefjorden and Tommerasfjorden. From the latter arm,

Fuglefjorden extends 2.25 miles SSE.

8.22 Stefjorden extends E and SE from the NE end of Haukoyfjorden. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway, and the

shores nearly everywhere are steep-to.

8.22 At Haukoya (68°12'N., 16°24'E.), on the S side of the entrance to Stefjorden, there is a berth at a stone and concrete

quay 26m long, with depths of 9.4 to 9.7m alongside. 

8.22 Anchorage is available off Haukoya as shown on the chart.

8.23 Indre Tysfjorden is entered off Kjopsvik (68°06'N.,

16°21'E.), 3.5 miles SSE of Skjerneset, and extends about 8

miles E. It is deep and free from dangers to a position about 1

mile from its head. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 35m, spans the fjord 3 miles NE of Kjopsvik.

8.23 Hulloya, which rises to a height of 676m, lies on the S side

of the entrance to Indre Tysfjorden, 1 mile from Kjopsvik. An

overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 38m, spans the

channel from Hulloya to a point on shore close W of Kjopsvik.

8.23 Hulloysundet, off the S side of Hulloya, is deep and free

from dangers, except for the chain of rocks extending from

Hulloyneset (68°03'N., 16°11'E.), the SW point of Hulloya, to

Hulloynesgrunnen, 1 mile WNW. An overhead cable, with a

vertical clearance of 24m, spans the sound.

8.23 Grunnfjorden, entered from Hulloysundet, W of Kjerrklubben (68°02'N., 16°19'E.), is free from dangers in the fairway. It extends 8 miles SSE.

8.23 Kjerrvika (68°01'N., 16°20'E.), a cove situated on the E

side of Grunnfjorden, 1.5 miles S of Kjerrklubben, is the site of

a concrete quay 16m long, with depths of 5.5 to 8.5m

alongside. The fjord is generally free from ice.

8.23 Mannfjorden lies E of Grunnfjorden, from which it is separated by a peninsula 2 miles wide. There are no dangers in the

fairway of the fjord which penetrates 5.5 miles SE. An overhead cable,with a vertical clearance of 65m, spans the fjord 4

miles within the entrance.

8.23 Multind (68°00'N., 16°30'E.) is a conspicuous dome-shaped

summit, 853m high, situated on the E side of Mannfjorden 4.5

miles SE of Kjerrklubben.

8.23 There is anchorage at the head of Mannfjorden in a cove on

the N side, clear of a cable.

Tysfjorden
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 175

Pub. 182

Ofotfjorden

8.24 Ofotfjorden Sis, entered between Baroya and Tjeldodden (68°23'N., 16°08'E.), 1.75 miles N. Its branches

extend about 40 miles E to within 5 miles of the Swedish

border.

8.24 Narvik, the most important port on the fjord, is situated 30

miles within the entrance. The prevailing winds are NE in the

winter and W in the summer.

8.24 The current in Ofotfjorden nearly always flows out, and it

may be strong during gales, especially along the land.

8.24 There is usually an outflow of current from the branch fjords

into Ofotfjorden, which can be strong and dangerous, particularly at the mouths of the fjords during the melting of ice in the

spring.

8.24 A mid-channel course will lead from the vicinity of Baroya

to Hamnesholmen (68°25'N., 16°35'E.), 11.5 miles ENE. The

white sector of the light on Baroya, astern, will lead clear of the

dangers.

8.24 Efjorden is entered from Ofotfjorden by a narrow channel E

of Baroya (68°21'N., 16°07'E.) and extends 17 miles SE. The

fjord may also be entered from Vestfjorden by boat channels S

of Baroya. The entrance channels are encumbered with shoals

and are difficult to enter. No attempt to enter should be made

without good local knowledge.

8.25 Ramsundet (68°29'N., 16°31'E.) is entered through

Breivika, off the N side of Ofotfjorden, 8.25 miles ENE of

Tjeldodden. This channel leads about 6 miles N to join Indreleia in Tjeldsundet.

8.25 From Hamnesholmen, the fairway of Ofotfjorden trends

ENE about 6 miles to the vicinity of Lilandsgrunnen

(68°27'N., 16°50'E.). It then continues E for about 11 miles to

Narvik.

8.25 Lilandsgrunnen, with a least charted depth of 2m, lies near

mid-channel about 1 miles off the N shore.

8.25 Skjomgrunnen (68°25'N., 17°13'E.), a rocky shoal with a

depth of 5m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 9 miles ESE of

Lilandsgrunnen. From a position 0.3 mile SE of Skjomgrunnen, a bank extends SE to the shore, 1 mile distant.

8.25 An ammunition dump is charted in the fjord; it is centered

about 1 mile SSE of the beacon on Lilandsgrunnen.

8.26 Kjeldebotn (68°25'N., 16°41'E.), a cove, opens off

the S side of Ofotfjorden 2 miles ESE of the light on Hamnesholmen. 

8.26 Anchorage, in a depth of 19m, clay and sand, may be taken

in the SE part of the cove. There is a timber quay on the E

shore with a berth, 28m long, with depths of 6.2 to 7m alongside.

8.26 Ballangen (68°22'N., 16°55'E.), an inlet, opens off the S side

of Ofotfjorden, 6 miles ESE of Kjeldebotn. The inlet extends

4.5 miles SW. Litle Ballangen lies near its head.

8.26 Dangers lie on both sides of the entrance to Ballangen, but it

may be entered in the white sectors of the lights, and by using

the lights, in range 236°, at Litle Ballangen.

8.26 Litle Ballangen (68°20'N., 16°51'E.) (World Port Index No.

22050) has two quays, 29 and 13m long, with depths of 3.5 to

6.2m and from 4.5 to 6m alongside, respectively. Anchorage

may be taken off the quays, in about 10 to 22m, clay.

8.26 Bogen, an inlet, opens off the N side of Ofotfjorden, 3 miles

ENE of Lilandsgrunnen. Skogoya lies on the W side of Bogen;

two smaller inlets lie off its SE and S extremities. Liland lies

near the W entrance of Bogen, off the S end of Skogoya;

Bogen, a village, lies at the head of the inlet. 

8.26 The white sector of Liland Light (68°28'N., 16°55'E.) leads

from Ofotfjorden into the entrance to Bogen. The port has a

timber quay, 100m long, with 11.6m alongside. There is a total

length of 77m of quay at the industrial works, with depths of

4.3 to 6.6m alongside. 

8.26 Bogen Nato Jetty is located below Slettebakken Light

(68°31'N., 16°58'E.). The jetty also has a concrete vehicle

ramp.

8.26 Caution.—A submarine cable crosses Ballangen from a

position close E of the quays. 

8.26 The dangers in Bogen are numerous and may best be seen on

the chart.

8.27 Liland (68°29'N., 16°53'E.) (World Port Index No.

22010) is situated near the W entrance point of Bogen. The

entrance leads N of Lilandsgrunnen and W of the islet lying off

the S extremity of Skogoya. Foul ground extends about 0.3

mile ESE from a position on shore S of Liland.

8.27 There is a berth at the end of a timber jetty, 30m long, with

depths of 4.6 to 6.7m on the E side and depths of 2.6 to 6.7m

on the inside.

8.27 Skjomen is entered from Ofotfjorden between Rosaneset

(68°24'N., 17°12'E.) and Einbaerneset, 1.25 miles E, about 7

miles SE of Bogen.

8.27 The fjord, about 13 miles long, is deep and surrounded by

high steep mountains. The innermost part of the fjord is magnificent, with high peaks covered a good distance upward with

a lush deciduous forest.

8.27 During some winters, the ice conditions may obstruct traffic

severely.

8.27 An overhead cable and a bridge span Skjomen 1.5 miles

within the entrance. Each has a vertical clearance of 35m. The

navigable width under the bridge is 150m.

8.27 Sorskjomen (68°12'N., 17°19'E.) is situated at the head of

the fjord. There is a quay at Hallarvika, close NW, 20m long,

with 5m alongside. Care is necessary to avoid the extensive

drying bank at the head of the fjord.

Narvik (68°26'N., 17°25'E.)

World Port Index No. 22030

8.28 Narvik is situated on the E side of Narvikbukten, at

the entrance to Beisfjorden, 3.75 miles ENE of Skjomen. The

harbor is a natural landlocked basin, almost completely surrounded, and sheltered by high ground. 

8.28 The port lies about 150 miles from the open sea. Commercial

shipping traffic is heavy in winter, when the Gulf of Bothnia is

ice-bound. Swedish ore is exported through the port.

8.28 Winds—Weather.—The “Beisfjorden Wind,” which occasionally blows from SE, can raise a considerable sea; otherwise

the wind is usually light. The harbor is always ice-free.

8.28 Tides—Currents.—Mean tides rise 3.2m at springs and

2.4m at neaps. During May and June, there is a constant NW

set out of Beisfjorden, which is estimated to reach 4 to 5 knots
176 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

during the ebb current. The direction of the current in the harbor is variable and may cause vessels at anchor to swing in

different directions.

8.28 Depths—Limitations.—The deepwater Fagernes Quay is

located in the SE part of the harbor. It is 280m long, with a

depth of 15m alongside.

8.28 There is about 1,000m of quayage within the harbor, including berths for coastal tankers, in addition to the four ore berths

described below.

8.28 Ore Berth No. 3 and Ore Berth No. 4 lie on the SW and NE

sides, respectively, of a concrete pier located in the NE part of

the harbor. They are both 214m long, with depths of 13.5m

alongside. Ore Berth No. 3 can handle vessels up to about

110,000 dwt and 200m in length. Ore Berth No. 4 can handle

vessels up to 45,000 dwt and 175m in length.

8.28 Ore Berth No. 5 is a concrete caisson berth lying parallel to

the shore in the N part of the harbor. It is 208m long, with a

depth of 27.5m alongside. Vessels of any length up to about

350,000 dwt can be handled.

8.28 Apatite Berth No. 6 is located between Ore Bberth No. 5 and

the shore. It has a depth of 12m alongside and can handle

vessels up to 10,000 dwt. 

8.28 It was reported that the largest vessel accommodated in the

harbor was 204,200 dwt, with a draft of 14.3m 

8.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage through Ofotfjorden is compulsory. The

pilot embarks at Tranoy. Harbor pilots are available at Narvik

and will board and assist during berthing.

8.28 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.

8.28 Anchorage.—Narvikbukten affords excellent anchorage in

any part of the bay, in depths of 18 to 29m. The pilot will advise on the selection of berths.

8.28 Caution.—Several wrecks lie in Narvikbukten and may best

be seen on the chart.

8.28 A seaplane operating area lies in Narvikbukten and may best

be seen on the chart.

8.29 Beisfjorden (68°24'N., 17°30'E.) is entered off Fagernes. It is spanned by a movable bridge, with a vertical clearance of 6m and a navigable width of 11m. The bridge can only

be opened for passage at HW slack and LW slack. Passage

under the closed bridge at other times must always be made

with the vessel stemming the current. Passage speed must be

no greater than steerage-way.

8.29 Signals for the bridge are, as follows:

1. Green light—bridge open.

2. Red light—bridge closed.

8.29 A water pipeline has been laid across the approach to

Beisfjorden. Warning signs are posted on both sides of the

passage. Ships must anchor to stay clear of the line between the

two warning signs.

8.29 Herjangsfjorden (68°30'N., 17°27'E.) is the NE continuation of Ofotfjorden N of Narvik. The fjord is deep and clear of

dangers except on the SE shore, which is fringed by a reef that

extends 0.5 mile offshore in places. Skolten, a rocky patch with

a depth of 14.9m, lies in mid-channel.

8.29 Hamnvik (68°32'N., 17°34'E.), situated near the head of

Herjangsfjorden, on its E side, has a quay 60m long, with

depths from 7.4 to 10.6m alongside.

8.29 Anchorage is available for small boats close S of the quay,

clay bottom, with mooring rings.

8.29 Rombaken (68°28'N., 17°36'E.) extends 5 miles E from its

entrance S of Oydjordneset. Rombaksbotn, the inner part of the

fjord, extends 4.5 miles farther in an ESE direction.

8.29 Straumen (68°26'N., 17°42'E.), the narrows between Rombaken and Rombaksbotn, is spanned by a bridge with a vertical

clearance of 40m. The passage is restricted to a width of 183m

by a reef which extends from the N side.

Rotvaer to Harstad

8.30 From Vestfjorden, the S approach to Harstad lead, in a

general N direction, through Tjeldsundet and Vagsfjorden,

Narvik
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 177

Pub. 182

about 33 miles distant. Sandtorgstraumen, 16 miles NE of Rotvaer, has a least charted depth of 7.9m in the fairway.

8.30 The winds in Tjeldsundet, to a large degree, follow the

direction of the sound, but are often unsteady and unreliable.

Winds which set S in the sound, will, in the W part of Sandtorgstraumen, slack and back around. South winds are usually

the most troublesome.

8.30 In Vagsfjorden, there can be E storms in the fjord on the

mainland, whereas there are W winds in the entrances from the

sea.

8.30 Lodingen (68°25'N., 16°00'E.) (World Port Index No.

21950), 3 miles NNE of the light on Rotvaer, lies on the W side

of the S entrance to Tjeldsundet. This is a sheltered harbor with

alongside depths of up to 9.4m. A pilot is available at Skraven

for the entrance to Lodingen. Lodingen, the largest pilot station

in Norway, has a continuous watch and is equipped with VHF

radio and radar. The area served is the W coast of Norway from

65°08.0'N to the Russian border. The station is available on

VHF channel 13.

8.30 Pilots to Lofoten and Vesteralen are ordered through

Narvik Harbor

Narvik—Iron Ore Terminal
178 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

Lodingen pilot station. Anchorage may be taken in the harbor,

in depths of 11.9 to 14.6m, good holding ground. 

8.30 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26. 

8.30 Care must be taken to anchor clear of the fairway leading to

the quay. A sea may set into the anchorage when the wind is E

of N.

8.31 Tjeldsundet (68°31'N., 16°10'E.), between Hinnoya

on the W and Tjeldoya and the mainland on the E, is the

continuation of Indreleia from Vestfjorden to the N ports. It is

narrow in several places;d the channel is rendered intricate by

below-water rocks and shoals. The currents are strong and the

numerous whirls and eddies necessitate care.

8.31 Kongsviktind (68°35'N., 16°16'E.), a mountain, 988m high,

10 miles NNE of Lodingen, provides a good mark in the S entrance to the sound.

8.31 The dangers in Tjeldsundet may best be seen on the chart. A

bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m and a horizontal clearance of 90m, spans the fairway near Langkvitneset (68°38'N.,

16°35'E.), 7.75 miles NE of Kongsviktind. 

8.31 It is reported that in the narrows N of Tjeldoya, the channel

will only accommodate one large vessel at a time between the

buoys on either side.

8.31 Tjeldsundet is well marked by lights and other navigational

aids. The white sectors of the various lights will lead through

the fairway, but caution must be exercised to alter course to

pass the lights at a safe distance. It must be noted that some of

the white sectors will lead into shoal water.

8.31 Anchorage may be taken, in 14.6 to 22m, in the W side of

Tjeldsundet, about 1 mile NW of Nordstandskjaer (68°30'N.,

16°09'E.). Local knowledge is necessary.

8.31 Kongsvika, 1.5 miles SSW of Kongsviktind, affords anchorage, in 18.3m, to vessels with local knowledge.

8.31 Vessels waiting for the tide before proceeding through Sandtorgstraumen, may anchor, as indicated on the chart, in 18.3m

or in 14.6m, 0.4 or about 0.6 mile NE, respectively, from Hol

(68°33'N., 16°24'E.).

8.31 The N entrance to Ramsundet lies S of Kalvoya (68°33'N.,

16°27'E.), which lies S of the W entrance to Sandtorgstraumen.

8.32 Vagsfjorden, the continuation N of Indreleia from the

N end of Tjeldsundet, is a large, almost landlocked basin. The

W shore of the fjord is formed by the NE side of Hinnoya and

the E side of Grytoya. The N shore of the fjord is formed by

Senja; the SE shore is formed by the islands of Rolla and

Andorja, lying off the mainland.

Tjeldsundet

The Tjeldsundet Bridge
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 179

Pub. 182

Caution.—A firing area has been established in Vagfjorden,

extending from the SW entrance to a line between Klubben and

Engenes.

8.32 A submarine cable runs NE across the entrance to Harstad

and may best be seen on the chart.

8.33 Harstad lies on the E coast of Hinnoya, which is

fringed with islets and shoals to a distance of 2.5 miles. These

dangers must be passed to the E.

8.33 The tidal currents in Vagsfjorden usually set N with the falling tide and S with the rising tide. They may attain a velocity

of 1 knot at springs.

8.33 Langgrunnen (68°42'N., 16°38'E.), with a charted depth of

2.1m, lies on the W side of Indreleia, 2 miles N of the light on

Grashdmen. A reef, with a charted depth of 2.2m, lies 0.25

mile E of Langgrunnen.

8.33 Store Rogla (68°44'N., 16°39'E.), 95m high, lies on the W

side of the fairway, 3 miles N of Grasholmen. Lille Rogla lies

0.5 mile farther NNE.

8.33 Storholmen (68°43'N., 16°46'E.), marked by a light, lies on

the E side of Indreleia, about 1 mile off the SW extremity of

Rolla and 2.25 miles E of Store Rogla. Foul ground extends 0.5

mile E of Storholmen and just over 0.5 mile SW from Rolla.

8.33 In the S approach to Harstad, which lies 3.75 miles NW of

Lille Rogla, are Arnoya (68°46'N., 16°37'E.), 1.75 miles NW

of Lille Rogla, Laukholmen, and Tjuvholmen.

8.33 Smaholmgrunn, a rocky shoal with a depth of 5.8m, and

Lysbotn, with a depth of 0.3m, lie 0.6 mile and 1.0 mile NNW,

respectively, from Lille Rogla.

8.33 The many dangers which front Harstadhamn from Tjuvholmen N to Roykenesboen (68°51'N., 16°39'E.), 2.25 miles

NNE, may best be seen on the chart.

8.33 Vessels approaching Harstad from the S, after passing Lille

Rogla, should shape a course toward Stangnesodden

(68°48'N., 16°37'E.), steering in the white sector of the light on

that point to within 0.3 mile of the light. A depth of 15m is

charted in this area. The track then leads E of the light structure, where course can be steered W into Harstadhamn.

8.33 Vessels approaching Harstad from the E should steer on the

church at Trondenes bearing 265°, passing S of Magoya Light. 

8.33 This track leads over a least charted depth of 10m. When the

vessel is about 0.3 mile WSW from the light, steer a course

into the harbor to the assigned berth.

8.33 Vessels from the N approaching Harstad, after having

cleared the dangers at the SE end of Toppsundet, should steer

in the white sector of Magoya Light to a distance of about 0.3

mile from the light; course of 212° will then lead into the harbor.

Harstad (68°48'N., 16°33'E.)

World Port Index No. 21610

8.34 Harstad is a coastal natural harbor situated on the NE

coast of Hinnoya. It is the second-largest town in N Norway. It

offers anchorage and piers for large vessels. The port is also a

base for oil exploration support.

8.34 Winds—Weather.—The harbor is well-sheltered and is

generally unaffected by winds, except those from the NE,

which give rise to considerable swell in Gangsasbotn. It is ice

free. The prevailing wind is S. There is no darkness from May

3 to August 11 and the sun does not rise from December 2 to

January 11.

8.34 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Harstad is from 2.2m

MHWS to 0.3m MLWS.

8.34 Depths—Limitations.—Large vessels may enter the harbor,

which has depths up to 151m. There is a total of about 1,880m

of quayage in the harbor. 

8.34 The quays have accommodations for vessels up to 183m in

length and a draft of 10.7m. There are two tanker berths, 240

and 171m in length, which will accommodate vessels with

drafts of 10 and 9.1m, respectively.

8.34 A new quay is reported to have been constructed about 1

mile SSW of Stangnessoden, outside the harbor area. It is

protected from the E by Arnoya and Laukholmen. The quay is

240m long, with a depth of 10m alongside. It is reported to

have facilities for ro-ro and container vessels.

8.34 Aspect.— Trondenes Church, on the NW side of the harbor,

1.75 miles NNW of Stangnesodden, and the school 0.3 mile

SSW of the church, are conspicuous. The church, with a tall

gray spire, 0.2 mile WSW of the Harbor Office, is a useful

mark for entering the harbor.

8.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Requests for pilots

should be made to the pilot office at Lodingen. If the vessel is

entering via Andenes, the vessel’s ETA should be sent 12 hours

in advance. If entering via Lodinge, the vessel’s ETA should be

sent 2 hours in advance; VHF channel 16 is used at Lodingen

and Andenes.

8.34 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26. 

8.34 Anchorage.—There is anchorage in Gangsasbotn, an inlet

which extends about 1 mile S from Harstad. The depths in the

anchorage are from 5 to 40m, sand and mud. There is an anchorage in Samabukta, in 30m, mud and shells.

Lofoten—Northwest and North Sides

8.35 From Lofotodden (67°50'N., 12°50'E.), the W coast

of Moskenesoya trends about 18 miles NNE to Fuglehuk, a

conspicuous hill, 562m high. 

8.35 Bergsneset (68°07'N., 13°04'E.), the NW extremity of

Moskenesoya, lies about 0.5 mile NNW of Fuglehuk. 

8.35 This stretch of coast is fringed with an almost unbroken line

of precipitous cliffs. It is fronted by a sand bank, with rocks

and shoals extending up to 4 miles offshore. Beyond this bank,

the depths increase rapidly.

8.35 From Bergsneset to Eggum, about 18 miles NE, the coast is

formed by the islands of Flakstadoya and Vestvagoya. The

coast of Moskenesoya, Flakstadoya, and Vestvagoya are

heavily indented by bays, fjords, and straits. This stretch is

fronted by a sand bank to a distance of 4 miles, with detached

rocks and shoals. The NW coast of Vestvagoya, from Skolneset (68°15'N., 13°31'E.) to Eggum, 5.5 miles NE, presents a

line of precipitous cliffs. The sea breaks along the entire coast

during gales from between W and N.

8.35 Skiven (67°58'N., 12°56'E.), a mountain 850m high, is situated 0.5 mile inland, 9 miles NNE of Lofotodden. It is one of

the principal landmarks on the coast. Other prominent landmarks are Napptind, on Flakstadoya, 8 miles ENE of

Fuglehuk; Horntind lying 2.25 miles NW of Napptind; and
180 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

Himmeltind, lying 5.25 miles NE of Horntind. Himmeltind is

easily identified from the W, appearing as two peaks; from N

three peaks are seen, with the one in the middle being the lowest and sharpest. 

8.35 Vaggen, close inland, 2 miles SW of Himmeltind, is precipitous on its W side. From a position W of Eggum, the 430m

peak close S will be distinctly seen.

8.36 Langeskallen (67°57'N., 12°43'E.), an isolated depth

of 18.9m, lies 4 miles offshore, 7 miles NNW of Lofotodden.

Haraldskallen, with a charted depth of 27m, lies 3.5 miles

NNW of Bergsneset. These two dangers are the farthest seaward along this coast. The coast should be avoided.

8.36 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the vicinity of

Bergsneset usually set NE on the flood and SW on the ebb.

8.36 From Lofotodden to Bergsneset, there are no reported safe

harbors.

8.36 Hornneset (68°10'N., 13°20'E.), the NW extremity of

Flakstadoya, lies 6.5 miles NE of Bergsneset. Skarvholman,

marked by a light, lies about 5 miles WNW of the point. It is

surrounded by foul ground to a distance of 0.25 mile. 

8.36 An isolated rock is charted 0.5 mile N of the light. The many

shoal patches in this area are best seen on the chart.

8.36 The harbor of Ramberg lies between the NE side of Moskenesoya and the W side of Flakstadoya. It is the principal

village in Flakstadoya. A dredged channel, with a depth of 4m,

leads to the harbor area, which has a depth of 3.4m. The public

quay is 42m long and has depths of 2.5 to 3.5m alongside.

8.36 During onshore gales and heavy seas, breakers form N and

NW of Busholmen (68°07'N., 13°14'E.). Hornneset lies 4.25

miles NNE of Jusholmen.

8.36 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken off the harbor of

Ramberg (68°05'N., 13°14'E.), in 10m, hard mud.

8.37 Eggum (68°19'N., 13°41'E.), the N extremity of

Vestvagoya, lies 11.75 miles NNE of Hornneset.

8.37 The N entrance to Nappstraumen lies between Hornneset

and Skolmneset, 6.25 miles NNE. Steinfjorden indents the

coast between these two points.

8.37 Haesholman (68°14'N., 13°26'E.), a group of islets marked

by a light, lies in Steinfjorden, 4.25 miles NNE of Hornneset.

A bank with a least charted depth of 0.9m lies between the

point and the islets.

8.37 Faldet (68°12'N., 13°15'E.), an isolated patch with a charted

depth of 0.9m, lies 3 miles NW of Hornneset, in the W

approach to Nappstraumen. There are other shoal patches

charted in this area, which may best be seen on the chart.

8.37 Gapet (68°09'N., 13°28'E.), which leads S into Nappstraumen, is approached through the area of shoals and islets in

Steinfjorden.

8.37 From seaward, the white sectors of the lights on Hundholmen (68°10'N., 13°27'E.) and Haesholman, lead to Gapet.

8.37 In bad weather, with heavy seas, it is inadvisable for those

without local knowledge to attempt to enter Gapet.

8.37 From Eggum, the coast trends in a general ENE direction to

the NE end of Austvagoya, about 35 miles distant. The entire

coastal area is much indented by small bays and coves.

8.37 A considerable amount of foul ground lies off the N coasts of

Vestvagoya, Gimsoya, and Austvagoya. This stretch of coast is

one of the most dangerous parts of Lofoten. 

8.37 From Eggum to Hoven (68°21'N., 14°06'E.), the NW extremity of Gimsoya, 8 miles ENE, there is a continuous line of

breakers during gales from between W and N.

8.37 Gimsoystraumen (68°20'N., 14°19'E.) is formed between

Gimsoya and the W side of Austvagoya. It gives access to

Vestfjorden.

8.37 Hadselfjorden, separating the NE end of Lofoten from the S

end of Vesteralen, is important for vessels seeking anchorage.

It is practically the only place of refuge between Lofotodden

and Andenes, the N extremity of Vesteralen. The W part of the

fjord is deep, with no dangers in the fairway.

8.38 Hadselfjorden is approached between the coastal reef

N of Gimsoya and the numerous dangers extending W from

Hadseloya (68°33'N., 14°49'E.). A rocky shoal, with a depth

of 6.7m, lies near mid-channel, 6 miles NNE of Hoven. The

fairway passes S of this shoal. 

8.38 Havboen (68°30'N., 14°28'E.), with a least depth of 0.6m,

lies on the N side of the fairway, 5 miles SW of the W extremity of Hadseloya.

8.38 Vessels proceeding through Hadselfjorden should keep in

mid-channel. When SE of Hadseloya, a vessel should steer NE,

passing E of Jaeva (68°32'N., 15°04'E.), a small islet, then into

the S entrance to Sortlandsundet.

8.38 Raftsundet, formed between Austvagoya and Hinnoya, is

entered from the SE part of Hadselfjorden, via Ingelsfjorden

(68°29'N., 15°14'E.). 

8.38 Brottoya, a low island, lies in the entrance to Ingelsfjorden. It

may be passed on the S side or on its NE side by steering in the

white sectors of the appropriate lights.

8.38 Anchorage.—Secure anchorage may be taken off the E side

of Holdoya (68°27'N., 14°54'E.), an islet 2.25 miles S of the

SE extremity of Hadseloya. The anchorage is in 18.3m, mud,

and may be approached from the N by passing between the

reefs off Holdoya and off the islets to the E. There is a least

charted depth of 11m over a width of 0.15 mile. The anchorage

may also be approached from the NE. A submarine cable lies

close E of the anchorage.

8.39 Sortlandsundet (68°42'N., 15°26'E.) lies between

Langoya and Hinnoya. It is about 19 miles long from its

junction with Hadselfjorden and the S end of Gavlfjorden,

which leads N into the open sea. The channel is deep and clear

of dangers in mid-channel. A bridge, with a vertical clearance

of 30m, spans the channel in the narrows at Sortland.

8.39 Local knowledge is required in all the harbors and anchorages off Sortlandsundet.

8.39 There is an isolated unmarked depth of 7.6m, 5 miles NE of

Jaeva and a rock, awash, lies 1 mile farther NE.

8.39 Vessels entering the fairway have only to keep in midchannel when passing up the sound and should pass E of a

7.9m patch lying near mid-channel about 3 miles SSW of

Sortland.

8.40 Sortland (68°42'N., 15°25'E.) (World Port Index No.

21670) is the administrative center for the Sortland District. It

is situated in Langoya. The berth at the packet boat quay is

150m long, with depths of 6.3 to 10m alongside. The larger of

two bunkering quays is 48m long, with a depth of 5m alongside. Steamers call regularly at the port.
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 181

Pub. 182

8.40 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26. 

8.40 The fairway of Sortlandsundet continues N from Sortland,

and narrows to about 0.4 mile between the shore banks about 1

mile N of the bridge. 

8.40 A light marks a reef on the E side of the fairway, 2 miles N

of the bridge; a shoal, with a depth of 1.8m, lies on the W side

of the fairway, just over 1 mile NW of the light. From this

shoal, the fairway N to the junction with Gavlfjorden is free of

charted dangers.

8.40 Gavlfjorden (68°56'N., 15°22'E.), between Langoya and

Andoya, connects with the open sea off Anda, which lies 14.5

miles NNW of its S entrance. The fjord is exposed N, and in

bad weather the sea breaks over the whole area of shoals N of

Gisloya (68°57'N., 15°16'E.).

8.40 The fairway of Gavlfjorden, which is clear of dangers in

mid-channel, is about 1 mile wide between the shore banks 3

miles SE of Gisloya, and 1.25 miles wide in a position 3 miles

NNE of the same islet. The fairway is well marked.

Vesteralen

8.41 Vesteralen, the island group NE of Lofoten, comprises

Hadseloya, Langoya, Andoya, Hinnoya, and several smaller

islands.

8.41 The waters off the W coast of Langoya from Litloya

(68°35'N., 14°19'E.), at the entrance to Vesteralsfjorden, to

Frugga, 15.5 miles NNE, are foul and difficult, to distances up

to 4.5 miles from the shore. A shoal, with a charted depth of

1.8m lying 3 miles NW of the light on Litloya, is the farthest W

of these dangers. 

8.41 The coast of Langoya NNE of Frugga is indented by

numerous fjords. The entrance to the various fjords are obstructed by islets, rocks, and shoals, and it is dangerous to pass

over them even in moderately fine weather. Mariners are

advised to avoid this coast.

8.41 Andoya (69°05'N., 15°45'E.) is the farthest N of the Vesteralen group. From a position on shore E of Anda to Andenes,

a distance of 20 miles, the almost inaccessible coast of the

island is fronted by a bank of white sand on which there are

numerous rocks. The various mountain formations are separated by vast flat marsh areas; for this reason the mountain

peaks will look like islands when seen from the sea. 

8.41 The N part of Andoya is low and flat. From E and W,

Andoya Light will become visible before the rest of the

landscape.

8.41 Gaukvaeroy (68°37'N., 14°21'E.), an island off the S end of

Langoya, close N of Litloya, has sharp hills which are good

landmarks in clear weather. The hills on Langenes, at the N tip

of Langoya, stand out distinctly against Andoya.

8.41 The hills on the island nearest the coast are generally high

and conical; it is difficult to distinguish them from those E until

quite near the coast.

8.41 The mountains of Andoya are easily identified as they rise

abruptly from low, marshy lands of considerable extent and

from a distance appear as detached rocky islets. They are

visible up to 50 miles in clear weather.

8.42 Vesteralsfjorden (68°35'N., 14°32'E.), between Hadseloya and the W point of Langoya, is continued NE by Eidsfjorden and E by Langoysundet.

8.42 Eidsfjorden (68°40'N., 14°53'E.) indents Langoya to a distance of 14 miles, and is mostly deep and clear in the fairway.

A depth of 3.4m lies at the W end of a shoal about 1 mile from

the head of the fjord. The innermost 2 miles of the fjord freezes

in winter and all the side fjords are frozen up.

8.42 Langoysundet (68°35'N., 14°55'E.), between Hadseloya

and Langoya, connects the inner end of Vesteralsfjorden with

the SW end of Sortlandsundet.

8.42 Langoya is connected to Hadseloya through Boroya

(68°34'N., 14°57'E.) by bridges. The vertical clearance across

the E end of Langoysundet is 30m over a navigable width of

80m.

8.42 There is anchorage in Langoysundet for vessels of moderate

size, in 44m, sand, SE of Dragneset, the N extremity of Hadseloya. A 6m rocky patch lies 0.2 mile E of Dragneset.

8.42 Boroysundet, off the W and S sides of Boroya, give access to

Stokkmarknes.

8.43 Stokkmarknes (68°34'N., 14°55'E.) (World Port

Index No. 21690) is a natural coastal harbor situated on Hadseloya abreast the W end of Boroya. The channels leading into

the harbor are well marked. 

8.43 The controlling depth is 5m in the W entrance and 5.5m in

the E entrance. The deepest berth has a depth of 7.8m.

8.43 Boroysundet, E of Stokkmarknes, is spanned by a bridge

with a vertical clearance of 15m.

8.43 Anda (69°04'N., 15°11'E.) lies 2.5 miles N of the N end of

Langoya. The islet is marked by a light equipped with a racon.

Flesan, a rocky patch with a least charted depth of 1.8m, lies 2

miles N of Anda and Brakan, an isolated patch with a least

charted depth of 2.7m, lies 2.25 miles NNE of the islet.

Sortland
182 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

8.43 Vessels approaching Gavlfjorden from the N should steer to

pass E of Brakan.

8.43 Foul ground extends 2.5 miles N from the N end of Andoya,

about 26 miles NNE of Anda.

8.43 Bjerka (69°24'N., 16°08'E.), an isolated patch with a depth

of 8.5m, lies 4.25 miles NNE of Andoya. It is the farthest N of

the dangers lying off the island. Nordhavboan, an isolated

shoal patch with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 1 mile ESE of

Bjerka. There are other patches with similar depths charted in

the area.

8.44 Andenes (69°20'N., 16°08'E.) (World Port Index No.

21660), a town situated at the N extremity of Andoya, is the

district administrative center. The harbor, which is on the NE

side of the town and protected by four large mole installations,

is filled with shoals and skerries. 

8.44 Depths—Limitations.—There is a berth alongside the military quay, 62m long, with depths of up to 6.3m alongside. The

harbor is mostly used by fishing vessels.

8.44 Aspect.—Andenes Light is shown from a prominent tower,

40m in height.

8.44 It is reported that a church spire and a microwave tower, both

conspicuous, stand about 1 and 2 miles, respectively, SE of

Andenes Light.

8.44 Pilotage.—Pilots are requested 24 hours in advance from

Lodingen Pilot Station (68°25'N., 16°00'E.). For further

information see paragraph 8.1. 

8.44 Pilots board in position 69°19.5'N, 16°13.5'E. 

8.44 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26. 

8.44 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted on VHF

channels 12 and 16 as well as by means listed in the table titled

Andenes—Contact Information. 

8.44 Anchorage.—Moderate-size vessels may anchor about 0.15

mile ESE of the E head of the NE detached mole or in the

entrance to the inner harbor. A prohibited anchorage area lies

adjacent to the coast close SE of the harbor and may best be

seen on the chart.

8.44 Bleik (69°16'N., 15°58'E.) is a small fishing harbor, protected by moles, lying about 5 miles SW of Andenes. A range

marks the entrance. It is reported that a conspicuous radio

tower stands about 2 miles ESE of Bleik.

Andenes Light

Port of Andenes Home Page

http://www.andoy.kommune.no

Andenes—Contact Information

Telephone Facsimile

Pilots 47-76-141115 —

Port Authority 47-76-141113 47-76-141113

Harbormaster 47-76-115000 —

Andenes
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 183

Pub. 182

8.45 Andfjorden (69°00'N., 16°03'E.), a large inlet

entered between the E side of Andoya and the W side of Senja,

15.5 miles E, leads in a S direction for about 22 miles to the

NW end of the island Grytoya; its continuations farther S are

known as Kvaefjorden and Gullesfjorden. 

8.45 At Grytoya, Toppsundet, formed between Grytoya and

Hinnoya, leads SE into Vagsfjorden and Indreleia.

8.45 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Andfjorden are not

very strong and are usually governed by the wind, but occasionally the N current sets toward the E side of the fjord and

the S sets toward the W side. 

8.45 In Toppsundet, the tidal currents usually set E with the rising

tide and W with the falling tide, but with E and S winds they

often set constantly W, and with W and N winds they set constantly E.

8.45 Caution.—Firing and bombing practice areas are established in the N entrance to Andfjorden. Firing areas are also

established in Andfjorden between Leikneset and Meloyvaer,

extending seaward from Steinvaer, and between Saurabogen

and Meloyvaer, extending S to the N entrances of Risoy Sund

and Topsundet.

8.46 On the E side of the fjord are several groups of low islands surrounded by rocks and shoals. Holmenvaer (69°18'N.,

16°45'E.), 14 miles ESE of Andenes, is the farthest N of these

groups. The Steinavaer group lies 8 miles SSW of Holmenvaer

and the Meloyvaer group lies 6 miles farther SSW.

8.46 Myrboen (69°12'N., 16°30'E.), an isolated rocky shoal with

a least charted depth of 6.7m, lies at the W end of Steinavaer.

8.46 Froholman (69°04'N., 16°19'E.), a group of rocks and islets,

lies 4 miles NNE of Grytoya. A rock at the S end of the group

dries.

8.46 Grotavaer, a group of islets and rocks with a depth of 4.9m at

its outer edge, lies close off the NW side of Grytoya. 

8.46 Skarvhausbaen (68°57'N., 16°10'E.), a shoal patch with a

depth of 4.9m, lies about 1.25 miles SSW of the 4.9m depth at

Grotavaer.

8.46 The W side of Andfjorden is relatively free of dangers outside the shore bank.

8.46 Myrflesan (69°06'N., 16°04'E.), marked by a light, lies 2.25

miles E of Andoya, 14 miles SSW of Andenes. It dries in

places. A 4m isolated depth lies 0.4 mile E of the light.

8.46 Kinnholmen, an island marked by a light, lies 1.5 miles E of

Andoya, about 10 miles SSW of Myrflesan.

8.46 Risoysundet, formed between Andoya and Hinnoya, connects Gavlfjorden with Andfjorden. The NE end of the channel, which is much narrowed by shallow banks, is entered 4

miles NNW of Kinnholmen. A bridge, with a vertical clearance, of 32m spans Risoysundet.

8.47 Kvaefjorden (68°50'N., 16°00'E.), the S extension of

Andfjorden, is relatively free of dangers in the fairway.

8.47 Mefjordingen (68°55'N., 16°05'E.), an isolated 12.8m

shoal, lies in mid-channel 2.25 miles ESE of the light on Kinnholmen. Jabaen, with a charted depth of 8.8m, lies 2 miles ESE

of Mefjordingen.

8.47 Kasfjorden opens off the E side of Kvaefjorden. Bygdesundet opens E 5 miles farther SW. Godfjorden extends SSW from

Kvaefjorden; Gullesfjorden is the S continuation of the main

fjord. The inlets are free from dangers in mid-channel.

8.47 Ice will form at the heads of the branch fjords in the winter.

Mariners are cautioned that ice movement may be strong when

melting occurs in the spring.

8.47 Toppsundet (68°53'N., 16°23'E.), formed between Grytoya

and Hinnoya, is the farthest S of the channels which lead

between Andfjorden and Vagsfjorden. It is easy to navigate but

heavy squalls may be expected.

8.47 Hestebaen (68°56'N., 16°16'E.), 0.35 mile N of Ytre Elgsnes, the SW entrance point at the W end of Toppsundet, is

awash. Store Sandskjaer lies on the shore bank 0.45 mile

offshore, 1.75 miles SSE of Hestebaen.

8.47 Vaskinnkviga (68°53'N., 16°26'E.), an above-water rock,

lies 0.25 mile off Grytoya, about 3 miles ESE of Store Sandskjaer. The other dangers in Toppsundet are marked and are best

seen on the chart.

8.47 Kjeoya (68°52'N., 16°34'E.), an islet marked by a light, lies

in the SE entrance to Toppsundet. Shoals, with a depth of 7m at

their outer end, extend 0.5 mile SW from the islet.

8.47 Krakeneset, a peninsula, lies 1 mile S of Kjeoya. A shoal,

which partly dries, extends 0.2 mile N from the peninsula.

8.47 The island of Magoya, with a light at its SW end, lies close E

of Krakeneset. Roykenesbaen, a drying shoal, lies 0.75 mile

NNE of Magoya.

8.47 Vessels may transit Toppsundet by steering in the white

sector of the various lights that mark the fairway.

Harstad to Malangen

8.48 Astafjorden (68°44'N., 17°00'E.), with its continuations of Salangen and Loksefjorden, extends in a general NE

direction for a distance of about 25 miles. The fjord is entered

from the SE side of Vagsfjorden and is formed on the NW side

by the islands of Rolla and Andorja and by the mainland on the

SE. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.

8.48 Several fjords branch from the SE side of Astafjorden. On

the NW side are Bygden and Mjosundet, which are channels

leading to Vagsfjorden. Mjosundet is narrow and there is usually a N setting, strong, tidal current, but it can be navigated by

large vessels.

8.48 A spit, with a charted depth of 1.8m, extends 0.6 mile SW

from the N side of the entrance to Astafjorden, and a reef, with

charted depths of 3m, extends 0.3 mile off the S side of the

entrance.

8.48 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in about 29m, clay,

off the village of Tovik (68°41'N., 16°53'E.), 2 miles within the

S entrance point of Astafjorden.

8.49 Grovfjorden (68°42'N., 17°05'E.) lies about 5 miles

ENE of Tovik. This arm of Astafjorden is encumbered by rocks

about 2 miles within the entrance. A bridge, with a vertical

clearance of 4.9m, spans the fairway at the narrows about 3

miles within the entrance.

8.49 Gratangen (68°45'N., 17°18'E.), a winding arm which extends about 11 miles ESE from Astafjorden, is entered about 4

miles ENE of Grovfjorden. Its shores are steep and inaccessible, except at its inner end, and it is free from dangers in the

fairway. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 17m, spans the

narrows about 8 miles within the entrance. Gratangsbotn is

formed E of the bridge.

8.49 Bygden (68°50'N., 17°08'E.), formed between Rolla and
184 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

Andorja, extends NNW from Astafjorden to Vagsfjorden, a

distance of about 7 miles. The S entrance, 2.5 miles NNW of

Gratangen, is encumbered with islets and rocks, which can best

be seen on the chart.

8.49 There are several anchorages charted in Bygden, but they are

for small vessels with local knowledge.

8.50 Lavangen (68°47'N., 17°37'E.) opens off the E side

of Astafjorden, about 9 miles ENE of Bygden. The fjord

extends about 9 miles SE and is free of dangers in the fairway. 

8.50 The shores of the outer part of this inlet are precipitous, but

are less bold toward the inner end, where alluvial banks of

considerable extent have been deposited by a river, which

flows into the head of the inlet.

8.50 In Lavangen, drift ice is sometimes encountered towards the

head of the inlet.

8.50 Salangen (68°53'N., 17°34'E.), the continuation of Astafjorden is about 8 miles in length. Loksefjorden is the NE end

of Salangen.

8.50 Sagfjorden, on the SE side of Salangen near its head, extends

4 miles in a SE direction. It is entered E of Foroya (68°54'N.,

17°41'E.). 

8.50 For the most part these fjords are clear and deep. The shoals,

which may be dangerous to shipping, are marked. An isolated

rock, with a depth of 5m, lies 0.6 mile SW of Foroya.

8.51 Salangsverket (68°55'N., 17°44'E.) (World Port

Index No. 21495) is a natural coastal harbor situated on the E

side of the N entrance point to Sagfjorden, 0.75 mile ENE of

Foroya. There is a concrete quay, 72m long, with depths of 7.7

to 9.2m alongside. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 10m,

stones, between the quay and an islet 0.25 mile E.

8.51 In hard winters, ice can lie in Sagfjorden from Salangsverket

to Sjovegan, where the quays are blocked.

8.51 Sjovegan (68°53'N., 17°50'E.) (World Port Index No.

21510) is the administrative center for the Salangen district. It

is a coastal harbor protected by breakwaters, situated on the NE

shore of Sagfjorden, 2.75 miles SE of Salangsverket. There are

several quays up to 48m in length, with depths of up to 8m.

8.51 Mjosundet (68°54'N., 17°27'E.), formed between Andorja

on the SW side and the mainland on the NE side, is entered

from Astafjorden in a position about 3 miles N of the entrance

to Lavangen. 

8.51 Mjosundholmen (68°53'N., 17°28'E.), an islet marked by a

light, lies in the SE entrance to the sound. The islet may be

passed on either side. A shoal, with a depth of less than 1.8m,

lies 0.3 mile ENE of the islet.

8.51 In Mjosundet, there is nearly always a strong W and N flow,

but after N winds of long duration it is weaker, and may occasionally run S and E. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of

34.7m, crosses Mjopsundet.

8.51 From a position E of Harstad (68°48'N., 16°33'E.), Vagsfjorden leads about 18 miles NE to the S entrance to Tranoyfjorden.

8.51 Vessels in transit of this part of Vagsfjorden should steer to

pass about 1 mile W of Engenes (68°56'N., 17°07'E.), the NW

point of Andorja, then steer for the N edge of Bergsheia

(69°03'N., 17°24'E.) situated on the island of Dyroya, about 9

miles NE of Engenes.

8.51 Tranoyfjorden (69°04'N., 17°19'E.) is entered between

Hageneset, the S extremity of Dyroya, and Stonglandet, a

peninsula extending SE from Senja.

8.51 Indreleia, continued from the NE end of Vagsfjorden, has

two alternative routes leading into Solbergfjorden, known as

Tranoyfjorden and Dyroysunde. Tranoyfjorden is the principal

channel. Dyroysundet, formed between Dyroya and the mainland, can be used by large vessels.

8.51 The Dyroy Bridge, with a vertical clearance of 17.6m,

crosses Dyroysundet.

8.52 Tranoyfjorden, deep and free from dangers in the

fairway, leads NNE to Solbergfjorden. 

8.52 From Solbergfjorden, the fairway leads ENE to the junction

with Finnfjorden, then NW to Finnsnes, a distance of about 24

miles.

8.52 Bispeflua (69°01'N., 17°14'E.), which dries and is marked

by a light, lies at the S end of Tranoyfjorden on the W side of

the fairway, 0.75 mile off Stonglandet. Foul ground with

several islets, including Leikangsoy, extends N about 2 miles

from a position 0.3 mile NE of Bispeflua. A reef fringes

Hoyholmen, an islet 2 miles N of Leikangsoy.

8.52 Solbergfjorden (69°08'N., 17°38'E.), formed between the

SE side of Senja and on the E by the mainland, is the continuation of Indreleia from Tranoyfjorden. The fjord is broad and

free from dangers in the fairway.

8.52 The tidal currents in Solbergfjorden set N with the rising tide

and S with the falling tide.

8.52 During W winds, heavy squalls, which may blow from any

direction, are experienced near Klauva Light (69°11'N.,

17°58'E.). These squalls decrease as Finnsnes is approached

and it becomes nearly calm in Gisundet. If it is blowing hard

from S or SE, irregular winds may be expected, and violent

squalls may strike down from Kistefjell, a peak 5 miles NE of

Finnsnes.

8.52 From Solbergfjorden, the fairway of Indreleia leads NE

between Klauva Light and Grunnreisaskjaer (69°11'N.,

18°02'E.), a rocky 4.9m shoal, about 2 miles E. From this shoal

the track turns NW toward Finnsnes, the S entrance to Finnsnesrenna.

8.52 The approach to Finnsnesrenna, which is entered W of

Finnsnes, leads between Storvikgrunn, on the W side, and

Millomgrunn on the E side of the fairway. They have least

depths of 7.9m and 12.8m, respectively.

8.52 The E part of the channel connecting Solbergfjorden and

Finnsnesrenna is Finnfjorden, and the W part is Laksfjorden.

8.52 Hemmingfjorden (69°12'N., 18°04'E.), about 1 mile NNE

of Grunnreisaskjaer, has a timber quay 31m long, with depths

of 4.5 to 7.5m alongside. The quay is in poor repair.

8.52 At Storvik, in Finnfjordbotn, the NE part of Finnfjorden,

there is a poorly fendered quay 25m long with 6.5 to 7.5m

alongside. At Storneset, close SSW of Storvik, there is a quay

associated with the smelting works, 42m long with 13m

alongside.

8.52 Finnsnes (69°14'N., 17°58'E.) (World Port Index No.

21490) is the administrative center for the Lenvik district. It is

a natural coastal harbor situated at the SE entrance to Finnsnesrenna. There is a packet boat quay, 87m long, with depths

of 5 to 7m alongside.
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 185

Pub. 182

8.53 Finnsnesrenna (69°14'N., 17°58'E.), formed in the

narrows between Senja and the mainland, is entered abreast of

Finnsnes and leads N into Gisundet. Gisundet extends in a

general N direction for about 16 miles to its junction with

Malangen, off the NE extremity of Senja.

8.53 There is a channel through Finnsnesrenna and Gisundet with

11m of water, but the channel itself is not marked for vessels

with draft greater than 10.5m.

8.53 There are two channels through Finnsnesrenna. 

8.53 The W channel is entered W of Finnsnesskjaer (69°14'N.,

17°58'E.), a shoal which dries, situated about 0.4 mile NNW

from the light on Finnsnes.

8.53 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m, spans Finnsnesrenna, about 1 mile N of Finnsnes. The white sector of the

lights on the bridge leads through the channel.

8.53 Regulations.—Traffic is controlled from a signal station

situated about 0.5 mile N of Finnsnes.

8.53 Southbound traffic has right of passage over northbound

traffic. Vessels with a draft of less than 6.1m use the E channel.

8.53 Signals.—The following signals, shown at the signal station,

indicate that passage is closed to northbound traffic:

1. By day—Flag N of the International Code of Signals

over a black ball.

2. By night—A white light over a red light.

8.53 Gisundet (69°18'N., 17°58'E.) is well marked; the dangers

and navigational aids may best be seen on the chart.

8.53 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set through Gisundet

with considerable strength, attaining their greatest velocity in

the vicinity of Gibostad, about 8 miles N of the bridge. 

8.53 With the rising tide the tidal current sets N from the S

entrance, losing strength toward a point 5 miles N of Finnsnes,

where it meets the S flood current from Malangen.

8.54 Gibostad (69°21'N., 18°05'E.) (World Port Index No.

21380) is situated on the W side of Gisundet. It is a natural

coastal natural with a packet boat quay, 59m long, with depths

of 5.5 to 7.5m alongside.

8.54 An area prohibited to diving, fishing, and anchoring is

charted N of Gibostad.

8.54 Gisundet extends about 8 miles N from Gibostad to Malangen, the approach to Tromso.

8.54 Sandholmen (69°25'N., 18°06'E.), an islet surrounded by

shoal water, lies on the W side of the fairway, 3.75 miles N of

Gibostad. The shoal water is marked on its E edge, about 0.3

mile off the islet. Other foul ground lies on the W side of the

fairway NNW of Sandholmen.

8.54 The white sector of the light on Slettneset (69°23'N.,

18°06'E.), 1.5 miles NNE of Gibostad, leads E of the dangers

off the W side of Gisundet and into the white sector of the light

on Lille Rodbergsodden (69°27'N., 18°08'E.), 4.75 miles

NNE. A bight, about 1 mile NE of Lille Rodbergsodden, is

foul. 

8.54 Prohibited Military Areas are located in the vicinity of Rodbergsodden and Skorliodden, and at the NW entrance point to

Gisundet. 

8.54 Aglapsbaen, a group of rocks partly awash, lies 0.5 mile offshore 1.5 miles NE of the light.

8.54 Indreleia leads into Malangen through the broad entrance of

Gisundet, N of Lille Rodbergsodden.

Andenes to Tromso

8.55 From abreast of Andenes, the W side of Senja trends

about 29 miles NE to the seaward entrance to Malangen, the

passage leading to Tromso. Kvaloy is on the N side of Malangen and W of Tromso.

8.55 Both islands have abrupt declivities toward the sea, and are

fronted by banks, with islets and below-water rocks extending

up to 11 miles off the NW side of Kvaloy.

8.55 Two large banks, Sveinsgrunn and Malangsgrunden, with

depths of less than 183m, extend, respectively, to a distance of

25 miles W of Senja, and 35 miles W of the N part of Kvaloy. 

8.55 Between the two banks, a fissure, with depths over 280m,

extends into Malangen and to a short distance from the outer

dangers extending W from Kvaloy. The approach to Malangen

is made with considerable danger in thick weather, even with

careful attention to soundings.

8.55 A vessel, having made the W coast of Senja between

Andenes and Kvaloy, with the island of Andoya bearing 180°,

can obtain a fix by means of the mountains on Senja. Vessels

running the W side of Senja should not close to within a

distance of 6 miles.

8.55 Strangers will have difficulty in identifying this part of the

coast from the offing. When seen from a distance, the larger

islands appear to diminish those in the background, and on

closer view, to hide them altogether. At a distance, the islands

themselves lose their height and peculiarity of outline and

appear to form a continuous mass, which is capped by so many

sharp peaks that considerable local knowledge is required to

identify with certainty any one in particular.

8.55 The most conspicuous points are Aldenes (69°20'N.,

16°0'E.), the N extremity of Andoya, and the N point of

Kvaloy, about 30 miles NE of the NW extremity of Senja. As a

rule the openings of the numerous fjords and channels will be

the most useful guides.

8.55 Aspect.—Kjerringneset (69°19'N., 16°55'E.), a point on

Senja 16.5 miles E of Andenes, is a good landmark when

approaching the coast from W of Andenes. Maneset, Teistneset, and Traelen, 3.75 miles N, 5.75 miles NNE and 8 miles

NNE, respectively, from Kjerringneset, are good marks.

8.55 At the N extremity of Senja is Kjolva (69°36'N., 17°30'E.),

416m high, which is especially prominent and can hardly be

mistaken from a position NW of Andenes. 

8.55 Snefjell, a rounded snowy summit 653m high, about 13

miles S of Kjolva, and Kvennan, 967m high with pointed

peaks, about 15 miles SW of Snefjell, are also good marks

from NW of Andenes.

8.55 When nearing the coast NW of Kjolva, the opening of

Oyfjorden, on the E side of Kjolva, will be visible. About 8

miles SE and 7.5 miles ESE of Kjolva are Skinnkollen and

Astria, 731m and 742m high, respectively, which are the most

important marks for the entrance to Malangen.

8.55 In the vicinity of Kvaloy at Malangen, the island of Haja

(69°44'N., 18°05'E.), 486m high, lies about 12 miles NNE of

Astria. It can be distinguished from the neighboring islands

and hills, by its precipitous fall to seaward. 

8.55 About 3 miles E of the summit of Haja is the summit of

Sessoya, 657m high. About 8 miles NE of Sessoya are the

pointed peaks of Vengsoya, up to 765m high.
186 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

8.55 From a position W of Auvaer (69°52'N., 18°00'E.), a group

of islets on the foul bank extending from the N end of Kvaloy,

the Alp-like mountains of that island will be seen behind the

islands in the foreground. The mountains bordering Ersfjorden,

together with Tromtind, 3 miles NE of Sessoya, and Blamannen, 5.5 miles SE of Tromtind, are the most conspicuous.

8.55 Pilotage.—There is a pilot station at Andenes; 12 hours

advance ETA is required. If entering by Lodingen, 2 hours

notice is required. The pilot boats guard VHF channel 16.

8.56 Malangen is entered between Hekkingen (69°36'N.,

17°50'E.) and Edoya, 1.5 miles NE. A light is situated on each

entrance point. This channel is the best approach from the SW

to Tromso. 

8.56 Hekkingen Light is shown from a low tower on a wooden

house, 10m in height. A racon is located at the light tower.

8.56 Malangen extends about 13 miles in a SE direction to its

junction with Straumsfjorden. An arm of Malangen continues

SE for about 12 miles to Nordfjorden, which lies at its head.

8.56 Indreleia enters Malangen from Gisundet about 10 miles

from its W entrance.

8.56 Winds—Weather.—During N winds over Malangen, it will

often be calm, or there may be a light breeze off Greipstad

(69°31'N., 18°13'E.) about 3 miles NNE of the entrance to

Gisundet. With a N wind out of Straumsbukta, 9 miles E of

Greipstad, and S through Malangen, it is often calm in

Rystraumen.

8.56 During E winds out of Malangen, it is often calm in Stonnesbotn, on the SW side of the passage, 4 miles SE of Hekkingen. It is also often calm under these conditions from Asnes, 5

miles ESE of Greipstad, to a position about 2 miles farther

ENE.

8.56 During SE winds in Malangen, strong squalls are experienced from S of Straumsbukta to a position about 3 miles SW;

these squalls are especially frequent at the SW position.

8.56 During SW winds in Malangen, irregular winds will be experienced from the NW entrance point of Gisundet, seaward.

During W winds, it is often calm in the neighborhood of the

NW entrance to Gisundet.

8.56 Tides—Currents.—During the spring season the, tidal

currents set very strongly out of Malangen, independently of

the tidal currents close inshore on both sides of the fjord, where

they turn at the times of HW and LW.

8.56 During the summer and autumn months, the ebb currents

have the stronger set, whereas during the winter months the set

is more strongly into the fjord. The tidal currents set strongly

through the channel SE of Hekkingen, taking a W direction

with the falling tide.

8.56 Numerous whirlpools occur in Rystraumen when the tidal

currents are running at their maximum strength; when passing

through them great attention must be paid to the steering.

8.56 The tidal currents in Rystraumen set SW with the falling tide

and NE with the rising tide, the turn occuring at the times of

HW and LW. They set strongly through the passage, attaining a

maximum velocity of 6 to 7 knots.

8.56 According to the latest observations in Tromsoysundet, the

tidal currents set S from about 1 hour 45 minutes before HW

until about 1 hour 45 minutes before LW, when they turn and

set N until about 1 hour before HW. At springs the velocity is

up to 6 knots at the narrowest part, being strongest midway

between the turns of the currents. The average velocity is from

4 to 5 knots in the narrowest part and from 2 to 3 knots N and S

of this part. During N gales the tidal currents set S almost

continuously, the slack lasting only for about 0.2 hour, when

they continue to set S with S winds there may be slack water

for 0.25 hour, otherwise the currents turn with no period of

slack water.

8.56 Owing to the formation of the bottom, the tidal currents do

not run truly in the direction of Tromsoysundet. The N current,

for example, often sets in toward the mainland in the vicinity of

Krokelva, the mouth of which is about 3 miles NE of Storsteinnes Light; therefore when visibility is bad especially careful navigation is necessary. 

8.56 When proceeding S against the N curren,t a vessel will always have the current on the starboard bow, and is therefore

liable to go ashore on Tomasjordnes, about 1.25 miles NE of

Storsteinnes Light.

8.56 Caution.—Firing areas are established in Malangen from

Hekkingen to the junctions with Gisundet and Straums Fjord.

8.56 Dangers in the entrance to Malangen may best be seen on the

chart. 

8.57 Kvaltyvan (69°39'N., 17°45'E.), a group of belowwater rocks with a least depth of 5.8m, lies on the SW side of

the approach to Malangen, in a position 3.25 miles NW of

Hekkingen. 

8.57 On the NE side of the fairway, shoals, with a depth of 4.9m

at its outer end, extend 0.8 mile NNW from Edoya.

8.57 Within the entrance there are no dangers in the fairway,

except for a narrow coastal reef off Kvaloy.

8.57 Caution.—An ammunition dumping ground lies in Malangen, with its N end situated about 2 miles SE of Hekkingen.

8.57 From Greipstad, the S extremity of Kvaloy, the continuation

of Indreleia from the E end of Malangen is known as Straumsfjorden, with the narrows between Kvaloy and the island

Ryoya, known as Rystraumen (69°33'N., 18°43'E.), where the

channel has a least width of 0.2 mile between the shore banks.

It has been reported (2008) that tidal currents of up to 7 knots

occur at maximum flood and ebb. It is recommended that

vessels transit this area at slack water or at a speed of 15 knots

at other times.

8.57 Skallen, a shoal patch with a least depth of 7.9m, lies in the

W entrance to Rystraumen, 0.15 mile NW of Ryoya. A rock

NE of the light N of Ryoya is especially dangerous, as the SW

tidal current sets toward it.

8.57 The coastal reef extends about 0.3 mile SSE from Tisnes

(69°36'N., 18°50'E.), 3 miles NNE of Ryoya; a drying reef lies

E of Tisnes.

8.57 A shoal, with a least charted depth of 3.4m, lies 1.25 miles

NE of Tisnes.

8.57 The coastal reef which fringes the mainland on the SE side

of Tromsoysundet dries in places. A rock, awash, lies on the

reef 0.5 mile S of the bridge which spans the channel.

8.58 Tennskjerholmen (69°29'N., 18°19'E.) lies close off

the W side of Malangen, 3.5 miles SSE of Greipstad; from this

position Malangen continues SSE.

8.58 Foroya lies on the E side of the channel, 2.5 miles E of

Tennskjerholmen. A shoal, with a charted depth of 1.8m,
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 187

Pub. 182

extends 0.4 mile from the mainland, from a position about 2

miles S of Foroya.

8.58 Tromsoya (69°40'N., 18°57'E.), 5.75 miles NNE of Ryoy, is

fringed by a coastal reef, which extends up to 0.2 mile from the

SE and SW sides.

8.58 Spilderoya (69°25'N., 18°29'E.) lies on the E side of the

fairway, 2.5 miles S of Foroya, and is surrounded by a flat

which extends 0.35 mile NNW from the N end and 0.7 mile

SSE from the S end. There is a 1.8m depth charted on the N

flat, and 4.9m charted at the extremity of the S flat. 

8.58 It has been reported there is good anchorage, in 27m, 2 miles

SE of Spilderoya. It is protected from SE weather.

8.58 Malselvfjorden, entered 3.75 miles SSE of Spilderoya,

extends about 8 miles S from its entrance. The S half of the

fjord is shoal.

8.58 Nordfjorden, the SE continuation of Malangen, is entered E

of Malsnes (69°21'N., 18°34'E.), which lies 4 miles SSE of

Spilderoya. Aursfjorden, which branches S from Nordfjorden,

is entered about 3 miles SSE of Malsnes. A reef extends about

0.5 mile N from the E entrance point of the fjord.

8.58 A cable, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans Nordfjorden

6.75 miles within its entrance.

8.59 Ballsfjorden (69°32'N., 18°55'E.) is entered between

Balsnesodden, 1.75 miles ENE of Ryoya, and Bergholmen, an

islet 2.25 miles E. The fjord indents the mainland about 25

miles, in a SE direction.

8.59 Ramfjorden branches E about 3 miles within the entrance to

Ballsfjorden. A Military Prohibited Area has been established

in Ramfjorden; the area is delimited to the S by a line drawn

between Kobben Light and the S point of land at Ramfjordnes

(Olavsvern) and extends NE to the parallel of latitude at Hundbergklubben and the islands lying due E of it. A pier, with a

length of 95m, is reported (2008) to be located at Ramfjordnes

(Olavsvern). An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of

45m, spans the fjord close within its entrance. 

8.59 The shore reef fringing the W side of Ballsfjorden extends to

a distance of 0.5 mile in places; an 8.8m patch lies near midchannel, about 8 miles within the entrance.

8.59 During the ice season, Ballsfjorden is usually obstructed for

about 8 miles from its head; occasionally the ice may extend N

to within a few miles of the entrance.

8.59 A measured mile is situated on the E shore of Balsfjorden,

with the N limit at Bergholmen. The N outer mark stands on a

skerry near Ytre Berg; the S outer mark stands near Holmesletta. The course to be made good is 162°/342° at a distance of

about 0.5 mile from the outer marks.

8.59 Vessels approaching Malangen from W should stand

sufficiently far N to clear Kvaltyvan (69°39'N., 17°45'E.) before altering course for the entrance to the fjord.

8.59 When the dangers NW of Edoya are abeam, alter course into

Malangen, keeping in mid-channel, and then into Indreleia.

8.59 The SW coast of Kvaloy should not be approached closer

than 0.3 mile, as many large boulders lie at some distance from

the shore.

8.59 It has been reported that it is dangerous for small craft to

approach Malangen from the NW during a NW gale, as strong

opposing currents may be encountered NNE of Hekkingen.

Tromso (69°39'N., 18°57'E.)

World Port Index No. 21310

8.60 The city of Tromso is located on the islands of Tromsoya and Kvaloya, and on the neighboring mainland. It is about

30 miles from the open sea. Tromso’s municipality, which is, in

area, Norway’s largest, extends to additional islands and over a

large area of the mainland. The highest mountain in the

municipality is Jiekkevarre, which is 1,833m high. Tromsdalstind, which is visible from the town center, rises to 1,238m. 

8.60 Tromso experiences 2 months of midnight sun from May 21

until July 23. The sun does not rise in Tromso from November

25 until January 21. 

8.60 Tromso’s harbor has two installations. The old port stands

close to the center of the city; the new port stands about 1.75

miles N. The harbor area extends from, and includes Rystraumen in the S, to a line from Kvalsundet to the mainland in the

N.

8.60 Prostnesset, the old harbor, on Tromsoya, is near the W end

of the bridge. It has three sections. Sondre Havn, located about

0.5 mile SSW of the Tromso Bridge, is protected by the S

breakwater. Indre Havn, which is close to and SSW of the

bridge, is protected by the N breakwater. Polsehamna, the third

section of the old harbor, is N of the bridge.

8.60 Breivika, the new port, also on Tromsoya, N of the city center, has container and ro-ro facilities.

8.60 Winds—Weather.—Weather conditions seldom seriously

interfere with port working conditions. The harbor and approaches are ice-free.

8.60 Tides—Currents.—Strong and somewhat complex tidal

currents are liable to be experienced in the whole area around

Tromsoya, reaching a velocity of 4 to 5 knots in the narrowest

part of Tromsoysundet abreast the N mole. 

8.60 A marked, irregular countercurrent is experienced close to

the shore alongside the moles. In the vicinity of the bridge, the

current starts flowing in a S direction 1 hour 30 minutes prior

to HW and reverses direction 1 hour 30 minutes prior to LW.

8.60 The mean tidal range is 1.8m and the spring range is 2.4m.

8.60 Depths—Limitations.—The Harbor Authority operates

about 1,500m of quays, with depths of about 3 to 11m alongside. There are also about 1,600m of private quayage.

8.60 The quays at Breivik are 120m long, with 10.5m alongside,

and 90m long, with 8m alongside. The ro-ro facilities in Breivik will accommodate containers to 6.1m.

8.60 On the mainland side of the harbor there is a bunker station,

70m long, with a depth of 11.9m alongside. There are numerous other berths on the mainland side.

8.60 Vessels up to 40,000 dwt, with a maximum draft of 10.4m,

can be accommodated.

8.60 Vessels greater than 7,000 dwt should pass through Sandnessundet, W of Tromsoya.

8.60 The Tromso Bridge, spanning Tromsoysundet, has a horizontal navigational width of 60m and a vertical clearance of

36m. The centerline of the channel is indicated by lights and a

racon. A least depth of 7m was reported (1992) under the

bridge.
188 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 

Pub. 182

8.60 Pilotage.—Harbor pilotage is compulsory for all vessels

over 300 grt. Regular route vessels with a fixed pilot on board

are not obliged to take a harbor pilot. Entry and exit pilots can

be obtained at Tromso Pilot Station. 

8.60 Pilot requests are required 12 hours before arrival and vessels may be berthed 24 hours.

8.60 Pilots board in the following positions:

a. 0.7 mile ENE of Hekkingen Light in position

69°36.5'N, 17°52.0'E.

b. 2 miles E of Fakken Light on Fakkakjeila in position

70°06.0'N, 20° 13.0'E.

c. On request, 1 mile NE of Grotnes Light in position

69°52.4N, 19°47.8E.

8.60 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26. 

8.60 Regulations.—Vessels navigating within the port area are

forbidden to proceed at a greater speed than required for their

Tromso

The Tromso Bridge
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 189

Pub. 182

safe maneuvering. Vessels of more than 500 tons must not

exceed 5 knots between the S mole and Storsteinnes; however,

when passing under the bridge it may be necessary to use

speeds of 10 to 12 knots at times other than slack water.

8.60 Vessels arriving at Tromso and not having an allotted berth

must anchor in Polsehavn, about 0.2 mile NE of the W end of

the bridge.

8.60 Contact Information.—The Tromso Harbor Authority

maintains a 24-hour watch and may be contacted on VHF

channels 8, 12, and 16.

8.60 Anchorage.—Polsehavn affords anchorage in 11 to 12.8m.

Large vessels can anchor on the W side of the fairway, in a

depth of 31m, from 0.5 to 1.5 miles N of the bridge.

8.60 Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine

cables which cross Tromsoysundet close S of the S mole.

8.61 Sandnessundet (69°41'N., 18°54'E.), between the E

side of Kvaloy and Tromsoya, is the principal channel leading

past Tromsoya. Vessels exceeding 7,000 tons displacement are

required to use it. 

8.61 The narrowest part, between Langneset (69°41'N., 18°54'E.)

and Sandneset, 1.5 miles NNE, has been dredged to a depth of

16.5m, with a navigable width of 100m.

8.61 The Sandressundet Bridge spans the channel 0.75 mile N of

Langneset. It has a vertical clearance of 41m over a navigable

width of 140m. The centerline is marked by lights and a racon.

8.61 Store Grindoy (69°38'N., 18°51'E.) lies on the W side of the

S entrance to Sandnessundet. A bank, with patches of 3m, extends about 1 mile N and S from the island. A bank, with a

depth of 1.8m at its extremity, extends 1 mile SSW from Langneset.

8.61 The dangers, which may best be seen on the chart, are

marked by navigational aids. The white sectors of the various

lights lead through the dredged channel and to Indreleia.
Pub. 182

9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
193

Pub. 182

SECTOR 9 

NORWAY—MALANGEN TO VARANGERFJORDEN

9.0 Plan.—This section describes the N coast of Norway from

Malangen to Varangerfjorden. It describes the outer route, and

inner route or Indreleia, and the inner fjords between Tromso

and Porsangerfjorden. The fjords and ports in the vicinity of

Varangerfjorden are also described. 

General Remarks

9.1 Winds—Weather.—Weather reports for this area are

frequently broadcast. The area is often affected by travelling N

Atlantic depressions and associated fronts. It is, therefore, a

stormy area, especially during the winter months. 

9.1 The climate in the landlocked places of the inner reaches of

the fjords and Indrelia is extreme and differs from the relatively

equable climate on the outlying islands. Therefore, during most

of the year, rapid decreases or increases in air temperature

when entering or leaving the fjords and Indreleia may be experienced. 

9.1 At Tromso, the wind is frequently from the S to SW from

October through April, and from the N to NE from June

through August. The mean force is between 2 and 3 in midwinter and below force 2 from July through September. 

9.1 At Elvebakken, near Alta, there is little seasonal variation in

wind force, and it is, most often, a force 2. From October

through March in this area, the wind is mostly from the S to

SE; during June, July, and August, it is mostly from the W to

NW. Gales (force 8) are infrequent. The highest frequency

during winter is one per month. Gale winds are practically

unknown during the summer months.

9.1 At Vardo, from October through March,the wind is mostly

from the S to W; from May through August, it is usually from

the S to SE. The wind is strongest in January and February,

when the average force is between 4 and 5 and is lightest in

August, when the average is about a force 3. Gales (force 8) are

frequent in January and February. They occur during these

months on an average of about 6 days per month, and occur

during the months of May through August on an average of

less than one day per month.

9.1 Fog at sea is not particularly frequent; however, visiblity

may be serverly reduced during periods of heavy snowfall. The

lack of daylight in winter adds to the problem of poor visibility.

9.1 Vardo Vessel Traffic Service.—Vardo Vessel Traffic Service (Vardo VTS) operated along the coast of Norway between 65°N, in the vicinity of Rorvik, and the border with

Russia. All tanker vessels over 5,000 grt and deep-sea tugs are

to report to Vardo VTS on VHF channels 13 and 16 when entering these waters. Vardo VTS also monitors vessels approaching Melkoya (70°41'N., 23°36'E.) and Hammerfest

(70°40'N., 23°40'E.).

9.1 Pilotage.—Lodingen Pilot Center organizes and engages

pilots for vessels in Nordland and the Troms, from Rorvik in

the S to Kirkenes in the N. Pilots should be requested 24 hours

in advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior to

arrival at the pilot station. 

9.1 See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic

Ocean for further information.

9.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

9.1 Several IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Schemes, best seen

on the chart, are located off the N coast of Norway. These

schemes have been established to maintain a safe sea route for

all vessels, especially for the transport of oil from the Barents

Sea region. 

9.1 The route applies to oil, gas, and chemical tankers of all

sizes, including all cargo vessels of 5,000 gross ton and above

on international voyages.

9.1 Ships on international voyages off the coast to and from Rost

(67°31'N., 12°07'E.) to Vardo (70°22'N., 31°07'E.) should

strictly follow the new routing systems; however, ships making

ports-of-call in Norway for supplies or services are recommended to follow the intermediary routes to ports as portrayed

on the chart or as advised by the pilot or the VTS of the ports

concerned.

9.1 Eastbound traffic should use the traffic lane on the S side of

each TSS; westbound traffic should use the traffic lane on the

N side of each TSS 

Outer Route—Malangen to Hammerfest

9.2 Between Malangen, the approach to Tromso, and

Hammerfest, about 100 miles NE, the outside track along the

islands leads to Soroysund. Soroysund is deep and unencumbered, and is the best approach to Hammerfest from seaward.

Because off-lying dangers extend well off the coast, and because during the summer months there is the likelihood of fog

and strong NW winds, it is recommended that vessels from the

S, bound for Hammerfest, or vessels that intend rounding

Nordkapp should navigate well offshore, and give the coast N

of Malangen a wide berth. Vessels should make landfall in the

vicinity of the island of Soroya (70°35'N., 22°40'E.), located

about 85 miles WSW of Nordkapp (71°10'N., 25°47'E.). 

9.2 A chain of outlying islets and rocks, forming one of the most

distinctive features on the Norwegian coast, terminates about 5

miles N of the N extremity of the N island of Kvaloy. 

9.2 To the E, unmarked dangers extend as far as 20 miles N of

Vannoy, Fugloy, and Arnoy.

9.2 Nordvestbanken, the area and position of which can best be

seen on chart, lies about 39 miles NW of the NW side of Ringvassoy. Between the SW side of this bank and Malangsgrunnen (69°58'N., 17°30'E.), the bank E of Ringvassoy, there is a

deep fissure, which has depths of over 183m at a distance of

about 0.5 to 2 miles from the outer dangers W of Ribbenesoy

and Grotoy. This section of the coast, as in the case farther S, is

extremely dangerous to approach in foggy weather, even when

giving careful attention to the soundings.
194 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

9.2 There are numerous navigational aids, both on the islands

and on the coast in this region, to assist the navigator mark his

position. Openings to fjords and channels proves to be a useful

means of identification. However, mariners new to this part of

the Norwegian coast may have difficulty identifying landmarks

and visually locating separations between land masses from

offshore. When seen from a distance, a group of islands may

appear as one continuous land mass that is capped by many

sharp peaks. 

9.3 Ringvassoy (69°55'N., 19°10'E.), the largest of the

islands fronting the mainland, lies with its W end about 25

miles NE of Malangen. To the N of Ringvassoy are the islands

of Ribbenesoy, Grotoy, and Kvaloy. To the E of Kvaloy are

Vannoy, Fugloy, and Arnoy. Southeast of Arnoy is Kvaenangen, which indents the coast to the SE. The large peninsula

on the NE side of Kvaenangen is a mass of mountains, with

Svartfjelljokelen attaining a height of 1,218m. 

9.3 This mountain exposes flat snow-covered surfaces from

which glaciers extend down on almost every side to nearly the

level of the sea. The peninsula itself is indented by fjords on all

sides.

9.3 Sandoya (70°02'N., 18°32'E.) lies about 2 miles W of Ribbenesoy. The N end of the island makes a steep descent toward

the sea. A beacon stands on its summit. 

9.3 Sorfugloya lies about 3 miles NNW of Sandoya and on an E

bearing appears as an almost perfect pyramid.

9.3 Ribbenesoy lies close NW of Ringvassoy and is separated

from it by Skagoys channel. The S part of Ribbenesoy is undulating, and a white sandy beach about 2 miles from the N end

of the island is conspicuous. Mulen, the N extremity of the

island, stands out from the background because of its high,

black, and precipitous sides. 

9.3 Andammen, an island, lies close N of Ribbenesoy. A light is

shown from the NW extremity of Andammen.

9.4 Grotoya (70°10'N., 18°52'E.) lies about 1 mile N of

Andammen. The island has hills almost equal in elevation and

a somewhat precipitous descent on its N side. A light is shown

from its NE extremity. The island of Maasvaer lies 1 mile E of

Grotoy. A light is shown close off the SE coast of Maasvaer.

Kvaloy is about 9 miles in length with a least width of 3 miles,

and lies about 2 miles N of Ringvassoy. 

9.4 A conspicuous mountain stands on the N and S ends of the

islands. Helgoy, a smaller island which has a flat-topped

mountainous ridge, lies about 3 miles SE of Kvaloy. A light is

shown close off the SW coast of Helgoy.

9.4 Vannoy, a large island which is flat-topped and precipitous

towards the sea, lies 3 miles E of Helgoy. Tvinaren, 759m high,

is a conspicuous peak on the N side of the island. The S part of

the island is mountainous, with heights of more than 914m. A

number of islets lie off the E and NE sides of the island.

9.4 A marine farm is located in position 70°14'N, 19°56'E. 

9.4 Torsvag Light (70°15'N., 19°30'E.) is shown from a low

tower attached to a building, 10m in height, standing on Koja

Islet off the NW side of Vannoy. A Decca radio mast, 140m in

height, stands about 201m N of the light.

9.4 Fugloya (70°16'N., 20°15'E.) lies about 4 miles NE of

Vannoy. When Fugloysveet, the channel W of Fugloy, is open,

Fugloya will appear quite detached and is then a very conspicuous landmark, identifiable by its pointed summit which is

precipitous on its S and W sides. Fugloya Kalven, which shows

a light, lies close off the NW extremity of Fugloy.

9.4 Caution.—A firing area is established N of Vannoy in the

seaward approaches to Fugloysveet.

9.4 Arnoy lies with its N end 9 miles E of the summit of Fugloy.

The island is very steep on its N and W sides, and the cliffs of

the N part of its W side are dark red. A large and conspicuous

radio tower is situated on a summit in the SW part of Arnoy.

Navigational aids are shown on all sides of the island and can

best be seen on the chart. Laukoy, an island, lies close off the E

coast of Arnoy. A number of islands and islets lie to the SE and

S of Arnoy. Loppa lies about 15 miles NE of Arnoy and on the

S side of the immediate approach to Soroysund. The island

appears dark and low with a gradual slope on its N side.

9.5 Silda (70°20'N., 21°45'E.) lies 5 miles E of Loppa

and shows a light from its N extremity. A light is also shown

from the S end of Silda. Maroy, an islet, lies close off the S

extremity of Silda.

9.5 Tides—Currents.—From abreast the S end of Ribbenesoy,

the tidal currents set NE and into the various fjords with the

rising tides and SW and out of the fjords with the falling tides.

The NE current may attain a velocity of 4 knots. West of Sor

Fugloya, the SW current is only occasionally discernible. 

9.5 At Kvaloy, the tidal currents set E with the rising tide and W

with the falling tide. The tidal current may attain a velocity of 1

knot E of Kvaloy and about 4 knots at Flatvoer, the group of

low islets extending about 2 miles N of Kvaloy.

9.5 Lopphavet (70°30'N., 21°00'E.), an area N of Fugloya,

Arnoy and W of Soroya. The depths vary between 0 and 400m.

N of Fugloya to about 18 miles offshore; there are three shoal

areas. East and W of the shoals, the depth is more than 300m.

9.5 Northwest and W of Soroya, there is a major shoal area, with

several lesser shoals. The slope outside of these is very steep. 

9.5 The current may be strong at the slopes in the entire area.

9.5 With the waves coming from NE to SW, several refraction

centers occur on the leeward side of the shoal area. Interaction

between waves and current may cause breakers in the area.

9.5 Soroysund is entered between the SW end of Soroya and the

NW end of Stjernoy. The entrance has a width of about 8 miles.

The fairway is deep and free of dangers. Lights are shown on

both sides of Soroysund and can best be seen on the chart. The

narrowest part of Soroysund is marked by an islet which shows

a light and is known as Vatnholmen, and lies close off the SE

coast of Soroya. 

9.5 After passing SE of Vatnholmen, vessels should steer for

Haja, 13 miles NE, giving the NW end of Seiland a fair berth.

After passing between Haja and the N end of Seiland, course

may be steered for Hammerfest harbor. The S extremity of

Hjelmen, bearing about 262° astern, and just open S of Haja, is

an excellent mark for making Hammerfest, which is not very

easily distinguished.
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 195

Pub. 182

Hammerfest

Hammerfest
196 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

9.6 Hammerfest (70°40'N., 23°40'E.) (World Port Index

No. 20920), the world’s N town, is located on the W coast of

the island of Kvaloy. The harbor is situated close NW of the

town.

Depth—Limitations.—This ice-free harbor is about 0.5

mile in extent and is surrounded by mountains except in the

SW to W section. Winds may send heavy sea into this section. 

9.6 Charted depths in the harbor are from 18.3 to 37m a short

distance offshore.

9.6 The deepest berth in the harbor is at Fugleneset outer arm,

which has depths of 11.9 to 14.8m. 

9.6 The main pier facilities are, as follows:

9.6 There are a number of smaller berths in the harbor which are

used mainly by vessels of moderate size. Norske Shell, Esso,

and Mobil operate an oil berth for ships up to 183m in length

and drawing not more than 11m. Vessels may berth at night at

this berth.

9.6 Larger vessels with deeper drafts may enter the harbor and

use the anchorage.

9.6 Aspect—Landmarks.—A light is shown from the head of a

breakwater which extends SE from the end of Fuglenes. A light

is shown on the mole on the SE side of the harbor entrance. 

9.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels.

Pilotage should be ordered using the Safe Sea Net or

alternatively the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center. 

9.6 Vessels should send a request for pilotage to the Lodingen

Pilot Booking Center 24 hours in advance. 

9.6 The pilot boards off Akkarfjordnaeringen in position

70°47.0'N, 23°32.2'E. Due to weather conditions, vessels are

allowed to continue to pick up the pilot in position 70°40.5'N,

23°30.0'E; this is the most-used position. 

9.6 The harbor pilot boards at the harbor entrance. 

9.6 Contact Information.—The Port Authority can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Telephone: 47-78-407400

2. Facsimile: 47-78-407401

Hammerfest

Hammerfest Port Authority Home Page

http://www.hammerfesthavn.no

Quay No. Length Depth

1 138m 7.8-13.0m

2 75m 6.8-13.0m

3 46m 2.6-6.1m

Hammerfest Bay enterance
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 197

Pub. 182

3. E-mail: post@hammerfest.havn.no

9.6 The harbormaster can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 47-78-407402

3. Facsimile: 47-78-407403

4. E-mail: harbour@hammerfest.havn.no

9.6 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.

9.6 Anchorage.—Large vessels may ride securely, in depths of

27.4 to 45.7m, off the SE side of Fuglenes, which is the best

anchorage in the harbor. Five mooring buoys for securing the

stern lines of vessels at anchor, are located in well-sheltered

positions on both sides of the harbor. Anchoring is appointed

by a state pilot or a harbor pilot.

9.6 The smaller inner harbor can accommodate a number of

moderate-sized vessels. Although it is exposed to W winds, the

harbor is secure. Depths of 9.1 to 31m are found in this anchorage. Vessels making a long stay should anchor off the SE side

of Fuglenes where it is more protected and clear of harbor

traffic.

9.7 Melkoya LNG Terminal (70°41'N., 23°35'E.) is located on Melkoya, about 1.75 miles NW of Hammerfest.

Berthing facilities are on the SE side of the island. 

9.7 Depths—Limitations.—Product Jetty is 125m long, with a

least depth alongside of 16.2m. Vessel limitations are, as follows: 

1. LNG vessels—a maximum length of 300m, with a

maximum capacity of 160,000m3.

2. LPG vessels—a maximum length of 300m, with a

maximum capacity of 38,000m3

.

3. Condensate vessels—up to 50,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 180m.

9.7 Construction Jetty, at the S end of the island, is used for the

handling of dry cargo. It has a safe berthing depth of 10m. Vessels over 120m long will not be allowed to remain along-side

the pier while LNG is being loaded at Product Jetty. 

9.7 All vessels are required to have a minimum underkeel clearance of 1.5m. 

9.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be requested 24 hours in advance from the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center and confirmed 2 hours prior to ETA or ETD. Pilots board,

as follows: 

1. Vessels greater than 20,000 gross tons—about 20

miles W of Fruholmen Light in position 71°05.0'N,

23°27.0'E. (by helicopter) or in position 70°38.0'N,

21°13.3'E (Lopphavet, by helicopter). 

2. Other vessels—about 1.5 miles NE of the entrance to

Akkarfjorden in position 70°47.0'N, 23°32.0'E. (by pilot vessel). 

9.7 Regulations.—Vessels are required to notify the terminal of

their ETA, via their agent, as listed in the table titled Melkoya—ETA Reporting Requirements. 

9.7 The ETA messages should contain the following information: 

1. Vessel name.

2. Call sign.

3. Nationality.

4. Beam, gross tonnage, and loa.

5. Draft.

6. Type of cargo.

7. Destination.

8. Purpose of call.

9. ETA at pilot boarding position or ETD from harbor.

10. Whether one or two pilots required.

11. IMO numer (if any).

12. Crew and passengers (including master’s name and

nationality, crew size, etc.).

13. Cargo and bunker fuel (UN number, quality of hazardous and polluting cargo, type, quantity of bunker fuel,

etc.).

14. Details of passage (last port-of-call, next port-of-call,

etc.).

15. Details related to pilotage requests and Pilotage Exemption Certificate.

16. Agent or operator (Norwegian contact).

17. Shipping company (name and address).

9.7 All vessels shall request clearance from the terminal upon

arrival on VHF channel 11, via the Port Operator Duty Telephone (47-47-659957) or via the agent. 

Melkoya Terminal Home Page

http://www.statoil.com

Melkoya—ETA Reporting Requirements

LNG Vessels Condensate Vessels (oil 

tankers) LPG Vessels

1. Not less than 8 days in advance or upon departure from the

last discharge port if less than 8

days distant.

— —

2. Ninety-six (96) hours prior

to arrival. If the ETA changes by

more than 9 hours, the terminal

must be advised immediately.

1. Not less than 96 hours prior

to arrival.

1. Not less than 96 hours prior

to arrival.

3. Forty-eight (48) hours prior

to arrival. If the ETA changes by

more than 6 hours, the terminal

must be advised immediately.

2. Forty-eight (48) hours prior

to arrival. If the ETA changes by

more than 6 hours, the terminal

must be advised immediately.

2. Forty-eight (48) hours prior

to arrival. If the ETA changes by

more than 6 hours, the terminal

must be advised immediately.
198 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

9.7 A safety zone, into which only authorized vessels may enter,

surrounds the terminal and is bounded by lines joining the

following positions: 

a. 70°41'55.8''N, 23°37'22.8''E. (shore)

b. 70°41'52.2''N, 23°35'49.8''E.

c. 70°40'53.4''N, 23°34'21.0''E.

d. 70°40'37.2''N, 23°35'23.4''E.

e. 70°40'51.0''N, 23°38'11.4''E. (shore)

9.7 Only two large LNG/Condensate vessels can anchor simultaneouly in the anchorage area. If there is a vessel already at

the terminal, only one vessel is permitted in the anchorage

area. All vessels en route to the terminal in excess of these vessels are required to remain at least 12 miles from the terminal. 

9.7 Vessels are not allowed to approach the terminal if the

visibility is less than 1 mile. 

9.7 Vessels will not be permited to sail if the winds speeds are in

excess of 29 knots. 

9.7 Contact Information.—The terminal can be contacted, as

follows: 

1. Call sign: Hammerfest LNG

2. VHF: VHF channel 11

3. Telephone: 47-78-404209

47-78-404100 (switchboard)

4. E-mail: lngship@statoilhydro.com

9.7 Directions.—From a position about 1.25 miles NE of Haja

Light (70°39.3'N., 23°27.8”E.), the track leads 2 miles ENE to

the vicinity of the berths. 

Indreleia—Tromso to Hammerfest

9.8 From Tromso, the fairway of Indreleia continues NE

to the W approach to Soroysund, and then leads E and NE

through Soroysund to Hammerfest. Immediately N of Tromso,

the channel is sheltered by the large islands of Kvaloy and

Ringvassoy. Tromsoysund, between the island of Tromsoy and

the mainland, is shoal on both sides of the channel. However,

the fairway is free of dangers, and can be navigated by large

vessels at HW. Indreleia leads E from Tromsoysund through

Grotsund to Ullsfjorden. Grotsund is also free of dangers in

mid-channel. 

9.8 This route is well-covered by navigational aids, which can be

best seen on the chart. Tidal currents are weak in Grotsund,

although during bad weather a considerable sea may be raised.

9.8 From the E end of Grotsund, the track of Indreleia leads

through the N part of Ullsfjorden. The channel is broad and

deep and extends in a general SSW direction from abreast the

SE end of Karlsoy. After rounding Lyngstuva, the N extremity

of the rugged promontory separating Ullsfjorden from Lyngsfjorden to the E, Indreleia passes through Kagsund, between

the SE end of Arnoy and the N end of Kagen, where smooth

water will be experienced.

9.8 The main track of Indreleia leads from Kagsund NNE across

Kvaenangenfjorden and then rounds Brynilen, an islet close to

the coast, about 14 miles NE of the N extremity of Kagen

island. From Brynilen, the track passes SE of Loppakalven, the

small island close SW of the S end of Loppa Island, then leads

SE of Loppa into the W approach to Soroysund.

Indreleia—Stiernsund to Hammerfest

9.9 An inner channel leads from the SW end of Soroysund through Stjernsund, Vargsund, Kvalsund, and Sammelsund, uniting with the main track of Indreleia N of Kvaloy.

This channel is smoother, though longer than the main channel

in Soroysund, and is often used in bad weather. 

9.9 Vessels bound for Hammerfest can pass W of Kvaloy

through Straumen, the narrows between Kvaloy and the NE

end of Seiland.

9.9 Stjernsund (70°14'N., 22°44'E.) is very deep and there are

no known dangers more than 0.2 mile offshore on both sides.

The wind in Stjernsund is very unpredictable. Usually it blows

either in or out of the sound. At times, violent gale winds blow

through Stjernsund. Vessels proceeding through the sound may

expect a deflection of the magnetic compass.

9.9 Kvalsund (70°30'N., 23°59'E.) and Sammelsund are deep

and free of dangers. Kvalsund is narrow but it may be used by

large vessels. Several submarine cables are laid across both

sounds.

9.9 Ytre Simavik and Indre Simavik lie in the central part of

Stjernsund and on its N shore. Vessels can anchor in both

4. Twenty-four (24) hours prior to arrival. If the ETA changes

by more than 3 hours, the terminal must be advised immediately.

3. Twenty-four (24) hours prior to arrival. If the ETA changes

by more than 3 hours, the terminal must be advised immediately.

3. Twenty-four (24) hours prior to arrival. If the ETA changes

by more than 3 hours, the terminal must be advised immediately.

5. Five (5) hours prior to arrival.4. Five (5) hours prior to arrival.4. Five (5) hours prior to arrival.

Melkoya—ETA Reporting Requirements

LNG Vessels Condensate Vessels (oil 

tankers) LPG Vessels

Berthing Restrictions and Tug Requirements

Vessel size 

(up to)

Maximum 

wind speed

Maximum 

wave height

Number of 

tugs

15,000m3 35 knots 1.0m 1

30,000m3 31 knots 1.0m 2

60,000m3 29 knots 1.5n 3

160,000m3 24 knots No 

restrictions 3
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 199

Pub. 182

places, in about 25m, clay bottom.

9.9 Oksfjorden (70°12'N., 22°18'E.) lies on the S side of the W

end of Stjernsund. It trends S for about 8 miles, then ESE for 5

miles. The fjord is deep and free of dangers in the fairway. 

9.9 The shores are sparsely populated, except for the port of

Oksfjorden on its NE shore. The fjord is a place of refuge to

vessels during bad weather, as the fjord can be calm when a

gale wind is blowing outside. 

9.9 Anchorage is afforded near the village of Vassdalsbotn,

about 0.3 mile S of the port of Oksfjorden. The anchorage has a

depth of about 20m, good holding ground.

9.9 Oksfjord (70°14'N., 22°21'E.) (World Port Index No.

21120) lies 1 mile S of the E entrance point to the fjord. There

are several quays in the port, with depths of up to 9.8m

alongside. There is also a boat harbor in the port. Coastal

vessels call here regularly. 

9.9 A light is shown from a breakwater at the harbor entrance.

There are a number of anchorages S of the port.

9.10 Ullsfjorden (69°50'N., 19°52'E.) is a deep fjord; with

its continuation, Sorfjorden, it extends for a distance of about

40 miles in a SSW direction from abeam the S end of Karlsoy.

The fjord is open to the sea, and N and NW winds send in a

very heavy sea during autumn and winter. The inner part of

Sorfjorden, for a distance of about 6 miles from its head, is

frequently ice-bound during the winter months. 

9.10 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25m, crosses

the entrance to Sorfjorden. The only shoal in the fairway of

Ullsfjorden is Nisegrunn, which lies 9.25 miles S of Grotsund

Light. Several dangers encumber Sorfjorden and can best be

seen on chart.

9.10 Lyngsfjorden (69°40'N., 20°25'E.) lies E of Ullsfjorden, the

two being separated by a high and rugged promontory. 

9.10 Lyngsfjorden is steep on both sides and is very deep. The

fjord extends about 50 miles in a SW direction; its end is

known as Storfjorden. There are two anchorages on the W side

of Storfjorden near its end. The fjord is well marked by navigational aids on both sides. The island of Uloy lies on the E

side of the fjord near its entrance. Kafjorden is located on the E

side of the fjord and extends 10 miles in a SE direction. Anchorage can be taken on the S side of Kafjorden, 3.5 miles

within the entrance.

9.11 Altafjorden (70°05'N., 23°06'E.), is a large deep

fjord which indents the mainland for about 20 miles and lies S

of the islands of Stjernoy and Seiland. The shores of the fjord

are irregular. There are several large bays and small inlets.

Langfjorden, on the W side of the fjord, is the only branch of

any extent. Altafjorden is accessible to large vessels. 

9.11 The weather in the fjord is usually calm. Kafjorden and

Rafsbotn lie at the head of the fjord. Aroy, a rocky island, lies

on the E side of Altafjorden.

9.11 Alta (69°58'N., 23°15'E.) (World Port Index No. 21130) is a

district, which consists of three close settlements of Bossekop,

Bukta, and Elvebakken. At Bossekop, vessels can anchor in the

bay S of the cape, in 20 to 30m, sand and clay bottom. The

harbor is sheltered against N and E winds. Strong W and SW

winds make it unsafe. 

Altafjorden

Alta Port Authority Home Page

http://www.altahavn.no
200 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

9.11 The harbor consists of two wharves. One is 51m in length,

with a depth of 10 to 11m alongside; the other is 36m in length,

with a depth of 5.9 to 6.4m alongside.

9.11 Bukta is the best anchorage in Alta. Vessels lie at anchor in

all weather, good holding ground. The port consists of five

wharves. Berthing information is given in the accompanying

table.

9.11 An overhead cable, with a clearance of 7m, crosses the entrance to Elvebakken.

9.11 Pilots are ordered through the Safe Sea Net or alternatively,

through the Lodingen Pilot Booking center. For further

information, see paragraph 9.1. 

9.11 The pilot boards in position 70°06.0'N., 20°12.9'E (2 miles E

of Fakkekjeila Light). 

9.11 The Port Authority can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 47-78-446910 (0800-1530 LT)

3. Facsimile: 47-78-446911

4. E-mail: post@altahavn.no

9.11 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.. 

9.11 Elvebakken affords anchorage for smaller vessels. These are

only fair anchorages and they are not recommended.

9.12 Talvik (70°03'N., 22°58'E.) lies on the W side of

Altafjorden, in a sheltered bay. It affords anchorage to small

vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 18m, about

0.2 mile W of the N entrance point of the bay. Mooring rings

are available, and vessels can secure to dolphins on the N side

of the cove. 

9.12 There are two quays, with depths of 4.9 to 5.8m alongside.

Coastal vessels mainly call at the port.

9.12 Rafsbotn lies on the E side of Altafjorden, near its head.

From its head for a distance of about 2 miles W, the bay is

frequently ice-bound during the winter months. This large bay

affords anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge, off

the NW side of Rafsholmen, in depths of 18.3 to 42m. Coastal

vessels call here regularly.

9.12 Langfjorden is situated on the NW coast of Altafjorden, near

the W entrance point. The fjord extends about 16 miles in a

WSW direction and is free of dangers in the fairway. Ytre

Koven, an inlet on the NW side of the fjord, affords anchorage

to small vessels with local knowledge. 

9.12 Storsandnes, a village on the E side of the fjord, has a quay,

with a depth of 7.3m alongside. There is anchorage close N of

the quay; mooring rings are available. 

9.12 Coastal vessels call here. Vessels with local knowledge may

anchor in Langfjordbotn, the head of Langfjorden, in depths of

12.8 to 20.1m. Langfjorden is well marked by navigational aids

on both its shores.

9.12 Vargsund (70°22'N., 23°30'E.) lies NE of the E entrance

point to Altafjorden. The sound is deep in the fairway and free

of dangers. From its entrance the sound runs NE for about 14

miles and then turns N for 9 miles where the sound narrows to

about 0.5 mile at its N entrance, 4 miles SSW of Hammerfest. 

9.12 The sound affords anchorage on both sides to vessels with

local knowledge. The sound is well marked by navigational

aids.

Outer Route—Soroya to Nordkapp

9.13 From the conspicuous headland surmounted by

Fuglen at the NW end of Soroya, the coast of this island trends

in an ENE direction and is not clearly distinguishable until a

vessel is N of the island. The N coast of Soroya is high and

presents a broken appearance of bold and steep headlands

separated by inlets which deeply indent the coast. Close off the

NW extremity of the island, the coast is indented by

Breivikfjorden and Markjeila, a smaller inlet.

Breivik (70°35'N., 22°08'E.) (World Port Index No. 20940)

lies on the NW side of Breivikfjorden, on the NW coast of the

island of Soroya. Vessels of moderate size can anchor off the

port NW of Breivik Light, in depths of 7 to 12m, loose sand.

Vessels may obtain fairly good anchorage off the N shore of

the fjord, about 3 miles E of Breivik Light, in depths of 27.4 to

31m, sand. The port has a quay on the N side of a mole, with a

depth of 2.4m alongside.

9.13 Sorvaer (70°38'N., 21°59'E.) (World Port Index No. 20930)

is a large fishing port on the N side of the entrance to

Markjeila. The approach from the SSW on the range lights to

Sorvear is encumbered with islets and shoals, some of which

are marked, and the position of which can best be seen on the

chart. Breakwaters built between islets extend SW, where a

light stands on the W breakwater head. 

9.13 The port has a number of quays with depths of up to 4m. The

port is used mainly by coastal vessels. Small vessels may

anchor off the port, in depths of 6 to 20m.

9.13 Rolvsoya (70°58'N., 24°00'E.) lies about 14 miles NE of

Soroya. The island is indented on all sides. Kallneringen, at the

NW end of the island, attains a height of 334m. Revsholmen and

Skipsholmen, two islets, lie near the middle of the broad channel

between Soroya and Rolvsoya. The islets are very prominent.

9.13 Ingoya (71°04'N., 24°04'E.) lies N of Rolvsoya. It is indented on all sides and quite mountainous. The harbor is

reached by passing between Avloysninga and a rock, awash,

about 0.1 mile N and marked by an iron perch, off the W end of

Langholmen.

9.13 Fruholmen Light (71°06'N., 24°00'E.) is shown from a

tower, 18m in height, standing off the NW coast of the island.

A racon is located at the light tower. There is an anchorage for

small vessels with local knowledge off the N side of Ingoya.

9.14 Hjelmsoya (71°04'N., 24°43'E.) is located about 9

miles E of Ingoya. The island is mountainous and conspicuous

from a considerable distance. The N coast of Hjelmsoya is very

steep. About 3 miles NE of the summit is a rocky pinnacle

Berth Length Depth

Frionor Wharf 61m 7.0 to 8.5m

Norol Bunkering Wharf 14m 4.5m

Shell Bunkering Wharf 12m 6.0m

Esso Wharf 10m 5.5m

Marine Wharf

East Berth 62m 11.2 to 13.0m

Inside Berth 49m 7.7m
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 201

Pub. 182

which rises perpendicularly from the sea and is easily identified from the NE. Akkarfjorden lies on the NW side of the

island and extends about 2 miles SE. A reef extends up to

183m from the shore of this fjord. A light is shown on the NE

side of the fjord. 

9.14 Good anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 10.1m, off

Sandvik, a village on the W side of the fjord, about 1 mile

SSW of the light.

9.14 Masoya (71°01'N., 25°00'E.) is located about 4 miles SE of

Hjelmsoya. The island is indented on all sides. Kalven, an islet

which shows a light, lies about 0.5 mile NNW of the NW

extremity of Masoya. Ostervag, on the SE side of the island,

affords anchorage to small vessels near its head, in a depth of

3.7m, good holding ground. Coastal vessels call here.

9.14 Mageroya (71°03'N., 25°40'E.) is located about 4 miles E of

the NE extremity of Masoya. The island is large and indented

on all sides. The coastline is fringed by a reef close offshore.

The NW coast of the island is penetrated for about 6 miles by

Tufjorden, which is desolate and affords no anchorage. Nordkapp is the highest and most prominent headland on the N

coast of Mageroya. 

9.14 The cape is a bold headland which rises in sheer walls of

dark rock to a flat barren plateau. Knivskjerodden, which

shows a light, lies 2.25 miles NNW of Nordkapp and forms the

N extremity of Mageroya. The point is low and much less

conspicuous then Nordkapp.

9.14 Kamoyfjorden (71°04'N., 26°04'E.) lies on the NE side of

Mageroy. The fjord is indented near its head by three small

fjords. Vessels of moderate size can anchor in sand, with

mooring rings available, between Kamoyvaer and the SW side

of Store Kamoy, in depths of 9.0 to 23.8m, about 0.2 mile ESE

of Kamoyfjorden Light. A power cable lying about 0.1 mile

offshore parallels the coast in the vicinity of the anchorage. 

9.15 Honningsvag (70°59'N., 26°00'E.) (World Port Index

No. 20800) is a large fishing station located on the SE side of

Mageroya.

9.15 Depths—Limitations.—The largest quay, on the N side of

the entrance, has three berthing side,s with depths of up to

10.1m alongside. There are also a number of smaller quays,

with depths of up to 7m alongside. The bunkering wharf is 63m

long and has a depth of 13m alongside.

Aspect.—A gray church and a large building close by the

church are very prominent landmarks from seaward. 

9.15 The approach and entrance to the harbor are well-marked by

navigational aids. A number of rocks and foul ground are

marked by iron perches and spar buoys. The harbor is excellent, though small.

9.15 Pilotage.—Vessels over 200 grt must use a harbor pilot,

which can be ordered from the harbor office. Vessels should

request a pilot 24 hours in advance. Generally two pilots board

vessels about 1 mile S of Honningsvag Light.

9.15 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.. 

Courtesy of Bill Fry

Nordkapp (on Mageroya)
202 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

9.15 Anchorage.—Vessels should anchor W of a straight line

between Klubskjeret Light and the spar buoy on Holmegrunnen, and N of a straight line extending E from Rosmaalneset, a

point about 0.5 mile NW of Klubskjeret Light, in depths of

29.3 to 49.4m.

9.16 Sarnesfjorden (70°58'N., 25°45'E.) lies on the S side

of Mageroya, about 4 miles W of Honningsvag. Altesula, an

island, lies in the entrance to the fjord. The island is fringed by

a reef, which extends about 183m N from its NW end. 

9.16 A light is shown from the SE extremity of Altesula. Litle

Altesula, an islet, lies about 0.5 mile N from the N extremity of

Altesula. Kobbholet, an inlet on the W side of Sarnesfjorden, is

well sheltered and affords anchorage to vessels with local

knowledge, in depths of 25.6 to 42.1m, good holding ground,

about 0.2 mile W of the S entrance point of the inlet. A bridge,

with a vertical clearance of 10m, crosses the entrance of the

inlet. 

9.16 There is also anchorage between Altesula and Litle Altesula,

in depths of 12.8 to 29.3m.

9.16 Helnes Light (71°04'N., 26°14'E.) is shown from a low

tower at the E end of Mageroy. A racon and a radiobeacon are

located at the light tower.

9.16 Caution.—The inshore TSS off Nordkapp is not IMO approved. 

Indreleia—Hammerfest to Varangerfjorden

9.17 From the NE end of Soroysund to Mageroya, about 36

miles ENE, Indreleia is mostly unsheltered. The route is

exposed off the N ends of Kvaloy and Havoy, which lies about

22 miles NE of the N end of Kvaloy; the currents and heavy sea

may render it difficult for small vessels to weather these conditions. Indreleia terminates at the N end of Porsangerfjorden,

where vessels can proceed to the open sea or Honningsvag.

9.17 From Hammerfest, a northbound vessel in Indreleia should

shape course to pass about 0.5 mile S and W of the small island

of Melkoya, on which a light is shown, and then proceed N in

mid-channel through Soroysund, which is free of dangers in

the fairway.

9.17 From the NE end of Soroysund, Indreleia passes across an

open arm of the sea for about 12 miles and then continues NE

through the exposed Rolvsoysund, between the SE side of

Rolvsoya and the small islands off the mainland. A light is

shown from the SE side of Rolvsoya.

9.17 From abeam of Havoygavlen Light, located on the NW

extremity of Havoy, Indreleia leads SE through Breisund. The

sound is about 2 miles wide. The depth in the channel is between 30 and 150m. There are several shoals in the area with

depths from 30 to 70m.

9.17 In Breidsund, there are special wave directions from N to

NW which create rough sea; with W currents broken surf has

been observed in the channel. The current is due primarily to

the tidal current and is estimated to reach between 1 and 2

knots. By Rolvsoyh, the sea becomes especially rough when

the wind blows from the N to NE. In both cases the wind and

the waves drive straight in from the open sea.

9.17 Northwest of Halvoygavlen there are three shoals with

depths between about 30 and 50m. It is noted that from there

and in toward Gavlodden, the sea is particularly rough, which

appears to be associated with the shoals and the “corner effect”

of the headland.

9.17 There is a big difference between the flood and the ebb in the

area and it is noticed that the sea is roughest on the ebb. 

9.17 After passing through Breisund, Indreleia leads into Masoysund. Submarine cables are laid across Rolvsoysund, Breisund,

and Masoysund.

9.18 Masoysund (70°59'N., 25°01'E.) lies between the

mainland and the S side of Masoya. The sound is about 1 mile

wide and is free from dangers in the fairway. 

9.18 The tidal currents in mid-channel set E from half rising tide

to half falling tide, the turn of the current usually occurs at the

times of HW and LW, setting E with the rising tide and W with

the falling tide. The currents may attain a velocity of from 3 to

4 knots. A light is shown on the S extremity of Masoya.

Honningsvag Bay

Courtesy of Paul Kerrien

Approach to Honningsvag

Courtesy of Paul Kerrien

Approach to Honningsvag
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 203

Pub. 182

9.18 Mageroysund, the continuation of Indreleia from Masoysund, leads SE and then E. The channel, though narrow, is free

from dangers, and it can be navigated by larger vessels. 

9.18 A submarine cable crosses the sound about 2 miles from the

entrance. The tidal currents set with strength through Mageroysund; at HW they may attain a velocity of 5 to 6 knots. A light

is shown on the S side of the NW entrance to Mageroysund. A

light is also shown on the E entrance point of the sound.

9.19 Porsangen (70°30'N., 25°30'E.), a long fjord, is entered between Helnes Light and Svaerholtklubben, about 10

miles ESE, and extends about 65 miles in a SSW direction. The

outer part of the fjord is fringed with precipitous and barren

tableland but toward the inner end the heights are more

irregular, with some trees and pasture land. 

9.19 Though not as deep as many fjords, it is fairly clear of

dangers except near its head, where there are scattered shoals

and numerous islands. The fjord is usually frozen over in

winter as far N as Borselvenes, a point about 16 miles from its

head. Porsangen is well-marked by navigational aids, which

can best be seen on the chart.

9.19 Store Tamsoy, an island, is located about 25 miles from the

entrance of the fjord, and is encumbered by a rocky shoal

which extends up to 1.5 miles S of the island. Two spar buoys

mark the shoal on the E. A beacon is shown on the SE side of

the island.

9.19 Strandbukt, a bay, lies on the W side of the outer part of

Porsangen and is entered between Homnneset (70°45'N.,

25°42'E.) and Nakken. The bay affords good anchorage to vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 23m, good holding ground, about 2 miles WSW of Repvag Light. 

9.19 Vessels with local knowledge may obtain anchorage off the

SW side of Litle Tamsoy, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, about 3

miles E of Repvag Light.

9.19 There are a number of anchorages on both sides of Porsangen and also at the head of this fjord. All of these anchorages require local knowledge and are best seen on the

chart. The anchorages are used mainly by coastal vessels.

9.19 Laksefjorden lies E of Porsangen and is entered between

Svaerholtklubben and Finnkjerka, 8.5 miles to the E. The fjord

indents the coast for about 40 miles and for the most part is

from 7 to 12 miles wide. The shores of the fjord are indented

by a succession of small bays and inlets. 

9.19 In Laksefjorden, the tidal current sets N with the falling tide

and S with the rising tide. The maximum velocity is attained at

the entrance to the fjord.

9.20 Kjollefjorden (70°57'N., 27°20'E.) (World Port Index

No. 20740), on the E side of the entrance to Laksefjorden, is

entered through a width of about 3 miles and extends about 4

miles SE. The head of the fjord forms a sheltered bay, where

there is a settlement. Coastal vessels call here regularly. 

9.20 The port has a number of quays, with depths of up to 4.9m

alongside. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage,

in depths of 20 to 23.8m, in the middle of the harbor, about 0.2

mile E of Kjollefjorden Light. The anchorage is not safe during

strong E winds, when violent squalls occur.

9.20 Oksefjorden is entered N of Kjollefjorden and indents the

coast for a distance of about 7 miles. The fjord is deep and

clear of dangers, except for scattered shoals, which are best

seen on the chart.

9.20 Small vessels can find good anchorage, in 7.3 to 14.6m, off

the village of Oksevag at the head of the fjord. The fjord is well

marked by navigational aids. Coastal vessels call here regularly.

9.20 Friarfjorden (70°28'N., 26°57'E.), located at the SE end of

Laksefjorden, affords good anchorage for vessels with local

knowledge, in depths of 22 to 33m, good holding ground, on

the W side of the fjord.

9.20 A number of anchorages are located on both sides of Laksefjorden, most of which require local knowledge, and can best

be seen on the chart. The anchorages are used regularly by

coastal vessels.

9.21 Mehamnfjorden (71°04'N., 27°52'E.) is located on

the mainland and lies between Laksefjorden and Tanafjorden.

Mehamn, on the E side of the head of Mehamnfjorden, is one

of the best harbors in this area, and is accessible in almost all

conditions. Vessels can anchor, in depths up to 13.7m, loose

clay, about 0.4 mile SSE of Mehamn Light. There are mooring

rings around the harbor. The E shore of Mehamn is lined with

quays, of which the three N quays have depths of 5.5 to 7.9m

alongside.

9.21 Slettnes Light (71°05'N., 28°14'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 39m in height, standing on a headland about 8

miles NE of Mehamn. A racon is located at the light.

9.21 A shoal bank extends seaward up to about 2 miles from the

light and breaks in places during heavy weather. Gamvik, a

fishing harbor suitable only for small vessels, lies close SE of

the light tower.

9.21 Regulations.—Gamvic Harbor District enforces a maximum speed limit of 5 knots for all vessels. This speed limit applies to all vessels except those engaged in operations for the

Norwegian armed forces or craft engaged in emergency police,

custom, fire fighting, ambulance, or search and rescue missions

along the coast of Nordkynhalvoya. 

9.21 Harbor limits are positioned from close N at Nordkyn, then

ESE to close N of Slettnes, then SE past Omgang to the middle

of Tanafjordon, and continue SW to close N at Digermulen.

9.22 Tanafjorden (70°45'N., 28°25'E.), which is entered

between Omgang and Tanahorn, about 9 miles SE, extends

SSW for about 34 miles on the W side of Varangerhalvoya.

The shores of this fjord are mountainous declivities, indented,

and made up of small inlets, especially on the W side. 

9.22 The principal branches of Tanafjorden are Hopsfjorden,

Langfjorden, and Vestertana, which extend in a W and S direction from the main fjord.

9.22 In the area outside the entrance to Tanafjorden, the depths

decrease sharply on both sides of a deep channel, which is an

extension of the fjord. During fair weather conditions, the current goes inward with the flood tide and out along the E side of

the fjord with the ebb. Wind and the outflow of water from

Tanaelven (Tana River) can also have a big influence on

current conditions.

9.22 Due to the situation mentioned above, it is difficult to predict

wave conditions. However, with waves from the NW and an

ebb current along the E side of the fjord, there is a possibility

of breaking waves. These are seen as areas of broken surf and it
204 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

is estimated that vessels must be 6 to 10 miles outside the fjord

mouth to avoid them.

9.22 Hopsfjorden lies on the W side of Tanafjorden. The fjord is

deep and free of dangers in the fairway. Large vessels can

anchor near the head of the fjord. Langfjorden lies S of Hopsfjorden and also affords anchorage for large vessels near its

head. Small vessels lie best in the bay at Boksjok, where there

is good holding ground, in a depth of about 20m.

9.22 A submarine cable crosses the fjord about 2 miles from the

entrance.

9.22 Gulgofjorden (70°41'N., 28°36'E.) lies on the E side of Tanafjorden, about 5 miles ESE of the E entrance point of

Langfjorden. This small fjord indents the coast for a distance

of about 2 miles. Anchorage can be taken off the N shore of the

fjord, in depths of 10 to 18.3m, sand and mud.

9.22 The head of Tanafjorden consist of a number of small fjords

and inlets, which are marked by lights. There is anchorage in

these fjords, which can best be seen on the chart.

9.22 Between Tanahorn and Vardo, about 53 miles SE, the coast

presents the appearance of a nearly horizontal ridge about 122

to 152m high. Between these two points there are no landmarks; neither does the aspect of any particular tract serve as a

guide. The general appearance of the countryside is barren;

hardly a trace of soil or vegetation is visible on the tablelands,

and fresh green grass is only found in the clefts of the hills

facing the sea. In summer, patches of snow may often be seen

on the hills. Vessels are advised to give this part of the coast a

wide berth in bad weather.

9.23 Berlevag (70°52'N., 29°06'E.) (World Port Index No.

20710) lies about 6 miles E of Tanahorn and is one of the

largest fishing stations on this part of the coast. The entrance to

the harbor is protected by a mole. The port consists of an outer

harbor and an inner harbor. 

9.23 There is anchorage in the outer harbor, in depths of 9.1 to

12.2m; the inner harbor anchorage has depths up to 4.6m. A

number of quays in the harbor have depths up to 4.9m alongside.

9.23 Kjolnes Light (70°51'N., 29°14'E.) is shown from a tower,

22m in height, standing 2.5 miles E of Berlevag. A racon is

located at the light tower.

Berlevag anchorage 

Kjolnes Light
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 205

Pub. 182

9.23 Kongsfjorden (70°45'N., 29°24'E.) is situated about 9 miles

SE of Berlevag. The fjord is divided into two arms by a

peninsula. The fjord affords anchorage for small vessels, in

depths of 12 to 16.5m, good holding ground. 

9.23 A number of dangers lie in the fjord and can best be seen on

the chart. The harbor is protected by a mole; however, swells

comes in during NE winds. Vessels are cautioned to be well

secured.

9.24 Batsfjorden (70°41'N., 29°51'E.) (World Port Index

No. 20695) lies about 7 miles E of Kongsfjorden. The fjord

extends about 7 miles SW and is deep and free from dangers. A

cove at the head of the fjord affords anchorage to small vessels

with local knowledge, in depths of 18.3 to 23.8m, good holding

ground, about 183m W of the N entrance point of the cove. 

9.24 The harbor in the cove has been dredged to a depth of 4.9m;

the quays in the harbor have depths of 4.9 to 7.3m alongside.

Maritbukt, the head of Batsfjorden, is the most spacious anchorage, with depths of 11.9 to 14.0m, good holding ground,

about 1 mile SW of Batsfjorden Light. 

9.24 There are 13 berths at Maritbukt, with lengths of 32 to 273m

and depths of 3 to 10m alongside. Two new berths are under

construction. A number of lights, which are best seen on the

chart, are located in the fjord.

9.24 Pilotage is optional but can be requested from Lodingen

Pilot Booking Center 24 hours in advance. The pilot boards

about 2 miles within the harbor entrance in position 70°38.5'N,

29°47'E. The pilot vessel can be contacted on VHF channels 12

and 16. For further information, see paragraph 9.1. 

9.24 Vessels should send their ETA, along with their pilot request,

24 hours in advance, and confirmed 3 hours in advance, along

with the following information: 

1. Vessel name.

2. Call sign.

3. Nationality.

4. Length.

5. Draft.

6. Gross tonnage.

9.24 The port office can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Telephone: 47-78-985510

2. Facsimile: 47-78-985511

3. E-mail: firmapost@batsfjord.havn.no

9.24 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.

9.25 Makkaur Light (70°42'N., 30°05'E.) is shown from a

low tower on a building standing about 4 miles E of the

entrance to Batsfjorden. A racon is located at the light tower.

9.25 Syltefjorden lies 12 miles SE of Batsfjorden. It extends

about 8 miles SW and is free from dangers in the fairway. The

head of the fjord is frozen over in winter. Syltefjordvaer, on the

NW side of the fjord, affords anchorage close inshore to small

vessels, in depths of from 4.6 to 6.1m, about 3 miles NE of

Sylefjorden Light. 

9.25 Small vessels can also anchor near the head of Syltefjorden,

in depths of 14.6 to 20m. Nordfjorden, lies 3 miles SW of

Syltefjordvaer, on the W side of the fjord and is protected by

two moles. A light stands on the W mole head. Small vessels

can anchor W of a spar buoy, located at the head of Nordfjorden, in 19m.

9.25 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks, best seen on the chart, lie up

to 9 miles NE of Syltefjordklubben, the NW entrance point of

Syltefjord. Another dangerous wreck lies about 6.5 miles ESE

of Hardbaken, the SE entrance point of Syltefjord. 

9.25 Persfjorden (70°26'N., 30°48'E.) is located about 10 miles

SE of Syltefjorden. The fjord is free from dangers in the fairway, and depths decrease gradually toward its head. Anchorage

can be obtained in the fjord in fine weather, but vessels cannot

remain there during winds from NW, through N, to E.

9.25 Caution.—In the stretch between Batsfjorden, from Makkaur Light to Vardo and Varangerfjorden, lies an area very exposed to bad weather. With the wind mainly from the N, waves

drive in from seaward. In Varangerfjorden, the currents are erratic and with the “corner effect” at Vardo, the sea becomes

more chaotic.

Vardo

9.26 Vardo (70°22'N., 31°07'E.) (World Port Index No.

20700) is composed of a group of islands lying close off the E

extremity of Varangerhalvoy, about 7 miles SE of Persfjorden.

Vardoya, the W and largest island, consists of two parts joined

by a narrow isthmus. 

9.26 Reinoya and Horwoya lie close to the E of Vardoya. Bussesundet, to the W of the islands, separates them from the mainland and can be navigated by large vessels.

Kjolnes Light

Vardo Home Page

http://www.vardoport.no
206 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

9.26 Depths—Limitations.—Steamship Quay, the main berth

lies on the W side of the harbor and is 158m in length, with

depths varying from 6.4m at the mouth end to 6.1m at the S

end at LW. The quays on the E side of the harbor have depths

of up to 4.5m alongside.

9.26 Aspect.—Vardo church, conspicuous from the N, is white

with a gray roof and white spire. A radar dome stands about

183m E of the church. Two radio masts stand on the island of

Vardoya, about 0.25 mile W of the church.

9.26 Protection is afforded to the harbor by a breakwater on each

side of the entrance. A light is shown from the seaward end of

each breakwater.

9.26 Vardo Light is shown from a tower, 20m in height, standing

on Hornoya.

9.26 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 100 tons

and more. Pilots should be ordered via the Safe Sea Net or

alternatively, the Lodingen Booking Center can be used. The

pilot boards by arrangement. Vessels at sea requiring a pilot

Vardo 

Vardo 
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 207

Pub. 182

should give at least 24 hours notice, notifying confirmation or

alteration at least 2 hours before the original time stipulated.

9.26 Vessel Traffic Service.—Vardo Vessel Traffic Service (Vardo VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the coast of

Northern Norway. Vardo VTS co-operates in close

coordination with the Norwegian Coastal Administration’s

Department for Emergency Response, the Norwegian Armed

Forces, and the Joint Rescue Coordination Center, Northern

Norway and the coastal radio. The area of operation of Vardo

VTS Center encompasses the Norwegian Economic Zone

(NEZ) from Rorvik (65°00'N.) to the border of the Norwegian

and Russian Economic Zones, and includes an IMO-approved

Traffic Separation Scheme. 

9.26 Vardo VTS may be contacted as follows:

1. VHF channel 16, or Bodo Radio or Vardo Radio

working channels. The call sign is NOR VTS. 

2. Telephone: 47-789-89-898

3. Facsimile: 47-789-89-899

4. E-mail: vardo.vts@kystverket.no

9.26 All tankers, vessels exceeding 5,000 gt, and sea-going tugs

are requested to report the following information to Vardo VTS

upon entering the Norwegian Economic Zone (NEZ) as outlined above.

1. Vessel name.

2. Call sign.

3. IMO No.

4. Departure port to include name, ETD, HAZMAT on

departure, actual bunkers on board.

5. Arrival port to include name. ETA, and ETD.

6. Additional information to include number of crew,

number of passengers, actual draft, actual height, and the

purpose of the voyage. 

9.26 Anchorage.—Nordvagen, the principal and best harbor at

Vardo, lies on the N side of the town. The anchorage is good

but constricted being available only to small vessels with local

knowledge. During N gales, there is considerable swell in the

bay N of the moles, and entering the harbor may be difficult. 

9.26 Caution.—An Explosives Dumping Area lies close E of the

Vardo Light and may best be seen on the chart.

9.27 Bussesundet (70°22'N., 31°02'E.), somewhat exposed to swell from both N and S, affords good anchorage to

small vessels off the S end of Tjuvholem, in depths of 7 to

10m, about 183m N of a line of buoys marking a pipeline. 

9.27 Two moles form a harbor in the S part of Bussesundet. A

light is shown from the seaward end of each mole. The entrance to the harbor has a least depth of 6.7m, decreasing

shoreward into drying flats. Several piers are situated in the S

part of the harbor.

9.27 There is a prohibited anchorage in the S part of Bussesundet,

best seen on the chart. Vessels arriving at the harbors without

an anchoring or mooring berth allocated must anchor well out

of the way until a berth is assign by the harbor authority. Under

no circumstances may vessels anchor in the channels or near

the piers, so as to impede traffic.

9.27 Vessels arriving at the harbors under quarantine flag, or

which are ordered to lay in quarantine, must anchor in Bassesundet, where they must remain until the health authority gives

them orders to go to another anchorage or mooring berth in or

outside the harbor.

Ytre Kiberg
208 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

Varangerfjorden

9.28 Varangerfjorden (70°00'N., 30°00'E.), a large and

deep fjord lies with Kibergneset, its N entrance point, about 5

miles S of Vardo. The fjord extends about 50 miles W, and is

free from dangers in mid-channel to a distance of about 7 miles

from its head. The best harbors will be found in the inlets on

the S side of the fjord, which is characterized by steep hills

with sparse growths of trees. In contrast, the N side of the fjord

slopes gently inland, with steep cliffs of irregular heights in

places.

9.28 The tidal currents in the fjord are very irregular. Their direction is largely influenced by the prevailing winds, rather than

by the tides. The more usual characteristic is a W set on the N

side of the fjord and an E set on the S side, on change in direction occurring at HW or LW. The E set will usually be stronger

than the W and may attain a velocity of about 2 knots, with

heavy overfalls occurring particularly during strong E winds.

9.28 The N shore of Varangerfjorden is formed by the SE and S

coast of Varangerhalvoy and is better protected against N gales

than the E and N coast of the peninsula. Between Kibergneset

and Vadso, 30 miles WSW, the coast is generally low and flat,

forming open shallow bays bounded by white sand hills.

9.28 Ytre Kiberg (70°17'N., 31°00'E.), a small harbor about 2

miles W of Kibergneset, is available to small vessels with local

knowledge. It is exposed to E winds, during which anchorage

is not recommended, though there is good holding ground of

sand and mud. A light is shown from the head of the harbor,

and range lights in line lead into the inner harbor. 

9.28 Coastal vessels call at the port, which is a fishing station.

Storskjer, an above-water rock showing a light, lies about 3

miles SW of Ytre Kiberg Light. Shoal water, marked by

beacons and iron posts, lies from Storskjer NE to Ytre Kiberg.

9.28 Komagneset, terminating in a point about 13 miles WSW of

Kibergneset, is a high plateau with three prominent ridges

between its summit and the sea; about 5 miles SW of these

ridges is Skallneset, another prominent point. 

9.28 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in good

weather off Komagneset, in depths up to 6.1m.

9.29 Litle Ekkeroya (Lille Ekkeroya) (70°05'N.,

30°14'E.), a small island fringed with reefs, lies about 4 miles

SW of Skallneset. Vessels entering Varangerfjorden in foggy

weather must be careful to identify Skallneset, as its long flat

projecting point may easily be mistaken for either Litle

Ekkeroya or Store Ekkeroy. Litle Ekkeroya shows a light on

the SE point of the island.

9.29 It has been reported (1994) that numerous shoals and wrecks

exist in close proximity, NW to SW of Litle Ekkeroya Light.

9.29 Store Ekkeroya lies about 3 miles SW of Litle Ekkeroy and

is connected to the mainland by a narrow, low isthmus. Store

Ekkeroya is higher than the mainland and when seen from a

distance appears as an island. On its summit is a tall black

beacon; a second black beacon stands on its E extremity. A

light is shown on the seaward end of a mole on the SW side of

Store Ekkeroya.

9.30 Vadso (70°04'N., 29°44'E.) (World Port Index No.

20690) is located on the N side of Varangerfjorden, about 15

miles NW of Kirkenes pilot station. The port is protected on its

S side by the W part of Store Vadsoya, a low barren island

lying on a coastal reef, and on its W side by a two breakwaters,

one extending about 0.2 mile NNW from the W extremity of

the island and the other extending about 91m S from the

mainland.

9.30 The channel leads along the N side of Store Vadsoya and has

a least depth of 6.2m. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 3m,

extends N from Vadso to the mainland. The harbor is seldom

ice-bound; however it is not recommended to enter the harbor

during strong N or S winds. Navigational aids can best be seen

on the chart.

9.30 It has been reported (1995) that a 475m long channel, with a

width of 180m and a dredged depth of 6.5m, leads from the

outer harbor to the inner harbor.

9.30 Depths—Limitations.—The main pier extends W from a

point S of the town. The pier is about 107m long, and accommodates vessels drawing up to 7.3m. Between this pier and the

town are numerous quays and jetties, 65 to 300m long, with

depths of from 3.3 to 7.5m alongside. Coastal vessels call

regularly at the port.

9.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered

via the Safe Sea Net or alternatively, the Lodingen Booking

Center can be used. The pilot boards about 0.5 mile W of the

harbor entrance. Vessels desiring a pilot should give 24 hours

notice, confirmation should be made 2 hours prior to arrival at

pilot station Vadso.

9.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage for vessels up to 400 tons is available in the basin, in depths of 4 to 6m. Larger vessels can anchor W of the mole, in depths of 16 to 21m, sand and clay.

Anchorage is also available in the outer harbor inside the

breakwater, in depths of 5 to 9m. 

9.30 Small vessels can obtain anchorage E of the town, in depths

of 4 to 5m, about 1.0 mile ENE of Vadsoya Light; it is approached E of Store Vadsoya.

9.31 Sandskjer (70°05'N., 29°33'E.), about 2 miles WNW

of Lille Vadsoya and about 0.5 mile offshore, is a skerry

fringed by a drying reef. It is marked by a black beacon tower.

Vestre Jakobsely, about 5 miles WNW of Sandskjer, is a

fishing harbor,with two short moles, at the mouth of a river. A

light is shown at the head of the W mole.

Mortensnes, a village, lies 6.5 miles WNW of Veste Jakobselv. A light is shown from a point close SE of the village.

9.31 Meskfjorden (70°10'N., 28°40'E.), an inlet lies on the N

side of the head of Varangerfjorden, has a narrow entrance

which is encumbered with dangers and has very strong tidal

currents. The N and deeper channel leading into the inlet has a

least depth of 4.9m. The fjord is ice-bound from October to

May. Range lights to the fjord stand on the N shore, close W of

the entrance. 

9.31 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage off

the N shore of the fjord, 1 mile W of the rear range light, in a

depth of about 15.2m.

9.31 Karlebotn (70°07'N., 28°45'E.) lies on the S side of two

inner fjords of the head of Varangerfjorden. Anchorage can be

obtained on the NW side of Karlebotn, about 0.5 mile ENE of

Rabbedalen, in depths up to 27.4m. 

9.31 Small vessels anchor off Bigganes (70°07'N., 28°36'E.), a

village on the NW side of the head of Karlebotn, in a depth of

about 12.8m, about 2 miles WSW of Rabbenes Light.
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 209

Pub. 182

Varangerfjorden—South Side

9.32 Veinesbotn (70°05'N., 28°47'E.) is an inlet on the S

side of Veidnes, a peninsula which separates it from Karlebotn.

A light is shown on the N entrance point of the inlet. There is a

small, but very good harbor for small vessels off Grasbakken, a

village on the S side of the entrance to Veinesbotn. The

anchorage has depths of up to 15.2m; the holding ground is

good. A quay at the village has a depth of 6.4m alongside. A

light is shown from a rock off the village.

9.32 Latnaeringen, a promontory, lies about 6 miles E of Grasbakken. There is anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge on the W side of the promontory, in depths of 10.1 to

15.8m. Vessels approaching this anchorage should be careful to

avoid the foul ground, marked by a light, on the outer end of

which is Storskjaer. The anchorage is sheltered from E winds,

but is not recommended during N and W winds.

9.32 Bugoyfjorden (69°56'N., 29°36'E.) lies about 14 miles SE

of Latnaeringen. In winter, the fjord is ice-bound up to about 1

mile from its head, but it freezes farther out in hard winters. 

9.32 The SE side of the fjord consists of steep hills and is

uninhabited; the NW side is lower and has some settlements

and harbors. On the S side of the entrance, a group of islets and

rocks lies close offshore. At the N end of this group an abovewater rock is marked by a lighted beacon. The tidal currents in

the fjord are weak and usually set outward.

9.32 Between the W side of Bugoya and the mainland, there is a

harbor where small vessels can anchor in depths of up to 3.7m. 

9.32 The harbor is protected from the N by two short moles. A

light is shown on the head of the W mole. The sea breaks in the

N entrance to the harbor if there is a swell.

9.33 Kjofjorden (69°50'N., 29°47'E.), a long fjord on the

W side of the island of Skogeroy, can be navigated by large

vessels. The shores of the fjord are high, rocky, and barren for

some distance inland, but have a less rugged character near

Neidenfjorden, which continues from Kjofjorden to the S. 

9.33 In hard winters, the fjord may be ice-bound; however icebreakers usually keep a channel open from Kirkenes to Neiden,

a town on the W side of Neidenfjorden. The tidal current runs

very strong between Korstjorden, a fjord on the SE side of

Skogeroy and Neidenfjorden. 

9.33 The fairway in Korsfjorden is nearly free from dangers within the entrance, but strong squalls occur in the N part of Kjofjorden during W winds. The fjord is well marked by navigational aids. Neidenfjorden extends about 4 miles SSW from the

S end of Korsfjorden; Munkefjorden continues SSW for 3

miles.

9.33 Anchorage.—Brashamn, a small landlocked harbor, lies

about 1 mile within the W side of the entrance to Korsfjorden

and is suitable to small vessels with local knowledge. Vessels

with local knowledge can anchor on the W side of Neidenfjorden in a position about 1 mile SW of Skogeroypynten

Light. Vessels should not anchor in depths of less than 24m in

order to swing clear of the drying shore reef. 

9.33 There are a number of other anchorages in the fjords, which

can best be seen on the chart.

9.34 Bokfjorden (69°50'N., 30°07'E.) is entered between

Bokfjorden Light and the NE point of the island of Kjelmoy, 2

miles to the W. The fjord extends about 9 miles S to a promontory on which stands the town of Kirkenes, where it divides

into Elvenefjorden and Langfjorden. 

9.34 About 4 miles within the entrance to the fjord lies Korsfjorden, which branches WSW for about 9 miles on the S side

of Skogeroy to a junction with Kjofjorden and Neidenfjorden.

The above fjords are well marked by navigational aids, which

can best be seen on the chart.

9.34 Bokfjorden Light (69°53'N., 30°11'E.) is shown from a

tower, 10m in height, standing on Hungerneset. A racon is

located at the light.

Varangerfjord
210 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 

Pub. 182

9.34 Anchorage.—Good anchorage for large vessels is obtainable at the entrance to Langfjorden, SW of Kirkenes. Depths

up to 37m are found in this anchorage. Small vessels can

anchor in Soldaterbukt, in depths of 9.1 to 14.6m. This small

bay lies between the SW side of Prestoy and the mainland to

the W.

9.35 Kirkenes (69°44'N., 30°03'E.) (World Port Index No.

20650) lies at the head of a promontory separating Elvenesfjorden and Langfjorden. The harbor is used mainly for the

loading of iron ore.

9.35 Depths—Limitations.—Large vessels of unlimited draft

can enter the harbor. Vessels up to 171m in length and drawing

up to 9.4m can berth at the harbor. Bulk ore carriers of 120,000

dwt and having a maximum draft of 15.5m, a maximum air

draft of 13m, and a maximum length of 303m, can be accommodated.

9.35 Under normal conditions, oil carriers of 20,000 dwt and having a draft of 10m can be accommodated.

9.35 Berthing facilities are, as follows:

9.35 Pilotage.—Pilots are compulsory. There is a coastal pilot

station at Kirkenes. The lookout station for the pilots is off

Oksebaasen (69°51'N., 30°07'E.). Contact can be made via

VHF channel 16.

9.35 Vessels at sea requiring a pilot should give at least 24 hours

notice, notifying confirmation or any alteration at least 2 hours

before the original time stipulated. 

9.35 Vessel Traffic Service (VTS).—For details see Vardo

paragraph 9.26.

Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to load ore can anchor in the

entrance to Langfjorden, about 0.5 mile W of Kirkenes

Church, in a depth of about 33m. 

9.35 Range lights, in line bearing 208°, lead to this anchorage.

There is also anchorage 0.15 mile NE of a mud pipeline, in a

depth of 27m, close off the harbor.

9.35 Caution.—It is necessary that vessels lying in the harbor at

Kirkenes should pay attention to the breaking up of ice at the

end of the winter. Spring tides and a S wind clear ice from the

harbor, but it is considerably later before the main ice from the

head of Elvenesfjorden drifts seaward. If at anchor, drifting ice

may cause a vessel to drag anchor. A vessel moored to a quay

should be moored flush against the berth to prevent ice from

lodging between the ship and the quay, which could carry away

her hawsers.

9.36 Holmengrafjorden (69°51'N., 30°19'E.), the

entrance of which lies about 4 miles ESE of Bokfjorden, is

entered between Jarfjordennes and Trifannes, about 1 mile

NNW. A shoal, which dries, lies about 0.2 mile N of Trifannes

and is marked by an iron perch. Holmengraholmen lies in the

fairway of the fjord about 2 miles W of Jarfjordnes. 

9.36 Anchorage is available in mid-channel 0.2 mile from the

head of the fjord, in 29 to 37m, good holding ground. The best

anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge is in Innerhamn, on the SE side of the fjord, in a depth of about 20m,

good holding ground.

9.36 The fjord trends S for about 9 miles to Kjerrisneset, then

WSW for 3 miles. In winter, ice usually lies from the head of

the fjord to Kjerrisneset. Jarfjorden Light is shown from a

pedestal on the E side of the fjord, about 0.5 mile SSW of the E

entrance point. A vessel entering Jarfjorden should keep nearer

the W side of the fjord to avoid the dangers on the E side of the

entrance.

9.36 The best anchorage in Jarfjorden is in Lanabukt, the inlet E

of Hinnoy, where there are depths of 20 to 24m. The inlet is

free of ice and is a port of call for coastal steamers. Small

vessels with local knowledge can anchor near the head of the

fjord, off Jarfjordenbotn, in depths of up to 22m.

Varangerfjord

Quay No. Length Depth

1 40m 7.0m

2 104m 7.0m

3 10m 4.2m

4 50m 6.0m

5 60m 4.7m

6 177m 13.1m

7 110m 9.0m

8 59m 9.0m
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 211

Pub. 182

9.36 Sagfjorden (69°49'N., 30°32'E.) lies about 3 miles E of

Jarfjorden and is entered between Sagfjordenneset and Koljeneset. An unmarked rock, with a depth of about 1m, lies in

this narrow channel 0.5 mile WSW of the entrance. 

9.36 Anchorage is available for small vessels with local knowledge in summer near its head, about 1 mile within the entrance, but is seldom used.

9.36 Pasvikhamn (69°49'N., 30°35'E.) lies about 1 mile E of

Sagfjorden, and is entered between Dodesneset and Vardeneset. The harbor is good at all times of the year for vessels

with local knowledge. Anchorage is available, in depths of up

to 33m, about 1 mile within the entrance. A swell occurs within

the inlet during NW winds. There is an islet and rocks, awash,

on the SW side of the entrance. A vessel entering the inlet

should pass E of the islet and rocks. A black beacon stands on

Vardeneset.

9.37 Ytre Smastraumneset (69°48'N., 30°41'E.) lies

about 2 miles E of Pasvikhamn and affords anchorage in summer to small vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 11 to

15m, clay. There are mooring rings on both sides of Ytre Smastraumneset.

9.37 Kobbholmfjorden (69°47'N., 30°44'E.) lies about 2 miles

SE of Ytre Smastraumneset and is entered by passing between

Heikeneset (69°48'N., 30°44'E.), and Ytre Kobbholmen Light. 

9.37 A number of islets and rocks lie on the NE side of the fjord

and can best be seen on the chart. 

9.37 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in Storbukt,

on the W side of the fjord, in depths of up to 45.7m, about

183m offshore. Vessels are advised to secure to the shore due

to rapidly increasing depths. 

9.37 Anchorage is also available on the SE of the fjord in Fabrikbukt, in depths up to 44m, about 2 miles SE of Storbukt.

9.37 Jakobselv (69°47'N., 30°50'E.), a river, the mouth of which

lies 8.5 miles E of Jarfjorden, flows from lakes and marshes 40

miles inland. Grense Jakobselv is a village on the left bank of

the river near its mouth. The alignment of two lighted beacons,

bearing 208° and situated on the W bank of the river, indicates

the seaward section of the boundary between Norway and

Russia. A white stone building with a tower stands on the W

side of the mouth of the river and is conspicuous from seaward

for a considerable distance. 

9.37 There is a black buoy moored about 0.2 mile N of the mouth

of Jakobselv. It also marks the frontier of Norway.
Pub. 182

10. Jan Mayen

10.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 10 — CHART INFORMATION
215

Pub. 182

SECTOR 10 

JAN MAYAN

10.0 Plan.—This sector describes the island of Jan Mayen from

Sorkapp, the SW extremity, to Nordkapp, the island’s northeasternmost point. The sector also describes the numerous bays

of Jan Mayen. 

General Remarks

10.1 Jan Mayen lies about 250 miles E of the E coast of

Greenland and about 300 miles NE of the NE extremity of

Iceland. The island is about 30 miles long and lies in a SW to

NE direction. Its narrowest part, which is less than 2 miles

wide, is in the central region. The island is important chiefly

because of its strategic position for weather forecasting.

10.1 The island, which apparently originated entirely by volcanic

processes, is divided into three distinct portions. The NE part is

almost entirely occupied by Beerenberg, an active volcano over

30 miles around the base. Beerenberg is one of the largest

known volcanic cones. The crater, over 1 mile in diameter, is

filled with a glacier which escapes by a break in the N wall and

cascades down to the sea. The highest peak in the crater is

2,277m high.

10.1 Beerenberg dominates the island from all directions and is

visible from a great distance in clear weather. In fog, the summit is sometimes suddenly revealed

10.1 The low central region consists of many lava flows and

volcanic sand deserts, with almost no vegetation. There are a

number of long beaches of dark volcanic sand, mixed with

shining olive green crystals and strewn with driftwood,

probably from the great rivers of N Siberia. In the NE part of

this region are two lagoons, or fresh-water lakes, separated

from the sea by narrow sand bars.

10.1 The SW region consists of scattered peaks, which rise to an

elevation of 768m, and then, in most places, fall steeply to the

sea. In some of the valleys, there are numerous small volcanic

cones which interrupt the natural drainage from the hillsides to

form small lakes. Mist is common in this area. 

10.1 The vicinity of land may be indicated by sea birds, which

swoop down in great numbers around a vessel. The cries of

these birds on land is like the distant roaring of a cascade and

may be of assistance in warning vessels of the proximity of the

cliffs they inhabit. 

Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind direction is E.

Gale winds and storms are usually from a NE to NW direction,

although NE winds are not very common. From June through

August, frequently the wind is out of the S to SW. Calm

weather is rare, but occurs mostly from May to August.

10.1 Fog occurs most frequently in calm weather or with E to SE

winds. Frequently, there is fog during most of the summer. The

island can be wrapped in fog for weeks. When fog hovers close

over the sea around the island in calm weather, the wind will

hold it back against the weather side of the island, while the lee

side remains clear. With N or S winds, however, the fog can be

piled over the low central part of the island, whereas the

mountains on Nordjan and Sorjan force it high aloft so that it

drifts in the lee as light clouds. This means that one side of the

island can have extremely poor visibility, while there is clear

weather with sunshine on the opposite side.

10.1 Precipitation occurs very frequently, although not in large

quantities. September and October are the wettest months,

whereas May and June are the driest. Precipitation mostly falls

as snow. However, it is rare for a precipitation to fall exclusively as snow during a month’s interval, even during the winter months. 

10.1 Ice.—The island is usually affected by sea ice from midNovember to mid-April. In severe seasons, the island may be

affected as early as late October and as late as early August,

and in a warm year, the island may be affected by ice perhaps

for only several weeks during winter months

10.1 Encountering mist is very common around Jan Mayen and

visibility is often poor. The temperature of the surface water

should be taken frequently, perhaps hourly. Extreme caution

should be taken of encountering the ice barrier, especially

when the seawater temperature falls to or below 3°C.

10.1 From mid-July to mid-August is the best time for finding an

opening in the ice around the island and for making a landing.

During this time of year, the sea around the island is often calm

or there exists a light breeze off the land. Making a landing is

extremely difficult or impossible with a swell or any waves that

break along the shore.

10.1 Tides—Currents.—Jan Mayen lies in the boundary water

Jan Mayan
216 Sector 10. Jan Mayan 

Pub. 182

between the East Greenland Current and an eddy from the Gulf

Current and the North Atlantic Current, both running in the

same direction, and causing a SW main current.

10.1 The tidal range varies between 50 and 120 cm and causes a

N current with rising water and a S current with falling water.

10.1 With the addition of the variable depth conditions, irregular

current conditions are thereby produced around the island.

Generally, there is a SW flow of 0.5 to 1 knot, sometimes rising

to 1.5 knots, although accurate observations have not been

made. 

10.1 During spring tides, inshore along the NW coast, the flow

may become N. Because of bottom conditions, irregular flows

or eddies occur, particularly S of the island in the vicinity of

Sorkapp and Strumflakect, a small body of water close to and S

of Sorkapp.

10.1 Depths—Limitations.—Except when in the vicinity of Sorkapp,and Losbaten, a small islet on the SE coast, a vessel, by

keeping a distance of about 1 mile offshore, will be outside the

20m danger curve off Jan Mayen. It is recommended that vessel navigate at least 2 miles offshore when in the vicinity of

Sorkapp or Losbaten. 

10.1 In the N, the great depths run right into the island from

Soraustkapp to Nordvestkapp.

10.1 Lvndquistflaket stretches NW about 15 miles from the center

of the island toward Marobanken, with a depth of 133m in the

shallowest part.

10.1 Stimen, a shoal ridge about 2 mile WNW of the W extremity of Sorjan, runs about 4 miles in a NE to SW direction.

There is a series of shoal heads here, with a least depth of

123m.

10.1 Hoybergrenna, between the shoal ridge and land, has increasing depths from 350 to 700m to the S. There are also

peaks that reach up to 200m above the surrounding bottom.

10.1 From Sorjan, Jan Mayenbanken stretches S out to sea with

increasing depths. The depth is thus about 500m at a distance

of about 40 miles S of the island. 

10.1 Straumflaket stretches from about 4 miles S of Sorjan for 10

miles S. The shallowest part of the bank is Bouwensonbaen,

with a depth of 6m, which lies about 9 miles SSE of Sorkapp.

A 6m shoal, whose position is doubtful, was reported to lie

about 1 mile S of Bouwensonbaen. There are also other shoals

on this bank which reach up to depths of as little as 12m.

10.1 Sarsbanken extends about 20 miles E from Jan Mayen, with

depths of 250 to 300m. The bottom then falls away to great

depths on the N side of Sarabanken.

10.1 Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

10.1 Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

Southeast Coast

10.2 For about 6 miles between Sorvestkapp and Kapp

Wier, there is a continuous undulating cliff about 150 to 300m

high, falling vertically down to the sea or a rather narrow

beach. Small landslides into the sea often occur along this

coast.

10.2 The W point of Sorvestkapp, 214m high, ends in a sharp bill

Beerenberg
Sector 10. Jan Mayan 217

Pub. 182

as a kind of portal over a remarkable 20m high hole right

through the rock.

10.2 Sjuskjera stretches about 0.5 mile W from Sorvestkapp. This

skerry lies 0.2 mile from land and is a 27m high inaccessible

rock with a profile like a goose. A couple of the other skerries

are about 3m high and are almost like large stones to look at,

while the others are rocks, awash.

10.2 Sorkapp (70°50'N., 8°59'W.) is the S extremity of the

island. It is foul within 0.3 mile from land. Due S of the point,

the 20m bank runs out to about 1 mile from land, with a 13m

depth at its extremity. Sorkappgrunnen, a 10m shoal, is located

about 0.2 to 0.3 mile outside the 20m curve, slightly more than

1 mile S of Sorkapp.

10.2 From Sorkapp, the coast continues 1 mile ENE toward Hjelmen, 341m hugh, with the easily-recognized points and skerry

of Kjeglene lying off.

10.2 Northeast from there is Fugleodden, which forms the W

limits of Hornbaekbukta. To the E, the bay is bounded by Kapp

Wien and is about 2 miles wide. Vessels find a good lee in

Hornbaekbukta against winds from the NW quarter, anchoring

in depths of 10 to 20m. 

10.2 The N part of the bay has an uneven bottom, with somewhat

shallower, sharp peaks. In the E part of the bay, about 0.5 mile

S of Kapp Wien, there is Fyrtarnet, a 47m high rock that is

narrower at the base than on top. It is perhaps the most remarkable natural landmark on the coast.

10.2 The conical Flykollen, 419m high, standing inside Kapp

Wien, is also easy to recognize where it runs in an even curve

down to the cape itself, which in turn is comparatively low and

divided at its end.

10.2 There is a stretch of about 3 miles, from Kapp Wien to Kapp

Traill in the NE, that is very foul to about 0.7 mile from land in

Brotvika, just on the NE side of Kapp Wien. There are also a

several high basalt rocks in the sea. 

10.2 Schiertzegga, 378m high, lies just S of Kapp Traill, with a

stairway-shaped and splintered profile to the NE, and with a

hat on the highest point. 

10.2 As a rule, the lower ledge will be visible beneath the fog and

is easily recognizable by a point which is separated from the

rest of the land by a deep hollow.

10.3 Rekvedbukta (70°57'N., 8°34'W.) is a bay entered

Beerenberg and surrounding vicinity
218 Sector 10. Jan Mayan 

Pub. 182

between Kapp Traill and Eggoya, 217m high. Along the first 2

miles NE from Kapp Traill, the coast consists of a low, heavily

splintered cliff edge. In the middle of this stretch is Batvika, a

comparatively good boat harbor with a sandy beach on the N

side, which provides room for hauling up boats. Batvika is the

first landing place possible when proceeding on the NE stretch

from Sorkapp, and serves as the nearest harbor for Olonkinbyen.

10.3 Olonkinbyen is the only inhabited place on Jan Mayer. It

serves as the base for the staff of the LORAN station and the

Jan Mayen radiostation. A road runs from Olonkinbyen across

to Kvalrossbukta, on the opposite side of the island.

10.3 With E wind conditions, landing is difficult in Batvika.

Under such conditions, Kvalrossbukta is an excellent harbor.

There are masts for the radio and navigation systems erected in

the shore area NE along Rekvedbskta, with the radio station

itself right in the S part. There is an air strip just E of the radio

station; S of this is an old, renovated hunting hut.

10.3 The shoreline along Rekvedbukta consists of a low sandy

plain. Inside the beach, there is the large Sorlaguna.

10.3 On the N side of the lagoon is Soyla, a large basalt rock,

114m high, which is a conspicuous landmark.

10.3 Losbaten (70°56'N., 8°40'W.) is a small islet lying S of the

radio station. about 0.7 mile from land. 

10.3 Losbatrevet is a shoal ,about 3m deep ,that extends 0.5 mile

ESE. 

10.3 Nansenflua, a 2m shoal, lies 1 mile offshore and 4 miles NE

from Losbatrevet. Abnormal magnetic variations, to the extent

of 20°, were experienced in the area about 5 miles E of

Losbaten. Nansenflua is an underwater rock with a small top

surface and about 20m high vertical sides.

10.3 Rekvedbukta is otherwise clear, with an evenly rising

bottom, except for a 13m shoal about 1 mile NE of Losbaten.

When vessels keep away from the shoals described, they can

anchor throughout the bay in W to N weather. With such conditions, fog usually comes rolling across the low, central part of

the island.

10.3 With W winds, vessels anchor best between Losbaten and

Batvika, while with N winds the best lee is to the E of Eggoybukta. Smaller vessels can lie here with the wind due NE if

they go far into the bay. With particularly strong winds, large

clouds of sand swirl up from the plain and are driven outward.

10.4 Eggoya (70°58'N., 8°24'W.), 217m high, is the

remains of an old crater, and is really a peninsula. The outer

part is so cut away by the sea that it forms a bay between two

steep points. From Eggoya, the coast runs 8 miles ENE to

Soraustkapp. This stretch is fairly straight. The large, sandy

plain behind Eggoya opens to the 1 mile wide Jamesonbukta.

10.4 Gouwernaerbaen is a 10m shoal that is about 1 mile S of

Jamesonbukta. From Jamesonbukta E, there is a 1 mile wide

belt of lava rocks. Turnbukta cuts in a little way in the N part of

this. Some projecting points, together with several skerries,

provide a considerable lee against swell, and the bay is therefore well-suited for hauling up boats.

10.4 To the ENE of this lava belt there is a new sand plain, Ullringsanden, with a lagoon beneath Kreklinghogda, red crater

wall, 61m high. The sand plain then stretches to Kapp Hap as a

narrow strip along the foot of the mountain.

10.4 Presidentsteinen, 12m high, is an easily-identifiable offshore

islet about 1 mile WSW of Kapp Hap.

East Coast

10.5 Along a stretch of about 3 miles around Soraustkapp

(71°01'N., 8°00'W.), the mountainsides plunge down into the

sea from heights of up to 200m. Soraustkapp itself appears as a

break in the cliff edge in about the middle of this area. The

coast continues as steeply N to Austbukta. 

10.5 Several glacier arms push down on this stretch; two of them

have their fronts in the sea. The N front is really two parallel

glaciers, Prince Haralds Bre and Frielebreen, which come

together at the lower end.

10.5 On the stretch from these glacier fronts and further N to

Austkapp, the coastline is new as a result of the lava masses

which burst out during a volcanic eruption. Due to the effects

of the sea and the steep sea bed, one cannot assume the shoreline is stable.

10.5 North of this new land, there is a low cliff edge between

Austkapp and Nordkapp, which rises up to a height of about

70m midway between the capes. 

10.5 The coast here forms the end of the ridge of Breerenberg to the

NE with several craters. The two most conspicuous are Sarskrateret, 264m high, and Hohenlohekrateret, 121m high, nearest

the cliff.

10.5 In no place off the E coast does the 20m bank reach further

out than 0.5 mile.

10.5 Austbuka and Clandeboyebukta were formerly the only

places around the island where vessels lay well in SW weather.

Volcanic eruptions, however, may have changed the bottom

conditions, which were previously steep outside the danger

line. Strong katabatic winds can occur off the coast here.

North Coast

10.6 Nordkapp (71°10'N., 7°57'W.) lies 1 mile NNW of

Austkapp and is moderately high, with a rugged background.

From Nordkapp, the flat Kokssletta extends with a width of

600 to 1200m across to Krossbutkta, about 2.5 miles W. Kokssletta is made up of coke like lava.

10.6 With S winds, Nordbukta, W of Nordkapp, provides good

anchorage for smaller vessels, but the bottom falls off steeply

outside the danger line.

10.6 Krossbukta, a better harbor, has sandy beaches. The bottom

here rises evenly up from 50m and most often the wind is

either out of the S or E. 

10.6 Kapp Muyen, on the NW coast, is 7 miles SW of KrossOlinkinbyin Weather Station
Sector 10. Jan Mayan 219

Pub. 182

bukta. Kapp Muyen is not recommended as a landing area,

especially in the N part, where the mountain falls almost vertically 400m. Three glacier arms emerge with fronts in the sea

on this stretch. Weyprechtbreen is the largest.

West Coast

10.7 South of Kapp Muyen, the coastal plain gradually

widens. There are some steep cliffs that meet the sea. Further

down the coast, the buildings of the a former radio station stand

at Libergsletta. S of Libergsletta, there is Nordlaguna which is

separated from the sea by a low shore bank.

10.7 The coastal waters on this stretch are clear except, for a 10m

shoal 0.3 mile offshore just S of Kapp Muyen; a rock, awash,

about 183m off Fugleberget near Nordlaguna; and a 5m shoal

about 0.1 mile from land N of Danielsenkrateret.

10.7 Fugleberget forms the separation between Stasjonsbukta and

Maria Myschbukta, both of which are excellent anchorages

when the weather allows.

Southwest Coast

10.8 Brielletarnet (70°58'N., 8°42'W.) 91m high, has the

same formation as Fyrtarnet on the SE coast. It is connected to

land by Kvalrossen, 157m high; together they form the most

remarkable place on the W side of the island.

10.8 Kvalrossbukta lies on the S side of Kvalrossen and is the best

harbor on the coast during favorable weather conditions.

10.8 The bays further S were used by whalers. Apart from Tommerbukta, the N bay, and Guineabukta, the S bay, they are not

particularly suited as harbors. In many places, landing is inaccessible because of an almost continuous cliff edge, which is

formed by the distinctively gray and wide Lavastraumen in the

N. This comes from the mountains in the interior of Sorjan and

ends at the edge of the sea at Kapp Rudsen (70°56'N.,

8°53'W.).

10.8 From Kapp Rudsen, the waters SW are relatively foul, with

many skerries near land and with shoals out to about 0.1 mile

from shore. Fuglesoyla, 14m high, is a rock about 183m off the

coast, 1.75 miles SW from Kapp Rudsen, which provides a

good landmark.

10.8 Between Guineabukta and Sorbukta, there is Kraterflya, with

Richterkrateret, 108m high; Hoyberg, 68m high; and Arnethkrateret, 111m high. The plain between the last two and Sorbukta has an overboiled surface, with upright figures in places.

10.8 Sorbukta is a much-used harbor, which provides excellent

shelter against winds between the NNE and E.
221

Pub. 182

11. 

Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)

11.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 11 — CHART INFORMATION
223

Pub. 182

SECTOR 11 

SVALBARD ARCHIPELAGO (SPITSBERGEN)

11.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Svalbard Archipelago, the

name given to all territory between the parallels of 74°N and

81°N, and between the meridians of 10°E and 35°E. It comprises the main group of islands consisting of Spitsbergen

(Vestpitsbergen), Nordaustlandet, Barentsoya, Edgeoya, Prins

Karls Forland, and numerous smaller islets, and the outlying islands of Kvitoya, Kong Karls Land, Hopen, and Bjornoya. 

General Remarks

11.1 Winds—Weather.—Data on wind direction and velocity show that gales tend to be somewhat less frequent from N

of latitude 70°N. Winds in Bjornoya are very variable; there is

little diurnal variation.

11.1 The ground W of Bjornoya is less foggy than Bjornoya itself, and in the area around the island there is a rapid increase

in fog frequency from W to E. In July, 40 per cent of observations report fog to the NE of the island.

11.1 Fog can be expected when the wind changes to E after a spell

of SW winds while pressure remains high. Fog has been known

to persist over the island for as long as 19 days.

11.1 The coasts of Svalbard are subject to squalls which develop

suddenly, even from a calm, and falling snow may rapidly

obliterate landmarks. Downslope winds from the glacier are a

common feature.

11.1 Fog is rather frequent at Edgeoya and Nordaustlandet and is

more frequent on the E coast of the island than on the W coast

of Spitsbergen.

11.1 The light conditions on Svalbard are very special, as in polar

regions in general, and are rather different from those we are

used to in lower latitudes. The further N one moves to the polar

circle, the longer the periods when the sun stays above the

horizon day and night in summer (midnight sun), and below

the horizon in winter (polar night)

11.1 The table shows when the “perpetual day” and “perpetual

night” begin and end for the latitudes covered by Svalbard.

These periods increase by about 6 weeks from 74° to 81°N,

corresponding to 6 days for each degree of latitude one travels

N, which again means about 2 hours, 26 minutes for every

nautical mile.

Bjornoya

11.2 Bjornoya (74°27'N., 19°04'E.), the S island of Svalbard, lies with its S extremity about 250 miles NNW of Nordkapp, the N point of Norway and about 140 miles SSE of

Vestspitsbergen. The island is triangular in shape, with the

apex pointing S; its length from N to S is about 10 miles and its

greatest width is about 8 miles.

11.2 The S and E part of the island are mountainous; the N part is

a stony and barren plateau. The coasts of the island are characterized by high and almost vertical cliffs. Many of the steep

cliffs are fringed with beaches on which landing can be

effected in fine weather, but few of the beaches afford access to

the interior of the island.

11.2 Bjornoya is often entirely or partly obscured by mist, but

Miseryfjellet, a mountain on the E coast, is frequently visible

when the lower parts of the island are hidden. In fine weather,

the mountain may be seen for a distance of up to 40 miles.

11.2 A Norwegian government meteorological and radio station

is situated at the N end of the island and is marked by three

high radio masts. A radiobeacon is located near the meteorological station. A consol beacon transmits about 2 miles SSE

of the radiobeacon.

11.2 Ice.—Bjornoya is usually affected by ice from late December to late March. In a heavy ice year, however, it may be

affected as early as late October and as late as early May. In a

light season, it is effected by ice for at least a few weeks in

winter. Small icebergs are sometimes found in the vicinity of

Bjornoya from May to October.

11.2 Tides—Currents.—The current runs around Bjornoya at an

unusual rate and in certain places raises a tremendous sea,

which is quite dangerous to small craft. The sea is especially

heavy around the S end of the island, between Sylen and the

entrance to Sorhamn, where the current attains a rate of about 3

knots. Tide rip around the island are experienced far out to sea.

11.2 On the rising tide, the current runs N on the E and W coasts

and W on the N coast. After the occurrence of HW, the rate of

the current decreases, and there may be slack water for as long

as 0.5 hour. On the falling tide, the current runs S on the E and

W coasts and E on the N coast.

11.2 Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

11.2 Regulations.—Vessels must report to Vardo Vessel Traffic

Service (Vardo VTS) when within 12 miles of the Svalbard

Archipelago. See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information. 

11.2 Anchorage.—There are no sheltered harbors in Bjornoya

and vessels surprised by the weather are forced to find shelter

on the lee side of the island and to anchor close in under the

cliffs, behind the points, or in the bays.

Latitude Midnight Sun Polar Night Latitude

From To No. of Days From To No. of Days

74°N May 3 Aug. 9 99 Nov. 10 Feb. 1 84 74°N

75°N Apr. 30 Aug. 12 105 Nov. 6 Feb. 5 92 75°N

76°N Apr. 27 Aug. 15 111 Nov. 3 Feb. 8 98 76°N
224 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

11.2 In good weather, anchorage may be obtained anywhere

around the island. Anchorage within a distance of 2 miles offshore may be obtained, in depths of 15 to 36m, most places

being sand bottom. 

11.2 Spitsbergen Bank (75°00'N., 21°00'E.), defined by the

183m curve, lies with its outer edges at least 25 miles S and W

of Bjornoya; then the bank extends N, NE, and E of the island.

Though the bank is not completely surveyed except in the

vicinity of the island, depths of 22m and 18m have been

obtained 43 miles N of the island. Depths of less than 37m are

frequent around these two soundings. Abnormal magnetic

variations have been reported on the bank in the vicinity of

Bjornoya.

Bjornoya—East Coast

11.3 Kapp Bull (74°21'N., 19°05'E.), the S extremity of

Bjornoya, is a steep headland, 373m high, close off which lie

three islets. The coast on either side of Kapp Bull is steep-to;

however, there are no harbor or landing places and strong

squalls frequently occur close inshore. Small boats are cautioned when proceeding along the coast during spring and early

summer, when ice is melting, for landslides and falling rocks

are almost continuous. Kapp Kolthoff, lies 0.75 mile ENE of

Kapp Bull and Alkeholmen, an islet, lies between them.

11.3 Sorhamna, a small bay, lies 1.5 miles NNE of Kapp Kolthoff. The E side of the bay is protected by a steep and narrow

islet. The depths in the middle of the bay are about 14.6m and

greater, shoaling to less than 9.1m at its head. Anchorage in the

bay may be obtained as convenient, but the holding ground is

not good. At the head of the bay is a small beach where landing

is possible; however, it was reported that the height of the cliffs

prevented access to the interior.

11.3 Roedvika (74°24'N., 19°13'E.), a small open bay, lies 2

miles NNE of Sorhamna. During W winds, this bay affords the

most secure anchorage on the E side of Bjornoya. A depth of

77°N Apr. 24 Aug. 18 117 Oct. 31 Feb. 11 92 77°N

78°N Apr. 21 Aug. 21 123 Oct. 28 Feb. 14 110 78°N

79°N Apr. 21 Aug. 21 123 Oct. 28 Feb. 14 110 79°N

80°N Apr. 15 Aug. 27 135 Oct. 22 Feb. 20 122 80°N

81°N Apr .12 Aug. 30 141 Oct. 19 Feb. 23 128 81°N

Bjornoya from S

Latitude Midnight Sun Polar Night Latitude

From To No. of Days From To No. of Days
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 225

Pub. 182

11m is found in the middle of the bay.

11.3 Miserygrunnen, a dangerous rocky shoal which is often hard

to distinguish, lies close offshore SE of the S summit of

Miseryfjellet. Great care should be taken when approaching

Roedvika from the N. Evensenbukta, a small bay, lies 3.5 miles

NNE of Roedvika. There is a landing place in the bay, but there

is no suitable anchorage due to rocks and strong tidal currents.

11.3 Austervag (74°30'N., 19°12'E.), a small cove, lies about 2

miles NNW of Evensenbukta. Two beacons stand close within

the head of the cove; when in line, bearing 218°, they indicates

the approach to Austervag. Small vessels with local knowledge

can obtain anchorage during S or W winds. Vessels are cautioned, should the wind change to NW, a heavy sea soon sets in

and vessels must leave. Two radio masts stand 0.5 mile SE of

the range beacons.

Bjornoya—North Coast

11.4 The N coast of Bjornoya affords the best landing

places and is comparatively free from off-lying dangers. Nordkapp (74°31'N., 19°07'E.) forms the N extremity of the island.

Herwighamn is an indentation in the coast and lies about 2

miles WSW of Nordkapp. A small stone pier, with a depth of

4m alongside, is located at Herwighamn. Gravodden, a promontory, lies 0.75 mile W of Herwighamn. A meteorological and

radio station stands 0.3 mile SSE of Gravodden. A number of

lighted radio and consol masts stand near the station and up to

2 miles E of the station. Herwighamn affords anchorage to

small vessels, in a depth of 10.9m.

11.4 Nordhamn (74°31'N., 18°59'E.) is an open bay entered between Gravodden and Kapp Kjellstrom, the extremity of a

small promontory 1 mile W. Emmaholmane, a chain of islets,

extends 0.3 mile N from a position close W of Kapp Kjellstorm. The islets are very prominent and cannot be mistaken

for other islets on the N coast.

11.4 The shore at the head of Nordhamn is low and fla, with a

small projection which divides the head into two bays. Anchorage, during offshore winds, is obtainable off these bays

according to draft. A vessel anchored, in 15m, nearly 0.5 mile

NW of Gravodden Kobbebukta (74°31'N., 18°54'E.), an

open bay, lies between Kapp Kjellstorm and Taggodden, a

point about 2 miles WSW. 

11.4 Anchorage may be obtained in offshore winds 0.25 mile off

the head of the bay, in a charted depth of 9m. In the E part of

the bay, the shores slope evenly down to the sea; landing with

access to the interior is possible, but in the W part the cliffs are

unscalable.

Bjornoya—West Coast

11.5 From Taggodden, the coast curves SW and S for

about 2 miles to Kapp Duner (74°29'N., 18°46'E.), which is

the NW point of a forked promontory forming the W extremity

of Bjornoya. Grytvika, on the NE side of Kapp Duner, affords

anchorage to small craft with local knowledge during E or S

winds. Teltvika, close SE of Kapp Duner, is a small cove from

which landing and access to the interior are possible.

11.5 Lunekevika (74°28'N., 18°47'E.), a bay about 0.5 mile wide

at its entrance, lies on the S side of the Kapp Duner promontory; landing can be effected on a short sandy beach, which

affords access to the interior of the island. The bay affords

anchorage for vessels with local knowledge.

11.5 Vernevagen, a bay, lies with Kapp Elizabeth, its S entrance

point, about 2 miles SSE of Kapp Duner. The entrance to the

bay is obstructed on its N and S sides by extensive shoals.

Close N of Kapp Elizabeth is a landing place. A cairn of stones

stands about 0.3 mile ESE of Kapp Elizabeth. 

11.5 Kapp Ruth projects from the coast about 3 miles SSE of

Kapp Elizabeth; midway between the two is Kapp Hanna, near

which a beacon stands. Kapp Maria lies about 1 mile SE of

Kapp Ruth; on its N side a group of islets lies close inshore.

11.5 Caution.—A depth of 2.7m was reported (1994) to lie 1.8

miles WSW of Kapp Ruth.

11.6 Landnordingsvika is a bay entered between Kapp

Kare and Kapp Harry, about 1 mile to the SE. Shelter is afforded in this bay during E and NE gales, but winds from other

directions may raise a heavy sea. Vessels should approach with

the middle of the bay bearing about 045°, and then can anchor,

in depths greater than 9.1m, with Kapp Harry in range about

133°, and in line with the outermost large rock on Skredneset, a

point 0.3 mile farther SE.

11.6 Sylen (74°22'N., 19°02'E.), an awl-shaped pillar of rock,

80m high, lies about 2 miles SSE of Kapp Kare. Hornvika, an

indentation on the S side of Hambergfjellet, lies close SE of

Sylen. Stappen (74°20'N., 19°04'E.), lying NW of Sylen, is a

conspicuous pillar-shaped rock about 186m high. 

11.6 The coast on either side of the S extremity of Bjornoya is

steep-to and there are no landing places. Small craft should

exercise great care along this coast, especially during spring

and early summer, when the melting ice causes continuous

landslides of rock. The sea raised by tidal currents is especially

heavy at the S end of the island, between Sylen and the entrance to Sorhamna on the E coast.

Spitsbergen

11.7 Spitsbergen, the largest island in the main group

forming Svalbard, is situated about 400 miles N of Norway. A

thick sheet of ice covers a large portion of the interior of the

island, through it projects numerous sharp peaks. The whole of

the W coast of the island is mountainous. The valleys opening

towards the coast, at the heads of which is a chain of mountains, are in most cases filled with permanent ice.

11.7 When approaching the W coast of the island, considerable

reliance may be placed on soundings. Deep submarine valleys

penetrate into the fjords, while the coast between them is

fronted by banks on which the depths in most cases increase

regularly close inshore from 45 to 90m.

11.7 Due to the effect of the warm West Spitsbergen Current,

most parts of the W coast are usually accessible from late May

to early November. However, in a bad ice year, this coast may

be affected from mid-October to late July. In a light year, apart

from the formation of fast ice in fjords, this coast may remain

practically ice-free throughout the winter.

11.7 A polar station exists on the NW coast of Spitbergen. It is

owned and manned by Nicolaus Copernicus Universsity of

Poland. 
226 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

Sorkapp Land

11.8 Sorkapp Land (76°50'N., 16°25'E.) is a peninsula,

27 miles long in a N-S direction, at the S end of Spitsbergen.

The coast of Sorkapp Land is one of the most exposed in Spitsbergen, and drift ice may be encountered off it at any time.

Sorkappoya, a narrow island, lies off the S coast of Sorkapp

Land. Sorkapp, the S extremity of the island, is surmounted by

a beacon. A large lagoon is entered from the W side of the

island. Flakskjeret is a low islet lying near the outer end of a

chain of islets and rocks extending 3.5 miles ESE from the E

extremity of Sorkappoya.

11.8 Sommerfeldbukta indents the S coast of Spitsbergen for

about 4 miles, and lies about 3 miles N of the N extremity of

Sorkappoya. Oyrlandet is a narrow and level tongue of land

extending 5 miles SSW and forming the W side of Sommerfeldbukta. A hunte’s hut stands on each entrance point to

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Stappen from SE

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Polish Polar Station on Spitsbergen Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Polish Polar Station on Spitsbergen
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 227

Pub. 182

Sommerfeldbukta.

11.8 Anchorage is obtainable off the entrance to Sommerfeldbukta,

in a depth of about 8m. The depths within the entrance are less

than 3m; the inner part of the bay dries.

11.8 Stormbukta (76°41'N., 16°18'E.), a small bay, lies close N

of the W coast of Oyrlandet. Open anchorage is obtainable in

the entrance to Stormbukta, but this berth is exposed to heavy

E squalls which descend from the mountains, and caution is

necessary owing to the dangers on the N side of the approach.

Brimingen is a dangerous rock lying 6 miles W of the head of

Stormbukta and 2.25 miles offshore. The coast between Stormbukta and Suffolkpynten (76°52'N., 15°34'E.) is very foul and

should not be approached within 2.5 miles.

11.8 Hornsund, lying 19 miles NW of Stormbukta and entered

between Suffolkpynten and a point 7.5 miles NNW, extends 10

miles ENE, with two short branches at its head. A bank, with a

depth of 29m, has been reported to lie about 6 miles NW of

Suffolkpynten. Horsund is ice-free from July to October and

the sound is usually navigable in June and November. The

sound of Horsund is exposed to very severe E squalls which

descend from the mountains.

11.8 Vessels entering Hornsund should keep in mid-channel,

taking care to avoid the dangerous shoal lying about 3 miles W

of Suffolkpynten. A rock, which does not cover, lies close E of

this shoal. An aero light is exhibited from the vicinity of the

NW entrance point to Hornsund. Anchorage may be taken off

the SW side of Gashama, a bight on the S side of Hornsund.

When entering the bight care is taken to avoid two below-water

rocks in its E part.

11.8 Han’s Glacier (Hansbreen) is a large glacier which descends

to the N shore of Hornsund, close E of a small inlet. It is

bounded on the E by a sharp ridge, 889m high, extending N

from the W entrance of Burgerbukta, with a very steep fall on

its E side. Both Han’s Glacier and the ridge are prominent from

off the entrance to Hornsund.

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Northwest Spitsbergen

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Hornsund

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Summer at Hornsund

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Han’s Glacier
228 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

Hornsund to Bellsund

11.9 The coastal area between Hornsund and Bellsund is

backed by sharp-pointed and crevassed peaks, a feature of the

W coast of Spitsbergen N of Hornsund. Depths of less than

91m will be found from about 6 to 10 miles offshore at Torbjornsenfjellet as far N as 77°30'N, so that soundings will give

warning of the proximity of danger.

11.9 The coast for 2.5 miles NW of Torbjornsenfjellet consists of

a high mountain ridge. Werenskioldbreen lies N of this ridge,

and a low swampy tract of land extends for 3 miles at the foot

of its front. Tonefjellet, on the W side of Werenskioldbreen, is

easily identified from seaward.

11.9 Dunoyane (77°04'N., 15°00'E.), a group of three islets surrounded by several rocks, lies on the outer part of a shallow

bank which forms the coast for 5 miles. The inner part of this

bank dries. Anchorage, in depths of 5 to 10m, may be obtained

0.3 mile NE of the NW islet. The anchorage is approached

from the N; local knowledge is necessary because of the many

dangers in the vicinity.

11.9 Olsholmen, an islet 5 miles NNW of Kapp Borthen, provides

anchorage during E winds between it and the coast, 0.75 mile

E, but local knowledge is necessary and care must be taken to

avoid several dangers in the vicinity.

11.9 From Kapp Borthen, the coast trends in a general N direction

to Kapp Lyell, a distance of about 25 miles. A mountain range

runs parallel to the coast, about 2 miles inland. The coast in this

vicinity is fringed with rocks which extend as far as 1.5 miles

offshore. A 13m patch lies 4.5 miles WSW of Kapp Borthen.

Bellsund

11.10 Bellsund (77°39'N., 14°00'E.), an important inlet, is

entered between Kapp Lyell and Kapp Martin, which shows a

light. It extends about 12 miles E of Midterhuken, the W

extremity of a mountainous peninsula known as Midterhukhalvoy. This peninsula divides the inlet into two E branches, Van

Mijenfjorden and Van Keulenfjorden. A small S branch of

Bellsund, lies on the E side of the peninsula and is known as

Recherchefjorden.

11.10 The mountains in the vicinity of Bellsund are barren and

have many crevasses, particularly the peaks farthest W. On the

N side of the sound a plain extends to the foot of Ingeborgfellet, a peak about 7 miles E of Kapp Martin.

11.10 Ice.—Bellsund is not navigable from December to May. In

June and November, the ice is generally navigable; from July

to October, the inlet is ice-free.

11.10 Recherchefjorden, the S branch of Bellsund, was formerly

the chief place of assembly for the whaling fleet. The fjord is

well sheltered, though NW winds may send in some sea.

Reinodden, a flat projection on the E side of the fjord, has a

dangerous spit, on which there are several rocks that extend

0.75 miles NNW offshore. Recherchefjorden is not usually

clear of ice until June or July and it freezes early, sometimes in

September.

11.10 Good anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 33 to 37m,

good holding ground, in the SW corner of the fjord. Do not

anchor anywhere near the two glaciers in the fjord, as they are

fringed with large quantities of floating ice. 

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Bellesund Light
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 229

Pub. 182

11.10 Regulations.—The Norwegian Maritime Traffic Regulations for Specific Waters have been extended to include the

waters of Bellsund and Van Mijenfjorden. The regulations apply to the waters within a line drawn between Bellsund Light

and Kapp Lyell (77°34.5'N, 14°14.4'E). The regulations apply

to the following vessels:

1. Vessels with a maximum length of 24m or more.

2. Vessels towing an object which is longer or wider

than 24m.

3. Vessels towing an object where the total length of the

vessel and the tow is 35m or more.

4. All vessels carrying hazardous or polluting cargo in

bulk.

11.10 Permission should be obtained from the Norwegian Coastal

Administration by contacting Vardo VTS (call sign: NOR

VTS) in good time and at least 1 hour before entering the area.

Vessels carrying hazardous or polluting cargo in bulk must give

6 hours notice. If there are extraordinary safety measures to be

out in place, 24 hours notice is required.

11.10 Permission must also be obtained prior to the following:

1. Entering Akselsundet or Mariasundet.

2. Anchoring or stopping.

3. Commencing any movement within the area.

4. Changing the agreed voyage route.

11.10 The regulations do not apply to vessels engaged in fishing or

hunting but such vessels must maintain a continuous listening

watch on the working channel of Vardo VTS. 

11.10 Midterkuken (77°39'N., 14°46'E.) is a promontory forming

the W extremity of Midterhukhalvoy. A cove which lies close

SE of Midterkuhen affords shelter from N winds. The depths in

the cove appear to decrease regularly toward the head, from

about 33m at the entrance. Anchorage may be obtained, in a

depth of about 15m, with the S extremity of the outer islet,

which forms the W entrance point, bearing 292°, distant 0.175

mile, or in a depth of about 9m, about 183m farther inshore.

11.10 Van Keulen Fjorden lies on the SE side of Bellsund and is

entered between Ahlstrandodden and Forsbladodden, 2.75

miles NNW. The fjord penetrates about 15 miles inland, and is

surrounded by flat-topped mountains. Nathorstbreen, a glacier

at the head of the fjord, has an extensive moraine on either side

of its front. Anchorages in the fjord are found close within the

entrance and are indicated on the chart.

Van Mijenfjorden

11.11 This fjord is entered by Mariasundet and Akselsundet,

two narrow channels at either end of the island Akseloya. On

either side and at the head of the fjord are flat-topped

mountains, separated by broad flat valleys which are mostly

ice-free. Strong winds often blow out of the fjord.

11.11 Mariasundet (77°41'N., 14°51'E.), the S entrance to the

fjord, is about 0.25 mile wide between Maseneset and the

island of Mariaoya, off the S end of Akseloya. The least

charted depth in the fairway is about 11m. The tidal currents in

this passage are very strong, and several dangers, the positions

of which are best seen on the chart, lie in the W approach and

in the entrance channel close SW of Maseneset.

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Akseloya Light from NW
230 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

11.11 Akselsundet (77°45'N., 14°36'E.), the N entrance to the

fjord, is the usually used and is nearly 0.6 mile wide at its narrowest part. The N side of the passage should not be approached within about 0.2 mile; the S side should not be approached within 183m. 

11.11 The depths are from 16.5 to 51m in mid-channel. Though the

tidal currents are weaker than those in Mariasundet, they may

attain a velocity of 5 to 6 knots at springs, causing considerable

eddies and rip tides. Large vessels or those with low power

should pass through Akselsundet at or near slack water. An

aero light is shown from the N extremity of Akseloya. 

11.12 Fridtjovhamna (Frithjofhamn) (77°46'N., 14°39'E.),

a cove on the N side of Akseljundet, is entered W of Kapp

Schollin, from which a spit extends 0.3 mile SSW. When

entering the cove, caution is necessary to avoid a bank, with

depths of less than 1.5m, which extends 0.2 mile NE and N

from the W entrance point. Anchorage is obtainable in the

middle of the cove or off its E side, in a charted depth of

16.5m. Local knowledge is necessary when anchoring in this

cove.

11.12 Between Maseneset and Blixodden, 16 miles ENE, the S

shore of Van Mijenfjorden is steep-to, with the exception of a

small bank. On this bank, there is a depth of 2m, which extends

0.5 mile offshore abreast Bromelldalen, a valley 1.5 miles W of

Blixodden. Conwentzodden, 5 miles ENE of Blixodden, is the

extremity of a large projection forming part of an old moraine.

A spit, on which the depths are less than 9m, extends nearly 1.5

miles NW from Conwentzodden.

11.12 Between Kapp Schollin and Svartodden, which shows a light

and lies 5.5 miles ENE, the N coast of Van Mijenfjorden rises

steeply to the summit of Kolfjellet. A camp lies at the foot of

this mountain. Dom Miguelodden, a cape, shows a light and

lies 10 miles ENE of Svartodden. Svensksundhamna, entered

between Dom Miguelodden and Langneset, 2 miles ENE,

offers anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge. Kapp

Amsterdam, which shows a light, lies 7.5 miles ENE of Langneset.

11.12 Sveabukta (77°52'N., 16°45'E.), an inlet at the NE corner of

the fjord, is entered between Kapp Amsterdam and Ottoneset

and extends 2.5 miles N to Barryneset. Sveagruva, a former

coal mining settlement with a jetty, is situated close NW of

Barryneset. The channel from Van Mijenfjorden to an anchorage close S of Sveagruva carries a least depth of 4m. The first

leg is marked by leading beacons, which in line bear about

016°. Local knowledge is required for the remainder of the

channel. The channel continues N along two more legs, which

are marked by lighted beacons. Although facilities at the settlement had been improved, including the construction of an export quay and storage area at Kapp Amsterdam; no mining is

presently taking place.

Bellsund to Isfjorden

11.13 Between Kapp Martin and Kapp Linne, 21 miles N,

the coast is fronted with dangers. Lights are shown from these

inlets. Kapp Bjorset, which lies 6.5 miles N of Lagneset, and

Stabbane, 6 miles farther N, are inlets which show lights. 

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Sveagruva
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 231

Pub. 182

11.13 There are no reported harbors of refuge in this section of the

coast. From a position off the entrance to Bellsund, a mountain

range may be seen stretching N from Ingeborgfjellet until

hidden by another range extending NNW from Ytterdalssata.

The coastal plain is widest abreast Ytterdalssata.

11.13 Kapp Linne (78°04'N., 13°37'E.), which shows a light,

forms the S entrance point of Isfjorden. A radio station, located

about 0.2 mile SE of the light, is also a Norwegian government

meteorological station. Randvika, a cove on the E side of Kapp

Linne, affords anchorage in S and SE winds, in a depth of

about 9m, with two beacons at the head of the cove in line

bearing about 150° and Kapp Linne Light bearing 260°. Large

vessels may anchor farther offshore, in a depth of about 15m,

137m E of the line of the anchorage beacons, with Kapp Linne

bearing about 233°.

11.13 Festningen, which shows a light, lies 5 miles NE of Kapp

Linne. Festningen is fringed by shoals extending 0.5 mile offshore; the outer edge is marked by a buoy.

Isfjorden

11.14 Isfjorden (78°18'N., 15°00'E.), the largest fjord in

Spitsbergen, is entered between Kapp Linne and Daudmannsodden, 12 miles NW. From its entrance, it stretches 55 miles

NE to the head of Billefjorden, and numerous bays and fjords

lead off each side. From June to November, the approach to the

fjord is ice-free, with the exception that the tidal currents may

sometimes cause the entrance to be barred by loose pack ice.

This is most likely in early June, but in bad years it may

happen in July or even later.

11.14 The fjord is ice-free from July through October inclusive. In

June and November, the W part of the fjord is also ice-free, the

inner part containing ice that is generally navigable. From

December through May, it is unnavigable.

Isfjorden—Southeast Side

11.15 Gronfjorden (78°03'N., 14°11'E.) is entered between

Festningen and Heerodden, which shows a light, and is marked

by a buoy on its edge. There are two small glaciers at the head

of the fjord and mountains stand on both sides of the fjord.

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Isfjorden

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Barentsburg
232 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

11.15 Barentsburg (78°04'N., 14°14'E.) (World Port Index No.

20560) is an extensive Russian coal mine settlement located on

the E shore of Gronfjorden, about 2 miles S of Heerodden. A

pipeline is laid across the fjord from a position 0.5 mile S of

Barentsburg in a WSW direction. The landing place of the

pipeline on the W side is marked by lights. There are two piers

abreast the settlement, each of which has depths of 8 to 9m

alongside and is capable of accommodating large coal vessels. 

11.15 One of the piers is used exclusively for loading coal. A

pipeline is laid across the fjord from a position 0.5 mile S of

Barentsburg in a WSW direction. The landing place of the

pipeline on the W side is marked by lights.

11.15 Finneset is a small projection 3.5 miles S of Heerodden, on

which are some buildings and two conspicuous radio masts. A

light is shown at the SW point of Finneset. Three range lights

are shown from a position 0.75 mile NNE of the light at Finneset; in line bearing 146° they lead through the middle of the entrance to Gronfjorden to a position 0.25 mile W of Barentsburg. Small vessels with local knowledge may anchor on either

side of Finneset. There is also a possible anchorage, in a depth

of about 46m, at the head of the fjord.

11.15 Between Heerodden and Kapp Laila, 8 miles E, the low

coast is fringed by a shore bank. It has been reported that 2

miles E of Heerodden the bank extends farther N than charted.

Hollendardalen, a wide ice-free valley, breaks the coast 3 miles

E of Heerodden and extends S and SE.

11.16 Colesbukta (78°08'N., 14°57'E.), is entered between

Kapp Laila and a point 2.5 miles NE. The bay extends 2.5

miles in a SE direction. Both entrance points, the SW side of

the bay, and its head are fringed with shoals. It was reported

that the shoal fringing Kapp Laila extends farther N than

charted. The depths in the bay are suitable for anchorage, but it

is open to the NW.

11.16 Grumantbyen, a former coal mining settlement, lies at the

mouth of Grumantdalen, a valley about 4 miles NE of the entrance to Colesbukta. The valley contains one of the most important coal mines in Spitsbergen. Abreast Grumantbyen, the

depths increase so rapidly offshore that vessels can only obtain

anchorage very close inshore. There is a pier for loading coal

by conveyor. Two mooring buoys are located close inshore in

the vicinity of the coal pier.

11.16 Vestpynten (78°15'N., 15°27'E.), the SW entrance point of

Adventfjorden, lies about 9 miles NE of Colesbukta. A light is

shown from the point.

Adventfjorden

11.17 Adventfjorden (78°15'N., 15°37'E.) is entered

between Vestpynten and Revneset, a point 3 miles to the NE. A

shoal bank fringes Revneset for about 0.5 mile offshore, its

outer edge being marked by a buoy. About 1.75 miles within

Vestpynten, on the SW side of the fjord is Adventpynten, a

salient point which is low, sandy, and inconspicuous. The point

shows a light. A low tract of land lies between the two above

points; about 2 miles farther SE is Longyearbyen. 

11.17 The wide valley of Adventdalen extends SE from the head of

the fjord, with Adventelva flowing through it. The area off the

mouth of the river is gradually silting up, but the edge of the

shoal water is very steep-to and anchorage is afforded only in

great depths. Moskushamn, a former mining camp, stands 3

miles SE of Revneset. Anchorage off the pier is exposed except during E winds.

11.18 Longyearbyen (78°14'N., 15°39'E.) (World Port

Index No. 20570), a coal-mining settlement, lies near the head

of Adventfjorden, on its SW shore. A coast radio station, from

which a radiobeacon transmits, is located at Longyearbyen. 

11.18 There are two piers extending NNE from abreast the settlement. The E and larger pier is 170m long; it has a berthing

face, 45m long, with depths of 8.2 to 9m alongside. A mooring

buoy is located near the head of this pier. 

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Grumantbyen

Longyearbyen Home Page

http://www.portlongyear.no

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Longyearbyen
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 233

Pub. 182

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Longyearbyen

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Longyearbyen—West Pier
234 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

11.18 The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF:VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 47-91-122300

3. Facsimile: 47-79-021315 

4. E-mail: bykaia@ssd.no

11.18 Large vessels can anchor 0.25 mile N of the piers, in a depth

of 47m, thick mud. The depths are considerable until close off

the head of the larger pier.

Revneset to Gasodden

11.19 Between Revneset and Deltaneset, 5 miles NE, the

coast is formed by a plateau, similar to that SW of Adventfjorden, above which can be seen the summit of Konussen.

Hatten, a rocky mound, which resembles a hat, lies 2.5 miles

ENE of Deltaneset. An aero light is shown from the NW side

of Deltaneset. 

11.19 Sassenfjorden (78°23'N., 16°30'E.) is entered between Diabasodden and Gasodden, 6 miles NNE, and extends 8 miles

ESE to Bjonapynten. Sassendalen, a wide ice-free valley, extends over 16 miles SE from the head of Sassenfjorden, with

numerous valleys on its SW side.

11.19 Gasoyane, a group of four islets, lies about 1 mile W of Gasodden. The passage between the islets and Gasodden is foul

and should not be attempted without local knowledge. A light

is shown from the NW end of the islet. Gipsvika, an open bay

2.25 miles wide, is entered 2 miles SE of Gasodden. Ministergrunnen, with a depth of 5m, lies 3.75 miles SE of Gasodden

and Medfjordgrunnen, with a depth of 15m, lies 1 mile farther

SSE. Two other patches, with depths of 13m and 16m, lie 0.8

mile NW and 0.6 mile S, respectively of Minister-grunnen. 

11.19 Templefjella (Temple Range) is flat-topped and rises precipitously from the sea in cliffs resembling tiers of cones arranged one upon another, a peculiar formation which is common in Svalbad. Templet, at the NW end, rises to an elevation

of 667m. Sindballefjellet, at the NE end, 737m high, is covered

by an ice cap, which apperars permanent, as there are no signs

of avalanches.

11.19 Templefjorden (78°24'N., 17°00'E.), the NE continuation of

Sassenfjorden, extends for about 8 miles from Bjonapynten. Its

shores are comparatively steep. There are no outlying dangers.

The head of the fjord is fringed by glaciers.

11.19 Bjonahamna, a cove on the NE side of Bjonapynten, affords

anchorage, in about 31m, in its middle part, but the cove should

not be used when broken ice may block its entrance. Care must

be taken to avoid the shoal patches in the N part of the cove.

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Longyearbyen—East Pier

Courtesy of Marek Szymocka

Templefjella (Temple Range)
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 235

Pub. 182

Billefjorden

11.20 Billefjorden (78°34'N., 16°28'E.) forms the NNE

continuation of Isfjorden and extends inland for more than 15

miles. It is entered between Gasodden and Rundodden. Lights

are shown from Kapp Ekholm, on the E side of the fjord, and

Rudmosepynten, at the head of the fjord. The fjord is free from

offlying dangers on its W side, but toward the E side, a 6m

patch lies about 3 miles N of the Gasoyane islets. Rocks, with

depths of 5m and 7m, lie 0.6 mile NW and W, respectively, and

an isolated 11m patch lies 1.25 miles NW, of Skvalpeskjer, a

patch which lies about 4 miles NE of the Gasoyane islets.

11.20 Skansbukta, a bay close within the W entrance point of

Billefjorden, is about 1 mile wide at its entrance and extends

about 1 mile NNW. The general depths in the bay decrease

regularly, over a muddy bottom, from 42 to 18m. Small vessels

may anchor close to the head of the bay, in depths of 15 to

18m. The bay affords excellent anchorage, the best in Isfjorden; it may be obtained anywhere in the bay. When entering the

bay, vessels are requested to keep to the middle until depths of

about 29m are reached.

11.20 Mimerbukta (78°39'N., 16°25'E.) lies about 9 miles NNE

of Skansbukta. The bay is 1.5 miles wide at its entrance and extends 1.5 miles W. A mud flat fills the inner part of the bay, extending 1 mile from the shore. A shallow spit extends 0.2 mile

S from the NE entrance point and usually excludes ice from the

bay.

11.20 Pyramiden, a Russian coal mining settlement, lies at the had

of the bay. A small wooden jetty, close within the entrance

point, is suitable only for lighters. A depth of about 20m is

reported about 0.1 mile off its head. Good anchorage for small

craft is obtainable, with local knowledge, close off the settlement.

11.20 Petuniabukta lies close NNE of Mimerbukta and forms part

of the head of Billefjorden. The bay is about 2 miles wide at

the entrance and extends about 3 miles to the N. Though the

depths in the bay are suitable for anchorage, conditions are

dependent on the movement of local ice. 

11.20 Adolfbukta, a bay, is entered between Rudmosepyten, which

shows a light, and Kapp Napier. It lies close SE of Petuniabukta. The shores of the bay are steep-to and depths are deep.

Small vessels can anchor between Kapp Napier and the reef E

of it, but this position may be dangerous because of ice from

the large glacier at the head of the bay.

11.21 Nordfjorden (78°30'N., 15°00'E.) is entered between

Bohemanneset, which shows a light, and Kapp Thordsen, 6.5

miles WSW of Rundodden. It is 9.5 miles wide at its entrance

and extends 11 miles N to Kapp Waern, with general depths of

73 to over 183m. Kapp Waern is the extremity of a peninsula

separating Ekmanfjorden and Dicksonfjorden.

11.21 Ekmanfjorden is entered between Kapp Waern and Sveaneset, a point about 5 miles WSW. The fjord extends about 10

miles in a N direction. The entrance is free of dangers, except

for banks extending about 0.5 mile off the two points. Flintholmen, a small island, lies close off the W side of the fjord.

Corahulmen, another small island, lies on the E side near the

head of the fjord.

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Pyramiden
236 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

11.21 There is a good harbor for small craft on the W side of Flintholmen. To reach this anchorage, a vessel must pass N and W

of a drying rock which lies in the N entrance near the W side of

Flintholmen. Good anchorage may be obtained, according to

draft, E of Coraholmen. Small craft may anchor in the basin on

the bank SE of the island, approaching from SW, but caution is

necessary.

11.21 Dicksonfjorden (78°42'N., 15°20'E.) is entered between

Kapp Woern (Kapp Waern) and Kapp Wyk (Kapp Wijk), 2.5

miles ENE. The fjord trends about 4 miles NE and 12 miles N,

where the head is filled by drying mud flats for about 2 miles

offshore. 

11.21 The entrance to the fjord and the channel N are constricted

by shoals, the positions of which can best be seen on the chart.

Accumulations of drift-ice in the narrow entrance may make it

impossible to leave the fjord for weeks at a time.

11.21 Kapp Nathorst (78°47'N., 15°25'E.) projects from the E

side of Dicksonfjorden, 4.5 miles from the head of the fjord. A

shoal spit extends nearly 1 mile W and NW from the cape,

leaving a narrow channel between its edge and the bank

fringing the W shore. This channel leads to a large basin in

which good anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 20 to

40m, good holding ground. The head of the fjord is filled by

drying mud flats which extend about 2 miles offshore.

Isfjorden to Smeerenbergfjorden

11.22 Prins Karls Forland (78°30'N., 11°06'E.) lies off the

W coast of Spitsbergen between Daudmannsodden and Kvadehuken, 50 miles NNW, and is separated from it by Forlandsundet, a strait navigable only by vessels drawing 3.5m or less.

There are no sheltered anchorages on the W coast of Prins

Karls Forland, but N of Forlandsundet anchorage is obtainable

in Kongsfjorden. Anchorages can also be found in Krossfjorden, Magdalenefjorden, and Smeerenburgfjorden.

11.22 Salfjellet (78°14'N., 12°03'E.), located at the S end of Prins

Karls Forland, is saddle-shaped and very distinctive. It lies at

the S end of a mountain range, which extends 3 miles NNW. 

11.22 The mountains of Prins Karls Forland are frequently enveloped in a dense canopy of clouds, which often descend to an

elevation as low as 30m and sometimes to sea level.

11.22 Fuglehuken (78°53'N., 10°30'E.) is the N extremity of Prins

Karls Forland. A beacon located on a knoll on the point is

reported difficult to see on certain bearings against the background of mountains.

11.22 Magnetic disturbances amounting to 4° have been experienced in places off the W coast of Prins Karls Forland. An 8°E

disturbance was observed in a position about 12 miles W of

Kaldneset, a point near the middle of the W coast. Disturbances of greater amounts, up to 11°W in places, have been

experienced N of the island.

11.23 Forlandsundet (78°30'N., 12°40'E.), with a maximum width of about 10 miles, separates the W coast of Spitsbergen from Prins Karls Forland. Vessels are advised not to use

this passage before the middle of May because of ice.

11.23 Poolepynten, a steep-to point, is marked by a beacon and lies

on the E side of Prins Karls Forland, about 12 miles N of SalCourtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Pyramiden Havn
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 237

Pub. 182

fjellet. Between Poolepynten and Dawespynten, a point about

8 miles NW, the coast recedes to form a bight, the S part being

known as Brucebukta and the N part as Peterbukta. Brucebukta

is free of dangers and affords anchorage, in a depth of about

8m, 2.5 miles NW of Poolepynten. 

11.23 Murraypynten, a sandy tongue extending 0.5 mile E, lies 11

miles NNW of Dawespynten and is marked by a beacon. An

aero light is also located on the point.

11.23 Eidembukta (78°21'N., 12°45'E.), a bight with a glacier at

its head, lies on the E side of Forlandsundet, about 9 miles

NNW of Daudmannsodden. Anchorage may be obtained in the

N part of the bight; however mariners are cautioned to avoid a

4m shoal located approximately 0.5 mile S of the anchorage. 

11.23 A chain of islets, rocks, and reefs, about 2 miles offshore, W

of the NW entrance point, extends in a SW direction.

11.23 St. Jonsfjorden, a fjord with a glacier at its head, lies about

10 miles N of Eidembukta. Other glaciers enter the fjord on

either side. The shores of the fjord are steep-to and free from

dangers, but in the entrance on the N side is a dangerous

detached shoal. Hermansenoya, an island, lies on the N side of

the outer entrance. The passage between the island and the

mainland is free of dangers on the S side.

11.23 Sarstangen (78°44'N., 11°29'E.), two narrow banks of sand

enclosing a lagoon, extends 2.5 miles WSW from the general

line of the coast of Spitsbergen. A beacon stands near the

extremity of Murraypynten. A light, with a racon and a radar

reflector, stands on the point of Sarstangen. Sarstangen tower

beacon stands about 183m E of the light. 

11.23 Forlandsrevet, a sandy bar connecting Sarstangen and Murraypynten, is about 13 miles within the N entrance to the

sound. The chart should be consulted for details regarding the

narrow and shallow channel.

Forlandsundet—North End

11.24 Forlandsundet is entered from the N between Fuglehuken and Kvadehuken, a low and salient point about 11 miles

ENE. From Fuglehuken, which shows a light, the W coast of

Forlandsundet curves SE for about 8 miles to the point of

Heemskerckneset. For about 4 miles S of Heemskerckneset,

the coast is indented by Ferskvassbukta, a bay, which affords

anchorage, in depths of 8 to 15m.

11.24 From Kvadehuken, which shows an aero light, the steep-to E

shore of Forlandsundet trends SE for about 9 miles to the N

entrance point of Engelsbukta, which is about 2 miles wide at

its entrance and extends about 2 miles SE to a glacier at its

head. Engelsbukta has been reported to be one of the best anchorages on the W coast of Spitsbergen, being completely

landlocked and free from incursions of polar ice. Within the

bay, in its middle, are charted depths of about 61m.

11.24 Between the S entrance point of Engelsbukta and Sarstangen, about 7 miles SW, the entire coast is fringed with a

shoal bank which, in places, extends about 3 miles offshore.

Rocks. with depths between 4 and 7m. lie near the outer edge

of this bank.

Kongsfjorden

11.25 Kongsfjorden (78°57'N., 12°00'E.) is entered between Kvadehuken and Kapp Guissez, 7 miles NNE. The fjord

extends 13 miles ESE, terminating in a large bay of which the

NW side is formed by a peninsula 6 miles SE of Kapp Guissez.

The shores of the fjord are free from off-lying dangers, and in

most places are steep-to. The fjord is usually ice-free, or almost

so, from late May to late November. Kongsbreen, one of the

largest glaciers in Svalbard, has a front 6 miles long, which

forms the head of Kongsfjorden.

11.25 Brandalpynten (78°57'N., 11°53'E.), which shows an aero

light, lies about 7 miles ESE of Kvadehuken. Kolhamna, the

shallow bay between the promintory of Ny-Alesund and

Brandalpynten, has depths of less than 5.5m. A rocky patch,

with a depth of 2.3m, lies 0.75 mile SSE of Brandalpynten.

11.25 Ny-Alesund (78°55'N., 11°57'E.) (World Port Index No.

20580), situated on the promontory on the SE side of Kolhamna, serves as a fishing station.

11.25 There are two piers in the harbor. A T-head pier is 130m long

and has a berthing face of 24m, with depths of 10m alongside.

The other pier has depths alongside of 4.8m. A mooring buoy

is situated between the heads of the piers.

11.25 Anchorage may be obtained by large vessels, in a depth of

27m, good holding ground, 0.25 mile NNW of the E pier. Take

care to avoid a rock, with a depth of 6.4m, lying 0.15 mile

NNE of this pier, at the seaward end of a bank extending NW

from the shore. Small craft can anchor near the head of Kolhamna. During N and W winds, vessels at anchor may be

bothered by drift ice, in which case anchoring in Blomstrandhamna is preferable. 

11.26 Blomstrandhamna (78°59'N., 12°06'E.), an inlet on

the NW side of the peninsula ofBlomstrandhalvoya, is entered

between Tonsneset and Hansneset, about 1 mile S. Lights are

shown from the W side of this inlet. Vessels should keep in

mid-channel when entering the inlet. On the N side of the inlet

is a small bight, in which vessels may obtain anchorage during

N and E winds, in a depth of about 33m, good holding ground.

11.26 Peirsonhamna, a small inlet at the S extremity of Blomstrandhalvoya, is 0.15 mile wide at its entrance, from which it

extends 0.15 mile NE. At its head is London, a former settlement used in the marble trade. Anchorage may be obtained 1

mile E of Peirsonhamna, in a depth of 35m, mud,about 0.4 mile

offshore, and also 0.75 mile farther NE, in a depth of 30m, 0.3

mile offshore. A 9m patch lies about 1.25 miles ENE of

Peirsonhamna.

Krossfjorden

11.27 Krossfjorden (79°09'N., 11°46'E.), entered between

Kapp Guissez and Kapp Mitra, 6 miles WNW, extends 8.5

miles NNE to Cadiopynten, the S extremity of Kong Haakons

Halvoy, where the fjord divides into Mollerfjorden and

Lilliehookfjorden. Mountains enclose the fjord on either side

and landing is difficult in most places.

11.27 Lilliehookbreen, an immense glacier at the head of Lilliehookfjorden, is a remarkable feature of Krossfjorden. 

11.27 The large bergs which are frequently calved, many with

heights of 12 to 15m, are the only real icebergs calved on the

W coast of Spitsbergen. None of these bergs reach the open

sea, having such a deep draft they ground on the shore of the

fjord, or on the shoals near the entrance.

11.27 Mollerfjorden, entered between Kapp Thoulet and the SE
238 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

extremity of Kong Haakons Halvoy, extends 3.5 miles N,

where it divides into Kollerfjorden and Mollerhamna. Two

dangerous shoals lie close off the W shore N of the W entrance

point. With the exception of these dangers, the outer part of

Mollerfjorden is free from shoals, but obstructions lie in the

approach to Kollerfjorden and Mollerhamna, where the depths

are very irregular. Kollerfjorden has not been thoroughly

examined and should be entered with caution.

11.27 Mollerhamna, entered between Regnardneset and Kong

Haakens Halvoy, to the W, is fringed on its NE side by a shore

bank which extends from about 0.2 to 0.3 mile offshore.

Anchorage is obtainable, in depths of 18 to 27m, 0.1 to 0.2

mile off its NE shore, with good holding ground. It is reported

that the depths N of the anchorage are less than those charted.

A conspicuous boulder on the shore 0.5 mile NW of Regnardneset may be useful as a mark when anchoring.

11.27 A hut stands on the shore between the boulder and Regnardneset. Due to the background, it is not easily seen from sea.

11.28 Ebeltofhamna (79°09'N., 11°39'E.), on the NW side

of Krossfjorden, is a shallow inlet about 4 miles within the entrance to the fjord. Anchorage may be obtained off Ebeltofhamna, in depths of about 15m, good holding ground, 0.25

mile ENE of Enjalbalstranda, a sand spit. 

11.28 Caution is necessary as the sand spit may have altered considerably in shape and extent. Anchorage is recommended for

use in only early summer, before drift ice sets in from Lilliehookbreen. 

Lilliehookfjorden (79°15'N., 11°40'E.) is entered between

the S end of Kong Haakons Halvoy and the shore abreast

Schottfjellet, a peak about 2 miles to the W. The fjord extends

6 miles NNW to Lilliehookbreen and is 1.5 miles wide

throughout its length. It is usually ice-free in July, but towards

the end of the summer, the ice from Lilliehookbreen may render navigation of the fjord impossible. The shores of the fjord

are steep-to and free from dangers.

11.28 Signehamna (79°16'N., 11°35'E.) is a cove entered between

Nilspynten, a point about 4 miles N of Schottfjellet, and Fridtjovneset, about 0.65 mile farther N. The head of the cove is

divided by Gunnarpynten, a point about 0.3 mile WNW of

Nilspynten.

11.28 Anchorage may be obtained midway between Gunnarpynten

and Fridtjovneset, in depths of 15 to 18m, but this anchorage

should only be used when Lilliehookbreen is not calving.

Krossfjorden to Smeerenburgfjorden

11.29 From Kapp Mitra, the N entrance point to Krossfjorden, the coast trends 28 miles N to Magdalenhuken, the S

entrance point of Magdalenefjorden. This part of the coast is

characterized by a series of glaciers, the deep valleys of which

are backed by high mountains. The coastline is fringed with

rocks, below-water and awash, which in places extend about 2

miles offshore; it should therefore be given a berth of at least 3

miles where the depths are 28m or greater.

11.29 Kvedfjordbukta (79°25'N., 10°55'E.) and Rekvedbukta are

small indentations in the coast lying, respectively, about 19 and

23.5 miles N of Kapp Mitra. Nothing further is recorded of

them and in the approaches below-water rocks make caution

necessary.

11.29 Hamburgerbukta, a cove about 2 miles S of Magdalenehuken (79°34'N., 10°44'E.), extends about 0.5 mile E to the

glacier at its head. The entrance is obstructed by a bar, over

which the depths vary from 1.8 to 5.5m. The middle of the

cove has general depths of 7.3 to 18.3m.

11.29 Magdalenefjorden (79°34'N., 10°54'E.) entrance lies

between Magdalenehuken and Knattodden, about 3 miles NE.

The fjord extends about 5 miles E to Waggonwaybreen, the

extensive glacier at its head. Surrounding the fjord are high,

rugged mountains which rise precipitously, the valleys between

the ranges being filled either with snow or glaciers. Calvings

are frequent during the summer months. Tidal currents at times

attain a rate of 1.5 knots along the S shore of the fjord.

11.29 Magdaleneboen, a 6m rocky patch, lies 2.5 miles WSW of

Knattodden, in the W approach to Magdalenefjorden. The N

extremity of Gravneset, bearing 101° and in line with the

middle of Waggonwaybreen, leads into deep water S of Magdaleneboen.

11.29 Gravneset, a small peninsula, is fringed on its N side by a

group of islets and rocks extending 0.2 mile offshore. Trinityhamna, on the E side of Gravneset, affords anchorage when

clear of ice. A stone cairn stands near the head of Trinityhamna.

11.29 Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of about 20 to 27m,

about 0.5 mile from the S shore in a position off Adambreen.

Adambreen lies more than 2 miles W of Gravneset and is the

outermost of the three glaciers on that side of the fjord.

11.29 Shannonboen (79°34'N., 10°56'E.), a rock with a depth of

less than 2.0m, lies about 2 miles SE of Knattodden. Fugleholmen, about 2m high, lies about 0.2 mile N of Shannonboen,

on a shoal with depths of less than 5.5m, on which lie several

dangerous rocks. Another dangerous patch lies 0.4 mile E of

Shannonboen, having a rock, awash, close off its SE end, and a

rock, with a depth of less than 2m, off its NE end.

Smeerenburgfjorden

11.30 Smeerenburgfjorden (79°43'N., 11°06'E.) is an extensive fjord lying between the NW corner of the mainland of

Spitsbergen on the E and two large islands, Danskoya and Amsterdamoya, on the W. It may be entered by Sorgattet, the

sound between Danskoya and the mainland; or by Danskegattet, the strait between Danskoya and Amsterdamoya; or by

Nordgattet, the N entrance between Amsterdamoya and the

mainland. Anchorage is afforded on the E side of the fjord,

about 3 miles from the entrance. This anchorage is best seen on

the chart.

11.30 Danskoya (79°41'N., 10°55'E.) lies with Kapp Gurnerd, its

SW extremity, about 3 miles N of Knattodden. The above cape

and the coast N of it are fronted by many islets and rocks; the

outermost danger is two rocks, awash, about 2 miles WNW of

the cape. With the exception of Kobbefjorden, this stretch of

coast has not been completely surveyed and should be given a

wide berth.

11.30 Kobbefjorden lies about 3 miles N of Kapp Gurnerd; it is

about 1 mile wide at its entrance and recedes E for about 2

miles. An islet lies off the S shore of the fjord, close within the

entrance.

11.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage is afforded N of the islet, in depths

of 6.5 to 9.1m, outside the sand bar off the islet. Small vessels
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 239

Pub. 182

able to cross the bar may anchor at the head of the fjord.

11.31 Amsterdamoya (79°46'N., 10°49'E.) lies 1 mile N of

Danskoya and is separated from it by Danskegattet. Most of the

island is mountainous and two high peaks form the summit.

Ytterholmane consists of one large and several smaller islets

lying between 0.75 mile and 1.5 miles NW of Bikuben, the W

extremity of Amsterdamoya. There is a passage between these

islets and the coast of Amsterdamoya. Hakluytodden, the NW

extremity of Amsterdamoya, is a bold granite headland.

11.31 Danskegattet is entered from the W between Kapp de Geer

and Bikuben, which is prominent from seaward. A conspicuous tower-shaped hill rises close SE of Kapp de Geer. This W

entrance, which is partly blocked by shoal spits, has depths of

10 to 11m in its middle part. In the E entrance channel, about

0.1 mile wide, the depths are only about 6.9m. Virgohamna, a

small bay on the SE side of Danskegattet, affords anchorage, in

depths of 22m and 11m, about 0.15 mile E and SE of Ekholmpynten. 

11.32 Nordgattet (79°45'N., 11°05'E.), the N end of

Smeerenburgfjorden, forms the principal approach to the inner

part of the fjord. The passage is bound on the W by the NE side

of Amsterdamoya and on the E by the coast of the mainland

between Fuglepynten and the front of Frambreen, a glacier

about 3 miles S. About 1.25 miles S of Fuglepynten, a bay

known as Kennedybukta recedes to the front of a glacier which

lies between mountain peaks and Frambreen glacier.

11.32 Sorgattet (79°39'N., 11°00'E.), the S approach to Smeerenburgfjorden is entered between Knattodden and Kapp Gurnerd,

3 miles N, and extends for 3.5 miles NE; with a least width of

about 1 mile; it is much encumbered with islets and shoals.

Mesteinane, two islets, lie 1 mile N of Knattodden, in the

entrance of Sorgattet. They are steep-to on their S and E sides.

A beacon marks the E islet. The tidal currents run with great

strength through the narrow part of Sorgattet. 

11.32 Anchorage may be obtained 0.5 mile NE of Moseoya, 0.2

mile offshore, in a depth of about 18m. Anchorage is also obtainable 0.75 mile WSW of Danskeneset.

Smeerenburgfjorden—Inner Part

11.33 From abreast Smeerenburgodden, the fjord extends

about 8 miles SSE to Smeerenburgbreen, a glacier at the E side

of its head. South of Danskegattet, the middle approach to the

fjord from seaward, foul ground lies off the W shore to a

distance of about 0.6 mile. The islet of Albertoya is about 0.4

mile SE of Kapp Pike, the S point at the E end of Danskegattet.

11.33 Slaadbukta (79°42'N., 11°15'E.), an indentation on the E

shore about 1 mile S of Frambreen, recedes to the front of a

glacier. About 2 miles SSE of Slaadbukta is a small bay named

Marbukta. Anchorage may be obtained 0.4 mile SSE of

Smeerenburgodden, in depths of 24 to 33m.

Spitsbergen—North Coast

11.34 Fuglefjorden (79°47'N., 11°28'E.) is entered between

Fuglepynten and Drottenneset, 3.25 miles ENE, and extends 3

miles SSE to two glaciers at its head. Fugloya, an island, lies

about midway between the entrance points. The depths in

Fuglefjorden are very irregular in places and it should be

entered with caution.

11.34 Fair Haven (79°49'N., 11°29'E.) a sound lying N of Fuglefjorden, is partly sheltered by cliff islets and shoals. The depths

in the sound are irregular and include a number of shoal

patches. Cummingoya lies in the E part of the sound, on a

detached shoal with depths of less than 5.5m up to 183m

offshore. Steggholmen, 0.5 mile SSE of Cummingoya, lies

close within the S edge of an extensive bank, having depth of

less than 5.5m, and with several rocky patches. Holmiabukta,

an inlet, is entered from the SE corner of Fair Haven, 1 mile E

of Drottenneset.

11.34 Suitable anchorage is reported in the channel between Fuglesangen and Klovingen, close N of Fair Haven. The depths are

from 16.5 to 46m, mud, free from hidden dangers, except for a

7m shoal spot that lies about 0.3 mile SW of Klovingen. Drift

ice and bergs may be carried in from the N by the wind or the

tidal current. 

Raudfjorden

11.35 Raudfjorden (79°50'N., 12°00'E.) is entered between

Flathukenand Jermaktangen, 4 miles E. The fjord extends 10.5

miles to the S and divides into two branches near its head. The

fjord has deep water for the most part and the general depths

off the entrance are 15.3m and greater. A shoal spot, with a

depth of 3.4m, and a rock, with a depth of 4m, lies about 1 mile

WNW and 1.25 miles NNW, respectively, of Jermaktangen. A

rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies approximately 1.5

miles W of Jermaktangen.

11.35 Between Jermaktangen and Velkomstpynten, the W entrance

point of Woodfjorden, a bend on the coast forms a wide bay

known as Breibogen, which recedes about 5 miles to its head at

the W end. The NE shore of the bay is covered by deep-red

limestone. Patches, with depths of 13.8m and 16m, lie within 2

miles seaward of the N extremity of Velkomstpynten. A shoal

patch, with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 3 miles NNW of Velkomstpynten.

11.35 Moffen (80°02'N., 14°30'E.), an island, lies 12 miles NE of

Velkomstpynten. It has an extensive bank, with depths from

Fugloya
240 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

17m to 102m, which extends more than 20 miles N. Two outlying shoals, with depths of 7m and 9m, lie, respectively, 15

miles NW and 12 miles N of Moffen; however, their exact

positions are not known. A beacon stands at the S extremity of

the island. The tidal currents off the island set NW and SE at a

rate of about 1 knot. Anchorage may be taken about 0.5 mile

SW of the beacon.

Woodfjorden and Liefdefjorden

11.36 Woodfjorden (79°40'N., 13°58'E.) is entered between Velkomstpynten and Grahuken, a point about 8 miles

ESE. The fjord indents the coast for about 34 miles to the S.

Grahuken, the E entrance point of Woodfjorden, is the N

extremity of a mountainous promontory between Woodfjorden

and Wijdefjorden. A beacon stands on a rock close N of Grahuken. From Velkomstpynten the W side of Woodfjorden

trends about 11 miles S to a small peninsula which forms the N

entrance point of Liefdefjorden.

11.36 Liefdfjorden is entered between Stasjonsoyane and Rooseneset, 6.5 miles SSW, and extends 13 miles WSW to Monacobreen at its head. The fjord contains numerous groups of

islets and rocks, which can best be seen on the chart. Bockfjorden, entered between Roosneset and Kapp Kjeldsen, 6

miles S, extends 3 miles S of the latter point. A shoal, with a

depth of 7m, lies 4 miles S; a dangerous shoal, with a depth of

1m, lies 6 miles SSE of Roosneset.

Wijdefjorden

11.37 Wijdefjorden (79°22'N., 15°37'E.) is entered between Grahuken and Bangenhuk, 14 miles ENE and extends 58

miles SSE to a glacier at its head. The depths in the fjord are

deep; however a shoal, the exact position of which is not

known, with a depth of 3m, lies about 17 miles SSE of Grahuken. The W side of the fjord is backed by mountain ranges

separated by valleys running in a WSW direction. Some of

these valleys are long and flat, others short and steep, but most

have glaciers at their sides or heads and all are desolate.

11.37 Vestfjorden, about 6 miles long, branches SSW from the W

shore of Wijdefjorden, about 35 miles within the entrance. It is,

in reality, a side valley which is depressed below sea level and

appears to be silting up rapidly. The depths in the fjord are

somewhat shallow and its head dries for 2 miles offshore.

11.37 Anchorage in Wijdefjorden can be obtained on either side of

Bratthuken, a small sandy projection on the E side of the fjord,

about 11 miles S of Bangenhuk, in depths of 9.1m on the N

side of the point and 7.3m on the S side. Anchorage is also reported on the W side of the fjord close N of Krosspynten, and

also 14 miles SSE of Kapp Petermann.

11.37 Mosselbukta (79°53'N., 15°55'E.) is entered between Bangenhuk and the coast 3.5 miles NNE, and extends 3 miles SE.

The bay apparently was used as an anchorage during former

whaling times, but vessels experienced severe difficulties when

they were beset by ice in the bay.

11.37 Verlegenhuken, about 13 miles NNE of Bangenhuk, forms

the N extremity of Mosselhalvoya, the latter being the seaward

end of the great peninsula Ny Friesland which terminates

Spitsbergen to the NE and separates Wijdefjorden from Hinlopenstretet. A beacon stands on Verlegenhuken; a dangerous

5m patch lies about 3 miles ENE of the beacon.

Nordaustlandet—North Coast

11.38 Nordaustlandet (79°50'N., 23°00'E.), the largest island NE of Spitsbergen, is separated from the latter by Hinlopenstretet. The very irregular N coast of the island is broken

by interspersed fjords, bays, and rugged peninsulas. Some of

the latter being large and salient and in places the offing is encumbered by islands and dangers.

11.38 Langgrunnodden (80°09'N., 17°46'E.), the NW extremity

of Nordaustlandet and the NE entrance point of Hinlopenstretet, lies at the NW end of Storsteinhalvoya. From Langgrunnodden to Marmorpynten, 11 miles ENE, the coast consists almost entirely of narrow strips of beach within which are

extensive lagoons, most of the water near them being brackish.

Lagoya, meaning low island, is separated from the N coast of

Storsteinhalvoya by Franklinsundet, known to be foul and

having a 10m patch in mid-channel, 3.5 miles WNW of Marmorpynten. Franklinsundet’s narrowest width is 3 miles;

however, it should be entered with great caution.

11.38 Lady Franklinfjorden (80°09'N., 19°11'E.) is entered between Marmorpynten and the coast of Botniahalvoya, which

projects 13 miles NNW to form the E side of the fjord. From its

entrance, the fjord penetrates about 9 miles SSE to a glacier at

its head. There appear to be several shoals in the fjord and

several above-water rocks are visible. At times, the fjord is unapproachable due to ice.

11.38 Brennevinsfjorden is entered between Kapp Hansteen and

Depotodden, 5 miles ENE, and extends 11 miles SSE. Two

shoal patches, with depths of 3m and 7m, lie about 5 miles

NNW of Kapp Hansteen. Mariners approaching Brennevinsfjorden are advised to proceed with extreme caution. 

11.38 Close within Depotodden are steep cliffs, on top of which is

an almost snow-free plateau, from which rises Snotoppen, a

mountain with a small ice cap on its summit. 

11.38 The best anchorage in the fjord is reported to be in an inlet at

the E corner of the head, which is said to be one of the best

sheltered harbors in Nordaustlandet. In normal years, the fjord

is reported to be ice-free between the end of July and early

October.

11.39 Laponiahalvoya (80°25'N., 19°50'E.) is a large peninsula which projects about 18 miles N and separates Breenevinsfjorden from the large body of water to the E, known as

Nordenskioldbukta. Kapp Rubin, the N extremity of the

peninsula, lies about 12 miles NNE of Kapp Hansteen. The

NW part of the peninsula is composed of gray granite.

11.39 Chermsideoya, a relatively large island, lies off the N end of

Laponiahalvoya. The passage between the island and the

mainland is narrow and its depths are moderate. About 1 mile

E of Chermsideoya are the smaller islands of Castrenoya. In

the channel between Chermsideoya and Castrenoya, the depths

are greater than 146m, but a vessel has anchored, in about

9.1m, between the E and SE points of Chermsideoya, in a

position about 0.5 mile offshore. A 3m shoal patch, the position of which is doubtful, was reported (1989) to lie 1.5 miles

SE of South Castrenoya Island.
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 241

Pub. 182

11.39 Beverlysundet (80°29'N., 19°52'E.) is entered between

Kapp Rubin and a point on the NW side of Chermsideoya, 2

miles ENE. The sound extends 3 miles SSE, then 1.5 miles NE,

with a least width of 0.4 mile. A small point, projecting 0.1

mile S from the middle of the S side of Chermsideoya, is

fringed with foul ground, which extends nearly 183m offshore.

A shoal, located 0.4 mile ESE of this point, with a depth of

1.8m, has passages on either side. Anchorage may be obtained

0.15 mile WNW of the above point. 

11.40 Waldenoya (80°37'N., 19°46'E.), an island, lies 5.5

miles NNW of Nordkapp, the N extremity of Chermsideoya.

The island consists of coarse-grain granite, most of which is

flesh color, giving the rock a red hue. The depths around the

island are considerable. Heclaskjeret, a dangerous rock, lies 1.5

miles S of the summit of Waldenoya. The rock at times is

awash when a heavy sea is running.

11.40 Sjuoyane consists of three large islands and four smaller islands, which lie NE of Nordkapp. Rossoya, one of the smaller

islands, is the northernmost island in Svalbard.

11.40 Nordenskioldbukta (80°25'N., 21°10'E.) is entered between

Nordkapp and Kapp Platen, 28 miles E. The bay consists of

numerous inlets, some of which may be entered without danger

and are suitable only for temporary anchorage. They are open

to the N and may be filled with heavy ice without warning.

Comparatively few soundings have been taken in the bay, but

several shoals are known to exist. Fowl ground with many

rocks, both below-water and awash, lies S of Scoresbyoya, an

island about 15 miles SW of Kapp Platen.

11.40 Rijpfjorden, the longest inlet on the N coast of Nordaustlandet, is entered between Kapp Loven and Kapp Wrede, 10.5

miles NE, and extends 25 miles S from the latter point. Vindbukta, on the E shore of the fjord, lies 7 miles S of Kapp

Wrede. Wordiebukta, entered N of a small projection 20 miles

S of Kapp Wrede, is considered to be the safest harbor in

Rijpfjorden. No soundings are available.

11.41 Zorgdragerfjorden (80°23'N., 22°40'E.), on the NW

side of Prins Oscars Land, is entered between Kapp Wrede and

Kapp Platen, and extends 12 miles S from the latter point. The

head of the fjord is shoal and submerged rocks are reported to

lie in the entrance. The fjord should not be used as a refuge and

great caution is necessary in entering it. The entrance can be

blocked very quickly by ice; the fjord frequently remains full

of ice long after the surrounding waters are open.

11.41 Duvefjorden (80°17'N., 23°30'E.) is entered between the

coast under Goodenoughtjellet, 6 miles SE of Kapp Platen, and

the N extremity of Glenhalvoya, a peninsula 11 miles farther

SE, and extends 18 miles S from its entrance. The W side of

the fjord consists of steep headlands which form the E side of

Prins Oscars Land. The E shore is lower and more undulating

then the W.

11.41 A rock, with a depth of 8m, is reported to lie in position

80°21.3'N, 23°14.0'E.

11.41 Adlersparrefjorden, on the E side of Duvefjorden, extends

about 4 miles SE and has three inlets at its head. The N inlet

affords refuge to small vessels, but if blocked by ice, the inlet

may remain closed for a year. Conwayfjellet, a mountain, rises

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Waldennoya from S
242 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

steeply between the middle and S inlets. Close SW of Adlersparrefjorden is an unnamed bight, about 2 miles wide at the

entrance; the E side of Duvefjorden trends about 10 miles S to

the head of the fjord. Near the outer end of the E and longer of

two promontories which project from the head is the dark and

prominent Louise Richardfjellet, with a cairn on its flat summit. Duvebreen, a glacier, enters the fjord about 4 miles E of

Louise Richardfjellet. 

11.42 Finn Malmgrenfjorden (80°17'N., 24°31'E.) is entered between Glenhalvoya and Bergstromodden, the N

extremity of a narrow whale-backed peninsula 6 miles in

length. The fjord, 4 miles wide at the entrance, extends 7 miles

SW. No soundings have been taken in the fjord or in its

approaches and great care is necessary when entering. Sealing

vessels report that a safe channel passes W of Alpinioya, the

islet close NW of Bergstromodden. An islet, whose position is

doubtful, lies about 2 miles W of Alpinioya.

11.42 Karl XII Oyane (80°39'N., 25°03'E.) lies 18 miles N of

Bergstromodden. The island has steep sides and a truncated

top. In clear weather, the island appears as a large black sail of

a boat. Norde Repoya, an island, lies 7 miles N of Glenhalvoya

and is 3 miles long in an E-W direction. Sore Repoya lies 2

miles S of Norde Repoya and is about 4 miles long in a N-S

direction. No attempt should be made to pass between the latter

island and the mainland, as both channels are foul.

11.42 Brochoya (80°27'N., 26°03'E.), which with Foynoya and

Schubeleroya forms a triangular group, lies 14 miles ENE of

Bergstromodden and is about 150m high. Foynoya lies about 2

miles E of Brochoya; Schubeleroya lies 1.5 miles S of Brochoya. 

11.42 Albertinibukta (80°16'N., 25°00'E.), a bay, is entered between Bergstromodden and Kapp Bruun, the extremity of a

small projection 6.5 miles SE, and extends 6 miles S to a

glacier at its head. Between Kapp Bruun and the W end of

Leighbreen are a large number of islets lying between 0.5 and

2 miles offshore. Shoals and submerged rocks surround these

islets and a berth of at least 3 miles should be given to the coast

in their vicinity.

11.42 The ice cliffs of Leighbreen extend 10 miles to Kapp Leigh

Smith, and then 4 miles S to Kapp Laura, an outcrop of bare

rock extending 2 miles E and 3 miles S, forming the E

extremity of Nordaustlandet. Storoya, an island, lies 5 miles

ENE of Kapp Laura. Foul ground with submerged rocks is

charted extending 2 miles S from the E extremity of the island..

The tidal currents between Kapp Laura and Storoya are reported to attain a velocity of about 4 knots; this is probably a

very conservative estimate. 

Hinlopenstretet

11.43 Hinlopenstretet (79°30'N., 19°20'E.) is entered from

the N between Verlegenhuken, and Langgrunnodden

(80°09'N., 17°46'E.). Lagunepynten, 3 miles ESE of Verlegenhuken, is a low point from which the coast extends 6.5 miles

SSE to Eolusneset. The strait extends about 95 miles SE to

Koristkabreen and Kapp Mohn. The narrowest part of the strait

lies from 15 to 25 miles within the N entrance where the shores

are only 5 miles apart. The strait in many places is encumbered

by islands and islets, especially in its S entrance. In October,

the whole strait is covered with ice. In July and August, the

strait is navigable by most type vessels during normal years.

The N part of the strait is affected by strong winds from adjacent ice-covered highlands in summer.

11.43 Sorgfjorden (79°54'N., 16°50'E.) is entered between Eolusneset and a small projection 1.5 miles ESE. The fjord extends 5

miles S to a glacier at its head. The fjord has not been completely sounded, but in most places both shores may apparently

be approached in safety to within 183m.

11.43 Heclahamma, a landlocked cove, lies on the S side of Crozierpyten, a narrow promontory on the E shore about 1 mile

within the entrance of Sorgfjorden. Anchorage may be obtained in Heclahamna, in depths of 5.5 to 13m, good holding

ground. Anchorage is also obtainable under Eolusneset, in

depths of 5.5 to 9m.

11.43 Lomfjorden (79°36'N., 17°54'E.) lies on the W side of Hinlopenstretet and is entered between Isrundingen and Kapp Fanshawe, 6 miles SSE. The fjord extends 17 miles SSW to a glacier at its head. It has been reported anchorage may be taken in

a depth of 14m, clay, off the W shore, close S of Valhallfonna. 

11.44 Tommelpynten (79°33'N., 18°42'E.) lies 7 miles SE

of Kapp Fanshawe. Tommeloyane, a group of islets, lies

between 1 and 2.5 miles offshore abreast of Tommelpynten. A

detached islet is charted 3.5 miles N of Tommelpynten; a

dangerous rock lies 5 miles E of the point.

11.44 Vaigattbogen, a wide open bay, lies between Tommelpynten

and Kapp Freeden, which projects 2.5 miles NE from the coast

27 miles SSE of Tommelpynten. Numerous glaciers, some of

them separated by mountains, form the coast for 19 miles S of

Tommelpynten. Between Kapp Freeden and Kapp Weyprecht,

26 miles SE, many glaciers discharge into the strait; there are

numerous off-lying islands and islets.

11.44 Wilhelmoya (79°03'N., 20°24'E.), a large island, lies 3.5

miles SE of Kapp Freeden. The island is high with a round

snow top. The island is separated from the mainland by Bjornsundet. Bastianoyane and Ronnbeckoyane, two groups of islets

SW of Wilhelmoya, obstruct the S approach to Bjornsundet.

Koristkabreen, 5 miles S of Kapp Weyprecht forms the SW

entrance point of Hinlopenstretet, and the E extremity of Spitsbergen.

Hinlopenstretet—East Side

11.45 Murchisonfjorden (80°00'N., 18°20'E.), an indentation on the E side of the strait, is entered between Tvillingneset

and Sparreneset, 8 miles S, and extends 8 miles E. It is encumbered with islets and its shores are considerably indented.

A detached shoal, with a depth of 9m, lies 3 miles WSW of

Tvillingneset. When the inner part of the bay is ice-bound,

vessels can anchor, in 9m, sand, close within the middle islet of

the three outermost ones at the entrance. Otherwise anchorage

is afforded close W of Kvalrosshalvoya, a peninsula at the

inner end of the S side, or in a cove at the NE end of the bay.

11.45 Wahlenbergfjorden (79°40'N., 20°00'E.) is the largest fjord

in Hinlopenstretet, lying about 35 miles within the N entrance,

and extends about 25 miles ENE from the E side of the strait. A

shoal, with a depth of 4.5m, was reported (1988) to lie 2.5

miles ESE of the SE extremity of Wahlenbergfjorden. Further

shoal patches have been reported (1989) up to 4 miles N of this
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 243

Pub. 182

position. The fjord has a width of about 6 miles at the entrance,

with the least width being about 5 miles. Gyldenoyane, an

island with an islet close SW, lies in the middle of the entrance.

11.45 Palanderbukta indents the S shore of Wahlengberfjorden, 9

miles within its entrance. The inlet is about 5 miles wide at its

entrance and extends about 11 miles SE to its head. Anchorage

is available at the head of the inlet, close off the NE shore, in a

depth of about 13m.

11.46 Vaigattoyane (79°20'N., 20°00'E.) is an extensive

group of islands and islets which encumber the middle of Hinlopenstretet for a distance of about 15 miles, from 9 miles S of

Selanderneset to 4 miles N of Kapp Freeden. Wahlbergoya, the

largest island of the group- is 7 miles long, with its NW

extremity 13 miles S of Selanderneset. Von Otteroya, the next

largest island, lies about 2 miles S of Wahlbergoya.

11.46 Ulvebukta, an open bay, lies on the S side of Nordaustlandet,

13 miles E of Wahlbergoya. The bay is entered between

Torellneset and Giaeverneset, 11 miles E. Anchorage may be

obtained close S of Torellnesfjellet, in a depth of 11m, or in the

same depth, close off Giaeverneset.

11.46 Kapp Mohn, a glacier point which forms the SE entrance

point of Hinlopenstretet, lies 36 miles E of Giaeverneset. The

point is subject to change due to the movement of the ice cliffs.

Spitsbergen—East Coast

11.47 Kikutodden (76°35'N., 17°00'E.), the SE extremity

of Sorkapp Land, is a projection on the coast and lies 6 miles

ENE of Sommerfeldbukta. Bettybukta is a slight indentation

with low land at its head. It lies 4 miles NNE of Kikutodden.

Isbukta, a bay, lies 7 miles NNW of Bettybukta.

11.47 Hedgehogfjellet, a steep mountain, rises close to the coast

about 10 miles NNE of Isbukta. From abreast this mountain,

the E coast of Spitsbergen, trends about 32 miles N to Kvalvagen. A number of glaciers discharge into the sea between

Hedgehogfjellet and Kvalvagen. It has been reported Kvalvagen affords good anchorage, but is unreachable at times because of drift ice.

11.47 Storfjorden (78°00'N., 20°00'E.), entered between Kvalhovden and Kvalpynten, 35 miles E, extends 63 miles N to the

entrance of Ginevrabotnen at its head. The whole of Storfjorden is filled with ice from January to May inclusive, in an

average year, but in exceptional years there may be large openings in May. Vessels can usually navigate from July to September. Strong winds and currents may cause rapid changes in

the ice in this region.

11.47 From Kvalhovden, the coast trends N for nearly 30 miles to

Kapp Dufferin; this stretch is broken by the fronts of three

glaciers between the coastal peaks. The glaciers are separated

by coastal mountains. Agardhbukta, is entered between Kapp

Dufferin and Revnosa, 6 miles NE, and extends 4.5 miles NW. 

11.47 This bay has the reputation of being very foul, though the

latest surveys indicate that its middle part is unencumbered. It

has been stated that the bay is exposed to drift ice because of

violent currents in the vicinity.

11.47 The coast continues N for about 25 miles from Revnosa;

then for about 8 miles E it is formed by the S side of Negribreen Glacier. Kapp Antinori, the SE extremity of the glacier,

is the W entrance point of Ginevrabotnen, which lies at the

head of Storfjorden. Anchorage has been reported in Dunerbukta and Mohnbukta, two coves on the coast between Revnosa and Negribreen.

Storfjorden—East Side

11.48 North of Kvalpynten, the E coast of Storfjorden has

been described as a continuous rocky wall, rising almost

directly from the sea to a high plateau. Kapp Lee, the NW point

of Edgeoya and the S entrance point of Freemansundet, lies

about 40 miles N of Kvalpynten. Between the two points the

coast is indented by Diskobukta, a wide bay with a valley at its

head.

11.48 Barkhamodden (78°14'N., 20°41'E.), the SW point of

Barentsoya, lies 7 miles NNW of Kapp Lee, with the entrance

of Freemansundet being between them. The mountainous coast

of Barentsoya continues in a N direction for about 16 miles to

Mistakodden, the NW point of the island. Anchorage is

available close N of Mistakodden in the position indicated on

the chart. A dangerous rock lies about 2 miles WNW of Mistakodden. Anderssonbukta indents the coast between Barkhamodden and Duckwitzbreen, a glacier about 5 miles to the

N. Vossebukta, a slight indentation in the coast, lies 5 miles SE

of Mistakodden. A rock lies 3 miles SW of Anderssono-yane.

11.48 A small unnamed islet and Sylen, a 3.5m patch, lie 3 miles

and 5 miles NW, respectively, of Hassensteinbukta. Storfloskjeret, a rock which covers and uncovers, lies 12 miles

WNW of this cove. Sletvoldgrunnen, a 5m patch, lies about 9

miles WSW of Kapp Lee, but its exact position is doubtful.

Other dangers in Storfjorden are best seen on the charts.

11.48 Ginevrabotnen (78°37'N., 20°20'E.), at the head of Storfjorden, is entered between Mistakodden and Kapp Antinori.

The bay extends about 15 miles NE to Heleysundet, the narrow

passage connecting it with Olgastretet, and is encumbered by

several off-lying islets. The ice in Ginevrabotnen remains

throughout almost the entire year. At times it is clear of ice by

the end of August, but new ice begins to form almost at once

and the bay is quickly blocked again.

Edgeoya and Barentsoya—East Coasts

11.49 Edgeoya (77°45'N., 22°30'E.), the third largest island

in Svalbard, lies E of the S part of Spitsbergen. The E coast of

the island forms the W side of Olgastrete. The island is about

60 miles long between Negerpynten, the SW extremity of the

island, and Kapp Heuglin, its N extremity. The approach to the

SW coast of Edgeoya is one of the most dangerous parts of

Svalbard, as the outermost known dangers lie a long way

offshore, the tidal currents in this vicinity are very strong, and a

number of uncharted dangers are reported to lie off the coast.

11.49 Tunsenoyane consists of several groups of islets some distance apart and as yet not accurately charted covering a large

area S of the SW coast of Edgeoya. The outermost known dangers are the isolated drying rocks Brotskjer and Rumpetrollet,

lying approximately 32 miles SW of Negerpynten. Breakers

have been reported in this area. A 10m depth has been reported

to lie about 12 miles W of this danger. Other dangerous submerged rocks lie between 10 and 12 miles WNW of the islet of

Haoya.
244 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 

Pub. 182

11.49 Kong Luovigoyane and Menkeoyane are the principal

groups of islets in the N part of Tusenoyane. The former, the

farthest NW, lies 13 miles W of Negerpynten and has dangerous reefs rising out of deep water close S; the latter, the farthest

NE, is situated 5 miles SSE of that point and is surrounded by

rocky patches.

11.49 A below-water reef extends 1 mile S of Menkeoyane and a

rock, with a depth of less than 2m, lies 2.5 miles SW of the

group. A channel leads NW between these dangers towards

Buolscheoya, a detached islet midway between Menkeoyane

and Kong Ludvigoyane.

11.49 About 6 miles S of Kong Ludvigoyane lies Utsira, a lowlying rocky islet; the same distance S of Buolscheoya stands

Meinickeoyane, a pair of islands steep-to except on their W

side.

11.49 Halvmaneoya (77°16'N., 23°10'E.), an island, lies with its

W extremity about 8 miles E of Negerpynten. The S point of

the island is foul to a distance of about 2 miles offshore.

Dianahamna, an indentation on the N side of the island, affords

anchorage.

11.49 Ryk Yseoyane (77°47'N., 25°12'E.), a group of islets, lie

about 10 miles E of the E extremity of Edgeoya. Seen from a

position 10 miles to the E, the group has the appearance of one

long low island, with the S extremity sloping gradually into the

sea and the N end finishing in an abrupt cliff.

11.49 Blafjorden, a large open bay, lies between Kapp Metchers

and Kapp Pechuel Losche, 20 miles NW, and extends 7 miles

SW of a line joining the entrance points. The NW part of the

bay is shallow, with depths of 9m being found about 4 miles

offshore. Submerged rocks, the exact position of which are

doubtful, are reported to exist between 1 mile and 2 miles E of

Kapp Pechuel Losche. 

11.50 Freemansundet (78°14'N., 21°37'E.), 22 miles in

length, has an E to SW direction and a least width of 2.5 miles.

It separates Edgeoyn from Barentsoya. The sound was surveyed in 1987; depths of 15m were found in the center but is

reported to be too shallow and rocky to admit passage of anything but small craft. The sound is entered from the E between

Kapp Heuglin and Kapp Waldburg, 9.5 miles W. 

11.50 Two islets lie in the middle of the E entrance, 4 miles WNW

of Kapp Heuglin. Foul ground extends 2.5 miles N and NW

from Kapp Heuglin and it has been reported that the area

around Kapp Waldburg is foul.

11.50 Barentsoya (78°26'N., 21°20'E.) lies close N of Edgeoya

and is separated from it by Freemansundet. Heleysundet,

another narrow passage, leads between Barentsoya and the

mainland to the N. The island is about 25 miles in extent and

has glaciers which empty into the sea from each of its four

sides.

Off-lying Islands

11.51 Hopen (76°35'N., 25°10'E.), an isolated island, is

narrow and 17 miles long in a NNE-SSW direction; it lies

about 54 miles SE of Negerpynten, the S extremity of Edgeoya. The island has been described as a tableland, the sides of

which are cut up with gullies and which attain an elevation of

Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

Negerpynten from SE
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 245

Pub. 182

365m at Kapp Thor, the S point. Landing is at all times difficult

because of the steep coasts and the shallow water close-in.

There is usually a heavy swell on all sides of the island.

11.51 Hopen Radio station is located 5 miles NNE of Kapp Thor.

11.51 In an average year, Hopen is clear of ice from July to

October. In a severe season, the island may be ice-free only

from mid-August to mid-September. The current sets SW past

Hopen at about 2 knots.

11.51 Anchorage.—The island has no sheltered bays which can

serve as harbors. It is so shallow inshore around the entire

island, thateven at 200m from the shore, very little sea is

required to form breakers, thus making landing difficult for a

boat. On the E side of the island, in places, the shallow area can

extend up to 0.7 mile or more out from land.

11.51 Today, both sides of the island are used as anchorages to

avoid storms, or for reloading from fishing vessels to mother

ships of up to 20,000 grt.

11.51 For those wishing to land, a boat channel should be found

into the shore where it appears to be deepest and calmest without breakers over a long period. From experience, it appears to

be best to go ashore is on the E side of the island, when vessels

go in carefully and anchor, in 10 to 15m.

11.51 Vessels have anchored, in a depth of 11m, at a distance of 0.5

mile from land off the radio station.

11.52 Kong Karls Land (78°50'N., 28°10'E.) consists of a

group of three main islands, Svenskoya, Kongsoya, and

Abeloya, together with a number of islets. Olgastretet, a

channel about 50 miles in width, separates the group from

Edgeoya and Barentsoya. Erik Eriksenstretet, a channel entered from the NE, is 35 miles wide and separates the group

from Nordaustlandet.

11.52 Svenskoya, the W island of Kong Karls Land, lies 50 miles

ENE of Barentsoya. In August and September, the coast may,

for the most part, be approached by most vessels through

navigable ice. Kapp Hammerfest forms the S extremity of the

island and is a tapering basalt ridge. The island is moderately

free from snow, but N of Kukenthafjaellet, between it and the

ridge, there exist a permanent cap of snow and ice. Patches of

snow cling constantly to the upper edges of the plateau and the

higher slopes of the hills. The lowlands of the island consist

mainly of sand and clay washed down by melting snow.

11.52 A high flat-topped cliff extends NE from Kapp Hammerfest

and is connected by a yellow sandy beach to Kapp Weissenfels, the E extremity of Svenskoya. This point, projecting about

1 mile ENE, consists of a mass of columnar basalt, with sand

dunes in its vicinity. Anchorage has been obtained in a bight on

the S side of Kapp Weissenfels, in a depth of 14m, poor holding ground, with some shelter from N winds.

11.53 Kongsoya (78°54'N., 28°13'E.), about 21 miles long

in an E-W direction, is the middle island of Kong Karls Land.

The island is separated from Svenskoya by Rivalensundet. The

island is comparatively narrow, its greatest width being about 5

miles, and consists of three main parts. The three parts are the

W plateau, the high land near the E end, and the low land

connecting the two. From the offing SE, it appears as three

separate islands; at a greater distance it resembles a group of

four islands, because of the dip in the W plateau.

11.53 Kapp Altmann is the extremity of a narrow tongue of land

which projects about 2 miles S from the S coast of Kongsoya,

in a position about 3 miles E of Kapp Andreassen, the W

extremity of the island. A dangerous reef extends about 1 mile

S from the cape; about 1 mile farther in the same direction is a

rock, awash. A shoal, with a depth of 2.7m, has been reported

about 5 miles SE of the cape. It has been reported that anchorage may be obtained close inshore on the E side of Kapp

Altmann, in a depth of 12m, fine sand. 

11.53 Some shelter from N and W winds was obtained, but the

holding ground is poor. At times, squalls from the N swept

down from the hills with great violence. 

11.54 Antarcticbukta (78°49'N., 28°03'E.) lies between

Kapp Altmann and Kapp Andreassen, 4 miles W. Anchorage is

obtainable here, in a depth of 11m, sand, but holding ground is

poor. Anchorage has been reported in Andreebukta, the bight

between Tommerneset and Nordaustpynten. The depth close

inshore in the SW part of the bight is 61m, clay.

11.54 Abeloya (79°00'N., 30°10'E.) is the smallest and farthest E

island of the Kong Karls Land group. The island is reported to

be barren and of basaltic formation and is located 6 miles ENE

of Kongsoya. The island is about 3 miles long by 2.5 miles

wide.

11.55 Kvitoya (80°09'N., 32°38'E.) is about 23 miles long

in an E-W direction. The island is located at the E extremity of

Nordaustlandet; about 45 miles E of Kapp Laura. Kvitoya is

almost completely covered by ice; the only ice-free areas are

Andreeneset, its SW point, and Kraemerpynten, near the NE

end of the island.

11.55 The ice cap covering the island is divided into three domes

which reflect the topography of the underlying rocks. The

island has been described as being glittering white from its

summit down to the water’s edge, from which it rises in a steep

icy wall.

11.55 A rock, awash, lies 6 miles SSE of Andreeneset. Another

rock, awash, lies 1.5 miles WSW of Andreeneset. A shoal spit

extends 2 miles S from a point on the S coast, 9 miles E of

Andreeneset.
Pub. 182

Glossaries 247

Glossaries

Norwegian

NORWEGIAN English

A

a......................................................................rivulet, stream

aker................................................................................ field

aksel, aksla............................shoulder of a hill or mountain

alltid synlig ....................................................... above water

ankerplass............................................................. anchorage

as ........................................................................... hill, ridge

atte.................................................................................eight

aust................................................................................. east

austre......................................................................... eastern

avfallsplass........................................................spoil ground

avlopsledning .......................................... outfall pipe, sewer

B

babord ........................................................ port (side, hand)

bae i vannflaten.............................rock, awash at low water

bae................................................rock (usually submerged)

bak............................................................................... astern

bake........................................................................... beacon

bakke............................................................................... hill

ballast plass.......................................................spoil ground

banke.............................................................................bank

basseng......................................................................... basin

bathavn............................................................... boat harbor

beholderskap ............................................................pedestal

bekk................................................................... stream beck

berg, bierg, bjerg ................................................. mount, hill

betong...................................................................... concrete

bla...................................................................................blue

bo .................................................................................. farm

boe................................................rock (usually submerged)

borg ..............................................................castle, mansion

botn ............................................................... head (of fjord)

boye...............................................................................buoy

boyestake .............................................................. spar buoy

brat ..................................... rock, (usually a group of rocks)

bratt ........................................................steep, cliffy, abrupt

bre ..............................................................................glacier

bred ...............................................................................wide

brott........................................rock (usually group of rocks)

bru .............................................................................. bridge

brudd .......................................................................... quarry

brygga, brygge ............................................................ wharf

bukt, bukta.............................................................bay, bight

bunn .......................................................................... bottom

bunnkjetting ............................................. bottom chain, trot

by .....................................................................town, village

bygd ...............................................................district, parish

bygning ..................................... framework structure, pylon

D

dag...................................................................................day

dal................................................................................valley

dalfore ..........................................................extended valley

djup ............................................................................... deep

dor, dora ................................................. door, gate, passage

drikkevand...........................................................fresh water

dumpefelt................................................... dumping ground

dyb, dyp ........................................................................ deep

dybde ...........................................................................depth

dykdalb .....................................................................dolphin

E

ebbe.......................................................................... ebb tide

egg ............................... edge (of a bank or mountain range)

eid ............................................................................ isthmus

elv, elva......................................................................... river

elvmunning ........................................................ river mouth

en .................................................................................... one

etterretninger for sjofarende .................. notices to mariners

F

fabrikk........................................................................factory

fall......................................................fall (of a rock of cliff)

famn...........................................................................fathom

farled, farlei ............................................... channel, fairway

fartoy, fartyg ............................................................... vessel

farvann .................................................. waters, sea, fairway

fastland...................................................................mainland

favn ............................................................................fathom

fem..................................................................................five

ferje............................................................................... ferry

festning ............................................................. fort, fortress

fire.................................................................................. four

fiskevaer......................................................... fishing station

fjaere ........................................................................ ebb tide

fjell.......................................... hill, mountain, rocky bottom

fjellplata.................................................................... plateau

fjellrygg ........................................................mountain ridge

fjellvegg .........................................................mountain wall

fjord .......................................................firth, arm of the sea

flae, flak, flat...................................................... flat or bank

flesa.........................................rock (generally above-water)

flo.......................................................................... flood tide

flu, flua .....................................................rock (submerged)

flyplasser.................................................................... airport

flytedokk..........................................................floating dock

foran, forud ..................................................................ahead

forberg ...............................................................promontory

forbudt ................................................................. prohibited

forbudt sjoomrade.................................... restricted sea area

fortoyningsboye ............................................. mooring buoy

foss........................................................... cascade, waterfall

fot.......................................................................... foot, base

fylke..........................................................................country

fyr ..................................................................................light

fyrhus, fyrtarn ...................................lighthouse, light-tower

fyrlampe....................................................light (unwatched)

G

gamle, gammel.................................................................old

gap, gat................................................mouth, channel, deep

gard ....................................................... farm, village, estate

gjennom ................................................................... through

godt synlig ........................................................ conspicuous

NORWEGIAN English
Pub. 182 

248 Glossaries

gra ..................................................................................gray

grend ..........................................................................hamlet

grense...........................................................limit, boundary

gron, gront, grun ..........................................................green

grube ................................................................ mine, quarry

grunn ..............................................................shoal, shallow

gul ..............................................................................yellow

H

hake............................................... strip or hook of low lang

hals..................................................................isthmus, neck

halvoy.................................................................... peninsula

hamn................................................................harbor, haven

haug............................................................................hillock

haus ........................................................................ headland

hav....................................................................................sea

havn.................................................................harbor, haven

havnedistrikt...................................... (civil) harbour district

havnekontor...................................................... harbor office

hei, heia..........................................hill or height, hummock

heim, hejm ...........................................................homestead

heller ................................................................... rocky cave

hode............................................................................... head

hol ......................................................................... deep hole

hole............................................................................. cavern

holm ...............................................................................islet

hop .......................................................................small cove

horn ........................................................................hill, peak

hovde, hoved ................................................................. head

hoy, hogd........................................hill or height, hummock

hoyere......................................................................... higher

hoyvann................................................................high water

huk ................................................ strip or hook of low land

hule............................................................................. cavern

hump .....................................................................hummock

hundre ......................................................................hundred

hus............................................................................... house

hvit, hvitt......................................................................white

I

i land .......................................................................... ashore

indre, inre, inste ........................................................... inner

innlop, innseiling .................................................... entrance

innsjo..............................................................................lake

is.......................................................................................ice

isbre.............................................................glacier, ice-field

J

jern ................................................................................. iron

jernbane.....................................................................railway

jokel ............................................................glacier, ice-field

jord.......................................................................earth, land

K

kabel............................................................submarine cable

kai..................................................................................quay

kalv..................... calf (small rock or islet near a larger one)

kanal...............................................................canal, channel

kapell.......................................................................... chapel

kapp............................................................................... cape

kil ........................................................................creek, inlet

kirke ...........................................................................church

NORWEGIAN English

kjegle, kjegleformede ......................................cone; conical

klett .......................................................................bluff, cliff

klippe .............................................................. reef, pinnacle

kloakkledning ......................................... outfall pipe, sewer

klokkeboye.............................................................bell-buoy

klova, kloft.....................................................................cleft

klubb ...................................................................... headland

klump..........................................................................clump

knaus.....................................................................crag, rock

knop ...............................................................................knot

koll....................................................knoll, rounded summit

kort................................................................................short

kraftstasjon ..................................................... power station

kran .............................................................................. crane

kreppa, kreppen ....................................................... narrows

krigshavn ..........................................................naval harbor

kulp ....................................................................... deep hole

kyst................................................................................coast

L

ladested ........................................................... loading place

lagerhus................................................................warehouse

land ..................................................................... land, shore

lang ................................................................................long

langgrunn.... shelving bottom, either froa shoal or the shore, 

which may be shallow water to be avoided or 

an anchorage to be used

lav, lave, lavt ...................................................................low

lavvann.................................................................. low water

led, leia ...................................................channel, lead track

leir (-bunn).....................................................clay (-bottom)

li..................................................................... mountain side

lille, lite, litla, litle .........................................................little

livbat .........................................................................lifeboat

lodret.........................................................................vertical

lop ..............................................................channel, passage

los ..................................................................................pilot

loskontor ............................................................. pilot office

lufspann, luftspenn .......................................overhead cable

lykt.................................................................................light

lysboye................................................................. light-buoy

M

mellom.....................................................................between

merke ............................................................................mark

midt............................................................................middle

mindre....................................................................... smaller

molle .............................................................................. mill

molo.......................................................... mole, breakwater

mork..................................................... obscured (of a light)

munn, munning...........................................................mouth

mur, murverk ............................................. brick, brickwork

myr.............................................................................. marsh

N

nakke............................................................................. neck

natt ................................................................................night

naust..............................................................hut, fishing hut

nearing ................................... high entrance point of a fjord

mederst .................................................................... beneath

nedre ............................................................................lower

NORWEGIAN English
Pub. 182

Glossaries 249 

nes ..................................................................................ness

ni ....................................................................................nine

nip ....................................................................... neap (tide)

nodhavn..........................................distress or refuge harbor

nord .............................................................................. north

nordenom ............................................................. northward

nordre...................................................................... northern

norske los, den .................. norway pilot (sailing directions)

nut ..........................................................mountain top, peak

ny; nytt ........................................................................... new

O

o .................................................................................. island

odde.............................................................................. point

olje ............................................................................ fuel oil

opphalings rampe........................................... slipway, ramp

oppmudret ................................................................dredged

orgelboye..........................................................whistle-buoy

orlogshavn.............................................. (naval) harbor area

os..................... river mouth, basin or area of water between 

islands or at fjord junctions

ovenfor ............................................................above, higher

overettlinjen .......................................................leading-line

oversvommet....................................................... submerged

ost................................................................................... east

ostenom.................................................................. eastward

ostre........................................................................... eastern

ovyvelsefelt, ovelsesomrade ..........exercise or practice area

overst........................................................................... above

ovre ..............................................................................upper

oy, oya......................................................................... island

oygard, oygruppe ...............................................archipelago

oyr, oyra, ora ................................................delta, sandbank

P

pa..................................................................................at, on

pa grunn ...................................................................aground

pakhus ................................................................. storehouse

peiling ...................................................................... bearing

pele................................................................................ post

pelebukk.................................................................. dolphin

peleverk.......................................................... piling, groyne

pir.................................................................................. pier

platta......................................................................... plateau

poll .............................................................cove, inlet, basin

pynt ............................................................................. point

R

rabbe..................................................... rocky or stony ridge

radiofyr............................................................. radiobeacon

ras............................................................................ landslip

rasa............................race (used in conjunction with names

of channels, through which, or of rocks, 

past which, the streams run with strength)

red ........................................................................ roadstead

redning ...................................................................... rescue

renna, renne............................................................. channel

rev ................................................................................. reef

rod, rodt............................................................................red

rorledning................................................................ pipeline

ros, roys........................................ stone heap, rocky ground

NORWEGIAN English

rund............................................................................. round

rygg..................................................................... back, ridge

S

sadel........................................................................... saddle

sagbruk ................................................................... sawmill

sand (-bunn).................................................. sand (-bottom)

sata, sate..................................................... haycock, hillock

seater....................................................................... hill farm

seks ................................................................................. six

singel (-bunn)............................................shingle (-bottom)

sjo ................................................................................... sea

sjoflyhavn ....................................................seaplane harbor

sjohus.................................................................. warehouse

sjomerke..................................................... beacon, seamark

sju ............................................................................... seven

skalle......................................................................head, hill

skar, skar...........................crevice, rocky outcrop, gap, glen

skip ............................................................................... ship

skipsverft ............................................................... shipyard

skjaer, skjer................................... above-water rock, skerry

skjaergard.............................................archipelago, skerries

skjell (-bunn).................................................shell (-bottom)

skog...................................................................wood, forest

skolt ............................................. headland; head (of shoal)

skorstein................................................................. chimney

skra ........................................................................ diagonal

skvalpeskjaer .....................................................rock, awash

slaggrunn ........................................................see langgrunn

slam (-bunn).................................................. mud (-bottom)

slepebat ........................................................................... tug

slette.......................................................................flat, plain

slik ............................................................................... ooze

slipp ..................................................................... patent slip

slott ............................................................................. castle

slua................................................................................ rock

slus, sluse............................................................lock, sluice

sma.............................................................................. small

smal........................................................................... narrow

sole (-bunn)................................................... mud (-bottom)

sondre .................................................................... southern

sonnenom............................................................ southward

sore ............................................................................. south

sorte ............................................................................ black

soyle............................................................................ pillar

spiss ......................................................................point, spit

stad........................................................................ city, town

stake............................................................. pole, spar buoy

stakk.................................................................... heap, stack

stang...............................................................perch, column

stativ.................................................................pile structure

staur ................................................................ pinnacle rock

stein, sten ............................................................ rock, stone

sto .......................................................... hard, landing place

stolpe............................................................................. post

stor, stora, store............................................................ large

storre ........................................................................... larger

styrbord................................................................. starboard

strand ................................................................beach, shore

NORWEGIAN English
Pub. 182 

250 Glossaries

straum, strom .................current, tidal stream; also used for 

channel with strong streams

stromsjo.................................................................. overfalls

sund...............................................................channel, sound

sva ....................................................................ridge of rock

svart............................................................................. black

syd............................................................................... south

sykchus.................................................................... hospital

T

tang.....................................................................tongue, spit

tare ......... submerged rock (usually large and flat); seaweed

takesignal ..............................................................fog signal

tarn .............................................................................. tower

ti ...................................................................................... ten

tind .................................................................. summit, peak

to .................................................................................... two

toll-bod, -bu-stasjon, -kammer, -sted..............custom house 

office, etc.

tonne..........................................................buoy, cask, barrel

topp .......................................................................... summit

torr.................................................................................. dry

torrdokk...................................................................dry dock

torrfall, torrflu ...............................drying bank, drying rock

trafikkregulertomrade ...................traffic separation scheme

trang, trange ............................................................. narrow

tre ................................................................................. three

tre ............................................................................ wooden

tue, tuva.............................................hillrock, knoll, mound

tung ................................................................tongue of land

tusen...................................................................... thousand

tvers........................................................................... abeam

NORWEGIAN English

tydelig .............................................................. conspicuous

U

uklar.............................................................................. foul

undervanns......................................................... submerged

ur............................................. rock-strewn slope; rock-falls

utlop.................................................................mouth, outlet

utstikker ............................................... projecting pier, jetty

V

vaer .........................................place, village; fishing station

vag ..................................................... bay, cove, creek, inlet

vaker ......................................................beacon; buoy; vane

val ..................................................coast, very shallow cove

vandret ................................................................. horizontal

vann, vatn.............................................................water, lake

vannfall .................................................... cascade, waterfall

varde ........................................................ beacon-tower, hill

vassdrag .................................................. river, water-course

vat .................................................................................. wet

vegg ...................................................................... wall, cliff

vei .................................................................. road (on land)

verft........................................................ dockyard, shipyard

vest................................................................................ west

vestenom............................................................... westward

vestre....................................................................... western

vik, vika, viki..................................... bay, cove, creek, inlet

vindmolle.............................................................. windmill

vogn ........................................................................ slipway

voll............................mound; dike; grassy plain; cove, inlet

vrak ............................................................................ wreck

Y

ytre, ytste, yttre ............................................................ outer

NORWEGIAN English
251

 Pub. 182

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

A 67 53 N 12 59 E 8.4

AADNESET 60 38 N 4 50 E 4.15

ABELOYA 79 00 N 30 10 E 11.54

ABELVAER LIGHT 64 43 N 11 10 E 7.17

ADLANDSFJORDEN 60 15 N 5 38 E 3.58

ADVENTFJORDEN 78 15 N 15 37 E 11.17

AERSTEINEN LIGHT 62 48 N 6 36 E 6.15

AGDENESET 63 39 N 9 46 E 6.64

AGNHOLMEN 58 16 N 6 50 E 1.25

AGOTNES 60 24 N 5 01 E 4.27

AKREHAMN 59 16 N 5 11 E 3.6

AKSELSUNDET 77 45 N 14 36 E 11.11

AKSNESET 62 57 N 8 20 E 6.45

ALBERTINIBUKTA 80 16 N 25 00 E 11.42

ALDEN 61 19 N 4 48 E 5.17

ALESUND 62 28 N 6 10 E 5.30

ALESUND HAVN 62 28 N 6 09 E 5.60

ALESUNDAKSLA 62 28 N 6 11 E 6.4

ALFARTANGEN 63 19 N 8 34 E 6.60

ALLMENNINGSFLUENE 61 54 N 5 16 E 5.46

ALMENINGSKOLLEN 64 11 N 10 01 E 6.56

ALNES LIGHT 62 29 N 5 58 E 6.4

ALSTADOYA 67 54 N 15 11 E 8.18

ALTA 69 58 N 23 15 E 9.11

ALTAFJORDEN 70 05 N 23 06 E 9.11

ALTFJORDEN 65 56 N 12 19 E 7.30

ALVERSTRAUMEN 60 34 N 5 14 E 4.30

ALVNESTANGEN LIGHT 67 16 N 15 02 E 7.59

ALVOYVAG 60 21 N 5 11 E 4.19

ALWYN NORTH OIL FIELD 60 48 N 1 44 E 5.2

AMBORNES LIGHT 63 34 N 10 26 E 6.70

AMSTERDAMOYA 79 46 N 10 49 E 11.31

ANASIRA 58 17 N 6 26 E 1.33

ANDA 61 51 N 6 05 E 5.47

ANDA 69 04 N 15 11 E 8.43

ANDALSNES 62 34 N 7 41 E 6.18

ANDENES 69 20 N 16 08 E 8.44

ANDERSBAKKEN 66 16 N 12 18 E 7.46

ANDERSBOSKALLEN 68 46 N 13 33 E 8.1

ANDFJORDEN 69 00 N 16 03 E 8.45

ANDOYA 69 05 N 15 45 E 8.41

ANGERSHOLMEN LIGHT 66 46 N 13 16 E 7.53

ANGVIK 62 53 N 8 06 E 6.42

ANNOYSKJERET LIGHT 61 36 N 4 56 E 5.15

ANSNESET 64 28 N 11 24 E 7.11

ANTARCTICBUKTA 78 49 N 28 03 E 11.54

ARALDEN 61 41 N 4 46 E 5.21

ARAMSUND LIGHT 62 12 N 5 29 E 5.50

ARASVIKFJORDEN 63 09 N 8 25 E 6.48

ARDAL 61 14 N 7 43 E 5.33

AREBROTSNESET LIGHT 61 38 N 5 00 E 5.22

ARHOLMEN 63 06 N 7 53 E 6.35

ARNESKLUBBEN LIGHT 62 40 N 6 41 E 6.16

ARNOYA 68 46 N 16 37 E 8.33

ARNOYFJORDEN 64 46 N 11 15 E 7.19

AROYA 63 11 N 8 36 E 6.48

ARSFLESA 65 01 N 10 41 E 7.26

ARSGRUNN 59 08 N 5 26 E 2.8

ARSUNDBAEN 63 07 N 8 02 E 6.44

ARSUNDOYA 63 06 N 7 59 E 6.39

ARVIKSUNDET 59 16 N 5 33 E 2.21

ASBRAKEN 66 30 N 12 32 E 7.60

ASKROVA LIGHT 61 31 N 5 00 E 5.40

ASNESET 61 56 N 5 28 E 5.46

ASPA 62 28 N 6 09 E 5.60

ASPENESET 68 25 N 15 47 E 8.11

ASTAFJORDEN 68 44 N 17 00 E 8.48

ASVAER 66 14 N 12 12 E 7.46

AUSTBAEN 59 08 N 5 17 E 2.8

AUSTDJUPET 59 16 N 5 24 E 2.20

AUSTEROY 59 17 N 5 27 E 2.20

AUSTERVAG, 74 30 N 19 12 E 11.3

AUSTKLAKKANE 63 23 N 8 24 E 6.62

AUSTNESFJORDEN 68 17 N 14 43 E 8.10

AUSTRE FUGLOYGRUNNEN 63 06 N 7 47 E 6.34

AUSTRE REIFLUA 63 27 N 8 13 E 6.53

AUSTRE VAGHOLMFLUA 59 13 N 5 31 E 2.21

AUVAER 69 52 N 18 00 E 8.55

AVEROYA 63 00 N 7 30 E 6.37

B

BAANE 61 29 N 4 59 E 5.39

BAEFLUA 63 14 N 7 52 E 6.59

BALLANGEN 68 22 N 16 55 E 8.26

BALLSFJORDEN 69 32 N 18 55 E 8.59

BALLSTAD 68 04 N 13 42 E 8.5

BANGSUND LIGHT 64 25 N 11 21 E 7.13

BARENTSBURG 78 04 N 14 14 E 11.15

BARENTSOYA 78 26 N 21 20 E 11.50

BARKHAMODDEN 78 14 N 20 41 E 11.48

BAROYA 68 21 N 16 07 E 8.24

BASUNDSKJERA 61 56 N 5 00 E 5.20

BATALDFLUENE 61 54 N 4 48 E 5.19

BATNFJORDEN 62 56 N 7 45 E 6.41

BATSFJORDEN 70 41 N 29 51 E 9.24

BEISFJORDEN 68 24 N 17 30 E 8.29

BELLSUND 77 39 N 14 00 E 11.10

BEREFJORDEN 58 16 N 6 28 E 1.33

BERG 65 22 N 12 12 E 7.33

BERGEN 60 24 N 5 19 E 4.31

BERGSHEIA 69 03 N 17 24 E 8.51

BERGSNESET 68 07 N 13 04 E 8.35

BERGSOYA 62 20 N 6 38 E 5.27

BERGSOYHOLMEN 62 58 N 7 53 E 6.41

BERLEVAG 70 52 N 29 06 E 9.23

BERYL OIL FIELD 59 33 N 1 32 E 3.3

BESSFJORDNESET 68 12 N 16 07 E 8.21

BEVERLYSUNDET 80 29 N 19 52 E 11.39

BIGGANES 70 07 N 28 36 E 9.31

BILLEFJORDEN 78 34 N 16 28 E 11.20

BISPEFLUA 69 01 N 17 14 E 8.52

BJERKA 69 24 N 16 08 E 8.43

BJOGNA 63 03 N 7 17 E 6.25

BJORNAFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 25 E 3.53
252 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

BJORNHOLMEN 65 37 N 12 18 E 7.37

BJORNOY LIGHT 67 25 N 14 26 E 8.12

BJORNOYA 74 27 N 19 04 E 11.2

BJORNOYNI 60 29 N 4 56 E 4.11

BJORNSUND 62 54 N 6 50 E 6.19

BJORNSUND LIGHT 62 54 N 6 49 E 6.22

BJOROYVAER 64 36 N 10 48 E 7.8

BJUGNSKJAER LIGHT 63 46 N 9 33 E 7.5

BLEIK 69 16 N 15 58 E 8.44

BLEIKJE 59 15 N 5 27 E 2.19

BLOMSTRANDHAMNA 78 59 N 12 06 E 11.26

BODO 67 17 N 14 23 E 7.65

BOFJORDEN 61 07 N 5 20 E 5.32

BOGAVIK 60 16 N 5 35 E 3.59

BOGVIKA 68 14 N 16 05 E 8.21

BOKFJORDEN 69 50 N 30 07 E 9.34

BOKFJORDEN LIGHT 69 53 N 30 11 E 9.34

BOKNAFLAEET 59 16 N 5 26 E 2.20

BOLGSVAET 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.33

BOLGVAGEN 63 05 N 7 47 E 6.34

BOLSOYGALTEN 67 57 N 15 24 E 8.20

BOMLAFJORDEN 59 34 N 5 14 E 3.11

BOMLO 59 40 N 5 12 E 3.13

BONETSKJERET 66 29 N 12 58 E 7.50

BOROYA 64 16 N 10 17 E 7.3

BOROYA 68 34 N 14 57 E 8.42

BOROYFJORDEN 59 40 N 5 17 E 3.20

BOVIKI 59 22 N 5 18 E 3.31

BRANDAL 62 24 N 6 01 E 5.53

BRANDALPYNTEN 78 57 N 11 53 E 11.25

BRANDSHOLMEN 68 05 N 13 39 E 8.6

BRASETHAMMEREN 63 50 N 11 04 E 6.73

BRATTHOLMEN 60 21 N 5 10 E 4.20

BREIDLIA 58 13 N 6 34 E 1.31

BREIDVIK 59 13 N 6 03 E 2.25

BREIFIND 66 15 N 12 48 E 7.46

BREIGTAREN 65 45 N 12 21 E 7.39

BREILIEN 58 13 N 6 34 E 1.31

BREISUNDET 62 27 N 5 59 E 5.49

BREISUNDET 62 27 N 6 00 E 5.29

BREISUNDET 67 54 N 14 43 E 8.17

BREIVIK 70 35 N 22 08 E 9.13

BREKKE 59 17 N 5 16 E 3.7

BREKNEHOLME 58 06 N 6 35 E 1.22

BREKNEHOLMEN LIGHT 58 05 N 6 36 E 1.24

BREMNESET 68 17 N 16 09 E 8.21

BREMNESSKJAER 68 17 N 16 08 E 8.21

BREMSNESFJORDEN 63 06 N 7 41 E 6.31

BRENT OIL FIELD 61 05 N 1 43 E 5.2

BRETTESNES 68 14 N 14 51 E 8.9

BRIELLETARNET 70 58 N 8 42 W 10.8

BROCHOYA 80 27 N 26 03 E 11.42

BRONNOYSUND 65 28 N 12 12 E 7.34

BRONNOYSUNDET 65 27 N 12 10 E 7.34

BROSVIKSATA 61 02 N 5 10 E 5.9

BRUKJEOY 59 02 N 5 40 E 2.9

BRUNESET 66 08 N 12 50 E 7.47

BRUNFLESAN LIGHT 65 03 N 11 17 E 7.28

BRUNTVEIT 60 02 N 5 26 E 3.54

BRUSEN 63 00 N 7 52 E 6.40

BUD 62 54 N 6 55 E 6.20

BUEFJORDEN 61 15 N 4 40 E 5.11

BUGOYFJORDEN 69 56 N 29 36 E 9.32

BUHOLMEN 64 25 N 10 26 E 7.7

BUHOLMEN LIGHT 62 10 N 5 05 E 5.25

BUHOLMRASA LIGHT 64 24 N 10 27 E 7.4

BUKKEGRUNNANE 58 04 N 6 51 E 1.15,

1.16

BUKKETJUVANE 62 11 N 5 04 E 5.25

BUNESET 67 13 N 14 42 E 7.59

BUSHOLMEN 68 07 N 13 14 E 8.36

BUSSESUNDET 70 22 N 31 02 E 9.27

BUVIKA 63 18 N 10 11 E 6.66

BYGDEN 68 50 N 17 08 E 8.49

C

COLESBUKTA 78 08 N 14 57 E 11.16

CRAWFORD OIL FIELD 59 07 N 1 30 E 2.1

D

DANSKOYA 79 41 N 10 55 E 11.30

DICKSONFJORDEN 78 42 N 15 20 E 11.21

DIGERFLESA LIGHT 66 58 N 13 38 E 7.55

DIGERMULEN 64 47 N 11 43 E 7.17

DINGENES 61 02 N 5 02 E 5.10

DJONNO 60 28 N 6 45 E 3.47

DJUPTARSKJERET 64 58 N 11 22 E 7.28

DOLMSUND LIGHT 65 00 N 11 39 E 7.31

DOLMSUNDET 65 00 N 11 37 E 7.31

DONNA 66 06 N 12 33 E 7.45

DRAG 68 03 N 16 05 E 8.21

DRAGJASKJAERFLU LIGHT 61 39 N 4 59 E 5.22

DRIVSUND 59 10 N 5 25 E 2.8

DRONENHOLMEN LIGHT 62 38 N 6 31 E 6.16

DUNOYANE 77 04 N 15 00 E 11.9

DUSAVIK 59 00 N 5 40 E 2.10

DUVEFJORDEN 80 17 N 23 30 E 11.41

DYRNESET 59 37 N 5 10 E 3.13

DYROY 58 28 N 5 52 E 1.47

DYROY 59 45 N 5 11 E 3.16

DYSJALANDSVAG 59 05 N 5 40 E 2.9

E

EBELTOFHAMNA 79 09 N 11 39 E 11.28

EDGEOYA 77 45 N 22 30 E 11.49

EGDEHOLMEN 58 17 N 6 23 E 1.34

EGERSUND 58 27 N 6 00 E 1.44

EGGLOYA 68 11 N 15 38 E 8.20

EGGOYA 70 58 N 8 24 W 10.4

EGGUM 68 19 N 13 41 E 8.37

EIDEMBUKTA 78 21 N 12 45 E 11.23

EIDFJORD 60 28 N 7 04 E 3.48

EIDFJORDEN 60 25 N 6 43 E 3.47

EIDSFJORDEN 60 43 N 5 47 E 4.33

EIDSFJORDEN 68 40 N 14 53 E 8.42

EIGEROY 58 27 N 5 58 E 1.41

EIGEROY LIGHT 58 26 N 5 52 E 1.46

EINARSNESET 58 03 N 6 47 E 1.12

EITLANDSKJAERA 58 03 N 6 59 E 1.9

EKREMSHOLMANE 63 00 N 8 02 E 6.41

ELDOYANE 59 45 N 5 30 E 3.18

ELTRANESET 62 26 N 6 03 E 5.53

ENGELVAER 67 53 N 14 34 E 8.3

ENGENES 68 56 N 17 07 E 8.51

ENGESUNDSLEID 59 52 N 5 17 E 3.20

ERKNA LIGHT 62 33 N 5 56 E 6.6

ERSFJORDEN 59 19 N 6 08 E 2.36

ERVIKEN 65 48 N 12 28 E 7.40

ESPE 60 12 N 6 36 E 3.51

ESPENES LIGHT 63 21 N 8 43 E 6.61

ESPEVAER 59 35 N 5 09 E 3.13

F

FAIR HAVEN, 79 49 N 11 29 E 11.34

FALDET 68 12 N 13 15 E 8.37

FALKEIDFLAEET 59 14 N 5 31 E 2.32

FALSKENESET 64 50 N 11 39 E 7.18

FAUSKANE 62 34 N 5 45 E 6.5

FAUSKE 67 16 N 15 24 E 7.59

FEDJE 60 46 N 4 43 E 5.3

FEDJEFJORDEN 60 45 N 4 47 E 4.23

FEDJEOSEN 60 44 N 4 44 E 4.22

FEISTEIN 58 50 N 5 30 E 2.3

FEOY 59 23 N 5 10 E 3.8

FERKINGSTADOYANE 59 14 N 5 04 E 3.4

FERKINGSTADVAG 59 14 N 5 11 E 3.5

FIBORGTANGEN 63 43 N 11 09 E 6.71

FINKONNA 66 07 N 12 44 E 7.47

FINN MALMGRENFJORDEN 80 17 N 24 31 E 11.42

FINNKONA 66 07 N 12 44 E 7.47

FINNOYFJORDEN 59 10 N 5 54 E 2.25

FINNSNES 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.52

FINNSNESRENNA 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.53

FINNSNESSKJAER 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.53

FINNVAER LIGHT 64 04 N 9 07 E 6.52

FINSKJERSLUA 64 46 N 11 00 E 7.20
Index—Gazetteer 253

 Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

FISKANESET 58 54 N 5 45 E 2.13

FISKHOLMEN 61 46 N 4 56 E 5.22

FISTERFJORDEN 59 09 N 6 00 E 2.26

FJELLSPOLLEN 60 18 N 5 03 E 4.8

FJORDAFLU 60 01 N 5 07 E 3.24

FJORDGRUNNSKJERET 63 48 N 11 19 E 6.72

FLAGSUNDET 67 55 N 15 00 E 8.18

FLAMA 58 04 N 6 50 E 1.18

FLATEGRUNNANE 61 35 N 4 50 E 5.15

FLATFLESA LIGHT 62 50 N 6 41 E 6.15

FLATHOLME 58 55 N 5 34 E 2.2

FLATHOLMEN 59 56 N 5 51 E 3.37

FLATOY 67 55 N 14 46 E 8.3

FLATOYFLU 61 19 N 5 03 E 5.37

FLATSTADBUKTA 58 05 N 7 07 E 1.6

FLAVAER LIGHT 62 19 N 5 35 E 5.58

FLEINVAER 67 10 N 13 45 E 7.57

FLEKKEFJORDEN 58 18 N 6 40 E 1.29

FLESA 62 52 N 8 35 E 6.46

FLESA LIGHT 63 39 N 9 14 E 6.58

FLESENE 62 17 N 5 27 E 5.59

FLESSA 64 06 N 9 54 E 6.56

FLOHOLMAN 66 10 N 11 42 E 7.45

FLOHOLMAN 67 01 N 13 42 E 7.56

FLORO 61 36 N 5 02 E 5.16

FLORO LIGHT 61 36 N 5 01 E 5.42

FLOTTRA 64 40 N 11 04 E 7.17

FLOVIKA 68 15 N 14 57 E 8.10

FLUSTEIN 59 08 N 5 39 E 2.24

FOGNAFJORDEN 59 07 N 5 56 E 2.26

FOLDOY 59 20 N 5 58 E 2.23

FOLLAFOSS 63 59 N 11 07 E 6.74

FOLVAGFLUENE 61 25 N 4 58 E 5.40

FORDESFJORDEN 59 20 N 5 23 E 2.31

FORDESPOLLEN 59 39 N 5 25 E 3.19

FORHJELMO 60 40 N 4 48 E 4.15

FORLANDSUNDET 78 30 N 12 40 E 11.23

FOROYA 68 01 N 15 07 E 8.19

FOROYA 68 54 N 17 41 E 8.50

FOSNAHOLMEN 59 18 N 5 23 E 2.31

FOSSE 60 16 N 6 02 E 3.42

FOYNFJORDEN 59 21 N 5 11 E 3.8

FREEMANSUNDET 78 14 N 21 37 E 11.50

FREIFJORDEN 63 03 N 7 55 E 6.38

FREIKOLLEN 63 03 N 7 46 E 6.24

FREINES LIGHT 63 01 N 7 49 E 6.38

FRIARFJORDEN 70 28 N 26 57 E 9.20

FRIDTJOVHAMNA 77 46 N 14 39 E 11.12

FRIGG GAS FIELD 59 53 N 2 04 E 3.3

FRITHJOFHAMN 77 46 N 14 39 E 11.12

FROHOLMAN 69 04 N 16 19 E 8.46

FROM ARSUNDFJORDEN 63 07 N 8 00 E 6.44

FROSKJERET 63 25 N 10 07 E 6.65

FROYFJORDEN 63 40 N 8 40 E 6.54

FRUHOLMEN LIGHT 71 06 N 24 00 E 9.13

FUGLEFJORDEN 79 47 N 11 28 E 11.34

FUGLEHUKEN 78 53 N 10 30 E 11.22

FUGLEN 63 03 N 7 09 E 6.25

FUGLESANGEN 66 59 N 13 38 E 7.56

FUGLOYA 67 04 N 13 50 E 7.44

FUGLOYA 70 16 N 20 15 E 9.4

FUGLOYA LIGHT 67 04 N 13 52 E 7.56

FUGLOYHAMN 60 10 N 5 01 E 4.5

FURUHOLMEN 58 16 N 6 28 E 1.33

FUSAFJORDEN 60 10 N 5 32 E 3.57

FYKSESUNDET 60 25 N 6 15 E 3.45

G

GALTAHOLMEN 59 09 N 5 37 E 2.24

GALTTAREN 65 09 N 10 41 E 7.25

GANDAFJORDEN 58 55 N 5 46 E 2.13

GAPAFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 55 E 2.28

GAPET 68 09 N 13 28 E 8.5

GARSUNDSFJORDEN 59 13 N 6 00 E 2.25

GARTEN 63 39 N 9 32 E 6.63

GASAHOLME 59 15 N 5 32 E 2.32

GASHOLMEN 61 55 N 5 06 E 5.45

GASVAER 66 53 N 13 29 E 7.55

GAUKVAEROY 68 37 N 14 21 E 8.41

GAUPHOLMEN 60 22 N 5 42 E 3.60

GAUSNESET 62 28 N 6 46 E 5.54

GAVLFJORDEN 68 56 N 15 22 E 8.40

GEIRANGER 62 06 N 7 12 E 5.56

GEITUNGANE 59 08 N 5 15 E 2.7

GEITUNGEN 59 08 N 5 15 E 2.21

GIBOSTAD 69 21 N 18 05 E 8.54

GILDRENESET LIGHT 62 30 N 6 11 E 6.9

GIMSOYSTRAUMEN 68 16 N 14 15 E 8.7

GIMSOYSTRAUMEN 68 20 N 14 19 E 8.37

GINEVRABOTNEN 78 37 N 20 20 E 11.48

GIPLINGOYA 63 54 N 11 01 E 6.73

GISKE 62 30 N 6 03 E 6.6

GISKESUNDET 62 30 N 6 01 E 6.4

GISLOYA 68 57 N 15 16 E 8.40

GISUNDET 69 18 N 17 58 E 8.53

GJELBUNESET 67 11 N 15 24 E 7.59

GJEMNESSUNDET 62 58 N 7 48 E 6.40

GJERDINGGALTEN 64 56 N 11 28 E 7.22

GJERMUNDSHAMN 60 04 N 5 55 E 3.40

GJESLINGENE LIGHT 64 44 N 10 51 E 7.20

GJESLINGSKJER LIGHT 63 15 N 7 48 E 6.30

GLOMFJORD 66 49 N 13 59 E 7.53

GLOMSTADHOLMEN LIGHT 63 19 N 8 38 E 6.61

GOLDNES LIGHT 62 22 N 5 34 E 5.27

GOLTASTEINEN 60 13 N 4 58 E 4.7

GOTEBERGHAMAREN 61 57 N 5 08 E 5.23

GRANDEVIKA 63 41 N 9 29 E 7.2

GRANEBAEN 61 23 N 5 01 E 5.37

GRANVINFJORDEN 60 28 N 6 37 E 3.46

GRASOYANE LIGHT 62 26 N 5 46 E 5.28

GRATANGEN 68 45 N 17 18 E 8.49

GRAVODDEN KOBBEBUKTA 74 31 N 18 54 E 11.4

GREIPSTAD 69 31 N 18 13 E 8.56

GRIMESKJARET LIGHT 60 51 N 4 45 E 5.4

GRIMO 60 23 N 6 39 E 3.51

GRIMSTADFJORDEN 60 19 N 5 14 E 4.18

GRIP LIGHT 63 14 N 7 37 E 6.24,

6.29

GRIPNESVAG 60 04 N 5 40 E 3.53

GRONESTADVAG 59 12 N 5 23 E 3.28

GRONFJORDEN 78 03 N 14 11 E 11.15

GRONHOLMEN 61 02 N 4 53 E 5.9

GRONHOLMEN LIGHT 63 41 N 9 09 E 6.58

GRONNA 67 01 N 13 10 E 7.54

GRONNA 67 01 N 13 11 E 7.45

GRONSFJORDEN 58 02 N 7 02 E 1.5

GRONSTABBEN 65 16 N 11 56 E 7.32

GROTHOLM 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.8

GROTOY 67 50 N 14 46 E 8.17

GROTOYA 70 10 N 18 52 E 9.4

GROTOYSUNDET 67 50 N 14 46 E 8.17

GROVFJORDEN 68 42 N 17 05 E 8.49

GRUNNREISASKJAER 69 11 N 18 02 E 8.52

GRUTLEFJORDEN 59 38 N 5 10 E 3.14

GRUTLEFJORDEN 59 40 N 5 10 E 3.15

GULGOFJORDEN 70 41 N 28 36 E 9.22

GULLFAKS OIL FIELD 61 12 N 2 12 E 5.2

GUNNARSKJAERSHALET 59 33 N 5 08 E 3.11

GUNNARSKJERSHOLET 59 33 N 5 08 E 3.11

GURSKOYA 62 15 N 5 40 E 5.27

GUTVIKFJELLET 65 08 N 11 56 E 7.29

GYLTEFJORDEN 64 39 N 11 22 E 7.16

H

HADSELOYA 68 33 N 14 49 E 8.38

HADYRET 58 20 N 6 10 E 1.39

HAESHOLMAN 68 14 N 13 26 E 8.37

HAJA 69 44 N 18 05 E 8.55

HALHOLMEN LIGHT 65 32 N 12 05 E 7.36

HALSEFJORDEN 63 04 N 8 12 E 6.45

HALSFJELL 64 19 N 10 37 E 7.7

HALSNE 59 11 N 5 57 E 2.25

HALTEN LIGHT 64 10 N 9 25 E 6.52

HALVMANEOYA 77 16 N 23 10 E 11.49

HAMARHAUGFLU 60 00 N 5 44 E 3.36

HAMMERFEST 70 40 N 23 40 E 9.6

HAMMERSNES 60 33 N 5 20 E 4.32

HAMNESHOLMEN 68 25 N 16 35 E 8.24

HAMNVIK 68 32 N 17 34 E 8.29

HANASKJAER 59 44 N 5 10 E 3.16
254 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

HANSNESET 61 07 N 5 06 E 5.10

HAREID 62 22 N 6 02 E 5.53

HAROYSUND 62 54 N 6 58 E 6.20

HARSTAD 68 48 N 16 33 E 8.34

HARTVIKGRUNNEN LIGHT 67 49 N 14 44 E 8.17

HASKALLEN 61 18 N 4 57 E 5.36

HASTEIN 58 57 N 5 26 E 2.2

HASTEINFJORDEN 59 00 N 5 30 E 2.2

HATBOEN 66 48 N 13 21 E 7.53

HAUGBERGET 63 26 N 10 41 E 6.68

HAUGESUND 59 25 N 5 16 E 3.10

HAUGJEGLA LIGHT 63 N 7 58 E 6.52

HAUGNESET 62 37 N 6 20 E 6.10

HAUGNESET LIGHT 62 37 N 6 20 E 6.10

HAUGSNESET 65 53 N 12 24 E 7.42

HAUKEDALSHOLMEN LIGHT 61 52 N 5 16 E 5.22

HAUKOMKIN LIGHT 63 09 N 8 16 E 6.47

HAUKOYA 68 12 N 16 24 E 8.22

HAUSEN 67 17 N 14 12 E 8.12

HAUSVIGODDEN 58 03 N 6 59 E 1.7

HAVBOEN 68 30 N 14 28 E 8.38

HAVEROY 60 24 N 4 56 E 4.8

HAVFRUSKALLEN 62 03 N 4 51 E 5.20

HAVIK 58 04 N 6 44 E 1.21

HAVSTEINEN LIGHT 62 29 N 6 04 E 5.61

HEGGNESET 62 43 N 6 56 E 6.19

HEIKENESET 69 48 N 30 44 E 9.37

HEIMDAL GAS FIELD 59 35 N 2 15 E 3.3

HEISSAFJORDEN 62 27 N 6 08 E 5.60

HEKKINGEN 69 36 N 17 50 E 8.56

HELBERGOTAREN 65 20 N 12 03 E 7.32

HELGELANDSFLESA 65 13 N 11 54 E 7.31

HELGELANDSFLESA LIGHT 65 13 N 11 53 E 7.29

HELGESTONES LIGHT 62 36 N 7 22 E 6.18

HELKLAKKEN 63 09 N 7 38 E 6.28

HELLA 62 41 N 5 59 E 6.10

HELLANDNESET 68 02 N 16 09 E 8.22

HELLESYLT 62 05 N 6 53 E 5.56

HELLEVIK 62 38 N 6 10 E 6.10

HELLIGVAER 67 25 N 13 55 E 8.3

HELLOYSKJERET 67 37 N 14 47 E 8.14

HELMOYA 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.27

HELNES LIGHT 71 04 N 26 14 E 9.16

HEMMINGFJORDEN 69 12 N 18 04 E 8.52

HEMNESBERGET 66 13 N 13 36 E 7.48

HENGSOY 58 53 N 5 26 E 2.3

HENNINGSVAER 68 09 N 14 13 E 8.7

HERAND 60 20 N 6 23 E 3.43

HERDLEFJORDEN 60 32 N 5 05 E 4.28

HERDLESUND 60 4 N 4 58 E 4.26

HERJANGSFJORDEN 68 30 N 17 27 E 8.29

HEROYSUND 59 55 N 5 47 E 3.35

HERREHOLMEN 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.7

HESTEBAEN 68 56 N 16 16 E 8.47

HESTOYFLUA 63 43 N 11 04 E 6.71

HESTSKJER LIGHT 63 05 N 7 30 E 6.24

HETSKJER LIGHT 63 05 N 7 30 E 6.27

HEVNSKJELOVA 63 29 N 9 08 E 6.63

HIDLEFJORDEN 59 04 N 5 49 E 2.16

HIDSNESET LIGHT 62 17 N 5 33 E 5.59

HILBAANE 63 12 N 7 44 E 6.29

HILBAREN 63 12 N 7 44 E 6.29

HILLE KJEOY 59 02 N 5 48 E 2.10

HILLEROEN 64 46 N 10 25 E 7.7

HINLOPENSTRETET 79 30 N 19 20 E 11.43

HISSFJORDEN 60 12 N 6 03 E 3.42

HJARTOYA 67 39 N 15 05 E 8.14

HJELMEHOLSEN 60 25 N 4 56 E 4.10

HJELMSOYA 71 04 N 24 43 E 9.14

HJELTEFFJORDEN 60 35 N 4 55 E 4.23

HJELTEFJORDEN 60 35 N 4 55 E 4.23

HJELTENESET 61 51 N 5 47 E 5.47

HJORINGNES LIGHT 62 21 N 6 07 E 5.53

HJORUNGNESET LIGHT 62 21 N 6 07 E 5.53

HODDOYA 64 28 N 11 14 E 7.11

HOGBRAKEN 65 24 N 11 02 E 7.25

HOGGSTEINEN LIGHT 62 28 N 6 02 E 5.61

HOGSFJORDEN 58 56 N 6 00 E 2.15

HOGSNES LIGHT 62 50 N 6 58 E 6.19

HOKSTAREN 65 24 N 11 58 E 7.35

HOL 68 33 N 16 24 E 8.31

HOLA 68 14 N 14 39 E 8.10

HOLDOYA 68 27 N 14 54 E 8.38

HOLEN 68 14 N 14 39 E 8.10

HOLLENDARANE 61 41 N 4 56 E 5.22

HOLMEFJORDEN 60 17 N 5 40 E 3.59

HOLMEFLU 59 57 N 5 58 E 3.37

HOLMENGRA 60 51 N 4 39 E 5.4

HOLMENGRAFJORDEN 69 51 N 30 19 E 9.36

HOLMENVAER 69 18 N 16 45 E 8.46

HOLSOYANE 59 39 N 5 07 E 3.14

HOLVIKTAREN 64 36 N 11 18 E 7.15

HOMENGRA 60 51 N 4 37 E 5.49

HOMMELVIK 63 25 N 10 48 E 6.68

HOMNNESET 70 45 N 25 42 E 9.19

HONNINGSVAG 70 59 N 26 00 E 9.15

HOOYA 63 54 N 11 05 E 6.74

HOPEN 76 35 N 25 10 E 11.51

HORGEFJORDEN 59 01 N 5 50 E 2.15

HORGEFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 05 E 3.26

HORNBAEN 64 59 N 11 35 E 7.24

HORNELEN 61 51 N 5 14 E 5.18

HORNELSFLUA 61 52 N 5 16 E 5.48

HORNNESET 68 10 N 13 20 E 8.36

HORNSNESET 65 35 N 12 18 E 7.36

HORNSTAREN 65 35 N 12 19 E 7.37

HORR FARM 58 33 N 5 40 E 1.51

HOVDEBUKTA 58 04 N 7 06 E 1.6

HOVDENES LIGHT 62 33 N 7 31 E 6.18

HOVDENESET LIGHT 61 56 N 5 01 E 5.43

HOVEDEHAMMAREN LIGHT 63 12 N 8 51 E 6.49

HOVEN 68 21 N 14 06 E 8.37

HOYANGER 61 13 N 6 04 E 5.32

HOYLANDSNESET 59 07 N 5 59 E 2.27

HUGLNESET 66 10 N 12 51 E 7.50

HULDRA GAS FIELD 60 50 N 2 40 E 4.2

HULLOYNESET 68 03 N 16 11 E 8.23

HUMULRASA 64 57 N 11 23 E 7.23

HUMULRASA LIGHT 64 55 N 11 22 E 7.22

HUNDERAVAG 59 20 N 5 49 E 2.22

HUNDHOLMEN 68 10 N 13 27 E 8.37

HUNDVAKOSEN 60 07 N 5 12 E 3.25

HUSAVAGEN 60 00 N 5 48 E 3.38

HUSEVIKFLUA 62 46 N 6 32 E 6.15

HUSNES 59 52 N 5 46 E 3.34

HUSVAERFJORDEN 65 58 N 12 05 E 7.30

HUSVAERSUNDET 65 56 N 12 12 E 7.30

HYENESE 61 51 N 5 59 E 5.47

HYLSFJORDEN 59 31 N 6 16 E 2.36

I

IDSEFJORDEN 59 01 N 5 58 E 2.16

IMARSUNDET 63 12 N 8 18 E 6.48

INDRE FOLDFJORDEN 64 53 N 11 44 E 7.18

INDRE HAROY LIGHT 62 53 N 6 56 E 6.19

INDRE HAUGOYTAREN 64 56 N 11 22 E 7.23

INDRE SKARBERGNESET 68 13 N 16 12 E 8.22

INDRE SOLVAERREVET 66 24 N 12 41 E 7.60

INDROY 60 09 N 5 25 E 3.54

INGELSFJORDEN 68 29 N 15 14 E 8.38

INGOYA 71 04 N 24 04 E 9.13

INNHOLMEN LIGHT 62 38 N 6 07 E 6.9

INNVIK 61 51 N 6 37 E 5.47

ISFJORDEN 78 18 N 15 00 E 11.15

J

JAERENS REV 58 45 N 5 30 E 1.51

JAEVA 68 32 N 15 04 E 8.38

JAKOBSELV 69 47 N 30 50 E 9.37

JARSTEINEN 59 09 N 5 11 E 2.7

JASUNDET 58 04 N 7 09 E 1.5

JELSAFJORDEN 59 19 N 6 02 E 2.34

JELSAVAG 59 20 N 6 02 E 2.34

JENDEMSFJELLET 62 48 N 7 03 E 6.8

JERVIKA LIGHT 64 38 N 11 09 E 7.15

JONDAL 60 16 N 6 15 E 3.42

JORPELAND 59 01 N 6 02 E 2.16

JOSENFJORDEN 59 15 N 6 10 E 2.35

JOSSINGFJORDEN 58 19 N 6 20 E 1.35

JUKLEBAEN 62 22 N 5 24 E 5.27
Index—Gazetteer 255

 Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

JULEDAGENE LIGHT 65 51 N 12 23 E 7.42

JULHOLMEN LIGHT 62 44 N 6 58 E 6.19

K

KALSHOLMEN LIGHT 66 55 N 13 06 E 7.61

KALSOYANE 60 19 N 4 56 E 4.9

KALVOYA 68 33 N 16 27 E 8.31

KAMOYFJORDEN 71 04 N 26 04 E 9.14

KAPP BULL 74 21 N 19 05 E 11.3

KAPP DUNER 74 29 N 18 46 E 11.5

KAPP LINNE 78 04 N 13 37 E 11.13

KAPP NATHORST 78 47 N 15 25 E 11.21

KAPP RUDSEN 70 56 N 8 53 W 10.8

KARHOLMEN 65 55 N 12 23 E 7.42

KARISKJER LIGHT 61 55 N 5 07 E 5.49

KARL XII OYANE, 80 39 N 25 03 E 11.42

KARLEBOTN 70 07 N 28 45 E 9.31

KARLSOYFJORDEN 67 31 N 14 40 E 8.13

KARSTO GAS TERMINAL 59 16 N 5 30 E 2.21

KARTVEIT 60 23 N 5 00 E 4.9

KAURA 64 14 N 10 08 E 7.3

KIKUTODDEN 76 35 N 17 00 E 11.47

KINN 61 34 N 4 46 E 5.17

KINSARVIKBUKTA 60 23 N 6 43 E 3.51

KIRKEHAMN 58 14 N 6 32 E 1.32

KIRKENES 69 44 N 30 03 E 9.35

KIRKGRUNNEN 67 15 N 14 14 E 7.64

KIRKNESTANGEN LIGHT 63 55 N 11 12 E 6.74

KJEFALLET 63 16 N 7 40 E 6.29

KJEHOLMEN LIGHT 62 42 N 6 15 E 6.11

KJELDEBOTN 68 25 N 16 41 E 8.26

KJENGBAEN 67 29 N 14 01 E 8.3

KJEOY LIGHT 64 48 N 11 35 E 7.18

KJEOYA 68 52 N 16 34 E 8.47

KJEPSOY 58 01 N 7 00 E 1.7

KJERGRONESET 62 58 N 8 28 E 6.47

KJERRINGA 62 11 N 5 08 E 5.18

KJERRINGHOLMEN 61 24 N 4 58 E 5.39

KJERRINGNESET 69 19 N 16 55 E 8.55

KJERRINGOY 67 31 N 14 46 E 8.13

KJERRINGSKJERET 66 20 N 12 53 E 7.50

KJERRKLUBBEN 68 02 N 16 19 E 8.23

KJERRVIKA 68 01 N 16 20 E 8.23

KJOFJORDEN 69 50 N 29 47 E 9.33

KJOLIBAEN 67 45 N 14 23 E 8.3

KJOLLEFJORDEN 70 57 N 27 20 E 9.20

KJOLNES LIGHT 70 51 N 29 14 E 9.23

KJOLVA 69 36 N 17 30 E 8.55

KJOPMANNEN 67 39 N 14 43 E 8.16

KJOPSVIK 68 06 N 16 21 E 8.23

KLAKKEN 62 57 N 6 43 E 6.21

KLAKKEN 64 40 N 10 27 E 7.8

KLAKKSBROREN LIGHT 63 21 N 8 25 E 6.62

KLAUVA LIGHT 61 07 N 5 02 E 5.34

KLAUVA LIGHT 69 11 N 17 58 E 8.52

KLEVEBOEN 62 16 N 5 30 E 5.57

KLOKKARVIK 60 13 N 5 10 E 4.17

KLOVNINGEN 61 56 N 4 57 E 5.22

KLUBBEN LIGHT 62 19 N 5 37 E 5.59

KNAPHOLMENE 64 36 N 11 02 E 7.9

KNAPPEN 62 38 N 6 02 E 6.7

KNARRHOLME 59 13 N 5 28 E 2.18

KNUTSTAREN 65 26 N 11 55 E 7.35

KOBBALEIDA 60 19 N 5 09 E 4.19

KOBBHOLMFJORDEN 69 47 N 30 44 E 9.37

KOKODDEN 58 14 N 6 39 E 1.26

KOLBEINSFLU 62 58 N 6 53 E 6.25

KOLTREPYNTEN 59 19 N 5 20 E 3.31

KONG KARLS LAND 78 50 N 28 10 E 11.52

KONGSFJORDEN 70 45 N 29 24 E 9.23

KONGSFJORDEN 78 57 N 12 00 E 11.25

KONGSMOEN 64 53 N 12 26 E 7.19

KONGSOYA 78 54 N 28 13 E 11.53

KONGSVIKTIND 68 35 N 16 16 E 8.31

KOPERVIK 59 17 N 5 19 E 3.29

KORNSTADFJORDEN 62 57 N 7 25 E 6.37

KORSNES 68 15 N 16 04 E 8.21

KORSNESODDEN LIGHT 63 35 N 10 50 E 6.69

KRAAKENES 62 02 N 4 59 E 5.17

KRABBEN LIGHT 62 52 N 6 43 E 6.22

KRAKA 59 09 N 5 25 E 2.8

KRAKA LIGHT 63 01 N 7 18 E 6.26

KRAKENES 62 02 N 4 59 E 5.17

KRAKHOLMEN LIGHT 62 58.6 N 7 46.8 E 6.40

KRAKVAGFJORDEN 63 40 N 9 15 E 6.57

KRIGSBORNTAREN 64 54 N 11 20 E 7.22

KRISTIANSUND 63 07 N 7 44 E 6.36

KRISTIANSUNDSLEIA 63 09 N 7 42 E 6.23

KROKSHAVN 62 41 N 8 32 E 6.43

KROKVIK 64 31 N 11 04 E 7.10

KROPPEN 63 03 N 6 59 E 6.25

KROSSFJORDEN 79 09 N 11 46 E 11.27

KROSSHAVNSUND 60 09 N 5 12 E 3.25

KULESEIDVAG 59 44 N 5 14 E 3.16

KUNNA 66 57 N 13 31 E 7.45

KUNNA 68 00 N 13 14 E 8.5

KVAEFJORDEN 68 50 N 16 00 E 8.47

KVAEREKNAPP 60 59 N 4 42 E 5.9

KVALBAKSKJER LIGHT 64 52 N 11 41 E 7.19

KVALHOLMEN LIGHT 66 25 N 12 28 E 7.60

KVALOSEN 60 34 N 4 50 E 4.13

KVALTYVAN 69 39 N 17 45 E 8.57

KVALVAGHOLMEN 62 59 N 8 00 E 6.41

KVALVAGHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 8 00 E 6.41

KVANFLESSVEET 65 58 N 12 03 E 7.30

KVANHOLMEN 67 27 N 14 40 E 8.13

KVANHOVDEN LIGHT 61 42 N 4 50 E 5.17

KVEDFJORDBUKTA 79 25 N 10 55 E 11.29

KVELDSUND 58 04 N 6 54 E 1.19

KVERNESFJORDEN 62 57 N 7 37 E 6.37

KVERVEN 63 07 N 7 40 E 6.31

KVINA 66 28 N 13 10 E 7.50

KVISVIKHOLMANE 63 03 N 7 57 E 6.39

KVITBERGET 67 14 N 14 36 E 7.58

KVITHOLM 59 23 N 6 03 E 2.33

KVITHOLMEN LIGHT 63 01 N 7 14 E 6.24

KVITNES LIGHT 63 08 N 7 48 E 6.35

KVITOYA 80 09 N 32 38 E 11.55

KVITSOYA 59 04 N 5 25 E 2.6

KVITSOYA BDOADCAST STATION 59 04 N 5 24 E 2.6

KYA 63 46 N 8 19 E 6.55

KYA 64 28 N 10 13 E 7.7

KYSNES 60 12 N 6 07 E 3.42

L

LADY FRANKLINFJORDEN 80 09 N 19 11 E 11.38

LAEDERSHOLME 58 29 N 5 50 E 1.48

LAKSELY 67 22 N 15 36 E 8.15

LAKSSHOLMBAEN 58 56 N 5 34 E 2.4

LAMANNSKJERET 66 36 N 13 05 E 7.51

LAMHOLME 59 20 N 5 12 E 3.7

LAMHOLME 59 20 N 5 45 E 2.22

LANDEGODE 67 24 N 14 20 E 7.44

LANDEGODE 67 25 N 14 20 E 8.12

LANDEGODE LIGHT 67 27 N 14 23 E 8.12

LANGENESET 59 31 N 5 14 E 3.9

LANGESKALLEN 67 57 N 12 43 E 8.36

LANGESKJERET 62 32 N 5 52 E 6.5

LANGESTRAUMEN 59 41 N 5 15 E 3.20

LANGGRUNNEN 68 42 N 16 38 E 8.33

LANGGRUNNODDEN 80 09 N 17 46 E 11.38

LANGHOLM 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.7

LANGHOLMEN 65 49 N 12 27 E 7.40

LANGKVITNESET 68 38 N 16 35 E 8.31

LANGNESET 69 41 N 18 54 E 8.61

LANGODBAEN 65 58 N 12 07 E 7.30

LANGOY 58 04 N 6 52 E 1.12

LANGOYSUND 60 37 N 4 48 E 4.15

LANGOYSUNDET 68 35 N 14 55 E 8.42

LANGRO LIGHT 64 29 N 10 30 E 7.4

LANGSTEIN 63 33 N 10 54 E 6.69

LANGSUNDET 65 14 N 11 58 E 7.31

LAPONIAHALVOYA 80 25 N 19 50 E 11.39

LATREVIKKLUBBEN 60 04 N 5 59 E 3.39

LAUKHAMARSUND 59 52 N 5 36 E 3.33

LAUVOY 63 56 N 9 56 E 7.5

LAUVOYFJORDEN 63 00 N 7 20 E 6.37

LAUVOYFJORDEN 64 35 N 11 20 E 7.15

LAUVOYTAREN 64 33 N 11 20 E 7.15

LAVANGEN 68 47 N 17 37 E 8.50
256 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

LEIRFJORDEN 67 32 N 15 37 E 8.15

LEIRVIK 59 47 N 5 31 E 3.19

LEITNES LIGHT 63 02 N 7 41 E 6.38

LEKAFJORDEN 65 05 N 11 47 E 7.31

LEPSOYA 62 37 N 6 11 E 6.7

LEPSOYKLOVNINGEN 62 38 N 6 03 E 6.7

LEPSOYREVET 62 36 N 6 15 E 6.10

LEROYOSEN 60 14 N 5 10 E 4.17

LEVANGER 63 45 N 11 18 E 6.71

LEVRA LIGHT 64 32 N 11 28 E 7.14

LILAND 68 29 N 16 53 E 8.27

LILAND LIGHT 68 28 N 16 55 E 8.26

LILANDSGRUNNEN 68 27 N 16 50 E 8.25

LILLE EKKEROYA 70 05 N 30 14 E 9.29

LILLE LAUGAROY 60 09 N 5 15 E 3.27

LILLE MOLLA 68 12 N 14 46 E 8.9

LILLEOYA LIGHT 63 20 N 8 44 E 6.61

LILLESVEET 66 06 N 11 31 E 7.45

LILLETAREN 65 10 N 11 50 E 7.29

LILLIEHOOKFJORDEN 79 15 N 11 40 E 11.28

LINDESNES 57 59 N 7 03 E 1.4

LINDHOLMEN 58 03 N 6 52 E 1.14

LINDOY 59 17 N 5 42 E 2.22

LINESFJELL 64 01 N 9 54 E 6.51

LINESOYA 64 01 N 9 54 E 7.6

LINFLUA 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.33

LISTA 58 07 N 6 34 E 1.22

LISTAFJORDEN 58 11 N 6 37 E 1.24

LITLE BALLANGEN 68 20 N 16 51 E 8.26

LITLE EKKEROYA 70 05 N 30 14 E 9.29

LITLE SKJELBREIDA 63 10 N 7 10 E 6.28

LITLEGRUNNEN 63 28 N 10 46 E 6.68

LITLOYA 68 35 N 14 19 E 8.41

LODINGEN 68 25 N 16 00 E 8.30

LODINGEN PILOT STATION 68 25 N 16 00 E 8.44

LOFOTODDEN 67 50 N 12 50 E 8.35

LOFOTODDEN 67 50 N 12 51 E 8.4

LOKKAREN 64 30 N 11 26 E 7.14

LOKKSUNDET 60 03 N 5 43 E 3.36

LOMFJORDEN 79 36 N 17 54 E 11.43

LONEVAGEN 60 33 N 5 27 E 4.34

LONGYEARBYEN 78 14 N 15 39 E 11.18

LONTARANE 63 11 N 7 31 E 6.28

LOPPHAVET 70 30 N 21 00 E 9.5

LOPSFELLET 67 19 N 14 29 E 8.12

LOPSHOLMEN 67 20 N 14 24 E 8.12

LOSBATEN 70 56 N 8 40 W 10.3

LOVOFJORDEN 63 00 N 7 20 E 6.37

LOVUNDEN 66 22 N 12 20 E 7.44

LUNDANES 62 07 N 6 58 E 5.56

LUNDENES 63 00 N 7 44 E 6.38

LUNDEVIKEN 58 26 N 5 55 E 1.45

LUNDSNESET 63 20 N 10 02 E 6.66

LUNEKEVIKA 74 28 N 18 47 E 11.5

LUREF JORDEN 60 42 N 5 07 E 4.30

LYGREPOLLEN 60 04 N 5 46 E 3.56

LYKLINGFJORDEN 59 42 N 5 11 E 3.15

LYNGHOLMEN 64 35 N 11 24 E 7.15

LYNGSFJORDEN 69 40 N 20 25 E 9.10

LYNGVAER 65 16 N 11 58 E 7.32

LYNGVAERFJORDEN 65 15 N 12 05 E 7.33

LYNGVAERGALTEN LIGHT 65 16 N 12 03 E 7.33

LYRODDANE 60 10 N 4 59 E 4.5

LYSEFJORDEN 58 54 N 6 05 E 2.29

LYSEFJORDEN 60 12 N 5 19 E 4.16

M

MADSOYGALTEN 65 02 N 11 41 E 7.29

MADSOYGALTEN LIGHT 65 03 N 11 41 E 7.31

MAGDALENEFJORDEN 79 34 N 10 54 E 11.29

MAGDALENEHUKEN 79 34 N 10 44 E 11.29

MAGEROYA 71 03 N 25 40 E 9.14

MAGNILLEN 63 06 N 8 05 E 6.24

MAGNILLEN 63 08 N 8 05 E 6.26

MAGNUS OIL FIELD 61 37 N 1 20 E 5.2

MAHOLMEN 65 00 N 10 58 E 7.26

MAHOLMRASA 65 00 N 10 55 E 7.26

MAKKAUR LIGHT 70 42 N 30 05 E 9.25

MALANGSGRUNNEN 69 58 N 17 30 E 9.2

MALM 64 04 N 11 14 E 6.74

MALOY 61 56 N 5 07 E 5.23

MALOY SKARHOLMEN 67 46 N 14 24 E 8.3

MALSNES 69 21 N 18 34 E 8.58

MANGERSFJORDEN 60 37 N 5 00 E 4.25

MARFLESA LIGHT 64 10 N 10 08 E 7.3

MARIASUNDET 77 41 N 14 51 E 11.11

MARKUSSUNDET 63 06 N 7 45 E 6.34

MARNESSKAGEN 67 10 N 14 05 E 7.56

MARSTEINSBAEN 60 08 N 4 59 E 3.22

MASOYA 71 01 N 25 00 E 9.14

MASOYSUND 70 59 N 25 01 E 9.18

MASTRAFJORDEN 59 06 N 5 39 E 2.17

MAURANGERFJORDEN 60 06 N 6 10 E 3.41

MEBAEN 60 54 N 4 42 E 5.9

MEFALDTAREN 64 37 N 11 00 E 7.10

MEFALLSTAREN 64 46 N 11 29 E 7.17

MEFJORDBAEN 65 08 N 11 12 E 7.28

MEFJORDBAEN, HORTAFJORDEN 65 10 N 11 30 E 7.29

MEFJORDINGEN 68 55 N 16 05 E 8.47

MEFJORDSHOLMAN 66 12 N 12 50 E 7.50

MEHAMNFJORDEN 71 04 N 27 52 E 9.21

MEKGRUNNA 62 43 N 7 06 E 6.16

MELINGSVAG 59 47 N 5 07 E 3.17

MELOY 66 04 N 11 37 E 7.25

MELOY LIGHT 62 48 N 8 18 E 6.43

MELOYNESET LIGHT 66 50 N 13 35 E 7.54

MELSTEINEN 63 58 N 9 35 E 6.57

MELSTEINEN 65 11 N 11 51 E 7.31

MESJOYGRUNNEN 67 12 N 13 59 E 7.63

MESKFJORDEN 70 10 N 28 40 E 9.31

MESOYA 66 51 N 13 40 E 7.54

MIA 62 40 N 6 38 E 6.8

MIDFJORDEN 62 38 N 6 40 E 6.16

MIDFJORDENSKJAER 58 02 N 6 54 E 1.10

MIDFJORDFLU 61 19 N 4 49 E 5.38

MIDTERKUKEN 77 39 N 14 46 E 11.10

MIDTFJORDSKJER 61 16 N 4 54 E 5.35

MIMERBUKTA 78 39 N 16 25 E 11.20

MJOSUNDET 68 54 N 17 27 E 8.51

MJOSUNDHOLMEN 68 53 N 17 28 E 8.51

MOFFEN 80 02 N 14 30 E 11.35

MOKALASSET 60 18 N 4 56 E 4.8

MOKALASSET 61 18 N 5 01 E 5.36

MOKSTER 60 04 N 5 06 E 3.24

MOKSTRA GRONINGEN 60 03 N 5 07 E 3.25

MOLDE 62 44 N 7 10 E 6.17

MOLDTU 62 18 N 5 38 E 5.59

MOLDTUSTRANDA 62 18 N 5 39 E 5.59

MONGSTAD 60 49 N 5 02 E 5.7

MORKEDALSTUA 63 30 N 8 31 E 6.51

MOSJOEN 65 51 N 13 11 E 7.41

MOSSELBUKTA 79 53 N 15 55 E 11.37

MOSTERHAMN 59 42 N 5 24 E 3.18

MOSTEROYA 59 05 N 5 38 E 2.8

MUKEN 66 45 N 12 29 E 8.2

MULTIND 68 00 N 16 30 E 8.23

MUNKHOLMEN LIGHT 63 27 N 10 23 E 6.66

MURCHISONFJORDEN 80 00 N 18 20 E 11.45

MURUVIK 63 26 N 10 51 E 6.69

MYKEN 66 45 N 12 25 E 7.45

MYKEN 66 46 N 12 29 E 7.61

MYRBOEN 69 12 N 16 30 E 8.46

MYRFLESAN 69 06 N 16 04 E 8.46

N

NAEROYSUNDET 64 50 N 11 11 E 7.20

NALAUVIKEN 58 23 N 6 04 E 1.40

NAMSOS 64 28 N 11 30 E 7.12

NAPPHOLMEN 68 08 N 13 28 E 8.5

NARVIK 68 26 N 17 25 E 8.28

NEDSTRANDSFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 44 E 2.22

NEDSTRANDSVAG 59 20 N 5 52 E 2.23

NEKKOYOSEN LIGHT 61 35 N 4 57 E 5.41

NERLANDSOY 62 21 N 5 33 E 5.27

NESNA 66 12 N 13 01 E 7.48

NEVERNES LIGHT 65 26 N 12 35 E 7.37

NINIAN OIL FIELD 60 51 N 1 28 E 5.2

NOGVAFJORDEN 62 41 N 6 20 E 6.11

NORDAUSTLANDET 79 50 N 23 00 E 11.38

NORDENSKIOLDBUKTA 80 25 N 21 10 E 11.40
Index—Gazetteer 257

 Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

NORDFJORDEID 61 54 N 5 59 E 5.47

NORDFJORDEN 58 20 N 6 15 E 1.38

NORDFJORDEN 78 30 N 15 00 E 11.21

NORDFOLD 67 46 N 15 14 E 8.14

NORDFOLLA 67 45 N 15 17 E 8.14

NORDGATTET 79 45 N 11 05 E 11.32

NORDHAMN 74 31 N 18 59 E 11.4

NORDKAPP 71 10 N 25 47 E 9.2

NORDKAPP 71 10 N 7 57 W 10.6

NORDKAPP 74 31 N 19 07 E 11.4

NORDOERNE LIGHT 64 48 N 10 33 E 7.1

NORDOY 60 43 N 4 44 E 4.15

NORDOYANE 59 36 N 5 07 E 3.14

NORDRE BRATTHOLME 60 24 N 5 06 E 4.26

NORDRE FAUSKEN 63 14 N 7 33 E 6.29

NORDRE NEKKOYA 61 35 N 4 56 E 5.41

NORDRE OYGARDSKJERET 67 32 N 15 08 E 8.15

NORDRE TJORNOY 60 22 N 4 55 E 4.9

NORDRE VAGAHOLME 59 13 N 5 31 E 2.32

NORDREGAPET 58 27 N 5 52 E 1.46

NORDSTANDSKJAER 68 30 N 16 09 E 8.31

NORDTAREN 65 34 N 12 11 E 7.36

NORESKALLEN 62 03 N 4 52 E 5.20

NORHEIMSUND 60 22 N 6 09 E 3.43

NORTH CORMORANT OIL FIELD 61 15 N 1 09 E 5.2

NUPEN 67 08 N 13 43 E 7.62

NY-ALESUND 78 55 N 11 57 E 11.25

NYHAMNA 62 51 N 6 57 E 6.13

NYLANDSKJERET 64 41 N 10 33 E 7.7

O

OBRESTADBREKRA 58 40 N 5 33 E 1.51

ODDA 60 05 N 6 33 E 3.52

ODDANE 61 33 N 5 00 E 5.40

ODDANE 62 54 N 6 53 E 6.19

ODDEN 60 26 N 4 56 E 4.9

ODOYFLUA 66 21 N 12 55 E 7.50

OEN 58 06 N 6 47 E 1.20

OFFERSOY 68 19 N 15 37 E 8.11

OGNABUKTI 58 31 N 5 45 E 1.49

OKSBASHEIA 64 25 N 10 31 E 7.7

OKSEBAASEN 69 51 N 30 07 E 9.35

OKSEBASEN LIGHT 62 31 N 6 09 E 6.9

OKSENDAL 62 43 N 8 26 E 6.43

OKSFJORD 70 14 N 22 21 E 9.9

OKSFJORDEN 70 12 N 22 18 E 9.9

OKSNESODDEN 68 03 N 15 14 E 8.19

OKSREVLTAREN 65 01 N 10 51 E 7.26

OKSSUNDET 68 00 N 15 18 E 8.19

OKSTRAFJORDEN 59 20 N 6 06 E 2.35

OLA-PERSOYA LIGHT 67 40 N 14 43 E 8.16

OLASKJAER LIGHT 61 44 N 4 57 E 5.22

OLDEN 61 50 N 6 49 E 5.47

OLSFLUA 62 30 N 5 51 E 6.4

OMBOFJORDEN 59 17 N 6 07 E 2.18

ONA LIGHT 62 52 N 6 33 E 6.21

ONARHEIM 59 57 N 5 38 E 3.35

ONARHEIMSFJORDEN 59 57 N 5 41 E 3.33

ONGLESUNDET 60 43 N 4 52 E 4.22

OPPLOYFJORDEN 64 48 N 11 45 E 7.17

ORKANGER 63 19 N 9 53 E 6.66

ORMOYA 65 26 N 12 09 E 7.34

ORNES 66 52 N 13 42 E 7.54

ORSTA 62 12 N 6 08 E 5.52

ORSTAFJORDEN 62 14 N 6 00 E 5.52

ORSVAG 68 12 N 14 25 E 8.8

OS 60 11 N 5 28 E 3.57

OSAFJORDEN 60 30 N 6 55 E 3.49

OSNESGAVLEN 59 25 N 5 14 E 3.9

OSPA 61 13 N 4 45 E 5.12

OSTHOLMEN 66 53 N 13 31 E 7.55

OSTMARKTANGEN 63 27 N 10 27 E 6.68

OSTRE STOLEN 58 13 N 6 43 E 1.25

OSUNDER 60 33 N 4 51 E 4.13

OTEREN 64 58 N 11 31 E 7.23

OTNESET 63 08 N 8 31 E 6.48

OTTOY 59 24 N 6 06 E 2.33

OVSKALLEN 66 25 N 11 58 E 7.46

OYENSVE 67 35 N 14 17 E 8.14

OYNAFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 55 E 3.40

OYSTESEVAGEN 60 23 N 6 12 E 3.44

P

PASVIKHAMN 69 49 N 30 35 E 9.36

PENNINGFLU 62 19 N 5 33 E 5.59

PERSFJORDEN 70 26 N 30 48 E 9.25

POLLATIND 61 06 N 4 52 E 5.5

PORSANGEN 70 30 N 25 30 E 9.19

PRESTEID 68 05 N 15 40 E 8.20

PRINS KARLS FORLAND 78 30 N 11 06 E 11.22

R

RABBAROSEN 60 18 N 4 57 E 4.8

RADOYFJORDEN 60 35 N 5 11 E 4.29

RAEVOYSUND 58 02 N 7 00 E 1.6

RAFTSUNDET 68 23 N 15 05 E 8.10

RAMBERG 68 05 N 13 14 E 8.36

RAMBERGHOLMEN 64 02 N 11 14 E 6.74

RAMSNES 59 38 N 6 20 E 2.37

RAMSOY 60 26 N 5 03 E 4.26

RAMSUNDET 68 29 N 16 31 E 8.25

RANDABERGVIGA 59 02 N 5 37 E 2.9

RANSKJERET 66 09 N 12 52 E 7.48

RASVAGEN 58 14 N 6 34 E 1.29,

1.30

RASVAGHOLMANE 58 13 N 6 35 E 1.31

RAUDFJORDEN 79 50 N 12 00 E 11.35

RAUDHOLMANE 60 10 N 5 28 E 3.57

RAUDHOLMANE 62 38 N 6 24 E 6.15

RAUDHOLMENE 59 33 N 5 09 E 3.11

RAUDOY 61 18 N 4 55 E 5.13,

5.39

RAUDOY LIGHT 62 14 N 5 59 E 5.52

RAUDSANDNES LIGHT 63 04 N 7 41 E 6.31

RAUNA 58 04 N 6 40 E 1.21

RAUNEFJORDEN 60 16 N 5 10 E 4.17

REIMANE 63 31 N 7 50 E 6.52

REINE 67 56 N 13 06 E 8.4

REINSFJELLET 62 56 N 7 56 E 6.24

REKEFJORDEN 58 20 N 6 16 E 1.37

REKVEDBUKTA 70 57 N 8 34 W 10.3

REMMINGSKJER LIGHT 63 22 N 8 17 E 6.54,

6.62

REVINGEN 59 00 N 5 49 E 2.10

REVOY 58 03 N 6 48 E 1.13

REVSHOLMEN 63 01 N 7 47 E 6.39

RIBBA 61 54 N 5 00 E 5.44

RINGOY 60 27 N 6 47 E 3.48

RINGVASSOY 69 55 N 19 10 E 9.3

RINNOYVAG 68 22 N 15 46 E 8.11

RISAVIKI 58 56 N 5 35 E 2.4

RISHOLMEN LIGHT 63 09 N 8 32 E 6.48

RISHOLMFLUA 61 38 N 4 53 E 5.21

RISHOLMSUNDET 58 14 N 6 40 E 1.26

RISKAFJORDEN 58 56 N 5 49 E 2.14

RISVAER 64 55 N 11 32 E 7.22

RISVAER 68 15 N 15 09 E 8.11

RISVAERSUNDET 64 58 N 11 31 E 7.23

ROBBEGANSTANGEN 60 41 N 4 48 E 4.15

RODBERG 63 29 N 10 00 E 6.65

RODBERGSODDEN 69 27 N 18 08 E 8.54

RODHOLMANE 68 13 N 14 33 E 8.9

RODOY 66 39 N 13 05 E 7.51

RODSUNDA 64 38 N 11 10 E 7.15

ROEDVIKA 74 24 N 19 13 E 11.3

ROGNAN 67 06 N 15 25 E 7.59

ROGNAN LIGHT 63 34 N 9 17 E 6.58

ROGNANNES LIGHT 63 23 N 8 39 E 6.61

ROHOLME 58 02 N 6 52 E 1.10

ROKKEM LIGHT 62 53 N 8 30 E 6.46

ROLVSOYA 70 58 N 24 00 E 9.13

ROMBAKEN 68 28 N 17 36 E 8.29

RONELDEN 61 55 N 5 01 E 5.43

RONGEVAER 60 49 N 4 47 E 5.5

RONGEVAERSKALLEN 60 50 N 4 46 E 5.5

RONGOYNI 60 30 N 4 55 E 4.11

RONGSUND 60 30 N 4 56 E 4.26

RONVIKSKJERANE 66 40 N 13 11 E 7.52
258 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

RORSUND 60 31 N 4 53 E 4.13

RORVIK 64 52 N 11 14 E 7.21

ROSANESET 68 24 N 17 12 E 8.27

ROSENDAL 59 59 N 6 00 E 3.37

ROSOK HAVFLUA 62 49 N 6 13 E 6.21

ROSOYTAREN 65 52 N 12 22 E 7.42

ROSSHOLMEN 62 36 N 6 03 E 6.7

ROSSOY 60 59 N 4 48 E 5.10

ROST 67 31 N 12 07 E 8.4

ROTVAER 68 22 N 15 56 E 8.10

ROVDESKJERET LIGHT 62 11 N 5 45 E 5.51

ROYKENESBOEN 68 51 N 16 39 E 8.33

ROYTINGKALVEN 60 52 N 4 47 E 5.8

RUMPENNESET 63 11 N 8 35 E 6.49

RUNDE 62 25 N 5 35 E 5.26

RUNDOY LIGHT 62 25 N 5 36 E 5.28

RUTLETANGEN 61 05 N 5 10 E 5.31

RUTLETANGEN LIGHT 61 05 N 5 10 E 5.10

RYK YSEOYANE 77 47 N 25 12 E 11.49

RYSSLANDSVIK 59 52 N 5 44 E 3.33

RYSTRAUMEN 69 33 N 18 43 E 8.57

RYVARDEN 59 32 N 5 14 E 3.11

S

SAEBOSUNDET 59 10 N 5 56 E 2.17

SAEBUOY 63 30 N 8 15 E 6.53

SAEVAREID 60 11 N 5 45 E 3.55

SAGFJORDEN 67 38 N 15 16 E 8.15

SAGFJORDEN 67 58 N 15 36 E 8.20

SAGFJORDEN 69 49 N 30 32 E 9.36

SAGVAG 59 46 N 5 23 E 3.21

SAKRISSKJER 61 14 N 4 57 E 5.35

SAKSA LIGHT 64 24 N 10 26 E 7.4

SAKSNES LIGHT 63 02 N 8 14 E 6.45

SALANGEN 68 53 N 17 34 E 8.50

SALANGSVERKET 68 55 N 17 44 E 8.51

SALFJELLET 78 14 N 12 03 E 11.22

SALHUSSTRAUMMEN 59 22 N 5 18 E 3.30

SALSBRUKET 64 48 N 11 52 E 7.18

SALTOYA 63 33 N 10 54 E 6.69

SALTRAK 58 03 N 6 49 E 1.18

SALTVIKHAMN LIGHT 63 47 N 11 00 E 6.72

SAMSKALLEN 66 22 N 11 58 E 7.60

SAND 59 29 N 6 15 E 2.34

SANDHOLMEN 69 25 N 18 06 E 8.54

SANDNES 58 51 N 5 45 E 2.12

SANDNESSJOEN 66 01 N 12 38 E 7.43

SANDNESSUNDET 69 41 N 18 54 E 8.61

SANDOY LIGHT 61 18 N 4 36 E 5.13

SANDOYA 70 02 N 18 32 E 9.3

SANDOYA LIGHT 61 33 N 4 46 E 5.33

SANDOYNI 60 27 N 4 53 E 4.9

SANDOYTAREN 65 23 N 12 00 E 7.35

SANDSFJORDEN 59 21 N 6 00 E 2.33

SANDSFJORDEN 62 15 N 5 31 E 5.57

SANDSHAMN LIGHT 62 15 N 5 30 E 5.57

SANDSKJER 70 05 N 29 33 E 9.31

SANDSORA LIGHT 63 45 N 11 03 E 6.71

SANDSOY 62 15 N 5 26 E 5.27

SANDVAER 65 21 N 11 58 E 7.35

SANDVAERODTAREN 65 22 N 12 03 E 7.32

SANDVEHAMN 59 11 N 5 11 E 3.5

SANDVERKEN 66 39 N 13 06 E 7.52

SANNA 66 30 N 12 03 E 7.44

SARNESFJORDEN 70 58 N 25 45 E 9.16

SARSTANGEN 78 44 N 11 29 E 11.23

SASSENFJORDEN 78 23 N 16 30 E 11.19

SAUDA 59 39 N 6 21 E 2.38

SAUDAFJORDEN 59 33 N 6 17 E 2.37

SAUDEFJORDEN 59 33 N 6 17 E 2.37

SAUDEHOLMEN LIGHT 62 11 N 5 36 E 5.50

SAUEHORNET 62 14 N 6 09 E 5.26

SAWGRUNNEN 65 09 N 10 56 E 7.27

SEIOSKALLEN 67 17 N 13 31 E 7.63

SEIRSTADFJORDEN 64 37 N 11 22 E 7.16

SELSOYA 68 09 N 15 29 E 8.20

SELVAER 66 36 N 12 18 E 7.60

SELVBUKTA 63 37 N 9 43 E 6.65

SENDINGANE 61 39 N 4 34 E 5.18

SHANNONBOEN 79 34 N 10 56 E 11.29

SHEMSHESTEN 62 58 N 7 11 E 6.23

SIGGJA 59 45 N 5 18 E 3.12

SIGNEHAMNA 79 16 N 11 35 E 11.28

SILDA 70 20 N 21 45 E 9.5

SILDSKJERET 67 48 N 14 44 E 8.16

SIMADALSFJORDEN 60 30 N 7 05 E 3.49

SIRAGRUNNEN 58 15 N 6 20 E 1.33

SIREVAG 58 30 N 5 48 E 1.49

SJOVEGAN 68 53 N 17 50 E 8.51

SKAFTENES LIGHT 64 57 N 12 01 E 7.19

SKAGSTADSUNDET 67 58 N 15 10 E 8.19

SKALEVIK 60 24 N 5 14 E 4.21

SKALLEFLUENE 61 35 N 4 46 E 5.15

SKALMEN LIGHT 63 28 N 7 46 E 6.52

SKARDHOLMEN 60 24 N 5 13 E 4.20

SKAREKINNA 61 42 N 4 51 E 5.21

SKARHOLMAN 67 39 N 14 28 E 8.14

SKARNESET 67 12 N 14 17 E 7.57

SKARVBERGNES LIGHT 63 05 N 7 58 E 6.39

SKARVHAUSBAEN 68 57 N 16 10 E 8.46

SKARVOY 60 30 N 4 50 E 4.12

SKARVOYA 65 53 N 12 20 E 7.42

SKARVOYSUND 60 27 N 4 56 E 4.10

SKATEN LIGHT 61 52 N 5 13 E 5.44

SKATEN LIGHT 67 50.6 N 14 47.4 E 8.17

SKIVEN 67 58 N 12 56 E 8.35

SKJAHOLMEN 67 43 N 14 43 E 8.16

SKJEGGENE 62 16 N 5 20 E 5.27

SKJELHOLMEN 63 54 N 9 51 E 7.5

SKJELJANGER LIGHT 60 37 N 4 57 E 4.25

SKJELJAVAG 60 22 N 5 40 E 3.59

SKJELVA 65 43 N 12 19 E 7.38

SKJERVHEIM 59 28 N 5 45 E 2.39

SKJOMGRUNNEN 68 25 N 17 13 E 8.25

SKJORAFJORDEN 64 06 N 10 10 E 7.6

SKLINNA 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.25

SKLINNA BANKEN 65 16 N 10 10 E 7.25

SKLINNA LIGHT 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.27

SKLINNAFLESAN 65 08 N 10 59 E 7.27

SKOLMNESET 68 15 N 13 31 E 8.35

SKOLTAFJORDEN 60 02 N 5 00 E 3.23

SKOLTEN 62 16 N 6 00 E 5.52

SKOMVAER LIGHT 67 25 N 11 52 E 8.4

SKONGSNES LIGHT 62 02 N 5 08 E 5.24

SKORPA 62 20 N 5 30 E 5.27

SKORPA 66 02 N 12 33 E 7.43

SKORPEFLUENE 61 55 N 4 46 E 5.22

SKORPEGAVLEN 59 56 N 5 48 E 3.37

SKORPERAUVA 61 46 N 4 40 E 5.22

SKORPESUND 59 55 N 5 38 E 3.33

SKOTAMEDGRUNN 58 48 N 5 26 E 1.52

SKRAEDDEREN 58 28 N 5 51 E 1.48

SKROVA 68 10 N 14 41 E 8.8

SKROVA HAVN 68 10 N 14 40 E 8.8

SKROVKJOSEN 68 15 N 16 19 E 8.22

SKUDENESFJORDEN 59 00 N 5 15 E 2.5

SKUDENESHAVN 59 09 N 5 16 E 2.7

SKULEN 62 41 N 6 19 E 6.11

SLAADBUKTA 79 42 N 11 15 E 11.33

SLETRINGEN LIGHT 63 40 N 8 16 E 6.52

SLETTEBAKKEN LIGHT 68 31 N 16 58 E 8.26

SLETTNES LIGHT 71 05 N 28 14 E 9.21

SLETTNESET 69 23 N 18 06 E 8.54

SLOVAER 67 36 N 14 39 E 8.14

SMASKJAER 59 17 N 5 57 E 2.23

SMEERENBURGFJORDEN 79 43 N 11 06 E 11.30

SMITSKJAERLEIEN 68 20 N 15 25 E 8.11

SMORSUNDNES 59 30 N 5 14 E 3.9

SNERTHOLMEN LIGHT 65 43 N 12 28 E 7.38

SOGNDALSSTRANDA 58 19 N 6 18 E 1.36

SOGNEUKSEN 60 57 N 4 46 E 5.8

SOLAVIKI 58 53 N 5 34 E 2.3

SOLBERGFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 55 E 2.28

SOLBERGFJORDEN 69 08 N 17 38 E 8.52

SOLBJORG 60 18 N 5 37 E 3.59

SOLEMSUNDET 63 12 N 8 11 E 6.48

SOLOYET 62 57 N 8 26 E 6.46

SONDRE SOROYHOLME 65 55 N 12 22 E 7.43

SONDREGAPET 58 26 N 6 00 E 1.42

SONOYOSEN 59 35 N 5 07 E 3.14

SORAGAPET 58 26 N 6 00 E 1.42

SORAUSTKAPP 71 01 N 8 00 W 10.5
Index—Gazetteer 259

 Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SORE GUTVIK LIGHT 65 05 N 11 49 E 7.31

SORE RAMNEN 63 08 N 7 24 E 6.27

SOREIDSVIK 60 03 N 5 28 E 3.54

SORFJORDEN 60 24 N 6 42 E 3.50

SORFJORDEN 60 31 N 5 22 E 4.32

SORFOLLA 67 32 N 15 16 E 8.15

SORGATTET 79 39 N 11 00 E 11.32

SORGFJORDEN 79 54 N 16 50 E 11.43

SORGRUNNEN 63 33 N 8 00 E 6.53

SORHAUGOY 59 25 N 5 14 E 3.9

SORHUNDEN 64 39 N 10 53 E 7.20

SORKAPP 70 50 N 8 59 W 10.2

SORKAPP LAND 76 50 N 16 25 E 11.8

SORNES 65 58 N 12 52 E 7.40

SORSKJOMEN 68 12 N 17 19 E 8.27

SORSUNDET 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.32

SORTLAND 68 42 N 15 25 E 8.40

SORTLANDSUNDET 68 42 N 15 26 E 8.39

SORVAER 70 38 N 21 59 E 9.13

SPANNHOLMANE 59 17 N 4 51 E 3.4

SPILDEROYA 69 25 N 18 29 E 8.58

SPINDSFJORDEN 58 05 N 6 56 E 1.10

SPITSBERGEN BANK 75 00 N 21 00 E 11.2

SPRANGBUKT 58 27 N 5 56 E 1.45

SPRINGEN LIGHT 65 55 N 12 13 E 7.30

STABBEN 63 08 N 7 16 E 6.27

STABBEN LIGHT 61 36 N 4 57 E 5.41

STABSAET 58 24 N 5 59 E 1.43

STAFLUA 62 54 N 6 51 E 6.22

STAKNES LIGHT 63 01 N 8 21 E 6.45

STALLEN 60 17 N 4 57 E 4.6

STAMSUND 68 07 N 13 51 E 8.6

STANGHOLMGALTEN 64 56 N 11 28 E 7.24

STANGNESODDEN 68 48 N 16 37 E 8.33

STATFJORDEN OIL FIELD 61 15 N 1 51 E 5.2

STATPIPE PLATFORM NO. 1 58 11 N 2 28 E 1.2

STATTHAVET 62 12 N 5 06 E 5.26

STATTLANDET 62 12 N 5 08 E 5.26

STAVANGER 58 59 N 5 45 E 2.11

STAVENES LIGHT 61 25 N 4 59 E 5.39

STAVENES LIGHT 63 07 N 7 40 E 6.28

STAVSUNDET 67 01 N 13 56 E 7.57

STEET 63 00 N 7 48 E 6.39

STEGLEHOLME 60 09 N 5 41 E 3.54

STEINAN 65 36 N 11 17 E 7.25

STEINHOLMEN LIGHT 63 17 N 8 20 E 6.60

STEINKJER 64 01 N 11 30 E 6.76

STEINODDEN 58 07 N 6 33 E 1.23

STEINSFLESA 65 09 N 11 31 E 7.29

STEINSHOLMEN 67 44 N 14 43 E 8.16

STJERNDALEN 68 02 N 13 14 E 8.5

STJERNSUND 70 14 N 22 44 E 9.9

STOKHOLMEN 66 29 N 12 21 E 7.60

STOKKGRUNNEN 64 39 N 11 00 E 7.17

STOKKMARKNES 68 34 N 14 55 E 8.43

STOKKSUND 59 45 N 5 23 E 3.20

STOLSFJORDEN 58 14 N 6 41 E 1.27

STORANESET 59 45 N 5 08 E 3.16

STORDALSVIKA 62 23 N 6 58 E 5.55

STORE BERGSHOLME 58 56 N 6 07 E 2.30

STORE GRINDOY 69 38 N 18 51 E 8.61

STORE HISKJO 59 44 N 5 09 E 3.15

STORE KLAKKSOY 59 50 N 5 16 E 3.20

STORE KOPPEREN 63 48 N 8 44 E 6.51

STORE KVITHOLME 65 01 N 11 36 E 7.29

STORE LAGMANSVIKA 67 55 N 15 53 E 8.20

STORE MARSTEIN 60 08 N 5 01 E 4.3

STORE OIL TERMINAL 60 37 N 4 52 E 4.24

STORE OTERHOLMEN 64 58 N 11 32 E 7.24

STORE ROGLA 68 44 N 16 39 E 8.33

STORE SORTNA 63 05 N 7 24 E 6.27

STORE SOTRA 60 20 N 5 05 E 4.6

STORE STEINEN 66 00 N 12 01 E 7.30

STORE SVARTOKSEN 67 16 N 14 14 E 7.64

STORE VERNOY 60 05 N 5 26 E 3.53

STOREGRUNNEN 63 30 N 10 26 E 6.68

STORFJELLET 67 28 N 11 56 E 8.4

STORFJORDEN 78 00 N 20 00 E 11.47

STORGRUNDEN 65 09 N 11 07 E 7.28

STORHOLMANE 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.6

STORHOLMEN 61 01 N 4 47 E 5.9

STORHOLMEN 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.6

STORHOLMEN 68 43 N 16 46 E 8.33

STORHOLMEN LIGHT 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.21

STORMBUKTA 76 41 N 16 18 E 11.8

STORNESORA LIGHT 63 59 N 11 18 E 6.74

STORSUNDET 59 57 N 5 53 E 3.37

STORTAREN 65 08 N 11 01 E 7.28

STORTAREN 65 09 N 11 50 E 7.29

STORVIKA 67 31 N 15 36 E 8.15

STOTT 66 55 N 13 28 E 7.55

STOTT LIGHT 66 57 N 13 28 E 7.55

STOTTVAER 66 56 N 13 20 E 7.61

STOVHOLME 60 03 N 5 06 E 3.24

STOVIKA 58 15 N 6 31 E 1.32

STRANDA 62 18 N 6 57 E 5.55

STRANDANES LIGHT 62 59 N 7 42 E 6.39

STRANDSFJORDEN 58 13 N 6 39 E 1.25,

1.26

STRANDVIK 60 10 N 5 41 E 3.55

STRAUMEN 68 26 N 17 42 E 8.29

STRAUMSUNDI 60 35 N 4 51 E 4.14

STROMOYA 64 52 N 11 16 E 7.22

STUSVIK 58 00 N 7 02 E 1.6

SUFFOLKPYNTEN 76 52 N 15 34 E 11.8

SULA LIGHT 63 51 N 8 27 E 6.55

SULA LIGHT 63 51 N 8 28 E 6.52

SUNDALSORA 62 41 N 8 33 E 6.43

SUNDSODDEN LIGHT 67 05 N 14 04 E 7.57

SURVIKSUNDET 64 33 N 11 24 E 7.14

SVAHOLMANE 58 23 N 6 03 E 1.41

SVANEFLU 58 03 N 6 45 E 1.21

SVARTESKJAER 62 11 N 5 21 E 5.49

SVARTSKJERET 63 18 N 8 18 E 6.60

SVEABUKTA 77 52 N 16 45 E 11.12

SVEFJORDEN 64 23 N 10 30 E 7.6

SVEHOLMEN LIGHT 63 17 N 8 29 E 6.49

SVEIO BROADCASTING STATION 59 37 N 5 19 E 3.11

SVELEDEN 68 11 N 14 42 E 8.9

SVELEIA 68 11 N 14 42 E 8.9

SVELLINGEN 68 18 N 15 18 E 8.11

SVENSSKJERET 66 06 N 12 41 E 7.46

SVERTINGANE 58 15 N 6 30 E 1.32

SVESKALLEN 64 33 N 10 15 E 7.8

SVINEFLU 61 20 N 4 33 E 5.14

SVINOY 62 20 N 5 16 E 5.27

SVINOYA 68 03 N 13 33 E 8.5

SVINVAER 66 45 N 13 10 E 7.52

SVOLVAER 68 14 N 14 35 E 8.9

SYKKYLVFJORDEN 62 24 N 6 33 E 5.55

SYLEN 74 22 N 19 02 E 11.6

SYNESFJELLET 62 33 N 6 02 E 6.6

T

TA 59 14 N 5 27 E 2.18

TAFJORDEN 62 14 N 7 25 E 5.57

TAKNESET 63 09 N 8 20 E 6.48

TALGJEFJORDEN 59 08 N 5 49 E 2.24

TALSGRUNNANE 63 10 N 7 46 E 6.35

TALVIK 70 03 N 22 58 E 9.12

TANAFJORDEN 70 45 N 28 25 E 9.22

TANGEFLU 59 56 N 5 44 E 3.35

TANNOYA 68 09 N 15 48 E 8.20

TARMEVIKODDEN 58 13 N 6 41 E 1.24

TARVFJORDEN 63 46 N 9 25 E 7.5

TAU 59 04 N 5 55 E 2.16

TAUTRA 62 40 N 6 4 E 6.18

TAUTRA LIGHT 63 35 N 10 37 E 6.70

TAUTREFLUA 62 41 N 6 56 E 6.16

TEINEGRUNNEN 61 24 N 4 29 E 5.14

TEISTEN 66 22 N 12 56 E 7.50

TEKSLO 60 09 N 5 01 E 4.4

TELAVAG 60 15 N 4 59 E 4.7

TEMPLEFJORDEN 78 24 N 17 00 E 11.19

TENNHOLME 59 17 N 5 52 E 2.28

TENNHOLMEN 67 18 N 13 30 E 7.62

TENNHOLMEN LIGHT 67 18 N 13 30 E 8.12

TENNSKJERHOLMEN 69 29 N 18 19 E 8.58

TERNEHAUG 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.15

TERNEHOLMEN 58 14 N 6 41 E 1.27

TERNESKJERFLU LIGHT 62 11 N 5 24 E 5.49

TERNHOLMEN LIGHT 65 00 N 11 07 E 7.26
260 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 182

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

TERNINGEN LIGHT 63 30 N 9 03 E 6.62

TERNINGEN LIGHT 64 13 N 10 15 E 7.3

TERNNESET 60 14 N 4 59 E 4.6

TEROY 58 03 N 6 56 E 1.8

THAMSHAMN 63 19 N 9 53 E 6.66

TINGVOLLVAGEN 62 54 N 8 11 E 6.42

TISNES 69 36 N 18 50 E 8.57

TJELDODDEN 68 23 N 16 08 E 8.24

TJELDSUNDET 68 31 N 16 10 E 8.31

TJOTTA 65 50 N 12 26 E 7.39

TJUVAHOLMEN 60 22 N 6 16 E 3.44

TJUVHOLMEN 63 04 N 7 42 E 6.38

TODALSFJORDEN LIGHT 62 50 N 8 38 E 6.46

TOFTEVAG 60 29 N 4 56 E 4.12

TOMMELPYNTEN 79 33 N 18 42 E 11.44

TOPPSUNDET 68 53 N 16 23 E 8.47

TORSFLU 62 04 N 4 57 E 5.25

TORSKJAER LIGHT 63 46 N 9 28 E 7.5

TORSVAG LIGHT 70 15 N 19 30 E 9.4

TORVIKNESET 62 57 N 8 26 E 6.47

TOVIK 68 41 N 16 53 E 8.48

TOVIKHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 7 21 E 6.37

TRAENA 66 25 N 12 00 E 7.60

TRAETHOLMEN 65 56 N 12 12 E 7.30

TRANOY 68 11 N 15 40 E 8.20

TRANOYFJORDEN 69 04 N 17 19 E 8.51

TROLL GAS FIELD 60 44 N 3 33 E 4.2

TROMSO 69 39 N 18 57 E 8.60

TROMSOYA 69 40 N 18 57 E 8.58

TRONDEN 62 19 N 5 38 E 5.59

TRONDHEIM 63 26 N 10 24 E 6.67

TROSNAVAG 59 13 N 5 23 E 3.28

TROYTAROSEN 59 44 N 5 13 E 3.16

TUNGENESET 59 02 N 5 35 E 2.2

TUNSOY 58 59 N 5 49 E 2.10

TUROY 60 27 N 4 55 E 4.10

TUSSEN 61 23 N 4 50 E 5.38

TYRHAUG LIGHT 63 19 N 8 14 E 6.59

TYSFJORDEN 68 06 N 16 15 E 8.21

TYSNESVIK 60 03 N 5 32 E 3.53

TYSSEDAL 60 07 N 6 34 E 3.51

TYSSEFJORDEN 59 21 N 6 14 E 2.36

U

UKNES NAVAL BASE 58 59 N 5 43 E 2.11

ULA GAS FIELD 57 06 N 2 51 E 1.2

ULLENSVANG 60 19 N 6 39 E 3.51

ULLEROYSUND 58 03 N 6 55 E 1.11

ULLSFJORDEN 69 50 N 19 52 E 9.10

ULVEN LIGHT 61 58 N 5 09 E 5.24

ULVUNFJORDEN 62 54 N 8 22 E 6.46

URBERGET 68 04 N 13 43 E 8.6

URTER 59 22 N 5 02 E 3.4

USKEDAL 59 56 N 5 52 E 3.37

UTGRUNNEN 67 42 N 14 17 E 8.3

UTNE 60 26 N 6 37 E 3.46

UTNEFJORDEN 60 26 N 6 38 E 3.46

UTOYBAEN 66 14 N 12 36 E 7.46

UTSIRA 59 18 N 4 53 E 3.4

UTSKARPEN 66 15 N 13 35 E 7.48

UTTORGFLESSA LIGHT 65 26 N 11 57 E 7.35

UTVAER LIGHT 61 02 N 4 31 E 5.11

V

VABERGET 63 31 N 10 46 E 6.69

VADSO 70 04 N 29 44 E 9.30

VAEROY 61 18 N 4 44 E 5.13

VAEROY 67 40 N 12 40 E 8.4

VAGEN 58 58 N 5 44 E 2.11

VAGEN 62 13 N 5 39 E 5.57

VAGENE 58 20 N 6 13 E 1.39

VAIGATTOYANE 79 20 N 20 00 E 11.46

VAKSDAL 60 29 N 5 44 E 4.32

VALLABAANE 62 28 N 5 41 E 5.58

VALLOYGALTEN 65 57 N 12 24 E 7.42

VALSHOLMSKJAER LIGHT 63 49 N 9 36 E 7.5

VALSOYA 63 52 N 9 44 E 7.2

VARANGERFJORDEN 70 00 N 30 00 E 9.28

VARDHOLMEN 60 46 N 4 52 E 4.22

VARDO 70 22 N 31 07 E 9.26

VARGSUND 70 22 N 23 30 E 9.12

VARNES 58 11 N 6 38 E 1.23

VASKINNKVIGA 68 53 N 16 26 E 8.47

VATLESTRAUMEN 60 19 N 5 12 E 4.18

VATNEMOHOLMENE 58 29 N 5 49 E 1.49

VEANESET 60 03 N 5 29 E 3.53

VEAVAGEN 59 18 N 5 13 E 3.7

VEINESBOTN 70 05 N 28 47 E 9.32

VELFJORDEN 65 35 N 12 21 E 7.37

VEMMELSVIKHOLMEN 61 54 N 5 10 E 5.49

VENNESODDEN LIGHT 63 53 N 11 03 E 6.73

VERDAL HAVN 63 47 N 11 27 E 6.72

VESTERALSFJORDEN 68 35 N 14 32 E 8.42

VESTERHOLMEN 63 43 N 11 00 E 6.70

VESTKLEPPEN 63 18 N 7 21 E 6.29

VESTPYNTEN 78 15 N 15 27 E 11.16

VESTRE BRADSTEINEN 58 02 N 6 52 E 1.10

VETEGJOGRASKJAER LIGHT 60 49 N 4 45 E 5.8

VETEN 60 01 N 5 15 E 3.22

VETRUNGANE 61 56 N 4 49 E 5.22

VEVLAN 65 01 N 11 19 E 7.29

VIKAFJORDEN 59 38 N 5 11 E 3.14

VIKAHOLMEN LIGHT 63 06 N 7 46 E 6.34

VIKANESET 63 12 N 8 36 E 6.49

VIKANESFLU LIGHT 62 28 N 6 07 E 5.60

VIKEVAG 59 06 N 5 42 E 2.17

VIKHOLMEN 65 57 N 12 26 E 7.43

VIKINGEN LIGHT 66 32 N 12 58 E 7.51

VIKINGNESET 60 51 N 4 56 E 5.8

VIKNA 64 55 N 11 00 E 7.26

VIKSOY 60 10 N 5 03 E 4.4

VIKUM 61 10 N 5 43 E 5.32

VIKVAGEN 65 18 N 12 07 E 7.33

VILNESFJORDEN LIGHT 61 18 N 5 04 E 5.36

VINDAFJORDEN 59 20 N 5 56 E 2.39

VINDNESKARVEN 60 27 N 5 00 E 4.6

VINGLEIA LIGHT 63 55 N 8 41 E 6.52

VOLDSFJORDEN 62 12 N 5 56 E 5.52

VOLONGOYA 63 08 N 8 09 E 6.44

VORDNESHOLMEN 59 45 N 5 13 E 3.16

VOTLOY 60 28 N 5 28 E 4.32

W

WAHLENBERGFJORDEN 79 40 N 20 00 E 11.45

WALDENOYA 80 37 N 19 46 E 11.40

WIJDEFJORDEN 79 22 N 15 37 E 11.37

WILHELMOYA 79 03 N 20 24 E 11.44

WOODFJORDEN 79 40 N 13 58 E 11.36

Y

YLVINGEN 65 36 N 12 10 E 7.36

YSTESTEINEN 58 01 N 6 53 E 1.10

YTRE ALVIK 60 25 N 6 23 E 3.45

YTRE ASAROY 59 25 N 6 08 E 2.33

YTRE KIBERG 70 17 N 31 00 E 9.28

YTRE LANGHOLMEN LIGHT 63 11 N 7 52 E 6.30

YTRE LANGOYFLUI 60 47 N 4 49 E 5.8

YTRE LOGRUNNEN 64 01 N 11 24 E 6.75

YTRE POLLEN 58 11 N 6 42 E 1.25

YTRE SAMLAFJORDEN 60 21 N 6 18 E 3.43

YTRE SKALLEN 67 28 N 14 25 E 8.12

YTRE SMASTRAUMNESET 69 48 N 30 41 E 9.37

YTREHOLMEN 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.25

YTREHOLMEN LIGHT 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.1

YTSTE TAREN 61 17 N 4 55 E 5.35

YTSTEBOEN 62 09 N 5 04 E 5.25

YTSTEFLU 62 12 N 5 27 E 5.50

YTTERHOLMEN 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.25

YTTEROYANE 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.15

YTTEROYANE LIGHT 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.17

YTTERTUVEN 67 50 N 12 52 E 8.4

Z

ZORGDRAGERFJORDEN 80 23 N 22 40 E 11.41